‘ini ‘ ar Paes et fe “ a r P 00 eee trating eit ~
enone : harece : $a ms

Nee
detvlormin

Set RPL IND thaliana

56 0 re ag
ih tnineiien ae
spabdisthoktnase tt
<i el neh

Wedre ree ne f

Tees
at:

vie entails EL Yat

= jnitindeanioenn ee

os : : : - - ane Pvtane

pane ~ : :

wee

Someries

he wee

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

LIBRARY

OF THE

Museum of Comparative Zoology

ih
EN

ant

Vibe
NY

jie

Petree
By age DA
hs, Rea ae
MACNN

q Bie

Jat)

cH an (
died

ACER aNTNG

ee
if

Phan Le}
nen ny ae
MOU ate

Hath

eA,
WAN ted

Aiea
ih a iy

\
(

ia a
nae an iy

: Mi di

ri

MANY

a bya ia Nyt att wae
Pas: rat i ASR a) ies 3 , pene
Lyn { j ike me HN K! a hee wine,

4 ‘ial

?

i
ie
i

jm
Auta
We

ti

ay Mt

Bue Ns

ie
Wi
i WMS Nh iy jt

pa
Way
i

Wy
has Kip ulus
Oa Ait

qi

in
4 Has

te)
a « x

“iyo an

The CANADIAN
FIELD-NATURALIST

Volume 64

950.

WUS. COMP. Z00L
LIBRARY

FEB 24 (950

HARVARB
UNIVERSITY

Published by
THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

at

OTTAWA, ONTARIO, CANADA

‘dg hes
od MeN
Pika

oh
ch

fees
i

aw i ¢
. 2 ren

J a et
oe Ms

‘

ot oy ei
Ee ahh

MT;

$1
acy vy 4
st J. (i

Vol. 64 _ JANUARY-FEBRUARY, 1950 No. 1

phe CANADIAN
FIELD-NATURALIST

nena hemes

MUS. CORP. 20 aL. |

LIDRARY
FEB 24 1950 Contents
1
a Sphaeriidae of Athabaska and Great Slave Lakes, Northwestern Canada.
LTE Cdl CER Fog a 0st 09 9 RP a ie Ir Re ee UR MAD PC VN Se aR as EGE 25°
Nesting of the Red Crossbill in Pakenham Township, Lanark County, Ontario.
meena Gy dxoss and Verna Mi Ross orc aie elle aie erate adeaaed 32
Statement of financial standing, Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, December 2, 1949 35
Annual meeting of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, 1949 oo. 36
Supposed natural hybrid between Agropyron and Hystrix. By W. G. Dore ................ 39
The productivity and sex survival of elk, Banff National Park, Alberta.
PORTILLO) pinch LL A ase Ll adh, va useeioag sa cegbaseiekiuas bs dives dbl aus 40
®-Five new Compositae from Yukon - Alaska. By A. E. Porsild .............0.00.0..... Loa ces 43 —
& “North-West Passage’ plants in the Scott Polar Research Institute.
SOY oc ele TIBES 1 Bea |r) Cr UIA a BM OAR ON Oe Ee HRP Ee 45
Notes and Observations: —
The Steller Eider in British Columbia. By Kenneth Racey ..............00.00000.... 51
Feeding flights of Common Terns across the Niagara Peninsula.
dE Vg 100019) Dad 25a c ce OM aCe i PO RR ERE Oe tea Sy OL 51
Red Crossbills collected in the Ottawa District. By A. E. Bourguignon ........ 52
Pintail and Ring-necked Duck breeding in the Ottawa region.
ep bier y ER VERA EES ity hse leat Neus Ma ii oh MEU UM ONC on ead 52
oy VE SES, G8 Lie CII SE SIGE adh) A MM RON A PCI eS ERC PO 53

Published by the
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

Entered at the Post Office at Ottawa, Ont., as second class matter.

Che Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club

— Patrons —
Their Excellencies the Governor-General and the Lady Alexander

President: Dr. PAULINE SNURE

1st Vice-President: Dr. J. W. GROVES 2nd Vice-President: Mr. R. FRITH
Treasurer: RayMonp Moore, Secretary: H. J. Scoccan,
Division of Botany, National Museum of Canada,
Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa.
Ottawa.

Additional Members of Council: Mrs. H. Luoyp, Miss VERNA Ross, Miss Mary Stuart,
Messrs. E. G. ANDERSON, R. M. ANDERSON, W. K. W. Batpwin, A. F. W. BANFIELD,
Rev. F. E. BAnim, B. Botvin, A. E. Bourcuicnon, A. W. Cameron, W. J. Copy, J. P.
CUERRIER, W. G. Dore, C. FRANKTON, W. E. GopFrrey, H. Grou, S. D. Hicxs, W. IttmMan,
W. H. Lancetey, D. LEEcHMAN, H. F. Lewis, Hoves Lioyp, T. H. Mannine, W. H.
MINSHALL, A. E. Porsitp, D. B. O. Savite, H. A. SENN, V. E. F. Sotman, J. S. TENER.

Auditors: I. L. CoNNERS, C. FRANKTON, and H. F. Lewis.

Editor

Dr. H. A. SENN,
Division of Botany,
Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa.

Associate Editors

Wir Goorin ean eis LN Botany Re MS ANDERSON WU ss uae Mammalogy
ACARI OCOUR Mag aun in Olin Conchology A. G. HUNTSMAN ............ Marine Biology
H. G. CRAWFORD .......0....00..00.. Entomology WetE) GopeREY, | Ui aan tae Ornithology
LOU [eure 6 aco 0 “a Mn Area ATie uaa as AL Geology Wi) As: BRE en ee nae rl ees Palaeontology
CEYDE REM PATCHY il tar inun yn Herpetology Uh RACDY MOND Wien Ase ae Ichthyology

Business Manager
W. J. Copy,
Division of Botany,
Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa.

The official publications of THE OTTAwaA FreLp-NATURALIsTS’ CLUB have been
issued since 1879. The first were The Transactions of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’
date. The Canadian Field-Naturalist is issued bi-monthly. Its scope is the publication
Club, 1879, 1886, two volumes; the next, The Ottawa Naturalist, 1886-1919, thirty-

two volumes: and these have been continued by The Canadian Field-Naturalist to
of the results or original research in all departments of Natural History.

Price of this volume (6 numbers) $3.00; Single copies 60c each.

Subscription ($3.00 per year) should be forwarded to Dr. R. J. Moore,
Div. of Botany, Central Experimental Farm,
OTTAWA, CANADA.

FEB 24 1950

The Canadiamudrie

NIVERSITY

OTTAWA, CANADA, JANUARY-FEBRUARY,

Vol. 64

d-Naturalist

1950

No. 1

THE GENUS ANTENNARIA IN NORTHWESTERN CANADA?

A. E. PorsILp
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa

I N NORTH AMERICA the taxonomy of the
genus Antennaria is difficult and very
complicated comparable perhaps to that of

the likewise apomictic genera Taraxacum and
Hieracitum in Eurasia where, on the other
hand, the genus Antennaria is simple.

Early botanists in North America paid
scant attention to the genus and, generally,
were content to refer American specimens
to one of the three well-known Eurasian
species: A. alpina, A. carpatica and A. dioica.
As late as 1834, W. J. Hooker, in his Flora
Boreali-Americana, recognized but six spe-
cies, and in 1867, Asa Gray, in his Synoptical
Flora of North America, no more than
eleven.

During the last fifty years, the number
of species of Antennaria recognized in North
America has increased rapidly, so that to-
day upwards of 200 species have been des-
cribed. Moreover, it has been shown, largely
by the studies of E. L. Greene, P. A. Rydberg
and E. Nelson that the genus is predominantly
Cordilleran, although the careful studies of
M. L. Fernald, Morten P. Porsild, M. O.
Malte, and others have shown that important
centres exist also in the East, chiefly around
the Gulf of St. Lawrence, Newfoundland,
Greenland, and elsewhere, and that a single
group, the broad-leaved grassland species:
Plantaginifoliae extend across the Continent
south of the transcontinental, boreal conife-
rous forest, with only two species, A. campes-
tris and A. Howellii, entering the southern
part of our area. A comparatively small
number of species have a continent-wide
range across arctic and _ sub-arctic North
America whereas the majority of species are
_ endemic to a given area.

Of the 32 species of Antennaria now
recognized in the flora of Alaska, Yukon and

1) Received for publication November 17, 1949.

Vol. 63, No. 6, November-December,

1

Mackenzie district, all except A. campestris
and A. Howellii belong in the sections: Alpi-
nae, Dioicae and Carpaticae of which the first
two are not too well differentiated. The
Alpinae are essentially arctic-alpine, the other
two sub-alpine and boreal, but not arctic. All
are adapted to open, sunny habitats such as
cliffs, rocky screes, alpine stream beds and
alpine meadows; all avoid shady places and
forests.

Early collectors brought back very few
specimens of Antennaria from the Yukon but
from the Bering Sea region of Alaska com-
paratively numerous collections exist, repre-
senting a small number of species that phyto-
geographically all belong in the Beringian or
Pacific Coast element of the North American
Flora? (A. monocephala, A. pallida and A.
dioica). To these have lately been added a
few species that are either endemic to the
region, and belong with the Beringian
element, or are widely distributed arctic
North American species.

In the interior of Alaska, and especially
aS we move east and south into the Yukon,
the Antennaria flora changes radically. The
rich collections of recent years from moun-
tains of Yukon show that we there have a
complex flora of Antennariae which is more
closely related to species in the Cordillera
than to those of Beringia. Further studies of
the still largely uncorrelated mass of species
described in the last fifty years from the
Rocky Mountains region, will undoubtedly
disclose a still closer affinity.

In the field the writer has devoted much
time to the study and collection of Anten-
naria in Central and Western Alaska, S.E.
Yukon, Mackenzie, Keewatin and West
Greenland as well as in Banff Park of the

2) Hultén, Outline of the History of Arctic and Boreal
Biota during the Quarternary Period. Stockholm, 1937.

1949, was issued November 23, 1949.

2 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Canadian Rockies. In Southeastern Yukon
no less than 22 different species were
recognized in mountains adjacent to the
Canol Road. Of these 22 species, 9 cannot be
identified with known species and, therefore,
have been described as new.

In my studies of the northwestern species
of Antennaria I have been constantly inspired
and guided by Professor Fernald’s exhaustive
and exemplary taxonomic monographs of the
eastern members of the genus, and I have
benefited equally from the researches of my
father, Dr. Morten P: Porsild, whose life-
long studies, particularly of the morphology
of the genus, have made his friendly criticism
particularly constructive and helpful.

In my present attempt to classify the
species included in this treatment, I have
found no new diagnostic characters, nor any
that appear infallible; my present concept
of species is based upon a series of often
minute characters that, although somewhat
variable in some species, nevertheless are
fairly constant and make it possible to draw
up recognizable descriptions and workable
keys. I have, myself, collected and also
studied in the field all-the species discussed
(except A. atriceps) and have found the
experience thus gathered invaluable. In ap-
praising the characters used I find that the
growth habit is always dependable, but not
always recognizable in poorly collected her-
barium material. Thus, nearly all species
here reckoned to the Alpinae, including A.
alaskana, A. angustata, A. compacta, A. den-
sifolia, A. Ekmaniana, A. monocephala and
A. subcanescens, lack procumbent stolons
and, therefore are sedentary, forming small
tufts or compact cushions. Exceptions to
this rule are: A. atriceps, A. megacephala, A.
pedunculata, A. philonipha and A. stolonifera.
All species here placed in the Dioicae, except
A. pygmaea, have procumbent stolons which
permit them to spread and form mats.

Equally reliable and constant is the
presence or absence of papillae or “duplex
hairs” on the achenes.* Other characters,
such as the number of heads in the inflores-
cence, the height of the involucrum and the
arrangement of its bracts, the presence or
absence of glands on the bracts and pedun-
cles, the shape of the leaves on the stolons
and the texture of their indument, the shape
and number of cauline leaves, and especially

3)See M. P. Porsild, Rhodora, 33: 213-222 (1931).

[Vol. 64

the presence or absence of their peculiar
flat or twisted, scarious appendages, are
most helpful once the collector has learned
to evaluate their relative importance in a
given species.

In the construction of a key the Dioicae
are by far the most difficult because such
characters as the shape, texture and colour
of the phyllaries are
within the species according to the state of
development and also within a given popula-
tion. Thus, amongst the monocephalic species
the phyllaries of A. pygmaea may sometimes
resemble those of the Alpinae. Amongst the
pleiocephalic species the phyilaries of A.
elegans are pink in youth but soon fade to
pale grey. In A. nitida the outer phyllaries
may be reddish brown in the young inflores-
cence.

Under each species are given references
to pertinent literature in which the species
is discussed for the area treated.

Only specimens which have been verified
by the writer are cited, and with few excep-
tions only specimens from Yukon and Mac-
kenzie are enumerated.

Where no herbarium symbol is given the
specimen is deposited in the National Her-
barium of Canada (Can.). Other symbols used
denote: (S) National Herbarium of Sweden,
Stockholm; (NY) Herbarium of the New
York Botanical Garden; (US) United States
National Herbarium, Washington, D.C.; (G)
Gray Herbarium, Cambridge, Mass.

On the maps shown on Plates 1-3, I have
spotted all stations known to me in Canada
and Alaska for each species included in the
present treatment. Each spot frequently
represents a number of collections, all of
which have been verified by me.

SECT, PLANTAGINIFOLIAE

1. Antennaria campestris Rydb. in Bull. Torr.
Bot. Cl. 24:304 (1897); Raup in Journ.
Arn. Arb. 17:305 (1936).

Low and creeping; the old stolons slender,
funiliform, subterranean, freely branching
with numerous sterile rosettes; young stolons
of the year above the surface, flagellate, up
to 10 cm long, issuing from the base of the
fertile stems. Basal leaves obovate-cuneate,
2-3 cm long and about 1 ecm wide, short-
petiolate with one prominent median nerve
and two indistinct lateral ones; the upper
leaf-surface dark green and glabrate in age,
the lower covered by a dense, permanent and

i ae
SS a ee een ee ee ee re

somewhat variable.

Se ee ee el?

January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST %

KEY TO THE GENUS ANTENNARIA IN YUKON AND ADJACENT PARTS OF
ALASKA AND NORTHWEST TERRITORIES.

A. Basal leaves prominently 3-nerved, erect, 4-16 cm long, similar to cauline leaves.
(CARPATICAE).

3. A. pulcherrima
Nfld. to Alaska.

A. Basal leaves 1-nerved or at most with obscure and weak lateral nerves, 3-5 cm long but
mostly less; cauline leaves reduced, usually ending in a scarious appendix.
B. Tall, broad-leaved plants; stolons of the year flagellate, ending in leafy rosettes;
heads large, with involucres about 10 mm. high. (PLANTAGINIFOLIAE).
C. Basal leaves obovate-cuneate, distinctly petiolate, rarely over 3 cm long;
flowering stems 10-25 cm tall, weak. Plant dioecious.

1. A. campestris
foothills and prairies
north to Slave Lake.

C. Basal leaves oblanceolate, gralually tapering toward the base, 3-5 cm long;
flowering stems 25-35 em high, stout. Staminate plant unknown.

2. A. Howelliu
open alpine forests;
Oregon - Montana & Sask.,
north to S. E. Yukon.

B. Tall, medium or dwarf species; stolons of the year not flagellate, leafy through-
out; heads smaller, with involucres less than 8 mm high (or, if ever, small-leaved,
dwarf species less than 15 cm tall: A. angustata and A. megacephala).

D. Bracts of the involucres (phyllaries) with pale greenish-brown to olivaceous
or dark-brown, usually acuminate and erose tips. (ALPINAE).

E. Male and female plants usually present.
F. Involucres of pistillate heads small, 4-5 mm high.

G. Strictly monocephalous, densely tufted, lacking stolons,
flowering stems rather low and stout.

12. A. monocephala
E. Asia, east to N. W.
~ Mackenzie,? Alberta
and B.C.

G. Heads normally 3-5, basal leaves oblanceolate, with well-
developed, purple-tinged petioles, appressed tomentose
on -both surfaces.

5. A. alaskana
Alaska.

F. Involucres of pistillate heads larger, about 6 mm. high.
H. Plant strictly monocephalous, almost entirely glabrous;
with long stolons.

16. A. philonipha
Alaska, Yukon and
N.W. Mackenzie.

H. Plant normally pleicocephalous, densely caespitose with
stout rhizomatose caudex,

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 64

I. Basal leaves spatulate, 10-15 mm long, not imbric-
ated, thinly appressed tomentose on both sides;
achenes papillose. ,

13. A. neoalaskana
N. W. Mackenzie,
? Alaska.

I. Basal leaves densely imbricated, about 6 mm long;
achenes glabrous.

9. A. densifolia
Mackenzie Mts.

E. Only female plant known.
J. Plant normally monocephalous, densely tufted, lacking stolons.

K. Inner phyllaries normally with blunt, pale straw-coloured
tips. (DIOICAE).

29. A. pygmaea
Lab., Keewatin, Mack.
and Yukon.

K. Inner phyllaries with attenuate olive-brown tips.

6. A. angustata
Lab., Keewatin, disjunct
stations in Mackenzie
and Alaska.

J. Plant normally pleiocephalous (dwarf plants of A. megacephala
often monocephalous). 2 %
L. Plant caespitose with stout rhizomatose caudices and
numerous sessile, sterile rosettes.
M. Basal leaves very narrowly oblanceolate, gradually
tapering towards the apex; pappus somewhat
rufidulous; achenes glabrous or minutely papillose.

10. A. Ekmaniana
Greenl. to Alaska,
high-arctic-alpine.

M. Basal leaves spatulate-obovate, rounded at the
apex; pappus white; achenes glabrous.
N. Basal leaves short obovate, white-lanate-tomen-
tose; stems floccose; plant pulvinate.

8. A. compacta
N. W. Mackenzie-Alaska
to S.E. Yukon;
arctic-alpine.

N. Basal leaves longer, grey, thinly appressed
tomentose; stems purple under the thin
non-floccose tomentum; plant caespitose,
but not pulvinate.

18. A. subcanescens
N. W. Mackenzie-Alaska;
arctic-alpine.

January-February, 1950] THE CANapIAN FIELD-NATURALIST | 5

L. Loosely caespitose with basal rosettes borne on normally
well-developed prostrate or ascending stolons.

O. Achenes strongly papillose, even when immature;
heads 4-10 with involucres 6-7 mm high.

P. Inflorescence rather compact; inner. phyl-
laries dark brown.

17. A. stolonifera
S. E. Yukon, ? Rock. Mts.

P. Inflorescence open, the lower heads remote,
on long peduncles; inner phyllaries pale
brown.

15. A. pedunculata
S. E. Yukon-N. E. Alaska.

O. Achenes glabrous.

Q. Heads large, 1-5, with involucres 7-10 mm
high.
R. Heads 1-3; stolons very short and
. plant forming small, compact tufts.

11. A. megacephala
N. British Columbia -
S. E. Yukon.

R. Heads 1-5; loosely caespitose with
well-developed stolons.

7. A. atriceps
N. British Columbia.

Q. Heads smaller, 3-5, with involucres 6-7 mm
high; loosely caespitose, with well-developed
stolons.

14. A. pallida
E. Pacific Coast, west
to Aleut. Isl.

D. At least the inner phyllaries with papery, white, straw-coloured or pink,
and usually spatulate-ligulate tips; in our area only the female plants
known. (DIOICAE).

a. Inner phyllaries pink (in A. elegans soon becoming pale grey or straw-
coloured.)

b. Tall plants with fruiting stems usually 20 cm or over.
ce. Plants with. well-developed stolons, forming colonies.

d. Basal leaves fresh green, glabrate above; cauline
leaves ample; fruiting stems 20-30 cm high; heads
showy, nodding in youth.

_

; 19. A. alborosea
Centr. Alaska-Yukon,
Mack.; ? mts. of Alberta
and British Columbia

=>

6 Tie CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 64

d. Basal leaves neither fresh green, nor glabrate
above, cauline leaves reduced.

e. Basal leaves narrowly spatulate, appressed
sericeous-tomentose; phyllaries pale pink
only in youth, soon becoming pale grey or
straw-coloured.

22. A elegans
S. E. Yukon, Bear Lake.

e. Basal leaves oblanceolate, dull greyish tomen-
tose; phyllaries pink, even in age.

30. A. rosea
S. E. Yukon, south through
Re. Mts., east to James Bay.

c. Plants with short, sessile offsets, forming small tufts; basal
leaves spatulate-obovate, with appressed grey tomentum.

28. A. oxyphylla
Centr. Alaska-Yukon,
east to Lake Athabaska
south to Nebraska and
S. Dakota.

b. Dwarf plants with fruiting stems less than 20 cm high.

f. Heads nodding in youth; plants of low, matted growth,
basal leaves short, spatulate-obovate, sessile, somewhat
crowded, aShy-grey, in age becoming glabrous above;
achenes sparingly, but distinctly papillose.

20. A. Breitungii
Centr. Alaska & Yukon.

f. Heads not nodding in youth; basal leaves erect, oblan- ©
ceolate, sericeous-tomentose. :

93. A. incarnata
S.E. Yukon.

a. Inner phyllaries papery white or straw-coloured, never pink (in A. —
leuchippi with purple spots visible only under a lens).
g. Tall plants with fruiting stems usually 20 cm high or over, with
long, trailing sto!ons. ; .

26. A. leuchippi
S. E. Yukon.

g. Dwarf to medium plants with fruiting stems usually under
20 cm.

h. Monocephalous; densely tufted; flowering stems rarely
over 10 cm; basal leaves small, rarely over 10 mm long. —

29. A. pygmaea ;
Lab., Keewatin, Mack.
and Yukon.

"January-February, 1950] Tur CANADIAN

“A See IM

i. Head

the lateral heads pedunculate;

j. Upper

FIELD-NATURALIST 7

h. Inflorescence pleiocephalous, usually with from 4-10 heads.

i. Heads nodding when young, inflorescence glomeru-
late, phyllaries firm, papery, white.

j. Cauline leaves all without scarious tips; basal
leaves densely canescent tomentose.

25. A. Laingii
Centr. Alaska,
S. E. Yukon.

1-3. cauline leaves with slender,
Scarious tips; basal leaves appressed seri-
ceous-tomentose, almost silvery.

27. A. nitida
Centr. Alaska-Yukon
east to James Bay, in
Re. Mts. and foothills
south to N. Mexico.

s not nodding in youth; inflorescence open, with
phyllaries rather

thin and soft, their tips often spreading in age.
k. Pappus pale rufidulous; plant pulvinate with

short sessile, erect offsets.

21. A. crymophila
Mackenzie Delta.

k. Pappus white; plant not pulvinate.

\
- yellowish-white felt. Flowering stems
slender, from 10-25 cm tall, bearing from
5-10 much reduced, scarious-tipped leaves.
_ Inflorescence dense, glomerulate; pistillate
‘heads large from 2-5, their involucres about
10 mm high; phyllaries indistinctly 3-seriate,
_ linear-lanceolate, greenish-brown and lanate
oe the base, with long-acuminate, papery,
_ white tips; pappus tawny; mature achenes
- olivaceous, shiny and distinctly papillose. —
Staminate heads somewhat smaller, with
btuse-erose, more or less reflexed tips. With
Howellii the only species in the section
ntaginifoliae which reach north into our

:% 1. Upper 1-3 cauline leaves with slender,
scarious tips.

31. A. subviscosa
Gaspé, Que. and
S. E. Yukon.

l. Upper 5-8 cauline leaves with broad,
flat and very prominent scarious
appendages,

24. A. isolepis
Lab. - Alaska.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
North shore of Slave Lake, C.F. Howe, Can.
104944.

General distribution: A grassland species
characteristic of dry, sandy plains and
prairies: Interior British Columbia and Rocky
Mountain foothills north to Slave Lake east
to north shore of Lake Superior, south to
Kansas.

Type locality: “Prairies and plains west.
of Mississippi”, Nebraska — S. Dakota.

Illustration: Britt. & Brown, Ill. Fl. N.
States and Can. ed. 2. 3:452 (1913).

Tur CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

7)

4 Antennaria pulcherrim
var. angustisquama

ca 5 sof
OB oy sla fom ENS

10 Antennaria Ekmaniana 11 Antennaria megacephala

Plate 1. Distribution of Antennaria in Northwestern Canada.

Be

January-February, 1950] THE CANapDIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 9

Sy |

15 Antennaria pedunculata

Sate

Sole hos,
4 A) = \ N
A
3 te
(Oy atk
ly i E
ae s|T AT ES Za Zz i \

| 7 Antennaria stolonitera

| SS ee iat

(Ope
Ee DS AS Ae &)'> =

1.9 Antennaria alborosea

pine

Plate 2. Distribution of Antennaria in Northwestem Canada.

10 THE CANADIAN

2. Antennaria Howellii Greene in Pitt. 3:174
(1897) and ibid. 276 (1898)

Humifuse; the old stolons stout, funiliform,
woody, subterranean, freely branching and
terminating in large, leafy rosettes; young
stolons of the year flagellate but much
stouter than in A. campestris, up to 10 cm
long, issuing from the base of the fertile
stems. — Rosette leaves 3-5 cm long and 1-2
em wide, oblanceolate, gradually tapering
toward the base, cuspidate-mucronate, fresh
green and in age glabrous above, permanently
white-tomentose and distinctly featherveined
below. — Mature flowering stems 25-35 cm
high, stout, greenish-purple under the thinly
lanate tomentum, bearing about 10 leaves,
the lowermost ample, 3-4 cm long and 3-4 mm
wide, linear-oblong, acuminate, the uppermost
rapidly diminishing in size and ending in
narrow, scarious tips. — Inflorescence nodding
in youth, cymose, open and much branched,
with 6-8 large heads, the lateral ones often
on up to 10 cm long peduncles and overtopping
the central part of the inflorescence; in-
volucres about 10 mm high; phyllaries 3-
seriate, linear-lanceolate, greenish-brown and
lanate below, with long-attenuate, tawny and
papery tips; pappus tawny; styles much ex-
serted; mature achenes about 1.8 mm long,
narrow and strongly papillate. Staminate
plant unknown.

Antennaria Howellii of the . section
Plantaginifoliae, is a Cordilleran species which
apparently extends north through mountains
of northern British Columbia into S.E. Yukon.
It is a species of open mountain forests rather
than of dry grassland and is larger and more
robust than A. campestris.

Specimens seen: YUKON: Watson Lake,
Anderson & Brown, 9938 (Can & 8S); Alaska
Highway, Rancheria west of Whitehorse,
Anderson, 10501 (S).

Type locality: Mt. St. Helen, Oregon.

General distribution: Wooded slopes:
Oregon, Idaho, Montana, east to Cypress Hills,
Sask., north through mountains of Washing-
ton, British Columbia and Alberta to S.E.
Yukon.

SECT. CARPATICAE

3. Antennaria pulcherrima (Hook.) Greene
in Pitt. 3:176 (1897). — Britt. & Rydb.
in Bull. N.Y. Bot. Gard. 2:185 (1901);
Ostenfeld in Gjoa Exp., Kria. Vidensk.
Selsk. p. 67 (1910); Porsild, in Nat.
Mus. Can. Bull. 101:32 (1945); Raup in
Sargentia 6:244 (1947).

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

A. carpatica var. pulcherrima Hook., Fl.
Bor.-Am, 1:329 (1834).

A. eucosma Fernald in Rhod. 13:23 (1911).

Tall, sericeous-tomentose plants which,

besides having a true rhizome are stolonifer-
ous and form small and rather compact tufts;
stolons 3-8 cm long, slender, subterranean,
ascending, bearing a tuft of erect terminal
leaves. Flowering stems solitary, slender,
sericeous-tomentose, 20-50 cm high, leafy;
stem leaves 8-12, the lower 4-12 cm long and
0.8-1.4 em broad, oblanceolate, acute, long-
petiolate, prominently 3-5-nerved, sericeous-
tomentose on both surfaces, pale grayish-
green, in age becoming greenish-yellow; the
upper linear, rapidly diminishing in size, and
the uppermost bearing small, scarious tips.—
Inflorescence glomerulate in youth, in age
becoming open and expanded, with 4 to 12
heads, usually two or three on each branch.
Pistillate heads large, involucres 7-8 mm high;
bracts 3-seriate, dark brown and lanate at the
base, with obtuse, scarious and pale brown
tips. Pappus pure white; achenes glabrous.
The staminate heads similar but slightly
smaller; the tips of their bracts papery white,
often reflexed; pappus bristles clavellate.

A strikingly tall and handsome species
which usually grows on well-watered alluvial
soils on river flats and meadows or on alpine
slopes, and probably always on calcareous
soil.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
West Coast of Bear Lake, Bell, 22928; North
shore Dease Arm, Porsild & Porsild, 4724;
McTavish Arm, idem, 5188; Leith Pt., idem,
35999 & 3598; Bear R., idem, 3274; Lone Mt.
near mouth of N. Nahanni R., Wynne-Edwards,
8520. YUKON: Pelly Range, Porsild &
Breitung, 9812, 9813, 10025, 10088, 10867; —
Kluane Lake, Anderson, 9359 (S, Can); White
R., idem, 9348; 30 Mile R. Aug. 23, 1899,
Williams (NY). Doubtfully recorded from the
arctic coast of Yukon, King Pt. (Ostenfeld).

Type locality: “Swamps of the plains
among the Rocky Mountains. Drummond”.

Illustration: Marie-Victorin in Contr. Lab.
Bot. Univ. Montr. 13:72, (1929) fig. 38.

General distribution: Boreal-alpine, but not
arctic: Central Alaska, Yukon and Mackenzie
north to the south slope of Endicott Range
and to Bear Lake, south to Colorado and
Washington, east to James Bay and the east
coast of Hudson Bay to Richmond Gulf, with
isolated stations on the north shore of the
Gulf of St. Lawrence, Anticosti Island and
on western Newfoundland (A. eucosma Fern.).

- January-February, 1950] Tue CanapIAn

4. Antennaria pulcherrima (Hook.) Greene
2 var. angustisquama A. E. Porsild, n. var.
A specie typica differt foliis attenuatis
_ glabratis, calathiis femineis imis valde remotis
et longe pedunculatis, involucri_ bracteis
angustioribus longe attenuatis apice atro-
viridibus; varietatis planta mascula ignota.
The var. angustisquama differs from the
species in’so many and important characters
that, were it not for the fact that but one
- single colony of about 50 individuals could
be found, the writer would be inclined to
consider it distinct. No specimens connecting
it to the species were seen elsewhere, nor
has the writer seen such in the large material
of A. puicherrima in the National Herbarium
of Canada, the Gray Herbarium or the U:S.
~ National Herbarium.

Specimens seen: S.E. YUKON: Pelly
Range, Canol Road, upper Rose R. on alluvial
flats, elevation 3600 feet, July 12, 1944,
Porsild & Breitung, 10413 (type).

General distribution: Known only from the
type locality.

SECT. ALPINAE

5. Antennaria alaskana Malte in Rhod. 36:107
(1934); Steffen in Beih. Bot. Centralbl.
58, Abt. B:104, fig. 1 (1938); Porsild in
Rhod. 41:292 (1939); Secamman in Rhod.
42:340 (1940).
Caespitose with a short, branched caudex
and numerous sessile and leafy offsets. Basal
_ Jeaves narrowly spatulate-oblanceolate from 1.5
to 3.0 cm long and from 2 to 4 mm wide, the
blade tapering gradually into a narrow and
often purplish tinged petiole, cinereous-
tomentose on both sides, prominently mucro-
- nate; cauline leaves 4-6, floccose-lanate, linear,
with a short, scarious tip.
Flowering stems 3-15 cm high, floccose,
somewhat flexuous; heads small, from 3-5,
usually densely clustered or sometimes the
~ lowermos{ remote. Pistillate heads larger than
- ‘the staminate ones, their involucres 4-5 mm
high, densely imbricated, sparingly lanate or
glabrate, greenish-brown at their bases, and
with long-acuminate, olivaceous tips; pappus
tawny; achenes glabrous. Staminate heads
smaller, their bracts with prominent dark
eentre and obtuse, papery, often reflexed tips
and with clavellate pappus bristles.
Antennaria alaskana is a very well marked
species which apparently is endemic to volcanic
_ hills of the Bering Sea region and central
_ Alaska. ‘Characteristic of the species, besides
the small dioecious heads, are the spatulate-
a blanceolate basal leaves with narrow, purplish
Vs eae

mae
ae ‘ ;
a °

FIELD-NATURALIST iti
petioles. In habit the plant resembles A.
Ekmaniana but, unlike it, is dioecious, has
smaller heads and perfecily glabrous achenes.
Type locality: “Alaska: near Port Clarence’’.
Illustration: Steffen, l. c.
General distribution: America: Bering Sea
region and high mountains of central Alaska.

6. Antennaria angustata Greene in Pitt. 3:284
(1898); Porsild in Sargentia 4:68 (1943).
glabrata f. tomentosa Ekman in Sv.

Bot. Tidsk. 21:5 (1927) tab. 1, fig. 9.
. nitens Greene in Ottawa Nat. 25:42

(1911).

. congesta Malte in Rhod. 36:114 (1934).
. hudsonica Malte in Rhod. 36:116

(1934).

. compacta sensu Polunin in Nat. Mus.

Can. Bull. 92:347 (1940), not Malte.
. Ekmaniana sensu Porsild in Nat. Mus.

Can. Bull, 101:27 (1945); Raup in

Sargentia 6:243 (1947), not A. Ekma-

niana Porsild in Sargentia 4:69

(1943).

Caespitose with sessile or subsessile, erect
basal offsets. — Basal leaves narrowly oblan-
ceolate, about 10 mm long and 2 mm wide,,
mucronate, appressed-tomentose beneath, glab-
rate or even glabrous above. — Flowering
stems 4-10 (14) ecm high, thinly floccose-
tomentose, bearing from 7-11 linear leaves;
these about 10 mm long with prominent, flat
scarious tips. Heads large, solitary or very
rarely with one or two small lateral ones;
involucres 8-10 mm high, thinly lanate at the
base; the phyllaries obscurely 3-seriate, long-
attenuate, olivaceous; style included or short-
exserted; pappus white; achenes glabrous,
about 1.4 mm long. The staminate plant not
known.

An eastern arctic species frequenting
slopes and depressions where the snow re-
mains late. The long list of synonyms shows
that A. angustata has been variously inter-
preted or misunderstood by different authors.
The reason for this is largely that much her-
barium material of Antennaria, as repre-
sented in the herbaria, is not well collected
and therefore often misleading. A. angustata
actually is very well marked by its tufted,-
caespitose habit, short basal leaves, large and
mostly solitary heads and by its acuminate,
dark or olivaceous tips of the phyllaries.

_ Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT-.
Mackenzie Mts., Canol Road, Plains of
Abraham, elev. 6000’, Porsild & Breitung,,
11823; mountain range west of Bolstead Cr.,,
Wynne-Edwards, 8385. Both are over mature

Zan

> f. PP PB

12 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST —

specimens and were erroneously recorded as
A. Ekmaniana (Porsild, 1945).

Type locality: “Hudson Strait’.

General distribution: Arctic-alpine: West
Greenland between 66° — 72° lat. N., northern
Labrador, southern Baffin Island and with
isolated, disjunct stations in Keewatin, Mac-
kenzie, the arctic coast of Alaska south to
high mountains of ‘the Canadian Rockies.

Illustration: Ekman, le., as A. glabrata
f. tomentosa.

7. Antennaria atriceps Fernald in Raup in
Contr. Arn. Arb. 6:207 (1934) tab.
WAND eer
Low and creeping with leafy stolons 4.5
cm long. Basal leaves oblanceolate or narrowly
cuneate-spatulate, sericeous-tomentose on both
surfaces, 0.5-1.5 cm long and 2-3.5 mm wide,
prominently mucronate, the mucro 0.5-1 mm
long, often claw-like. Flowering stems 0.5-1
dm high. Stem leaves 7-11; the lower oblan-
ceolate, obtuse, mucronate; the middle and
upper ones linear, 1-1.7 cm long with oblong,
2-3 mm long, scarious tips. Inflorescence
eymose, heads 1-5. The involucres turbinate-
cylindric, 8-10 mm high, with a greenish
and more or less lanate base; phyllaries
3-seriate, blackish-brown, very thin, the outer
ones oblong, acute, the inner ones oblong-
lanceolate 0.8-1.33 mm wide with acuminate
almost awn-like tips. Corolla 5 mm long with
purpurescent lobes. Style much exserted,
vellowish, becoming brownish. Achene 1.4
mm long, glabrous. Male plant unknown.
Type locality: Mt. Selwyn, northern British
Columbia, Raup 4134 (Can., G.). Illustration:
Raup, l.c.
General distribution: Thus far known only
from the type locality.
8. Antennaria compacta Malte in Rhod. 36:111
(1934); Porsild in Sargentia 4:69 (1943).
A. candida sensu Macoun & Holm in Rept.
Can. Arct. Exp. 5A:21, 1921, not Greene.
Densely caespitose with numerous densely
crowded, erect or suberect basal offsets. Basal
leaves broadly oblanceolate-obovate, obtuse,
0.4-0.8 cm long and 0.3-0.4 em wide, gradually
tapering towards the narrower petiole, dense-
ly appressed canescent-tomentose on both
surfaces, the tomentum almost completely
covering the small but distinct mucro at the
tip of the leaf. — Flowering stems 5-10 cm
high, slender and often more or less arched,
copiously and conspicuously floccose-tomen-
tose; leaves 5-9, oblong-lanceolate-spatulate
about 1.0 cm long and 0.2 cm wide, the lower
obtuse, the upper with 2-3 mm long, scarious

[Vol. 64

tips. Pistillate heads (1) 2-4, cymose. Involucre
6-7 mm high with densely lanate base. Phyl-
laries 2-to-3-seriate, subequal, the outer ones
oblong, dusky brown, in age becoming tawny;
the inner narrower, olivaceous with attenuate,
erose tips. Corolla lobes purple. Style barely
exserted, bifid. Pappus white. Achenes glab-
rous, 1.5 mm long. Male plant unknown.

Antennaria compacta, as the name implies,
forms small, flat, compact cushions which
rarely exceed 5-10 cm in diameter. It differs
from A. Ekmaniana by its growth habit and
by its broad, short and oblanceolate, densely
crowded basal leaves, and by its copiously
floccose flowering stems and by its glabrous
achenes; from A. subcanescens by its densely
tomentose basal leaves and floccose stems.

A well-marked arctic-alpine species of dry
gravelly and rocky places which, apparently,
is endemic to the Western Arctic and which
has been erroneously recorded from the east- |
ern Canadian Arctic and from Greenland.

Specimens seen: NORTHWEST TERRI-
TORIES: Victoria Island, Porsild 17333-5,
17419, 17499; Banks Isl., Porsild 17600. Mac- —
kenzie District: Arctic Coast: Bernard Har-
bour, Johansen Can. 91545 (type); Cape Dal- —
housie, Porsild & Porsild 2801; Bear Lake, —
idem, 4853, 5210; Bear R., Mt. Charles, idem, 4
3306. YUKON TERRITORY: Pelly Range, 4}
Porsild & Breitung, 11012 & 10192; Mt. Shel- 4
don, idem, 11098, 11642 & 11756; Old Crow
R. June 26, 1926, O. J. Murie (S). 4

Type locality: Arctic Coast, Bernard Har-
bour. j

General distribution: Arctic-alpine: Arctic
Coast from Bering Strait east to Coronation
Gulf, south to Bear Lake, and high mountains
of the Mackenzie and Pelly Ranges.

9. Antennaria densifolia A. E. Porsild in Nat.
Mus. Can. Bull 101:26 & 32 (1945); Raup
in Sargentia 6:243 (1947).

Densely caespitose, with short crowded, ~
sessile or subsessile basal offsets. Basal leaves
densely congested or imbricated, cuneate-
obovate or broadly oblanceolate, obtuse, not
mucronate, 0.5-0.6 em long, 0.3 cm broad, 4
densely and yellowish tomentose on both”
surfaces. — Flowering stems 6-9 cm high,
slender, floccose-tomentose; stem leaves 5-7, 7
close together, linear, the lowermost 0.6-1.0
cm long and 0.2 em broad, acute, with subulate
tips; the upper smaller and bearing scarious,
lanceolate appendices. — Pistillate heads 2-4, —
campanulate, cymose, on 0.5 cm long pedicels; |
involucre 0.5 em high, densely lanate at the
base; phyllaries 2- to 3-seriate, subequal,
lanceolate, subacute; the exterior chestnut-

January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN Fietp-NATURALIST

brown, greenish at the base; the interior

- brownish, erose; corolla lobes purplish; style

_-exserted, deeply cleft;

—
al

a
%

exserted, bifid; pappus white; achenes glab-
rous. — Staminate heads smaller, with 0.4
em high involucres; phyllaries broadly ob-
lanceolate, subequal and spreading; pappus
bristles plumose somewhat clavellate toward
the tip.

Antennaria densifolia superficially re-
sembles depauperate specimens of A. com-
pacta from which it differs by its shorter and
more densely crowded leaves, and by being
dioecious.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Great Bear R., summit of Mt. Charles, Porsild
& Porsild, 3347; Mackenzie Mts., Canol Rd.
Mile 174 E., Porsild & Breitung, 11881;
Mountain range west of Bolstead Cr., 6000’
elev., Mile 111 E., Wynne-Edwards, 8384
(type); North peak of Nahanni Mt., zdem,
8521.

General distribution: An apparently well-
marked endemic of western Mackenzie dis-
trict, inhabiting dry, calcareous alpine sum-
mits.

10. Antennaria Ekmaniana A. E. Porsild in

_ Sargentia 4:69 (1943).

A. angustifolia El. Ekman in Sv. Bot.
Tidskr., 21: 53, tab. 1, figs, 1, 2 and 12
(1927), not Rydberg in Bull. Torr. Bot.
Cl. 26: 546 (1899).

Densely caespitose with sessile or sub-
sessile, erect basal rosettes; their leaves 1.0-
2.2 cm long, 0.2-0.3 cm wide, linear-lanceolate,
distinctly mucronate, densely appressed—to-
mentose on both sides, and usually somewhat
purplish tinged at the base. — Flowering
stems 10-20 cm high, distinctly purplish tinged
under the thin, appressed tomentum, bearing
from 68 linear, long-appendiculate, thinly
lanate-tomentose leaves. — Pistillate heads
from 1 to 7, but usually 3-4; involucres about
7 mm high, thinly lanate at the base; phyl-
laries, subequal, the outer ones lanceolate,
olive-green, the inner long-attenuate, light
chestnut-brown; pappus subrufescent; style
achenes glabrous or
minutely papillose. Male plant unknown.

Antennaria Ekmaniana is the most arctic
member of the genus and appears to be res-
tricted to non-caleareous soils. In Alaska-
Yukon it is generally found only on rocky,
lichen-covered slopes, above timberline.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Bear Lake, Porsild & Porsild, 5319; Arctic
Coast, Coppermine R., Porsild, 17185; Atkin-

Bean
es | \

13

son Pt., Porsild & Porsild, 2668; east of Kitti-
gazvit, idem, 2525; 60 miles east of Tuktuayak-
tog, Porsild, 16772; Kittigazuit, Porsild & Por-
sild, 2401; Mackenzie Delta, Richards Island,
Porsild, 7455, 16793, 16857; ibid., Porsild &
Porsild, 2123, 2288 and 2288b. S.E. YUKON:

-Pelly Range, Porsild & Breitung, 9954, 11011;

Macmillan Pass, idem, 11271.

Type locality: West Greenland.

General distribution: High arctic-alpine.
From northern West Greenland across Baffin
Island, northern Ungava, Keewatin, Mac-
kenzie and the Arctic Archipelago west to
high mountains of Yukon and Alaska.

Iustration: Ekman, l.c., as A. angustifolia
sensu Ekman,

11. Antennaria megacephala Fern. in Raup
in Contr. Arn, Arb. 6:208 (19438), tab.
ix.

Humifuse; stolons densely leafy, short
and suberect, their leaves spatulate-obovate
or broadly oblanceolate, prominently mucro-
nate, 0.8-1.2 cm long, 0.3-0.4 em wide, thinly
appressed tomentose, the upper surface gla-
brescent in age. — Flowering stems 5-12 cm
high, thinly floccose-tomentose, bearing 5-9
closely spaced, 1.0 cm long, linear leaves, all
with prominent, 2-3 mm long, scarious tips.—
Pistillate heads 1-3; involucres 0.8-1.0 cm
high, thinly lanate at the base; phyllaries 3-
seriate or subsequal, all dark green or oliva-
ceous, the outer ones somewhat spreading,
the inner ones oblong-linear, about 2 mm.
wide, with blunt, erose tips; style barely
exserted, bifid; pappus bristles white; ache-
nes 1.4 mm long, glabrous. — Male plant not
known.

The type of A. megacephala which came
from mountains of northern British Colum-
bia and consisted of dwarf, monocephalic
specimens led Professor Fernald to compare
his new species with the strictly monoce-
phalic A. monocephala and A. angustata. In
the large colonies of A. megacephala found
by the writer on high, alpine slopes of the
Pelly range in S.E. Yukon, the larger and
more vigorous plants have flowering stems
measuring 10-12 cm in height, each bearing
from 2 to 3 heads, whereas dwarf plants are
mostly monocephalic. In all other respects
the Yukon plant is a close match for the
type. Characteristic for A..megacephala are
the large heads with broad, blunt, dark-
green or olivaceous phyllaries and the unu-

14 THE CANADIAN

sually long, scarious tips of the upper cauline
leaves.

Specimens seen: NORTHERN B.C.: Mt.
Kenny, 5800’, Mrs. J. Norman Henry, 286
(type), (Phila. Acad., G); White Pass, Malte,
65. S.E. YUKON: Pelly Range, Porsild &
Breitung, 10153 and 10091.

General distribution: High, alpine slopes
and summits of Northern British Columbia
and S. E. Yukon,

Illustration: Raup, lL.c.

12. Antennaria monocephala DC., in Prod.
6:269 (1837). — Porsild in Nat. Mus.
Can. Bull. 101:27 (1945); Raup in Sar-
gentia 6:243 (1947).

Dwarf, often forming small mats although
the offsets are rarely more than a few centi-
metres long, erect or suberect; their leaves
spatulate-obcuneate toward the base, about 1
cm long, mucronate, thinly floccose-tomen-
tose beneath, green and glabrous above. —
Flowering stems usually about 5 cm high but
often only 2 and occasionally up to 15 cm
high, bearing from 5-10 thinly lanate, linear
leaves with prominent, 2 mm long, scarious
tips. — Heads always Solitary; involucres
about 4 mm high; phyllaries of the pistillate
heads, green at the base, dark brown to al-
most black in the middle and olivaceous to
golden brown towards the attenuate tips;
pappus bristles white; style long-exserted;
achenes glabrous. Staminate heads slightly
smaller, their phyllaries broadly lanceolate,
with papery, obtuse and often spreading tips;
pappus bristles clavellate.

A common species above timberline on
pre-Cambrian rocks where it is ubiquitous in
srow-patch vegetation, ravines and avalanche
paths.

Specimens seen: NORTHERN BRITISH
COLUMBIA: Mt. Selwyn, Raup & Abbe, 3969;
Alaska Highway, Swift R., Clarke, 132. MAC-
KENZIE DISTRICT: Canol Road, mountain
range west of head of Bolstead Creek, Mile
111 E., Wynne-Edwards, 8386-7; Macmillan
Pass, Porsild, l.c.; Brintnell L., according to
Raup, l.c.; YUKON TERRITORY: Pelly Ran-
ge, Porsild & Breitung, 9255, 9381, 9414, 9815.

9953, 10089, 10150, 10193 and 10585; Haines

Rd. near boundary, M.P. & R.T. Porsild, 233,
262 and 263; Mayo, Ladue R., Bostock, 138;
Dawson Range, Carmaks, idem, 31; north
fork of Klondike R. Cockfield, 68.

General distribution: Alpine but not
arctic: Kamtchatka and Eastern Chukotsk

FIELD-NATURALIST

a
[Vol. 64

Peninsula, western and southern Alaska
south to lat. 60° N., east through high moun-
tains of central AlaSka and Yukon to Mac-
kenzie Mts. about latitude 63° N. and south
to high mountains of northern British Colum-
bia.

Type locality: “in insula Unalaschka”’
Chamisso.

Illustration: Hultén, Fl. Aleut. Isl., tab.
15 (1987).

13. Antennaria neoalaskana A.E. Porsild in
Sargentia 4:71 (1943).

Caespitose, with a short, rather stout,
freely branched, subligneous and rhizomatose
base; the offsets sessile, their leaves spatula-
te 1-1.5 em long, 0.2-0.3 em wide, mucronate,
thinly appressed tomentose on both surfaces
and in age becoming glabrate. — Flowering
stems 5-12 cm high, thinly floccose, stout,
stiff and usually somewhat arching, bearing,
from 4 to 7 linear-spatulate, scarious tipped
leaves. — Inflorescence glomerulate, the
lateral heads on 0.5' cm long peduncles;
pistillate heads mostly 3; involucre circa 6
nim. high; phyllaries 2-seriate, long-attenuate,
the outer somewhat lanate below, in youth
with olive-green tips which in age become
pale brown; pappus white; tips of corolla
pale yellow; styles much exserted; achenes
minutely papillcose—The staminate plant
similar, but heads smaller, their phyllaries
ovate-lanceolate, with obtuse, erose, pale
stramineous tips, and clavellate pappus
bristles.

Perhaps most closely related to A. alas-
kana which differs by its smaller heads and
characteristic purplish leaf petioles. Super-
ficially A. neoalaskana resembles A. subcanes-
cens from which it differs by the shape and
vesture of its leaves and by being dioecious.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
high alpine summits and slopes of Richardson
Mts. west of Mackenzie Delta, Porsild 6727
(type), 6862 and 6864. Alaska: Arctic Coast,
Sadlerochit R., Spetzman, 1100 (S).

General distribution: Known only from
the above mentioned stations.

14. Antennaria pallida E. Nels. in Proc. U.
S. Nat. Mus. 23:700 (1901).
A. borealis Greene in Pitt. 4:85 (1899),
not Gand.
Loosely tomentose, with well-developed
stolons, their leaves spatulate-oblanceolate,
1.0 - 1.5 cm long, thinly but permanently

=e

_ tibus, costa unica distinctis.

January-February, 1950]

appressed woolly on both surfaces. — Flower-
ing stems from 6 to 15 cm high with from
7 to 9 amply developed linear-lanceolate
leaves lacking or almost without scarious ap-
pendages.—Inflorescence glomerulate, heads
comparatively large, 3-5. Involucres 6-7 mm
high; the outer phyllaries broadly and some-
what cuneately obovate obtuse, in youth
conspicuously dark; the inner with attenuate,
scarious, dirty white tips. Pappus bristles
white. Achenes glabrous. Staminate plant
unknown.

Antennaria pallida is a somewhat polymor-
phic species of the section Alpinae and, ap-
parently, is limited essentially to the Pacific
coast and to the Aleutian Islands. Perhaps
most closely related to A. isolepis of the
interior, from which it differs by its darker,
non-spreading phyllaries, more ample stem
leaves, lacking or almost without scarious
appendages, and by its broadly spatulate basal
leaves bearing a thin and appressed tomen-
tum. In the Alaska Range and in mountains
of northern British Columbia where A. pallida
and A. isolepis meet, intermediate forms
occur which may be referred to either
species.

The specimens listed below, while not
typical, are best referred to A. pallida.

Specimens seen: BRITISH COLUMBIA:
Haines Road, near Yukon boundary, 59° 51’
N. - 136° 58’ W., M.P. & R.T. Porsild 231,
232 and 264; Haines Rd., Klehini R., Clarke
421,

Type locality: Disenchantment Bay (S.E.
Alaska).

General distribution: Pacific Coast of
Alaska from Juneau to the tip of Alaska
Peninsula and Unalaska, north to mountains
of northern British Columbia near the Yukon
border; with a disjunct area in the central
Aleutian Islands.

Illustration: Hultén, Fl. Aleut. Isl. tab. 15

“ (1987).
15. Antennaria pedunculata A. E. Porsild,

n. sp.
Humifusa caulibus ramosissimis 5-8 ecm
longis stragulum 25-100 cm diametro forman-
tibus. Stolones procumbentes 5-10 cm longi

- feliis oblanceolatis apice mucronatis, 2.0 cm

longis 0.5 cm latis, juventute tomento tenui
sericeo adpresso munitis, aetate glabrescen-
Caulis florifer

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 15

15-22 cm altus glabrescens, foliis 8-10 lineari-
bus vel lanceolatis, imis obtusis, superioribus
apicibus scariosis munitis. Calathia feminea
1-5 campanulata cymosa, inferiora sat remo-
ta, pedunculis 3.0 - 6.0 cm longis. Involu-
crum 0.7-1.0 em altum basi lanatum. Bracteae
triseriatae valde inaequales, exteriores oblan-
ceolatae subfuscae, interiores oblanceolatae
subacutae vel obtusae chartaceae, aetate non-
nihil patentes. Corolla purpurea. Stylus
valde exsertus bifidus. Achaenia 1.0 mm
longa olivacea valde papillosa. Planta mas-
cula ignota.

A rather peculiar looking species inhabit-
ing open willow or birch thickets, rock slides
and outwash plains. It is, undoubtedly, closely
related to A. stolonifera from which it differs
by its long-pedunculate lateral heads and by
the broad, rather obtuse and pale chartaceous
inner phyllaries. No intermediate forms were
seen between it and A. stolonifera.

Specimens seen: YUKON TERRITORY:
Pelly Range, Upper Rose River valley, Mile
95, elevation 3600 feet, on gravelly outwash
plain, July 12, 1944, Porsild & Breitung,
10447 (type); alpine slopes of mountain east
of Mile 77, idem, 10965; granite mountain
opposite Mile 85-90, dry slopes, elevation
5000 feet, idem, 10191. ALASKA: Colville R.,
Umiat, Sept. 17, 1948, (overmature and frag-
mentay specimens), Polunin (S).

General distribution: Known only from
ebove mentioned stations,

16. Antennaria philonipha A.E. Porsild in
Rhod. 41:294 (1939), tab. 554, figs. 1-10.

Plant dioecious, matted, forming small
colonies by stolon-like offsets 5 to 10 cm
long; basal leaves spatulate-obovate about 1.5
cm long and 0.4 cm wide, mucronate, glabrous
above, appressed silky-tomentose beneath,
becoming glabrate in age; stems very slender
and weak, thinly floccose-tomentose, espe-
cially above, becoming glabrate in age, with
5 to 10 very reduced stem leaves tipped with
very conspicuous brown, flat, obtuse and
scarious 2.0 mm long appendages; stem of
pistillate plant 10 to 14 cm tall, that of the
staminate as a rule less than 10 cm high;
heads solitary or very rarely 2 to 3 together,
the staminate small, nodding when young,
their involucres about 5.0 mm high with
chovate, lead-coloured bracts and with pappus
scarcely barbellate, slightly thickened at the
apex; pistillate heads somewhat larger, their

16 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

involucres 6 to 7 mm high, the bracts of
equal length, thin and hyaline, acuminate,
dark brown below the tips, olivaceous when
young, becoming pale straw-coloured in age;
pappus rufidulous when mature, the rays
merely scabrous, not at all plumose; style
exserted, bilobed; achenes glabrous.

Antennaria philonipha is a _ very well
marked species, perhaps nearest related to
A. monocephala with which it, apparently,
hybridizes when the two species meet. From
A. monocephala it is at once distinguished by
its tall and slender flowering stems and large
pistillate heads, by its long, stolon-like off-
sets and by the much thinner indument of
the leaves and stem. It is an arctic-alpine
species which, as the name implies, is
ecologically bound to moist, grassy places
near alpine snow banks.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Arctic Coast: six miles west of Kittigazuit,
Porsild & Porsild, 2524 (type); Tuktuayaktoq,
J. Robertson, 70; Caribou Hills east of
Mackenzie Delta, Porsild, 6553 and 16757;
east slope of Richardson Mts. west of Mac-
kenzie Delta, idem, 6861 and 6863. YUKON
TERRITORY: Pelly Range, Porsild & Brei-
tung, 10154, 10524, 10964, 11013, 11050 and
11156; Mayo District, Bostock, 137 and 230;
Mt. Sheldon, Porsild & Breitung, 11099, 11100,
11640, 11755, 11778 and 11779; Maemillan
Pass, idem, 11273; White Pass, Eastwood,
925; Haines Road, near B. C. boundary, M.P.
Porsild, 699 and 700.

General distribution: Arctic-alpine: From
Seward Peninsula east through high moun-
tains of central Alaska and Yukon, east
along the arctic coast of Mackenzie to Ander-
son R., south through Yukon to mountains
of northern British Columbia.

Illustration: Porsild, l.c.

17. Antennaria stolonifera A. E. Porsild, n.sp.
? A. media Raup in Sargentia 6:244 (1947),
not Greene,

Humifusa stolonibus bene evolutis, 5-10
cm longis, sublignosis repentibus et ample
radicantibus, stragula diametri unius metre
vel ultra formantibus. Folia basalia spathula-
ta obtusa plane mucronata, 2.0-2.5 cm longa,
0.4-0.5 cm lata, utrimque tomento sericeo
tenui adpresso induta, frarius_ glabrata,
~distincte uninervia. Caules floriferi per an-
thesim ca 10.0 cm alti, serius non parum

[Vol. 64

elongati, fructiferi 14-18 cm alti, sat robusti
rigidi erecti, sub tomento albo floccosa pur-
purascentes. Folia caulina 8-10, inferiora
optime evoluta lineari-lanceolata, 1.5-2-0 cm
longa apicibus scariosis destituta, superiora
pauperrima apicibus longis Scariosis. Cala-
thia feminea 3-5 per anthesim dense ag-
gregata, lateralia adulta, per elongationem
pedunculorum, terminale superantia. Brac-
teae 3-seriatae, exteriores dense lanata apici-
bus obtusis griseis, interiores lineari-oblon-
gae obtusiusculae olivaceae. Corollae pur-
pureae stylis vix exsertis. Achaenia parva,
0.8 mm longa, papillis numerosis longis
hispida. Pappus sordidus, minutissime bar-
bellatus. Planta mascula ignota.

The large series of remarkably uniform
material listed below suggests that A. sto-
lonifera is a good and well marked species.
It is a good match for some specimens in the
National Herbarium of Canada from the
Canadian Rockies, which by Greene were
tentatively identified with his A. media. Our
plant, however, is much taller than is true
A. media of which the type, from Sierra
Nevada, Cal., C. F. Sonne, July 31, 1892 (NY)
is before me; also, in true A. media the stam-
inate plant is common. Although hundreds
of colonies of A. stolonifera were carefully
examined, not a single male plant could be
found. Our plant superficially resembles A.
atriceps Fern. of mountains of northern
British Columbia. That species, however, has
glabrous achenes and long-acuminate, oliva-

ceous phyllaries whereas in ours the phyl-

laries are obtuse and the achenes very hispid.

The type, No. 11377, from a mountain on
the upper Macmillan R. was collected late in
the season near a perennial snowbank. The
long series include specimens of all stages
of development, and beautifully illustrate the
range of seasonal development.

Specimens seen: YUKON TERRITORY:
Canol Road, Pelly Range, Porsild & Breitung,
10151, 10231, 10232, 10448, 10586, 11051,
11052a and 11155; Mt. Sheldon, idem, 11641
and 11780; Itsi Range, idem, 11392; upper
south fork of Macmillan River, shale moun-
tain west of river, opposite Mile 268, forming
dense mats near snowfield, elevation 5500
feet, idem, 11377 (type); Macmillan Pass,
Mackenzie-Yukon divide, .idem, .11272 and
11274. MACKENZIE DISTRICT: Brintnell

}

January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Li

Lake, Mackenzie Mountains, Raup, 9648 (n.v.,
recorded as A. media probably belongs here).

General distribution: Common on alpine
slopes of S.E. Yukon east to Mackenzie Mts.
(as A. media), south through the Canadian
Rockies to Banff Pk.

18. Antennaria subcanescens Ostf. in Malte in
Rhod. 36:112 (1934); Porsild in Sar-
gentia 4:73 (1943).
A. alpina sensu Macoun & Holm in Rept.
Gane Aret. Exp. b:21A; tab. 12; fig: 3
(1921), not Gaertn.
~ Densely caespitose, forming flat cushions
10-15 cm in diameter, with short, ascending-
erect, leafy offsets. Basal leaves oblanceolate,
obscurely mucronulate, 1.5 - 2.5 cm long, in-
cluding the well-developed petiole, and 0.4 -
_ 0.5 cm wide, dark cinereous and thinly ap-
pressed tomentose on both surfaces.—Flower-
ing stems 5-10 em high, dark purplish,
distinctly glandular-papillose under the
sparse, appressed-woolly indument. Stem
leaves 5-7, linear, thinly lanate, 1.0-1.2 cm
long, the upper with 2 mm long, Scarious ap-
pendages.—Inflorescence glomerulate; heads
mostly 3. Involucres about 7 mm high; phyl-
laries slightly lanate and dark brown at the
base, with long, narrow and greenish-brown
tips; styles exserted, bifid; pappus bristles
dirty white; achenes glabrous. Staminate
plant unknown.
Antennaria subcanescens, like A. com-
_ pucta, is densely caespitose but differs from
that species by the very characteristic dark
ashy-grey basal leaves, dark purplish flower-
ing stems with long gland-tipped papillae
beneath the thin, non-floccose indument.
Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Arctic Coast, Bernard Harbour, Fr. Johansen,
Can. Arct. Exp. No. 286a (type); Cape Dal-
housie, Porsild & Porsild, 2800; Mackenzie
Delta, north end of Richards Island, Porsild,
16855. YUKON TERRITORY: Canol Road,
_ Pelly Range, Porsild & Breitung, 11052.
_ General distribution: Arctic-alpine: Moun-
tains of Central Alaska and S.E. Yukon and
_ the arctic coast of Mackenzie Distr. east to
Coronation Gulf.
Illustration: Macoun & Holm, l.c. as A.
alpina. ;

e

Sect. DIOICAE

19. Antennaria alborosea A. E. Porsild in
a M. P. Porsild in Can. Field-Nat. 60:85
meee, (1946).

"
iN

A. rupicola sensu Porsild in Sargentia
4:73 (1943), not Fern.

Stolons creeping, freely branching; the
older subterranean and _ subligneous, the
younger ones sarmentose, 5-10 cm long. —
Basal leaves oblanceolate-cuneate, tapering
into a narrow petiole, mucronate, 2.0 to 3.0
cm long, 0.5-0.6 em wide, obscurely 3-nerved,
glabrate or glabrous and deep green above,
sericeous-appressed tomentose below.—Flow-
ering stems 20-30 em high, slender, stiff or
sometimes arcuate, thinly arachnoid-tomen-
tose, glabrate and greenish-purple. Stem
leaves 15-20, linear-lanceolate, glabrate and
fresh green, long acuminate but scarcely ap-
pendiculate, the lower 2.0 cm long, the upper
much smaller. — Inflorescence lax cymose,
rodding in youth, with from 5-8 pistillate
heads on 0.6-1.0 cm long peduncles. Invol-
ucres 0.6-0.7 cm high, the phyllaries 3- to 4-
seriate, conspicuously imbricated, thin and
oblanceolate; the outer green with thinly
lanate bases, the inner first beautifully
roseate, later straw-coloured. Corolla with
greenish tips. Style scarcely exserted. Ache-
nes dusky brown, glabrous or minutely and
sparingly papillose. Pappus silky and snowy
white. Staminate plant unknown,

A very attractive species which inhabits
sandy or gravelly and not too dry places on
acidic soils in the lowland where it forms
small colonies, sometimes one metre across.
A. alborosea is probably closely related to A.
acuminata Greene (from Chilliwack Valley,
B.C.) from which it differs by its glabrous
and fresh green upper leaf surfaces and by
the more reduced stem leaves and larger
heads; it is closely related also to A. leuchip-
pi which, however, lacks the pink showy
inner phyllaries and has permanently tomen-
tose leaves.

In view of the more abundant material
now available it is evident that the plant
recorded from Bear Lake (Porsild, l.c.) as
A. rupicola Fern. is actually A. alborosea. In
A. rupicola, originally described from Maine
(Rhod. 1:74 (1897)), and later reduced to a
variety of A. neodioica, the bracts are said to
have “conspicuous yellowish-white firm
papery tips exceeding the dark bases”. The
1928 collections from Bear Lake were Over-
mature; better and younger series obtained
in 1949 are a close match for the Yukon

18 THE CANADIAN

plant. A rupicola, furthermore, is a limestone
plant, whereas A. alborosea grew on neutral
or acid soils,

' Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Bear Lake, McTavish Arm, Porsild & Porsild,
3640, 3648 and 3738A; Etacho Pt., alpine
meadows, idem, 3517; ibid., Porsild, 17123.
BRITISH COLUMBIA: Bennett, near Yukon
boundary, Malte, 63; ibid., Cowles, 935 (G,
US). S.E. YUKON: Canol Road, Pelly Range,
Porsild & Breitung, 9326, 10190 (type), 10325,
10446, 10633, 10868, 10966 and 11014; John-
sons Crossing, M. P. Porsild, 316, 317, 436,
Ad( v499. 575, 516, O11, O18; (at and. 762;
Alaska Highway, Rancheria, Anderson, 10475,
in part.

General distribution: Alpine: Central
Alaska through central and 8S. E. Yukon east
to Bear Lake, south to mountains of S. E.
Alaska and northern British Columbia.

20. Antennaria Breitungii A. E. Porsild, n.sp.

Humifusa, stolonibus sublignosis ramifica-
tis repentibus bene evolutis, innovationes
foliiferas ad 8 cm longas gerentibus. Folia
basilaria anguste spathulato-obovata, 5-7 mm
longa, 2-3 mm lata, juventute utrimque
cinereo-tomentosa, sed aetate saepe Superne
glaberrima. Caules floriferi 8-12 cm alti,
foliis 8-10 lineari-oblongis sine appendicibus
scariosis instructis. Inflorescentia juventute
nutans, calathiis 4-8 sat glomeratis. Involu-
cra 5-6 mm alta phyllariis triseriatis roseis.
Achaenia modice sed _ distincte papillosa.
Planta mascula ignota.

Antennaria Breitungi differs from all
other northern pink-flowered species by its
short, somewhat crowded basal leaves that
in age become perfectly glabrous above. In
habit it resembles A. nitida but is at once
distinguished from that species by its pink
phyllaries and by the character of the tomen-
tum. It grows on dry, sandy slopes of the
lowland and flowers very early. It was named
for August Breitung who for several seasons
accompanied the writer in the field and
contributed large numbers of beautifully
prepared series of Antennaria.

Specimens seen: YUKON: Canol Road,
Pelly Range, Porsild & Breitung, 9451 and
9493; Whitehorse, sandy bluffs east of Lewes
R., June 1-5, 1944, idem, 9229 (type); ibid.,
Anderson, 9596; south end of Kluane Lake,

FIELD-NATURALIST

*

[Vol. 64

idem, 95138. ALASKA: Anchorage, Lepage,
O’Neill & Dutilly, 21089; Anderson, 6529 (S)..

General distribution: Southern dry belt of
Yukon with a single station in Alaska.

Co

21. Antennaria crymophila A. E. Porsild in
Sargentia 4:69 (1943).

Plant densely caespitose or even pulvinate —
with numerous short, sessile and erect sterile
rosettes. — Basal leaves spatulate, obtuse,
about 1.0 cm long and 0.3 cm broad, persisting
for several years, appressed white-tomentose
on both sides, in age becoming dark grey. —
Flowering stems ca. 10 cm high, covered by
a floccose tomentum which in age peels off
showing the dark-brown cortex. Stem leaves
6-8 rather distant, linear, the lower about
1.0 cm long, the upper much reduced and
bearing long, scarious tips. — Inflorescence
cpen, mostly with 4 heads; the lateral on ~
1-2 cm .long peduncles. Involucres about —
0.6 cm high; phyllaries 4-to 5-seriate, brown-
ish black at the base, with obtuse, straw-
coloured, papery tips. Pappus rufidulous;
style barely exserted. Mature achenes oliva-
ceous, minutely but distinctly papillose. —
Staminate plant unknown. ;

\

ee ee ee

Antennaria crymophila is perhaps most
closely related to A. pulvinata Greene of
moutains of Alberta and British Columbia
but differs from it in the open inflorescence,
taller flowering stem and strongly developed,
thick stolon.,

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
dry, gravelly places along the East Branch
of the Mackenzie Delta, Porsild, 7053 (type). —

General distribution:
the type locality.

Known only from 7

22. Antennaria elegans A. E. Porsild, n.sp.

Humifusa, stolonibus sublignosis ramifi- —
catis repentibus bene evolutis, stragula parva
et laxa formantibus. Folia divaricata lineari- ~
oblanceolata apice acutiuscula, 10-20 mm __—
longa, 2-3 mm lata utrimque tenue adpresso-
sericea. Caulis florifer 12-18 cm altus ©
gracilis et parum floccosus, foliis plerumque
10 utrimque adpresso-tomentosis, lineari-
lanceolatis 10 mm longis, 2 mm latis, in-—
ferioribus obtusiusculis, superioribus duobus
(vel unico) apice scarioso tenui munitis. ~
Calathia feminea (1) -4-(8) per anthesim |
laxe aggregata, lateralia adulta, per elonga- ~
tionem pedunculorum, terminale superantia. —

aA

January-February, 1950] THE CanapIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 19

Involucrum 5-6 mm altum, bracteis angustis
3-vel 4-seriatis, initio valde imbricatis deinde
patentibus. Bracteae exteriores ovatae basi
fuscae parce lanatae apice straminescentes,
interiores oblongo-lanceolatae acuminatae
erosae, initio venuste roseae, deinde strami-
nescentes. Corolla apice viridescens. Stylus
vix exsertus. Achaenia fusca, laevissima.
Planta mascula ignota.

Antennaria elegans is a rather attractive
species well marked by its matted growth,
narrow, appressed-sericeous-tomentose and
spreading leaves, its slender up to 20 cm tall,
and somewhat flexuous stems and by its
numerous and rather ample, oblanceolate,
obtuse stem leaves of which all but the top-
most lack scarious appendages. In life the
young inner phyllaries are pale rose but soon
turn grey or straw-coloured.

This species which appears to be common
in S.E. Yukon, was collected by the writer
on Bear Lake, N.W.T., in 1928, but was er-
roneously reported by him in Sargentia 4:71
(1943) as A. isolepis (Porsild & Porsild, 3440,
3516 and 5085).

Specimens seen: NORTHWEST TERRIT-
ORIES: Great Bear Lake, Etacho Pt., 1500’
elev. Porsild & Porsild, 3516, ibid. Porsild,
17124; north shore of Smith Arm. Porsild &
Porsild, 5085; Keith Arm, Russell B., idem,
_ 3440. YUKON: Canol Road, Pelly Range,
Porsild & Breitung, 10189, 10414, 10523,
10865, 10967, 11015 including: upper Rose R.,
dry gravel benches, 10411 (type); Mt. Shel-
don, idem, 11639 and 11644.

General distribution: Alpine: Mountains
ci S.E. Yukon and Great Bear Lake.

23. Antennaria incarnata A. E. Porsild, n.sp.

Humifusa, stolones suffrutescens ramo-
sissimum, 3-5 cm longi suberecti, foliis con-
fertis oblanceolatis vel spathulatis apice

_ acutis mucronibus tomento occultis, 1.0 cm
_ - longis, 0.3 cm latis utrimque tomento incano-

sericeo vestitis. Caulis florifer 10-12 cm altus

a adpresse sericeo-tomentosus, foliis 7-8 linea-
- ribus, 1.0 - 1.5 em longis, 0.2 cm latis, acutis

vel attenuatis apice vix scariosis. Calathia

| % feminea 5-8 cymam subglobosam formantes,
_ pedunculis eglandulosis

inferioribus inter-

dum ramificatis. Involucrum 5 mm altum,

_bracteis bi-vel triseriatis sub-aequalibus: ex-
_teriores basi virides dense lanatae, apicibus

Re

roseis, interiores oblongo-lanceolatae pallide
incarnatae, in vivo purpureo-puncticulatae.
Corolla apice pallide purpurascens. Stylus
exsertus. Achaenia laevia. Planta mascula
ignota.

A rather attractive and distinct little
species which forms small, but rather dense
colonies in turfy places on river terraces,
outwash plains and in open birch thickets.
By its small size alone it is easily distinguish-
ed from A. alborosea, and from the rather
polymorphous A. rosea by its more numerous
and smaller heads. It rather closely resem-
bles A. Hansii (A. groenlandica) of S. W.
Greenland from which it differs by its always
pink phyllaries lacking the dark spot at the
base of the outer row. A single collection
from Bear Lake was erroneously reported as
A. isolepis, Porsild in Sargentia 4:71 (1943).

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Great Bear Lake, McTavish B., Porsild & Por-
sild, 5211. S.E. YUKON: Canol Road, Pelly
Range, turfy river terraces of upper Rose R.
neal: Mile 95, elevation 3600 feet, July 11,
1944, Porsild & Breitung, 10412 (type) and
10445.

General distribution:
S. E. Yukon,

Great Bear Lake,

24. Antennaria isolepis Greene in Ottawa Nat.
25:41 (1911); Porsild in Sargentia 4:71
(1943) pro max. pte.; idem, in Nat.
Mus. Can. Bull. 101:27, 32 (1945); Raup
in Sargentia 6:243 (1947).

Humifuse, with leafy stolons up to 5 cm
long. Basal leaves oblanceolate, 1.5-2-0 em
long and 3-4 mm broad, subacute or short
mucronate, appressed white-tomentose on
both surfaces but more densely so under-
neath. — Flowering stems 10-15 cm high,
somewhat flexuous, floccose-tomentose; cau-
line leaves numbering about 10, linear-oblan-
ceolate, floccose-tomentose, the lower about
1.5 cm long, with subulate tips, the upper
not much reduced, with broad, flat, scarious
tips; heads 3-6, usually 4, the lateral on 1
em long penduncles; involucres 6-7 mm high;
phyllaries 3-seriate, oblanceolate, with oblong,
erose, papery white and spreading tips; pap-
pus bristles white; achenes glabrous. —
Staminate plant unknown.

Antennaria isolepis in Alaska may some-
times resemble over-mature specimens of

ome \ ; ; 4
20 Tur CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 64

7

U
Nag] END ees Tg ANE

24 Antennaria isolepis

s|T aT E\S

30 Antennaria rosea 31 Antennaria subviscosa

Plate 3. Distribution of Antennaria in Northwestem Canada.

January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN
A. pallida from which it may always be dis-
tinguished by its more ample stem leaves
with strongly developed scarious tips.

Fernald’s statement in Rhodora 26:102
(1924), that the achenes of A. isolepis are
“sparingly papillose”’ and the flowering stems
“0.7-2.5 dm high”, probably refer to speci-
mens of the taller A. Rousseaui Porsild, in
Can. Field-Nat. 63:80, tab. 1, figs 1-5 (1949),
from northern Ungava. At any rate, the type
as well as all other specimens of A. isolepis
seen by the writer from west of Hudson Bay
have glabrous achenes. Greene’s statement,
l.c., “I suspect that the plant here described
is male” is difficult to understand, for the
type, J. M. Macoun, Can. 79270, consists of
three plants with a total of nine normal and

well developed pistillate inflorescences with

fully expanded flowers and almost mature
achenes.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Great Bear Lake, Porsild & Porsild, 4969 and
3008; Hanbury R., 63° 40’ N.-105°W., Rad-
ford, Can. 132365; Lone Mt., near confluence
of N. Nahanni and Mackenzie R., Wynne-
Edwards, 8519; Mackenzie Mts., Canol Rd.
Mile 111 east, idem, 8384a. YUKON: Canol
Road, Pelly Range, Porsild & Breitung,
10092, 10094a, 10152, 10194, 10324; Kluane
Lake, Anderson, 9477 (in part); Dawson,
Eastwood, 236.

Type locality: Keewatin, Cape Eskimo

[Eskimo Pt.], Lat. 61°05’N.
Illustration: Fernald, l.c., tab. 142, fig. 7.

General distribution: Mountains of cen-
tral Alaska and Yukon, south to mountains
of northern British Columbia, east through
Bear Lake and Keewatin to the west coast
of Ungava and northern Labrador coast.

25. Antennaria Laingii A. E. Porsild in Rhod.
~ 41:293 (1939), tab. 554, figs. 11-13.

Caespitose, matted, with long, stolon-like

_ Gffsets; leaves of the rosettes numerous, 1.0
to 1.5 cm long, about 0.3 cm wide, oblan-
_ ceolate-spatulate, acuminate, densely canes-

_ stout and rigid, woolly above,
below, 8 to 14 cm high, leafy with 10 to 14

cent-tomentose on both sides; stems rather
canescent

well developed, flat, linear-spatulate leaves,

a
“al

y

er
ta?
4

these canescent with a dense even felt,

acuminate or mucronate, but not at all

FIELD-NATURALIST

ail

scarious-tipped; pistillate heads 3 to 8 in
dense glomerules; outer phyllaries green,
with scarious brown tips, like the peduncles
densely white-woolly; inner phyllaries lan-
ceolate, obtuse, papery, ivory white; pappus
white; achenes glabrous; staminate plant
unknown.

Antennaria Laingii, in S.E. Yukon, is in-
variably found on dry, shaly or sandy foot-
hills of Palaezoic rocks; its closest relative
may be A. nitida from which it differs by its
stout rhizomatose stolons, its dull and densely
canescent-tomentose, not at all silky or
spreading basal leaves and by its stiff and
rather stout flowering stems with well
developed leaves entirely lacking brown,
scarious tips. As in A. nitida the young
flowering heads are nodding.

Specimens seen: YUKON: Canol Road,
Pelly Range, Lapie Crossing, Porsild & Brei-
tung, 9753; Alaska Highway between White-
horse and Johnsons Crossing, idem, 11162;
Whitehorse, idem, 9228 and 9231; south end
of Kluane Lake, Anderson, 9477 (in part);
Alaska Highway, Rancheria, Anderson, 10476
(S).

Type locality: Head of Chitina R., Alaska.

General distribution: dry interior of cen-
tral Alaska and southern Yukon; Rocky
Mts.?.

Illustration: Porsild, l.c.

26. Antennaria leuchippi M. P. Porsild in Can.
Field-Nat. 60:85 (1946).

Humifuse, with up to 9 em long, leafy
Stolons. Basal leaves about 2.0-2.5 cm long,
0.4 cm wide, oblanceolate-spatulate, mucro-
nate, densely white tomentose on both sides.
—Flowering stems erect, greenish-purple
under the thin, floccose tomentum, 25-30 cm
high, with about 15 evenly spaced and well
developed stem leaves, the lower as long or
jonger than the basal leaves, the upper
gradually decreasing in size, all conspicuous-
ly mucronate and the upper with brown,
scarious tips. — Inflorescence cymose, usual-
ly with from 6-10 glomerulate, short-pedi-
cellate heads but frequently also with lateral,
long-pedunculate heads rising from the axis
of the uppermost stem leaves. Mature involu-
cres turbinate, 5-6 mm high, tomentose
below; phyllaries 4-seriate, subobtuse or the
inner subacuminate with entire, scarious

22 THE CANADIAN

white tips which in youth are dotted with
tiny pink spots. Corolla purple, 3.0-3.3 mm
long, its lobes short pilose. Style not ex-
serted. Achenes small for the size of the
plant, about 1.0 mm long and 0.3 mm broad,
glabrous. Staminate plant unknown.

A rather striking and attractive species
which forms smal] colonies up to one metre
in diameter on gravelly or sandy river banks.
It is, perhaps, most closely related to A.
alborosea from which it differs by the per-
manent indument of the upper surface of the
leaves, by its smaller cauline leaves, by its
smaller heads and papery white or at most
pink-dotted inner phyllaries.

Specimens seen: YUKON: Canol Road,
Pelly Range, Porsild & Breitung, 10415, 10526
and 10866b; Johnsons Crossing, M. P. Porsild,
542, 543, 544, 603, 639, 739, 740 and 741;
Whitehorse, July 11, 1944, A. & R.T. Porsild
(type); Takhini R. w. of Whitehorse, Michel
35 in part (Calif.). ALASKA: Alaska Range,
Glenn Highway, Anderson, 10771 (S).

General distribution: Thus far known
only from S. E. Yukon and Central Alaska.

27. Antennaria nitida Greene in Pitt. 3:283
(1898); Raup in Journ. Arn. Arb. 17:305
(1936); Porsild in Sargentia 4:71
(1943); idem in Bull. Nat. Mus. Can.
101:33 (1945); Raup in Sargentia 6:244
(1947).—See Fernald in Rhod. 26:101
(1924).

Humifuse and densely matted with well
developed, subligneous, freely branching and
leafy stolons. Basal leaves small and spread-
ing, obovate-oblanceolate, mucronate, nar-
rowly petiolate, 0.5-1.5 cm long, 0.4-0.5 cm
wide, somewhat involute and almost keeled
from the prominent median nerve, silvery
white and almost shiny on both surfaces due
to the finely appressed tomentum.—Flower-
ing stems of the pistillate plant from 5-25
em high, slender and somewhat flexuous,
pale green and thinly arachnoid-tomentose,
bearing from 8-20 linear leaves, the lower-
most merely mucronate, the upper with at-
tenuate brownish and scarious tips. — In-
florescence cymose, densely glomerulate and
rodding in youth, in age open and branched,
the lower branches often distant and bearing
up to 4 heads, Involucres 6-7 mm high, viscid-
hirsute; phyllaries in 4 rows, Pale green
below with oblong, obtuse and entire, papery

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

white tips. Pappus white, scarcely exceeding
the mature corollas; styles barely exserted;
achenes glabrous. — Staminate plant similar
in stature but with broader and often reflexed
tips of the phyllaries and with. conspicuously
barbellate pappus bristles.

Antennaria nitida is a common and wide-
spread species on calcareous soils of the low- |
land and in the Northwest is one of the
earliest flowering species in the genus; the
young flowering heads are nodding but
towards maturity the stems elongate and
become erect. Although .a somewhat poly-
morphous species which shows considerable
variation in stature according to the habitat
and latitude, A. nitida may always be recogn-
ized by its short, broad, obovate and silvery
basal leaves and by its diffuse growth habit.
In the southern part of its range the staminate
plant is as common as is the pistillate one
but towards its northern limit appears to be
decidedly less common or even totally lack-
ing.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Lockhart River, E. end of Slave Lake, Tyr-
rell, Can. 23176; McTavish Arm, Bear Lake,
Porsild & Porsild, 3649, 3660, 3686 and 3739;
Mackenzie River, 10 miles below Mills Lake,
Wynne-Edwards, 8560; Bear Rock, Porsild &
Porsild, 3398; Nyarling R., Russel, Can.
105283. YUKON: Canol Road, Pelly Range,
Porsild & Breitung, 9325, 9369, 9452, 9453,
9492, 9495, 9752, 9754, 9814, 10866a, 10093,
10095, 10149, 10326; Johnsons Crossing, M. P.
Porsild, 318, 431, 433, 434, 481, 542, 735;
Whitehorse, Anderson, 9596 (S), 1942, (NY);
ibid. M. P. Porsild, 111; ibid., Macoun, 79019;
ibid. Porsild & Breitung, 10704; Keno, Mayo
District, Anderson, 9800; Haines Road, M. P.
Porsild, 145; Bear Creek, August 6, 1920, A.
Miiller (Can, G); Kluane Lake, Anderson,
9513 (S); Dawson District, Bonanza R., East-
wood, 445; Dawson, Macoun, 79021 (Can,
NY), ibid., Eastwood 236 (G).

Type locality: Charlton Island, James Bay.

General distribution: Prairies and plains.
From Central Alaska through upper Yukon
and Mackenzie District north to Bear Lake,
exust to James Bay, south to Manitoba, Alberta
and interior British Columbia, and in the
Rocky Mountains south to New Mexico.

Illustration: Fernald in Rhodora 26, tab.
142, fig. 9. (1924). ;

:
7
3

= See

rapt Gta Sk

January-February, 1950]

pale pink

_ bearing 2 cm long

‘Bear Lake, Etacho Pt.,

/ e

THE CANADIAN

. Antennaria oxyphylla Greene in Pitt.

' 4:284 (1901); Raup in Journ. Arn. Arb.
17:305 (1936); zdem in Sargentia 6:244
(1947).

Humifuse, with short, leafy ascending-
erect stolons, forming small, rather compact
colonies. — Basal leaves 1.5 - 2.0'cm long
and 0.6 - 0.7 cm broad, obovate-oblanceolate,
distinctly mucronate, with one prominent
median and weaker lateral nerves on the
underside, silvery gray, appressed tomentose
on both surfaces but more densely so on the
underside. — Flowering stems 20 - 25 cm
high, slender and somewhat arched, the cor-
tex greenish to purplish brown under the
thin, caducuous, floccose tomentum; stem
leaves about 9 or 10 evenly spaced, linear-
lanceolate, the lower about 1.5 cm long and
0.3 cm wide, merely acuminate, the upper
rapidly diminishing in size and terminating
in thin, scarious tips——Inflorescence glomer-
ulate, with from 3 - 5 heads; involucres 6-7
mm high, lanate below; phyllaries 4-seriate,
the outer ones pale reddish-green, the inner
in youth, soon turning straw-
coloured, with oblong, attenuate somewhat
erose, non-spreading tips. Pappus bristles
white, much longer than the reddish-purple

_ corollas; styles barely exserted; achenes 1.4

mm long, glabrous.
known.

— Staminate plant not

Our plant differs from that of the Rocky
Mountains chiefly in the slightly smaller and

less numerous heads and by the phyllaries

which in youth are pale pink whereas those
of the Rocky Mountain plant are said to be
white. A. oxyphylla differs strikingly from

_ all other northern pink-flowered species of

Antennaria by its short, ascending stolons
obovate, silvery gray
leaves, 15-25 cm tall flowering stems and

rather smal] heads.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
elev. 2000’, Porsild,

| 17124a; Mackenzie River near Wrigley, Por-

sild, 16675; north shore of Slave Lake, Howe,

Can. 91995. YUKON: Canol Road, Pelly
ia _ Crossing, Porsild & Breitung, 9860; Alaska
| Highway, Rancheria west of Whitehorse, An-
|, .derson, 10475 in part (8S);
_ 50-Mile R., June 28, 1899, Bolton (US).

Dawson District,

Type locality: Seas Basin, Gallatin Co.,

As Montana.

FIELD-NATURALIST

23

General distribution: Prairies and dry
meadows: Central Alaska and Yukon east to
northern Saskatchewan and south through
the Rocky Mountains to Nebraska and S.
Dakota.

29. Antennaria pygmaea Fern. in Rhod. 16:129

(1914); ibid. 26:99, tab. 142, figs. 5 &
5a (1924); Porsild in Sargentia 4:72
(1943).

Humifuse, with very short erect-ascending °
stolons, forming small, compact tufts.—Basal
leaves oblanceolate, prominently mucronate,
0.8 - 1.4 em long, 0.3-0.4 cm broad, glabrous
or glabrate above, thinly appressed tomen-
tose beneathF lowering stems from 4 - 14
cm high, stiff, dark purplish brown and
finely papillose under the thin arachnoid
indument, bearing about 9 somewhat crowded
linear-oblanceolate, 6-14 mm long, glabrate
leaves, all bearing prominent up to 4 mm
long narrowly deltoid to subulate, scarious
brown tips. — Heads large, solitary or oc-
easionally two side by side or even two smal-
ler lateral heads below the terminal one;
involucre hemispherical, about 7 mm high,
lanate at the base; phyllaries densely im-
bricated, in 3 or 4 rows, oblong and obtuse;
the outer fuscous with short stramineous
tips; the inner with long obtuse stramineous
tips. Pappus bristles silky, white, longer than
the corollas; styles barely exserted; achenes
glabrous. — Staminate plant not known.

As with A. angustata, A. isolepis and sev-
eral other “eastern” species, the known range
of A. pygmaea has recently been extended
west through Keewatin and Mackenzie dis-
tricts to Yukon. Superficially A. pygmaea
resembles the pistillate plant of A. mono-
cephala from which it may at once be distin-
guished by its larger heads and pale, straw-

_coloured inner phyllaries.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Bear Lake, Etacho Pt., elev. 1500’, Porsild &
Porsild, 3515; Mackenzie Delta, north end of
Richards Island, Porsild 16854; ibid, Porsild
& Porsild, 2286-7. YUKON: Canol Road,

Pelly Range, Porsild & Breitung, 10584.
Type locality: “Okkak, Labrador”.

General distribution: arctic-alpine: Nor-
thern Ungava, Labrador and Hudson Bay,

24 j THE CANADIAN

west through Keewatin and Bear Lake to the
Mackenzie Delta, south to mountains of S. E.
Yukon.

Illustration: Fernald, l.c.

30. Antennaria rosea (Eaton) Greene in Pitt.
3:281 (1898); Raup in Journ. Arn. Arb.
17:304 (1936); Porsild in Nat. Mus.
Can. Bull. 101:33 (1945); Raup in Sar-
gentia 6:244 (1947).

A. parvifolia Britt. & Rydb. in Bull, N.Y.
Bot. Gard. 2:185 (1901), at least in
part.

A. plantaginifolia Macoun in Ann. Rept.
Geol. Surv. Can., 1887-8, 3, 1:221B
(1889).

Humifuse, with strongly developed, long,
ligneous and freely branching stolons each
branch ending in an erect or ascending leafy
rosette which the following year produces
a flowering stem; adventitious roots appear-
ing on the subterranean part of the branches
in the third year. — Basal leaves oblanceo-
late, acute, about 2.0 em long and 0.4 cm
wide, often involute in age, with a densely
appressed pale yellowish-green tomentum;
the old leaves persist for several Seasons. —
Flowering stems rather weak, in our area
usually 10 - 15 cm high, but farther south
frequently twice as high, with 8 - 10 linear,
2.0 cm long, acuminate leaves all without
scarious appendages. The inflorescence rather
compact with 3 = 5 rather small heads in a
hemispherical cyme. Involucres 4 - 5 mm
high; phyllaries of unequal length, 3 - seriate,
the outer ones pale green and lanate, the
inner lanceolate, acuminate dark rose or
pink, fading in age. Pappus dirty white, not
lustrous; styles not exserted, and the achenes
glabrous. — The staminate plant unknown.

The name A. rosea is applied only prov-
isionally to the series of plants listed below,
and not until a comprehensible revision has
been undertaken of the pink-flowered species
inhabiting the Rocky Mountains, can it be
determined what species, if any, should
rightly bear that name.

Specimens seen: MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Fort Smith, E. Taylor, 39 and 118; Slave Lake,
Rocher R., Harper, Can. 105532; Slave Lake,
R. Bell, Can. 105530; Mackenzie R., above

FIELD-NATURALIST

°

[Vol. 64

Providence, Porsild, 16578;
Mills Lake, Wynne-Edwards, 8561; lower
Mackenzie (without locality) Stringer, Can.
105531; Liard R., between Nahanni Butte and
Simpson, Crickmay, 111. YUKON: Canol
Road, Pelly Range, Porsild & Breitung,
10323, 10327, 10525, 10866; Teslin Lake, M. P.
Porsild, 571, 573, 633, 636, 738; Bennett,
Macoun, 79018 (NY); Whitehorse, Porsild &
Breitung, 10705; Lewes R., Sept. 6, 1887,
Dawson, Can. 11286; Alaska Highway Mile
970, Anderson & Brown, 10012 (S); Five
Finger Rapids, Tarleton, 93 (NY, US); Ft.
Selkirk, Gorman, 1164 (US); Ranch Creek,
Gorman, 1062 (Can, US); Haines Road, July
1909, E. W. Scheuber (US); ibid., Clarke,
353; Dawson District, Hunter Creek, Macoun,
79020; Moosehide, idem, 79022.

Type locality: Rocky Mountains.

General distribution: Pacific coast of
Alaska south to California east through
southern Yukon and Mackenzie to James Bay.

Illustration: Henshaw: Mountain Wild
Flowers of Canada, tab. 47 (1906), as A. par-
vifolia var. rosea.

31. Antennaria subviscosa Fern. in Rhod.

16:1381 (1914), and 47:232 (1945) tab.
916 & 917; Raup in Sargentia 6:244
(1947).

Humifuse, with freely branching, ‘sublig-
neous stolons ending in leafy, erect or as-
cending rosettes. — Basal leaves _ oblan-
ceolate-spatulate, obtuse and scarcely if at all
mucronate, 1.0 - 1.5 em. long and 3 - 5 mm
broad, densely white-tomentose on both
surfaces. — Flowering stems 8-11 ecm high,
floccose, slender and more or less flexuous,
with about 10 linear-oblanceolate leaves, the
lower about 1.0 cm long, merely acuminate,
the upper but slightly reduced in size, with
thin, subulate brown and scarious tips.—tIn-
florescence glomerulate, hemispherical, with
from 3 - 6 heads; involucre 5-6 mm high,
Gensely white-lanate below; phyllaries 3-
seriate; the outer ones green below, with a
brownish centre and _ stramineous blunt,
papery tips; the inner with paler and more
attenuate tips. Pappus white; styles barely
exserted; achenes glabrous.—Staminate plant
unknown.

10 miles above

Pa a

ae

e
January-February, 1950] THe CaNnapIAN
Our plant differs from typical A. subvis-
cosa (otherwise endemic to the Gaspé Penin-
sula, Que.) by having the achenes perfectly
glabrous and by the lack of viscid glands at
the base of the involucres and on the upper-
most part of the stem; otherwise it is a close
match for the Gaspé plant. It is probably
closely related to A. albescens (Nels.) Rydb.
ef the Rocky Mountains of which the writer
has seen no authentic material. Rydberg,
however, places that species in the section
Alpinae. 7

FIELD-NATURALIST

25

Specimens seen: S.E. YUKON: Canol
Road, Pelly Range, Porsild & Breitung, 9973,
10090, 10094, 10634. MACKENZIE DISTRICT:
Brintnell Lake, (according to Raup, l.c.).
SASKATCHEWAN: Athabaska Lake, Corn-
wall B., Raup, 6452 (distributed as A. nitida).

Type locality: Gaspé, Que.

General distribution: Gaspé, Que., Atha-
baska Lake and mountains of. S. E. Yukon.

Illustrations: Fernald, l.c.

SPHAERIIDAE OF ATHABASKA AND GREAT SLAVE LAKES, «
NORTHWESTERN CANADA*

H. B. HERRINGTON
Newburgh, Ontario.

XTENSIVE COLLECTIONS of sphaeriids

from Athabaska and Great Slave Lake
were made during the years 1944-46, in the
course of fisheries investigations under the
direction of Dr. D. S. Rawson of the Fisheries
Research Board of Canada. In view of the
scarcity of information concerning the
Sphaeriidae of northwest Canada, the writer
was glad to receive these specimens for
examination.

Lake Athabaska, lying across the northern
part of the border between the Provinces of
Saskatchewan and Alberta, is between 58°
and 60° north latitude and 107° and 112°
west longitude. Great Slave Lake is between
61° and 63° north latitude and 109° and 117°
west longitude and is within the North West
Territories.

It may be that the great size of these
northern lakes — Athabaska, Great Slave
and Great Bear — is not generally appreci-
ated. Many people assume that the five
Great Lakes are the largest on the continent.
Athabaska and Great Slave Lake, along with
Great Bear the fourth largest lake in North
America, are the main bodies of water of the
Mackenzie River System whose outlet is the
Arctic Ocean. About one-fifth of the area
of Canada is drained by the Mackenzie River
System. Lake Athabaska has an area of about
3,050 square miles. Into this lake flows

1 Fereived for publication December 15, 1948.

Athabaska River. As the water leaves the
lake it is known as Slave River. It is joined
at once by the Peace River. The Slave River
enters Great Slave Lake at about the middle of
the south side of the lake. Great Slave Lake,
the fifth largest lake in North America, has
an area of about 10,500 square miles. (Lake
Ontario has an area of about 7,240 square
miles). The Mackenzie River begins where
the water leaves the western end of Great
Slave Lake.

Both Athabaska and Great Slave Lake
(as is also the case with Great Bear Lake)
lie across the western edge of the Precam-
brian Shield. The western ends of these
lakes are in the more recent formations and
are shallower and the water warmer than in
the eastern ends where the shores are more
rugged and the water deeper. In Lake Atha-
baska the maximum depth is 405 feet. A
depth of 2,000 feet was found in Christie
Bay, Great Slave Lake. This is one of the
deepest spots in North America — even
deeper than Lake Superior.

The collections included representatives of
19 species which are discussed in the follow-
ing list. Data are included as to distribution,
both in depth and area.

The specimens were obtained mostly by
means of an Ekman-Birge dredge which
brought up 1/20 of a square metre — ap-
proximately 80 square inches.

26 Tur CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

The writer wishes to make grateful ack-
nowledgement to Dr. J. G. Oughton for con-
tinued help and encouragement in the sys-
tematic study of the Sphaeriidae and to Dr.
D. S. Rawson for materials and assistance in
the preparation of this report.

The quotations in this paper are from the
_“Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Bulle-
tin No. LXXII, North West Canadian Fish-
eries Surveys in 1944-1945.”

GREAT SLAVE LAKE

There were 173 dredgings which contained
specimens of sphaeriids.

Pisidium conventus Clessin. One hundred
and thirty-six dredgings brought up P. con-
ventus. Of these there were 2285 specimens
— including empty shells but not single
valves. These were secured in various parts
of the lake. The greatest number of shells
in a single dredging was 241, in water less
than two metres in depth. Eight hundred
and sixty-six specimens (38%) were dredged
from a depth of less than 5 metres. From a
depth of 12 metres and on there were 14
dredgings containing 20 or more _ shells
coming up at intervals up to 44 metres, the
latter having 22 shells. After 44 metres the
live specimens were more intermittent until
77 metres was reached, then one specimen
was brought up in the 101-121 metre zone,
one at 137 metres, and one at 140 metres.
On July 2, 1947, an adult was secured in
Hearne channel at a depth of 219 metres.

Pisidium subtruncatum Malm. The 1119
specimens of P. subtruncatum were brought
up from various parts of the lake in 73
dredgings. That is less than half as many
specimens as in the case of P. conventus and
in a little more than half as many places.
The greatest number of shells to a single
dredging was 133, in water less than two
metres in depth. Eight hundred and ninety-
four specimens (80%) were brought up from
less than 5 metres. Below 7 metres the num-
ber fell off, there being only one dredging
containing over 20 specimens — 25 specimens
at 12 metres. Dredging continued to bring
up live specimens, in small numbers, regular-
ly until’ 20 metres was reached. After that
only two lots were recovered — 1 specimen
at 57 metres, and 5 at 79 metres.

In some species of pisidia there are one or
more forms that so closely resemble some
other species that identification of the speci-

*

[Vol. 64

mens is exceedingly difficult. This close ap-
proach of species occurs in some of the
specimens from Athabaska and Great Slave
Lake. These specimens stand at the meeting
point of P. henslowanum (Sheppard) variety
distans Stelfox, P. subtruncatum Malm and
P. lilljeborgi Clessin. In this instance I
have followed Dr. Jules Favre, Geneva, Swit-
zerland, who examined some of the speci-
mens, in calling them subtruncatum. It is
quite possible that I have included a few
specimens that are really lilljeborgi — no
undoubted henslowanum were found in either
lake.

The only other pisidia in Great Slave Lake
that have any claim to being deep-water
forms are idahoense and lilljeborgi.

Pisidium idahoense Roper. There were 21
dredgings containing idahoense, but only 43
specimens in all. These were from the North
Arm and central part of the lake. The
largest number found in any one dredging
was 7, at 1 metre. But live specimens con-
tinued to be found in ones and twos right
down to 24 metres.

Pisidium lilljeborgi Clessin. P. lilljeborgi
(equals P. scutellatum Sterki) was taken in
13 dredgings — 52 specimens — but the
largest number of specimens to a dredging
was 9, at 11 metres. They began at 3 metres
and ended with a single live adult in the
15 to 25 metres zone at Yellowknife. They
were found almost entirely in the Yellow-
knife region and in the western half of the
lake — one specimen only coming from the
eastern end, at Reliance.

Pisidium medianum Sterki. Six lots of a
form of this species were found, a few in
dredging, in water from one to four metres.
None were from the eastern end of the lake.
These may be P. hibernicum Westerlund.

Pisidium pauperculum Sterki. There were
two lots of pawperculum — 10 specimens —
from Preble Island near the south-centre of
the lake, and in water of 2 and 5 metres
depth.

Pisidium compressum Prime. Only one lot
of 10 specimens from one metre, at the west
end of the lake.

Pisidium punctatum Sterki. One valve in
Yellowknife Bay, north arm.

Pisidium fallax Sterki. A few empty shells, —

toward the west end.

be . ‘
et Ye a ee

ee ee a

January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

-Pisidium lermondi Sterki. Three specimens
found in a pond on Caribou Island.

Pisidium milium Held. Two specimens in
the same pond as above.

Pisidium lermondi, splendidulum and _ te-
nuissimum so strongly resemble forms of
P. nitidum Jenyns of Europe that they may
prove to be conspecific.

Sphaerium striatinum Lamarck. Of these
but four lots were found — 12 specimens —
in water of 2-3 metres. Some of these shells
are higher than the usual run of striatinum

and may be a related species.

Sphaerium tenue nitidum Clessin (equals
S. tenue walkeri Sterki). This species was
quite. plentiful and from different parts of
the lake — 175 specimens — but specimens
in quantity were only found in the north
arm. They were brought up in 35 dredgings,
five of which were at one metre. At Yellow-
knife one dredging, between 3 and 6 metres,
brought up 50 specimens, another in the 14
to 25 metre zone had 27 specimens.

Musculium transversum Say. A small form
and only 3 specimens — 1 dredging at 1
metre — at Yellowknife Bay, north arm.

Musculium winkleyi Sterki. What appears
to be this species was found at one and 5
metres — 7 specimens — at the south-center
of the lake and at Yellowknife Bay.

Musculium ryckholti Normand. Two dredg-
ings brought up four live specimens and four
valves at 1 metre and a single worn speci-
men at 22 metres. Both dredgings were at
Outspost Island, center of lake. But Dr.
John G. Oughton, one of the expedition,
picked up specimens, as shore debris, at
Yellowknife Bay as well as at Outpost
Island. At the latter place he also collected
live specimens in a pond.

LAKE ATHABASKA.
There were 100 dredgings which contained

- Specimens of Sphaeriidae.

Pisidium subtruncatum Malm. Fifty-six
dredgings brought up P. subtruncatum, from
different parts of the lake. The total num-

ber of specimens of this species was 534. The
- greatest number to a dredging was 76. Four

hundred and twenty-two specimens (79%)
came from a depth of less than 5 metres. The

greatest number of specimens from a dredg-

_ ing of 11 metres or over was 11. From be-

7M

yond 12 metres only 18 specimens were

~ secured. These were from 9 dredgings, and

five of these came from the deepest dredging
bringing up subtruncatum in this lake — 36
metres.

Pisidium conventus Clessin. The picture
presented by conventus is different from that
of subtruncatum in several respects. Seven-
ty-four dredgings brought up a total of 247
specimens. The greatest number of speci-
mens to a dredging was 14 at 62 metres.
There were only 21 specimens (9%) in
water of a depth of less than 5 metres. Two
hundred and twelve (86%) came from a
greater depth than 12 metres. Five speci-
mens were recovered by a dredging at 101
metres and one at 104 metres. This species
also is found in various parts of the lake.

Pisidium lilljeborgi Clessin. Only five speci-
mens of lilljeborgi were secured in this lake.
They occurred at depths from 3 to 10
metres. The two specimens from the greatest
depth were of the variety cristatum (equals
P. scutellatum cristatum Sterki).

Pisidium idahoense Roper. P. idahoense
was represented by only 17 specimens.
Twelve had no depth recorded, but seem to
be from shallow water. The depths at which
the others were taken ranged from 2 to 36
metres. All were secured in the western
half of the lake except a single specimen
from the north-eastern part.

Pisidium compressum Prime. Only two
dredgings contained live specimens of P.
compressum. Both were from 1 metre.
Several other dredgings brought up empty
shells. All were from the western half of
the lake.

The rest of the pisidia were all secured in
shallow water in the western half of the
lake. Those represented by whole specimens
were:

Pisidium milium Held. One dredging of 3
specimens.

Pisidium pauperculum Sterki. One speci-

men.

Pisidium tenuissimum (?) Sterki. One speci-
men.

Pisidium splendidulum Sterki. Two dredg-

ings — 7 specimens.

Pisidium abditum Haldeman. What appears
to be a single valve of this species was found.

28 THE CANADIAN

Sphaerium striatinum Lamarck. Of this spe-
cies only 4 live specimens were found, all
infants and all in water up to 3 metres in
depth. Several lots of empty shells were also
found at 1 and 2 metres. All were secured
in the western half of the lake.

Sphaerium tenue nitidum Clessin. Only one
specimen of this species was secured, an
immature clam at 12 metres, in the western
half of the lake.

Musculium transversum Say. Twelve dredg-
ings, in the western half of the lake, brought
up what appears to be a small, or stunted
form of this species (the same as in Great
Slave Lake), all infants, and in water from
1 to 5 metres, but mostly 2 metres.

Musculium winkleyi Sterki. What appears
to be an immature winkleyi was found in the
western end of the lake in 1 metre of depth.

DISCUSSION

Since much of the sampling of the bottom
of these lakes was from water of over 5
metres in depth the species that extend out

FIELD-NATURALIST

to a greater depth than 5 metres make a
better showing in this report than the shal-

low-water species. If the samplings had been

taken from 0-5 metres around the lakes, as
is the custom with the usual collector, the
general picture would be different (Table 1).

As shown by Table 2, the proportion of

sphaeriids in the bottom population di-
minishes from 14.7 per cent in the upper 25
metres to 0 in depths below 300 metres.
But the shallower depth.zones make up a
larger part of the total area of the lake
than do the deeper zones (the 0-25 metre
zone represents more than one-third of the
total water area). Thus by weighting the
averages for different zones according to
their relative areas it is found that the
sphaeriids constitute approximately 7 per
cent of the total number of macroscopic bot-
tom organisms.

These little clams are used as food by
waterfowl, by small fish which in turn be-
come food for larger fish like trout, etc., and
by larger bottom-feeding fish. This is
brought out in the report on Lake Athabaska:

Table 1

OCCURRENCE OF SPHAERIIDAE IN ATHABASKA AND GREAT SLAVE LAKES

Species Athabaska Great Slave
SPLOCMUN «SUNIGLIMV UNG WiamanCh teenies eee kings acess Peers eee teste tee C R
LONE NITICU TL. “CICSSIMIE ata nets tae ae eee ee ee R Cc
MPS CULLEN ad NOTUSVICTISUTT SAY r a erence acta seekaee en ee eee ee eee C R
id AU UICLEUE Stet kiletet aaa, ces eo hte A ae cco, MCU com cco hme 2 R
re PASGICHE OLB Lip SIN OASTVVUINC eure tes oe oe ere etre ees eee eee R
ESO LUNDY COMUENLUS sm ClESSIM nt esse cee terteg tees veers merece | Geis ne rN A
He SOA POMOCOIUNTOs IMB WITT, — 5 c6de¥ssc0n0s-conbtcobob-noouceocnbbodouosneabsanceeceneocdc A BA:
oh LAANOCNS GOP CI sees ease en ae eRe ae O Cc
* lillgeborg?) Clessiny -.......... Lee Ue On ene Lee R C
e ‘: CHUSECRUTO, SSNUSTARST aso sqooe hand oonee Ee RCo oe) R R
a medianum Sterki or hibernicum Westerlund ............ O
es PAUP eT CULMS SUCT: <e ihre ete ee sce aac ee ee R R
sf COMDTESSUTNS SPRUNG I Reeds ene Ree ee ee O R
5c DUNGEMEWN A STOL Kall gS ee Presi Ue tok Re eee ee ts
2 LENUISSTINUT MO LCLRA Sc ccscetse tesedticck ee eecs nhs tae ee eee R
4 Lerndvondi WSterks oe Barc ik ease Oe aNE ce oer ae R
ee HOPM HOH CKIMH HAs MSN HSDEL Th cAtepasn see ecaransacBncaeeepeces Satan endure rbogadéonc soba R
# fallan eSter Kate reset een atte mek iio Gee J ek ghee gy eee R
< aodrtumiy. Haldema tite eect cole bails cneds ee Nee u
# PLWHA (ea W510 ba ppt vie Me AO Aan ORE Pree arab S| R us

A = abundant, C—common, O = occasional, R — rare.

[Vol. 64

;
‘
:
q
.

‘

wre pin teh

se

a

_ January-February, 1950]

THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

29

Table 2

TOTAL MACROSCOPIC BOTTOM ORGANISMS PER SQ. M. AT VARIOUS
DEPTH ZONES IN GREAT SLAVE LAKE.

Data from D. S. Rawson.

Total

Metres population
0-25 2092
25 - 50 1688
50 - 100 1230
100 - 150 718
150 - 200 566
200 - 300 386
300 - 400 300
400 - 500 254
500 - 600 392

Percentage
Sphaeriidae approximate

308 14.7
76 4.5
20 1.6
14 2.0
9 1.6
2, 0.5

0 0

0 0

0 0

“The food of the common whitefish is most-
ly the shrimp Pontoporeia and minute mol-
lusecans. In the deeper water, Pontoporeia
makes up about 85% of the food. In the
shallower half of the lake (less than 65 feet
deep), Pontoporeia contributes about 50%
and the remainder is equally divided be-
tween minute snails and clams.” (p. 77).

The distribution of these clams appears to
be related to depth of water (Fig. 1) and
kind of bottom material rather than to geo-
logical formation. These lakes lie across
two main formations: “Thus the north and
east shores are of rugged Precambrian rocks
while to the south and west are found sedi-
mentary rocks mostly overlain with glacial
drift. It is of interest that Great Bear and
Athabaska, the other two large lakes in the
Mackenzie drainage, have similar shores
since they too lie across the edge of the
Precambrian Shield.” (p. 45). In these two
formations there is great difference in
depth, particularly in Great Slave Lake:
“The west and south shores, lying in the
Mackenzie lowlands, are marked by low
contours and exposed rocky or sandy mar-
gins.... The shallow water and the long
stretches lacking harbours provide hazards
to navigation in this area.” (p. 50): “The
deep water continues some distance into the
north arm but from Yellowknife bay north-
west it is quite shallow.... The depths in
the east arm are quite a different story.
Many places in the Hearne channel are
deeper than 1,000 feet. The greatest depths

yet encountered are in Christie bay north of
Snowdrift, where a maximum of 2,000 feet
was observed.” (p. 51). The water of the
Slave River enters the southern part of the
lake and leaves by the Mackenzie River at
the extremity of the western arm. It should
be noted that. most of the sphaeriids col-
lected in Great Slave Lake were from west
of a line from Taltson River to Gros Cap,
i.e. in the west half of the lake including
the north arm. The water in this part of the
lake is warmer than in the east end because
it is shallow or warmed by the Slave River~
or both. A number of samplings of clams
were secured in the east arm but the num-
ber of specimens per dredging was small ex-
cept in a few cases where they were secured
in shallow water along shore.

In Lake Athabaska most of the specimens
came from the south-center shore and. from
the west half of the lake. Of 247 P. con-
ventus collected in this lake only 92 (37%)
came from the north shore and east half.
Of the 534 P. subtruncatum collected only
43 (8%) came from the vicinity of the north
shore and east half, and of these 26 were
from one dredging at 1 metre. Besides these
there were only two specimens of P. lillje-
borgi, two idahoense and one tenuissimum
(?) found in the east half.

It would appear that the nature of the
bottom rather than geological formation af-
fects the scarcity or abundance of these
little clams in one part or another of a

30 THE CANADIAN

Hoo

350

JOO—

250

Depth Metres

/50

160

59

FO. 400

FIELD-NATURALIST

150

[Vol. 64

70 FO IFO SFO

Average number of Sphaeriids per sq, m.

Fig. 1. Depth distribution of sphaeriids (all species) in Great Slave Lake. Data from D. S. Rawson.

body of water. Temperature also has an
important effect. Along shores which are
not steep the water warms up more readily
and to a greater extent. This is conducive to
abundance in the forms preferring warmer
water, possibly through an increase in vege-
table matter.

Only two of the species of Sphaeriidae
found in these lakes can be described as

cold-water clams — P. conventus Clessin and
S. tenue nitidum Clessin. P. idahoense

Roper may also have this status, but not

enough specimens were collected to justify
this conclusion. *;

That P. conventus has a preference for
cold water is seen by a comparison of it
with P. subtruncatum the other dominant
species. P. subtruncatum, having no aversion

—

|
;
’

January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 31

to warm water, maintains its relative depth
In both lakes, but a marked difference is
seen in conventus. The temperature of Great
Slave Lake has been described thus: “the
surface temperature of the open lake is
rarely higher than 55° F. In June it is about
40°, in July and August from 45 to 55° and in
September back to 40°. Extremes of cold
water are observed in McLeod Bay where on
August 12, 1945, the surface was 39.5° in the
centre and 45° F. near shore. The inflow
from the Slave river has a warming effect
over a broad area near the delta. In the
river mouth and in shallow areas such as
the harbour at Resolution the surface
temperature rises above 62° and allows a
short period of bathing. On July 27, 1945,
the temperature of surface water at Resolu-
tion was 62° F. and decreased gradually away
from shore until at a point 35 miles north
it was only 39°.” (p. 52).

But in Lake Athabaska “By mid-July the
open lake is warmed to 50° or 55° and in
mid-August temperatures of 60° to 66° are
common in all parts of the lake. The maxi-
mum temperature, observed only in shallow
near-shore areas, is about 77° F. The deep
water remains cold throughout the summer
Rei s0R..).,

Note the effect of this difference in
temperature on the depth at which these
two species were found in the two lakes.
In Great Slave Lake 80% of the subtrunca-

tum were dredged from less than 5 metres.

of water; in Athabaska 79%. But of con-
ventus in Great Slave Lake 38% were
dredged from less than 5 metres; in Atha-

baska only 9%, or 21 specimens.

It might be of interest to add that P. con-
ventus was secured in Great Bear Lake by
R. B. Miller; Reindeer Lake, northern Sas-
katchewan, by D. S. Rawson; Lac Epaula,
Pare des Laurentides, Quebec, by V. D.
Vladykov; Lake Nipigon, northern Ontario,
by F. B. Adamstone; and Mazinaw Lake,
southern Ontario, by H. B. Herrington.
Specimens from all these lakes are in the
writer’s cabinet. The only other known
North American locality for this species is
Unimak Island, False Pass, Aleutian Islands,
where it was collected by W. J. Eyerdam.

This latter reference is recorded by Nils

Hj Odhner in his paper “Sphaeriids from the
Aleutian Islands” (Nautilus Vol. 52, No. 3,

Jan., 1939, p. 83).

‘Great Slave Lake,

I see no reason why this species should
not be found in other deep lakes when deep
dredging is done. For five summers I col-
lected around the shores of Mazinaw Lake
(about 70 miles north of Lake Ontario), with-
out finding any indication that P. conventus
lived in its waters. Then, for my last dredg-
ing there in 1947, I went out deeper — up
to 15 metres. Of the six specimens secured
in the haul four were conventus. In 1948 I
dredged still deeper — 18 to 21 metres —
and in a couple of hours I secured about 150
specimens.

The following additional information about
the region of Great Slave Lake is submitted:

From Kakisa Lake, near the outlet of
Great Slave Lake, Dr. W. Kennedy secured
specimens of Sphaerium solidulum Prime,
Pisidium idahoense Roper and what appears
to be immature Musculium partumeium Say.

And, from bog lakes near the shores of
Dr. Oughton collected
S. tenue nitidum Clessin, M. ryckholti Nor-
mand, M. winkleyi Sterki and, besides P.
subtruncatum Malm, two forms of P. abdi-
tum Haldeman — one translucent, P. roperi
Sterki — which may be only a subspecies of
abditum, P. splendidulum Sterki, and what
is either a form of P. medianum Sterki or P.
hibernicum Westerlund. As some hundreds
of the latter were collected they should aid
greatly in settling the relationship, if any,
between these two.

EVIDENCE OF A BREEDING SEASON

In approaching this question we are justi-
fied in taking into consideration only P. con-
ventus, subtruncatum, idahoense, lilljeborgi
and S. tenue nitidum. The other species
have too few specimens to enable us to form
a sound judgment. Also, since the collecting
period in Lake Athabaska did not extend
beyond Aug. 15, we are restricted to such
information at Great Slave Lake yields.

In no case was depth of water correlated
with the age of the animal; all stages of
growth were found at the different depths.
The dredging began in June and ended be-
fore September 15.

Infant subtruncatum were found uniform-
ly from June to the end of August. Of the
16 specimens found Sept. 3, 1945, four were
infants, seven half-grown, and five adults.

32 THE CANADIAN

In the case of conventus most of the speci-
mens were collected before Aug. 15. From
Aug. 16 to 31 there were only nine col-
lections. Of these my chart shows only four
dredgings with any infants. Four had speci-
mens not quite adult, and seven had adults.
Of the two dredgings for Sept. 3 (20 speci-
mens) the record is: infants none, about
half-grown 11, adults 9. This suggests a
summer period of bearing young, but more,
and later dredgings might alter this im-
pression.

When we turn to lilljeborgi and idahoense

there is nothing to indicate a breeding season.
In neither case were specimens taken in

September, and infants were collected in the -

Aug. 16-31 period.

The situation with respect to S. tenue niti-
dum is similar. No specimens were collected
in September. Of the fifty specimens col-
lected at Vellowknife, Aug. 10, 1946, 29 were
infants and 11 half-grown. Of the three
dredgings Aug. 16-31 (3 specimens) one was
an infant.

We may conclude that our information
gives little evidence of a breeding season,

FiELp-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

with the possible exception of P. conventus.
of which there were very few young col-
lected in the latter part of the season.

SUMMARY

The sphaeriid fauna of Great Slave Lake
includes eleven species of Pisidium, two of
Sphaerium, and three of Musculium. Pisi-
dium conventus, the dominant species, oc-
curs in great numbers in shallow water and
in smaller numbers to at least 219 metres.

Lake Athabaska has ten species of Pzisi-
dium (seven of which were found also in
Great Slave Lake), two species of Sphaertum
and two of Musculium.

The distribution of these species within
the lakes appears to be chiefly influenced
by temperature, depth and type of bottom.

Examination of stages of developinent at
the time of collection gives little or no
evidence of a breeding season.

In both Athabaska and Great Slave Lakes
the sphaeriids are an important source of
food for bottom-feeding fish.

‘NESTING OF THE RED CROSSBILL IN PAKENHAM TOWNSHIP,
LANARK COUNTY, ONTARIO *

Epna G. Ross and VERNA M. Ross

Almonte and Ottawa, Ontario

N THE WINTER of 1947-48, the coniferous

trees bore a heavy crop of cones in the
Pakenham, Ontario, region where the follow-
ing observations on red crossbills were made.
The occurrence here of the red crossbills is
believed to be correlated with the unusually
abundant cone crop.

On December 26, 1947, crossbills which
could not be specifically identified but which
were thought to be red crossbills were ob-
served briefly by Verna Ross, T. W. Ross and
Douglas Deugo. Several times during the
week, December 26-31, 1948, Edna Ross saw
apparently the same birds feeding in the
same spruce trees. They were identified as
ved crossbills, Loxia curvirostra. From five

1) Received for publication February 21, 1949.

to ten were present on each occasion, In-
clement weather during the first three weeks
of January precluded further observations in
that period. On January 21, a field trip was
made but no _ crossbills were noted. “On
January 25, only two white-winged crossbills,
Loxia leucoptera, were observed.

On February 15, Verna Ross saw four red
crossbills on Cemetery Hill in Pakenham
village. Two were watched at close range,
a brightly-colored male and a bird of duller
plumage, presumably a female. They ap-
peared to be quite indifferent to the presence
of four red-breasted nuthatches feeding in
the same tree, a white pine. Later the male
sang from the top of the tree. On February
29, crossbills were heard in Pakenham town-

7» — ee Lo ee eS ee

es, = ge

as

3
7

3 January-February, 1950] THe CanapiAN Frietn-NATURALIST

ship by Edna Ross, Mary Stuart, Verna Ross
and T. W. Ross. On the same date, crossbills
were heard also on Cemetery Hill, but the
birds could not be found.

On March 20, a frozen female was picked
up near Cemetery Hill by A. F. Ross. This
bird was sent to the National Museum and
was identified by W. E. Godfrey as the
eastern red crossbill, Loxia curvirostra minor.
The skin is in the National Museum collec-
tion.

On April 4 (temperature 53°) Edna Ross,
T. W. Ross and A. F. Ross took a three-mile
trail from Pakenham village to the woods at
the base of the Pakenham Mountains. This
trail goes across open fields, through wooded
areas and along a creek up the valley
between two ranges of hills. They climbed
“The Notch” trail through a grove of white
birches to the top of the cliff. After lunch,
Edna Ross descended to the base of the hill
and returned on the lower trail; the other
two continued along the crest of the hill.

At a point on the W% of Lot 13, Con-
cession 6, T. W. Ross noted a bird which flew
from some shrubbery near the ground and
alighted in a small evergreen about fifteen
feet high and some 35 feet ahead of him.
He immediately identified it as a male red
crossbill. The bird appeared alarmed and
flew from tree to tree uttering alarm notes.

Both observers followed it cautiously for

about 50 yards towards the edge of the cliff.
Here three pines formed a triangle and the
bird remained in this locality flying about,
frequenting these three trees, and chirping
almost continuously. Finally he flew into a

_ tree in the centre of this group, a white pine

- about 30 feet

a

in height. Listening carefully
the observers imagined that they could hear
a second bird. Meanwhile the male bird

_ remained longer in this particular pine than

in the others, literally giving himself away.

A. F. Ross discovered the nest about 20

_ feet up, 3 feet from the main trunk on a

Se el ee al Be a wl

branch pointing almost due north. The fem-
ale was on the nest. The time from the first
sight of the male bird until the discovery
of the nest at 11.15 a.m. was not more than
10 minutes.

T. W. Ross climbed the tree and when
he reached the branch on which the nest was

33

saddled the female flushed. The nest had
one egg in it. A. F. Ross also climbed the
tree to examine nest and egg. Both birds
flew from the nest site and the observers
left the tree and called Edna Ross who was
then on the trail in the valley below. She
visited the spot twenty minutes later, viewed
the nest from some of the lower branches
and remained behind for ten minutes but,
although she heard the male bird call oc.
casionally from the swale several rods to the
rear of the nest, the pair did not return.
She descended the cliff a third of the way
and sat down to wait. In ten minutes the
two birds flew by, the male singing his
Sharp, high-pitched notes. Both went in the
direction of the nest.

The next day, April 5, the following mem-
bers of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club,
Dr. O. H: Hewitt, Mr. A. E. Bourguignon,
Verna Ross, Mary Stuart and Edna Ross,
visited the nest site with Bill McKenzie and
A. F. Ross. The day was clear, sunny and
very warm (temperature 68 degrees). Maple
trees were tapped and sap was running.
While the observers were walking along the
edge of the cliff at 1 p.m. watching for land-
marks by which to locate the nest, the male
crossbill flew singing into a’*white pine on
the edge of the precipice. All members of
the party viewed him with field glasses for
five minutes. He was evidently a young bird
as his plumage was not highly coloured.
While members of the party were sitting on
a rock about twenty-five feet from the nest
he flew into a pine west of the nest and

~ remained there for more than five minutes

in splendid light. The female was on the
nest, head turned towards the tree trunk.

Dr. Hewitt climbed to the nest and then
to a point above it. The female remained
en the nest and finally flushed reluctantly
when Dr. Hewitt’s hand was six inches from
her. There were two eggs in the nest. After
leaving the nest, the female flew to the top
of a dead pine nearby and remained almost
motionless for five minutes, giving the party
a splendid opportunity to observe her. Both

birds then flew away and the party divided

to search the surrounding trees. Later Edna
Ross heard the male singing in the swale
behind the nest but the birds were not seen
again that day.

34 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

On April 11, Mr. Hoyes Lloyd, Mr. Earl
Godfrey, Mr. A. E. Bourguignon, Verna
Ross, Mary Stuart and T. W. Ross made
another trip to the crossbill nest. The day
was dull, with a raw wind, and when the
cbservers left Pakenham a thin drizzle of
rain was falling which continued during the
entire expedition. The temperature was 45
degrees and there was still ice on the north
side of the rocky hillside where it had not
been exposed to sunlight.

The male bird was not heard and did not
appear, but the female was on the nest as
usual. Mr. Godfrey climbed the tree and
when his hand was six inches from the nest
the bird flushed. She remained in nearby
trees and as soon as Mr. Godfrey moved
away from the nest she returned to it. There
were three eggs in the nest and the female
was off only one minute. No further obser-
vations were possible due to the inclemency
of the weather and the party returned to
Pakenham village.

On April 17, Mr. Bourguignon and Dr.
Hewitt visited the nest. The male bird was
not seen; there were three eggs in the nest.

At three o’clock on the afternoon of April
18, R. M. McKenzie visited the nest. The
day was dull, raw, overcast and the tem-
perature 50 degrees. The woods were fairly
dry; hepaticas, trailing arbutus and bloodroot
were in bloom. The male red crossbill was
not seen but the female was incubating and
was not easily flushed. There were two
young birds and one unchipped egg in the
nest. One bird was completely out and the
cther sitting in the half eggshell. The ob-
server quickly left the nest site to allow the
bird to return to the nest.

[Vol. 64

The evidence thus obtained is that in-
cubation begins with the laying of the first
egg, a condition which would seem not un-
likely in a species which may nest in sub-
freezing weather. One egg was noted in the
nest on April 4, the second on April 5, and
it seems probable that.the third egg was
laid on April 6. The young hatched on
April 18 which indicates an incubation period |
of 14 or 15 days. All observed incubation
was by the female.

When Bill McKenzie visited the nest site
at noon on April 24, there were no fred cross-
bills in the vicinity. The nest was empty
and only a small fragment of shell, which
he collected from the base of the tree, could
be found. Later in the day, Mr. Earl God-
frey collected the nest for the National
‘Museum.

The weather during the period from April
18 to April 23 was unsettled, with cool, rainy
weather, a thunderstorm during the week,
and temperature ranging from the high
twenties to the low fifties. April 24 was
warm, sunny, with the temperature again
at 68 degrees.

Many visits were made to Cemetery Hill
curing the next month=but it was not until

May 22 that red crossbills were again ob-. |

served. A male red crossbill sang for five
minutes from the top of a tall spruce. A
second bird, presumably a female, joined him
in the same tree and the two remained feed-
ing for another five minutes before they
flew away. This was the last observation
made of red crossbills in Pakenham town-
ship, Lanark County, during 1948.

—

January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL STANDING
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, DECEMBER 2, 1949

ASSETS
Balance in Bank, Dec. 2, 1949 .......
PAIS MIRECOLVADIC: «002i ..5...:s0cc-sergeeenceeees
RECEIPTS
Balance in Bank, Dec. 3, 1948 .......
' Fees:—

Ce 1494.69

Advances

ands VATLEATS:...:.....4..2- 195.48

Assoc. Members........ . 45.00
SED TICTU ESR ae Aer eee eee
SUITE SSS 6 1a ae

MMSE SAME BACK ...2..cs...cbseeccesstccccsenes

Miscellaneous

ASSETS
Canadian Govt. Bonds....................
Balance in Bank, Dec. 2, 1949........
RECEIPTS
Balance in Bank, Dec. 3, 1948...
HVOULOOM EIT CEKESE Nn ep hee ceetcc oaene
seme IM tGGLeSt= 55. cee swodescsetacci
ASSETS

Canadian Government Bonds .......
_ Balance in Bank, Dec. 2, 1949 .......

CURRENT ACCOUNT

.... $2631.10
Das 68.10

$2699.20

.-- $2238.11

1735.17

$6066.91

RESERVE FUND

.... $1800.00
ee 71.86

$76.86

PUBLICATION FUND

.... $1300.00
2 12064

$1,556.11

35

LIABILITIES
Audubon Screen Tours (Guarantee) $ 725.00
O/S*Chequeste.$ 3. eee wee 5.00
Balancers, ee eel Le ee Bae 1969.20
$2699.20

EXPENDITURES
Gan? -Bield:Naty sai ee en $1987.60
IE CLI OTR Bese = ss, ee ee oe, eae ee 100.00
Business.) Manager.) 0s. ce ee 15.00
Separates sf Set Res es wie ae oes 403.16
Macoun™ Club?..22234 3.4 2 eee 20.00
Hlustrationsy cs i koe ee ee ee 172.00
Postage and Stationery...................0 168.60
Banke Discount eee 21.98
Exe. and Lectures Comm. .................... 75.00
Membership Comm). ...:.......c..:0c+-ecsse-e0+0 83.43
Lodges Building ......2425..0 eee 300.00
Miscellaneous i082 s...< ses beeen omens 94.04
Balance in Bank............. 2631.10
Less O/S Cheque...... 5.00

Corrected Balance ..... 2626.10 2626.10
$6066.91

LIABILITIES

NIL
EXPENDITURES

Rent DEpOS ite OXste niece estes ee eee _$ 5.00
Balance in Bank, Dec. 2, 1949.............. 71.86
$76.86

LIABILITIES

NIL

36 THE
RECEIPTS
Balance in Bank, Dec. 3, 1948.............. $ 53.56
Bondi nteresty.. ke ate ae eee 51.00
Banikeeinter eStats een 1.55
Life, Memberships...0 0300 3¢..¢-....24..22.-5 150.00
$256.11

Audited and found correct
(Signed) Harrison F. Lewis,
I. L. Conners,
Auditors.

December 2, 1949.

CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

EXPENDITURES

Balance in Bank, Dec. 2, 1949 ........... $256.11

$256.11

C. Frankton,
Treasurer.

ANNUAL MEETING OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’
CLUB, 1949

REPORT OF COUNCIL

Since the last Annual Meeting there were
seven meetings of Council as follows, all
held at St. Patrick’s College: December 17,
1948, with 22 members present; January 26,
1949, with 16 members present; February 28,
with 18 members present; March 25, with 13
members present; May 19, with 17 members
present; October 21, with 16 members pres-
ent; November 22, with 14 members present.
A special meeting was also held on Septem-
ber 27, with 17 members present, for the
purpose of discussing the report of the
Constitution and By-laws Committee.

Appointments were made for 1949 as
follows:

Editor of the Canadian Field-Naturalist—
Dr. H. A. Senn.

Business Manager — W. J. Cody.

Chairman of Publications Committee —
A. E. Porsild,

Chairman of Excursions and Lectures
Committee — E. G. Anderson.

Chairman of Special Lectures Committee
—Dr J. W. Groves.

Chairman of Membership Committee —
Dr. V. E. F. Solman.

Chairman of Reserve Fund Committee —
E. F. G. White.

Chairman of Bird Census Committee —
A. E. Bourguignon.

Chairman of Constitution and By-laws
Committee — Father F. E. Banim.

Chairman of Library Committee — A. E.
Porsild.

Chairman of Macoun Field Club Com-
mittee — W. K. W. Baldwin.

Chairman of Building Committee — A. E.
Bourguignon,

A special feature of the year’s activities
was the construction of a lodge near Beattie
Point on Lake Deschenes, about 15 miles
from Ottawa, to serve as a field head-
quarters. This lodge, formally opened last
Spring, has been used by many members and
their friends, as well as for Club excursions
and outings of the Macoun Field Club. Mr.
A. E. Bourguignon has earned the thanks of
all members for his enthusiastic and able
direction of this project, an account of which
will appear in a future issue of the Canadian
Field-Naturalist. Members and. their friends
are invited to make the fullest possible use
ef the new lodge.

Report of Publications Committee

During the period December 1, 1948, to
December 1, 1949, seven numbers of the
Canadian Field-Naturalist were published.
This included No. 6 of Volume 62, with 36
pages, and Nos. 1-6 of Volume 63, with a total
of 262 pages. Thus 298 pages were published
in 1948-49, as against 213 pages in 1947-48.
Papers, notes and reviews were distributed
as follows: ;

Papers Notes Reviews
Ornithology," e225. 12 25 4
Botany,, ....kceee e e = 11 6 iL

[Vol. 64 ~

i saa Sn a in ape lk a i i rn a are a

Z
:

- January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN
Mammalocy ....2:2.5..0 00600 5 2 2
Invertebrate Zoology ..... 4 —- —
Palaeontology ........0...-.... 2 a
Herpetology ................ 1 a te
Pehthyology 22.08.0006. 1 — 3
Miscellaneous ................-. 6 2 3

Seven maps and 21 other illustrations
were used. |
The business manager reported sales of

- back numbers totalling $225.00, including an

almost complete set of the “Naturalist” to
the University of Oklahoma. He also reported
that a set had been ordered by the University
of Arkansas,

Report of the Excursions and Lectures
Committee

Seven meetings of the Committee were
held during the year, at which plans were
made for the regular Club activities and ap-
proval given to 23 applications for Associate
membership. Three indoor meetings were
held as follows:

March 10 — At a meeting held in the
auditorium of the National Museum of Canada,

Dr. H. A. Senn gave a talk, illustrated with

_ explain the exhibits.

kodachrome slides,’ on his trip to South
America during the fall of 1948 to attend the
Second South American Botanical Congress.

April 21 — The Annual Dinner held at
the Central Experimental Farm was greatly
enjoyed by all attending. The programme
consisted of a display of Natural History sub-
jects prepared by the Macoun Field Club,
members of which were in attendance to
The evening closed
with the showing of a film in colour entitled

“Birds near Home”,

November 3 — A Member’s Night was

held in the auditorium of the Ottawa Normal

School. Informal talks were given by various
members, coloured films were shown by
Messrs. Groves, Conners, Drzewiecki and
Anderson, there was a display of dyed wools
by Miss E. Ross, and snapshots of the Club’s

- activities were exhibited.

Two special meetings were held as

follows:

May 24—The lodge at Lake Deschenes

2 was officially opened in the presence of over
- 65 members. Following a picnic dinner, the

:

om

_ members spent the rest of the day exploring
_ the district.

June 7 — An evening excursion to Rock-
cliffe was held under the leadership of Mr.
_W. I. Illman.

FIELD-NATURALIST

37

There were eight meetings of the Bird
Group, with an average attendance of 26
members. The programmes included discus-
sion. of bird observations, talks and pictures
of trips taken by members, studies of the
various species of birds seen in the district
and of the preparation of dry skins. Four
early morning bird walks were held, under

the leadership of Messrs. Savile, Groves,
Bourguignon and Frith.
- Seven Saturday afternoon excursions

were held as follows:
May 7—Rideau River and Billings Bridge.
May 14—Central Experimental Farm.
May 28—Val Tetreau.
June 4—Britannia.

Sept. 10—Wiener Roast at the Lodge.

Sept. 17—Hosts to Macoun Field Club at

the Lodge.

Sept. 24—Bird Group at the Lodge; Botany

Group at the White Bridge.

A new venture was the inauguration of
the Newsletter, four issues of which have
been distributed, and which have been well
received by members. Plans have been made
to have it continued.

Report of Special Lectures Committee

Three Audubon Screen Tours completed
the series initiated in the Fall of 1948. These
were:

January 8—Midnight Movies in Animal-
and, by Howard Cleaves.

February 9 — Happy Valley, by Tom and
Arlene Hadley.

March 29—Athabaska Sojourn, by O. S.
Pettingill.

Following the encouraging reception of
the 1948-49 series, the Committee drew up
plans for a series in 1949-50, including free
matinee programmes to be held in some of
the Ottawa secondary schools. Two of this
series have already been held, as follows:

October 13—Bits of Land along
Coast, by Telford H. Work.

November 24 — South along the Suwan-
nee, by Allan Cruickshank.

The response to this second Audubon
series, which will include three more lectures,
kas been most encouraging.

the

Report of Membership Committee

As a result of a meeting and many infor-
mal discussions during the Spring of 1949,
the Committee agreed that a drive for local

38

members should be launched, and produced
a pamphlet for use in this campaign. Several
hundreds of these pamphlets were distributed
at the Annual Dinner held in April. A mail-
ing list of over 2,100 names was assembled
through the co-operation of numerous local
organizations and by collecting names and
addresses at the last Audubon lecture held
in March. Over 2,100 pamphlets were sent
out by mail during May.

Since the last annual meeting, 23 associate
members and 28 active members, as well as
3 life members, have joined the Club. A full
set of The Canadian Field-Naturalist was
sold as a result of the 1948 campaign.

The Audubon Screen Tour series and the
new Lodge have undoubtedly aided in at-
tracting interested persons to the Club. The
help of the Press in providing valuable
publicity for both the Audubon series and
the membership campaign must also be
acknowledged. The business manager has sent
out 66 sample copies of the Field-Naturalist
to various institutions.

Report of the Bird Census Committee

The Christmas Bird Census was taken on
January 2, 1949. A total of 29 species and
2,012 individuals was reported; 21 members
participated. The Bird Census Report for all
of Canada was published in the March-April
issue of The Canadian Field Naturalist,

Report of the Constitution and By-laws
Committee

A proposed amendment of the constitution
of the Ottawa Field-Naturalist’s Club was
published in’ the November-December 1949
issue of the Canadian Field-Naturalist, ac-
companied by notice of a motion to be pres-
ented at the present annual meeting.

Report of the Library Commitiee

A year ago, members of the Committee,
with Mr. Jennings, Chief Librarian of the
Ottawa Carnegie Library, made an examin-
ation of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ library

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

stored there. A preliminary list of some of
the more important items was made. Of chief
value are some broken runs of various Nat-
ural History periodicals, etc. After consul-
tation with members of the Committee, the
chairman undertook to prepare a complete
list that, in due course, will be circulated to
various Ottawa libraries.

Report of the Macoun Field Club Committee

This Natural History club for boys and
girls of school age continued into its second
year under the joint sponsorship of the
National Museum of Canada and the Ottawa
Field-Naturalists’ Club.

Thirty meetings were held in 1949. These
included ten excursions to points of interest
in the Ottawa district. Indoor meetings were
held in the special project room at the

National Museum, and were timed to include.

the eight programmes in the 1949 Museum
Saturday Morning Series.

On February 26th the Macoun Field Club
assisted Dr. Douglas Leechman in _ the
Museum program “Oh! What a. Face’. On
April 20th, the Club showed an exhibition
of their work at the Annual Dinner held at
the Central Experimental Farm. This exhibit
was shown later at a special meeting at the
Museum, on April 30th, for sponsors, parents
and friends. At this meeting, Miss Mary
Macoun Kennedy presented badges to the
boys and girls who had qualified. The Club
in turn presented souvenir badges to the
Curator of the Museum and the President of
the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club. On June
4th, the Club made a bus excursion to Kings-
mere, where Mr. and Mrs. Selwyn H. Wilson
gave a picnic lunch at their cottage. On
October ist, the Club showed an exhibit at
the Youth Week Hobby Show held in Lans-
downe Park. The Club has supplied ushers
from among its members for the second
Audubon Screen Tour series.

(Signed)
Pauline Snure, H. J. Scoggan,
President. Secretary.

-

January-February, 1950] THe CaNnaprtAN Frerp-NATUuRALIST . 39

SUPPOSED NATURAL HYBRID BETWEEN
AGROPYRON AND HYSTRIX ??
W. G. Dore

Division of Botany and Plant Pathology, Science Service,
Department of Agriculture, Ottawa

TALL TUFTED GRASS with the general
appearance of Agropyron trachycaulum
was collected in open deciduous woods on
the shallow precambrian bed-rock of the
south-facing slope of the escarpment about
15 miles northwest of Ottawa in Eardley
Parish, Gatineau County, Quebec, on July 8,
1948. The specimen bears the collection
number: 8617 W. G. Dore and B. Boivin. In
the following discussion it will be referred
to as “the Hybrid’. Also collected at the
same site were specimens identified as
Agropyron trachycaulum (Link) Malte var.
glaucum (Pease & Moore) Malte (No. 8619
Dore & Boivin and Hystrix patula (L.)
Moench var. Bigeloviana (Fernald) Deam
(No. 8623 Dore & Boivin). These latter two
specimens, the suspected parents, will be
referred to respectively as “the Agropyron”
and “the Hystrix’. Spikes of these three
plants are shown in Plate 1.

In the Hybrid the spikelets occur singly
at the nodes of the rachis, except in one
spike (of the six available) with two spike-
lets at the second to lowest node. In the
Agropyron the spikelets are single and in the
Hystrix paired at the rachis nodes. On a
dead stem still attached to the crown of the
Hybrid, however, every node of the shattered
spike, except the lowermost, bears two pairs
of glumes, indicating paired spikelets on the
same plant in the year previous. The rachis
internodes in the Hybrid are intermediate
in thickness between the thin ones of
Hystrix and the thick ones of Agropyron.
The spikelets show no tendency to diverge
from the rachis as in Hystrix.

The glumes in the Hybrid show greater
variability in size, shape and arrangement
than ordinarily expected within a single
spike. An average glume is slender, 10 mm.
long by 0.7 mm. broad, indurated, thick at the
margins, 3- or 4nerved and tapers gradually
into a long awn-point. In the Agropyron the
glumes are broader, 8 to 9 mm. long, about
15 mm. broad, 5- to ‘7-nerved, scarious
1) Received for publication April 14, 1949.

2) Contribution No. 984 from the Division of Botany and

Plant Pathology, Science Service, Dominion Depart-
ment of Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario.

3

margined and abruptly tapered into short
awns less than 1 mm. long. In the Hystrix
the glumes are absent or abortive and pre-
sent as minute points less than 0.5 mm.
long. Certain irregularities in the glumes
of the Hybrid may be listed as follows:
glumes of the terminal spikelet only, awn-
like, 2 to 4 mm. long and 0.2 mm. broad; an
awn-like tooth, 0.5 to 1.0 mm. long, projects
from the edge of the glume at the base of
the awn in about 50 per cent of glumes; a
“slume-lemma” appears in a few of the
spikelets, attached to the rachis (not to the
rachilla) between the glumes and composed
of two longitudinal segments, one nerveless
and strigose similar to a lemma and the
other nerved and glabrous similar to a true
glume. This “glume-lemma” generally sub-
tends a floret.

Lemmas of the Hybrid are sparsely stri-
gose, intermediate between the densely stri-
gose lemmas of the Hystrix and the glabrous
or scabrous lemmas of the Agropyron. The
callus is prominent, but not as prominent
as in the Hystrix. The awn is much shorter
than in the Hystrix but slightly longer than
in the Agropyron.

In the Hybrid the anthers are cream co-
loured, wrinkled, 2.3 to 2.55 mm. long and
contain abortive pollen grains. In the Agro-
pyron, which is just past flowering and the
caryopsis starting to grow, the spent anthers
are 1.5 to 1.7 mm. long, their few adhering
pollen grains all round and filled with starch.
In the Hystrix, in a stage just before an-
thesis, the anthers are yellow, smooth, 3.7
to 3.9 mm. long and contain pollen grains
which are at least 95% good.

It is impossible to classify this supposed
hybrid (No. 8617 Dore & Boivin) with any
grass yet described in Eastern Canada. Since
it is pollen-sterile, exhibits variability in the
number of spikelets per node in subsequent
seasons, exhibits considerable variability in
the size and outline of the glumes within the
spike, possesses “glume-lemma”’ structures,
and has various features intermediate be-
tween two putative parents growing in close

40 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

proximity, it is highly probable that it is of
intergeneric hybrid origin. Without indica-
ting which is the female parent, the hybrid
may be designated: Agropyron trachycaulum
var. glaucum x Hystrix patula var. Bigelo-
viand.

It is not known whether additional plants
of this hybrid or the two parents still persist
at the original locality, but, if so, cytological
examination should add pertinent informa-

THE PRODUCTIVITY AND SEX SURVIVAL OF ELK
BANFF NATIONAL PARK, ALBERTA *

Husert U. GREEN
Banff National Park, Alta.

INTRODUCTION

pe to the overutilization by elk of the
Bow River range of the Banff National
Park, Alberta, it was decided by the National
Park Service in 1944 to remove by non-
selective slaughter a predetermined number
each year until range-carrying capacity was
in balance with population.

During the winters of 1944-45, 1945-46,
1946-47 and 1947-48, a total of 1,130 elk were
destroyed by shooting on the open range
during the months of November, December
and January and the salvaged carcasses, num-
bering 1,093, conveyed to park headquarters
at Banff for dressing, storage, and disposal
to the Department of Indian Affairs.

As the opportunity for performing autop-
sies on large samples of elk from year to year
was unusual, and the quantitative data that
could be derived from post-mortem examin-
ation should be of great interest, the author,
a member of the National Park Service, was
detailed for this work. Particular emphasis
was placed on the desirability of building up
comparative productivity and primary sex
ratio records in order to establish the survival
trend between conception and the age of
about 6 months and between the ages of
about 6 months and rising 2 years, and the
sex ratio of both age groups. It was believed
that as the annual samples were not selected
they would be representative of the herd
during the winter months.

1) Received for publication March 7, 1949.

paratively light. Winter snowfall is variable. 4
It is heaviest at Louise with from 9 to 15 ~~

°

-[Vol. 64

tion. At the same site another specimen of
Apropyron trachycaulum var. glaucum (No.
8618 and one of Hystrix patula (L.) Moench
(No. 8610) were also collected. In the latter
the lemmas are glabrous and it is, therefore,
thought not to figure in the parentage of
the hybrid. All specimens referred to are
preserved in the herbarium of the Division
of Botany and Plant Pathology, Department
of Agriculture, Ottawa.

HABITAT

The winter elk range of the Bow River
within the Banff National Park, utilized spar-
ingly by moose, bighorn sheep, and mule deer
during the summer months, covers the valley
of the river between East Gate and Louise, a
distance of approximately 48 miles. About
two-thirds of the valley is mixed forest of
lodgepole pine (Pinus contorta), white spru-
ce (Picea glauca), Engelmann spruce (Picea
Engelmanni), Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga taxi-
folia), and aspen poplar (Populus tremuloi-
des), with lodgepole pine the overall dominant
type. The remainder is open and semi-open
meadowland, with areas of grassy ridges and
alpine meadows to near timberline. The
valley averages about one mile in width and
is well watered by a number of creeks
draining the surrounding mountain slopes
and tributary valleys on either side. The
average elevation of the _ valley floor is
4,706 feet above mean sea level, and the sur-
rounding mountains rise to an elevation of
between 7,000 and 9,000 feet. Situated in a
semi-arid zone, summer precipitation is com-

feet par annum, and lightest at East Gate
with an average of 3 feet or less, a cir-
cumstance that causes higher concentrations
of elk at the middle and east end of the
range when deep snow conditions prevail to
the west. The Canadian Pacific Railway
traverses the valley from East Gate to Louise.
The Banff-Louise-Jasper highway closely
parallels the railway to Louise.

Plate 1. Spikes of supposed wild hybrid and parents. (1) Agropyron trachycaulum var.
glaucum, specimen No. 8619. (2) The supposed hybrid, specimen No. 8617: A spike of current
season, B. spike of previous season attached to same plant. (3) Histrix patula var. Bigeloviana,
specimen No. 8623. Natural size

mises

TARY

cue
fino
ne

a
Runa

Aree tay

%

tony Ae
ae, oe

ae

January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN

The number of elk wintering from year to
year on the range described is estimated from
the interpretation of census data to be at
least between 750 and 1,000 head.

MORTALITY FACTORS

A family group of wolves, estimated to
be between 9 and 12 in number, hunted the
Bow River range during the winters of 1946-
47 and 1947-48. Prior to the winter of 1946-
47, wolf tracks were occasionally seen, and
individual wolves were observed from time
to time after the arrival of elk from the
summer range. Wolves were also observed
at all times of the year in and about other
widely-separated ranges in the park which
were frequented by elk. The predator-prey
‘relationship of wolves occurring on the Bow
River range is at present incompletely
known. However, in the absence of buffer
prey during the winter months, the wolf
pressure on elk at this time is believed to be
relatively heavy, judging from the number of
kills discovered.

Some elk kills have been observed during
the winter months which indicated that a
cougar was involved. Observation records
show that a few cougars frequent the Bow
River range from time to time at all seasons
of the year.

The range also supports what is considered
a normal population of black bears and coyo-
tes, both of which species are known to prey
to some extent upon elk calves during the
early days of infancy.

FIELD-NATURALIST 41

Two mechanical factors are present: des-
truction by shooting, previously discussed,
and the mortality incurred by being struck
by locomotives on the railroad track trav-
ersing the range. In the Spring of 1947, a
survey of the track between East Gate and
Louise revealed the carcasses of 45 elk of all
age and sex groups that had been killed by
passing trains during the previous winter.

As a heavy calf loss between conception
and the age of about 6 months was evident
early in the study, infection by Bacillus
abortus was suspected as a possible lethal
factor. During the slaughter of 1946-47, 187
samples of elk blood from all age and sex
groups were collected in the field and the
Sera tested by the Animal Disease Research
Institute, Hull, Quebec. The results were
negative.

METHODS EMPLOYED

All carcasses brought in from the field
were tallied according to age and sex, and
recorded on individual record sheets on daily
arrival at the dressing and storage sheds,
Banff. The sample total of all age and sex
groups was computed at the end of each
slaughter season (Table 1). '

Pregnant and non-pregnant females were
segregated as indicated in Table 2.

Fetuses were removed from ll
uteri and the sex determined.

gravid
When sex

could not be determined due to incomplete

differentiation of the primitive external sex
apparatus, it was recorded as undetermined
(Table 3).

TABLE 1 — NUMBER AND COMPOSITION OF ELK AUTOPSIED

_ Season No. Over 2 yrs Rising 2 yrs Calves
ai 2 ry 2 3 2
EA yy Me a kacsw a 200 — AG, — — —_- —
EPA Foe EES oo alocatcs 352 56 198 24 19 30 25
MOA GA fer ache ere OS) ee: 297 50 152 19 17 36 23
LID ee Se ones oe eee eS eee 244. 13 165 15 11 21 18
TABLE 2 — PRODUCTIVITY
Season Females Pregnant Non-pregnant
autopsied
Te 2 aA) Bes oe oe ea ee eee 117 109 3
ay AE eRe Petes 0 has foe eee dpe NieeneNs 198 149 49
PAs A et Pe te oe sn, recat oonsectree a 152 113 39
Nl eok otic eres SL SA, Zo esos tden dace => 165 125 40

42 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

TABLE 3 — PRIMARY SEX RATIO

Season Number fetuses Sex Ratio
examined ard OROR eenWinicle Cnn one
AAR A yeh yg Ae ity, cea at aaatoees 110* 58 48 4 121:100
HOA D-A Gara nOe Ee Rete he mec bint 149 66 67 16 ~ 97:100
OA GA apne ile ed Walon ees NS, 113 58 52 3 112:100
TES YAyerle kta i Ce a i 4 125 61 52 12) 117:100
* Number includes one twinning.
TABLE 4 — COMPARATIVE SURVIVAL
Season Pregnant Ratio 6 months Ratio R. 2 yrs Ratio
Gag © SIS 6 6329
1 ea ee 109 121:100 55 120:100 36 111:100
OAS -4G en oe 149 97:100 59 156:100 27 145:100
OA GA fie oF Nats.ctcitascses 113 112:100 39 145:100 — —
TOG 0 Ser ae ee oe ee 125 117:100 — on = nee are)

Using the data derived from Tables 1 and
2 as the basis of comparison beginning with
the season 1944-45, the number of calves
progressively tallied each season in relation
to the number of pregnancies occurring
would indicate the annual loss trend between
conception and the age of about 6 months.
Applying the primary sex ratio would
similarly indicate the annual sex survival to
this age. The number of yearlings (rising 2
years olds) tallied in the samples following
would progressively indicate the survival
trend from the age of about 6 months to the
age of one year, together with the sex ratio
(Table 4).

CONCLUSIONS

The primary sex ratio, the ratio at the
age of about 6 months, and the ratio at the
age of rising 2 years follow the same pat-

tern, there being a preponderance of males
in every case with the exception of the
fetuses examined in 1945-46.

High productivity is indicated, 78 per
cent pregnancies occurring in 632 females of
breeding age examined.

The mortality between conception and the
age of about 6 months is unexplained. In the
ebsence of infection by Bacillus abortus it is
probably largely post-natal, — death at
parturition, or due to inclement weather at
the time of the birth, or to predation.

The mortality indicated between the ages
of apout 6 months and one year may be
attributed to the hazards encountered during
the first winter of life, which are known to
exact a heavy toll in the low age group of
other park game mammals. - 4

SO a

:

Fae cr ebiuaty, 1950] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

43

FIVE NEW COMPOSITAE FROM YUKON — ALASKA*

A. E. PorsILp
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa

Aster elegantulus n.sp.
Perennis rhizomate brevi.—Caules foliosi,
30-40 cm solitarii vel aggregati, graciles, sim-

-plices, ubique pubescentes. — Folia caulina

15-20 integra revoluta linearia, 2.5-3.0 cm
long., 1.5-2.0 mm lat., sessilia nec tamen am-
plexicaulia neque auriculata, superna unifor-
mitas appresso-pubescentia, inferna glabra.—
Rami 3-6 cm graciliores, caput apicale latius
ferentes et lateralia 1-3 in ramis reductis. —
Capita parva 10-15 mm lat., 10 mm alt.
Phyllaria biseriata aequilonga, glabra sive in
margine subscabra, lanceolata acuta, externa
viridia, summa interna viridia basi alba uni-
nervia, 6 mm long., 1 mm lat. — Ligulae ca.
16 in capite, 8 mm longae, 1.0-1.5 mm latae
albae vel sublilacinae, tenue _ trinerviae,
spathulatae, summae obtusae, dentibus 3
minutis plus minus crispis. — Flores disci
ca. 20 in capite, 5 mm longi, lilacini; pappus
minute barbellatus albus, 3 mm longus.
Achaenia 1 mm longa setigera.

Whitehorse, in open aspen woods on clay
banks east of Lewes River, with flowering
and fruiting heads on July 28-29, No. 10703 °
(type); Sheep Creek, Alaska-Yukon Bound-
ary, July 21, 1936, E. & J. Lohbrunner.
Thus far known only from the above men-
tioned stations.

Aster elegantulus, with its slender, nar-
row-leaved stems and few-flowered, graceful
and delicate inflorescence superficially resem-
bles A. junciformis Rydb. but differs from
that species, as well as from the Eastern A.
junceus, by its densely caespitose growth
form, by its evenly pubescent stem, and by
its phyllaries which are of equal length and
arranged in two series. In A. junciformis and
A. junceus, the rhizome is very slender and

- ereeping, the stems are conspicuously striped

with appressed hairs and the phyllaries are
of unequal length arranged in three series’.

- 1) Received for publication December 2, 1949.

2) Throughout the text of this paper serial numbers

not preceded by the collector’s name refer to specimens

collected by A. E. Porsild and A. J. Breitung, in 1944,

in the course of a botanical survey of the country

adjacent to the Canol Road and pipeline of south-
eastern Yukon.

8) Professor M. L. Fernald, who kindly examined our
plant, believes it “a clear new species, nearest re-
lated to A. junciformis Rydb. but with much smaller
and few-flowered heads, very narrow and _ short
leaves and more racemose-paniculate habit’’ (Fer-
nald, in litt.)

Senecio sheldonensis n.sp.

Planta perennis gracilis et glaberrima e
rhizomate brevi pluricipito, sed mox emar-
cido, radicibus fibrosis multis sustentata. —
Rosulae steriles foliorum desunt. — Caules
foliiferi et floriferi simplices erecti, 30-40
em alti—Folia ad 10 late-lanceolata, repan-
do-denticulata, apicibus dentium subincrassa-
tis, glabra satis firma venis subobscuris, in-
feriora conspicue petiolata, 6-10 cm longa (pe-
tiolis inclusis), superiora sessilia plus minus
amplexicaulia, valde reducta—Inflorescentia

_cymosa Saepissime ex tribus (? 4) calathiis

longe-pedunculatis. — Calathia turbinata, 12-
17 mm alta, ca. 8 mm lata—lInvolucrum ca.
10 mm altum glabrum, phyllariis ca. 12 linea-
ribus firmis, marginibus latis hyalinis apici-
bus attenuatis, conspicue obscuris pubescen-
tibusque. — Radii lutei, ligulis 10 mm longis
1 mm latis obtusis. — Disciflosculi lutei pap-
pum album superantes. Achaenia glabra.

South shoulder of Mt. Sheldon, in open
timberline forestin saddle between Mt. Shel-
don and Mt. Riddell, elev. 4500’, August 10,
1944, No. 11689 (type); northeast spur of Mt.
Sheldon, in subalpine meadows near Mile
226, No. 11492. Also from Mayo District, Mc-
Arthur Mts., near the hot springs, elev. 4200’,
Bostock, No. 196, and mountain north of
McQuesten R., alpine meadow, 4700’ elev.,
Christie, No. 126; McQuesten Area, head of
Sunshine Creek, 4000’ elev., Campbell, No.
472. Also northern British Columbia: Ben-
nett, Malte, No. 56; Haines Rd., Mile 85,
Clarke, No. 438.

Senecio sheldonensis is perhaps most
closely related to the Eurasian S. nemorensis
L., particularly to the few-headed var. macer
(DC.) Printz., Veg. Sib.—Mong. Frontier. 428,
tab. 14, (1921). (S. octoglossus var. macer DC.
in Prod. 6:354 (1837) ) from Altai Mts. from
which it is, however, amply distinct by its
fewer and upwards much reduced, acute
rather than long-acuminate stem leaves and
by its broader and longer, non-ciliate phy]l-
laries, shorter ligules, etc.

From the somewhat polymorphous S.
triangularis Hook. and its var. trichophyllus
Hardin & St. John in Mazama 11:95 (1929),
which is S. saliens Rydb. in Torr. Bot. Cl.

44 THE CANADIAN

24:298 (1897) and also S. prionophyllus
Greene in Ott. Nat. 15:250 (1902), as well
as from S. triangularis var. angustifolius Jones
in Univ. Wash. Publ. in Biol. 5:257 (1936),
S. sheldonensis differs by its more slender
growth, weaker rhizomes, few-leaved stems
and by its always lanceolate, never trian-
gular-hastate, and barely dentate leaves and
by its dark-tipped phyllaries.

On Mt. Sheldon S. sheldonensis grew in
subalpine meadows associated with Delphin-
ium glaucum, Thalictrum sparsiflorum, Herac-
leum lanatum, Mertensia paniculata, ete., in
rather dry, turfy places quite unlike those
preferred by S. triangularis.

No. 11689 had almost mature fruits on
Aug. 10, whereas, on a somewhat later and
more shaded habitat, No. 11492 was in full
bloom on Aug. 8.

Senecio yukonensis n.sp.
S. sp. Porsild in Nat. Mus. Can. Bull. 101:28
(1945).

Perennis caudice ascendente rosulas steri-
les nonnullas gerente. — Folia radicalia nu-
merosa carnosula, 4-6 em longa, eorum partes
dimidiae petioliformes basi gradatim perdila-
tatis tenuissimis subcaerulescentibus, laminae
lineari-oblongae vel oblanceolatae, 0.8 -1.0
cm latae, integrae vel obscure repando-denti-
culatae, juventute subtus floccoso - lanatae,
serius glabratae. — Caules floriferi singuli
aut rarius bini vel terni ex eodem caudicis
ramo, sat robusti, 10-20-(30) cm alti, erecti
aliquantum flexuosi, viridi- purpurascentes
costati, juventute tenuiter arachnoideo-flocco-
si, serius glabrati, foliis sessilibus 4-7 lineari-
bus, superioribus reductis. — Calathia rarius
singula, saepe terna vel quaterna cymosa, in
anthesi plus minus congesta, lateralia saepe
reflexa vel etiam nutantia, maturitate pedun-
culis 2-6 cm longis lano lutescente dense in-
dutis. — Hypanthium pilis lutescentibus mo-
niliformibus dense lanatum, maturitate gla-
brescens. — Phyllaria linearia longe attenua-
ta, obscure viridia vel nigrescentia, lutescenti-
lanata, maturitate glabrata. Radii ligulis
janceolatis ca. 1 cm longis pallide luteis 3-ad
5-veniis; corollae flosculorum disci luteo-fus-
cae pappum sordide-album vel pallide rufes-
centem valde superantes. — Achaenia 3 mm
longa valde costata glabra.

Pass between Teslin and Nisutlin Rivers,

mossy alpine Summit of mountain east of
Mile 14, Nos. 11017 and 11055; same place,

FIELD-NATURALIST

M. P. & R. T. Porsild, No. 702; alpine slopes
east of Rose River, Mile 77, No. 10963; mossy
north summit of granite moutain east of
upper Rose River, Mile 85-90, elev. 6000’,
No. 10187 (type); alpine slopes west of upper
Rose River opposite Mile 95, elev. 6000’, No.
10226; same place, in dry, alpine heath, No.
10580; north shoulder of Mt. Sheldon, in al-
pine mossy heath, elev. 6000’, No. 11096;
south shoulder of Mt. Sheldon, alpine heath
en rocky ledges, elev. 6000’, No. 11638; north-
west end of Itsi Range, alpine slopes south
of Mile 252, No. 11393; in mossy places on
gravelly summit of Shale mountain west of
upper Macmillan River, Mile 268, elev. 6000’,
No. 11376; Macmillan Pass, Yukon-Mackenzie
Divide in alpine tundra near Mile 284, No.
11275. Also mountains north of McQuesten
R. on dry grassy summit, 5700’ elev. Christie,
No. 101; McQuesten Area, Little Klondike R.,
5800’, Campbell, No. 696; on east slope of
Mackenzie Range, N. W.T., high, alpine ridge
west of head of Bolstead Creek, Mile 111 E.,
V.C. Wynne-Edwards, No. 8402. Also from
a single collection from Alaska: Eagle Sum-
mit, Lepage, 25363 (Can.)

Senecio yukonensis is a truly alpine spe-
cies, which apparently is endemic to high
mountains of central Yukon and Alaska
where is not uncommon in mossy heath, far
above timberline. Flowering specimens were
first noted early in July and fruiting heads a
month later. On Aug. 31, in large wintering
buds concealed amongst the withered leaves,
next year’s inflorescences were in far ad-
vanced state of development.

Senecio yukonensis probably belongs in
the section Integerrimi (Rydb., Re. Mt. FI.)
in which are placed S. integerrimus Nutt., S.
Hookeri T. & G., S. exalatus Nutt., and others;
but it is probably not closely related to any
of these, or to any other N. American mem-
ber of the genus.

Taraxacum pellianum n.sp.

Planta minor e sectione Ceratophora
Dahlst. Radix primarius verticalis crassus
capite pluricipita, scapis florigeris 2-3 et ro-
sulis sterilibus paucis coronatus. — Folia
glabra, firmula, nervo medio purpurascente,
laete-viridia in petiolum angustata, priora
2.5-3 cm longa subintegra lanceolata, pos-
teriora 6-8 cm longa, 8-10 mm lata, margini-
bus plus minus dentatis, runcinatis aut etiam
hamatis, deinde superiore tertia parte lami-

ivel 64

January-February, 1950] Tue CanapiAN FIELD-NATURALIST . 45

nae plus minus integra et sensim acutata, —
Scapi 8-10 cm alti erecti, initio purpurascen-
tes, deinde stramineo-virides glaberrimi, api-
cibus araneosis exceptis. — Involucrum ca.
15 mm altum viridi-olivaceum, phyllariis
apice distinctissime cornutis. — Calathia flo-
rescentia parce expansa, ca. 25 mm lata, flo-
ribus pallide aureis splendentibus, antheris
luteis obscurioribus, polline praeditis, —
Achaenia parum matura stramineo-brunnea
apicibus grosse muricatis, 4.24 mm. longa,
pyramides 0.75 mm, rostra 4.50 mm longa.

Rose-Lapie Pass, rocky ledges on moun-
tain west of Mile 116, Nos. 10101 and 10155;
lower Lapie River, dry shaly slopes of moun-
tain west of Mile 132, elev. 5000’, flowering
specimens on June 20, No. 9760 (type); same
place, rocky ledges in a ravine, No. 9498;
rocky summit west of Mile 132 elev. 5000’,
No. 9956. Also McQuesten Area: Pelly R.
- fiats near Pelly farm, Campbell, No. 74.

Taraxacum pellianum undoubtedly belongs
in the section Ceratophora Dahlst, and per-
haps is closely related to T. hyperboreum
Dahlst. the type of which came from King
William Island, N.W.T. Our plant grows in
small tufts: bearing numerous erect rosette
leaves and usually but one scape; the tap-root
is stout for a plant of its size and its crown
is densely covered by the remains of last
year’s leaves. The leaves of the early rosette
stage are mostly entire and narrow.

. Our plant appears to be restricted to
sunny, calcareous Shale slopes of the Pelly
Range where it flowered from June 15.

Hieracium gracile Hook. var. yukonense n.var.

Differt radice magis producta et ferente
rosettas densas foliorum firmiorum, caulibus
floriferis 30-45 cm alt., 2-3 mm diam., firmis,
gaudentibus 10-15-(30) capitum subumbella-
torum latorum in pendunculis longis gracili-
bus atrovillosis,

South shoulder of Mt. Sheldon, in old
burns on timbered lower slopes in saddle
between Mt. Sheldon and Mt. Riddell, elev.
4500’, No. 11693 (type); Same place, grassy
slopes above timberline, No. 11646; northeast
spur of Mt. Sheldon, in subalpine meadows
near Mile 226, No. 11499; upper Rose River,
river flat meadows near Mile 95, No. 10427.

The var. yukonense, by its stout and
tall stems, many-headed inflorescence and
large, leafy rosettes, differs strikingly from
the low, few-headed H. gracile. From H. triste
it differs by theepresence on the peduncles
of stalked glands and by the basal leaves
which are glabrous, oblanceolate, sharply
ecuminate and almost cuspidate rather than
cbovate-obtuse.

On Mt. Sheldon var. yukonense fruited
abundantly the first week of August. The
achenes, as in H. gracile, are dark, wine-red
drying almost black.

‘NORTH-WEST PASSAGE’ PLANTS IN THE SCOTT POLAR
RESEARCH INSTITUTE?

: NICHOLAS POLUNIN
Macdonald Professor of Botany, McGill University, Montreal

LTHOUGH VEGETATION tends to be

less prolific in the Arctic than in most
other regions of the world, it is nevertheless
virtually omnipresent in one form or another.
Not only does it temper the summer land-
scape and exist in various forms abundantly
in the sea, but it also shows characteristic
development in fresh water and, in some
circumstances, on snow or even ice. More-

over it is upon the photosynthetic activity.

of green plants, which alone among living
organisms can regularly build up simple

1) Received for publication December 16, 1948.

inorganic substances to complex food mat-

-erials, that all other forms of life are ultim-

ately dependent for their nutriment and very
existence. Consequently the elucidation of
botanical problems looms large in many
arctic research programmes today, and al-
ready more than a century and a quarter
ago was occupying considerable attention.
Outstanding among earlier investigators were
Sir W. E. Parry and his officers who collected
plants industriously during his three ‘North-
west Passage’ expeditions (1819-20, 1821-23,
1824-25). The approximate routes of these

eS

46 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

voyages, together with the earlier one of Sir
John Ross on which Parry also served, are
shown on the accompanying sketch-map
(Fig. 1). Many of the resultant collections,
which are now scattered in various institu-
tions, have recently been studied (1, 2, 3, 4,
Gs).

The main subject of this present note is
the attractive series of such collections which
belong to the Scott Polar Research Institute,
Cambridge, and which I have been enabled
to study through the kindness particularly of
Professor Frank Debenham, Dr. B. B. Roberts,
and the Rt. Rev. W.L.S. Fleming. Largely be-
cause they do not appear to have been
considered by Hooker (8, 9) when preparing
his botanical appendices to Parry’s accounts
of his voyages (10, 11), these collections add
not a little to our knowledge of the botany
of the regions whence they came; moreover
they are of considerable historical interest
and, being well preserved, merit some des-
cription. This will now be undertaken more
cr less briefly for each of the six ‘sets’
(numbered I-VI below) ‘4nto which the
specimens seem naturally to fall.

I

The first set to be described appears to
be one of the two most significant belonging
to the Institute and was evidently collected
during Parry’s ‘second’ expedition (10), most
of the specimens coming from Melville Penin-
sula or its adjacent islands. In some respects
this set corresponds closely to a larger one
recently presented to the University Herbaria,
Oxford (6). Thus similar (but not identical)
gilt-edged paper is generally used for moun-
ting, the sheetlets being most often cut down
to about 18.5 x 11 cm., while the labels are
frequently identical in their content — al-
though not as regards the hand that wrote
them, for most at least in this Cambridge set
appear to have been written by Parry him-
self. Such ‘individual’ labelling is usually to
be relied upon as regards place and date,
and in this set the attempted specific deter-
minations — which are also in the same hand
and were probably Parry’s own—are usually
in accordance with modern conceptions.

The set consists of 28 separate sheetlets
of specimens that are well mounted and
usually in good preservation, representing 3
species of Algae, 2 species of lichens, 6
species of mosses, 2 liverworts, and 21 species
of vascular plants. Most of these are now

[Vol. 64

well known from the localities whence these
specimens came (1, 14), the majority having
been already reported by Hooker (8); the
only really notable exception among the
vascular plants is Poa abbreviata R. Br. Of
which there is a specimen labelled “Duke
of York Bay, Southampton Island, August
18th, 1821” (place and date correspond per-
fectly with Parry’s narrative (10) ). This
characteristic high-arctic species was re-
ported from Igloolik by Hooker (8) and is
now known from elsewhere in the vicinity
of Melville Peninsula (1); but it was not
previously recorded (at least in the eastern
or central sectors of Canada (12) ) from any-
where so far south as Southampton Island,
to the known flora of which it may now be
added, making a total of 169 species and 23
subsidiary entities so far recorded from that
considerable land-mass (13). Another signif-
icant specimen is that of Cerasteum alpinum
L., s.l., on the Sheetlet of which is written
“The Island of Igloolik, July 1822”. As Hoo-
ker expressly reports August as the month
cf collection of this species at igloolik, this
specimen would seem to give a further indic-
ation that he did not consider the present
set when preparing his ‘Botanical Appendix’
(8). There is also a specimen of the lichen
Alectoria ochroleuca (Ehrh.) Nyl. from Five
Hawser Bay, Melville Peninsula, which ap-
pears to constitute a new locality; however,
the fact that this almost ubiquitous arctic
species is well known from the vicinity makes
this specimen significant chiefly as yet
another indication that Hooker did not see
the set to which it belongs.

It is particularly among the mosses that
the few cryptogams in the present Set are
significant, for they include Ditrichum flexi-
caule (Schwaegr.) Hampe from the new
locality of Neerlo Nakto Island, and Hypnum
condensatum Schimp. (also from Neerlo
Nakto) which Mr. James Kucyniak affirms
is an addition to the known flora of North
America.

It would appear most likely that Parry
collected as well as labelled most at least of
this set; and indeed on the back of one of
the moss sheetlets is written “This little col-
lection of Arctic Mosses and Lichens, was
given to my dearest Mother by her Cousin
Capt. Edw. William [sic] Parry... M. Brod-
rick”. The sheetlets comprising this set are
enclosed between two

carefully fashioned _

47

FIELD-NATURALIST

THE CANADIAN

January-February, 1950]

‘(SUIT WeYOIq) ¢-FZ8T PAL},
s,kuvg ‘(eUl] PeHOp) E-1Z8l ,Puoses, s,AtHg ‘(@UL] SMNOnUTUOD) OZ-618T ISI}, 8,AuDg ‘(@Ul] PessoId) BIBT SSOY “ZIA ‘pajoet[oo ATpesod
-dns eam syunjd esey} yorym uo sebofoa ,ebnssog jseM-YYON,, INOF ey} Jo Senor oyouttxciddo burmoys dour-yojeyxs “T “iy

,

ee

~“e.anowccce zor \;

worm nnnm= F-12781 hyetYy ar Len Ava

eeeerearsreenes SHIT AWYW
——— 97 -bI8! Avuvd

opt eereren. 818) Ssoy

a a ai

48 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

boards of exotic wood that are reminiscent
of, but of different origin from, those in the
Manchester Museum (5) and in the Univer-
sity Herbaria, Oxford (6). In the present
instance the outside of one of the boards
bears a small stuck-on paper label on which
is written in a hand that may quite likely be
Parry’s, “Arctic Plants - Captn. Parry 1821-
22”. To these dates all the enclosed speci-
mens that are dated may be seen to conform;
and indeed there is to my mind no reason
for not having full confidence in the labels
belonging to this set. The only other ‘general’
label belonging to this set is the name
“Louisa Bell” which is written in ink on the
hoard above the stuck-on paper label.

II

Likewise pressed between two _ beauti-
fully fashioned boards of Similar but not
identical dark-brown exotic wood is another,
much smaller collection of plants. Again
stuck on the outside of one of the boards
is a small paper label on which is written,
in a hand that may well be Parry’s, “Arctic
Mosses and Lichens — Captn. Parry [?] &
1825”. This time the inked name above the
label is “Eliza Bell”. The earlier date is
deleted with black ink which appears to be
the same as that in which both “Eliza Bell”
and “Louisa Bell” are written, and ome can
imagine two sisters, having perhaps come by
these treasures without realizing their signif-
icance, sorting the specimens according to
the dates given on the individual sheetlets—
elthough the plant phyla represented, and
the general labels referring to “Mosses and
Lichens”, make one wonder at what period
or periods such sorting may have been ac-
complished. For even if M. Brodrick did not
know a moss from a lichen, or these from
vascular plants, Parry assuredly did. How-
ever this may be, sorting by dates would
have involved putting several of the mosses
in Louisa’s set (where I have treated them),
in compensation for which Eliza may have
received the earlier specimens (see below);
for whatever may have been the first, deleted
date, it can be plainly seen that it was not
1818.

The present ‘set’ consists of only 6
sheetlets, though these fall naturally into
two categories which will be treated as
separate sets. Of these the larger comprises
four sheetlets that were evidently gathered
during Parry’s ‘third’ expedition (11). They

[Vol. 64

ere mounted on rather thick pieces of draw-
ing paper which have been roughly cut down
to about 16 x 9 cm. each, and are labelled
individually with the locality and year of
collection. This labelling is in two apparently
contemporary hands, one of which, although
not typical, may yet be Parry’s. The sheetlets
and specimens are reminiscent of some of
those belonging to the Manchester Museum
(5), and are from Somerset Island and the
adjacent northwest coast of Baffin Island.
Three are mosses and the other is a flowering
specimen of Dryas integrifolia M. Vahl, all
being known from the Canadian Eastern
Arctic (14) although one of the mosses, Tetra-
plodon mnioides (Hedw.) B.S.G. from Somer-
set Island, is an addition to the known flora
of that considerable island, while another,
Bryum pallescens Schleich. from Port Bowen,
has not previously been recorded from
northern Baffin.

Til

The remaining two sheetlets of the second
collection appear (at least according to their
labels) to have been obtained during Captain
John Ross’s earlier “Voyage of Discovery...
for the purpose of exploring Baffin’s Bay,
and inquiring into the probability of a
North-West Passage”, and consequently com-
prise another set. On this voyage, Parry
served as a lieutenant and had command of
the smaller ship (15). There is no indication
as to the collector, but unlike the situation
with most of the known specimens gathered
on Ross’s expeditions (1, 16), the locality
is given in the present instances, although of
the second of the sheetlets the authenticity
is perhaps to be doubted.

One of the sheetlets is of Neuropogon
sulphureus (Konig) Hellb. and is labelled
“Arctic Lichen, Found at the N.E. part of
Hare or Waygatt Island, Davis’s Straits, Lat.
70° 27’ N. June 18th. 1818. Captn. Parry’s
1st. Voyage”, This specimen may yet be the
one, or a duplicate of the one, cited by
Robert Brown (17) as “Usnea?—,nov. sp.?
absque scutellis”’. The writing, although not
typical, bears a strong resemblance to some
forms of Parry’s own; nevertheless, the
indication of “Captn. Parry’s ist. Voyage”
is misleading as the expedition that is
usually so termed took place in the years
1819-20 and during its course Hare Island,
which lies off the west coast of Greenland,
was not visited (18).

Nor was Parry prom--

\
eS ae
CS es

~~

January-February, 1950] Tue CaNapiAN Fretp-NaTURALIST 49

oted even to the rank of Commander until
late in 1820. Apart from these items the label
checks almost perfectly with Ross’s account,
for he writes (15) of “Waygatt or Hare
Island” that “On the 18th” (of June, 1818)
“J went on shore at noon to take the sun’s
transit... the latitude was determinated to be
70° 26’ 17”... Here then we rested... While
on shore, parties were occupied collecting
specimens of natural history, and in making
geological researches’’,

The other sheetlet that conforms most
closely to this one bears four scraps of ap-
parently exotic dicotyledonous plants that
seem inadequate for determination. The
paper is different from that of the other
sheetlets considered above, although ap-
parently identical with that of the majority
of the next set considered below; but the
label, which is in a different hand from all
the rest, reads “Found N.E. part of Hare or
Waygatt [?sic] Island. Lat. 70° 27’ N. This
is the only wood and [three illegible words]”.

IV

This is the other of the more significant
sets and consists of 22 sheetlets of which
the majority are of thin but good quality
paper that is watermarked “Gilling & Allford
1820” and so folded over as to protect the
specimens which are usually mounted with
glue instead of the commoner strips. Each
sheetlet is labelled in what is clearly Parry’s
hand, and with the possible exception of
' three which are unlocalized they were all
collected at “Igloolik 1823” and accordingly
belong to his ‘second’ expedition (10). The
specimens are all in good preservation and
the majority are correctly determined, with
the name written over the locality and date
by Parry who may also be presumed to have
been their collector. They comprise one
moss and fourteen different species of
dicotyledonous plants, all belonging to wide-
spread arctic species that were already
recorded from Igloolik by Hooker (8). How-
ever, the date given on one of the sheetlets
of Cerastium alpinum L., s.l., again makes it
seem improbable that Hooker can have seen
the present specimens when preparing his
‘Botanical Appendix’ (cf. above).

The two specimens of scurvy-grass (Coch-
learia officinalis L., s.l.) in this set appear
te belong to var. arctica (Schlechtend.)
Gelert, which has not. been recorded from

Igloolik; but they are scarcely sufficient for
the foundation of a new record of a ‘critical’
entity which in any case is already known
from the nearby Neerlo Nakto Island (1).

V

It is greatly to be regretted that the two
remaining sets are unlocalized and indeed
virtually unlabelled — the more so as they
are the largest of all. Consequently we can-
not use them for citation purposes. To be
sure, one of them is accompanied by a
recent note on the paper of the Institute
which states that they are “Plants Collected
hy Lieutenant J. Nias during the Parry Ex-
peditions. 1819-1822”, and I also have a
statement initialled by Dr B. B. Roberts to
the effect that “A label with this collection
reads as follows: ‘Given to Jane Sheppard
Alison by Lieut. Joseph Nias who - sailed
with Capt. Parry on board the [name omitt-
ed] to endeavour to discover the Northwest
Passage’. Presented by Mrs. Baynes and Miss
C. Nias”. Actually, Joseph Nias was a mid-
shipman on board the Hecla on Parry’s ‘first’
voyage and a lieutenant on the Fury during
Parry’s ‘second’ voyage; and as the ‘first’
voyage took place in 1819-20 and the
‘second’ during 1821-23, it may well be that
the above dates are correct even if at first .
glance they appear incongruous. Indeed this
would seem the more likely because the
present set contains a Specimen of Geum
rossii (R. Br.) Sér., which was first described
as Sieversia rossii by Robert Brown from
material collected on Melville Island during
Parry’s ‘first? expedition, but which is un-
known from the region visited by the ‘second’
expedition (19), whereas this Set also con-
tains specimens of Matricaria inodora var.
nana (Hook.) Torrey and Gray emend.
Polunin which was well represented in the
collections brought back from the ‘second’
voyage (1, 8) but is unknown on Melville
Island where all the plants brought back
from the ‘first’ voyage are supposed (3) to
viave been collected. However this may be,
the present set, being unlocalized, is prac-
tieally valueless from most points of view—
and the more pity as it is large and well
preserved, consisting of 22 folders and one
extra sheetlet which in most instances con-
tain several (in some as Many as 9 or 10)
different plants. Almost all the plants belong
tc widespread and common arctic species.
More than half the folders measure about

50 THE CANADIAN
20 x 14 cm. and are made of larger pieces
of the same paper as the last set described
above; the remainder are still larger and of
different, unwatermarked paper.

VI

The final set comprises an assortment of
7 folders of various sizes and 19 loose
sheetlets of plants that are without any label
of any kind, although it has been said that
they were collected by Nias. From _ their
general appearance the plants might well
emanate from Melville Island. The suggestion
about their collector may be supported by
the fact that both of the main types of paper
used in the Nias collection (described last
above) are also represented in the present
Set.

In conclusion, it is a pleasure to thank
the officers of the Scott Polar Research
institute for the loan of these interesting
collections, and the following gentlemen for
specialist determinations: Dr. R. M. Whelden
of Harvard University (Algae), Mr. George
A. Llano of the Smithsonian Institution,
Washington, D.C., (Lichenes), and Mr. James
Kucyniak of the Montreal Botanical Garden
(Bryophyta, apart from the single Bryum
which was determined by Prof. A. LeRoy
Andrews of Cornell University). Grateful
acknowledgment is also due to Mr. Richard
Pennington, University Librarian at McGill,
for advice and assistance in dealing with
problems of calligraphy — particularly in
relation to the fine series of Parry letters
in the Redpath Library of McGill University.

REFERENCES

1. Polunin, Nicholas (1940): “Botany of the
Canadian Eastern Arctic: Part
I, Pteridophyta and Spermato-
phyta”; Canada: Department of
Mines and Resources, National
Museum Bull. No. 92, pp. vi +
408. .

2. —————. (1942): “On some early collec-
tions of arctic plants”; North
Western Naturalist, XVII, pp.
168-173.

3. ————— (1943a) (dated May 1942:) “Per-
lustrationes Plantarum Arcti-
carum I. ‘Parry plants’ in the
possession of (i) the University

FIELD-NATURALIST

Pig

10.

1k

12.

13.

14.

of Durham, and (ii) the Bristol ,

Naturalists’ Society’; Journal
of Botany, LXXX, pp. 81-94.

(1943b): An early collection of
arctic plants belonging to the
Society”; Geographical Journal,
CII, pp. 27-29.

(MS.a): “Perlustrationes Plan-
tarum Arcticarum II. ‘Parry
plants’ in the Manchester Mu-
seum”; Journal of Botany (in
the Press).

(MS.b): ibid. “IV. ‘Parry plants’
recently added to the Univer-

/Sity Herbaria Oxford.”

(MS.c): ibid. “V. ‘Parry plants’
in the possession of the Univer-

Sity of Glasgow”.

Hooker, Sir W. J. (1825): “Botanical Ap-
pendix”, pp. 381-430 in “Ap-
pendix to Captain Parry’s Jour-

nal of a Second Voyage for the
Discovery of a North-West Pas-
sage...”; London: pp. 1-482.

(1826): “Botanical Appendix”,
pp. 121-131 to Sir W. E. Parry,
“Journal of a Third Voyage for
the Discovery of a North-West
Passage...”; London: pp. xxviii
+ 186, and appendix, pp. 151.
Parry, Sir W. E. (1824): “Journal of a
Second Voyage for the Discov-
ery of a North-West Passage...”;
London: pp. xxx + 571.

(1826): “Journal of a Third Voya-
ge for the Discovery of a North-
West Passage...”; London: pp.
XXViii + 186 and appendix pp.
151.

A specimen in the National Herbarium

of Canada (no. 129537), distributed as

Poa laxa Haenke (Raup & Abbe no. 3903,

Mount Selwyn, B.C., July 19, 1932), may ~

yet belong to this species.

Polunin, Nicholas (1947): “Additions to
the floras of Southampton and
Mansel Islands, Hudson Bay”;
Contributions from the Gray
Herbarium of Harvard Univer-
sity, CLXV, pp. 94105.
et al. (1947): Botany of the
Canadian Eastern Arctic: Part

II, Thallophyta and Bryophyta”; ~

Canada: Department of Mines
and Resources, National Mu-
seum Bulletin No. 97, pp. v +
573.

_ [Vol. 64 -

ase Haas

|

:
2

;

‘

ms
A.

¢

4
a

x

‘4
f

January-February, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

15. Ross, Sir John (1819): “A Voyage of
Discovery... for the purpose of
exploring Baffin’s Bay...”; Lon-
don: pp. xl. + 252 and appendix
Pp. exliv.

16. Wilmot, A. J. (1942): “Canadian Arctic
Botany”; Nature CXLIX, pp. 5-
7. A review of (1).

17. Brown, Robert (1819): ‘““Botanical Appen-
dix” in Ross, q.v., appendix pp.
CXXXVii-cxliv.

18. Parry, Sir W. E. (1821): “Journal of a
Voyage for the Discovery of a
North-West Passage from the
Atlantic to the Pacific...”; Lon-
don: pp. xxix + 310 and appen-
dix pp. clxxix.

51

19. Hultén (Flora of Alaska and Yukon, VI,
p. 1042, 1946) has recently
remarked on the apparent isola-
tion of “the type locality Mel-
ville I., [which]... must be said
to be most unexpected phyto-
geographically and . . . unpar-
alleled in my experience .. .”
as the species is found chiefly
in Asia, being otherwise known
in America only from Alaska
and the adjacent Aleutian
Islands and Yukon Territory.
Thus Melville Island already
constitutes a considerable east-
ern extension of the known
range.

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

The Steller Eider in British Columbia.
On October 15th, 1948, when Mr. Ronald M.
Stewart of Massett, Q.C.1., B.C., was duck
hunting on Massett Inlet he noticed a flock
of Lesser Scaup which had only recently
arrived. These birds appeared tired out and
were resting with heads under wings.
Amongst these he noticed one which looked
strange and this bird he collected. Believing
it to be a Steller Eider, Mr. Stewart sent it
to the writer for confirmation.
proved to be an immature female Steller
Eider, Polysticta stelleri. The bill shows the
characteristic shape of that of the Steller
Eider and in general the bird is more lightly
coloured than the adult female, the under-
parts being mottled with definite barring on
flanks and lower abdomen. The tertials are
straight and the colour of the specilum is
not so pronounced as in the adult nor is the
lightish ring about the eyes so clearly de-
fined. The bill, before drying, was a light
slate grey and the tarsi and feet light brown.

This, apparently, is the first record of the
Steller Eider in British Columbia waters. —
KENNETH RACEY, 6542 Lime St., Vancou-
ver, B.C.

Feeding Flights Of Common Terns Across
The Niagara Peninsula. — Although no breed-
‘ing colonies are known to exist in the

The bird.

western part of Lake Ontario, common terns,
Sterna hirundo L., are abundant throughout
the summer along the shore of western Lin-
coln County. From May to late July many
can be seen almost any day, leaving Lake
Ontario and heading south ‘or southwest
across the Niagara Peninsula toward Lake
Erie, or arriving from that direction. Early
in June they become more noticeable and the
majority of those going south carry fish in
their bills. They are frequently heard passing
over long after dark.

The source of these terns appears to be
Mohawk Island, a small island in Lake Erie
about three miles east of Port Maitland and
somewhat over a mile off the shore of Haldi-
mand County. On June 13, 1948, great num-
bers of terns could be seen through binocu-
lars from the mainland, flying about and
alighting on the island, and many others
were scattered over the surrounding waters.
A large proportion of those flying toward
the island carried fish. Although the island
was not visited it was evident that it sup-
ported a populous colony. It has since been
learned, from a note by Donald Gamble
(Prothonotary 14 (7): 46-47, 1948) that this
is an old and well-known colony which con-
tained about 1100 nests in 1948.

During twenty minutes of observation
about 3.00 p.m., seven terns arrived at the

52 THE CANADIAN

Erie shore from the north, from the direction
of Lake Ontario, all bearing fish, and flew on
toward the island, and as the writer drove
eastward along the shore read near Low-
banks, others reached the lake from the
north and then turned westward in the
direction of the island. The shortest airline
distance from Mohawk Island to Lake On-
tario is twenty-five miles; the round trip
therefore requires a flight of at least fifty
miles, and as they frequent a long stretch
of the Ontario shore many must travel
seventy-five miles or more.

A possible clue to the cause of these long
flights was noticed on May 16, 1941. Several
terns among a party of about forty were
displaying on the pier at the Horticultural
Experiment Station at Vineland Station,
some, presumably males, presenting fish to
others with much posturing. When the flock
was startled a couple of fish left on the pier
were found to be gaspereau or alewife
Pomolobus pseudo-harengus (Wilson). This
fish is very abundant in Lake Ontario, where
the waters along the southern shore are often
covered with dead and dying individuals in
June. Most of these are too large to be
eaten by terns, but sufficient smaller ones
are present to form a very easily obtainable
food supply. According to Hubbs and Lagler
(Fishes of the Great Lakes Region. Cran-
brook Inst. Sci. Bull. 26, 1947.) this species
has only recently entered Lake Erie.

Parties of juvenile terns still being fed by
their parents sometimes appear along the
shore of Lincoln County in August. It would
be interesting to know whether they come
from the Mohawk Island colony or from
breeding grounds in eastern Lake Ontario.

While the writer was at the Erie shore
opposite Mohawk Island, three gulls ap-
proached from the north and continued to-
ward the island. One was a herring gull
Larus argentatus Pontopp. but the others
were too distant to be identified. According
to Gamble there were about nine nests of the
herring gull and at least 125 nests of the
ring-billed gull Larus delawarensis Ord on
the island in 1948. Both are very common
on Lake Ontario and probably also make
feeding flights across the Niagara Peninsula.
— WM. L. PUTMAN, Vineland Station, Ont.

Red Crossbills Collected In The Ottawa
District. — On January 21, 1948 I set out
for Pakenham village hoping to find red

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

crossbills which had been reported there
and, if possible, to collect specimens. Miss
Verna Ross and Miss Mary Stuart accompa-
nied me. In the Burnt Lands in Carleton
County, twenty-two miles from the city of
Ottawa, two red crossbills flew down into
the road in front of my car.

When I got out the birds left the road to
perch in the highest points of the conifers
at the roadside. Several males were singing.
The birds seemed fairly tame and returned
to the roadway several times presumably to
get gravel. Two dozen birds were feeding
on the cones of the pines and spruces in the
vicinity. The majority were red crossbills.

I collected a pair of red crossbills and a
male white-winged crossbill for the National
Museum of Canada, Ottawa, and an adult
male, immature male, and adult female red
crossbill for my own collection. The red
erossbills collected were Eastern Red Cross-
bill, Loxia curvirostra minor.

On the following day Mr. Hoyes Lloyd
visited the same spot with me and collected

a pair of white-winged crossbills. No red
erossbills were observed.
A week later, January 29, Dr. Oliver

Hewitt and I again visited the Burnt Lands.
We saw one pair of red crossbills on the
road, either getting salt or gravel. They
flew into a tree by the roadside where the
male sang for five minutes. Both then flew
into the thick bush. We searched the woods
but were unable to find the birds again,
either then or on subsequent visits to the
Burnt Lands. — A. E. BOURGUIGNON, Ot-
tawa.

Pintail and Ring-Necked Duck Breeding in
the Ottawa Region — Numerous recently
published notes indicate that both Pintail
Anas acuta tzitzihoa, and Ring-necked Duck,
Aythya collaris, are extending their ranges
or re-establishing breeding populations in the
eastern provinces and north-eastern states.
However, positive breeding records of these
species in the east are still worthy of
publication.

On May 18, 1948, I flushed a female Pin-
tail from her nest on the edge of MacLaren
Lake, a land-locked bay on the north side
of the Ottawa River in the Province of
Quebec, about 10 miles east of the city of
Ottawa. The nest contained seven fresh eggs.

January-February, 1950]

The drake Pintail was still in attendance on
the female. On May 20, I found the nest
deserted and the contents destroyed, ap-
parently by crows. There was no evidence
of re-nesting in that area by the Pintail.

On June 29, 1948, Mr. Rowley W. Frith
and I spent two hours in the western part
of Lochaber Bay, also on the north side of
the Ottawa River, about 30 miles below
Ottawa. This shallow bay supports a heavy
srowth of Scirpus fluviatilis. Two female
Ring-necked Ducks were seen to behave as
though they had broods. Finally one brood
of five very small downy young was discover-
ed. On the following day I located three
female Ring-necked Ducks with broods of 5,
4 and 8. The cover was so dense that some
of the young may have been missed.

On June 3, 1949, I again visited Lochaber
Bay in an attempt to locate a nest. Five

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

3 53

drake Ring-necked Ducks and six females
were seen. Four of the drakes were together
in the centre of the marsh, and I believe
that four of the females may have been in-
cubating full clutches of eggs. The fifth
drake was in attendance on a female at the
east end of the marsh. After careful obser-
vation of the pair, the shore was searched
and a nest with 5 eggs was found On a grassy
hummock surrounded by shallow water. The
water level was high on June 3, and the
water could be expected to recede somewhat
before the time of hatching.

While the Ring-necked Duck may have
been breeding unobserved in the Ottawa
region for some years, its appearance as a
breeding bird on Lochaber Bay is recent. It
was not found there in 1944 or in 1947, when
observations were made in that area. —
CLIVER H. HEWITT, Dept. of Conservation,
Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y.

BOOK REVIEW

American Wild Flowers, by Harold Mol-
denke, Curator, New York Botanical Garden.
D. Van Nostrand Company, Inc., New York
and Toronto. 1949, pp. 453, illustrated with
88 photographs in full colour and 67 in
gravure. Price, $8.75.

AMERICAN WILD FLOWERS is the first
of a series: THE NEW ILLUSTRATED
NATURALIST and will be followed by other
kooks on spiders, butterfies, birds and on
many other subjects.

The present volume will meet the need
for a popular and well-illustrated book on
“all” the well-known wild flowers of United
States and Canada. Of the 32,000 species of
flowering plants said to occur in North
America north of Rio Grande, Dr. Moldenke
has selected a couple of thousand of the most
popular and best known species, varieties and
named forms. This number includes not only
native plants, but also naturalized exotics. In
each of the fifty chapters one or more, not
always very closely related families are
treated and within each family the best
known genera are described and enumerated.
Within the genus representative individual
species are described together with their

distribution. Common as well as_ scientific
names are given. For the former, Dr. Mol-
denke, to avoid the difficulty of selecting
common names from the great diversity of
regional vernacular names, has adopted those
of “Standardized Plant Names”, Edition 1942.
This obviously has some advantages but in a
number of cases leads to names and combina-
tions that to those not familiar with the
“Standardized list” may at first appear some-
what puzzling. A few random samples: Wil-
dallamandas (Urechites), Californiapea (La-
thyrus californicus), dwarfirises (Iris or
Neubeckia), or the more obvious, but equally
strange: Venuslookingglasses (Triodanis—to
most botanists known as Specularia) and
Dogtoothviolet (Erythronium). The photo-
graphs are excellent and well chosen and
the reproduction good for this type of book
elthough the reproduction of the colour
plates is inferior to that in Torsten Lager-

berg’s: “VILDA VAXTER I NORDEN”,
which is currently being published in
Sweden.

At the end, there is a Select Bibliography
and an index to common and technical names.
—A. E. PORSILD.

54 THE CANADIAN

_ Spiders.—By T. B. Kurata, Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology, Handbook No. 6, Toron-
to, Ontario, 1949.

A number of years ago, the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology inaugurated a Series of
handbooks designed to afford the general
public a variety of information on various
subjects of Natural History. This present
work is the latest addition to this series. It
contains 33 pages consisting of an account
of the salient facts concerning the habits and
classification of our native spiders. It is
written in a popular style with an obvious
attempt to avoid technical phraseology, which
is often confusing to the non-professional
reader. Nevertheless, it contains a scientif-
ically accurate account of this most in-
teresting animal group. The work is copiously
illustrated by line drawings which depict the
various types of spiders and their webs. A
simple key is included for the identification
of the common families, followed by des-
criptions of the habits of the members of the
various families, with frequent reference to
species most commonly encountered. The
bulletin concludes with a brief account of
methods employed in collecting and preserv-
ing spiders. This should be of special interest
to field naturalists—T. N. FREEMAN.

Birds of Arctic Alaska. — By Alfred M.
Bailey. Popular Series No. 8, Colorado
Museum of Natural History, pp. 1-317,
1948.

This is the long awaited account of the
results of Bailey’s work on birds of northern
Alaska. The area covered, the coastal strip
from the Yukon boundary to Cape Prince of
Wales on Bering Strait is of particular inter-
est to bird students. Point Barrow is well
known ornithologically for the long series
of unusual records made by Charles Brower,
whose photograph appears as the frontispiece
of this volume. It is here at Barrow that
such unusual records for the Arctic as western
and scarlet tanagers have been made. The
list of Old World species which are known

in America from the western part of Alaska
is surprisingly long. Bailey lists 22 species
of rare occurrence including such things as
red-throated pipit,’ wryneck and _ Siberian
cuckoo. In addition there are Old World
species with a firm foothold in Alaska, such
as Kennicott’s willow warbler and the yellow

FIELD-NATURALIST

~ [Vol. 64

wagtail. The continents are only 50 miles
apart at Cape Prince of Wales, and possibly
there were habitat differences in glacial
times which contributed to the overlapping
of the faunas.

The migration in the Bering Strait area is
fascinating. Three distinct migration routes
cross in the Wales region; some New World
species which cross to the Old World side
and fly up and down Siberian coast; some
Old World birds which come up the Siberian
coast and then touch at the Wales area; and
the water birds which move north through
the straits. Many small birds may not reach
the Arctic coast by way of the strait, but
cross through low passes in the Endicott
Mountains. Shore birds do not arrive in
fiocks, but appear overnight, apparently al-
ready mated.

The account is based on Bailey’s work in
1921-22 for the Colorado Museum of Natural
History, but all the records from the liter-
ature and others from various museum col-
lections have been added. There is a pleasing
account of the winter Bailey spent on the
coast; and an account of the vegetation,
written by Joseph Ewan. The main part of
the book (pp. 132-304) is the list of birds,
with their occurrence, status and the field
observations. The conclusions of a field ob-
server carry weight in taxonomic problems;
the Pacific loon and the green-throated loon
are kept as separate species, because they
both breed in the Wales area; the Canada
goose group is considered as forming a single
species; several of the many brants seen are

considered as B.b. hrota, but not typical, —

being intergrates toward the black brant,
B.b. nigricans.

The notes on the habits of many species
seldom watched by a student on their nesting
grounds include such species as the yellow-
billed loon, whistling swan, emperor goose
and ptarmigan.

©

Naturally a reviewer is never Satisfied;
one would have wished for a better map, and
fuller discussion of the fauna from general
biological and distributional viewpoints. But
Bailey is to be congratulated on a volume
which is indispensable to anyone working on
the birds of northwestern North America.
A. Ly RAND,

a at ee ee eee eee

President Emeritus: Dr. H. M. S 2
A. H. SHORTT; Vice-Presidents: R. R. | YE, Mrs.
D. B. SPARLING; General Secretary: Miss WINONA
DO ; _Executive Secretary: H. V. H RD;
Treasurer: H. MOSSOP; Auditor: W. A. CARTWRIGHT;
Social Convenor: Mrs. R. K. HELYAR.
SECTIONS—
iological: Chair. HARRY YOUNG; | WAR-
REN te STON. eatanolo, gical: Chair. H. R. WONG;
. D. SMITH. Botanical: Chair. Mrs. E. J. McMIL-
LAN; Sec. Mrs. D.B. SPARLING. Geological: Chair.
G. LA CE; Sec. P. Wee oe
Chair. L. T. S. NORRIS-ELYE; Sec. D.
ates : Chair. R. K. STEWART-HAY; Sec. D.
Archaeological: Chair. W M. -
Sec: Mrs. P. H. STOK
Meetings are held each Mon evening, except on
Beideys, t from October to fs of the Unt
versity of peeareba, ial Winnipeg.

days in Ju
for adults; 5 eons

PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL
HISTORY OF CANADA

OFFICERS FOR 1949

Publicity Section: RENE
, Chief ee Section
ee oe
1G. PRICE, ii ;

Secretary’s address: GEORGES
Franciscains St., Quebec, P.Q.

THE TORONTO FIELD-NATURALISTS’
CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1947-1848

Eeecenr C. A. WALKINSHAW; Vice-President: ee
J. V. LEHMANN; Secretaries: MISS
cn TEWART, Royal |

JAQUITH, DR. LE E TAQUITH, W. H. MARTIN, DOUGLAS
MILLER, A. OUTRAM, MISS LILIAN PAYNE, F.
GREER ROBERTS, MRS. H. C. ROBSON, H. E. SOUTHAM,
EARL STARK, MRS. J. B. STEWART, R. W. TROWERN:
Ex Office: F. C. HURST, R. M. SAUNDERS, T. F.

Be ee eu oe ee ae
each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario
Museum, unless otherwise Field trips are
pee cere cage
Saturday of each month during the winter.

ay oe s. ae Hee P. =

OFFICERS FOR 1949

President: Mr. WM.
don; V.

Meetings are held at. 8.00 p.m. in. the Public
aes shale et ; “ ae
se Fe Spicer ne faa bana cael) ay Serna

PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR
THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS INC.

Dr le BERTRAM;

3, De oa

ce sein Hy the ecu Monday of the month except
during summer.

President: KENNETH RA Gane nee
LAING; _ Secretary: mie COW. Dept.
_ Zoology, University ‘of Bat British Columbia, Vancouver, 3a

WANTED

In order to meet the demand for back numbers of the publications
of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, the following are urgently needed:
Transactions, Otta. Field-Nat. Club, No. 1, 1880.

Oitawa Naturalist

Sept., 1890
Jan., 1898
Feb., 1898
Mar., 1898
Apr., 1898
July, 1898
Aug., 1898
Sept., 1898
Oct-Nov., 1898
Dec., 1898

Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 38, No. Jan., 1924
Vol. 39, No. Mar., 1925
Vol. 39, No. Apr., 1925
Vol. 39, No. May, 1925

Members and subscribers who are able to spare any of these numbers
would greatly assist the Club by forwarding them to:

Mr. W. J. Cody,

Division of Botany

Central Experimental Farm,
Ottawa, Ontario.

“Le Droit” Printing, Ottawa, Canada. OeGhEijast

<a

MUS. CORP. Z00L.|
Vol. 64 LIBRARY MARCH-APRIL, 1950 No. 2

ANADIAN
meLD-NATURALIST

Contents

% Notes on the birds of the Ungava Bay District.

Eee CHUA Ett GE DEAE mere Ah A) nada ele OS A EN ee ee, 55
William Henry Mousley, 1865-1949. By L. Mcl. Terrill oo... ccc cseeeeeee 67
The Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris) in the Counties of Kamouraska

and L’Islet, Province of Quebec. By Abbé René Tanguay .............0.0.c000 70
Pereira ENTE MOPTISUS. MOF O MMs ti NTE Uy MO Ma Nh 71
Fifth census of non-passerine birds in the bird sanctuaries of the North

Shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. By Oliver H. Hewitt .....00000000 ccc 73
Observations of Ruffed Grouse in Southern Ontario with a discussion

mipcveless) by A. Murray\Fallis and C. EB. Hope oo... iu eae 82
Some herpetological records from the Quetico Provincial Park of Ontario.

armen aCe DOTA Inu aren sue WN wc lead ae aU a Ue OE 86
Some counts of bird populations in coniferous forests near the limit of trees.

ce Ve CA eh RMR MYO 3 YR! GRD SIERO AU IO Fa eR Rs EV Aa 87
Mirawapeicia-Naturalists’ Cliab — By-Laws. i..ci.0 kee i clidscseecadbsenleecseuscenees 89

@ Plants collected by B. John Woodruff on the west coast of Melville Peninsula,

Pranklimn« District; NW.ip)) Canada.) By WJ. Codyic oe. 90
Notes and Observations: —

An albino mud puppy near Fort William, Ontario. By A. E. Allin .............. 92

Micration. of. black iSyitt.)) By: Kenneth Racey) Asi... 93

Aemew record tor, Palmmwarbler.)) by (C2) Ei Law: ine 93

Burple Sandpiper in Manitoba. By L. T.S. Norris-Elye .............0..0.,...... 94

ie Bloe\ Grosbeak isWestern Ontario. By C. S. Marvel 0.000.200... 0ic5. 94

Migration of Western Grebe on British Columbia coast. By Theed Pearse ........ 94
PELE (UDI ST UR SP PR 88

Published by the
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

Entered at the Post Office at Ottawa, Ont., as second class matter

Che Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club

— Patrons —
Their Excellencies the Governor-General and the Lady Alexander

President: Dr. PAULINE SNURE

1st Vice-President: Dr. J. W. GRovEs 2nd Vice-President: Mr. R. FRITH
Treasurer: RAYMOND Moore, Secretary: H. J. ScoGcaAn,
Division of Botany, National Museum of Canada,
Science Service, Dept. of Ottawa.

Agriculture, Ottawa.

Additional Members of Council: Mrs. H. Luoyp, Miss VERNA Ross, Miss Mary Stuart,
Messrs. E. G. ANDERSON, R. M. ANDERSON, W. K. W. Batpwin, A. F. W. BANFIELD,
Rev. F. E. Bantu, B. Borvin, A. E. Bourcuicnon, A. W. CAMERON, W. J. Copy, J. P.
CUERRIER, W. G. Dore, C. FRANKTON, W. E. Goprrey, H. Grou, S. D. Hicxs, W. Ittman,
W. H. Lancetry, D. Lrecuman, H. F. Lewis, Hoves Luoyp, T. H. MaNnnine, W. H.
MINSHALL, A. E. Porsitp, D. B. O. Savite, H. A. SENN, V. E. F. Sotman, J. S. TENER.

Auditors: I. L. CONNERS, C. FRANKTON, and H. F. Lewis.

Editor

Dr. H. A. SENN,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

Associate Editors

Wi G-SDORE een y sev izaion an) Botany R. M. ANDERSON ................+- Mammalogy
AC EA ROCOME) Milita, aUU eaten Conchology A. G. HUNTSMAN ............ Marine Biology
FENG) CRAWFORD? vis) \o. nn Entomology Wi Ee GOopRREyga Gina ek Ornithology
ERE COCK Oe 20) Ca) M I sheen) Geology WA.) Beri: aie at ce iee Palaeontology
Grype yh Parc). nee eeu Herpetology J.vRs DYMONDMRE Yn Ichthyology

Business Manager
W. J. Copy,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

The official publications of THz OTrAwa FIELp-NaATuURALISTs’ CLuB have been
issued since 1879. The first were The Transactions of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’
date. The Canadian Field-Naturalist is issued bi-monthly. Its scope is the publication
Club, 1879, 1886, two volumes; the next, The Ottawa Naturalist, 1886-1919, thirty-

two volumes: and these have been continued by The Canadian Field-Naturalist to
of the results or original research in all departments of Natural History.

Price of this volume (6 numbers) $3.00; Single copies 60c each.

Subscription ($3.00 per year) should be forwarded to Dr: R. J. Moore,
Div. of Botany, Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture,
OTTAWA, CANADA.

The Canafii

Vol. 64

MAY —5
aie

Pitasitt

OTTAWA, CANADA, MARCH-APRIL, 1950

1950
d-Naturalist

No. 2

NOTES ON THE BIRDS OF THE UNGAVA BAY DISTRICT?

HENRY HILDEBRAND

School of Fisheries, University of Washington, Seattle, Wash.

URING 1947 and 1948 the writer made
three trips to Ungava Bay under the
sponsorship of the Canadian Fisheries
Research Board. On two summer trips lasting
from June 14 to September 8, 1947 and June
17 to October 5, 1948 respectively, the writer
was a member of a marine biological survey
under the directorship of Dr. Max Dunbar of
McGill University. One late winter trip, which
lasted from March 21 to April 17, 1948, was
undertaken by the writer to investigate under-
ice fishing on lakes in the Fort Chimo area.
Bird observations were limited on these trips
due to the press of other duties, and were
necessarily confined to the immediate coastal
region and the trading posts in that area.
The itinerary of the three trips was briefly
as follows: June- 14, 1947, arrival at Fort
Chimo; June 23, 24 False River and return;
June 28 to July 20 hydrographic investigations
along the west coast from Chimo to Payne
Bay and return with stopovers at Kasigiak-
siovik on the south shore of Leaf Bay from
July 1 to 10, and at small uncharted islands
near the entrance of Hopes Advance Bay from
July 12 to 14; July 21 to August 4, Fort Chimo
and Koksoak Estuary; August 5, 6 Fort Chimo
to George River; August 7 to 11 George River
to Keglo Bay and return; August 16 to 26
George River to Port Burwell and return with
a stopover at Port Burwell from August 10 to
25; August 27 to 31 George River to Fort
Chimo; September 8 departed Fort Chimo; in
1948 March 21 to April 17 under-ice fishing
on the following lakes in the vicinity of Fort
Chimo, Lake Mendry, Lac Berthet and Lake
Stewart; June 17, 1948, arrival Fort Chimo;
June 30 to July 14 sealing along the edge of
floe ice from Inukshuktuyak to False River;
July 14 to 18 sealing east north-east of the
Gyrfalcon Islands; July 24, 25 Fort Chimo to
George River; July 26 to August 19 George
River to Port Burwell and return with a stop-

‘1 ‘Received for publication May 9, 1949

over at Port Burwell from July 29 to August
18; August 19 to 31 George River Hudson’s
Bay Post; September 1 to 2 George River to
Fort Chimo; September 2 to October 5 Fort
Chimo.
A small collection of 173 bird skins was
made and they, together with observations on
the species represented, form the basis of this
report. All skins collected are deposited in the
National Museum of Canada in Ottawa.
A complete review of the literature on the
birds of this region was not undertaken. The
largest collection from this district was made
by Lucien M. Turner, who was sent to the
region by the United States Army Signal

. Service and the Smithsonian Institution during

the years 1882-4. He made a large collection
in the Fort Chimo neighborhood. An interest-
ing sidelight is that the writer found an old
native, Tommy Gordon, who remembered
Turner’s sojourn in that region very well.
The writer wishes to acknowledge his in-
debtedness to the following: Mr. W. Earl God-
frey of the National Museum in Ottawa, who
verified all identifications and critically read
the manuscript; Dr. Max Dunbar of McGill
University, who aided in making the col-
lection; my colleague Philip Orkin who assist-
ed in making the ‘collection in 1948; and Lewis
Mcl. Terrill of Montreal who aided in ident-
ifications. I also wish to express my indebted-
ness to the Hudson’s Bay people, Bob May and
Mr. and Mrs. P. M. Wright; the Anglican Mis-
sionary, Rev. Arnold Ruskell; and the R.C.M.P.
representative, Constable Kenneth McLean,
without whose help and hospitality this work
could not have been accomplished. A special
debt is owed the Suppa family, Eskimos, who
worked with and aided both summer parties.
Ungava Bay is the large bight on the south
shore of Hudson Strait and is located between
roughly 58° to 60° North latitude, and 65°
to 70° West longitude. Many of the features
of this bay are at present unnamed; conse-

Vol. 64, No. 1, January-February, 1950, was issued February 18, 1950.
ELE aya }

56 THE CANADIAN

quently a few of the names which I have used
are not on any existing map, but are the native
names of the areas in question. The coastline
on all existing maps is at error at several
‘places both on the east and west coast, part-
icularly the areas of Keglo Bay and Hopes
Advance Bay. Akpatok, a large and con-
spicuous island at the northern entrance of
the bay, was not visited. It is known to be a
nesting place for murres from which its
Eskimo name is derived. The west coast north
of Payne Bay was not visited. Numerous
rivers drain into the bay, the largest of which
is the Koksoak River in the southwest part
of the bay. Other major rivers are the George
and Payne Rivers, which like the Koksoak,
have a Hudson Bay Trading Post located on
their shores. Whale and Leaf River formerly
had trading posts, but these are now aband-
oned. Lesser rivers draining into the bay
include the Mukalik, False, Tunulik, Tuktuk,
and Korok Rivers.

The coast line actually traversed by the
hydrographic survey stretches from northern
Killinek Island on the east coast to Payne
Bay on the west. At no point does the tree
line reach the coast. The population of the

coast traversed is entirely Eskimos, and al- °

though the people are for the most part
nomadic, the census figures are based on their
trading centers. George River has approxim-
ately 187 natives, with 30 residing at Port
Burwell; Fort Chimo on the Koksoak has 257
Eskimos plus an additional 200 Indians from
inland; and Payne Bay has approximately 350
‘Eskimos.

The region may be roughly divided into
bush, barrens or tundra, and marine. None
of these habitats was investigated thoroughly
due to the work being confined to the shore
region and the neighborhood of the trading
posts.

I have used the term ‘bush’ rather than
‘forest’ due to the small size of the trees in
the region studied, and to indicate the abund-
ant undergrowth of alders, willow, and dwarf
birch in places. The term ‘bush’ is not meant
to include areas of willow \growth north of the
tree line. Vegetation varies considerably with-
in this region from the swampy sedge and
sphagnum moss communities to the rocky hills
where only lichens find ecesis. Principal trees,
are the larch, Larix laricina and black spruce,
Picea mariana, and in a few favored sites
poplars, Populus sp. Collecting was done at
two separate sites within the bush region
hear the trading posts at Fort Chimo an
George River.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Fort Chimo, which is located on the Kok-
soak River approximately twenty-five miles
from its mouth and ten miles from the tree
line, was chosen as the base of operations be-
cause of its proximity to an established air-
field. This district is a part of the Canadian
Shield and shows plainly the effects cf glaci-
ation. Much of the country is barren gneissic
ridges covered sparingly with lichens and
mosses. The region is pockmarked with num-
erous lakes and ponds. Drainage is poor and

most of the valleys are swampy, but the depth —

of soil or peat is limited to a shallow layer.
Glacial erratics and moraines of glacial till
are much in evidence. The trading post at
Fort Chimo rests on a terrace composed of
glacial till along the Koksoak. The tide is
still felt at Fort Chimo, high spring tides of
25 feet expose large areas of sandy, rocky
flats. Bird habitats at Fort Chimo have been
considerably altered due to the extensive

cutting of black spruce for firewood and floor- -

ing boughs by the natives.

George River, Hudson’s Bay Trading Post,
is located in the southeast part of the bay. Its
relationship to the tree line is approximately
the same as Fort Chimo. One of the most
characteristic differences is in topography.
While Fort Chimo is generally flat with a few
low hills, many hills are present in the George
River neighborhood, three of which, in the
immediate vicinity of George River Trading
Post, are approximately 800 or more feet in
height. This leads to much admixture of
purely barren land condition on the hills to
timbered sections in the _ valleys.
impressive is the much more luxuriant vegeta-
tion in the protected valleys, and there is
much less disturbance of the natural environ-
ment due to tree cutting than at Fort Chimo.
Two trees enter the vicinity of the trading
post which are apparently absent along the
Koksoak. These are the white spruce, and a
short distance inland on the river, paper birch.
Kopaluk, a lake and a stream with a heavy
stand of spruce two miles up’ the river from
the post, was visited twice during August,
1948.

The barrens include the tundra region
which skirts the bay. This is a low rocky
region on the west but along the east shore
the topography is much more rugged. Num-
erous little lakes and ponds dot the region.
Vegetation consists of mosses, sedges, grasses,
and flowering herbs. Willow and dwarf birch
grow in favored sites well protected from the
wind. A number of sites were visited along

t

Very

.
7
4
k
"i

figs 25

E

j

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN

the east and west coast, but only briefly and
often with no collecting being done. Prin-
cipal collecting stations were Inukshuktuyak
at the mouth of the Koksoak River, Kasigiak-
siovik on the south shore of Leaf Bay, and
Killinek Island at Port Burwell.

Inukshuktuyak is located on the west side
of the mouth of the Koksoak and is a typical
barren land region as described above. This
spot was interesting due to the large num-
bers of nesting birds, proximity to tree line,
and as a migratory route. The Nepihjee
River forms the west boundary to this point,
and was followed inland to the tree line
approximately four miles from the coast. The
river bank is marked by an abundant growth of
willows and on the drier adjacent region by
dwarf birch. A few stunted, shrubby black
spruces were the only kind of trees along the
timberline.
determined, but in this particular region it
was south of the spruce. A large muddy tidal
flat at the mouth of the Nepihjee is a favored
spot for large flocks of semipalmated plovers
and sandpipers.

Kasigiaksiovik is the native name for a

- river and district on the south shore of Leaf .

Bay. This name does not appear on any map
of the region. Kasigiaksiovik is a small fast
stream draining Ballantyne Lake. The lower
part of the stream drains through a sandy
meadow. Along the south shore of Leaf Bay
are raised beaches, approximately 100 feet in
height. The permanent frost zone was found
to be eight inches below the surface on July 8,
1947, ‘

The coast from Leaf Bay north to Payne
Bay was not visited. A stopover was made at
some small uncharted rocky islands off the
entrance of Hopes Advance Bay. The vegeta-
tion is very limited and is mostly lichens,
mosses, grasses, and a few small flowering
herbs. No mammals were seen, and it is
doubtful if any but an occasional seal visit the
islands during the summer months. These
islands were nesting sites for Arctic terns,
eider ducks and guillemots.

False River includes a large estuary which
resembles the mouth of the Koksoak. All col-
lecting was done on this estuary.

Keglo Bay is typical of the hilly east coast.
Many islands, tidal and otherwise dot this
region. Small marshy ponds make this an
ideal nesting place for loons.

Port Burwell is located on the southwest
part of Killinek Island. Killinek is a bleak

- and forbidding chunk of rock with only a

y fer

FIELD-NATURALIST

The limit of the larch was not '

57

limited growth of plants. Many steep and
rocky cliffs and ravines with small ponds
characterize the island. Port Burwell has a
mean summer temperature which is reputed
to be 15° lower than Fort Chimo due in part
to the fogs which roll in from the Atlantic.
Marine fauna is much richer than in the west-
ern part of the bay due to the entrance of
Atlantic water. The Atlantic cod, Gadus cal-
larias, is the main indicator of this difference
in fish fauna.

Marine is included to describe the con-
ditions in the bay. Ungava Bay is noted for
its high tides, which measure 38 feet or more
on spring tides at the mouth of the Koksoak.
These tides expose large areas of tidal flats
which vary from mud to glacial boulders and
sand or bare rock. Ice conditions in the bay
during the summer depend upon the direction
of the winds, a northeast wind will prevent the
floe ice from reaching the Atlantic. Naviga-
tion into the bay normally does not start
before the last week in July and may be
slightly earlier or later depending upon the
winds. Natives start sealing operations by
peterhead boat shortly after the break-up of
ice on the rivers, but native boats are rarely
able to make the trip between Payne Bay and -
Fort Chimo before the middle of July. During
the winter a large part of the bay is closely
packed floe ice, and all navigation into the bay
is usually completed by the first week in
October. Open water is found at the mouth
of the George and the Koksoak River the
entire winter. A part of the turbulent McLelan
Strait which severs Killinek from the mainland
is open all winter, and supports, according to
the natives, a much richer winter bird fauna
than the open water at the mouth of the.
Koksoak.

Climate is generally variable, temperatures
of ca.—45° to 95° F. have been recorded.
Frost may occur during any month of the
year as may light snow flurries. Break-up
on the Koksoak River occurs about the first
week in June, and on the Leaf and Payne
River usually a week to ten days later. The
larger lakes at Fort Chimo are usually not
free of ice until the first week of July. The
larch, Larix laricina, usually leafs out around
the fifteenth of June and the leaves turn
yellow about mid-september. Immense swarms
of mosquitoes and blackflies are usually pres-
ent during the months of July and August
only. The time of snow cover varies however,
but usually extends from the first of November
to the middle of May. Snow cover is approx-

58

imately a meter deep within the tree line. The
year 1948 was noted for a very light snowfall,
and also a dry summer with a lowering of
lake and river levels.

The following is an account of the species
represented in the collection. Sight records,
unsupported by specimens, are listed separ-
ately at the end of the first list.

1. Gavia immer immer (Brinnich).

COMMON LOON.—One specimen was col-
lected five miles north of Adluilluk Fjord on
the east coast of Ungava Bay on July 27, 1948.
Loons were noted as being especially abundant
in the Keglo Bay area on the east coast.
Eskimos do not hunt loons, but would not
pass up a shot at one of them. No use is
made of the loon except as dog food, although
in case of food shortage it would be eaten.
A skin of this species and one of the red-
throated loon was seen in a house at Port
Burwell, probably for use as napkins or mops.

2. Gavia stellata (Pontoppidan).

RED THROATED LOON.—A red-throated
loon was collected on False River on July 3,
1948, which had an almost fully developed egg
in the oviduct. This was the most common
loon along the coast. Groups of two to four
would often be found feeding among the ice
floes in the lower bay during July 1948. This
species was common at Kasigiaksiovik and
also Port Burwell.

3. Fulmarus glacialis glacialis (Linnaeus).
ATLANTIC FULMAR. — A fulmar was
taken on August 3, 1948, about two miles west
of Port Burwell. Flocks of three to eight were
often seen during our stay at Port Burwell
during both 1947 and 1948. This bird is un-
’ known to the natives in the southern part of
the bay, and we obtained no sight records
south of Killinek Island.

4. Branta canadensis. subsp.

CANADA GOOSE.—One downy young from
a nest of three was collected July 3, 1948, at
False River. One of the best nesting places
for geese is the False River area. A single
pair of geese was found nesting on a small
island in the Kasigiaksiovik River. The nest
contained four eggs, and except for one of the
northern eider, it was the only nest on the
island.

Geese are much valued by the natives as
food and much hunting is done during the
nesting season, but I doubt that the Eskimos
obtain many as most of the geese nest inland
away from the coast. I spent the entire sum-

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

mer of 1948 with 6 Eskimo hunters and they
killed only 3 geese.

Flocks of geese were not uncommon along
the Koksoak at Fort Chimo during late Sep-
tember, 1948.

5. Anas acuta tzitzihoa Vieillot.

AMERICAN PINTAIL, UVUGUK. — One
female was collected July 3, 1948, by Simeone
Suppa on False River. This was the only bird
of that species seen at False River. On July
15, 1948, our Eskimo crew obtained 15 male
pintail ducks on an island six miles north of
the Koksoak Estuary. The ducks were all
moulting. The only other record of pintails
were two shot at the trading post on George
River late in August.

6. Clangula hyemalis (Linnaeus). ,

OLD-SQUAW.—One old-squaw duck taken
at Kasigiaksiovik on July 1, 1947, was pres-
erved. Next to the northern eider this is the
most common duck in the coastal region, and
was found to be very common in the south-
ern and western part of the bay. None was
observed on Killinek. A nest containing 8
eggs was discovered by George Johannes on
June 29, 1947, on the coast two miles south of
Pauktorvik Island.

7. Somateria mollissima borealis (Brehm).

NORTHERN EIDER, METERK. — One of
the most characteristic birds of the Ungava
coast is the meterk. It was observed every-
where in abundance except the north and west
coast of Killinek Island. Only two specimens
of this very common duck were collected, one
an adult female at Kasigiaksiovik on July 9,
1947, and the other a downy young collected
on a small island in the False River Estutary,
on July 3, 1948.

On July 7, 1947, Dr. Dunbar and I followed

the Kasigiaksiovik River inland for approxim- ©

ately five miles. In the bend of the stream
was a ‘group of islands and small islets around
which a large flock of female eiders was
observed. All the male eiders had left the
vicinity except for two which were observed
on the river. On July 9, 1947, I returned to
the locality with hip boots in order to wade
out to the islands. The main groups of islets
were surrounded by two channels of cold
swift-flowing water and the water braided its
way between the islands in a shallow foot-
deep layer. The two main channels were
about three to four feet deep, but very
narrow. However, the swiftness of the stream
made it seem unlikely that any predatory

mammals could reach the islands. Ona large

March-April, 1950]

island was located one Canada goose nest
and one eider nest at the edge of a large
rock. Near this large island were numerous
small islets or hummocks through which the
stream wended its shallow way. The largest
islet was approximately 10 x 5 feet and the
smallest a mere hummock of land. The largest
islet had nine eider duck nests and one herring
gull nest. Another islet about 9 x 3 feet had
three eider nests neatly arranged in a row
each about two feet apart. The nests were
formed by scratching a slight hollow into the
grassy turf and filling it with down. In all,
35 nests were observed on these small islets,
7 nests had 5 eggs, 19 had 4 eggs, 7 had 3
eggs, and two nests had 2 eggs. Incubation
was advanced. The female eiders left their
nests very reluctantly, and either feigned
injury to lead one away from the nest or flew
off and circled back to the immediate neigh-
borhood of the nest and would thus have been
easy targets for a rifle. These habits are used
to advantage by the natives in hunting eider.

Characteristically, the northern eider nests
on most of the small islets off the coast of
Ungava Bay. Eider nests on the islands near
the entrance of Hopes Advance Bay were
visited on July 14, 1947. Eiders were nesting
here together with large numbers of arctic
terns and a few guillemots. Natives had col-
lected most of the eggs, but I discovered three
relatively well-concealed nests with 5, 4, and
2 eggs respectively.

False River was visited on July 3, 1948,
with a sealing party of Eskimos. One small

island within the tidal zone contained a
number of moulting black ducks, Anas rub-

ripes. The natives shot a number of black
ducks and one female eider. Two downy
young eider ducks, one of which was collected,
were observed in a pond on the island.

Gyrfalcon Islands were visited on July 15,
1948. Approximately a dozen eider nests were
seen on one island. One nest was observed
with the young ducks just hatching. The
habits of these female eiders were noted as
being wilder than usual as they left the area
when frightened from their nests. Our native
crew obtained only one. Eiders were noted
as nesting on some of the Gyrfalcon Islands
with colonies of herring gulls. An eider duck
with three ycung was seen in the water among
the Gyrfalcon Islands, and although the female
was an easy mark, one of the older natives
prevented a young Eskimo boy from shooting
the mother bird, the only unprompted act of
conservation I have seen among these people.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

&

59

Available information would indicate that
eider ducks nest almost a week to two weeks
earlier in the southern part of the bay than
they do on the Gyrfalcon Islands and farther
north. This is consistent with the fact that
break-up and the clearing of the ice away from
the coast is usually a week to two weeks later.
Most of the eider nesting places observed were
on small islands which supported no small
mammals, such as lemmings and voles.

The northern eider is of great economic
importance to the native population in this
region. They eat the eggs in almost any
stage of incubation, and value the flesh highly.
As a source of food, the eider is the most
valuable bird during the summer, and its place
is taken in late fall and winter by the ptar-
migan. Among a people whose diet is hardly
of subsistance level due to the decrease of
large game in the region, the importance of
this bird cannot be overlooked. There is no
commercial gathering of eider down in the
region but the natives gather down for their
own use. ;

A survey should be undertaken as to num-
bers and the best methods of game manage-
ment in the area concerned. Killing the
female with the eggs can lead only to a
serious decline in numbers. A_ supervised
game management might lead to an authorized
development among the natives of the gather-
ing of eider down by approved methods for
commercial purposes. This additional income
might lead to a reduction in pressure on the
eider population due to an ability to buy
more food. White people, Hudson’s Bay Com-
pany employees in the region, state that the
eider is in no danger in the area, that Eskimos
have hunted them from time immemorial with-
out a noticeable decrease in population, chiefly
because there are large nesting areas which
the natives never visit. This is unlikely to
continue in Ungava Bay with the coming of
power boats. That all may not be well is
indicated by my trip to the False River area
in 1948, for in many places where the natives
said nesting eiders would be numerous few or
mone were seen. However, on the other side
of the ledger travel along the east and south-
east coast of Ungava Bay indicated a fairly
large hatch of young eiders in 1948.

That Eskimos will take to conservation
when they realize it is in their interest to do
so is indicated by information given me by
Tom Crawford, Hudson’s Bay Factor at Payne
Bay. The Eskimos at Repulse Bay on the west
side of Hudson Bay annually collect eggs from

60 THE CANADIAN
the nesting sites of gulls in that area. How-
ever, the Eskimos know how many times they
may take the eggs without destroying the
gulls’ chances of reproducing and thus des-
troying the colony. It seems that such a policy
could be introduced in Ungava Bay with
regard to the eider duck.

8. Somateria spectabilis (Linnaeus).

KING EIDER.—A first-year male was taken
mear the mouth of the Koksoak from a flock
of four feeding among the ice floes on July 1,
1948. This specimen had been feeding on
large isopods. Other adults killed in the False
River area were seen by me. This species is
not nearly so common as the preceding one,
but is definitely not a rare bird in the area.
I have positive records only from the southern

part of the bay, but it probably occurs through- |

aut.

9. Mergus serrator Linnaeus.

RED-BREASTED MERGANSER.—A merg-
anser thought to belong to this species was
seen at Kasigiaksiovik. This is not a common
bird along the coast but is reported to be
common inland by the natives. The only
specimen of this bird that I saw was collected
by the Duncan Hodgson-Bob May party on the
George River during September, 1948.

10. Faleo columbarius columbarius Linnaeus.

EASTERN PIGEON HAWK.—One doubt-
ful sight record made of a small falcon at
George River trading post during August, 1948.
One specimen of this species was collected by
the Duncan Hodgson—Bob May party ca. 100
miles up the George River, and is now de-
posited in the Redpath Museum at McGill
University together with the merganser spe-
cimens mentioned above.

11° Canachites canadensis canadensis
(Linnaeus).
HUDSONIAN SPRUCE GROUSE.—A res-
ident of the region; two specimens were taken,
one at Fort Chimo and the other at Kopaluk
on the George River. This species is not
common near the timberline, but a short dis-
tance inland it increases numerically. Bob
May told the writer in 1948, that when he
first came to George River about five years
ago this species was at the peak of its cycle.
Adults and young were extremely abundant
up river from the post and could be easily
snared.

12. Lagopus lagopus ungavus Riley.
UNGAVA PTARMIGAN.—Willow ptarmigan
were collected at Fort Chimo, Kasigiaksiovik

FIELD-NATURALIST

_ground is inland.

[Vol. 64

and False River. This is one of the most
common residents. of the region. A fair
estimate of number is difficult to obtain during
the summer as they nest inland away from the
settlements and the coast. In 1947 a pair of
willow ptarmigan were taken along the Kasig-
jiaksiovik River in an area almost devoid of
brush; willow and dwarf birch were very small
even in protected localities. The only other
ptarmigan observed during 1947 was a pair
of rock ptarmigan which were taken at Kasig-
iaksiovik. During March and April, 1948, wil-
low ptarmigan were seen around the north end
of Lake Mendry and Lac Berthet in a heavy
growth of willows. Ptarmigan were wild and
difficult to approach, however during April
the majority of the natives were living on
them. During the summer of 1948, birds were
obtained at Fort Chimo, Inukshuktuyak, and
False River. At False River ptarmigan were
found in pairs in small ravines with light
willow growth.

The year 1948 was an extremely favorable
nesting year and during the latter part of
September great numbers of ptarmigan were
seen in the spruce and willow shrubbery north-
east of Fort Chimo. I estimated that in an
hours walk, I saw over a thousand. Flocks
of thirty or more would whir over the trading
post nearly every day.

Ptarmigan is a very important part of
the diet of the Eskimos during its cycle of
abundance. A very easy bird to hunt, I know
of three instances where single Eskimo hunters
killed 50, 32, and 23 birds in a couple of hours
of hunting. Sometimes a hunter could shoot-
into a flock less than twenty feet away without
the birds taking wing. The Indians are as
dependent as the Eskimos on ptarmigan and
probably obtain many more as their hunting
I would consider 600 a con-
servative estimate of the ptarmigan killed in
the vicinity of Fort Chimo during September,
1948. However, this large kill should not be
viewed with alarm, because the birds are
almost untouched on their nesting grounds,
and vast areas of the country are never hunted.

13. Lagepus mutus rupestris (Gmelin).

ROCK PTARMIGAN.—A common resident
of the region. Specimens were taken at
Kasigiaksiovik and False River. The pair
taken at False River on July 3, 1948, was
evidently a non-breeding pair as they were
taken late in the evening, when roosting in a
willow copse. One downy chick was taken >
on July 4, 1948, by Simeone Suppa.

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN

One finds it difficult to compare the ab-
undance of the two species. At False River,
four small ravines with willow growth were
visited, three contained pairs of willow ptar-
migan, the fourth rock ptarmigan. At Lac
Berthet during April, 1948, willow ptarmigan
were noted as being abundant in the heavy
willow growth along the streams, while in an
adjacent barren area with numerous glacial
erratics, a lerge flock of rock ptarmigan were
observed. The rock and willow ptarmigan
are easily distinguishable in the field in winter
plumage.

Eskimos utilize this species for food to a
large extent, but at Fort Chimo the majority
of the ptarmigan killed were willow ptarmigan.
Women as well as men take part in hunting
them.

14. Charadrius hiaticula semipalmata
Bonaparte.
SEMIPALMATED PLOVER. — Extremely
common, often in large flocks on the muddy
tidal flats of the bay. Specimens were col-
lected at Inukshuktuyak and False River. A
fledgling was taken on July 31, 1947, at Inuk-
shuktuyak.

This bird was most often seen in company
with the semipalmated sandpiper, and great
numbers of plovers were seen at Inukshuk-
tuyak, Kasigiaksiovik, False and George Rivers.
On the east coast it was not observed north of
Keglo Bay, probably due to the absence of
mud flats in the area visited. Only an occas-
ional bird was seen on the river flats at Fort
Chimo.

15. Pluvialis dominica dominica (Miiller).

GOLDEN PLOVER.—Two specimens were
taken at Port Burwell, Killinek Island but no
others were seen. Simeone Suppa, an Eskimo,
stated that these birds were not uncommon at
his home on Inukshuktuyak although none
were seen there by any member of the hydro-
graphic survey. This bird is extremely un-
popular with the natives as they state that
it feeds on dog feces. Golden plovers are
never eaten by the natives.

16. eActitis macularia (Linnaeus).

SPOTTED SANDPIPER.—Only one speci-
men of this bird was taken along the Koksoak
at low tide cn September 5, 1948, about three
miles north of Fort Chimo. No other birds
belonging to this species were recognized.

17. Erolia melanotes (Vieillot).
PECTORAL SANDPIPER.—Two were col-
lected on a grassy little pond beside the old

FIELD-NATURALIST 61

R.C.M.P. house at Port Burwell, a female on
August 10, and a male on August 11, 1948.
Several natives were observed throwing rocks
at this pair of birds. Although they were
frightened off repeartedly, they kept retur-
ning. No other birds belonging to this species
were recognized.

18. Erolia fuscicollis (Vieillot).

WHITE-RUMPED ‘SANDPIPER. — Three
specimens were taken at the mouth of the
Koksoak on August 31, 1947. The flock was
in migration and the birds were excessively
fat. No additional records of this species were
obtained.

19. Ereunetes pusillus (Linnaeus).

SEMIPALMATED SANDPIPER. — This is
the common breeding sandpiper in the area.
Adult specimens were collected at several
localities along the coast. A downy was taken
along the edge of a pond at Inukshuktuyak on
July 8, 1948.

This bird was extremely common at Inuk-
shuktuyak and Kasigiaksiovik. At Kasigiak-
siovik, semipalmated sandpipers were found
nesting beside small ponds three to four miles
from the sea. Nearly every little pond had
a pair of sandpipers around it. Two nests were
discovered. The nests were hollowed out in
the moss near the edge of the pond and con-
tained a few dwarf birch leaves as lining.
Each nest contained four eggs, and incubation
was only slightly advanced on July 7, 1947.
Sandpipers were common on the George River
estuary and were recorded as far north as
Keglo Bay on the east coast.

20. Lobipes lobatus (Linnaeus).

NORTHERN PHALAROPE.—Adults were
collected at False River, Inukshuktuyak and
near Pauktorvik Island on the west coast. A
very common bird throughout most of the
region visited. During the first week of July,
1947, four alighted daily on a small pond in
front of our tent at Kasigiaksiovik. The birds
were extremely tame and one could approach
to the edge of the pond without frightening
them. The most conspicuous form of life in
the pond were numerous phyllopods.

21. Larus hyperboreus hyperboreus Gunnerus.

GLAUCOUS ‘GULL. — An adult and an
immature were collected on a small islet be-
tween Bush Island and the northern tip of
Killinek Island. The immature bird could
fly only short distances when captured on
August 4, 1948. Other immatures were caught
by hand. No other species of gull were noted

62 THe CANADIAN

as nesting in the immediate vicinity of Killinek
Island. On an island at the entrance of Payne
Bay a single pair of glaucous gulls was ob-
served to be nesting with a colony of herring
gulls. In all colonies examined in the south
part of the bay only herring gulls were re-
cognized.

22. Larus argentatus smithsonianus Coues.

HERRING GULL.—Next to the northern
eider, the herring gull is the most character-
istic of the large birds along the shores of
Ungava Bay. It breeds on all suitable rocky
islands at least as far north as Payne Bay on
the west coast and within fifteen miles of Kil-
linek on the east. Inland this bird nests around
many of the lakes and streams.

A nest of this bird was observed on a small
islet in the Kasigiaksiovik River together with
mine eider duck nests. The young were just
picking the shell on July 9, 1947. Gulls nest-
ing on the Gyrfalcon Islands were found to
vary in nesting times. On July 14, 1948, young
birds were found in the water, one nest with
the young just picking the shell, and unhatched
eggs.

A young gull on the Gyrfalcon Islands
disgorged four young sculpins, Myoxocephalus
scorpius. This common littoral sculpin along
the coasts of Ungava Bay is probably the
principal food of the herring gull.

23. Rissa tridactyla tridactyla (Linnaeus).

ATLANTIC KITTIWAKE. — Two adults
were collected from a flock of about thirty
birds, who followed our small boat during
plankton hauling west of Killinek Island on
August 24, 1947. A native boy shot a single
specimen, which appeared around our boat
in Burwell Harbor on August 3, 1948. This
bird apparently does not nest anywhere in
Ungava Bay, although that it may nest on the
Button Islands to the north of Killinek Island
is indicated by native reports. It apparently
does not occur in the southern part of Ungava
Bay even during migration as the bird was
unknown by our crew, who lived in the south-
ern part of the bay.

24. Sterna paradisaea Pontoppidan.
ARCTIC TERN.—A common nesting bird
in local areas of the bay. Adults were collected
at False River and Tunulik. This bird is.
' extremely common along the southern coast
from False River to Tunulik, and certain
islands in that region are known to the natives
as “tern islands”. Another nesting site was
small islands near Hopes Advance Bay. No

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

nesting colonies were discovered north of
George River on the east coast.

While anchored off some small uncharted
islands near the entrance of Hopes Advance
Bay, the native crew went ashore to gather
eggs. Tern nests were found to be so numer-
ous in the grassy turf that it was difficult to
walk without stepping on eggs. One or two
eggs were laid in a cavity pressed into the
grass. Incubation was slight or none, and
although we stayed anchored by the islands
from July 12 to 15, 1947, terns flew over the
island only once and never alighted on the
islands. Northern eider and a few guillemots
were also nesting on the island.

Natives prize these eggs despite their small
size, and the natives took 116 tern eggs off
the small island described above. Tern eggs
taken by natives on July 4, 1948, were seen at
False River.

25. Uria lomvia lemvia (Linnaeus).

BRUNNICH’S MURRE. — Three murres
were collected in Leaf Bay. The distribution
of this bird in the bay outside its nesting area
depends to a large extent on the icing condi-
tion in the bay at any particular time.
only nesting place in Ungava Bay is the cliffs
of Akpatok Island at the northern entrance.
When ice was thick in Leaf Bay this bird was
extremely common feeding among the ice
floes. However, on the return trip in 1947
when the ice had been blown out into the bay
no birds were seen.

Especially noted was the attraction of float-
ing ice to the sea birds in Ungava bay. An
isolated berg would usually have several

murres and guillemots feeding around the

edges. Murres would usually be found feed-
ing close to the floes and not out in the middle
of large leads and air holes among the floes.
Murres examined were found to be feeding
chiefly on amphipods and an uwunindentified
small fish. No use of this bird for food is
made by the native population.

26. Cepphus grylle subsp.

BLACK GUILLEMOT.—This is the most
common resident in the bay and during, the
winter guillemots are the only birds that occur
in the open water near the mouth of the Kok-
soak and George River. It nests on certain
rocky coastal islands where it can hide its
eggs under overhanging rocks. Two of the
most abundant concentrations of guillemots
are Inuksuli, a small island near the Gyr-
falcon Islands, and the southeast part of the
pay.

The

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN

Several nests were discovered on the small
uncharted islands off the entrance of Hopes
Advance Bay. The nests had two to three
eggs, and incubation was slight. The natives
will gather the eggs, but the birds are left
unmolested because of their poor taste. The
first white bird observed was a young of the
year seen on September 1, 1948, in the south-
east part of the bay.

27. Asio flammeus flammeus (Pontoppidan).

SHORT-EARED OWL. — One adult speci-
men was taken at Fort Chimo on September 5,
1948. None was seen in the area previous to
that date. After the above date and through-
out the remainder of September this species
was very common at Fort Chimo and as many
as 18 were seen flying over the terrace at
dusk. No owls were seen the previous year.
This large number of birds might be attrib-
uted to the large increase in vole Microtus
pennsylvanicus, population over that of the
previous year.

28. Eremophila alpestris alpestris (Linnaeus).

NORTHERN HORNED LARK.—A common
nesting bird throughout the region. An adult
female collected together with a fledgling
two miles south of Pauktorvik Island on June
29, 1947, contained three egg yolks in the ovid-
uct which would indicate two nestings for
the year.

This species was seen at all points along
the coasts. Along the flat west coast the bird
was found to be more common than the pipit.
At Port Burwell and along the east coast
the situation was reversed.

29. Perisoreus canadensis nigricapillus
Brooks.

CANADA JAY.—A not uncommon winter
resident in the bush region. At Fort Chimo
during March and April, two or three of these
birds would be seen near every native en-
campment. A short time after setting up
tents in the spruce trees around lakes in the
region, Canada jays would appear.

Only three sight records of this species
were made during the summer time. Several
of these birds were seen at George River
during August, 1948, when they came out of
the spruce trees to feed on char. Another
was seen at Kopaluk on the George River.
At Fort Chimo no birds were sighted during
1947 and only one during 1948. The rarity at
Fort Chimo is probably due to the extensive
cutting of black spruce in that area.

The Eskimos have a superstition that the
finding of this bird’s nest brings bad luck.

"was possibly from this nest.

FIELD-NATURALIST 63

This superstition has been commented upon
by Turner. Bill Saunders, a native of the
region, stated that a number of years ago one
of the Adams boys, a family name of a group of
Eskimos at Fort Chimo, saw the eggs of the
Canada jay and commented upon the fact.
That same spring he drowned in the Koksoak
in a boat accident. All the natives however
do not believe in this superstition. Alex
Gordon, another native, stated that he had
found a nest with three eggs at Blueberry
Creek during April. Blueberry Creek is a
small stream about a mile north of Fort Chimo ©
where the post obtains its winter drinking
water.

30. Parus hudsonicus hudsonicus (Forster).

HUDSONIAN CHICKADEE. — Five adult
chickadees were taken in a spruce stand near
Lake Mendry and Lac Berthet during March
and April, 1948. Although this species was
particularly watched for during 1947 none
was seen. In 1948, a stand of black spruce
was visited three miles south of Fort Chimo,
and one was obtained on June 25, 1948. At —
Kopaluk on the George River it was found to
be common in the black spruce which bordered
a small rocky stream.

Winter specimens of this species were
taken from small flocks, none of which con-
tained more than five birds. A conservative
estimate would be only 12 chickadees sighted
during a 27-day stay during March and April,
1948.

This bird was never seen on the terrace at
Fort Chimo due to the extensive cutting of
black spruce in the area.

31. Turdus migratorius nigridcus
_ Aldrich and Nutt.

BLACK-BACKED ROBIN.—The robin is
one of the more common birds in the bush
region. Adults were taken at George River
and Fort Chimo. In this region it is one of
the wariest of birds and is extremely difficult
to approach. The country between Lake Men-
dry and Fort Chimo is largely barren
rock, but wherever little local swamps or
streams are formed and trees find ecesis, this
bird occurs.

Two nests were seen, one in a spruce tree
in the native cemetery at Fort Chimo which
contained two young birds and one infertile
egg on June 26, 1947. When I returned nearly
a month later the young birds had flown. An
immature robin taken from a group of two
adults in the same vicinity on July 28, 1947,
The other nest
was observed on the wooden ledge of a ruined

64 THE CANADIAN
building at Fort Chimo. This nest contained
three eggs on July 21, 1947. A few days later
the nest was destroyed, possibly by native
boys.

32. Hylocichla minima minima (Lafresnaye).

GRAY-CHEEKED THRUSH — Two speci-
mens were taken, one at Fort Chimo on July
26, 1947, and the other a juvenile taken at
Kopaluk, George River, the latter part of
August, 1948. This is not a common bird in
the region and is unknown to many of the
matives, despite its distinctive call. No addi-
tional sight records were obtained, but during
August 1947 it was heard calling both at Fort
Chimo and George River.

33. Regulus calendula calendula (Linnaeus).

EASTERN RUBY-CROWNED KINGLET.—
Two kinglets were collected, one at George
River Hudson’s Bay Post on July 25, 1948, and
one at Kopaluk on August 31, 1948. No other
kinglets were recognized. This moves the
known range of the ruby-crowned kinglet from
central Quebec to the limit of trees in the
George River area.

34. Anthus spinoletta rubescens (Tunstall).

AMERICAN PIPIT. — An extremely com-
mon bird throughout the barren ground region
along the coast of Ungava Bay. On the east
coast this species was found to be extremely
common from Keglo Bay to Killinek Island.
On Killinek Island it was much more common
than the horned lark. This bird was very
abundant around the trading post at George
River during late August. Large flocks were
common at Fort Chimo during mid-September,
1948.

35. Lanius excubitor borealis Vieillot.

NORTHERN SHRIKE.—Two shrikes were
taken on September 9, 1948, at the Hudson’s
Bay Post at Fort Chimo. No shrikes were
seen previous to this date, and none was seen
in 1947. In the remainder of September and
until our departure on October 5, 1948, four
to five shrikes were seen nearly every day.
The shrike is apparently not a winter res-
ident, as inquiries among the natives during
March and April did not reveal its presence.
John McLean reported a butcher bird as a
winter resident in Ungava. However, McLean
traveled 2s far south as Hamilton Inlet. Flocks
of red-polls are certainly adequate to support
this species during winter months.

36. Dendroica coronata coronata (Linnaeus).
MYRTLE WARBLER.—Two myrtle warb-
lers were taken at George River trading post

FIELD-NATURALIST

ot

and Kopaluk. Others were seen in spruce
habitat at George River. None was taken or
sighted at Fort Chimo, which I attributed to
the heavy cutting of black spruce in that
neighborhood.

37. Dendroica striata (Forster).

BLACK-POLL WARBLER. — This is the
commonest warbler in the region. Black-poll
werblers were very numerous at Fort Chimo
during 1947. Adults were collected at Fort
Chimo and George River. At Fort Chimo this
bird was found abundant on the terrace on
which the post is situated in the willow, larch,
and dwarf birch association. This warbler
was also seen in black spruce habitat.

38. Wilsonia pusilla ‘pusilla (Wilson).

WILSON’S WARBLER.—Wilson’s warblers
were noted in numbers at George River trading
post, on August 27, 1947, in the willow thickets
near the Hudson’s Bay factor’s home. None
was seen on a previous visit to this locality
on August 7 and 12, 1947, and none was seen
in 1948 although extensive collecting was done
in the region from August 21 to 31, 1948, and
it seems highly unlikely that this brightly
colored bird would be overlooked. These are
the northernmost recorded occurrences of this
species east of Hudson’s Bay.

39. Pinicola enucleator leucura (Miiller).

PINE GROSBEAK.—Pine Grosbeaks were
reported by Turner (1885) to be common in
the Fort Chimo region. No grosbeaks were
sighted by me anywhere in the Ungava Bay
area. Bob May reported seeing this bird at
Kopaluk, but two trips there late in August
were unsuccessful. I am indebted to the
Duncan Hodgson-Bob May party for two speci-
mens collected 96 miles up the George River
on September 13, 1948. Possibly in heavy
stands of spruce this bird is still present at
Fort Chimo, although spruce cutting has mater-
ially altered the habitat in the Fort Chimo
neighborhood.

40. Acanthis flammeus flammeus (Linnaeus).

COMMON REDPOLL.—Two species of red-
polls abound in the Koksoak and George River
region of Ungava. The similarity of the two
species makes recognition in the field un-
reliable, however, of ten summer specimens
collected at random, 9 proved to be flammeus
and the other Acanthis hornemanni exilipes.
This would indicate that flammeus is the more
common nesting bird.

One fledging was obtained on June 25,
1948, at Fort Chimo. Two other juveniles

[Vol. 64 -

ee a a oe

ee ea ee
< rere

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN
were taken along the tree line on the Nepihjee
River on July 8, 1948, in a dense growth of
willow. Of eight specimens taken in late
March and early April, 1948, only one was this
species.

41. Acanthis hernemanni exilipes (Coues).

HOARY RED-POLL.—One breeding female
of this bird was collected at Fort Chimo on
June 19, 1948. In the oviduct was a fully
developed. egg. Other eggs of this species
or the preceding one were brought into camp
by the native boys at Fort Chimo on June 19,
1948. One other summer specimen of this
bird was taken a mile north of the tree line
at Inukshuktuyak in dwarf birch on July 8,
1948.

Enormous flocks of redpolls were seen
during March and April of 1948. Seven of
eight specimens collected then are ewilipes.
On cold windy days these birds would seek
shelter of the more heavily timbered valleys.
One flock estimated to contain over a thousand
birds was seen in a small protected valley
containing spruce and larch about five miles
south of Fort Chimo. On quieter and more
sunny days these birds fed in the more open
areas. These birds were found to be feeding
almost altogether on one species of seed
belonging to the Ericaceae. Eskimos stated
that redpolls were abundant all winter.

Very few redpolls of any Species were
noted at Fort Chimo from September 10 to
27, 1948. However, on September 27, 1948,
large and noisy flocks appeared on the ter-
race at Fort Chimo. Most of these birds were
much lighter in color then the majority of
the nesting birds, but a few dark individuals
were sighted in the group.

42. Passerculus sandwichensis labradorius
} Howe.
. LABRADOR SAVANNAH SPARROW. —
Adult savannah sparrows were taken at Inuk-

shuktuyak, Kasigiaksiovik, Fort Chimo, and

George River. On September 5, 1947, two
specimens were taken from a large group near

- Fort Chimo.

A common bird on both sides of the tree
line. This bird was especially abundant at
Kasigiaksiovik during July, 1947.

43. Junco hyemalis hyemalis (Linnaeus).
SLATE-COLORED JUNCO.—Juncos were
seen and taken only at Kopaluk on the George
River on August 31, 1948. Three specimens
were taken and several others seen at Kopaluk.

FIELD-NATURALIST 65

44, Spizella arborea arborea (Wilson).
EASTERN TREE SPARROW.—Most com-
mon summer resident of the bush area and
along the tree line. (Several tree sparrows
were collected at Inukshuktuyak at least two
miles from the nearest spruce trees on the
timber line. It was common in the dwarf
birch and willows in the region of the tree
line. Tree sparrows were abundant at Fort
Chimo as late as September 25, 1948.

45 Zonotrichia leucophrys leucophrys
(Forster).
WHITE-CROWNED SPARROW. — The
white-crowned sparrow was the most con-
spicuous member of the avian fauna at Fort
Chimo. It rivals the redpolls and the tree
sparrows in numbers. It was found common-
ly along the tree line on the Nepihjee River,
and two specimens were taken two miles north
of the tree line in very scanty willow and
dwarf birch growth.

- A nest of young birds was found at the tree
line on the Nepihjee River on July 8, 1948,
Another nest containing five eggs, was discov:
ered at the base of a vertical rock wall two
feet in height on June 25, 1948.

46. Passerella iliaca iliaca (Merrem).
EASTERN FOX SPARROW. — Fox spar-
rows are rare in the region. Five adults were
taken at the George River Hudscn’s Bay post
and one at Fort’Chimo. ‘Several natives at

_ Fort Chimo stated that this was the first time

they had seen this species. Fox sparrows
are not familizr to many of the George River
natives, although I found it a much more
common bird in that area. This is the first
record of this species from Fort Chimo. Except
for a group of six seen at George River during
late August, 1947, this bird was usually seen
singly.

47. Calcarius lappenicus lapponicus
(Linnaeus).
LAPLAND LONGSPUR.—A very common
inhabitant of the barrens, rivaling in abund-
ance other ground birds such as horned larks
and pipits, especially at Kasigiaksiovik and
Inukshuktuyak. Adult specimens were col-
lected. One fledgling was taken at Inuk-
shuktuyak on July 8, 1948.

48. Plectreophenax nivalis nivalis (Linnaeus).

EASTERN SNOW BUNTING.—A common
bird, which was usually seen in pairs through-
out most of the barrens during nesting season. -
At Killinek, flocks of adults and young were
seen every day during our stay in 1948. On

parren island.

66 THE CANADIAN

rainy days, snow buntings would be seen
crouching under the shelter of overhanging
rocks. Next to the pipit, snow buntings were
the most abundant bird on Killinek Island.

The snow bunting is the first migrant to
return in the spring. Native reports were
that snow buntings had preceded my arrival at
Fort Chimo on March 21, 1948. My first sight
record was on April 13, 1948, when they
appeared in abundance around the Hudson’s

Bay post at Fort Chimo. This period was

well before the spring thaw, and temperatures
as low as 24° below zero were still being
recorded at Fort Chimo.

SIGHT RECORDS

The following birds were identified by sight
only.

1. Anas rubripes Brewster.

BLACK DUCK. — Twenty males of this
species were obtained by the natives on a
small island in the False River Estuary. The
ducks were moulting on July 3, 1948. Espe-
cially noted was the amazing ability of these
birds to find hiding places on an almost
This duck is considered the
best edible duck by the natives, but the numb-
ers obtained do not approach the number of
eider ducks.

2. Buteo lagopus s. johannis (Gmelin).

AMERICAN ROUGH-LEGGED HAWK.—A
not uncommon bird throughout the entire
region. Nesting pairs were seldom out of
sight on either coast during 1948. The hawk
population was greater in 1948 than in 1947.
A nest with downy young was observed near
Fort Chimo on June 30, 1948.

Eskimos believe that the disturbance of this
hawk’s nest causes bad weather, especially
strong winds. Natives also advised against
shooting this bird, claiming, according to my
informant, that bad weather would result.

3. Falco peregrinus anatum Bonaparte.
DUCK HAWK. — This species was seen at
Kasigiaksiovik, Fort Chimo, George River,
and Polunin Inlet on the east coast. A not
uncommon bird throughcut the region.

4, Stercerarius ‘parasiticus (Linnaeus).

PARASITIC JAEGER. — A single sight
record from near Pauktorvik Island on the
west coast on June 29, 1947.

5. Nyctea scandiaca (Linnaeus).
SNOWY OWL.—Three snowy owls were
observed regularly in the meadow at Kasigiak-

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

siovik during the first week in July, 1947. One
was observed in September east of Fort Chimo.
No snowy owls were seen in 1948, although
the small mammal population had taken a
great upswing. However I spent less time
ashore in suitable localities in 1948.

6. Corvus corax principalis Ridgway.

RAVEN.—A common bird throughout the
region, this species nests regularly at George
River and Port Burwell.
April, 1948, this bird was very common around
the airfield at Fort Chimo.

DISCUSSION

A total of 48 species is represented by
skins from the region and 6 by sight only.
The region represented is diverse and grades
from tree growth to tundra. Barren ground
conditions extend within the tree line on
exposed and elevated areas.

The most common summer residents at
Fort Chimo and George River were tree Spar-
rows, Spizella arborea arborea; white-crowned
sparrows, Zonotrichia leucophrys leucophrys,
redpolls, Acanthis sp.; black-poll warblers,
Dendroica striata; and robins, Turdus migra-
torius nigrideus. All species taken at Fort
Chimo were also taken at George River. How-
ever, additional species which were taken at
George River but not Fort Chimo, are ruby-
crowned kinglets, Regulus calendula calendu-
la; juncos, Junco hyemalis hyemalis, myrtle
warblers, Dendroica coronata coronata; and
Wilson’s warbler, Wilsonia pusilla pusilla.
One reason for the occurrence of additional
species near the George River Post is the
non-disturbance of natural habitat due to
spruce cutting. Secondly, George River
courses through a much more rugged topo-
graphy than does the Koksoak. This provides
better protection and a much more luxuriant
vegetation with the introduction of species
unknown on the lower Koksoak. Ornitho-
logically the George River valley is practical-
ly unknown; reports from Bob May, who has
traveled extensively on the river indicate
that many birds occur here far north of their
known range. Perhaps when the fauna is
well known, nearly every species occurring
in the valley of the Hamilton River will also
be found on the George River.

A visit was made to the tree line on July
8, 1948. In this region only the black spruce,
Picea mariana, was present. Breeding birds

observed were white-crowned sparrows, red-

I

During March and

ae ey fe
ii

March-April, 1950] THe CANADIAN
polls, and tree sparrows. Tree sparrows were
the most common bird.and would be seen
2 to 3 miles north of the tree line. White-
crowned sparrows would be seen only as
single individuals north of the tree line.
Redpolls, Acanthis hornemanni exilipes were
seen only once on Inukshuktuyak north of the
tree line, this probably being due to the
absence of willow growth in the area.

_ Coastal islands were the nesting places of
herring gulls, guillemots, arctic terns, north-
ern eider, and glaucous gulls. Herring gulls,
nested in the southern part of* the bay, while
in the vicinity of Killinek Island only glaucous
gulls nested.

Large mud flats along the coast were in-
habited chiefly by semipalmated sandpipers
and semipalmated plovers.

FIELD-NATURALIST

67

The common ground birds in the tundra
region were lapland longspurs, horned larks,

and pipits. In the Killinek area snow buntings
replaced longspurs.
BIBLIOGRAPHY

McLean, John. Notes of a Twenty-five Years’
Service in the Hudson’s Bay Territory.
Vol. 2, London, 1849.

Turner, Lucien M. List of the Birds of
Labrador, Including Ungava, East Main,
Moose, and Gulf Districts of the Hudson
Bay Company, together with the Island of
Anticosti. Proceedings of the U.S.’ Nat.
Mus., Vol, VIII, 1885, pp. 233-254.

Hantsch, Bernhard. Beitrag zur Kenntnis der
Vogelwelt des Nordostlichsten Labradors.
Journal fiir Ornithologie, 1908, No. 2, pp.
177-202; and No. 3, pp. 307-392.

WILLIAM HENRY MOUSLEY
1865-1949

L. Mcl. TErriri
Montreal, Quebec

ILLIAM HENRY MOUSLEY was born

at Taunton, Somersetshire, England, on
February 17, 1865, the son of William Henry
and Sarah Anne (Whittle) Mousley. He was
educated at Clifton College in Bristol and later
_entered the business of his father, a railway
contractor. In 1885, he married Alice Maud
Mary Lake of Wakefield, Yorkshire. They
were blessed with the large family of eight
daughters and four sons, of whom five
daughters and two sons survive. His wife
died in 1938,

Mr. Mousley—‘“Henry”, as he was famil-
iarly known to his friends — became inter-
ested in natural history at the early age of
six upon finding his first bird’s nest. Com-

ing to Canada with his family in 1910, he

settled at Hatley in Compton County in the
Eastern Townships of Quebec where he
found ample opportunity to develop his
studies in natural history, as there had been
very little previous research in the district.

_ During this period (1910-1924) his list of

birds reached 194, Although birds were his
chief interest he was also a botanist and an
entomologist of distinction, specializing in
orchids, ferns, and butterflies. Through his

\

initiative, Hatley became quite famous for
its orchids, forty-three species and varieties
having been found there. Probably his many
studies of the orchids, published in various
journals in Canada, the United States and
England, are amongst his most valuable con-
tributions to science,

Henry Mousley was always tremendously
_thrilled at a new discovery — a new bird
habit, a new variety of orchid or fern, an
extension of range, or, in fact, anything
pertaining to his chosen subjects that had
not already been described. I shall always
remember the excitement in his voice when
he made such a find one day on the slopes
of Orford Mountain. “I’ve got it, I’ve got it!”
he cried. He had seen a butterfly lay an
egg which had never been found before. It
was merely the egg of an insect, but new to
science.

Moreover, Henry Mousley never neglected
_to place his discoveries on record, and his
published papers on birds, butterflies, ferns
and orchids, numbering over one hundred
and thirty, now form a fitting tribute to his
memory. They are to be found in many

68

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

WILLIAM HENRY MOUSLEY
1865 - 1949

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN
publications, notably The Auk, The Canadian
Field-Naturalist, The Wilson Bulletin, and in
numerous other journals more or less dev-
oted to natural history.

Mr. Mousley’s interest in birds com-
menced in Cumberland, England, in 1871,
upon his discovery, at the age of six, of a
nest of the Spotted Flycatcher. As the first
bird to greet him on his arrival in Hatley
was another flycatcher, the Kingbird, it is
fitting that his latest published article, which
appeared in the Provancher Society’s Annual
Report for 1946, was on the nesting of the
Kingbird.

This detailed description well illustrates
the thoroughness of the author who was
always most meticulous in his studies. His
records attest to this. These are contained
in several handsomely bound volume, in the
form of.reprints of his articles, with photo-
graphs, supplemented by many notes inscribed
in his exceptionally neat and legible hand-
writing. One of these, on the flora and fauna
of ‘Hatley, was donated to the Wood Library
of Ornithology, McGill University. Others
have been presented to the Provincial Mu-
seum at Quebec.

For several years I had known Henry
Mousley only as a correspondent. Then, one
cay, I met him by appointment on his arrival
in Montreal. His features were wholly un-
known to me, yet I unhesitatingly picked
him out in the crowd as he stepped from the
train. Possibly the natural unaffectedness of
his friendly, smiling countenance was the
magnet. It seemed unthinkable that a frown
would dare to cross that serenely smiling
face, yet, on occasion, when thoroughly
aroused by just anger, the blood would surge
and the keen eyes flash. However, these
occasions were few. He was most unself-
conscious, of which there is abundant proof
in the group photographs taken at the num-
erous meetings of the American Ornithol-
ogists’ Union he attended. He was a full
member of the Union.

After coming to Montreal in 1924, Mr.
Mousley became a member of the Province
of Quebec Society for the Protection of
Birds, taking a prominent part in the various
activities of the Society. He served as
Honorary Treasurer for twenty years and
was made a life member upon his retirement
from the Board. We have greatly . missed

FIELD-NATURALIST 69

_his genial presence at our meetings and now

that we can no longer drop in for a chat
with him in his home, amidst his books and
pictures and other treasures, we shall miss
him even more.

Somewhat late in life, Mr. Mousley
kecame interested in photography as an aid
to his studies of birds and plants. Photography
became almost a passion with him and in the
course of time he built up a notable collection
of mounted enlargements, -numbering over
five hundred and fifty. The majority of these
are now in the Provincial Museum at Quebec.
He also had many slides prepared for use
in his lectures. These were donated to McGill
University for such use as might be found
for them. His collections of birds and their
rests and eggs are for the most part in the
National Museum at Ottawa, and the Redpath
Museum at McGill University, while his plant
Specimens are in various herbariums in
Canada and the United States, chiefly at the
Montreal Botanical Gardens and in the
National Museum.

For a number of years, Mr. Mousley was
employed in the Wood Library of Ornithol-
ogy at McGill. It was while compiling a list
of drawings and paintings in the Wood
Library that he discovered some interesting
Grawings depicting the flexibility of the
upper mandible of the Woodcock’s bill. It
was this discovery that induced him to
frepare his “Historical Review of the Wood-
cock” which was published as a special num-
ber of the Canadian Field-Naturalist (vol.
49, no. 1, 1935).

The majority of Mr. Mousley’s published
articles on birds, however, concerned their
intimate home life. He spent a great deal
of time watching them at their nests and
added much to our knowledge of their habits. —
Even in the last years of his life, although,
raturally, less active, he still made peviodical
trips with his camera to favoured haunts.
Adding a new bird to his photographic tro-
phies always provided a thrill.

One of the notable incidents in Mr. Mous-
ley’s life occurred in 1937 when he became
a great grandfather. Would that he could
have achieved his hope to see his great great
grand children! But this was not to be. The
recurrence of an illness resulted in his death
cn September 22, 1949, in the Montreal Gen-
eral Hospital,

70 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

THE RING-NECKED DUCK (AYTHYA COLLARIS) IN THE
COUNTIES OF KAMOURASKA AND L’ISLET,
PROVINCE OF QUEBEC? °

ABBE RENE TANGUAY
Ste. Anne de la Pocatiére, Quebec

H OR SEVERAL YEARS past I have been
investigating the fauna of this region.
For this purpose I have traversed, in almost
every direction, the bank of the St. Lawren-
ce, the fields, the wood and the lakes. In
January, 1945, one of my friends, Mr. R.
‘ Cayouette, of the Charlesbourg Zoological
Garden, published in ‘The Auk’, the third
authentic record of the breeding of the Ring-
necked Duck in the Province of Quebec. I
immediately conceived the idea of making
investigations in our region in order to
throw some light on this matter.

I began by consulting suitable books for
information on the species and its environ-
-ment. Then I started my field investigations,
in the course of which I visited the follow-
ing lakes and bog:

Lake Bourgelas

Green or Gamache Lake

Star or Crowned Lake

Meadow Lake

Otter Lake

The Bog
Green, Crowned, and Meadow Lakes are in
L’Islet County; the others mentioned are in
Kamouraska County. I began my search on
the shore of Green Lake. This lake, which
is readily accessible, is in the south-eastern
part of Ste. Louise parish. It is a mile long
and five or six hundred feet wide. A sheer
cliff about 75 feet high, crowned with aspen
and birch, overhangs the north shore. The
south shore is wooded; aquatic vegetation is
abundant at both ends of the lake.

At this lake, both at the end of April and
in mid-May, 1946, I found two adult Ring-
necked Ducks, which I was able to observe
at leisure. Thus I knew that the species was
to be found there, at least in spring migra-
tion. Unfortunately I was unable to continue
my observations that year.

Next I went to the bog. This bog, of
small extent, a few hundred feet long and

1) Received for publication May 2, 1949.

about 75 feet wide, contains a few scattered
cedars and black spruce, with aquatic plants
bordering a pond. On the second visit, July
4, 1947, I found a nest containing 8 eggs and,
like a bird of prey, I took two of them. A
little later, about July 18, at the same place,
I caught a glimpse of a mother duck and
her five ducklings, which swam about on the
pond, and on perceiving me, hid quickly
among the bulrushes without my being able
to identify them with certainty.

These successive discoveries induced me
to continue my investigations. On July 13,
1947, I visited Otter Lake, at Lapointe, on’
the Transcontinental railway line. This shal-
low lake, flecked with yellow water lilies
and algal growth is a mile and a quarter
long. A strange duck, I was told, had been
observed on this lake. We set out in a canoe
to look for the family and this time I suc-
ceeded in capturing a duckling in a net.

On September 23, 1947, I shot at Green
Lake what I took to be a young Ring-necked
Duck, and on the 25th I obtained another.
After numerous trips to very different local-
ities, I then had in my possession plenty of
promising material, namely, a photograph
of a duck’s nest, two eggs, a duckling, and
two immature ducks.

’ As for the young ducks taken in the
autumn of 1947, I was practically certain of
their identification. For greater certainty, I
sent one specimen to Madame B. Langelier,
at the Provincial Museum and I consulted
Dr. H. F. Lewis and Mr. W. Labrie. They
confirmed my identification. The birds I had
were Ring-necked Ducks. As for the eggs,
I first sent one to Messrs. Terrill and Smith,
ornithological experts at Montreal. Although
they were not positive, they thought it was
an egg of a Ring-necked Duck. A second egg
was sent first to Madame Langelier at Quebec
and thence to Montreal. The opinion was the
same in each case — an egg of a “bluebill”,
but without being sure of the exact species.
Not being satisfied with this conclusion, I

dee, 9; Eastern Mockingbird, 1;

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN
sent an egg to Mr. W. Earl Godfrey, of the
National Museum of Canada. This in -part
is what he wrote to me:

“The two downy ducklings and one
egg, which you mentioned in your letter
of January 22 as being sent to me for
‘identification, have arrived in good con-
dition. :

“No. 395 is Anas acuta tzitzihoa

“No. 558 is Aythya collaris

“The egg however, is a difficult thing
to identify certainly. While I could not
be absolutely sure, I believe this to be
the egg of Aythya collaris, the Ring-
necked Duck.”

After two years of investigation, I had
the joy of seeing my efforts crowned with
success beyond my hopes. I could, with the
utmost certainty, and with proof to support

FIELD-NATURALIST 71

it, claim the fourth record of the breeding
of the Ring-necked Duck in the Province of
Quebec.

The nest may be described as follows:

Site: About 75 feet from the pond and
about one foot from the inlet, on the ground,
well hidden by small bushes or tall veget-
ation, presented a rather flattened appearan-
ce.

Dimensions: Outside diameter, 10% in-
ches; inside diameter, 7 inches; depth, about
4 inches.

Materials: Grass or straw, lichens and
moss, lined with a few fragments of rushes
lightly covered with down.

Eggs: Eight in number, deep olive or
buff, oval in shape, 2.26 inches by 1.57 in-
ches. They were normally placed. One egg
weighed one and ten-sixteenths ounces.

CHRISTMAS BIRD CENSUS — 1949!

Wolfville, Kings Co., N.S.—(Within radius
of 10 miles). — Dec. 24, 1949; 9 a.m. to 4.30
p.m.; temp. about 30°F.; ground bare; no
wind; approx. 50 miles by auto with frequent
side trips on foot; two observers. Canada
Goose, 210; Black Duck, 31; American Mer-
ganser, 23; Eastern Red-tailed Hawk, 1;
Ruffed Grouse, 2; Partridge, 25; Ring-necked
Pheasant, 34; Great Black-backed Gull, 12;

Herring Gull, 225; Great Horned Owl, 1;

Northern Flicker, 2; Northern Horned Lark,
1; Northern Blue Jay, 40; Northern Raven,
4; Eastern Crow, 312; Black-capped Chicka-
Common
Starling, 66; English Sparrow, 191; Common
Red-poll, 26; Eastern Goldfinch, 33; Slate-
colored Junco, 56; Eastern Tree Sparrow, 7;
White-throated Sparrow, 1; Eastern Song
Sparrow, 7. Total 25 Species, 1320 individuals.
— R. W. Tufts, John Erskine.

Port Mouton, Queens Co., N.S.—(Within
radius of 6 miles). — Dec. 25, 1949; 9 a.m.
to 2.30 p.m.; temp. 14 to 22° F.; ground bare,
slight N. W. wind; about 20 miles by auto
with frequent side trips on foot; one obser-
ver. Canada Goose, 3,000; Black Duck, 300;
Green-winged Teal, 5; American Golden-eye,
2; American Merganser, 4; Eastern Goshawk,

1 Received for publication February 10, 1950.

1; Eastern Red-tailed Hawk, 1; Northern

Bald Eagle, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 4; Great Black-

backed Gull, 4; Herring gull, 50; Northern
Hairy Woodpecker, 1; Northern Blue Jay, 6; .
Northern Raven, 1; Eastern Crow, 4; Black-
capped Chickadee, 16; Eastern Robin, 1; Red-
winged Blackbird, 1. Total 18 species, 3402
individuals. — Dr. H. F. Tufts.

Quebec, Que..— (same area as in 1948;
town suburbs 13%, fields 19%, coniferous
forests 15%, deciduous woods 10%, mixed
woodlands 36%, shores 7%). — Dec. 28; 7:30
a.m. to 4:30 p.m.; cloudy; temp. 31°F. at
start, 22°F. at return; wind N.W., 18-25
m.p.h.; 5-12 in. snow on ground in the woods,
fields almost bare; small rivers open; no ice
on St. Lawrence River; six Observers in 3
parties; total hours, 17 (on foot); total miles,
18 (on foot). American Merganser, 1; Bald
Eagle (?), 1 (dark plumage, seen for 5
minutes at range of 150 to 2,000 feet, with-
out ‘binoculars, L.-A.L.); Ring-necked Phea-
sant, 6; Ruffed Grouse, 1; Hairy Woodpecker,
1; Downy Woodpecker, 1; Black-capped
Chickadee, 19; Starling, 3; English Sparrow,
37; Evening Grosbeak, 5; Pine Grosbeak, 2;
Common Redpoll, 31; Slate-colored Junco, 1;
Snow Bunting, 14. Total 14 species; 123
individuals. (Seen in area Jan. 1, Iceland

72 THE CANADIAN

Gull, 4, Great Black-backed Gull, 1; Dec. 18
and 20, Briinnich’s Murre, 2; Dec. 18, Great
Horned Owl, 1; Dec. 24, Bohemian Waxwing,
3; Cedar Waxwing, 2.) — Louis-A. Lord,
Jean and Gilbert Lord, Jacques Talbot, Fran-
cois Hamel, Raymond Cayouette (La Sgcizte
Zoologique de Québec).

Mentreal, Que. — (Mont Royal West-
mount Mountain, LaSalle, Ahuntsic, Cote St.
Luc, St. Lambert and Brosseau. woods,
Montreal South, Montreal West, south shore
of St. Lawrence R. from the Mercier Bridge
to Jacques Cartier Bridge and north shore
from Dorval to Victoria Bridge, Heron Island,
Goat Island, St. Helen’s Island, Cartierville,
Back River to Viau Bridge).—Dec. 26, 1949;
Overcast; wind S. E., 14 to 18 m.p.h.; min.
temp. 40°F., max. 43°F.; depth of snow in
open country, nil.; 34 observers in 12 parties;
total houzs, 66; total miles, 228 (46 on foot,
6 by boat, 176 by car). Mallard, 71; Black
Duck, 1500 (partly estimated); Pintail, 1;
Greater Scaup Duck, 4; American Golden-
eye, 770 (part. est.); American Merganser,
92; Goshawk, 2; Sparrow Hawk, 2; Ruifed
Grouse, 1; Ring-necked Pheasant, 143; Glau-
cous Gull, 17; Iceland Gull, 9; Great Black-
backed Gull,61; Herring Gull, 615 (part.
est.); Ring-billed Gull, 12; Rock Dove, 10;
Snowy Owl, 4; Flicker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker,
4: Downy Woodpecker, 11; Crow, 13; Black-
eapped Chickadee, 61; White-breasted Nu-
thatch, 8; Brown Creeper, 5; Winter Wren,
1; Northern Shrike, 2; Starling, 558 (part
est.); English Sparrow, 781 (not fully est.);
Pine Grosbeak, 5; Common Redpoll, 5; Amer-
ican Goldfinch, 12. Total 31 species; approx.
4782 individuals. (Seen Dec. 18, Briinnich’s
Murre, 6 (Terrill); Dec. 23, Duck Hawk
(Montgomery); Dec. 25, Robin, Pine Siskin).
— J. P. Anglin, Miss R. Blanchard, P. N.
Boultbee, Mrs. P. N. Boultbee, H. A. Bunker,
Mrs. H. A. Bunker, J. D. Cleghorn, J. A.
Decarie, F. DeKinder, P. DuBoulay, Mrs. P.
DuBoulay, Rev. Brother V. Gaboriau, Miss
M. Glynn, G. H. Hall, Miss G. E. Hibbard, J.
Hirayama, H. A. C. Jackson, C. MaclInnes,
Rev. Brother Matthias, I. McLaren, G. H.
Montgomery Jr., Mrs. G. H. Montgomery, W.
Rawlings, J. W. Robinson, Dan Ryan Sr., G.
Sanderson, Dr. D. M. Scott, H. F. Seymour,
J. Somerby, C. H. Sullivan, L. MclI. Terrill,
Mrs. L. MclI. Terrill, Dr. F. R. Terroux, Dr.
K. G. Terroux.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Hudson Heights, Hudson and Como, P.Q.—
(Whitlock Bird Sanctuary of 1150 acres, of
which 200 golf course, remainder mixed farm
lands and woodlots; villages above named.
Total area extends from Harwood Road on
west eastward about 4% miles to a line
parallel to and about % mile east of Como
Station Road, and between the Montreal —
Ottawa highway on south and shore of the
Lake of Two Mountains on the north; the
eastward end of the area extends about %
mile southward of highway 17. Exclusive of
residential areas and sanctuary the area is
about 50% farmlands and 50% deciduous and
mixed woods). — Dec. 31, 1949; 7: a.m. to
4:30 p.m.; sunny; temp. 2° to 17°F.; wind
light, variable, 1-3 m.p.h.; bar. 29.80; ground
partly covered 2 inches snow, water frozen
except in a few ditches; 26 observers in 10
parties; total hours, 43 (on foot); total miles
52 (on foot). Ruffed Grouse, 8; Pileated
Woodpecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 9; Downy
Woodpecker, 9; Blue Jay, 85; Czow, 1; Black-
capped Chickadee, 184; White-breasted Nu-
thatch, 17; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 5; Starling,
62; English Sparrow, 47; Evening Grosbeak,
99, Pine Grosbeak, 17; Redpoll, 34; Pine
Siskin, 16; Slate coloured Junco, 17; Tree
Sparrow, 4. Total, 17 species; 616 individuals.
(Seen in area during period, Brown Creeper.)
— Pat Baird, Ada Bonnard, Vi. Bryan, Amy
Clarke, Audry Clarke, Marnie Clarke, Ed.
Croll, Eunice Croll, Wendy Gray, George
Gurden, Mack. Johnson, Althea Macaulay,
Dunbar Mullan, John Mullan, Mary Mullan,
Dolly Nelson, Geof. Ommanney, Kate Omman-
ney, Geo. M. Patterson, Gwen. Pinhey, Betty
Puxley, George Riley, Sr., Drucilla Riley, Sr.,
Drucilla Riley, May Riley, Mac. Yuile.

Ottawa, Ont. — Dec. 26, 1949; 8 am. to 4
p.m.; temp. 23° to 42°F.; mod. S.E. breeze;
heavy haze and low cloud; steady, light rain
started 9.30 a.m.; one-half inch snow early,
gone by noon; much open water; 18 obser-
vers; 45 miles on foot, 82 by car.—Holboells
Grebe, 1; Black Duck, 2; American Golden-
eye, 322; American Merganser, 19; Red-
breasted Merganser, 13; Sparrow Hawk, 1;
Ruffed Grouse, 2; Ring-necked Pheasant, 2;
Glaucous Gull, 2; Herring Gull, 51; Rock
Dove, 274; Hairy Woodpecker, 1; Downy
Woodpecker, 3; Crow, 3; Black-capped Chicka-
dee, 41; White-breasted Nuthatch, 6; Brown
Creeper, 1; Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 1; North-
ern Shrike, 1; Starling, 524; English Spar-

March-April, 1950]

row, 506; Pine Grosbeak, 14; Pine Siskin, 1;
Snow Bunting, 1. Total, 24 species, 1792
individuals. — A. E. Bourguignon, Ken.
Bowles, Art. Brown, Graham Cooch, Dr. and
Mrs. C. Frankton, R. Frith, Dr. and Mrs. J.
W. Groves, Dr. H. F. Lewis, H. Lloyd, D. A.
MacLulich, P. McMillan, Dr. and Mrs. D. B.
O. Savile, John Smith, R. Vockeroth.

Pakenham, Lanark Co., Ont. — Dec. 26,
1949; 830 am. to 3 p.m.; overcast, fresh
breeze; ground bare, streams open; temp. 40°
to 43°F.; rain 9 to 10 a.m. and steadily from
1 p.m.; visibility and audibility poor; 5 ob-
servers in morning, two in afternoon; total
miles, 14 on foot. American Merganser, 1;
Ruffed Grouse, 2; Herring Gull, 1; Hairy
Woodpecker, 1; Blue Jay, 1; Black-capped
Chickadee, 20; White-breasted Nuthatch, 1;
Starling, 24; English Sparrow, 74; Evening
Grosbeak, 2; Purple Finch, 1. Total: 11
species, 128 individuals. (Dec. 15: Pine Gros-
beak, 2).— Edna G. Ross, Verna M. Ross,
Douglas Deugo, T. W. Ross, R. M. McKenzie,
Bill McKenzie.

Kingston, Frontenac Co., Ont.—(selected
areas within — 15 mile radius — farmland

Tur CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

43%, woodland 8%, marshland 2.6%, tow
0.4%, water 46%). — Dec. 26, 1949; 9 a.
to 4.45 p.m.; overcast with rain, foggy pé
of time; no snow; temp. 40° to 45°F. Wil
10 to 15 m.p.-h., variable; L. Ontario a:
St. Lawrence R. open; small bays, rivers a
marshes mostly frozen; 12 observers, 2 p:
ties; total man hours 67, total miles, on fo
50, by car 125. Black Duck, 7; Scaup Du
(sp.), 300; American Golden-eye, 9; Re
breasted Merganser, 2; American Sparrc
Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 11; Ring-neck
Pheasant, 2; Glaucous Gull, 15; Great Blac
backed Gull, 40; Herring Gull, 431; Rir
billed Gull, 8; Rock Dove, 41; Great Horn
Owl, 2; Belted King-fisher, 1; Hairy Woo
pecker, 1; Downy Woodpecker, 5; Americ:
Crow, 2; Black-capped Chicadee, 72; Whit
breasted Nuthatch, 7; Red-breasted Nuthatc
1; Northern Shrike, 1; Common Starlix
140+; English Sparrow, 200+; Tree Sparro
36; Chipping Sparrow (W.G.L.), 3. Total |
species, 1939+ individuals. (Seen recent
Canada Goose, Snowy Owl, Blue Jay, Brov
Creeper, Pine Siskin). — A. E. S. Bell, M
and Mrs. T. Boardman, John Cartwright, .
Hyde, W. G. Lamb, B. Morrison, R. |
(Continued on page 77)

FIFTH CENSUS OF NON-PASSERINE BIRDS IN THE BIRD
SANCTUARIES OF THE NORTH SHORE OF THE
GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE’

OtiverR H. HEWITT
Department of Conservation, Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y.

HIS is the fifth of a series Of reports on

the progress of the Dominion bird sanc-
tuaries on the north shore of the Gulf of St.
Lawrence. Since 1925, enumerations have
been made at five-year intervals of the
populations of non-passerine birds, mostly
“sea-birds”, in the sanctuaries. The first four
censuses were conducted by Harrison F.
Lewis in 1925, 1930, 1935 and 1940, and were
reported by him in 1925, 1931, 1937 and 1942.
The fifth census was made by the author
during the summer of 1945. Comparable
census reports are available for a period of
twenty years for nine of the ten sanctuaries.

1) Received for publication July 11, 1949.

As mentioned by Lewis (1942), Cape Whitt
Bird Sanctuary was replaced in 1937 }
Carrousel Island Bird Sanctuary. This repo
includes the first comparative census of tl
bird populations in this sanctuary. |

The results of the 1945 census for eax
species in each sanctuary are shown in Tab
1, along with the corresponding figures fe
1940.

In order to maintain a series of censusi
which would be entirely comparable, ar
change in census-takers should be made wit
an over-lap. However, it was not possible fe
Dr. Lewis to take part in the 1945 censu
The census methods used in the first for

ee

74. | % THE CANADIAN’ FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 64

TABLE 1. — CENSUS OF NON-PASSERINE BIRDS IN THE BIRD SANCTUARIE 07

Carrousel Birch SAN
SPECIES Island Islands Betchouane | Watshishou Fog Islan}| ¥
| == — — — 20
Red-throated : LOOM .........-.uss..lc0., — = = auld 18
European Cormorant....................... — — os pao — |
310 a — 70 42.
Double-crested Cormorant............. 272 as a 60 112 ‘
aa rea = 2 6
lac kare kites thse i velccesds eer hove — — — 4 4
i aaa a od a nn 4 4
“Peeve SPA ae a UO = ay ath sen me
pies tlhe Et, Ge 8
Green-winged Teal..................08. — 2 — eae —
250 1508 1188 1184 664
COMMON OIGEN A 25.25) veces ceseseeseesece, 80 1648 1304 1100 1012
— — — 6 8
Red-breasted Merganser ................ — —_— —_ 2 —.
oo sae aes aise 2
Willaw Ptarmigan. ...00.00.....c0c.... — — — — 2
Semipalmated Plover................06 —— — — 2 14
6 14 14 18 4
Spotted Sandpiper .........1..........:..-: 2 12 8 98 30
2 24 20 156 196
Great Black-backed Gull............... 4 18 16 156 258
| 1100 544 388 208 120
ib Ushesah okay CAO ERE pean eer ieee eee 600 606 460 150 162
— — 275 Bry 110
Ring-billed Gull eet tet ec A6o000c: = — = oa 270
7150 a 27 Mirus ples
"ESTHET fail Ey yo oO eo 500 = 18 Fh, aes
| — 2 290 410 42
Common and Arctic Terns............ ar 6 2 308 Santee
aad — — _ 90
Caspian Tern................cecneseonneseesnes = — = mea 66
| 60 — 250 32 24
Razor-billed Auk ...........cccsceee- 56 iol 240 28 42
— ue — pea, 2000
WOMMOMMUTVE 0.2.0. 5..cs05c0s ccsesere se: — a — — 3300
Brunnich’s Murre...............:cccc = i ne we Ver
| 98 14 = 30 136
Black}: Guillemot....../.............ceccece0s 176 30 lade: 28 150
_ — 610 — —
PTE TA Pee cgeee ONUN I aay — a NAT 50 ek wh
2576 2106 3062 2816 3476

TOWNES lve ke ae 1690 2322 2798 1866 5494

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 75

OF THE NORTH SHORE OF THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE, 1940 AND 1945

JARIES St. Mary’s TOTALS
| Wolf Bay Islands Mecatina | St. Augustine | Bradore Bay 1945 1940
wt Pee Bet Cae —$—$._—$———— | ————— =a“ |] sss
| 10 16 30 18 ea
S 16 28 22 Pas 94 90
ih 360 ues soe me
as 172 hs a“ Aol 360 172
340 6 16 — Lay
366 eat coe = a 184 810
si BA eS 4 a
fate sh PAN: 6 il 12 14
pa pa pan _ a 4 play
aa 2 Ee. — ee
ae Pa kaa) os aes 10 2
1400 1420 1640 1050 =
1600 - 980 1830 1500 aS 11004 11004
16 all ne 12 i
Na vias ' 2 ey 42 4
cid ie BN si ae 2 att
pees 4 6 == 6
ihe 10 24 20 8 16 78
8 18 16 — 32
12 20 18 32 8 130 170
152 270 280 320 ie
244 234 1134 902 wat 1420 2966
520 150 882 890 tla
280 702 740 812 als 5402 4512
Fa: ae 50 400 on
eh et 68 58 ie 835 396
Brees f oe ct a 177 518
I 6. 8 18 = ia:
8 8 26 ee es 7716 412
ae of we eis a 90 66
2600 4058 158 8 1500
2562 4414 164 4 1386 8690 8896
2000 5248 = = 120
2310 6846 — — 104 9368 12560
rei 2 = —_— pets
aaa 2 peat pad pike 2 2
16 222 840 168 as
| 4 246 660 172 : ety 1524 1466 |
6300 4796 — = 48304

ve)
=
(oo)
i)
lon)
=
(op)
i)
|
|
aN
we)
oO
o
oO

60010 65444

16574 19762 4692 3530 50856 101352 — 109584

76 THE CANADIAN
counts were studied carefully, and these
same methods were used in obtaining the
present figures,

Comparisons of these results with those
of 1940 reveal some rather interesting popul-
ation similarities and differences, most of
which can be readily explained. No significant
changes appear in the numbers of those
species which are comparatively scarce in
the sanctuaries. It is possible that the pair
of Brunnich’s Murres on Cliff Island in the
St. Mary’s Islands Sanctuary is the same
pair observed by Lewis five years previously.
Black Ducks nest in only three sanctuaries,
and are much more common inland. An in-
crease in breeding numbers on the outer
islands is not to. be expected. Red-throated
Loons have undoubtedly increased, but
because each pair requires a territorial fresh-
water pond, the increment often must spread
to ponds outside of the sanctuary boundaries.
A remarquable coincidence is noted in the
totai counts of the Common Eider Duck.
Round figures were used by neither census-
taker, and the comparative counts in various
sanctuaries vary a great deal. The indications
are that the sanctuaries are not yet sup-
porting their full capacity of breeding eiders,
and that local populations are considerably
affected by adverse and _ beneficial factors
such as predation and decreasing interference
by man. The Great Black-backed Gull seems
to be the most active predator on the downy
young eider ducks. Some regulated control
has been carried on through the collection
of eggs of this gull. The amount of collecting
varies on different parts of the coast. The
eggs are uSed as food by the residents of the
north shore, and in the Grenfell Mission
Hospital at Harrington Harbour. It was an-
ticipated that in sanctuaries where the Black-
backed Gull had decreased, a corresponding
increase in eiders would be found. This is
rot the case, however, as demonstrated by
counts in five of the sanctuaries.

Notable changes are apparent in the gull

populations from 1940 to 1945. The numbers —

of Great Black-backed Gulls have decreased
in the sanctuaries more than fifty per cent,
which may be due to the control programme.
Herring Gulls and Ring-billed Gulls show
considerable increases. These species nest in
colonies which move about occasionally. Such

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

increases may be the result of the shifting
of colonies to islands within the boundaries
of the sanctuaries. This is plainly what took
place at Betchouane Sanctuary, where a large
colony of Ring-billed Gulls had appeared. It
also explains the increase in Arctic and
Common Terns in the same sanctuary. Kitti-
wakes, on the other hand, nest in the same
places, and even on the same nests, year
after year. The great increase in the num-
bers of this beautiful species is actual, and
very gratifying. The Euzopean Cormorant
colony in St. Mary’s Islands Sanctuary has
shown an excellent increase, and the Fog
Island colony of Caspian Terns is growing.

There are other variations in comparative
figures which must be explained by the
differences between census-takers. A decrease
of almost 3200 Common Murres is hardly
credible. Actually it is impossible to obtain
accurate estimates of the breeding population
of this species, which nests in colonies, most
of which are hidden or inaccessible among
the rocks: The eight per cent decrease in
puffins probably can be explained in the
same way. The major decreases appear in
Wolf Bay and St. Mary’s Islands, where
accurate counts could not be made. On
Perroquet Island, where an accurate and
comparative census method was used, only
a slight decrease was evident, and the colony
appears to be in excellent condition.

REFERENCES

Lewis, Harrison F., 1925. The new bird
sanctuaries in the Gulf of St.
Lawrence, Can. Field-Nat. 39: 177-
179.

1931. Five year’s progress in the
bird sanctuaries of the north
Shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence.
Can, Field-Nat. 45:73-78.

—_———_—1937. A decade of progress in the
bird sanctuaries of the north.
shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence.
Can. Field-Nat. 51: 51-55.

1942. Fourth census of non-pass-
erine birds in the bird sanctuaries
on the north shore of the Gulf of
St. Lawrence. Can. Field-Nat.
56: 5-8.

~
(

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN
CHRISTMAS BIRD CENSUS — 1949
(Continued from page 73)

Stewart, Dr. Geo. M. Stirrett, Mr. and Mrs.
L. Thornton, Dr C. J. Vincent. (Kingston
Nature Club).

Lindsay, Ont.—(Southwest of town, some
river bank, 15% swamp and low woodland,
remainder pasture and cultivated land). —
Dec. 30, 1949; 7.16 a.m. to 12.20 p.m., and
2.46 to 4.20 p.m.; gentle E. breeze; temp. 5°
to 15°F.; half inch of snow; 17 miles on foot.
Ruffed Grouse 6; Hairy Woodpecker, 1;
Blue Jay, 1; Black-capped Chicadee, 18;
Starling, 9; English Sparrow, 20; Pine Gros-
beak, 9; Snow Bunting, 50. Total, 8 species,
114 individuals. (Seen during period, Downy
Woodp:cker, Common Redpoll). — E. W.
Calvert.

Rutherglen, Ont.—(15 miles east of North
Bay to 10 miles west of Mattawa). — Dec. 30,
1949; black spruce bog, township of Bonfield,
village of Bonfield, highway to Rutherglen,
Pimisi Bay, Mattawa River, Kennedy Lake,
Eau Claire, Smith’s Lake and Amable du
Fond River; open farmland 20%, coniferous
woods and black spruce bog 10%, second
growth mixed forest 60%, lakes and rivers
10%; clear to cloudy; temp. 10° to T7°F.;
wind N. E. and E. to S. 5 to 10 mp.h.;
ground covered with 2 inches powdery snow;
all water except rapids frozen; 8 hours’ ob-
servation; total miles, 5 on foot, 27 by car.
American Goldeneye, 3; Hairy Woodpecker,
8; Downy Woodpecker, 1; Blue Jay, 5; Black-
capped Chickadee, 63; Brown-headed Chicka-
dee, 5; White-breasted Nuthatch, 1; Common
Redpoll, 79; Snow Bunting, 8. Total, 9
species, approx. 174 individuals. — Louise de
Kiriline Lawrence.

Huntsville, Ont—Dec 19, 1949; 9.30 am.
to 4:00 p.m.; cloudy; temp. 35° to 40°F.; 4
to 5 inches of soft snow in the bush, ground
50% bare in the open; smal] bodies of water
frozen with water on the ice, larger lakes and
streams open; 1 observer; 50 miles by car,
4 miles on foot; chiefly mixed forest. Ruffed
Grouse, 4; Herring Gull, 2; Pileated Wood-
pecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 1; Blue Jay, 6;
- Black-capped Chickadee, 3; White-breasted
Nuthatch, 2; Northern Shrike, 1; Common
Starling 1; English Sparrow, 10; Evening
_ Grosbeak, 30. Total, 11 species, 61 individuals.
3 Russell J. Rutter.

x

FIELD-NATURALIST 77

Toronto, Ont. — Dec. 18, 1949; 7 a.m. to
5 p.m.; total hours, 11534; continuous drizzle
all morning, thick fog, all afternoon; temp.
37° to 42°F.; ground bare at city, 3” to 4”

in woods; bay and.lake open, rivers and
ponds frozen; 76 observers in 20 parties. Hol-
boell’s Grebe, 1; Horned Grebe, 1; Great

Blue Heron, 4; Mallard, 350; Black Duck,
770; Pintail, 3; Shoveller, 12; Greater Scaup
Duck, 962; American Golden-eye, 311; Buffle-
head, 54; Old-squaw, 408; Whi-e-winzed Sco-
ter, 2; American Merganser, 53; Goshawk, 1;
Cooper’s Hawk, 3; Red-tailed Hawk, 7; Rough-
legged Hawk, 1; Sparrow Hawk, 9; Ruffed
Grouse, 8; Ring-necked Pheasant, 166; Glau-
cous Gull, 1; Iceland Gull, 1; Great Black-
backed Gull, 14; Herring Gull, 2672; Ring-
billed Gull, 49; Screech Owl, 3; Horned Owl,
21; Snowy Owl, 3; Barred Owl, 1; Long-eared
Owl, 1; Saw-whet Owl, 1; Kingfisher, 4;
Flicker, 1; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy
Woodpecker, 18; Downy Woodpecker, 52;
Blue Jay, 81; Crow, 54; Black-capped Chicka-
dee, 737; White-breasted Nuthatch, 51; Red-
breasted Nuthatch, 18; Brown Creeper, 34;
Hermit Thrush, 1;; Golden-crowned Kinglet,
42; American Pipit, 1; Cedar Waxwing, 5;
Northern Shrike, 11; Starling, 1742; Myrtle
Warbler, 1 (the 125th species for the Brodie
Club’s 25 Toronto Christmas censuses);
House Sparrow, 1570; Eastern Meadowlark,
3; Rusty Blackbird, 1; Cardinal, 68; Purple
Finch, 22; Pine Grosbeak, 12; Common Red-
poll, 2; Pine Siskin, 15; Goldfinch, 103; Slate-
colored Junco, 419; Tree Sparrow, 398; White-
crowned Sparrow, 2; White-throated Sparrow,
3; Swamp Sparrow, 1; Song Sparrow, 50.
Total, 64 species, 11416 individuals. — F. E.
Baillie, J. L. Baillie, J. Barnett, R. Bateman,
D. Beacham, F. Bodsworth, A. Brooks, A.
Bunker, D. Burton, W. H. Carrick, C. H. D.
Clarke, A. Cobden, A. Dawe, M. E. Devitt,
O. E. Devitt, F. H. Emery, B. Falls, G. Fran-
cis, A. Ghent, G. Giles, W. Giles, A. Gordon,
Walter Gunn, W. W. H. Gunn, I. Halladay,
R. Hambly, C. Helleiner, F. Helleiner, C. E.
Hope, R. F. James, G. Lambert, A. Lamsa,
C. Leavens, G. Lentine, N. Martin, W. Mar-
tin, K. Mayall, L. McDougall, E. McEwen, M._
Mcllwraith, D. S. Miller, G. Miller, M. H.
Mitchell, C. Molony, F. Mueller, D. Perks, W.
Peters, A. Reid, R. Ritchie, B. Runnings, J.
Runnings, T. Russell, J. Satterly, R. M. Saun-
ders, D. Scovell, R. Scovell, J. Sherrin, T. M.
Shortt, D. Smith, F. Smith, R. A. Smith, W.

78 THE CANADIAN

W. Smith, H. H. Southam, D. H. Speirs, J.
M. Speirs, E. V. Stark, T. Swift, R. Tasker,
_ §. L. Thompson, R. Trowern, V. Trowern, M.

Vanderwater, J. B. Walty, D. West, R. Wil-
son, J. Woodford. (The Brodie Club).

Hamilton, Ont—(Dundas Valley west to
Ancaster, Hamilton and harbor, Burlington
Beach, Aldershot, Lake Medad, Bronte). —
Dec. 28; 8am. to 5.m.; rain intermittent in
morning, continuous in afternoon with fog
over water; temp. 38° to 44°F.; wind S., light;
ground bare; streams and harbor open; 50
observers in 19 parties; total hours, 85; total
miles, 172 (101 on foot, 71 by car). Common
Loon, 1; Horned Grebe, 6; Gannet, 1 (im,
J.L.B., W.W.G., F. Helleiner, R.W.T.); Mal-
lard, 23; Black Duck, 99; Ring-necked Duck,
2; Greater Scaup Duck, 114; Lesser Scaup
Duck, 4; American Golden-eye, 257; Buffle-
head, 2; Old-squaw, 31; White-winged Scoter,
24; Ruddy Duck, 2 (G.N.); Hooded Merganser,
3; American Merganser, 105; Red-Breasted
Merganser, 2; Red-tailed Hawk, 8; Rough-legged
Hawk, 1; Bald Eagle, 1; Sparrow Hawk, 13;
Ruffed Grouse, 11; European Partridge, 7;
Ring-necked Pheasant, 6; Glaucovs Gull, 4;
Kumlien’s Gull, 1 (adult, G.N.); Great Black-
backed Gull, 80; Herring Gull, 11,800 (est.);
Ring-billed Gull, 300 (est.); Bonaparte’s Gull,
3; Sereech Owl, 3; Horned Owl, 13; Snowy
Owl, 5; Long-eared Owl, 1; Belted Kingfisher,
1; Hairy Woodpecker, 10; Downy Wood-
pecker, 41; Blue Jay, 64; Crow, 1; Black-
capped Chickadee, 292; White-breasted Nu-
thatch, 29; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 4; Brown
Creeper, 18; Robin, 2; Golden-crowned King-
let, 7; Cedar Waxwing, 23; Northern Shrike,
6; Starling, 916; English Sparrow, 957; Car-
dinal, 76; Common Redpoll, 20; Pine Siskin,
30; American Goldfinch, 7; Slate-colored Jun-
co, 415; Tree Sparrow, 466; Field Sparrow, 2
. (G-N:); White-crowned Sparrow, 1 (P.H., at
feeder since Dec. 14); Swamp Sparrow, 1;
Song Sparrow, 24. Total, 58 species; 16,347
individuals. (Seen recently; Iceland Gull,
Saw-whet Owl, Winter Wren, Catbird (R.E.),
Evening Grosbeak, Purple Finch, Mocking-
bird seen by P. H. Dec. 8). — Dean Axelson,
Donald Babbs, Jas. L. Baillie, Eric W. Bastin,
Jack Bond, Thelma Boorman, Donald Bourne,
Neil Bourne, R.D.F. and Mrs. Bourne, David
Campbell, Jack Campbell, Wm. Campbell,
Kenneth J. Cox, James Dowell, Robert O.
Elstone, Bob Finlayson, Larry Gravefell, W.
W. H. Gunn, Ian Halladay, Fred Helleiner,

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Peter F. Henderson, Fred L. Henderson, Do-
rothy Henwood, Wm. Holley, Angus B. Jack-
son, H. E. Kettle, Margaret Lamb, Gordon
MacPartlin, Julius Mannheimer, Jack E. Mar-
tin, Douglas and Mrs. McCallum, G. O. Mec-
Millan, John Moule, Gertrude Nelson, Albert
B. Nind, George W. North, James Nuttall,
David Powell, Mrs. N. M. Robertson, Bob
Sergeant, Laura Stewart, R. W. Trowern, Ann
Watson, Mabel Watson, Mr. and Mrs. M. R.
Watters, J. Harvey Williams, Laurel Williams.
(Hamilton Nature Club).

Kitchener — Waterloo, Ont.—(Westmount
through limits of Waterloo, N.E. to Bridge-
port; Frederick St. limits; Grand River area
at Breslau; Freeport to Doon; and near Galt).
—Dec. 31, 1949; clear in am., overcast in
p.m.; temp. 30° -42°F.; moderate S. E. breeze
decreasing in p.m.; no snow; swamps and
ponds frozen, river open; 16 observers in 5
parties; 23 miles on foot. American Mergan-
ser, 7; Black Duck, 200; Mallard, 50; Amer-
ican Golden-eye, 25; Ruffed Grouse, 4; Ring-
necked Pheasant, 1; Rock Dove, 64; Belted
Kingfisher, 2; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy
Woodpecker, 1; Downy Woodpecker, 10;
Horned Lark, 1; Blue Jay, 8; Black-capped
Chickadee, 291; White-breasted Nuthatch, 13;
Red-breasted Nuthatch, 23; Brown Creeper,
33; Winter Wren, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet,
18; Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 2; Northern Shri-
ke, 1; Starling, 60; English Sparrow, 555;
Cardinal, 20; Pine Grosbeak, 8; Pine Siskin,
8; American Goldfinch, 10; Towhee, 1; Slate-
colored Junco, 133; Tree Sparrow, 20; Lin-
coln Sparrow, 2; Song Sparrow, 7. Total, 32
species, 1729 individuals. — F. Bender, C.
Bingham, M. Campbell, E. Carter, R. Dick-
son, R. Hilborn, R. Jilt, R. Pickering, M.
Preston, G. Schaefer, W. Schaefer, F. Shantz,
P. Smith, D. Wambold, E. Wambold, L. Wam-
bold.

Meaford, Ont.—(E. half of town, including
harbour and three feeding stations, 11th line
North, St. Vincent township). — Dec. 27,
1949: 10 am. to 4 p.m.; overcast, intermittent
drizzle, visibility fair; light to strong W.
wind; temp. 45°F.; 10 observers. Horned
Grebe, 1; American Merganser, 6; American
Golden-eye, 5; Ruffed Grouse, 12; European
Partridge, 3; Herring Gull, 30; Rock Dove, 3;
Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Downy Woodpecker,
4; Hairy Woodpecker, 1; Blue Jay, 3; Black-
capped Chickadee, 60; White-breasted Nut-

i:
Sat

a

4
{
|
|
|

~ March-April, 1950] Tue CANADIAN
hatch, 3; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 4; Starling,
85; Cardinal, 1; English Sparrow, 162; Snow
Bunting, 50. Total, 18 species, 432 individuals.
— L. H. Beamer.

St. Thomas, Ont. — (Waterworks marsh,
Pinafore Park, Kettle Creek at Union, Port
Stanley harbour, Springwater. Cattail marsh
5%, pasture land 5%, deciduous woods 5%,
lake shore 25%, creek banks 60%). — Dec.
26, 1949; 8 a.m. to 3 p.m.; completely over-
cast; intermittent rain until 10 a.m. then
continuous rain for rest of day; wind E., 5
m.p.h.; temp. 40°F.; no snow on ground; 5
observers in 4 parties; total hours, 12% (6
iby car, 64% on foot); total miles, 55 (50 by
car, 5 on foot). Canada goose, 12; American
Golden-eye, 3; Black Duck, 200 (est.); Mal-
lard, 12; Red-breasted Merganser, 1; Herring
Gull, 250 (est.); Red-tailed Hawk, 4; Mourn-
ing Dove, 2; Screech Owl, 1; Snowy Owl, 1;
Downy Woodpecker, 20; Hairy Woodpecker, 1;
Blue Jay, 4; Crow, 1; Black-capped Chickadee,
60; White-breasted Nuthatch, 6; Brown Creep-
er, 4; Winter Wren, 1; Golden-crowned King-
let, 2; Starling, 25; English Spzrrow, 60; Card-

inal, 9; Purple Finch, 5; American Goldfinch,

10; Slate-coloured Junco, 50; Tree Sparrow,
100 (est.); Song Sparrow, 6. Total, 27 species,
about 850 individuals. (Seen in area; Belted
Kingfisher, Dec. 24; Pileated Woodpecker,
Dec. 27). — Fred Bodsworth, Ron Brooman,
Marshall Field, Ken McCaw, Donald Young.

London, Ont.— (Valley of Thames River
from London to Delaware; Redman’s Swamp;
Trott’s Swamp; Coves; part of Dorchester
Swamp; J. C. Higgins Farm at Lobo; 3 feed-
ing stations in same area. Pasture 5%;
deciduous . woodland 20%; swamp 20%;
mixed wooded river bank 55%). — Dec. 26,
1949; 8 am. to 4.30 p.m.; overcast, rain
starting at dawn and continuing all day;
visibility very poor; wind S. W., slight at
first, 5-10 m.p.h. later in day; ground bare;
temp. at 8 aim. 40°F.; river approx. 8-10 ft.
above normal; streams swollen; ponds al-
most entirely free of ice; 31 observers in 10
parties observing mostly in the morning;
total party hours 60; total party miles, 50
on foot, 75 by car. Great Blue Heron, 1;
Black Duck, 6; American Golden-eye, 69;
American Merganser, 9; Sharp-shinned
_ Hawk, 2; Cooper’s Hawk, 1; Red-tailed Hawk,
7; American Rough-legged Hawk, 1; Bald
Eagle, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 8; Ring-necked

FIELD-NATURALIST 79

Pheasant, 15; Herring Gull, 29; Ring-billed
Gull, 1; Rock Dove, 67; Mourning Dove, 9;
Screech Owl, 3; Great Horned Owl, 2; Snowy
Owl, 3; Belted Kingfisher, 1; Flicker, 1;
Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker,
4; Downy Woodpecker, 38; Blue Jay, 17;
Crow, 138; Black-capped Chickadee, 219;
White-breasted Nuthatch, 22; Brown Cvreeper,
18; Winter Wren, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet,
30; Cedar Waxwing, 7; Common Starling, 152;
English Sparrow, 313, Bronzed Grackle, 1;
Cardinal, 124; Evening Grosbeak, 3; Purple
Finch, 14; Common Redpoll, 1; Pine Siskin,
2; American Goldfinch, 30; Slate-coloured
Junco, 164; Tree Sparrow, 172; White-throat-
ed Sparrow, 2; Song Sparrow, 16; Swamp
Sparrow, 2. Total, 45 species, 1,662 indiv-
iduals. (Observed in area recently, Canada
Goose, Dec. 21; Mallard, Dec. 24; Long-eared
Owl, Dec. 17; Northern Shrike, Dec. 17; East-
ern Meadowlark, Dec. 22). H. Calvert, Dr.
and Mrs. R. G. Cummings, John and Tom
Cummings, A, Clendinning, Eli Davis, Ver-
non Franks, Ted Garside, Frank Girling, Wil-
liam Girling, Frances Girling, John Harvey,
Mary Harvey, John Higgins, Mrs. C. Landery,
Mrs. F. Landon, Jack Laughton, Gretchen
Lawton, Jim Leach, Fred Lewis, Allan
Loughrey, William Morris, Donald Pope,
Keith Reynolds, Matthew Schoenfeld, Dou-
glas Soper, Margaret Stevens, Charles White-
law, John and David Wismer. (MclIlwraith
Ornithological Club).

Ripley, Ont.—(Village and country within
3 miles, mostly open farm lands with some
woodlots). — Dec. 31, 1949; mild, overcast,
ground bare; 3 observers in one party. Pigeon
Hawk, 1; Herring Gull, 10; Screech Owl, 1;
Horned Owl, 2; Snowy Owl, 1; Richardson’s
Owl, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 1; Downy Wood-
pecker, 3; Black-capped Chickadee, 1; White-
breasted Nuthatch, 1; Brown Creeper, 2;
Starling, 150; English Sparrow, 500, Slate-
coloured Junco, 15. Total, 14 species, 702
individuals. — Ian Gibbons, Clare Thuell,
Albert Wylds.

West Elgin, (Aldboro and Dunwich Twps.),
Ont.—(area within 742 mile radius of West
Lorne; pine woods 2%, deciduous woods
50%, lake shore 10%, river banks 15%, gras-
sy marsh 10%, pasture land 13% ).—Dec. 27,
1949; 7.45 am. to 5.15 p.m.; low overcast
during morning with almost continuous rain,

80 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

foggy; wind E., 8 m.p.h., increasing at mid-
day to 25-30 m.p.h. and veering to W. as over-
cast broke to high, scattered cloud; temp.
26° at start, 45° at mid-day, 34° at finish;
lake and river free of ice; river and tribut-
aries almost bank full of water; ground bare;
5 observers in 2 parties; total hours, 17 (16
on foot, 1 by car); total miles, 28 (15 by car,
13 on foot). American Golden-eye 51; Black
Duck, 1; Mallard, 5; Red-tailed Hawk, 5; Red-
shouldered Hawk, 1; American Rouwgh-legged
Hawk, 3; Marsh Hawk, 5; Bald Eagle, 1; Amer-
ican Woodccek, 1; Herring Gull, 10; Ring-billed
Gull, 2; Rock Dove, 16; Mourning Dove, 25;
Downy Woodpecker, 8; Horned Lark, 3; Blue
Jay, 7; Cvow, 1; Black-capped Chickadee, 36;
Brown Creeper, 2; Carolina Wren, 1; Robin,
1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 2; Starling, 18;
English Soarrow, 109; Cardinal, 3; Red-eyed

Towhee, 1; Slate-coloured Junco, 70; Tree
Sparrow, 98; Song Sparrow, 1. Total, 29
species, 489 individuals. (Seen recently,

Shazp-shinned Hawk, Lapland Longspur, Dec.
23; Sparrow Hawk, Dec. 24; Cooper’s Hawk,
Snowy Owl, Meadowlark, Dec. 25; White-
breasted Nuthatch, Screech Owl, Dec. 26).—
H.* L.. Laneaster, J. K. Lantaster, R.. E.
Lemon, V. E. Lemon, Allan Streib. (West
Elgin Nature Club).

Point Pelee, Ont. — (area within 744 mile
radius centred about 1 mile north of the
boundary of the National Park; includes the
Park and agzicultural land to north enclosed
by an are from the Lake shore S. of Ruthven,
passing 1 mile S. of Blytheswood and back to
the lake shore 1 mile E. of Wheatley; lake
shore 30%, cedar woods 10%, deciduous
woods 30%, agricultural land 15%, cattail
marsh, 15%) — Dec. 29, 1949; 7.45 a.m. to
5.15 pm.; cool; clear during morning,
high scattered cloud during p.m.; wind
N., 12 m.p.h.; no snow on ground, drifting
ice in lake along west shore of Point, light
skim of ice on marsh during a.m.; 6 obser-
vers in 2 parties. Total hours, 18 (16 on
foot, 2 by car); total miles, 69 (49 by car,
20 on foot). Black Duck, 36; American Gol-
den-eye, 116; Buffle-head, 12; American Mer-
ganser, 235; Red-breasted Merganser, 19;
unidentified duck, 192; Sharp-shinned Hawk,
1; Cooper’s Hawk, 1; Red-tailed Hawk, 3;
Red-shouldered Hawk, 2; American Rough-
legged Hawk, 3; Bald Eagle, 3; Marsh Hawk,
1; Ring-necked Pheasant, 8; Herring Gull,
200 (est.); Ring-billed Gull, 4; Great Horned

[Vol. b4e

Owl, 2; Snowy Owl, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 2;
Downy Woodpecker, 13; Horned Lark, 4;
Blue Jay, 2: Crow, 502; Black-capped Chicka-
dee, 127; White-breasted Nuthatch, 2; Brown
Creeper, 5; Winter Wren, 4; Golden-crowned
Kinglet, 11; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 32;
English Sparrow, 227; Red-winged Blackbird,
4; Rusty Blackbird, 1; Cow-bird, 550, (est.);
Cardinal, 23; American Goldfinch, 75; Red
Crossbill, 1 (R.B., A.A.W., C.H.Z.); Slate-
coloured Junco, 15; Tree Sparrow, 70; Song
Sparrow, 9; Swamp Sparrow, 3. Total, 40
species, about 2536 individuals. (Seen just
outside area, 2 more snowy owls). — Richard
Blackburn, Hugh Evans, H. L. Lancaster,
Allan Streib, A. A. Wood, C. H. Zavitz.
(Combined Kent and West Elgin Nature
Clubs).

Port Arthur - Fort William, Ont. — Dec.
26, 1949; 9.30 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; temp. 8° to
4° F.; wind W.S.W. 10 m. p.h. to variable
light airs; clear to hazy; 3 inches snow on
level; rel. hum. 85% at 1.30 p.m.; 15 ob-
servers in 9 parties; total miles, 252 by car,
14% on foot. Black Duck, 1; American Gol-
den-eye, 16; American Mergenser, 1; Rufied
Grouse, 2; European Partridge, 5; Herring
Gull, 124; Rock Dove, 257; Snowy Owl, 2;
Pileated Woodpecker, 3; Hairy Woodpecker,
3; Downy Woodpecker, 12; Arctic three toed
Woodpecker, 1; Canada Jay, 5; Blue Jay, 15;
Raven, 10; Crow, 8; Black-capped Chickadee,
98; Hudsonian Chickadee, 3;
Nuthatch, 2; Bohemian Waxwing, 20; North-
ern Shrike, 2; Starling, 133; English Sparrow,
289; Evening Grosbeak, 16; Pine Grosbeak,
37; Common Redpoll, 8; Slate-coloured Jun-
co, 1; Snow Bunting, 15.° Total, 28 species,
1089 individuals. — Dr. A. E. Allin, Ken
Campbell, Keith Denis, Claude Garton, El-
liott Heslop, James Thompson, Jack Smith,
Dr. and Mrs. H. J. Ferrier, Mr. and Mrs.
C. H. Philpot, Mrs. W. Knowles, Mrs. Carl
Rydholm.

Yorkton, Sask.—(area 15 miles in diame-
ter with Yorkton as center). — Dec. 26, 1949;
9 am. to 4.30 p.m.; overcast with snow
flurries in morning, clear in afternoon; temp.
O°F. at start, 6°F. at noon; wind E. 3 m.p.h.;
snow averaging three inches in depth; 12
observers in 4 groups; total party-hours
afield, 11% (6 by car, 5% on foot); total
party miles, 40 (34 by car, 6 on foot). Ruffed
Grouse, 2; Sharp-tailed Grouse, 46; European

Red-breasted ~-

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN
Partridge, 28; Downy Woodpecker, 2; Canada
Jay, 2; Magpie, 8; Black-capped Chickadee,
17; White-breasted Nuthatch, 1; English
Sparrow, 441 (est.); Common Redpoll, 38;
Snow Bunting, 821 (est.). Total, 11 species,
approximately 1406 individuals. (Snowy Owl,
Dec. 22 and Dec. 27; Bohemian Waxwings
noted Dec. 24 and Dec. 28). — Wayne Bjor-
gan, Jerry Bulitz, Lionel Coleman, Doug.
Logan, D’Arcy Wershler, Merle Wershler,
(members Simpson School Nature Club) and
Jim Allen, Brother Clarence, Dr. C. J.
Houston, Dr. S. C. Houston, C. Stuart Hous-
ton, Brother Vincent (Yorkton Natural His-
tory Society).

‘Crescent, B.C.—(parts of coast and bush
between Crescent, Ocean Park and White
Rock, including White Rock pier and Nico-
mekl River). — Dec. 30, 1949; 8.30 a.m. to
4 p.m.; wind S.E. changing to N.E. with some
snow; visibility poor; temp. 30°F.; 2 obser-
vers, one party; 15 miles by car and on foot.
Common Loon, 4; Red-necked Grebe, 3;
Horned Grebe, 21; Western Grebe, 5; Double-
crested Cormorant, 3; Pelagic Cormorant, 2;
Great Blue Heron, 1; Black Brant, 18; Can-
vas-back, 4; Greater Scaup Duck, 55; Amer-
ican Golden-eye, 35; Buffle-head, 23; Harle-
quin Duck, 22; White-Winged Scoter, 66;
Surf Scoter, 56; American Scoter, 14; Amer-

ican Merganser, 13; Red-breasted Merganser,

3; Western Goshawk, 1; Ring-necked Phea-
sant, 2; Red-backed Sandpiper, 3; Glaucous-
winged Gull, 67; Red-shafted Flicker, 5;
Pileated Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker,
1; Northwestern Crow, 50; Black-capped
Chickadee, 20; Winter Wren, 1; Bewick’s
Wren, 1; Varied Thrush, 1; Golden-crowned
Kinglet, 12; English Sparrow, 26; Purple
Finch, 25; Pine Siskin, 50; Spotted Towhee,
6; Oregon Junco, 36; Song Sparrow, 10. Total,
37 species, 647 individuals. — M. W. Holdom,
E. E. Woodford.

Vancouver, B.C.—Dec. 26, 1949; cloudy,
S.E. breeze, freezing at start; thawing, some
fog in low areas at finish; some snow lying
in sheltered places; 6 observers; distance
covered, 5 miles; continuation of hunting
season probably contributed to scarcity of
waterfowl. Common Loon, 2; Pacific Loon,
1; Western Grebe, 13; Double-crested Cor-
morant, 17; Great Blue Heron, 1; Mallard, 6;
Greater Scaup Duck, 16; American Golden-
eye, 10; Buffle-head, 1; Red-breasted Mer-
ganser, 1; Sharp-skinned Hawk, 1; Ring-

FIELD-NATURALIST e 81

necked Pheasant, 9; Wilson’s Snipe, 7; Glau-
cous-winged Gull, 300; Ring-billed Gull, 87;
Sereech Owl, 3; Red-shafted Flicker, 6; Dow-
ny Woodpecker, 3; Northwestern Crow, 6;
Oregon Chickadee, 11; Winter Wren, 1;
Robin, 40; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 30;
Crested Mynah, 3; Western Meadowlark, 2;
Brewer’s Blackbird, 2; California Purple
Finch, 510; Pine Siskin, 250; Oregon Towhee,
41; Oregon Junco, 75; Song Sparrow, 56.
Total, 31 species, 1510 individuals. — Mrs. E.
Bisney, Billy Bisney, E. Church, Wm. H.
Hughs, W. Peters, F. Sanford. (Vancouver
Natural History Society).

New Westminster, B.C.—(Pasture, hedge-
rows, brushy bogland, woods, river margin,
sewer outfall and open river, adjacent to
Fraser River). — Dec. 26, 1949; 10.00 am.,
to 3.00 p.m.; overcast, misty; extreme visib-
ility one quarter mile; five miles on foot, two
miles by car; two observers. Western Grebe,
1; Mallard, 2; Scaup Duck, 150; Cooper’s

Hawk, 1; Herring Gull, 8; Western Gull,
40; Glaucous-winged Gull, 45; Heerman’s
Gull, 10; Short-billed Bull, 30; Gull sp.,

81; Northwest Flicker, 2; Gairdner’s Downy
Woodpecker, 5; Northwest Crow, 7; Oregon
Chickadee, 84; Chestnut-backed Chickadee,
2; Coast Bush Tit, 26; Seattle Wren, 2;
English Sparrow, 25 (est.); Oregon Towhee,
19; Oregon Junco, 40; Pine Siskin, 250 (est).;
Puget Sound Sparrow, 3; Rusty Song Spar-
row, 3. Total, 23 species or subspecies, 879
individuals. — W.’S. Maguire, Harry Middle-
ton.

Courtenay — Comox, Vancouver Island,
B.C. — (Same area as covered for several -
years: through Courtenay and around river
there, along river and shore line to and
through Comox Village). — Dec. 26, 1949;
8.30 am. to 5 p.m.; overcast, calm, good
visibility, temp. 29° to 38°F.; ground covered
with snow for over a week; two observers,
mainly on foot and together; 8 miles. Com-
mon Loon, 6; Red-throated Loon, 5; Holboell’s
Grebe, 6; Horned Grebe, 7; Western Grebe,
8; Pied-billed Grebe, 1; Double-crested Cor-
morant, 7; Pelagic Cormorant, 2; (unidentif-
ned cormorants, 10); Northwestern Coast
Heron, 5; Mallard, 160 plus; Baldpate, 60;
Pintail, 1; Shoveller, 2; Canvas-back, 6;
Greater Scaup, 250 est.; American Golden-
eye, 190 plus; Barrow’s Golden-eye, 3; Buffle-
head, 50 (est.); White-winged Scoter, 190
plus; Surf Scoter, 50 plus; American Scoter,

82. eT THe CANADIAN
7; Ruddy Duck, 1; Hooded Merganser, 5;
American Merganser, 7; Red-breasted Mer-
ganser, 4; 1000 plus unidentified ducks at
sea; Red-tailed Hawk, 1; Sparrow Hawk, 1;
Oregon Ruffed Grouse, 3; California Quail,
11; Ring-necked Pheasant, 6; Coot, 33; Kill-
deer, 7; Glaucous-winged Gull, 570; Herring
Gull, 1; Thayer’s Gull, 15; California Gull,
1 (R.F.); Ring-billed Gull, 1 (RF.); Short-
billed Gull, 11; California Murre, 1; Flicker,
3; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Harris’s Wood-
pecker, 2; Gairdner’s Woodpecker, 2; Raven,

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

5; Western Crow, 4; Northwestern Crow, 175
plus: Chestnut backed Chickadee, 1; Seattle
Wren, 2; Robin, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet,
3; English Sparrow, 49; Meadowlark, 4; Pur-
ple Finch, 20 plus; Pine Siskin, 70 plus;
Bendire’s Crossbill, 4; Oregon Towhee, 6;
Oregon Junco, 61; Fox Sparrow, 1; Song
Sparrow, 7. Total, 59 species, 3124 plus in-
dividuals. (This is the first record on a
Christmas census of Pintail, Ruddy Duck,
California Gull, Ring-billed Gull and Spar-
row Hawk). — Ralph Fryer, Theed Pearse.

OBSERVATIONS OF RUFFED GROUSE IN SOUTHERN ONTARIO
WITH A DISCUSSION ON CYCLES?

A. Murray FALris? and C. E. Hops?

HE OBSERVATIONS recorded below

were made for the most part in isolated
woodlots in the township of Albion, Peel
County, Ontario. The woodlots consisted of
mixed stands of deciduous trees, maple and
beech predominating, and a mixture of hem-
lock and cedar. Small spring streams flowed
through most of the woodlots. Most readers
will be familiar with the extensive observations
and studies on ruffed grouse in New York
State by Edminster and others(4) so that
further reference will not be made to them
in this report.

@

NESTING

The number of eggs laid may be an import-
ant factor in grouse populations. In thirteen
nests observed during 1944, 1945, 1946 and
1947, a total of 159 eggs was tallied which gives
an arithmetic average of 12.2 per nest. Fisher
(6) found an average of 10.6-in nine nests
and states that Bump gave eleven as the
average clutch in more than one thousand
nests observed.

A single, somewhat impromptu experiment
was carried out to determine the effect of
removing eggs from a nest during the laying
period. The eggs were removed after seven
had been laid and three hen’s eggs were
put in their place. The nest was visited four
days later, by which time three more eggs had
been laid. These were removed. Four days
1) Received for publication May 30, 1949.

2) Ontario Research Foundation.
3) Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology.

later there were four more eggs in the nest
and incubation had begun. These eggs were
removed and no more eggs were laid sub-
sequently. The grouse continued to sit on the
hen’s eggs for two weeks at which time she
was taken as a specimen. It seems obvious
that the hen’s eggs served to hold the grouse
to the nest which might otherwise have been
abandoned. The total of fourteen eggs laid
in this nest did not exceed the maximum of
fifteen eggs found in any one nest during
the period of our observations and therefore
the total seems unaffected by egg removal.

Our observations suggest that second nest-
ings following the destruction of first clutches
which were in the process of incubation, are
rare. In the eleven instances in which some
agency had destroyed the eggs of a first nest-
ing, neither a second nest was found nor were
nestlings observed subsequently in the res-
pective woodlots.

TEMPERATURE AND EGG LAYING

It is apparent from Table 1 that egg laying
or incubation, or both, do not begin at a
uniform time each year. The differences
appear to be related to weather conditions,
especially temperature. The snow had almost
completely disappeared everywhere by April
1st in 1945 and 1946; in contrast with this the

winter snows remained in the swamps until —

the latter part of April, during the spring
of 1944 and 1947 and consequently few nest-

ing sites. were available for the grouse in

a0:
, > ai

ee eee eee §

ee ae ee eS ap

i i a Re

Sah os 5
a

q

; ;

ra

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

TABLE 1. — SUMMARY OF GROUSE DRUMMING AND HATCHING
IN PALGRAVE AREA.

Year First Drumming Eggs Hatching
LADLE Ve hlen Gee eel pO OO April 25 June 3-13
Ls Cs DS ae a ae ea April 1 May 18-24
POUAG fre eth Oe cs ctco wake April 6 May 26-31
LIA E predate aan aR April 22 June 1-7
Pea ee LAM ise cess ain tags weet April 2 May 28 - June 3

TABLE 2. — MEAN TEMPERATURE °F FOR 10 DAY INTERVALS
(FROM MAR. 10 - MAY 8) FROM WEATHER STATION AT BEETON, ONTARIO.

1944 1945 1946 1947 1948
MoarehelO~ 19). 2200 .2..2...0. 24.1 42.2 39.5 24.1 26.6
March 20-29 00.22.2500... 29.8 50.2 46.5 27.5 39.9
March 30- April 8 ...... 31.0 46.7 40.6 32.6 42.6
Jo 2) 51 DG 5 (Se 36.7 54.0 39.4 39.6 42.4
7 \)0 610 Us A E24 44.6 40.6 47.8 41.1 52.9
April 28- May 8 ........... 59.4 44.3 46.7 47.9 48.7

1944 and 1947 before the latter part of April. |
occurred after egg laying had begun and
before incubation commenced.

The spring of 1948 was rather intermediate
between these two extremes. If gonad develop-
ment in certain migrating birds (Rowan, 10)
is related to the increasing length of day it
might be expected that mating behaviour in
grouse would occur about the same time each
year. However it appears from an examination
of the temperature data (Table 2) and cloud-
iness records taken at a nearby weather station’
in different years at nesting time, that the
initiation of drumming, egg Jaying and in-
cubation may be affected more by temper-
ature than by light, although drumming is
known to occur after the incubation period is
over. In fact, Mr. H. Holmberg informs us
that he heard grouse drumming in mid-winter
1947-1948 in Algonquin Park.

The rate of growth of grouse populations
may be affected by the percentage hatch of
the eggs which in turn may be affected by
temperature. Fisher (6) gives the percentage

hatch for eighty-five eggs as 90%. We observed

:

;
_*
rt

a

hatch of over 90% in 1947 and an approxim-

ate 50% hatch in seventy-three eggs in 1945.
However egg mortality in 1945 was apparently
increased by cold weather as frost and snow

NESTS AND PREDATORS

The destruction of nests by predators may

affect the rate of increase of a grouse pop-

ulation. Such destruction is probably determ-
ined by several factors such as the number of
predators plus the availability to them of other
acceptable food animals, and the adequacy of
cover for the grouse. Clarke (3), in his exten-
sive study of grouse, found only a single nest
destroyed by predators, whereas fourteen out
of twenty-three nests observed by us were,
or were judged to have been, destroyed by
predators. Eleven of the fourteen nests were
destroyed after they had been visited by man,
although not necessarily after the first visit;
three were found destroyed, although so far as
known they had never been visited by man;
nine were visited some several times but were
not destroyed. It is probable that the figure
for those destroyed but not visited should be
much higher as the chances of finding a nest
with a bird sitting on it are much better than

84 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

that of finding a destroyed nest. It is appar-
ent, therefore, that twelve nests were not
affected by the trails which the authors made
to them as three were destroyed before they
were discovered and nine were not destroyed
after being visited. This suggests that des-
truction of grouse nests is not necessarily in-
creased because of a trail made by man to the
nests. It is our opinion, also, although sub-
Stantiating data are insufficient, that predation
is more likely to occur just after incubation
has commenced rather than before this time or
later in the incubation period. Presumably
foxes or skunks were the cause of most of
the nest destruction observed by us.

WINTER MORTALITY

Few figures on winter mortality of adults
are available from the present study. While
looking for grouse nests, in the spring of 1946
the remains of seven grouse were encountered
in the woods whereas in 1947 in approximately
the same number of man hours spent in similar
woods, no remains of grouse were found.

OTHER FACTORS AFFECTING GROUSE
POPULATIONS

Mortality due to hunting might be thought
important in causing declines in grouse pop-
ulations. Fisher (6) concluded from studies
in Michigan that the yearly kill by hunters in
that state is a minor factor in the decimation
of grouse populations as compared with other
factors. It is common knowledge that declines
in population occur in parts of the country
which are rarely, if ever, hunted.

The rate of increase of grouse populations
will be influenced also by the ratio of the
sexes, especially if monogamy, rather than
polygamy, is the rule. Bump (2) places the
sex ratio for grouse in New York State as
about equal although he states there may be
a slight excess of males. It appears from our
observations on raising grouse in captivity
that males may be reared to adults more easily
than females as ten out of fifteen so reared
have been males. However, more information
on the sex ratio in nature, together with data
on the mortality of the sexes, is desirable. An
examina‘ion of hunters’ bags to determine the
percentage of males and females should yield
useful information. Clarke (3) believes there
may be occasional polygamy and Snyder (11)
suggest polygamy may occur. Allen (1) found
a ratio of five hens to one cock was sufficient
for breeding grouse in captivity. We found in
one instance three nests within 100 yards of

each other and two of these were less than
100 feet apart. It seemed unlikely that more
than two males were in this territory.

It is conceivable that decline of grouse
populations is caused by disease. Clarke
(3) found Leuwcocytozoon bonasae to be
abundant in young grouse at the time they
were “dying off” and thought possibly this
was responsible for the decline. Leucocyto-
zoon bonasae might be expected to be patho-
genic as Wickware (12), O’Roke (8), Huff
(7) and others have observed that a species
related to it is pathogenic to ducks. We
found that 20% of thirty experimental ducks
died, presumably as a result of the infection
with the latter species. We also found that
one out of nine crows infected with L. sakha-
rofft died presumably as a result of the in-
fection. L. bonasae has been found in ap-
proximately 60-70% of over 100 adult grouse
examined in Ontario (Fallis (5)), but whilst
infection has been followed from the
beginning in three ruffed grouse, no patho-
genic effects have been observed. A heavy
infection of Haemoproteus was observed in
one grouse in which 30% of the red blood
cells were parasitized.

DISCUSSION

It is generally conceded that rather pron-
ounced “crashes” occur in the grouse pop-
ulation. Reports of Clarke (3) and Fallis (5)
based on replies to questionnaires suggest that
these occur at rather regular intervals of 9 to
10 years throughout the Province, zlthough the
cycle did not coincide exactly for all parts
of the country. However, in the light of
further experience it seems that a great
number of quantitative observations are need-
ed in more localities over a period of years to
confirm the existence of any regular cycle.
A priori it would seem to us unlikely that any
such regularity occurs for reasons outlined
below. Clarke, in his extensive work noted

differences of two to three years in the.

period of peak abundance and decline in
different parts of the of the Province. If this
is the case the cycle would be immediately
out of phase. If natural factors operate to
bring the cycle back into phase there is no
reason to suppose that they do not operate
to create the opposite condition.

The sudden depletion of grouse in an area
suggests that disease may be responsible for
the “crash” and if this is so it might be
expected that the sudden decline would occur

[Vol. 64

ee ee

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN
only when a certain density of population
occurs. A number of factors may tend to
prevent this build-up occurring with unifor-
mity except in a local area.

Firstly, the rate of spread of disease would

-depend on a number of factors such as popul-

ation density, predisposing causes, host re-
sistance, mode of spread and _ incubation
period. If transmission is direct the spread
might be reasonably uniform. If, on the other
hand, an insect vector of a disease is involved
it introduces another series of variables. It is
consequently inconceivable how any insect

‘borne disease can spre2zd among grouse with

the same uniformity throughout widely scat-
tered parts of the country at the same time.

Secondly an increase would not be expected
as rapidly in a “hunted” as compared to a
“non-hunted” area.

Thirdly, our observations suggest that the
population may be affected by predators. A
discussion of this aspect involves a consider-
ation of complicated interlocking food chains,
as it is necessary to consider not only the
animals which prey on the grouse, young and
old, but also availability of other foods and
disease among the predators; in addition the
number of predators will be affected by the
number of their enemies. In addition it
seems obvious from our limited observations
that the grouse population may be affected by
adverse weather conditions. The possibility of
variations in weather throughout the country
are such as to interfere with any regular cycle
of population that otherwise might be ex-
pected.

The questions of sex ratio, differential
mortality, and polygamy are also important
in considering the rise and fall of grouse
populations.

In view of the number of factors which may
affect the grouse population it seems impos-
sible to expect any regular cyclical phenomena
in a widespread area at the same time. This
throws some doubt on the further usefulness
of compiling questionnaire data simply on
population trends each year. Rather should
we not endeavour to obtain information
annually on the number of male and female
grouse taken in hunters’ bags, the number of
drumming males in the spring, the number

and size of broods in the early summer, and

eal

the number of predators together with inform-
ation on disease and parasitism from a large
number of localities? Admittedly this is a
difficult programme to accomplish since the

2

FIELD-NATURALIST 85

determination of certain points would seem to
require biologically trained observers over a
wide area and for a long period of time.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

We are indebted to Dr. H. B. Speakman,
Director, Ontario Research Foundation and
Professor J. R. Dymond, Director, Royal On-
tario Museum of Zoology, for permission to
carry out this co-operative work and publish
our observations. We are grateful also to Miss
Maynard Grange, Librarian, Ontario Research
Foundation and Mr. L. L. Snyder, Assistant
Director, Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology,
for reading the manuscript and making helpful
suggestions.

REFERENCES

1. Allen, A. A——Ten years experiments in
rearing ruffed grouse in captivity. Trans.
16th Amer. Game Conf. 3-21, 1929.

2. Bump, G.—Recent developments in the
rearing of ruffed grouse. Trans. 21st.
Amer. Game Conf. 213-217, 1935.

3. Clarke, C.H.D.—Fluctuations in numbers
of ruffed grouse Bonasa umbellus (L.)
with special reference to Ontario. Univ.
Toronto Studies Biol. Ser. 41:118 pp. 1936.

4. Edminster, F. C.—The ruffed grouse, its
life history, ecology and management,
Macmillan, New York, 1947.

5. Fallis, A. M—Population trends and blood
parasites of ruffed grouse in Ontario. J.
Wildlife Manag. 9:203-206, 1945.

6. Fisher, L. W.—Studies of the eastern
ruffed grouse in Michigan. Michigan State
College Tech. Bull. 166:46 pp. 1939.

7. Huff, C.G.—Schizogony and gametocyte
development in Leucocytozoon simondi
and comparisons with Plasmodium and
Haemoprotens. J. Inf. Dis. 71: 18-32,
1942.

8. O’Roke, E. C.—A malaria-like disease of
ducks. Univ. Mich. Sch. Forestry Conserv.
Bull. 4:44 pp., 1934.

9. Romanoff, A. L., Bump, G., Holm, E.—
Artificial incubation of some upland game
birds’ eggs. N.Y. State Conserv. Dept. &
College of Agric. Bull. 2:44 pp., 1938.

10. Rowan, Wm.—The riddle of migration,
Baltimore, 1931.

11. Snyder, L. L.—The summer birds of lake
Nipigon. Trans. Roy. Can. Instit. 16:251-
277, 1928.

12. Wickware, A.B.—Is Leucocytozoon anatis
the cause of a new disease in ducks?
Parasit. 8:17-21, 1915.

86 THEr CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

SOME HERPETOLOGICAL RECORDS FROM THE QUETICO
PROVINCIAL PARK OF ONTARIO ?*?

R. G. LINDEBORG
N.M. Highlands Univ., Las Vegas, New Mexico.

URING THE SUMMER of 1935, the author

and R. V. Drexler travelled by canoe
through the Quetico Provincial Park and ad-
joining regions of southwestern Ontario.
Amphibians and reptiles were collected from
a limited number of locations but it is felt
important to report them because the fauna
of this interesting area is not well known.
Identification of material collected was
checked at the Museum of Zoology, University
of Michigan, and the specimens are deposited
there, numbers 89534-55.

The region is located in the eastern por-
tion of the Rainy River district and the
western part of the Thunder Bay region, all
within the Hudson Bay drainage system. The
trip started at Ely, Minnesota, and described
a large figure eight with the most northerly
point at Savanne, Ontario. A short itinerary
of the trip may aid in locating the collecting
stations. The following lakes were visited
in turn: from Basswood northeast to Agnes
and Kawnipi, northwest to Russell, and north
te Sturgeon and Doré; thence to Pickerel,
east to French, north to Eva, east to Nydia
and Elbow, north to Crooked and Mercutio,
east to Bedivere and up the north arm to Lac
des Mille Lacs, the most northerly lake vis-
ited. From the southeast end of Mille Lacs
we travelled south through Kashabowie,
scuthwest through Upper Shebandowan, Bur-
chell and Snodgrass; then down the Wawiag
River turning south just inside the park
boundary to Mack Lake. From Mack we
returned to the Wawiag and continued south-
west to Kawa Bay of Kawnipi and retraced
our course almost to Shelly, finally turning
south to Cairn, Sark, Keefer, Kahshahpiwi to
end the journey in Ranger Bay of Basswood
Lake. All of the names used are taken from
the Quetico Sheet No. 52B, of the National
Topographic Series, of the Canadian Depart-
ment of Interior dated August 1931.

1) Received for publication July 11, 1949.

2) Contribution No. 28 from the Biological Science De-
partment of Michigan State College, East Lansing,
Mich.

LIST OF SPECIES

1. Ambystoma jeffersonianum. Jefferson’s
salamander. — Near Agnes Lake. About a
hundred logs were turned over and only two
specimens were found under one; another
was found near Russell Lake.

2. Plethodon cincreus. Red-backed Sala-
mander. — Seven specimens were collected
from three locations near Agnes Lake, and
two near Kahshahpiwi Lake. Breeding was
evidently in progress by June 20 since the
Agnes specimens include a male, female and
cluster of eggs collected under the same log.

3. Bufo americanus americanus. American -

Toad. — Three adults collected near Anubis,
young were also seen June 23; two taken near
Russell. This toad was observed also near
Basswood, Meadows, north end of McKenzie
Bay of Kawnipi, Cache, Pickerel, and French
Lakes.

4. Hyla crucifer. Spring Peeper. — Two
specimens were collected near Mack Lake
and one at each near Pickerel, Eva, Doré, and
Russell Lakes,

5.—Rana _ septentrionalis. Mink Frog. —
One taken near Kahshahpiwi Lake.

6. Rana clamitans. Green Frog. — One
collected near each, south and west shores
of Kawnipi, Elbow, and Sark Lakes,

7. Rana pipiens. Leopard Frog. — Three
specimens were collected near north end of
McKenzie Bay of Kawnipi. Others were seen
at Cache, Pickerel, and French Lakes.

8. Rana_ sylvatica catabrigensis. Wood
Frog. — Four were collected from _ three
localities near Agnes. Others were Seen at
Basswood, Meadows, Anubis, Kawnipi, Cache,
Russell, Doré and Pickerel Lakes.

9. Chelydra serpentina. Snapping Turtle.
—Identified from photographs taken at Stur-
geon Lake by rangers stationed there.

10. Chrysemys sp. Painted Turtle. —
Seen at Meadows Lake. Resembled picta belli
in that markings followed well out on the
plastron.

11. Thamnophis sirtalis sirtalis. Garter
Snake. — One collected near Agnes and
another near the north end of McKenzie Bay
of Kawnipi Lakes.

Ste eee ee ee eee

;
eee

.
|
|
;

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

87

SOME COUNTS OF BIRD POPULATIONS IN CONIFEROUS FORESTS
NEAR THE LIMIT OF TREES?

LEONARD W. WING
Texas A. & M. College, College Station, Texas

HE COUNTS that supply the base for
this paper were obtained during some
studies of bird activity in the Arctic (by
means of a grant from the Arctic Institute
of North America). Owing to the advance of

the breeding season, it was not feasible to

set up regular check plots for counts of bird
populations along Teslin River, near John-

‘son’s Crossing, Yukon Territory in the sum-

mer of 1948. Instead, I contented myself with
making several transects at I had time avail-

able from other field work. There are so

few counts of actual populations in the North-
land, that these seem of especial significance
as indicating the very low order of abundan-
ce near the conifer fringe. The transects

1) Received for publication November 22, 1949.

themselves varied from one to seven miles
in length over substantially the same route
each time. I kept a record of each individual
bird and group as seen, along with the dis-
tance at which it was first detected. This
detection-distance is the distance between the
bird and me at the moment of finding it.

I average the respective detection-distances
and have used this average as the width of the
strip along each side of the transect line in
which birds were counted. The length of the
travel line and the strip width along each side
gives the area covered by this type of census.
For comparative purposes, I converted all
to a 100-acre basis. The number of birds per
hundred acres for nine transect counts varied
from a low of 1.3 to a high of 13.0 in the

TABLE 1. BIRD POPULATIONS — LODGEPOLE PINE TYPE

Average

: i Bird
Date Hours pe eh nace petection Shy i Hundred
Species Size (Yards) Transect Acres
June 30 9:00 AM to 1:00 P.M............000. 10 1.5 110.0 2.5 13.0
July 4 3:00 PM to 6:00 PM............0.... 7 1.6 108.2 3 3.5
ELIS S10 Opt ae ICTR ae oe ee 5 1.0 145.0 5 1.3
STL RTS es oe PN ee eee eR Lu Ml Sar DN 3 1.0 90.0 1 4.6
July 9 7:30 INNievtoy 233 Op sey ile aetna. ele 16 i533 76.7 7 10.0
sly 132.900; AM, to. NOOM socsecccce toca: 5 1.6 56.0: 5] 6.5
Sly. 49:00AM £0. NOOM 0.0.8 e 8 1 192.5 2.5 3.2
Sibyl as 9200; AM to Noone cudece. dacs. 4 ey 100.0 3 4.1
AU OLE SES Aan SRI aA Eg Lena A 3 1.3 93.3 ils) 4.0
Mortals msl OS ii... ecette Meira oy, FO 28.5
CMAVOT ASO clan Lili A cae an Ag rae us 1.3 103.1 5.2
SPRUCE TYPE
aly: -23).9:00) AM: to: Noon) 2 utc heeled... 3 3.7 83.3 3 6.5
July 25 8:00 AM to Noon.......... 3 9.0 106.2 5 9.3
duly 26); 9200/ GAM" to’ Noone iwi Sag. 6 23 140.0 4 3.4
MP Ota INES ode Met Mn Ceemt NT 12
PAVIA re) fet Geis Mea aN 4.7 124.2 5.6

88 THE CANADIAN

lodgepole pine type (see table 1). It averaged
5.2. In the spruce type, the transects gave
3.4, 6.5 and 9.3 for three transects, respectiv-
ely; they averaged 5.6.

An observer must necessarily assume that
he detects all or most of the birds within the
detection strip. This is a problem involved
in all animal censuses also. The important
point, however, is not the exactness of the
estimate by the transect censuses but rather
the low order of population indicated for
this northern conifer limit. This population
thus indicated is far lower than any that I
have found reported elsewhere, but all such
counts are from hundreds of miles farther
South. The total approaches that along the
ponderosa pine-grassland border or even of
some desert areas.

A noticeable trait of birds in the region,
and perhaps elsewhere in the Arctic and other
places, is their appearance in local concen-
trations that I have called “pocketing”.
Pockets occur in parts of the vegetation type

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

seemingly uniform throughout, for I could
find no readily apparent differences between
pockets and the places between. Pockets
occur also in favorable places where habitat
variation throws many birds together. Pocket-
ing in the woods impresses itself upon one
as he walks for perhaps a mile or two with-
out finding a bird and then passes through
a spot inhabited by a number of birds of
several species.

The presence in the following tabulation
of several birds of long-range detection, such
as the Nighthawk, influences the final figures
as well as the detection-distance averages.
But this a relative matter and does not
materially change the indications of very low
level populations in the northern coniferous
forest fringe.

The larger flock average for the spruce
type resulted from the later dates and con-
sequent presence of family groups and birds
gathered together as a prelude to flocking
for migration.

—_—_-___—_

REVIEW

An unusual Maskinonge from Little Ver-
milion Lake, Ontario. By G. S. Cameron.
Contributions of the Royal Ontario Museum
of Zoology No. 31, 1948. Reprinted from the
Canadian Journal of Research, D, 26:223-229,
October, 1948.

In the October 1945 issue of “Outdoors”,
J. Godfrey Jr., reported an unusual type of
maskinonge from Little Vermilion Lake,
Ontario, which was described as a new
species, Esox amentus.
the taxonomic study of maskinonge conducted
by the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology a
study of the maskinonge of the area was
conducted during the summer of 1946 with
_the financial support of the Carling Conser-
vation Club. The results of this study are
reported in the paper under review.

During the study, 69 maskinonge from
Little Vermilion Lake and a connecting lake
were examined in detail (28 measurements,
counts of scales, branchiostegal and fin rays).

Six of the maskinonge were significantly
different from the remaining 63 in many of
the observed characters including the
presence of the distinct dark cross-bars on

In connection with

the body which have resulted in the name
“true tiger” being applied to this type.

Pike (Esox lucius) although not reported
from Little Vermilion Lake are abundant in
a neighbouring lake which is joined to Little
Vermilion Lake by ,a long meandering
stream.

A consideration of the characters of the
“true-tiger’ maskinonge in relation to those
of the maskinonge and pike indicates that
the form is a hybrid between these two
species. This conclusion is strengthened by
the fact that the “tiger” type fish ave relativ-
ely rare, appear to be sterile, and have many
characters like one or other parent or inter-
mediate between thoSe of the parent species.
Hybrids between these two species have been
reported by other authors. TheSe were sim-
ilar in some characteristics, including bar-
ring, to the specimens secured from Little
Vermilion Lake.

A map of the area, a table comparing
some 32 characters of the hybrid with the
common maskinonge, three graphs, four
excellent photographs of specimens and a
brief bibliography complete this interesting
paper. — Victor E. F. Solman.

March-April, 1950] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

89

OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB
BY-LAWS

(Revised 1949; approved by Council December 9, 1949)

1. Standing Committees. Three standing
committees of at least five members each, of
whom a majority in each committee shall be
members of the Council, shall be appointed
by the Council, namely: a Publications Com-
mittee, an Excursions and Lectures Com-
mittee, and a Reserve Fund Committee. The
Editor, the Treasurer, and the Business
Manager shall each be, ex-officio, member
of the Publications Committee.

The Chairman of the Excursions and
Lectures Committee shall have power to add
to the Committee, provided that the majority
of the Committee shall at all times be mem-
bers of the Council.

2. Duties of the Publications Committee.
The Publications Committee shall have direct
supervision over all publications issued or
received by the Club. The Committee shall
have power to decide what shall and what
shall not be published in the Canadian Field-
Naturalist and shall see that the Editor per-
forms his duties in accordance with the
Constitution and By-laws.

The Chairman of the Committee shall
submit to the Council a report which shall
be embodied in the Annual Report of .the
Council. This report shall give an outline of
the work accomplished by the Committee
during the year.

3. Duties of the Editor. The Editor shall
be responsible for the preparation of the
Canadian Field-Naturalist. He shall be, ex-

officio, a member of the Publications Com-

mittee, whose executive officer he shall be
and to whom he shall be responsible. He shall
be Chairman of the Editorial Committee,
composed of the Editor and the Associate
Editors.

4. Duties of the Associate Editors. The
Associate Editors shall co-operate with the
Editor in his work of preparing the Canadian
Field-Naturalist.

5. Duties of the Business Manager. The
Business Manager shall be responsible, under
the direction of the Publications Committee,
for the custody and sale of the publications
owned by the Club; for the management of

the circulation and for the sale of adverti-
sing for The Canadian Field-Naturalist.

6. Duties of the Excursions and Lectures
Committee. The Excursions and Lectures
Committee ‘shall make arrangements for
field excursions and for lecture programmes,
subject to the approval of the Council. The
Chairman of this committee shall submit a
signed report to the Council at the close of
each year outlining the activities carried out
under the supervision of this committee. This
report shall be embodied in the Annual
Report of the Council.

7. Duties of The Reserve Fund Com-
mittee. The Reserve Fund Committee shall
serve in an advisory capacity to the Treasurer

in the matter of investment of the Reserve

Fund.

8. Groups. The Council may authorize
the formation of groups for study in any
field of natural history.

9. Fees. The schedule of Annual Fees
shall be as follows:
Active Members: Three Dollars
Associate Members: One Dollar
Fees become due at the beginning of each
calendar year and no member in arrears
shall be entitled to the privileges of the Club.

10. Order of Business at Meetings of the
Council.
1. Reading of the minutes of the previous
meeting.
. Business arising out of the minutes.
‘Communications.
. New members.
. Finances.
. Reports of committees.
. New business.

11. Amendments. An amendment to
these By-laws may be adopted at any meeting
of the Council, by a three-quarter vote of
the members present, due notice embodying
a copy of the proposed amendment having
been given at a previous meeting of the
Council. Any such amendment shall be
published in an early issue of the Canadian
Field-Naturalist.

IQ FP ww

90 THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

PLANTS COLLECTED BY B. JOHN WOODRUFF ON THE WEST
COAST OF MELVILLE PENINSULA, FRANKLIN DISTRICT,
N.W.T., CANADA. *? |
W. J. Copy

Division of Botany and Plant Pathology, Science Service,
Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Canada.

URING THE SUMMER of 1948 (Aug.

16 to 20) Mr. B. John Woodruff of the
Geodetic Survey of Canada made a collection
of plants from the west coast of Melville
Peninsula, Franklin District, N.W.T. (68°18’N,
85°25’W). Since relatively little is known of
the vegetation of Melville Peninsula, par-
ticularly of the west coast, it seems fit to
publish a list of the species represented in
the collection.

~The following description of the area
(see Fig. 1) has been provided by Mr.
Woodruff:

The camp site was on a sandy beach on
the south shore of a small lake about two
miles in length and a mile in width, on the
mid-west side of Melville Peninsula. The
lake was drained by a small stream, which
dropped about 20 feet in its 100 yard course
to sea level at Committee Bay. To the south
of the camp was a 20 to 30 foot bank of
gravel containing numerous sea Shells and
a buried whale skeleton, indicating an old
sea shore about twenty feet above the present
lake level. The old sea bed maintained a
sedge meadow, where there were many
signs of cariboo. There were two marshy
areas on either side of the camp site. The
surrounding land mass consisted of glaciated
igneous rock that rose 500 to 1000 feet above
sea level. The folds and valleys were filled
with glacial till and, in sheltered moist areas,
the soil supported a fair growth of veg-
etation. The exposed land was swept almost
bare by the wind, although scattered clumps
of mosses and lichens maintained a foothold.

The following specimens have been ident-
ified by members of the staff of the Division
of Botany and Plant Pathology, Department
of Agriculture, Ottawa, and are preserved in
- the herbarium of that institution:

1) Contribution No. 1003 Division of Botany and Plant
Pathology, Science Service, Department of Agri-
culture, Ottawa, Canada.

2) Received for publication December 27, 1949.

Hierochloé alpina (Sw.) R. & S.—sand beach;
17.
Alopecurus alpinus J. E. Sm. — swamp and
sand beach; 29.
Arctagrostis latifolia
marsh; 30.

Trisetum spicatum (L.) Richt.—scattered in
small clumps on sandy bank and on sand
beach; 11, 15.

(R. Br.) Griseb. —

Pleuropogon Sabinei R. Br. — in running
water; 42B.
Poa arctica R. Br. — common in clumps on

sand bank; 13 (det. J. R. Swallen, U.S.
National Herbarium, Washington). A
Dupontia Fisheri R. Br. var. aristata Malte

ex Polunin — in stream; 42A.

Puccinellia paupercula (Holm) Fern. &
Weath; 26 (det. J. R. Swallen).
Puccinellia Vahliana (Liebm.) Scribn. &

Merr.; 27 (det. J .R. Swallen).

Festuca brachyphylla Schultes—moist sandy
beach; 6.

Eriophorum angustifolium Honckn. — marsh;
31.

Carex nardina Fries — in clumps on sand
beach; 24.

Carex Bigelowit Torr.— common, in clumps,
on moist sandy beach; 4.

Carex aquatilis Wahl. — swamp; 28.

Carex membranacea Hook. — moist gravel;

44,

Luzula nivalis (Laest.) Beurl. — crack in
rock; 37.

Luzula confusa Lindeb. — scattered on moist
sandy beach; 1.

Juncus biglumis L. — moist sand beach; 33A.

Juncus albescens (Lange) Fern.—moist sand
beach; 33C.

Juncus castaneus J. E. Sm. — moist sand be

beach; 33B.

Salix arctica Pall. var. Brownei Anders; 35.

Salix herbacea L.—prostrate on moist creek
bank; 34.

Oxyria digyna (L.) Hill — scattered on moist
sandy bank; 7.

YS ees oe —

91

THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

March-April, 1950]

‘D[Nsuluad o[TA[ey JO JSDOD jsem uO o}Is Hunyodaljoo jo dy ‘{ “bry

yoou snoaNol*
20001 OL STTIH

ASTIVA TSAVHYD GadOud

ARTIVA
TSAVHS
LSIOW

‘
Seen

aLlISdWyvo

VINSNIN3d
STHATSW

NISsvd

3xod LOSLISIA
V3YV 2 aarumnos

NMONYUNN dalyoS LovxXa

Avd dalliNWod

92 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Silene acaulis L. var. exscapa (All.) DC. —
common; in clumps on moist sand beach;
3.

Cerastium alpinum L. — fairly common;
scattered on sand bank; 14.

Stellaria laeta Rich. (Stellaria longipes sensu
Polunin, pro parte, Bot. East. Can. Arctic,
Part 1, Canada, Department of Mines and
Resources, National Museum Bulletin No.
92, 1940). — moist rocky area; 39.

Papaver radicatum Rottb. — moist sandy
beach; 2.
Cochlearia officinalis L. var. arctica

(Schlecht.) Gelert — prostrate on sand
beach; 12.

Eutrema Edwardsii R. Br. moist plain; 23.

Draba fladnizensis Wulfen — sand beach;
19, 20B.

Draba nivalis Lil. — sand beach; 20A.

Arabis arenicola (Rich.) Gelert — prostrate
on sand beach; 21.

Saxifraga cernua L.—scattered on moist sand
bank; 9.

Saxifraga stellaris L. var. comosa Retz. —
scattered on moist sand bank; 10.

Saxifraga tricuspidata Rottb. forma Wood-
ruffii J. A. Calder, forma nov. — laxissime
caespitosa caudiculis elongatis; folia fere
omnia integra; caules floriferi breves uni-
flori simplices; petala lutea (epunctata?).
TYPE: Moist sheltered habitat among boul-

ders along a rocky hillside, west coast of Mel-

ville Peninsula, Franklin District, N.W.T.

68°18’N, 85°25’W, B. J. Woodruff 38, Aug. 20,

1948. (DAO).

[Vol. 64

Although this form is represented by only
a single collection, it is so strikingly different
from the typical phase that it has been thought
worthy of describing. It is readily distinguished
by its more lax and prostrate form, its caudex
with elongate branches, leaves more diffused
along the branches, and the short, simple,
single-flowered scapes 2—10 (—25) mm long.
As in forma subintegrifolia Abrom., the
majority of the leaves are subentire, lacking
the lateral teeth. Since the collector stated
that only a single colony was noted in the
area, it is impossible to say whether this is
simply an ecological form which may occur
throughout the range, or whether it is varie-
tally distinct with a restricted distribution.
Until further collections have been made, it
has been thought appropriate to give this
entity the status of a form.
Saxifraga Hirculus L. — clump in marsh; 32.
Saxifraga oppositifolia L. — prostrate clumps

on moist sandy beach; 3.
Dryas integrifolia Vahl — moist plain; 40.

Astragalus alpinus L. — prostrate on moist
rising ground; clay soil; 41.
Oxytropis Maydelliana Trautv. — common;

prostrate on sandy bank; 18.

Epilobium latifolium L. — sand bank; 25.

Cassiope tetragona (L.) D. Don—dry rocky
hillside; 36.

Armeria maritima (Mill) Willd. var. sibirica
(Turcz.) Lawr. (Armeria maritima sensu

Polunin, pro parte, L.c.) — scattered on
sand bank; 16.
Antennaria Ekmaniana A. E. Porsild — on

moist plain; 22.

————__+-<__—_

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

An Albino Mud Puppy near Fort William,
Ontario. — On May 7, 1949, Mr. Edward Hay,
Fort William, presented me with two mud
puppies (Necturus maculosus (Raf.)) which
he had taken the previous evening while
fishing with worms in Mosquito Creek, Neeb-
ing Township, near its confluence with the
Kaministiquia River, outside the city of Fort
William. The one was a male, typical in ap-
pearance and measuring 280 mm. in the
preserved state. The second was an albino
female which measures 204 mm. In life it
was delicate pink in coloration but after
preservation in ten percent formalin, assum-

ed a dirty white appearance, the gills and
borders of the tail being considerably darker.
The dorsal surface shows a suggestion of
small pale grey spots where black spots
typically occur in normal specimens. I have
been unable to find a previous record of
albinism in the mud puppy. It occurs of

course in other amphibians and in reptiles

and there is no reason why it should not also
cecur in this species.

The two mud puppies had been kept in a

pail of water overnight and in the morning ©
Mr. Hay stated several dead “young” were ©

,

Pi?

Busses Reais

full of swifts.

I _ ft eS

March-April, 1950] Tur CANADIAN
present in the container. Unfortunately he
had destroyed them. I presume they were
small amphibians of the same or of another
species which had been disgorged.

During the ten years spent in this region
prior to 1948, salamanders were conspicuous
by their scarcity. In addition to one or two
records of mud puppies, I had seen a Jef-
ferson’s Salamander (Ambystoma jeffersonia-
num) (Green) taken locally in 1944. On May
1, 1941, Common Newts Triturus viridescens
(Raf.) ) were noted at Nishin Lake, 100 miles
to the north-east, both in the water and in the
stomach contents of Brook Trout (Salvelinus
fontinalis (Mitchill) ).

In the Fall of 1948, several Jefferson’s
Salamanders were taken in Port Arthur.
This year (1949) one was taken at Lake
Shebandowan, 50 miles west of the Lakehead,
on June 26. On June 22, a Newt was caught
at Nishin Lake, where I had observed the
above specimens. Two Red-backed Salaman-
ders (Plethodon cinereus (Green) ) were cap-

tured in Pardee Township on June 19, and

one in Paipoonge Township on August 28.
These localities are 25 miles south and 20
niles south-west of Fort William. Several
other mud puppies have also been taken

this year by local fishermen. The increased —

number of records is probably due to an in-
creasing interest in our wild life rather than

- due to an actual increase in the numbers of

salamanders present. — A. E. ALLIN, Fort
William, Ontario.

Migration of Black Swift. — A very large
flight- of Black Swift, Nephoecetes niger
borealis (Kennerly), was seen at 9.30 o’clock
on the morning of September 16, 1949, over
the city of Vancouver, B.C. The weather was
dull and showery. Temperature 50°F. and
the wind was 20 mph. from the southeast.

At first two flocks of swifts could be seen
moving in a southeastern direction and very
high up. On looking at these birds through
field glasses it was found that they were but
a lower stratum of swifts and that there

were great numbers higher up all migrating

in the same direction; in fact the sky seemed
It was quite impossible to
estimate the number seen in this flight which
lasted about six minutes and I do not think
I saw the beginning, but there were many

hundreds. Through the glasses the centre of

Bet 0

.) ae

FIELD-NATURALIST

93.

the flock reminded me of a Swarm of bees
so great was the number. These swifts were
not circling in the usual manner of flight,
but were sailing or gliding in one direction
and travelling very rapidly. The flight was
scmewhat broken towards the end with single
individuals and groups of five or seven
following close together.

It is known that the Black Swift nests in
the high mountains about Kennedy Lake on
Vancouver Island, but this colony could not
possibly account for even a small proportion
of the birds seen this morning as all were
coming from a northwesterly direction which
is the direction Kennedy Lake lies in relation
to Vancouver.

Southbound flights of Black Swift have
been seen at other times about Huntingdon
which lies about fifty miles east of Van-
couver. On September 8, 1934, about 350
swifts passed overhead during the morning,
circling and drifting in a southerly direction.
Small flights were also seen on Sept. 10 and
11 of the same year.

Flights of Black Swifts which might be
termed feeding flights have been noticed on
numerous occasions. On June 22, 1932, at 7
p.m. after a rainy morning, about 150 swifts
were seen flying between 100 and 200 feet
in the air near Huntingdon. After circling
about for an hour they disappeared. The
same number appeared the following day at
the same hour and repeated the performan-
ce. On June 26, the flight again appeared,
but this time at 7 a.m. and remained circling
about until 12.30 p.m. The flights on June
25 and 26 both came from the south-east in
which direction lies the Mount Baker range
of mountains, — KENNETH RACEY,

Vancouver, B.C.

A New Record for Palm Warbler. — On
October 1, 1949, while collecting on the
University of British Columbia campus, the
unusual behavior of a warbler attracted my
attention. I collected the bird, which proved
to be a Palm Warbler (Dendroica palmarum
palmarum). This appears to be the first
record for Canada west of the Rockies and
the second specimen collected in North
America west of the Rockies.

Munro and Cowan, (B.C. Prov. Mus.,
Spec. Pub. No. 2, 1947, p. 195) state that the
species is a summer visitant to the extreme

94 THE CANADIAN

north-eastern portion of the province. Grin-
nell and Miller (Pac. Coast Avifauna, No.
27, 1944, p. 408) cite the species as acciden-
tal in California. One immature male was
collected in Monterey County, October 9,
1896. A sight record was made in Imperial
County on September 22, 1942.

The preserved specimen of this new
record, a male, has been deposited in the
Museum of Zoology, University of B.C. as
number 2175, — C. E. Law, Dept. of Zoology,
University of B.C.

Purple Sandpiper in Manitoba. — In the
late afternoon of May 14, 1949, accompanied
by three friends, equipped with prismatic
field-glasses, I visited the southwest shore of
Lake Winnipeg at Whytewold beach to look
for birds on migration.

After watching for less than half an hour,
we saw a purple sandpiper at a distance of
twenty-five yards and watched it for at least
ten minutes with the glasses. I pointed out
to my friends the yellow legs, the orange
colour at the base of the bill, the colour of
the head, mantle and breast like the colour
of a male slate-coloured junco; also when it
flew the white wingbar and the stiff flight
like that of a spotted sandpiper and, when it
walked, its stooped crouching posture remin-
iscent of a sanderling. Unfortunately, I was
not equipped to collect it.

I believe that this is the first record for
the Province of Manitoba. A perusal of the
literature, indicates that inland records are
exceedingly scarce, apart from some large
lakes in the Mackenzie River region. I used
to be familiar with the purple sandpiper on
the east coast of England but this is the
first I have seen in North America.

L. T. S. NORRIS-ELYE,
Manitoba Museum, Winnipeg, Man.

The Blue Grosbeak in Western Ontario.—
Standard reference books indicate that the
blue grosbeak (Guiraca caerulea) is a south-
ern bird. It may therefore be of interest to
record the observation of a male in adult
plumage at a small clearing on Cliff Lake

FIeELp-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

about twenty-five miles north of Vermillion
Bey, Ontario.-The bird was seen in good
light through 7 x 50 glasses in the early
morning of June 25, 1949. There can be no
doubt of its identity. The bird was not seen
again during a two weeks’ stay at this camp.
Although I made daily observations, no
unusual amount of time was devoted to
searching for the bird.

Cc. S. MARVEL,
University of Illinois.

Migration of Western Grebe on British
Columbia Coast. — The main migration, south,
of the Western Grebe (Aechmophorns occi-
dentalis) usually reaches this part of the east
coast of Vancouver Island, about the middle
of October so it seems worth recording that at
least 1500 were seen at Oyster Bay (20 miles
north of Comox) on September 7, 1949. These
birds had all the appearance of recent arrivals
resting after a long journey. The following
day there was not one to be seen there. Other
evidence of early migration, this year, was
seeing six birds, also within a short distance
of Oyster Bay, that were swimming in a
southerly direction suggesting migration.

Oyster Bay would appear to be the resting
place for these grebes on reaching the sea on
their migration from, probably, their nesting
grounds in British Columbia and possibly, far-
ther east. About the middle of October is the
date of their arrival and they will be there
in thousands and, generally, have had the
appearance of tired birds resting. As Oyster
Bay is just south of the entrance to Bute
Inlet, on the mainland of B.C., and which ex-
tends into the Coast range some fifty miles,
this may be the route taken to and from their
breeding grounds. I have never seen the
Western Grebe in flocks, of anything like com-
parable size, north of Oyster Bay nor any sug-
gestion that they travel north of there by sea,
on migration.

The Western Grebe moves up this coast, in
the Spring, in thousands, and, in support of
the suggestion that these birds strike inland
from Oyster Bay, on April 24, 1943, I noted
there were “thousands” in the Bay all of which
had disappeared by the evening of the same
day. — Theed Pearse, Comox, V.1., B.C.

(
.

AFFILIATED SOCIETIES

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY
OF MANITOBA

OFFICERS FOR 1949-50

President Emeritus: Dr. H. M. Speechly; President:
A. H. SHORTT; Vice-Presidents: R. R. LEJEUNE, Mrs.
D. B. SPARLING; General Secretary: Miss WINONA
DOWNES; Executive Secretary: H. V. HOSFORD;
Treasurer: H. MOSSOP; Auditor: W. A. CARTWRIGHT;
Social Convenor: Mrs. R. K. HELYAR.

SECTIONS—

Ornithological: Chair. D. HARRY YOUNG; Sec. WAR-
REN JOHNSTON. Entomological: Chair. H. R. WONG;
Sec. J. D. SMITH. Botanical: Chair, Mrs. E. J. McMIL-
LAN; Sec. Mrs. D.B. SPARLING. Geological: Chair.
A. G. LAWRENCE; Sec. P. H. STOKES. Mammalogical:
Chair. L. T. S. NORRIS-ELYE; Sec. D. K. SMITH.
Herpetological: Chair. R. K. STEWART-HAY; Sec. D.
K. SMITH. Archaeological: Chair. Walter M. Hlady;
Sec: Mrs. P. H. STOKES.

Meetings are held each Monday evening, except on
holidays, from October to April, in Theatre F of the Uni-
versity of Manitoba, Memorial Boulevard, Winnipeg.
Field excursions are held on Saturdays or Sundays
during May, June and September, and on public holi-
days in July and August. Membership fee: $1 a year
for adults; 25 cents for juniors.

PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL
HISTORY OF CANADA

OFFICERS FOR 1949

President: REX MEREDITH, N.P.; Ist Vice-President: Dr.
VIGER PLAMONDON; 2nd Vice-President: J. GERALD
COOTE; Secretary-Treasurer: GEO. A. LECLERC; Chief
_ Scientific Section: Dr. D. A. DERY; Chief Protection Sec-
- tion: JOS MORIN; Chief Publicity Section: RENE CONS-
TANTINEAU; Chief Information Section; FRANCOIS
HAMEL. Other directors: J. K. HILL, J. SAUNDERS
HUGILL, STUART ATKINSON, T. J. A. HUNTER, O.
Rae mcnCe G. STUART AHERN, ULRIC G. TESSIER,

Secretary’s address: GEORGES A. LECLERC, 85 des
Franciscains St., Quebec, P.Q.

THE TORONTO FIELD-NATURALISTS’

CLUB
OFFICERS FOR 1947-1948
President: C. A. WALKINSHAW; Vice-President: Pro-
fessor A. J. V. LEHMANN; Secretaries: MISS M.

MEASHAM, MRS. J. B. STEWART, Royal Ontario Mu-
seum, 100 Queen’s Park; President of Junior Club:
MRS. J. W. BARFOOT; Vice-President of Junior Club:
MISS LEWELLA MANN; Executive Council: J. L.
BAILLIE Jr., ALFRED BUNKER, A. C. CAMERON, BRO-
THER DENIS, O. E. DEVITT, MISS BARBARA DOUGLAS,
T. W. DWIGHT, MISS MADELEINE FRITZ, MRS. L. E.
JAQUITH, DR. L. E JAQUITH, W. H. MARTIN, DOUGLAS
MILLER, A. A. OUTRAM, MISS LILIAN PAYNE, F.
_ GREER ROBERTS, MRS. H. C. ROBSON, H. H. SOUTHAM,
_ EARL STARK, MRS. J. B. STEWART, R. W. TROWERN;
_ Ex Office: F. C. HURST, R. M. SAUNDERS, T. P.

McILWRAITH,

Meetings are held at 8.15 p.m. on the first Monday of
each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario
Museum, unless otherwise announced. Field trips are
held during the spring and autumn and on the second
Saturday of each month during the winter.

VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY
SOCIETY

EZECUTIVE OFFICERS — 1946-1947

Hon. President: DR. NORMAN A. M. MacKENZIE, M.M,
B.A., L.L.M., L.L.B., L.L.D., Past President: LAN McTAG-
GERT COWAN, B.A., Ph.D.; President: A. H. BAIN:
Vice-President: J. J. PLOMMER; Corr. Secretary: A. RB.
WOOTON; Rec. Secretary: MISS STELLA BOYSE; Asst,
Secretary: F. TIMMIS; H. Treasurer: F. J. SANDFORD;

- WILLIAMS, B.Sc. Ph.D., F.G.S.A.: Entomology -
A. R. WOOTTON: Omithology HOLMAN: Photo-
graphy - P, T. TIMMS: Mammalogy - Ian McT. COWAN,
B. A., Ph.D.: Marine Biology - R. W. PILLSBURY, M.A.3
Junior Section - MISS M. L. ELLIOTT; Additional
Menibers aot Rese - MISS E. SU D, G

Has + G. R. WOOD. i ° N°
SELWOOD, W. B. WOODS. Sarat ok Rea

All meetings at 8 p.m., Room 100, Applied Science-

Building, University of British Columbia, unless other-
wise announced,

McILWRAITH ORNITHOLOGICAL CLUB
LONDON, ONT.

OFFICERS FOR 1949

President: Mr. WM. G. GIRLING, 530 English St., Lon-
don; Vice-president: Mr. J. LEACH, West London P.0.;
Recording Secretary: Miss M. STEVENS, 81 Elmwood
Tones pee csuter: Mr. A. CLENDINNING, 40
idou -, London; Migration Secretary: Mr. T, -
SIDE, 27 Elm St., London. ie SMa nee

_Meetings are held at 8.00 p.m. in the Public Library
biulding on the second Monday of each month from
September to May.

Field trips are held during the sprin d i
excursion in September. z ATE enn

PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR
THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS INC.

OFFICERS FOR 1949-50

President : G. HARPER HALL; Vice-president : George H.
MONTGOMERY ; Vice-President: W. H. RAWLINGS:
Treasurer: A. R. LEPINGWELL; Secretary: MISS R. S.
ABBOTT, 166 Senneville Road, Senneville, P.Q.

COMMITTEE

Miss R. S. ABBOTT; J. P. ANGLIN; W. R. B. BERTRAM:
J. D. CLEGHORN; J. A. DECARIE; Dr. M. J. DUNBAR;
D. G. ELLIOT; Mrs. D. G. ELLIOT; G. H. HALL:
W. S. HART; Mrs. C. L. HENDERSON; Miss G. HIBBARD;
H. A. C. JACKSON; A. R. LEPINGWELL; G. H
MONTGOMERY; Miss L. MURPHY; G. G. O H
W. H. RAWLINGS; Miss M. SEATH; L. MclI. TERRILL;
Mrs. L. McI. TERRIL.

Meetings held the second Monday of the month except
during summer.

BRITISH COLUMBIA BIRD AND
MAMMAL SOCIETY
President: KENNETH RACEY; Vice-President: H. M.

LAING; Secretary: IAN McT. COWAN, Dept. of
Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver, B.C,

WANTED

In order to meet the demand for back numbers of the publications
of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, the following are urgently needed:
Transactions, Otta. Field-Nat. Club, No. 1, 1880.

Ottawa Naturalist

Vol. 4, No. 6, Sept., 1890
Vol. 11, No. 10, Jan., 1898
Vol. 11, No. 11, Feb., 1898
Vol. 11, No. 12, Mar., 1898
Vol. 12, No!) il Apr., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 4, July, 1898
Vol. 12, No. 5, Aug., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 6, Sept., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 7 & 8, Oct.-Nov., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 9, Dec., 1898
Canadian Field-Naturalist
Vol. 38, No. 1, Jan., 1924
Vol. 39, No. 3, Mar., 1925
Vol. 39, © No 4 Apr., 1925
Vol. 39, No. 5, May, 1925

Members and subscribers who are able to spare any of these numbers
would greatly assist the Club by forwarding them to:

Mr. W. J. Cody,
Division of Botany
Science Service,
Dept. of Agriculture,
Ottawa, Ontario.

“LE DROIT” Printing, Ottawa, Canada. pafighiog

Vol. 64 MAY-JUNE, 1950 No. 3

The CANADIAN
PNWATURALIST

MUS. fey. ZOOL.
LIBRARY

FI

AUG —2 1950
HARVARD Contents
UNIVERSITY
| eal hale@River, Que: (By D. B. O: Savile (2)... cc: 95

Food habits of the marten (Martes americana) in the Rocky Mountain region
Gineanada., by lan Mc@: ‘Cowan and. R: HH. Mackay .......00.0.c..i-e cesses 100

Description of a new northwestern Geothlypis. By W. Earl Godfrey ....0...00000...8. 104

Botanical research in Scandinavia: 375 contemporary workers and their
Pacman beITheLestse | bY INICHOlAS, POliMin ees 8 fess sul cusses Joss Seceveaescoweneouneegant aeeouies 105

Members of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club and subscribers to the Canadian
Field-Naturalist. New members and changes in address since May, 1949 .... 120

European hare introduced into the District of Thunder Bay, Ontario.
CEUP cas LE RLU, GER Te MERA, Ue art aaa a ED ee BS A er 122

Notes and Observations:—

Mola mola (Linnaeus) from the lower St. Lawrence. By M. J. Dunbar .... 124

Partial albinism in the Bronzed Grackle (Quiscalus quiscula versicolor).
LEN IES VRS ACCS bn allaea dee is oe mE SNR ee 125

EST EGREL GL ok gt TS ee TREE 2M Ua. See RO Ae a eA OR OR Cae 126

Published by the
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

Entered at the Post Office at Ottawa, Ont., as second class matter.

The Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club

— Patrons —

Their Excellencies the Governor-General and the Lady Alexander

President: Dr. PAULINE SNURE

1st Vice-President: Dr. J. W. GROVES 2nd Vice-President: Mr. R. FritTH
Treasurer: RAYMOND Moore, Secretary: H. J. Scoccan,
Division of Botany, National Museum of Canada,
Science Service, Dept. of Ottawa.

Agriculture, Ottawa.

Additional Members of Council: Mrs. H. Liroyp, Miss VERNA Ross, Miss Mary Stuart,
Messrs. E. G. ANDERSON, R. M. ANDERSON, W. K. W. Batpwin, A. F. W. BANFIELD,
Rev. F. E. BAnim, B. Borvin, A. E. Bourcuicnon, A. W. CAMERON, W. J. Copy, J. P.
CUERRIER, W. G. Dore, C. FRANKTON, W. E. Goprrey, H. Grou, S. D. Hicks, W. ILLMAN,
W. H. Lancetey, D. LEecHMAN, H. F. Lewis, Hoves Lioyp, T. H. MANNING, W. H.
MinsHatt, A. E. Porsitp, D. B. O. SAvitE, H. A. SENN, V. E. F. Sotman, J. S. TENER.

Auditors: 1. L. CONNERS, C. FRANKTON, and H. F. LEewis.

Editor

Dr. H. A. SENN,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

Associate Editors

VW GAMO RE” hemi Wee Mal nO LN ay Et Botany Ro! MCANDERSONA otra ey Mammalogy
ACT AROCOUE ey AOiiuin Mawes Conchology A. G. HUNTSMAN ............ Marine Biology
EVAG ACRAWEORD POL) uy. Entomology Wil EE \GoprREY Gaerne a Ornithology
Be AE COTE EE anak RAM kt Geology WCAG BEE iin, dpe ae eee: Palaeontology
CryvpE TA IPAT GEN. LN ae) Herpetology J. Re sDYMOND);, 3) 4 (Re cana Ichthyology
Business Manager
W. J. Copy,

Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

The official publications of THE Ottawa FIeELp-NATURALIsSTS’ CLUB have been
issued since 1879. The first were The Transactions of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’
Club, 1879, 1886, two volumes; the next, The Ottawa Naturalist, 1886-1919, thirty-
two volumes: and these have been continued by The Canadian Field-Naturalist to

date. The Canadian Field-Naturalist is issued bi-monthly. Its scope is the publication
of the results or original research in all departments of Natural History.

Price of this volume (6 numbers) $3.00; Single copies 60c each.

Subscription ($3. OO per year) should be forwarded to Dr. R. J. Moore,
Div. of Botany, Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture,
OTTAWA, CANADA.

i

The Cana

Vol. 64

AUG Osea
VARBH4
RS ic

OTTAWA, CANADA, MAY-JUNE, 1950

d-Naturalist

No. 3

o
BIRD NOTES FROM GREAT WHALE RIVER, QUE. ;
D. B. O. SAVILE

Division of Botany and Plant Pathology, Science Service,
Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

HE WRITER was engaged in botanical

work at Great Whale River, Que., from
16 June to 10 September, 1949. Circumstan-
ces made it impossible to spend much time
on bird study, particularly in June and July.
The random data gathered were largely from
chance observations made in the course of
other field work. The notes given below
should be read with this qualification in
mind and should not be assumed to give a
complete picture of the status of any species.
The data are mainly from the writer’s ob-
servations, but include a few observations
from Mr. J. R. Vockeroth and Dr. D. W.
Jenkins. Thanks are due to Mr. W. Earl
Godfrey for advice and assistance in the
preparation of this report.

The settlement of Great Whale River is
situated at the mouth of the river of that
name, at 55° 17’N, 77° 47’W. The country
consists of strongly glaciated granite hills,
mostly 200 to 600 feet high, with summits
almost unvegetated, but with every cleft
filled with thickets of willow, alder and
dwarf birch. The valleys contain abundant
black and white spruce and some tamarack
wherever sufficient soil has accumulated. A
narrow coastal strip is almost completely
treeless largely because of abrasion by driv-
ing snow. An elevated delta of almost pure
sand occubvies each side of the river mouth
and spreads intermittently up and down the
coast for several miles.
posed of extensive sand beaches broken by
rocky headlands. Such a shore _ provided
little attraction to most shore birds, but the
variety of habitats to which the sand con-
tributed compensated for this drawback.

Of 69 species seen, 39 occurred in sum-
mer. Most of the latter probably bred in the
area, but a heavy work programme in July

1 Received for publication December 14, 1949.

The shore is com- ©

precluded the search for nests, and satisfac-
tory proof of breeding was not often obtained.
The spring migration was virtually over by
mid June and the data for migrant species
are, therefore, almost all for the fall.

ANNOTATED LIST OF SPECIES
OBSERVED

1. Common Loon
Gavia immer.—Seen occasionally in June
and July.

2. Red-throated Loon

Gavia stellata—Seen regularly through-
out the summer; fairly common.

3. Canada Goose

Branta canadensis. — Small strings seen
23, 24 and 29 June, and 27 Aug. and 7 Sept.
We left before the main southward migra-
tion.

4. Lesser Snow Goose

Chen hyperborea hyperborea.—Frequent
in small numbers from 24 Aug. onward. At
least 95 on 5 Sept. Usually with blue goose
and averaging about 10 per cent of the mixed
strings. Juveniles seen 7 and 9 Sept.

5. Blue Goose

Chen caerulescens. — Abundant from 24
Aug. onward. Geese were reported two days
earlier but were not seen by the writer and
the species is in doubt. We were told that
this year’s migration started exceptionally
early. It may have been hastened by a Suc-
cession of strong northerly winds. Over 1150
seen in drizzle on 5 Sept., including a few
juveniles and at least one snow-blue hybrid;
several hundred more geese beyond range of
positive determination. Of several hundred
on 9 Sept., about 50 per cent were juveniles,
and of about the same number on 10 Sept.,
over 50 per cent were juveniles.

Vol. 64, No. 2, March-April, 1950, was issued April 27, 1950.
=O 5

06 - THE CANADIAN

6. Pintail
Anas acuta tzitzihoa. — Seen frequently

from 14 Aug. in small numbers. Often seen
to fly up the river, suggesting that some
migrants break away from the coast here and
follow a river and lake course through cen-
tral Quebec.
7. American Golden-eye

Bucephala clangula americana. — A few
seen in June, July and September.

8. Old-Squaw
Clangula hyemalis. — One pair seen 22
June.

9. White-Winged Scoter

Melanitta fusca deglandi. — About 50 to
150 seen off shore with American scoters
during last week of June. A few seen in July
ard September.

10. American Scoter

Oidemia nigra americana. — About 150
to 700 spent the last week of June just off
shore with smaller numbers of white-winged
scoters. They were apparently feeding at a
mussel bed some half mile from shore, since
many mussel shells wash ashore here. From
the date these must have been non-breeding
birds although adult males of each species
could be discerned in some numbers. They
disappeared abruptly at the beginning of July
and very few were seen later in the season.

11. Ruddy Duck

Oxyura jamaicensis rubida. — A single
dead female was found washed up on the
shore on 19 June.

12. Red-breasted Merganser

Mergus serrator. — A recently picked
partial skeleton was found on the shore on
25 June. About ten were seen on 30 June and
one on 20 July.

13. American Rough-legged Hawk

Buteo lagopus s. johannis. — Several
were seen 23 and 24 June and one on 2
August a few miles from the settlement. The
latter bird called repeatedly with a powerful
‘Kee-ee-ur’ that started explosively and then
dropped in pitch and volume; not such a
squealing quality as in the calls of the red-
shouldered and red-tailed hawks. From late
August until we left one to nine birds were
seen almost daily, usually soaring in the up-
draft over the river bank and often hovering.
By starting to squeak when it was headed
toward us from a distance of some 300 yards,

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

one bird was attracted successfully and hoy-
ered some fifty feet over our heads for a
minute or more. Although the species may
breed in the area it is not surprising that it
did not frequent the settlement during the
summer when many natives are there. It
would certainly be favoured as food and may
well be disliked as a competitor for the food
of fur bearers,
14. Marsh Hawk
Circus cyaneus hudsonius. — A female

was seen repeatedly through the summer
near the settlement and a male once; but no
evidence of breeding was obtained, except
that after mid August a second brown in-
dividual that might have been a juvenile was
sometimes seen.
15. Osprey

Pandion haliaetus carolinensis. — A pair
nested four miles up the river from the
settlement on the platform made by the top
of a fire-killed black spruce breaking off

thirty feet from the ground. The nest was

about three feet across. A pair, probably the
same birds, occasionally fished at the river
mouth.
16. Peregrine Falcon

Falco peregrinus anatum. — One each
seen on 22 Aug. and 8 Sept.
17. Eastern Pigeon Hawk

Falco columbarius columbarius. — One,
or occasionally two, seen at regular intervals
during the summer. A female flushed on 13
July stayed close by, giving a repetitious
rasping call, which suggested that it had
young. :
18. Spruce Grouse

Canachites canadensis. — Six seen in
scattered locations. One flushed on 9 July
stayed, close repeatedly giving a low warning
“kuk’”’, but the young could not be found.
19. Ungava Willow Ptarmigan

Lagopus lagopus ungavus. — Seen occa-
sionally in small numbers. Apparently breed-
ing, as two seen Showed injury feigning.
20. Semipalmated Plover

Charadrius hiaticula semipalmatus.—One
seen on 22 June. One to 20 seen on 9 dates
from 30 July to 6 Sept.

21. Golden Plover

Pluvialis dominica dominica. — Thirty-
one in breeding plumage seen on 26 Aug.;
several in varying Dae on 6 and 7 Sept.

\

4

i
{
|
)

i

7

|
{
i
i

May-June, 1950] THE CANADIAN

- 22. Black-bellied Plover

Squatarola squatarola.— One seen on 4

Sept. and one on 7 Sept.; both in fall or
juvenile plumage.
23. Ruddy Turnstone

Arenaria interpres morinella. — Four

adults seen on 2 Sept. and two juveniles on
7 Sept.
24. Hudsonian Curlew

Numenius phaeopus hudsonicus. — On 9
July, three seen flying north. Eleven passed
south and tracks of two others seen on beach
25 July. Several seen or heard on 28 July
and one on 29 July. Not noted thereafter ex-
cept for one each on 5 and 7 Sept.
25. Spotted Sandpiper

Actitis macularia. — The only shore bird
proved to be breeding. Three nests seen
along the river banks and birds noted reg-
ularly at several other points. Last seen on
30 Aug.

26. Greater Yellow-legs ‘
Totanus melanoleucus. — One to four
southbound birds seen or heard 24 July,
19, 21, 28 Aug. and 8 Sept. Four on 21 Aug.
came down the coast and swung up the river
as though to migrate inland. -(See under
Pintail.)
27. Knot
Calidris canutus rufus. — One seen 24
August. .

28. Pectoral Sandpiper

Erolia melanotos. — Thirteen seen on 6
Sept. and a few on 7 Sept., feeding in low
mossy sand between old beach ridges or fly-
ing straight through.

29. White-rumped Sandpiper

Erolia fuscicollis. — One to 9 birds seen
on five dates from 29 July to 9 Sept.
30. Baird’s Sandpiper

’ Erolia bairdii.icTwo to sixteen seen on

six dates from 16 Aug. to 8 Sept. Most com-
monly flushed from grass near tent sites
where insects may have been abundant.
31. Least Sandpiper

Erolia minutilla. — One to 8 or more

seen on fourteen dates from 25 July to 9.

Sept. These counts are probably considerably
lower than they would have been if all
‘peeps’ had been identifiable; but in the ab-
sence of good feeding grounds they were
usually seen in flight overhead when they
could not be named unless they called. The

FIELD-NATURALIST # AO.

apparent absence of any semipalmated sand-
pipers was surprising to the writer who ex-
pected them to be fully as common as the
least on sandy shores.

32. Red-backed Sandpiper

Erolia alpina pacifica.—One seen 7 Sept.
We presumably left too early for this species.
33. Hudsonian Godwit

Limosa haemastica. — On 4 Sept., the
writer went out to the sand point at the river
mouth in the late afternoon in a 30 m.p.h.
southwest wind. By the greatest good fortune
a single bird of this species passed within 20
feet a minute after the point was reached.
Flying into the wind five feet above the sur-
face at an estimated ground speed of 40
m.p.h. it afforded an excellent view. It was
in fall or juvenile plumage; and, from the
date, it was probably a juvenile. The deep,
rather slow, driving wing beats gave an im-
pression of great power. The species is pro-
bably less common on this coast than on the
southwest coast of Hudson Bay where the
main fall migration apparently occurs.

34. Sanderling

Crocethia alba.—Two to 73 seen on eight
dates from 24 Aug. to 8 Sept. The one
migrant shore bird that was really at home
on the clean sand beaches.

35. Glaucous Gull

Larus hyperboreus hyperboreus. — One
seen 18 June with herring gulls, presumably
a late migrant.

36. Kumlien’s Gull (?)

Larus leucopterus kumlieni. — A bird
seen close to the river bank at the settlement
on 25 Aug. might have been Kumlien’s gull
or Thayer’s herring gull.

37. Great Black-backed Gull

Larus marinus. — One adult and four
juveniles seen 13 Aug., and one adult and
two juveniles 25 Aug.

38. Herring Gull

Larus argentatus smithsonianus.—Up to
about 15 seen almost daily. Probably breeds
on the islands off shore a few miles north.
39. Ring-billed Gull

Larus delawarensis. — A few seen on 18
and 25 July. Some of the gulls often seen
at a distance were probably of this species.
40. Arctic Tern

Sterna paradisaea.—11 birds seen fishing
inside the river mouth on 20 June and three
on 21 June were provisionally identified as

98 THE CANADIAN

this species by the decided greyness of the
bodies in comparison with those of the fami-
liar common tern. No more was seen of these
birds until a week or so later the wings and
tails of at least five were found at an Indian
camp site. No tarsi could be found, but Mr.
W. Earl Godfrey was able to confirm the
identity from examination of the wings and
tails. Two more birds were seen on 25 Aug.

41. Short-eared Owl

Asio flammeus flammeus. — First noted
10 Aug.; seen frequently thereafter in num-
bers up to ten. Never seen in full daylight
unless disturbed, which perhaps accounted
for their survival, for they were very tame
and squeaking would bring them close about
one’s head. They usually appeared at or just
after sunset.

42. Flicker

Colaptes auratus—Two seen 12 July a
few miles up the river, where the forest was
denser than near the coast.

43. Eastern Phoebe

Sayornis phoebe.—One was clearly seen
and another heard a short way off on 28 June
on a rocky wooded stretch of the river bank.
At the time, the writer did not realize how
far this station was from the normal northern
limits of the phoebe. As this stretch of the
river bank was of difficult access it was in-
frequently visited and it is not known what
became of these birds. It can only be sup-
posed that they were carried beyond their
normal destination by a strong south wind
during their spring migration. (See also Cow-
bird).
44: Northern Horned Lark

Eremophila alpestris alpestris—Several
pairs nested on the open sand delta near the
settlement. Young not quite flying were seen
on 14 July. The resident birds and the later
migrants all showed the bright yellow facial
markings of this race. Migrants from up the
coast began to appear about 2 Sept. From
4 Sept. onward 200 or more were present
each day on this single area. The peak of
migration seemed to be 6 - 8 Sept., but the
species was still plentiful on 10 Sept. and
one or more later peaks may have occurred.
On some days the flocks milled about the
delta in a way that made counts impossible;
but on 6 Sept., when they were moving
steadily across the river, 2,500 were estim-
ated to pass in a few hours. These migrants

7

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

employed two calls that were unfamiliar to
the writer: a ‘tee-ew’ in quality much like the
‘too-ee’ of the semipalmated plover; and a
dry, fast ‘dit-dit-dit-dit’ slightly like the buzzy
call of the redpoll. It appears that many of
the birds from the northern barrens funnel
through this coastal strip of unwooded coun-
try.
45. Canada Jay

Perisoreus canadensis. — Plentiful wher-
ever spruce was abundant. When we first
arrived, the young were on the wing and with
apparently fully grown rectrices, but were
still in family groups with the adults and
were a uniform deep slate gray. By the end
of June, the family groups were tending to
break up and individual juveniles were seen
more often. During August, the plumage of
the young birds became noticeably lighter
and the head markings began to show.
46. Raven

Corvus corax principalis——Several seen
in June and late August, but not between.
Possibly the summer concentration of natives
at the settlement tends to keep them away.
47. Brown-capped Chickadee

Parus hudsonicus. — Seen in small num-
bers from 27 July on. Probably more abun-
dant a few miles inland in denser forest.

48. Robin

Turdus migratorius. — A pair nested. in
willow scrub on the river bank near the
settlement and others were Seen in various
small thickets in the area.

49. Ruby-crowned Kinglet
Regulus calendula calendula. — Seen in
small numbers in June and July.

50. American Pipit

Anthus spinoletta rubescens. — A few
pairs were seen on the barren hill tops and
presumably bred although proof is lacking.
The first definite migrants appeared on 12
Aug. They were present in great numbers
(probably 500 to 1500 daily) on the delta
from 18 Aug. to 5 Sept. fell abruptly to 30
on 9 Sept. and were not seen on 10 Sept.
They and the northern horned larks made
great inroads into a caterpillar “plague”.
Like the latter species, the pipits evidently
funnel down the barren coastal strip, which
would be almost ideal for large-scale banding.
51. Tennessee Warbler

Vermivora peregrina. — One seen on 27
June.

)
|

May-June, 1950]

52. Yellow Warbler

Dendroica petechia. — A few occurred
regularly on a portion of the river bank
clothed in willow and alder scrub. Last seen
18 Aug.

53. Myrtle Warbler

Dendroica coronata coronata.—Occurred
in small numbers, mainly in the stand of tall
white spruce south of the river.

54. Black-poll Warbler

Dendroica striata.—Abundant; apparently
breeding in almost every spruce thicket.
Juveniles almost fully grown were seen on
13 Aug.

55. Northern Water-thrush

Seiurus noveboracensis. — A few seen
or heard in wet alder thickets near the river.
One seen feeding a juvenile just out of the
nest on 16 July.

56. Wilson’s Warbler

Wilsonia pusilla pusilla. — Several pairs
occurred in wet willow-alder thickets. A male
carrying food on 16 July provided breeding
evidence.

57. Rusty Blackbird

Euphagus carolinus. — An adult and
three juveniles barely able to fly were found
on a gravelly stretch of river shore on 6 July.
58. Cowbird

Molothrus ater ater—Two birds, clearly
this species, were said to have been coming
to the Hudson’s Bay Company manager’s
house with white-crowned and savannah spar-
rows for crumbs for some time before we
arrived. On 18 June, one male was seen clear-
ly and a second bird of uncertain sex was
seen at a distance in fog. From information
received it also was probably a male. The
birds were not seen again. This species was
seen in small numbers at Moose Factory,
Ont., which is probably near its normal limit.
Possibly carried north by strong winds dur-
ing migration.

59. Redpoll

Acanthis flammea.—Almost every clump
of dwarf birch on the open ground yielded
a pair of redpolls. Their behaviour indicated
breeding’ but no nests were found. They
were forming into flocks by 2 July.

60. Pine Siskin

Spinus pinus pinus. — A flock of eight

seen 18 Aug.
61. White-winged Crossbill
Loxia leucoptera leucoptera.—One male

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 99

seen 18 July and one female or juvenile 29
July.
62. Savannah Sparrow

Passerculus sandwichensis. — Abundant
on open ground. Mr. Vockeroth found one
nest, and the writer saw a few carrying food.
Probably about thirty pairs nested on roughly
one square mile near the settlement.
63. Slate-colored Junco

Junco hyemalis hyemalis. — Occurred
in small numbers, mainly on a rocky south
slope with seattered spruce.
64. Tree Sparrow

Spizella arborea arborea. — Abundant,
usually on open ground near water with a
few trees or shrubs. Dr. Jenkins found a
nest on 23 June with four eggs; it was on a
sphagnum hummock a foot from a pool and
was lined with white willow ptarmigan
feathers.
65. White-crowned Sparrow

Zonotrichia leucophrys leucophrys. —
Very abundant. Every gully big enough to
support a few small spruce supported a pair,
and they also occupied willow clumps along
the river bank. Perhaps the dominant species
of the area as a whole. Fully fledged young
were seen on 30 July.. By mid August the
head stripes of the juveniles were becoming
distinct.

66. White-throated Sparrow

Zonotrichia albicollis. — A few were
seen through June and July mainly along
wooded stretches of the river.

67. Fox Sparrow

Passerella iliaca iliaca. — Abundant, es-
pecially in slightly wet areas with Labrador
tea and other low shrubs and a few spruce.
At first counted almost entirely by song; but
after 10 July, the birds suddenly became quite
aggressive for a short period, suggesting that
the young had hatched. Singing largely
stopped about 20 July, but there was a slight
recrudescence in September.

68. Lincoln’s Sparrow

Melospiza lincolnii lincolnii. — Reponded
regularly in small numbers through June and
most of July, usually by song. Not found
after singing ceased, °
69. Lapland Longspur

Calcarius lapponicus lapponicus.—A sin-

gle female was seen on the sand beach on
25 June.

100 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

FOOD HABITS OF THE MARTEN (Martes americana)
IN THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN REGION OF CANADA‘*

I. McT. Cowan and R. H. Mackay
University of British Columbia and Canadian Wildlife Service, Vancouver, B.C.

HE MARTEN in Canada is one of the

species of carnivorous mammals display-
ing the classical pattern of cycles in abun-
dance with a mean phase of approximately
10 years. This pattern of population be-
haviour was present when the commercial
fur harvest of marten in the Canadian west
began (Cowan, 1938), and despite the inten-
Sive trapping to which the species was sub-
jected, the cycle persisted for many years
(Hewitt, 1921) and still persists in some parts
of its range. Since 1922, however, the mar-
ten catch in British Columbia has shown little
tendency toward large scale periodic fluctua-
tions in abundance (Ann. Rept. Prov. Game
Comm. 1947: L 52). Across Canada, the peak
years of marten harvests were in the 19th
century and since that time, the number of
marten taken has gradually declined and al-
though the phase has persisted the peaks in
the cycle no longer reach the amplitude they
did formerly.

The approximate coincidence of the peaks
in marten catch and the known peaks in the
abundance of the varying hare have suggested
to many a causal relationship between the
cycles in rabbits and those in marten. The
inference is drawn that the varying hare
provides so important a part of the marten
diet that when the hare becomes scarce the
marten suffers from food shortage and either
dies of starvation or fails to reproduce.

In an examination of the probability of
this causal relationship between the members
of the two species mentioned it is pertinent
to examine the food habits' of the marten
in order to determine to what extent it is
dependent upon the varying hare for food.
Several studies have revealed that the preda-
tors strictly dependent upon one food source
react to its scarcity by failure to breed (Lack,
1946), while those not so dependent while
they may use an abundant prey species to a
large degree when it is easily available, do
so merely as opportunists and not of neces-
sity and can turn to other sources of food
when the need arises. Cyclic fluctuation in

1 Received for publication December 29, 1949.

the latter group may very well not be the

result of cyclic changes in the population of
one prey species, albeit a very Obvious one,
but may rather be the result of other factors,
as yet elusive, inherent in the predator popu-
lation or species, or imposed upon it by ex-
ternal influences.

There is little published information upon
the food of the marten in North America.
Seton (1929) outlined a general diet on the
basis of field observation. Grinnell, Dixon and
Linsdale (1937) reported on food items in
34 stomachs supplied by California trappers.
Marshall (1946) published information based
upon the analysis of 64 scats collected in
Montana.

This paper presents the results of the
examination of 197 scats and 3 stomachs from
the Rocky Mountain National Parks of Alber-
ta and British Columbia. Jasper Park prov-
ided 133 scats and one stomach, Banff Park
19 scats and 2 stomachs, and Kootenay Park
the remainder. These were gathered during
the course of wildlife studies undertaken by
the senior author between 1943 and 1946 in
the interest of the National Parks Service of
Canada.

The results obtained from the scats and
stomachs have been lumped and are ex-
pressed in terms of percent by occurrence
except in the case of insects and_ berries.
With these groups the occurrence of one or
more specimens in a scat or stomach was
regarded as a single occurrence.

The year-round diet, on this basis, was
made up of 81% small mammals, 4.3% birds,
5.2% insects, 5.2% berries and 4.2% uni-
dentified items or debris of no apparent food
value. These percentages varied seasonally.
Small mammals, for instance, contributed
76% of the summer diet, birds, 5.9%, insects
7.9% and berries 5.9%; whereas in the win-
ter diet small mammals made up 91%, birds
1% and berries 3.8%. :

DISCUSSION OF FOOD ITEMS

Small mammal trapping conducted inci-
dentally to other studies served to give a
general picture of the fauna from which the

101

FIELD-NATURALIST

THE CANADIAN

May-June, 1950]

Se LY 07 OP OL 08 6¢ SUIBPWIOY peTjI}USpTUy)
= = aa G0 60 OT £0 SSO
8é LY Ov 6S OOT OCT GG Seog
== == Se OL OVI O'9T oG Sspoosu]
60 GT OT 6S 0'OT OCT ra splld
60 oT OT x = £0 sisuapvuUDI snasagD WH
60 GT OT 0% Gé Ov oT ‘ds xaL0g MOUS
6T VG 0G OT LT 0% cal sdaoutsd DU0LOYIO yIqqel Yooy
6G Gé 0s OT LT 0% 9T snupd1awUn sndaT a1ey SUIAIC A
(3'P ) (O'S ) (6'ZT) (0°92) (Z'0T) STHUYINOS TVLOL
6T VG 0@ c0 60 OT OT SnuLtgns shwwoonn)y yersinbs SsutAyy
= = a 0@ Gé OF eT SNUAULW SDIWDING yunuwudiyp
Si aS ae 0G Ge OT ST SNUDIQUINIOI $N712I1D Je1imbs punois ueiquintopD
aE = - 0S L’8 0'0T eé $1]0.121D] 8N112919 JeliInbs punois pepjue
6G Gg OE Ge T9 OL pS 8 SnoiMospny sninig Jerlsmnbs poy
(6'6L) (0'€8) (06S) (0'6TT) (0°99) AOIN TV.LOL
9°0T Ost OTT PPL 0°Sz 0°62 Ost ATUO OSnojl
<< as oe 0G Gé i ST DALBULI DULOOA N yer POOM
8G TL 09 GG ra oc 9€ SNIDINIUDW SnIshwo1ad BSNOW PS}OOF-9}TYM
9'8 €'0T 06 GS eV os oF sypa1og shwojdnuhg Q[OA SUTUIWE'T
o'er €'cT 0'sT v9 TT 0ST G8 snypausajur Shwmoouayd sAwoovueyd urTeyunoy AyI0Y
vel GOT OFT vs STI OLT OOT tpuowwnup “dh SnjOLILAT esnout MOpveU pos{ie}-}104S
0'6¢ ocE 0:0€ 8G 0'0F 0'9F 0'ce waddpb shwouor.y42710 asnoul paxyoeq-poy
oe Se
SYIBUIN}S

suleq] 8389S ¢g Ur suid} € pue szeog |sur11ins909

POL jo QdUeIINIIQ =| SurzinddO Z0Z 3° ZIT ut Soul],
quedi9d quedied Saul], qyued10g adUeTINIIO

quso10g Pood
We 7° eueN [eoruyIey, oUeN IelnIVUusaA
jusdied
SulszT FOT !s}¥0S $8 Sure} Z0Z {syoeurojg € ‘s}¥9S ZIT
MALNIA waWWAS

Ee a Ea ae ep a [Pee a ee ae,
' SHOVIWOLS € GNV SLVOS NALYVW L6l NI GHLNASHUdaY SWALI GOOd — T ATAVE

——-

=

102

marten was selecting its diet and with this
in mind it is pertinent to examine the major
categories of food items more closely.
CRICETIDAE

Mice were by far the most important item,
making up 59% of the summer food and 80%
of the winter food for an annual contribution
of 66%. This is in close agreement with the
findings of Grinnell, Dixon and Linsdale, who
reported mice in more than half of the 34
stomachs examined by them.

Fifty-three percent of the mouse items

were identified to species while the remain- ©

ing 13% could be classified only as mice.
Clethrionomys gapperi athabascae

The red backed mouse was moderately
abundant throughout the forested areas of
the parks during the period covered by this
study. It was certainly the most uniformly
distributed small mammal in marten habitat,
and is the most important food source. This
one species made up 25% of the food items.

The relatively stable percentage of the
food contributed by this mouse through the
year is noteworthy. It occured as 22.8% of
the summer food and 29% of the winter food.
This uniformity, despite the natural seasonal
fluctuations in the numbers of a species such
as this, suggests that the marten was probably
hunting it selectively and at the same time
was not taking a significantly large part of
the current population.
Microtus pennsylvanicus drummondi

This meadow mouse was abundant in al-
pine meadows and locally common in open-
ings within the spruce forest, but was not
generally distributed in the forest areas. It
represented 10% of the food items and ap-
peared more frequently in winter (13.4%)
than in summer (8.4%).
Phenacomys intermedius levis

Phenacomys was not abundant during the
study period but was quite generally dis-
tributed. It occurred as 8.5% of the total
items and occurred almost twice as often in
winter scats (12.6%) as in summer scats
(6.4% ).
Synaptomys borealis chapmani

The lemming vole was found to represent
4.6% of the items identified. It was gener-
ally rare over the study area but was abun-
dant in certain subalpine meadows. This
species was also found more often in winter
(8.6%) than in summer scats (2.5%).

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Peromyscus maniculatus

Identified as eleven of the 306 items
found, the white-footed mouse constituted
3.6% of the total diet. It again predominated
in the winter items (5.8%) as opposed to the
summer items (2.5%).
Neotoma cinerea

Appearing only as 4 items or 1.3% of the
material examined, the woodrat did not form
an important part of the diet. It was scarce
during the time the scats were collected and
was most abundant in rocky, thinly forested
areas not favoured by marten.
SCIURIDAE

Squirrels were the second most important
family on the marten menu. Four genera,
Tamiasciurus, Citellus, Eutamias and Glauco-
mys represented 10.2% of the items occurring
in the scats. Marshall (1946) found this
family to occur most frequently in his exam-
ination of 64 scats collected in Montana dur-
ing the winters of 1941 and 1942. Squirrels
were more important as a summer food than
as a winter food owing, probably, to the fact
that the ground squirrels and chipmunks
hibernate.
Tamiasciurus hudsonicus columbiensis

Red squirrels were common during the
course of this study and it was surprising to
find that they had not been preyed upon to
a greater extent than the 3.3% of the food
items identified.
Citellus lateralis tescorum

Mantled ground squirrel remnants did
not appear in any scats from Jasper Park but
did, however, appear 7 times in the material
from Banff Park and three times from Koote-
nay Park. These made up 3.3% of the items
eaten over the entire area.
Citellus columbianus columbianus

The Columbian ground squirrel was abun-
dant in meadow areas throughout the parks
but showed up only as 1.3% of the food
items. Living, as it does, near its burrow in
open meadows, this species appears to be
relatively safe from the predation of the tree-
loving marten.
Eutamias minimus and E. amoenus

Nowhere abundant in the parks, chipmunk
remains were found only four times to repre-
sent 1.3% of the diet.
Glaucomys sabrinus alpinus

Flying squirrels were very scarce in the
National Park area and were found only 3
times in the marten scats.

May-June, 1950]

OTHER MAMMALS
Lepus americanus columbiensis _

The varying hare was not abundant during
the years of this study but it was widely
distributed and not rare. Its availability to
carnivores is attested to by its contribution
to the food of the coyote in the same region.
Hatter (1945) found this species to be the
most important single item in the coyote diet
in Jasper Park in 1943 and 1944. Its remains
occurred as 25% of the total items in 335
winter scats,

In face of this it is important to note that
varying hare remains appeared only 5 times
(1.6%) in the material examined by us. Ap-
parently, then, under the conditions obtain-
ing, marten were not seeking the hares to
any extent but were devoting their maximum
foraging effort to the mice.

Ochotona princeps

The pika was abundant in the timberline
rock slides all over the study area and
present in reduced numbers at lower eleva-
tions. Several of the trappers in the Koote-
nay Valley outside the Park area reported
noticing a movement of marten toward the
timberline rock slides during the late au-
tumn. They assumed it was for the purpose
of foraging upon the pikas there. However,
it occurred only 4 times (1.83%) in our mate-
rial and it seems more probable that this
movement to the rock slides is for the pur-
pose of hunting the red-backed and other
mice that abound in them.

Sorex sp.

Shrews occurred in 5 scats (1.6%) even
though reasonably numerous in parts of the
marten habitat. Their strong smell may well
render them unpalatable.

Carrion

Carrion in the form of the carcasses of
large game mammals was very abundant in
the park, but despite this, it was apparently
avoided by marten. Elk hair was found once
only and was the only evidence of the use of
carrion by marten.

BIRDS

_ Feathers of birds were found 13 times
to represent 4.3% of the food items. In one
of the stomachs the remains of an unhatched
bird and, part of the egg shell were found.
There was little to suggest that birds were

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

103

important in the food of marten. They were
probably taken when chance made them
easily available.

INSECTS

This item was represented most frequently
by grasshoppers, with crickets, moths and
beetles occurring less frequently. Insects were
found in 16 seats, sometimes several in a
scat as evidence of deliberate foraging upon
them.

BERRIES

Cranberries (Vaccinium oxycoccus) Oc-
curred as 5.2% of the items, estimated on
the basis of one or more berries in a scat
regarded as one item. As many as 25 ber-
ries occurred in a single scat.

: DISCUSSION

This survey of the food of marten in the
Canadian Rocky Mountains, made at a time
when marten were abundant but when none
of the small prey species was at cyclic peak,
has revealed that the marten is probably an
opportunist in much of its feeding. It takes
a wide variety of food items including ber-
ries, insects and birds, but especially small
mammals. It avoids carrion. Among the
small mammals, neither the red squirrel nor
the varying hare were being taken in pro-
portion to their availability. It seems justifia-
ble to assume that these animals were not
hunted assiduously and that by choice the
marten was feeding upon mice, for the most
part red-backed mice.

It seems doubtful to us that in a moun-
tainous habitat such as the one represented
in this study, with its diversified fauna as
available marten food, that the varying hare,
even when much more abundant than it was
during the course of the study, would be of
sufficient importance to the marten to serve
as a population control following its remo-
val by epidemic die-off.

The varying hare and the grouse family
are the only food species in the marten
habitat subject to the “10 year” cycle and if
these species, by their periodic abundance
and subsequent absence, are not Serving as
population controls upon the marten, then
the cycle in the marten is probably not, in-
duced by mere quantity of available food and
is rather of more deep seated origin.

104 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

LITERATURE CITED
British Columbia Game Commission, 1948.
Annual report for 1947, pp. 89.
Cowan, I. McT., 1938. The Fur Trade and
the Fur Cycle 1827-1857. B.C. Histo-
rical Quart. pp. 19-30.

Grinnell, J., J. S. Dixon and J. M. Linsdale,

1937. Fur-Bearing Mammals of Califor-
nia. Univ. Calif. Press, Berkeley. 1:184-
210.

Hatter, J., 1945. A preliminary predator prey
study with respect to the Coyote (Canis
latrans) in Jasper National Park. (Un-
pub. thesis - pp. 76).

[Vol. 64

Hewitt, C. G., 1921. The conservation of the
wild life of Canada. Chas. Scribner’s
Sons, New York. pp. 343.

Lack, D., 1946. Competition for food by birds
of prey. Journ. Animal Ecol. 15 (2):
123-130.

Marshall, W. H., 1946. Winter food habits of
the pine marten in Montana. Journ.
Mammal. 27 (1): 83-84.

Seton, E. T., 1929. Lives of Game Animals.

Doubleday Doran, New York. 2(2):
369-746.

38
DESCRIPTION OF A NEW NORTHWESTERN GEOTHLYPIS'

W. Earit GODFREY

National Museum

HE CHARACTERS shown by six speci-

mens of the yellow-throat Geothlypis
trichas from southern Yukon, which were sec-
ured for the National Museum of Canada in
1943 by C. H. D. Clarke and in 1944 by A. L.
Rand (1946, National Museum of Canada
Bulletin 105, p. 58), aroused some time ago
the writer’s suspicions that these specimens
represent an undescribed subspecies. Ac-
cordingly eight additional specimens were
taken in the summer of 1949 in southwestern
Yukon Territory, which possess the same
characters shown in the previously taken
series. They plainly represent an unusually
well-marked, undescribed subspecies, and
since no published name appears to be avail-
able, it may be called

Geothlypis trichas yukonicola, subsp. nov.
YUKON YELLOW-THROAT

Type—Adult male, No. 34907, National
Museum of Canada collection; Jarvis River
at Alaska Highway, Yukon Territory; June
29, 1949; W. Earl Godfrey.

Subspecific characters—Upper parts, in-
cluding crown and nape, much grayer (less
greenish or brownish) than in Geothlypis
trichas campicola Behle and Aldrich or G. t.
arizela Oberholser. Yellow of under parts
more restricted than in either, and paler
(less orange-hued) than in campicola and
abdomen whiter.

of Canada, Ottawa

Measurements. — Adult male (7 speci-
mens): wing, 53.0 - 57.5 mm. (average, 55.4);
tail, 46.1 - 53.2 (50.5); exposed culmen, 10.1 -
11.5 (10.5); tarsus, 19.8 - 20.9 (20.3). Adult
female (1 specimen): wing, 52.6 mm.; tail,
50.2; exposed culmen, 10.5; tarsus, 10.8.

Range. — Known only from southern
Yukon where it is a local summer resident,
but undoubtedly will be found also in north-
ern British Columbia.

Specimens examined. — Yukon Territory :
Squanga Lake, 1 juv. ¢; Canol Road at Ni-

sutlin River;*l ‘ad.7 6," 1)-ad.) Sl juve? 3

Canol Road at Pelly River, 2 ad. ¢; Jarvis
River at Alaska Highway, 2 ad. ¢; Sulphur
Lake, 1 ad. ¢; Champagne, 1 ad. 6,1 juv. 9;
Haines Road Mile 118, 1 juv. ¢; Carcross,
1 juv. ¢, 1 juv. unsexed.

Comments.—Although the writer has not
examined material from the type locality
(Athabaska Delta) of G. t. alberticola Ober-
holser, an excellent series was available from
Lac la Nonne, Alberta, which presumably
are similar, being readily separable from G. t.
yukonicola mihi. Oberholser states (1948
Descriptions of New Races of Geothlypis
trichas, privately published) that alberticola
is greener above than campestris, whereas
yukonicola is grayer and is conspicuously less
greenish.

1 Received for publication May 10, 1950.

ees See

May-June, 1950]

BOTANICAL RESEARCH IN SCANDINAVIA:
| AND THEIR SPECIAL INTERESTS *?

WORKERS

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

105

375 CONTEMPORARY -

NICHOLAS POLUNIN
Macdonald Professor of Botany, McGill University, Montreal, Canada.

N THE SCANDINAVIAN countries, there

has long been a keen awareness of the
unique position of plants in the world’s
economy, and of the importance as well as
fascination of their study. Consequently it
was a very special pleasure for me to be able
to revisit some of those delightful lands in
July and August, 1948, to work in several of
their botanical institutions, and to see some-
thing of the advances that have been made
in recent years: stimulated by the exchange
of views with old acquaintances and meetings
with many enthusiastic workers, I soon
came to feel that Canadian Plant Scientists
might find useful some enumeration of what
is going on in those regions that are in
many ways comparable with our own, and,
as a result of note-taking and subsequent
correspondence, etc., assembled the follow-
ing list of 375 investigators who are doing
botanical or closely-related research in
Scandinavia (sensu lato, and including a few
transients). After the name of each worker,
there is given what should prove to be an
effective postal (usually working) address
and a brief statement indicating his or her
main current (or at least recent) research
interest or interests — so far as could be
determined.

In connection with the preparation of
this list I find it a pleasure to acknowledge
with warm thanks the special help given by
Prof. Rolf Nordhagen, Drs. Tyge Bdocher,
Ilmari Hustich, Nils Hylander, Askell Love,
Th. Sgrensen, and Messrs. Arne Lundqvist
and Per Stormer. Far from purporting to
be complete, the compilation must be
emphasized as being merely provisional
and, probably, in places out of date
or otherwise inaccurate (e.g. in the ortho-
graphy of titles and addresses in various
languages). To those who have been omitted
through lack of available data or recent
signs of activity (perhaps owing to submer-
gence in the preparation of a magnum opus)
all apology is due. But publication has been

1 Received for publication July 4, 1949.
2 So far could be determined at the time of ‘compilation.

The list includes a few visitors, removals, and recent
deaths.

urged in the interests of transatlantic col-
Jaboration and particularly in view of the
forthcoming International Botanical Congress
which should attract many Canadian Plant
Scientists to Scandinavia in general and
Sweden in particular next summer, and so
as compiler I offer the list to a wider
public than my immediate colleagues and
correspondents — for such usefulness as it
may have but without taking responsibility
for its content and inevitable shortcomings.
As the list is intended for the use of in-
habitants of the Western Hemisphere some
titles, etc., have been omitted or contracted
and “A”, “@”, “O”, “B” (Th), etc., have been
placed in the alphabetical position in which
they would normally be expected by English
readers not familiar with Scandinavian lan-
guages and customs, ~
Aberg, Dr. Bérje; Kg. Lantbrukshdgskolan,

Uppsala, Sweden — Ascorbic acid meta-

bolism; physiology of weed-destruction.
Aberg, Dr. Ewert; Kgl. Lantbrukshdgskolan,

Uppsala, Sweden — Taxonomy of culti-

vated plants; influence of growth-sub-

stances on weeds and cultivated plants.

Afzelius, Dr. Karl; Karlavagen 9, Stockholm,
Sweden — Cytology of Senecio,
Ahlner, Dr. Sten; Universitetets Vaxtbiolo-
giska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden —
Taxonomy of boreal Lichenes; mono-
graph of Scandinavian Caliciaceae.

Akdik, Sara; (foreign visitor at) Genetiska
Institutionen, Lund, Sweden — Genetics
of Rye.

Akerberg, Dr. Erik; Sveriges Utsddesfére-
nings Filial, Ultuna, Uppsala, Sweden —
Genetics of induced polyploids in Tri-
folium and Medicago; hybridization in
Medicago and Poa; apomixis in Poa
pratensis; breeding of Clovers and the
role of bees, etc., in their pollination.

Akerman, Prof. Dr. Ake; Sveriges Utsides-
forening, Svaliv, Sweden — Genetics
and plant breeding of Avena sativa and
Triticum spp.

Albertson, Dr. Nils; Universitetets Vaxtbiolo-
giska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden —

106 THE CANADIAN
Vegetation of certain calcareous districts
in Sweden,

Algéus, Dr. Sven; Universitetets Botaniska
Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden — Physio-
logy of planktonic Algae (especially the
nitrogen assimilation of unicellular green
Algae).

Alm, C. G.; Universitetets Botaniska Museum,
Uppsala, Sweden — Arctic and _ boreal
flowering plants; Carex.

Almborn, Dr, Ove; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Lund, Sweden—Lichen vegeta-
tion and flora, especially of southern
Sweden; Pertusaria.

Almquist, Dr. Erik; Lohegatan 13, Eskilstuna,
Sweden — Flora of the Provinces of
Dalarna (Dalecarlia) and Uppland.

Alvik, Prof, Dr. Gunnar; Universitetets Bo-
taniske Laboratorium, Blindern, Oslo,
Norway — Plant physiology: various
studies including electric potentials in
plants.

Andersen, Mag. Alfred; Danmarks Geologiske
Unders¢gelse, Charlottenlund-Kgbenhavn,
Denmark — Pollen statistics.

Andersen, Mag. Knud; Skandinavisk Bryg-
geri-Laboratorium, Forhaabningsholm-
salle, Kgbenhavn, Denmark — Microbio-
logy; limnology.

Andersson, Mag. Artur; Universitetets Bota-

niska Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden —
Root cultures.

Andersson, Enar; Institutet for Skogstradsfo-
radling, Brunsberg( Sweden — Genetics
of Coniferae, Parnassia, etc.; cytotaxo-
nomy; effect of altitude on meiosis in
Spruce.

Andersson, Lic. Olof; Universitetets Botanis-
ka Museum, Lund, Sweden — Vegetation
of sandy districts of southern Sweden;
taxonomy and ecology of higher Fungi,
in particular the Hymenomycetes of
southern Sweden.

Andersson-Kotts — see Kottd, Irma Anders-
son.

Arnborg, Dr. Tore; Universitetets VAxtbiolo-
giska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden —
Swedish forest trees and forest vegeta-
tion.

Asplund, Dr. Erik; Naturhistoriska Riksmu-
seet, Stockholm 50, Sweden — South
American vascular plants.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

\

Benum, Kons. Peter; Museet, Troms¢, Nor-
way — Vascular flora of northern Nor-
way.

Bergman, Dr. Bengt; Forsvarets Laroverk,
Uppsala, Sweden — Embriology of
Erigeron, Chondrilla, and other Composi-
tae.

Bernstroém, Lic. Peter; Genetiska Insitu-
tionen, Lund, Sweden — Genetics and
taxonomy of Lamium species and
hybrids,

Bjorkman, Prof. Dr. Erik; Skogshdgskolan,
Experimentalfaltet, Stockholm, Sweden—
Mycorrhiza and fungous parasites of
forest trees; timber ‘conservation and
decay due to Fungi; ecological problems
of forests and heaths.

Bjérkman, Mag. Sven O.; Universitetets
Botaniska Museum, Uppsala, Sweden —
Cytogenetic- taxonomic monograph of
Agrostis in Sweden.

Bjorling Prof, Dr. Karl; Kgl. Lantbruks-
hdgskolan, Uppsala, Sweden — Fungal
diseases of cultivated plants.

Bliding, Dr. Carl; Kvarngatan 49, Boras,
Sweden — Taxonomy of Enteromorpha.

Blom, Kons. Carl; Géteborgs Botaniska
Tradgard, Gédteborg, Sweden—Adventive
plants; Chenopodiaceae.

Bocher, Dr. Tyge W.; Universitetets Plantea-
natomiske Laboratorium, Gothersgade
140, Kgbenhavn K, Denmark — Plant
anatomy and cytogenetics; plant geogra-
phy and sociology with special reference
to Greenland; Blue-green Algae.

Bérgesen, Dr. Fr.; Universitetets Botaniske
Museum, Gothersgade 130, Kgbenhavn
K, Denmark — Algae, especially of salt
water.

Borgstrom, Dr. Georg; Svenska Institutet for
Konserveringsforskning, Gibraltargatan
5c, Goteborg, Sweden — Storage and
canning of fruits and vegetables.

Bgrset, Ola; Norges Landbruksh¢gskole, Vol-
lebekk, Norway — Forestry; ameliora-
tion of Populus tremula.

Bosemark, N. Olof; Genetiska Institutionen,

i ils ot a cia

Lund, Sweden — Cytology of Festuca

pratensis and Centaurea.
Boyne Petersen — see Petersen, J. Boye
Boysen-Jensen, Prof. Emer. Dr. Peter; Uni-
versitetets Plantefysiologiske Laborato-
rium, Gothersgade 140, Kgbenhavn K,

May-June, 1950]

Denmark — Plant physiology: various
studies including auxins, production of
dry matter, etc.

Braarud, Prof. Dr. Trygve; Universitetets
Botaniske Laboratorium, Blindern, Oslo,
Norway — Marine phytoplankton.

Bremer, Prof. Dr.; Norges Landbrukshgg-
skole, Vollebekk, Norway — Ameliora-
tion of vegetables.

Buch, Dr. Hans; Botanical Institute of the
University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Taxonomy and physiology of
Bryophyta, especially Hepaticae; flora of
parts of Spain. ;

Buchwald, Prof. N. Fabritius; Klg. Veteri-
naer- og Landbohgjskole, Rolighedsvej 23,
Kgbenhavn V, Denmark — Plant patho-
logy; Fungi.

Buen, Cand. Helge; Eidsvolls Landsgymnas,
Eidsvoll, Norway — Sphagnum; ecology
of mosses.

Burstrém, Prof. Dr. Hans; Universitetets Bo-
taniska Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden —
Water balance of trees; nitrogen assimi-
lation; hormones and growth mechanism
in higher plants.

Cedercreutz, Dr. Carl; Botanical Institute of

_, the University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Taxonomy and ecology of
Algae; aquatic vegetation.

Christensen, Mag. Tyge;
Planteanatomiske Laboratorium, Gother-
sgade 140, Kgbenhavn K., Denmark —
Green Algae; Musci; Nature preserva-
tion.

Christiansen, Kapt. M. P.; Bjelkes Alle 39,
Kgbenhavn K, Denmark — Taraxacum;
resupinate Hymenomycetes.

Christiansen, Mag. M. Skytte; Universitetets
Botaniske Museum, Gothersgade 130,
Kgbenhavn K, Denmark — Lichenes.

Christophersen, Dr. Erling; Universitetets
Botaniske Museum, Toéyen, Oslo, Norway
— Ecology; Pacific flora.

Clausen, Mag. Eva; Nogrrebrogade 11 Kében-
havn N, Denmark — Hepaticae.

Cleve-Euler, Fru Dr. Astrid (A. Cleve von
Euler); Floragatan 4, Uppsala, Sweden—
Diatomeae, especially preparing a flora
of Swedish and Finnish species.

Collander, Prof. Dr. Runar; Botanical Ins-
titute of the University, Unioninkatu 44,
Helsinki, Finland — Plant physiology,
especially the semipermeability of cells.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Universitetets |

107

Dahl, Cand. Ejilif; Universitetets Botaniske .
Museum, Téyen, Oslo, Norway — Liche-
nes, especially of the Arctic; northern
vascular plants; ecology.

Dahlbeck, Dr. Nils; Master-Samuelsgatan 3,
Stockholm, Sweden — Nature conserva-
tion, etc,

Dahlgren, Prof. Dr. K. V. O.; Geijersgatan
18, Uppsala, Sweden — Plant embryolo-
gy; history of botany.

Danielsen, Can. Anders; Botanisk Museum,
Universitetet i Bergen, Bergen, Norway
— Pollen analysis.

Danielsson, Kand. Berta; Balsgard, Fjalke-
stad, Sweden — Genetics and breeding of
Prunus and Corylus.

Davidsson, Mag. Ingolfur; Institute of Plant
Pathology, Atvinnudeild Haskolans, Reyk-
javik, Iceland—Floristics of some regions
of Iceland, especially the east coast and
the Eyjafjérdur district; compiling list
of plants cultivated in Reykjavik (with
Ingimar Oskasson q.v.).

de Faria — see Faria, A. Lima de

Degelius, Dr. Gunnar; Universitetets Vaxt-
biologiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden
—Taxonomy and distribution of boreal
Lichenes; monograph of Scandinavian
Collemataceae.

Du Rietz — see Rietz, G. Einar Du

Egede Larsen — see Larsen, Kari Egede.

Ehle — see Nilsson-Ehle, H.

Ehrenberg, Kand. Carin; Statens Skogsforsk-
ningsinstitut, Experimentalfaltet, Stock-
holm, Sweden — Polyploidy and _ hy-
bridization in Ulmus.

Ehrenberg, Lic. Lars; Brahegatan 41, or
Stockholms Hégskola, Stockholm, Swe-
den — Genetics; biochemistry; antibio-
tics.

Eide, Prof. Erling; Skogforsoksvesenet, Volle-
bekk, Norway — Forestry.

EKidem, Cand. Per; Flekkefjord Skole, Flek-
kefjord, Norway — Dendrochronology.

Ekdahl, Lic. Ivar; Kgl. Lantbrukshégskolan,
Uppsala, Sweden — Physiology of root
hairs.

Ekstrand, Lic. Harry; Statens Vaxtskyddsan-
stalt, Stockholm 19, Sweden — Typhula
on economic plants,

Genetiska Institutionen,

of Secale,

Ellerstrom, Sven;
Lund, Sweden — Genetics
Hordeum and Galeopsis.

108 ; THE CANADIAN

Elvers, Dr. Ivar; Gullmarsvagen 4, Enskede,
Sweden — Botanical microtechnique.
Engdahl, Mag. Sven; Universitetets Botanis-
ka Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden — Nitro-

gen assimilation in green Algae.

Erdtman, Dr. Gunnar; Abrahamsbergsvagen
151, Stockholm-Abrahamsberg, Sweden
— Palynology.

Ericson, Jan; Universitetets Botaniska Mu-
seum, Lund, Sweden — Floristics of
southern Scandinavia.

Eriksson, Lic. John; Universitetets Botanis-
ka Museum, Uppsala, Sweden — Taxono-
my of resupinate Hymenomycetes (es-
pecially the Swedish species).

Erkamo, Mag. V.; Botanical Institute of the
University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Flora of Finland, especially
changes in floristics during recent years.

Erlandsson, Dr. Stellan; Sibyllegatan 7,
Stockholm, Sweden — Chromosome races
of Scandinavian flowering plants.

Euler — see Cleve-Euler, Astrid.

Faegri, Prof. Dr. Knut; Botanisk Museum,
Universitetet i Bergen, Bergen, Norway
— History of Norwegian flora; pollen
analysis; ecology.

Fagerlind, Prof. Dr. Folke; Botaniska Insti-
tutet, Stockholms Hégskola, Stockholm
6, Sweden — Cytotaxonomy and ecology
of Rosa and Galiwm.

Fagerstrém, Mag. Lars; Botanical Institute of
the University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Taxonomy and phytogeogra-
phy of boreal plants; Lichenes.

Fahraeus, Dr. Gdsta; Kgl. Lantbrukshogsko-
lan, Uppsala, Sweden — Cellulose de-
composition by Bacteria; Fungi causing
rotting.

Faria, A. Lima de; (foreign visitor at) Gene-
tiska Institutionen, Lund, Sweden—Cyto-
taxonomy of Antirrhinum.

Fjerdingstad, E.; Vangeleddet 51, Lyngby,
Denmark — Limnology; algae.

Florin, Prof. Dr. Rudolf; Bergianska Trad-
garden, Stockholm 50, Sweden — Taxo-
nomy of recent and fossil Gymnosper-
mae.

Flovik, Dr. Karl; Statens Forsgksstasjon i
Plantekultur, Holt, Troms¢, Norway —
Cytology of northern grasses, etc.;
breeding of agricultural plants.

Foged, Niels; Naturhistorisk Forening, Aare-
shrupsvej 20, Odense, Denmark — Dia-
toms; Limnology.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Frandsen, Dr. K. J.; Otoftegaard, Taastrup,
Denmark — Genetics of cultivated plants.

Fransson, Mag. Par; Statens Skogsforsk-
ningsinstitut, Experimentalfaltet, Stock-
holm, Sweden — Growth substances.

Fridriksson, Mag. Sturla; Institute of Botany
and Genetics, Atvinnudeild Haskolans,
Reykjavik, Iceland — Genetics and flo-
ristics of Icelandic plants.

Fries, Dr. E. Th.; Visby, Sweden — Flora of
the Province of Gotland.

Fries, Dr. Harald; Stampgatan 8, Goteborg,
Sweden — Flora of the Province of Bo-
huslan.

Fries, Fru Lic. Lisbeth; Universitetets Vaxt-
fysiologiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden
— Induced mutations in Coprinus.

Fries, Lic. Magnus; Universitetets Vaxtbio-
logiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden —
History of Picea abies in southwestern
Sweden,

Fries, Dr. Nils; Universitetets VAxtfysiologis-
ka Institution, Uppsala, Sweden — Ex-
perimental work on Ophiostoma, espe-
cially the influence of purine compounds;
mutations in Ophiostoma multiannula-
tum, Neurospora, and other Fungi in-
duced by X-rays and chemicals.

Fries, Prof. Emer. Dr. Robert E.; Floragatan
3, Stockholm, Sweden — African moun-
tain flora; Annonaceae.

Frisendahl, Dr. Arvid; Bjérngardsgatan 13!V,
Stockholm, Sweden—Flora of the Provin-
ce of Bohuslan.

Froier, Dr. Kare; Sveriges Utsadesforning,
Svalév, Sweden — Genetics of Avena sa-
tiva, Poa pratensis, Trifolium, etc.; plant
breeding of Medicago and Bromus.

Fréman, Mag. Ingmar; Botaniska Institutet,
Stockholms Hodgskola, Stockholm, Swe-
den — Hedera in Scandinavia.

Frost, Sune; Genetiska Institutionen, Lund,
Sweden — Cytology of Centaurea scabio-
sa, ete.

Funder, Dr. Sigurd; Universitetets Botanis-
ke Laboratorium, Blindern, Oslo, Nor-
way — Microbiology.

Gaarder, Cand. Karen Ringdal; Universite-
tets Botaniske Laboratorium, Blindern,
Oslo, Norway — Marine phytoplankton.

Gabrielsen, Prof. Dr. E. K.; Kgl. Veterinaer-
og Landboh@jskole, Rolighedsvej 23, K¢-
benhavn V, Denmark — Plant physiology,
especially photosynthesis.

SS ae

May-June, 1950]

Gallge, Dr. O0.; Nybrovej, Lyngby, Denmark
— Lichenes,

‘Gelin, Lic. Olov; Weibullsholm, Landskrena,
Sweden — Genetics of induced mutations
and polyploids in Pisum, Hordeum, Tri-
folium, etc.; Avena species; cytotaxono-
my of Erophila.

Gelting, Dr. Paul; Dansk Arktisk Station,
Godhavn, Greenland (c/o Gr@nlands Sty-
relse, Slotholmsgade 10, Kgbenhawn K,
Denmark) — Arctic plant geography;
Lichenes.,

Gillner, Mag. Vilhelm; Universitetets Vaxt-
biologiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden
— Meadow vegetation of Swedish coasts.

Gjaerevoll, Kons. Olav; Kgl. Norske Viden-
skabers Selskab Museet, Trondheim, Nor-

. way — Norwegian flora; Scandinavian
snow-bed vegetation; Bryophyta.

Gram, Mag. Ernst; Statens Plantepatologiske
Forsgg, Lyngby, Denmark—Plant patho-
logy.

Gram, Prof. Dr. Kai; Kgl. Veterinaer-og
Landbohgjskole, Rolighedsvej 23, K@-
benhavn V, Denmark — Plant anatomy
and systematics; forest trees.

Gran, Prof. Emer. Dr. Haaken H.; Slemdal,
Oslo, Norway — Algology; plankton;
genetics of Phaseolus; horticulture.

Granhall, Dr. Ingvar; Balsgard, Fjalkestad,

Sweden — Genetics and breeding of
Humulus, Malus, Prunus, etc.
Grenager, Cand. Birger; Institutet for

Tangforskning, Blindern, Oslo, Norway
— Algology of Oslofjord; influence of
pollution on the marine flora.

Grénblad, Dr. Rolf; Karis, Finland (c/o Bo-
tanical Institute of the University,
Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki, Finland) —
Taxonomy of Algae, especially Desmi-
diaceae, “fe

Gr@ntved, Mag. Johs.; Universitetets Botanis-
ke Museum, Gothersgade 130, Kgbenhavn
K, Denmark — Floristics, especially of
Iceland and the Baltic regions.

Grgntved, Mag. Julius; Plankton Laborato-

riet, Charlottenlund Slot, Charlotten-
lund-K¢gbenhavn, Denmark — Marine
phytoplankton.

+ Gudjonsson, Mag. Gudni; c/o Universitetets
Botaniske Museum, Gothersgade 130,
Kgbenhavn K, Denmark — Cytology of
flowering plants.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

109

Gustafsson, Prof. Dr. Ake; Statens Skogsfor-
skningsinstitut, Experimentalfaltet, Stock-
holm, Sweden — Genetics of Barley and
forest and other valuable plants, es-

pecially in connection with induced
mutations; cytotaxonomy of Rubus,
Rosa, etc.; effects of polyploidy on

ecology and _ survival in nature;
mixis and amphimixis.

Gustafsson, Arne; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Lund, Sweden — Floristics; the
genus Juncus.

Hafsten, Cand. Ulf; Botanisk Museum, Uni-
versitetet i Bergen, Bergen, Norway —
Pollen analysis; Tristan da Cunha and
Norway.

Hagberg, Mag. Arne; Sveriges Utsadesfodre-
ning, Svalov, Sweden — Genetics of Ga-
leopsis tetrahit, Solanum tuberosum, etc.;
breeding of Hordeum and Secale. :

Hagem, Prof. Dr. Oscar; Botanisk Labora-
torium, Universitetet i Bergen, Bergen,
Norway — Microbiology; soil microflora;
heredity; ecology and physiology of
forest trees.

Hagen, Cand. Absjgrn; Statens Plantevern,
Botanisk Museum, Tgyen, Oslo, Norway
— Mycology; parasitic Micromycetes of
Norway.

Hagerup, Dr. Olaf; Universitetets Botaniske
Museum, Gothersgade 130, Kgbenhavn K,
Denmark — Cyto-ecology; ontogeny; phy-
logeny.

Haglund, Dr. Gustaf; Naturhistoriska Riks-
museet, Stockholm 50, Sweden — Taxo-
nomy of Taraxacum.

Hakansson, Prof. Dr. Artur; Genetiska Insti-
tutionen, Lund, Sweden — Genetics of
Secale, Hordeum, Galeopsis, Poa alpina,
Godetia; apomixis in Alchemilla;- em-
bryology of Poa alpina and Potentilla
argentea.

Hakansson, Mag. Torsten; Universitetets Bo-
taniska Museum, Lund, Sweden — Cyto-
taxonomy of Festuca rubra; flora and
vegetation of southern Scandinavia, es-
pecially plant sociology of the Beech
forests of the Province of Skane (Scania).

Halden, Dr. Bertil; Skogshégskolan, Experi-
mentalfaltet, Stockholm, Sweden—Forest
soils and water problems; distribution of
Scandinavian forest trees, especially

apo-

+ News of death received since this compilation was
last revised (N.P.).

110 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

their northern boundaries; northern out-
posts of southern Scandinavian plants;
marine sediments and their vegetation.

Halle, Prof. Dr. Thore; Naturhistoriska Riks-
museet, Stockholm 50, Sweden — Palaeo-
botany.

Hansen, Mag. E. Bille; Universitetets Plante-
fysiologiske Laboratorium, Gothersgade
140, Kgbenhavn K, Denmark — Plant
physiology; genetics of Fungi.

Hansen, Dr. H. M¢lholm; Universitetets Bo-
taniske Museum, Gothersgade 130, K@-
benhavn K, Denmark — Palaeobotany;
plant sociology.

Hansen, Mag. J. Benth; Universitetets Bota-
niske Museum, Gothersgade 130, K¢ben-
havn K, Denmark — Algae; Cytology.

Hansen, Kand, Samuel; Universitetets Bota-
niska Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden —
Physiological activity of herbicides.

Hansen — see also Roll-Hansen, Finn

Hansen — see also Roll-Hansen, Helga

Hard av Segerstad — see Segerstad, Fredrik
Hard av

Harling, Lic. Gunnar; Stjarnvagen 11, Lidin-
gd I, Sweden — Plant embryology; taxo-
nomy of Cyclanthaceae.

Harmsen, Mag. Louis; Teknologisk Institut,
Kgbenhavn K, Denmark — Cytology;
Musci; lignicolous Fungi.

Hartelius, Dr. Vagn; Carlsberg Laborato-
rium, Valby-Kgbenhavn, Denmark —
Fermentation; micronutrients of micro-
organisms.

Hasle, Cand. Grethe Ryther; Universitetets
‘Botaniske Laboratorium, Blindern, Oslo,
Norway — Plankton; marine botany.

Hasselrot, Lit. Torsten; Naturhistoriska
Riksmuseet, Stockholm 50, Sweden —
Taxonomy and distribution of boreal
Lichenes; Umbilicariaceae.

Hassler, Lic. Arne; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Lund, Sweden—Garden plants;
systematics of the genus Euphorbia.

Hayren, Prof. Emer. Dr. Ernst; Mannerheim-
vagen 33, Helsinki, Finland (c/o Bota-
nical Institute of the University, Unionin-
katu 44, Helsinki, Finland) — Lichenes;
Fungi; phytogeography.

Hedberg, Lic. Olov; Universitetets Bota-
niska Museum, Uppsala, Sweden—Moun-
tain flora of tropical Africa.

-[Vol. 64

Heiberg, Prof. Hans H. H.; Norges Land-
brukshggskole, Vollebekk, Norway —
Forestry; ecology; Norwegian flora.

Hemberg, Dr. Torsten; Ulrikagatan 3, Stock-
holm, Sweden — Substances promoting
or inhibiting growth in flowering plants.

Heribert-Nilsson — see Nilsson, N. Heribert

Herring, P. M.; Universitetets Botaniska Mu-
seum, Gothersgade 130, Kgbenhavn K,
Denmark — Rosa.

Hesselbo, Cand. A.; Bellmans Plads 22, Kg-
benhavn @, Denmark — Musci.

Hellesman, Mag. Erik; Kgl. Lantbrukshdgs-
kolan, Uppsala, Sweden — Mutual in-
fluence of plants on each other.

Hiitonen, Dr. Ilmari; Botanical Institute of
the University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Taxonomy and phytogeogra-
phy; flora of Finland; Salzzx.

Hjelmqvist, Dr. Hakon; Universitetets Bota-
niska Muséum, Lund, Sweden — Garden
plants; chimaeras; morphology of Amen-
tiferae.

Hgeg, Prof. Dr. O. A.; Universitetets Farma-
soytiske Institutt, Blindern, Oslo, Nor-
way — Palaeobotany; vernacular plant
names.

Holm, Lic. Lennart; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Uppsala, Sweden—Monographic
work on the genera Ophiobolus and Lep-
tosphaeria.

Holmberg, U.; Universitetets Botaniska Mu-

seum, Lund, Sweden — Floristics of
southern Scandinavia. b:

Holmen, Mag. Kjeld; Universitetets Botanis-
ke Museum, Gothersgade 130, K®oben-
havn K. Denmark — Musci; arctic plant
geography; cytology.

Horn, Cand. Kristian; Universitetets Bota-
niske Laboratorium, Blindern, Oslo, Nor-
way — Cytology; genetics; Fungi.

Horn af Rantzien — see Rantzien, Henning
Horn af

Hultén, Prof. Dr. Eric; Naturhistoriska Riks-
museet, Stockholm 50, Sweden—Flora of
Alaska; distribution of boreal vascular
plants.

Hustich, Dr, Ilmari; Botanical Institute of the
University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Forest geography of Lapland
and the Labrador Peninsula; reactions
of tree growth and distribution to recent
climatic changes.

|
-
P
,
¢
4
4
7

May-June, 1950]

Hygen, Cand. Georg; Universitetets Botaniske
Laboratorium, Blindern, Oslo, Norway—
Plant physiology; algology.

Hylander, Dr. Nils; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Uppsala, Sweden — Preparing
flora of vascular plants of the ‘Nordic
flora region’; taxonomy and nomemcla-
ture of garden plants, especially Hosta
as cultivated in Sweden; adventive park
flora, especially of Hieracium; revision
of International Rules of Botanical No-

menclature.
Hylmd, Kand. Bertil; Ufiiversitetets Betanis-
ka Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden — Ion

absorption and transpiration.

Israelson, Dr. Gunnar; Ostergaten 3, Hassle-
holm, Sweden — Rheophilous freshwater
Algae of Sweden.

Iversen, Dr. Johs.; Danmarks Geologiske
Undersggelse, Charlottenlund-K¢ébenhavn,
Denmark — Late glacial and postglacial

vegetation; pollen statistics; ecology;
aquatic plants.
Jakobsen, Knud; Universitetets Botaniske

Museum, Gothersgade 130, Kgbenhavn
K, Denmark — Flora and vegetation of
northwestern Greenland.

Jalas, Mag. Jaakko; Botanical Institute of the
University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Phytogeography; taxonomy
and cytology of Thymus, Anthyllis, Viola,
ete. sf

Jensen, H. Nilaus; Mster Farimagsgade 2B,
- Kgbenhavn @, Denmark — Systematics
of ornamental plants; Hedera.

+ Jensen, Prof. Emer. Hj.; Gersonsvej 55, Hel-
lerup-K¢benhayn, Denmark — Plant phy-
siology; Tobacco.

Jensen, Dir. Holger; Ramldsa Plantskola,
Halsingborg, Sweden — Genetics of in-
duced polyploids in Beta, Rubus, Fra-
garia, Vaccinium and*various Coniferae.

Jensen — see also Boysen-Jensen, Peter

Jessen, Prof. Dr. Knud; Universitetets Bota-
niske Have, Gothersgade 140, K®oben-
havn K, Denmark — Historical plant
geography; pollen statistics.

Johansson, Lic. Emil; Alnarp, Akarp, Sweden
— Genetics of fruit trees; hybridization
in Prunus and Fragaria.

+ News of death received since this compilation was
last revised (N.P.).

THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

PII

Johnsson, Dr. Helge; Institutet for Skogs-
tradsforadling, Kallstorp, Sweden—Gene-
tics and breeding of Populus, Betula, and
Coniferae.

Jonassen, Dr, H.; Kratholmsvej 6, Holte, Den-
mark — Pollen statistics.

J@rgensen, Prof. Dr. C. A.; Kgl. Veterinaer—
og Landboh@jskole, Rolighedsvej 23, K¢-
benhavn V, Denmark — Genetics (Papa-
ver, etc.); floristics; plant pathology.

J@rgensen, Mag. E.; Danmarks Farmaceutis-
ke H@jskole, Universitetsparken 2, K9-
benhavn Q, Denmark — Diatomeae. ©

Jorstad, Dr. Ivar; Statens Plantevern, Univer-
sitetets Botanisk Museum, Tg¢yen, Oslo,
Norway — Mycology; plant pathology.

Juel, Mag. Inger; Universitetets Plantefy-
siologiske Laboratorium, Gothersgade
140, Kgbenhavn K, Denmark—Plant phy-
siology, especially water-economy of
higher plants; auxins.

Julén, Gullan; Sveriges Utsadesforening, Sva-
lév, Sweden — Genetics of Medicago sa-
tiva, Phleum pratense, etc.; breeding of
Clovers,

Kalela, Prof. Dr. Aarno; Botanical Institute
of the University, Unioninkatu 44, Hel-
sinki, Finland — Taxonomy, especially
of Carex; vegetation of Lapland and Pa-
tagonia; post-glacial history of the flora
of Finland. ’

Kalliola, Dr. R.; Forest Institute of the Uni-
_versity, Kirkkokatu 4, Helsinki, Finland
— Floristics and plant sociology; nature:
conservation.

Kari, Dr. L.;- Botanical Institute of the Uni-
versity, Turku (Abo), Finland — Liche-
nes; Fungi,

Karlsen, Cand. Astrid; Haakonsgt., Bergen,
Norway—Denitrification Bacteria; Myxo-
mycetes of Norway.

Key — see Mackey, J.

Kiellander, Lic. Carl L.; Institutet for Skogs-
tradsforadling, Kallstorp, Sweden—Gene-
tics of Larix and other Coniferae; hy-
bridization and cytotaxonomy of Poa.

Kilander, Mag. Sven; Universitetets Botanis-
ka Museum, Uppsala, Sweden — High
limits of Scandinavian mountain plants.

Klykken, Cand. Odd; Den Landbrukskjemis-
ke Kontrollstasjon, Oslo, Norway—Seeds:
of agricultural and technical plants;
contamination of cereals.

112 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Knaben, Mag. Gunvor; Universitetets Bota-
niske Hage, Tgéyen, Oslo, Norway — Cy-
tology; chromosome numbers of alpine
plants.

Kgie, Dr. Mogens; Universitetets Planteana-
tomiske Laboratorium, Gothersgade 140,

Kgbenhavn K, Denmark — Experimen-
tal ecology; flora of Persia and Afghanis-
tan.

Kotilainen, Prof. Dr. Mauno; Botanical Ins-
titute of the University, Unioninkatu 44,
Helsinki, Finland — Phytogeography;
bog and rock vegetation, especially of
Lapland and Karelia.

Kottd, Dr. Irma Andersson; Wenner-Grens
Institut for Experimentell Biologi, Norr-
tullsgatan 16, Stockholm, Sweden—Gene-
tics of Fungi.

Krog, Cand. Hildur; Universitetets Botaniske
Laboratorium, Blindern, Oslo, Norway —
Chemistry of Lichens in relation to
systematics.

Krosby, Cand. Peter A.; Statens Frékontrol-
lanstalt, As, Norway — Adulteration of
seeds.

Krusenstjerna, Dr. Edvard von; Vastra Ny-
gatan 24, Norrkoping, Sweden — Phyto-
geography of Scandinavian Musci.

Kujala, Prof. Dr. Viljo; Forest Research
Institute, Unioninkatu 40, Helsinki, Fin-
land — Forest vegetation of Finland,
Canada, etc.; ecology of forest plants
and Fungi.

Kylin, Mag. Anders; Universitetets Botaniska
Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden — Sulphur
and nitrogen metabolism.

+Kylin, Prof. Emer. Dr. Harald; Universite-
tets Botaniska Laboratorium Lund, Swe-
den — Physiology and taxonomy of ma-
rine Algae.

Lagerberg, Prof. Emer. Dr. Torsten; Morby, ©

Stocksund, or c/o Skogshdgskolan, Ex-
perimentalfaltet, Stockholm, Sweden —
Dendrology; forest mycology and taxo-
nomy; nature conservation.

Lagerkranz, Rev. J.; c/o Naturhistoriska
Riksmuseet, Stockholm 50, Sweden —
Vascular plants of arctic and subarctic
regions,

Lamm, Dr. Robert; Genetiska Institutionen,
Lund, Sweden — Genetics of Pisum sa-

+ News of death received since this compilation was
last revised (N.P.).

[Vol. 64
tivum, Solanum tuberosum and S. acaule;
cytotaxonomy.

Lamprecht, Dr. Herbert; Weibullsholm,
Landskrona, Sweden—Genetics of Pisum
sativum and Phaseolus vulgaris; Phaseo-
lus hybrids.

Lange, Bodil; Universitetets Botaniske Mu-
seum, Gothersgade 130, Kobenhayn K,
Denmark — Musci (Sphagnum).

Lange, Mag. Joh.; Kgl. Veterinaer-og Land-
boh@jskole, Rolighedsvej 23, Kgbenhavn
V, Denmark — Dendrology.

Lange, Mag. M.; Universitetets Planteanato-
miske Laboratorium, Gothersgade 140,

_ Kobenhavn K, Denmark — Fungi.

Lange, Thorvald; Olympiavagen 13, Halsing-
borg, Sweden — Flora of the Province
of Skane (Scania).

Langlet, Dr. Olof; Statens Skogsforsknings-
institut, Experimentalfaltet, Stockholm,
Sweden — Forest ecology; nutrition of
Conifers; introduction of foreign trees.

Larsen, Cand. C. Muhle; c/o Forst- og Jagt-
museet, Hérsholm, Denmark—Vegetative
propagation of forest trees; growth hor-
mones.

Larsen, Dr. C. Syrach; Forstbotanisk Have,
Charlottenlund-Kgbenhavn, Denmark —
-Forest trees.

Larsen, Kai; Universitetets Botaniske Labo-
ratorium, Gothersgade 140, Kgbenhavn

* K, Denmark — Cytology.

Larsen, Cand. Kari Egede; Botanisk Mu-
seum, Universitetet i Bergen, Bergen,
Norway — Pollen analysis.

Larsen, Dr. Poul; Universitetets Plantefysio-
logiske Laboratorium, Gothersgade 140,
K@benhavn K, Denmark (at present c/o
Department of Botany, University of Chi-
cago, Chicago 37, Ill., U.S.A.) — Plant
physiology, especially growth hormones.

Leissner — see Nilsson-Leissner, Gunnar

Lemberg, Dr, Bertel; c/o Botanical Institute
of the University, Unioninkatu 44, Hel-
sinki, Finland — Floristics and phyto-
geography of southern Finland.

Levan, Dr. Albert; Genetiska Institutionen,
Lund, Sweden — Genetics of induced
polyploids, etc., in Yeasts, Beta, Trifo-
lium, Raphanus, Sinapis, Brassica, Linum,
Phleum, and of natural polyploids in
Allium nutans; effects of colchicine and
other substances.

el
:

y.
x

May-June, 1950]

Levring, Dr. Tore; Gdteborgs Botaniska Trad-
gard, Goteborg, Sweden — Australian
Algae; physiology of marine Algae.

Lid, Kons. Johannes; Universitetets Botanis-
ke Museum, Toyen, Oslo, Norway—Arctic
and Norwegian floristics, including pre-
paration of a new edition of his ‘Norsk

_ Flora’; Sphagnum.

Lihnell, Dr. Daniel; Statens Vaxtskyddsan-
stalt, Stockholm 19, Sweden — Fungal
and virus diseases of cultivated plants.

Liljeback, Lars; Skogshdgskolan, Experimen-
talfaltet, Stockholm, Sweden — The dis-
tribution of spontaneous Beech forests.

Liljefors, Lic. Alf; Asbacken 35, Alsten,
Sweden — Embryology of Sorbus.

Lillieroth, Mag. Gunvor; Universitetets Bo-
taniska Museum, Lund, Sweden—Fresh-
water Algae.

Lillieroth, Lic. Sigvard; Universitetets Lim-
nologiska Institution, Lund, Sweden —
The regulation of lakes and its influence
on vegetation.

Lima de Faria — see Faria, A. Lima de

Lindeberg, Dr. Gdsta; Universitetets Vaxt-
fysiologiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden
— Role of polyphenol oxidases in the
physiology of Fungi; biological decom-
position of lignin.

Lindfors, Prof. Dr. Thore; Statens Vaxt-
skyddsanstalt, Stockholm 19, Sweden —
Plant pathology; Uredineae.

Lindquist, Prof. Dr. Bertil; Skogshdgskolan,
Experimentalfaltet, Sweden — Plant so-
ciology; genetics and ecology of forest
trees; tree breeding and silviculture.

Lindqvist, K.; Hilleshdg, Landskrona, Sweden
— Genetics of Piswm sativum and Lac-
tua.

Linnermark, Mag. Nils; Universitetets Bota-
niska Museum, Lund, Sweden — Soils
and plant sociology in southern Scandi-
navia.

Ljunger, Kand. Sven-Ake; Institutet for
Skogstradsforadling, Kallstorp, Sweden—
Genetics of Brassica, Sinapis, Raphanus,

“and generic and other crosses between
. various Cruciferae.

Lohammar, Dr. Gunnar; Universitetets VAxt-
fysiologiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden
— Taxonomy and cytology of Butomus
and Thalictrum simplex.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

113

Love, Dr. Askell; Institute of Botany and
Genetics, Atvinnudeild Haskolans, Reyk-
javik, Iceland — Cytotaxonomy of Ice-
landic plants; origin of the Icelandic
flora; polyploidy in northern regions;
ecological investigations on some nuna-
tak areas of the last glacial age; cyto-
genetics of Rumex s. 1.

Love, Dr. Doris; Institute of Botany and
Genetics, Atvinnudeild Haskolans, Reyk-
javik, Iceland — Cytotaxonomy of Ice-
landic plants; origin of the Icelandic
flora; polyploidy in northern regions;
cytogenetics, etc., of Silenoideae (es-
pecially the problem of sex and isolation
of Melandrium species).

Lovkvist, Kand. Borje; Kgl. Lantbrukshégsko-
lan, Uppsala, Sweden — Cytology in
relation to taxonomy and ecology of
Cardamine (especially C. pratensis), and.
the genetics of its natural polyploids.

Lund, Mag. Aage; Tuborg Laboratorium,
Hellerup-Kgbenhavn, Denmark — Micro-
biology.

Lund, Mag. Séren; Dansk Biologisk Station,
Charlottenlund Slot, Charlottenlund-Kg-
benhavn, Denmark — Marine Algae.

Lundegardh, Prof. Dr. Henrik; Kgl. Lant-
brukshégskolan, Uppsala, Sweden — Ab-
sorption and transport of ions; bleeding
of plants.

Lundell, Dr. Seth; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Uppsala, Sweden — Taxonomy
of Swedish Hymenomycetes, especially
Polyporaceae; editor (with J. A. Nann-
feldt q.v.) of ‘Fungi exsicatti suecici’.

Lunden, Dr. Askel P.; Norges Landbruk-
shggskole ,Vollebekk, Norway — Amelio-
ration of potatoes.

Lundh, Lic. Asta; Universitetets Botaniska
Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden — Fresh-
water ecology, in particular lake vegeta-
tion of the Province of Skane (Scania).

Lundqvist, Kand. Arne; Genetiska Institutio-

- hen, Lund, Sweden — Genetics of Rye.

Luther, Mag. Hans; Botanical Institute of the
University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Taxonomy and phytogeogra-
phy; ecology of water plants.

Lyche, Prof. Dr. Ralph Tambs; Universitetet
i Oslo, Oslo, Norway — Floristics; weed
flora of Norway.

Mackey, J.; Sveriges Utsadesforening, Svaldv,
Sweden — Genetics of induced mutations
in Triticum, etc.; breeding of Wheat and
Oats.

114 THE CANADIAN

Magnusson, Dr. A. H.; Géteborgs Botaniska
Tradgard, Goteborg, Sweden—Taxonomy
of Lichenes.

Malmstrom, Prof. Dr. Carl; Statens Skogsfor-
skningsinstitut, Experimentalfaltet, Stock-
holm, Sweden — Forest types; wood-ash
as a fertilizer of bogs and peat.

Marklund, Dr. G.; Botanical Institute of the
University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland—Taxonomy of Potentilla, Tara-
xacum, and especially Ranunculus.

MAartensson, Kand. Olle; Universitetets Bota-
niska Museum, Uppsala, Sweden — Dis-
tribution and ecology of Scandinavian
Bryophytes.

Mathiesen, Prof. Fr. J.; Danmarks Farma-
ceutiske Hogjskole, Universitetsparken 2,
Kgbenhaven %, Denmark — Plant anato-

my; palaeobotany.
Mattisson, Kand. Carl H.; Universitetets Bo-
taniska Museum, Lund, Sweden — Sys-

tematics of Orchidaceae, especially Cyto-
taxonomy of Swedish Orchis species of
the section Dactylorchis.

Melderis, A.; Universitetets Botaniska Mu-
seum, Uppsala, Sweden — Monographic
work on boreal species of Agropyron and
Elymus; Mongolian grasses.

Melin, Prof. Dr. Elias; Universitetets Vaxt-
fysiologiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden
— Influence of amino acids on growth
of Fungi (especially mycorrhiza Fungi);
morphogenic influence of exudates of
Fungi on roots of Pinus sylvestris (with
V. Slankis q.v.); antibiotic substances
from Hymenomycetes (with K. Oblom
q.v.).

Meurman, Prof. Olavi; Maatalouskoelaitos,
Puurtarhaosasto, Piikkio, Finland—Cyto-
genetics of Ribes, ete. :

Michanek, Goran; Genetiska Institutionen,
Lund, Sweden — Genetics of Brassica
and Sinapis.

Mikaelsen, Cand. Knut; Norges Landbruk-
shggskole, Vollebekk, Norway — Gene-
tics; Godetia; Draba.

Mikkelsen, Dr. Vald.; Danmarks Farmaceu-
tiske Hgjskole, Universitetetsparken 2,
Kgbenhavn ~@, Denmark — Ecology; pol-
len statistics.
Moen, Prof. Olav; Norges Landbruksh@ggs-
kole, Vollebekk, Norway — Landscape
gardening; dendrology, horticulture.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Mglholm Hansen — see Hansen, H. M¢@lholm.

Moller, F. H.; Vesterskovvej] 66, Nykobing
Falster, Denmark — Fungi.

Mork, Prof. Dr. Elias; Skogforsgksvesenet,
As, Norway — Forest botany; ecology.

Miller, Prof. Dr. D.; Universitetets Plante-
fysiologiske Laboratorium, Gothersgade
140, Kébenhavn K, Denmark — Plant
physiology, especially enzymes and pro-
duction of dry matter.

Munk, Anders; Silkeborg, Denmark—Fungi.

Miintzing, Prof. Dr. Arne; Genetiska Institu-
tionen, Lund, Sweden—Genetics of Rye,
Galeopsis tetrahit, Poa, Hordeum, Triti-
cale; cytotaxonomy and ecology of poly-
ploids and hybrids of Potentilla; apomixis
in Poa alpina and Potentilla.

Nannfeldt, Prof. Dr. John A.; Universitetets
Botaniska Museum, Uppsala, Sweden —
Taxonomy of Ascomycetes and apomictic
microspecies of the Ranunculus aurico-
mus group; Poa; editor (with S. Lun-
dell q.v.) of ‘Fungi exsicatti suecici’.

Naustdal, Jakob; Folkeh¢gskulen, Store-Milde
pr. Bergen, Norway — Norwegian flora.

Nielsen, Prof, Dr. E. Steeman; Danmarks
Farmaceutiske H@gjskole, Universitetspar-
ken 2, Kgbenhavn @, Denmark — Plant
physiology; biochemistry.

Nielsen, Dr. Niels; Laboratorium for Livs-
medalskemi, Kgl. Tekniska Hdgskolan,
Stockholm, Sweden — Plant physiologic-
al chemistry, in particular growth sub-
stances; vitamin-production by micro-
organisms.

Nilsson, E.; Ohlsens Enke, Malmsd, Sweden—
Genetics of Pisum, Solanum, Lycopersi-
cum, Cucumis; breeding of Lycopersi-
cum; hybridization in Raphanus.

Nilsson, Prof. Dr. Fredrik; Alnarp, Akarp,
Sweden — Genetics of induced polyploids
in Sinapis, Brassica, Raphanus, Pyrus,
Fragaria, Ribes, Lactuca, Spinacia, Cu-
curbita; hybridization in Ribes.

Nilsson, Prof. Emer. Dr. N. Heribert; Uni-
versitetets Botaniska Museum, Lund,
Sweden — Experimental genetics and
taxonomy of Salix hybrids, etc., and
palaeontology of the genus; preparing
book on species problems and theory of
evolution,

May-June, 1950] THE CANADIAN

+ Nilsson-Ehle, Prof. Emer. Dr. H.; Torna-
platsen 5, Lund, Sweden — Genetics of
induced polyploids in Populus and Pyrus.

Nilsson-Leissner, Prof. Dr. Gunnar; Statens
Centrala Frokontrollanstalt, Stockholm
19, Sweden — Seed control.

Nissen, Cand. @ivind; Norges Landbruk-
shégskole, Vollebekk, Norway — Amelio-
ration of grasses; analysis of grassland.

Nordal, Prof. Dr. Arnold; Farmas@ytisk Insti-
tutt, Blindern, Oslo, Norway — Pharma-
ecognosy; morphology and anatomy of
Sedum species; investigation of popular
Norwegian herbs; plant-folklore of Nor-
way.

Nordenskiold, Dr. Hedda; Kgl. Lantbruks-
hégskolan, Uppsala, Sweden — Cytology
and taxonomy of Phleum, Brassica, Sina-
pis, Raphanus, Luzula.

Nordhagen, Prof. Dr. Rolf; Universitetets
Botaniske Hage og Museum, Toyen, Oslo,
Norway — Phytogeography; Norwegian
flora and vernacular plant names; qua-
ternary history of the European flora;
dispersal of plants.

Nordli, Cand. Erling; Universitetets Botanis-
ke Laboratorium, Blindern, Oslo, Norway
— Plankton; marine botany.

Norkrans, Fru Lic. Birgitta; Universitetets
Vaxtfysiologiska Institution, Uppsala,
Sweden — Physiology of Tricholoma,
especially comparative studies of purely
saprophytic and mycorrhiza - forming
species,

Norlindh, Dr. Tycho; Universitetets Botanis-
ka Museum, Lund, Sweden — Taxonomy
of Calendula; phytogeography of South
African and Mongolian vascular plants.

Nybom, Nils; Genetiska Institutionen, Lund,
Sweden—Genetics of induced mutations,
especially in Hordeum; cytogenetics of
Allium.

Nygaard, Mrg. G., Ordrup Gymnasium, Char-
lottenlund, Denmark—Limnology; fresh-

3 water plankton.

Nygren, Dr. Axel; Kgl. Lantbrukshogskolan,
Uppsala, Sweden — Cytotaxonomy and
ecology of Calamagrostis, Melandrium,
and other critical (especially apomictic)
-boreal siphonogamous genera.

Nyholm, Fru Elsa; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Lund, Sweden — Bryophyta,

_ + News of death received since this compilation was
last revised {N.P.). >

FIELD-NATURALIST

ERS
“a
especially Hepaticae; systematics of the
genus Carex.

Oblom, Mag. Karin; Universitetets WVaxtfy-
siologiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden—
Antibiotic substances from Hymenomy-
cetes (with E. Melin q.v.).

@degard, Cand. Knut; Universitetets Botanis-
ke Laboratorium, Blindern, Oslo, Norway
— Plant physiology.

Olsen, Dr. Carsten; Carlsberg Laboratorium,
Valby-Kgbenhavn, Denmark — Plant phy-
siology, especially mineral nutrition.

Olsen, Sigurd; Parnasvej 5, Kgbenhavn, Den-

mark — Limnology; Charales.
Olsson, Mag. Gosta; Sveriges Utsadesforening,
Svalév, Sweden — Genetics of induced

polyploids, etc., in Brassica, Sinapis, Ra-
phanus and crosses between various
Cruciferae.

Omang, Cand. S. O. F.; Lersolvegene 18, Sogn
Hageby, Oslo, Norway (c/o Universite-
tets Botaniske Museum, Toyen, Oslo, Nor-
way) — Hieracium.

Omvik, Cand. Aasa; Botanisk Laboratorium,
Universitetet i Bergen, Bergen, Norway
— Microbiology.

Oskarsson, Ingimar; Institute of Fishing Re-
search, Atvinnudeild Haskolans, Reykja-
vik, Iceland — Floristics of the neigh-
bourhood of Reykjavik; compiling list of
plants cultivated in Reykjavik (with
Ingolfur Davidsson q.v.).

Ostergren, Lic. Gunnar; Genestika Institutio-
nen, Lund, Sweden — Polyploid induction
by N:O; genetics of Anthoxanthum,; ef-
fect of chemicals on Alliwm cepa.

Osterlind, Dr. Sven; Universitetets VAxtfy-
siologiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden—
Experimental researches on carbon sour-
ces of planktonic Chlorophyta.

Osvald, Prof. Dr. Hugo; Kgl. Lantbrukshdgs-
kolan, Uppsala, Sweden—Plant breeding;
weed-destroying substances.

Palmgren, Prof. Dr. Alvar; Botanical Ins-
titute of the University, Unioninkatu 44,
Helsinki, Finland — Taxonomy, especial-
ly of Carex and Hieracium.

Palmgren, Lic. Oscar; Glemenstorget 6,
Lund, or c/o Universitetets Botaniska
Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden — Cytology
of Potamogeton.

Pehrson, Lic. Stig; Svenska Traforskningsins- |
titutet, Drottning Kristinas vag 61, Stock-

116

holm, Sweden — Antibiotic effects of
Bacteria on Blue-stain Fungi.

Persson, Ake; Universitetets Botaniska Mu-
seum, Lund, Sweden — Plant sociology
of mountain marshes.

Persson, Arne; Universitetets Botaniska La-
boratorium, Lund, Sweden — Nutrition
and germination of Pine seedlings.

Persson, Dr. Herman; Naturhistoriska Riks-
museet, Stockholm 50, Sweden — Bryo-
phyta of Scandinavia, Alaska, etc.; South
American Hepaticae.

Perttula, Dr. Uuno; c/o Botanical Institute
of the University, Nnioninkatu 44, Hel-
sinki, Finland — Phytogeography.

Pesola,, Prof. Dr. Vilho; Maatalouskoelaitos,
Jokioinen, Finland — Plant breeding;
phytogeography.

Peters, Mag. Bengt; Universitetets Botaniska
Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden—Physiology
of marine Algae.

Petersen, Prof. E. J.; Kgl. Veterinaer- og
Landbohgjskole, Rolighedsvej 23, Koben-
havn V, Denmark — Microbiology.

Petersen, Dr. J. Boye; Universitetets Bota-
niske Museum, Gothersgade 130, Kgben-
havn K, Denmark — Aerial Algae; micro-
biology.

Pettersson, Lic. Bengt; Visby, Sweden—Flora
and vegetation of the Province of Got-
land, especially as influenced by cultiva-
tion; Orchidaceae of Gotland.

Pettersson, Dr. Bror; Botanical Institute of
the University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsin-
ki, Finland — Dispersal of seeds and
spores; influence of human culture on
plant life; Flora of Canary Islands.

Pohjakallio, Prof. Dr. Onni; Plant Patho-
logical Institute of the University, Malmi,
Finland — Plant diseases; photoperiodi-
city.

Porsild, Mag. Morten P.; Brg@ndbyvester pr
Glostrup, or c/o Universitetets Botanis-
ke Museum, Gothersgade 130, Kgbenhavn
K, Denmark — Arctic vascular plants,
especially flora of Greenland.

Printz, Prof. Dr. Henrik; Institutt for Tang-

forskning, Blindern, Oslo, Norway —
Algae; phenology.

Quennerstedt, Lic. Nils; Universitetets
Vaxtbiologiska Institution, Uppsala,
Sweden — Taxonomy, distribution, and
ecology of Swedish freshwater Diato-
meae.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Rantzien, Lic. Henning Horn af; Naturhisto-
riska Riksmuseet, Stockholm 50, Sweden
— Monographic work on Potamogeton
in South America; Characeae.

Rasmussen, R.; Thorshavn, The Faeroes —
Preparing new edition of his ‘Féroya

Flora’.
Rasmusson, Prof. Dr. Johan; Hilleshdg,
Landskrona, Sweden — Genetics and

breeding of Sugar-beets.

Reiersen, Cand. Johannes; Byasvegen 54h,
Trondheim, Norway — Norwegian flora.

Reisaeter, Cand. Oddvin; Norges Land-
brukshggskole, Vollebekk, Norway —
Dendrology; horticulture.

Rennerfelt, Dr. Erik; Statens Skogsforsknings-

institut, Experimentalfaltet, Stockholm,
Sweden — Wood preservation; forest
pathology; Root-rot (Polyporus annosus);

Peridermium.
Rietz, Prof. Dr. G. Einar Du; Universitetets
- Vaxtbiologiska Institution, Uppsala, Swe-
den — Plant communities of Scandina-
vian bogs; vegetation of high mountains;
Euphrasia (especially tropical species).

Robak, Dr. Hakon; Vestlandets Forstlige
Fors¢ksstasjon, Bergen, Norway—Fungi
on wood pulp; forest trees.

Rodhe, Dr. Wilhelm; Universitetets Limno-
logiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden —
Chemistry of Swedish fresh waters and
ecology of phytoplankton.

Rged, Cand. Hakon; Statens Plantevern, Uni-
versitetets Botaniske Museum, Toyen,
Oslo, Norway — Mycology; plant patho-
logy.

Roivainen, Mag. Heikki; Botanical Institute
of the University, Unioninkatu 44, Hel-
sinki, Finland — Bryophyta of Finland
and Patagonia.

Roll-Hansen, Mag. Finn; Norges Landbruk-
shggskole, Vollebekk, Norway — Forest
botany; mycology.

Roll-Hansen, Cand. Helga; Norges Landbruk-
shggskole, Vollebekk, Norway — Bacte-
riology; plant pathology.

Romell, Prof. Dr. lLars-Gunnar; Statens
Skogsforskningsinstitut, Experimentalfal-
tet, Stockholm, Sweden — Forest soils
and nutrition problems (especially the
réle of minor elements); decomposition
of litter by Fungi.

Rosen, Dr. Godsta von; Hilleshog, Landskrona,
Sweden — Genetics of induced mutations
and polyploids in Pisum and Beta; rela-

ae

May-June, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 117

tionship of species in Pisum, and cyto-
logy of species-crosses.

Ruden, Cand. Tollef; Skogforsdksvesenet,
Vollebekk, Norway — Amelioration of
Norwegian forest-trees.

Rufelt, Kand. Brita; Sveriges UtsAdesfore-
ning, Svalév, Sweden — Genetics of in-
duced polyploids, etc., in Brassica, Sina-
pis, Raphanus.

Rufelt, Mag. Henry; Universitetets Botaniska
Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden — Nitrogen
metobolism in nitrophilous plants.

Rune, Lic. Olof; Universitetets Vaxtbiologis-
ka Institution, Uppsala, Sweden — Pha-
herogamic flora of the mountains of
southern Lapland, especially on serpen-
tine rocks.

Runemark, Hans; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Lund, Sweden — Lichen taxo-
nomy and phytogeography; marine Algae;
thermophilic plants of Scandinavian
mountains.

Sandberg, Lic. Gustaf; Kyrkogardsgatan 11,

Uppsala, Sweden — Solifluction in Swe-
dish Lapland; grass vegetation of air-
fields.

Santesson, Lic. Rolf; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Uppsala, Sweden — Preparing

world monograph of epiphyllous Li-

chenes; taxonomy of Swedish and South
American Lichenes; ‘lichen parasites’.

Segerstad, Dr. Fredrik Hard av;
Botaniska Tradgard, Gdteborg, Sweden—
Flora of the Province of Varmland.

Selander, Lic. Sten; Universitetets VAxtbio-
logiska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden —
Vascular plant flora of Lule Lappmark,
Sweden.

Selling, Dr. Olof H.; Naturhistoriska Riksmu-
seet, Stockholm 50, Sweden — Tertiary
flora of the southern hemisphere.

Siggeirsson, Mag. Einar; Museum of Natural
History, Reykjavik, Iceland — Floristics
of Icelandic plants; agronomy.

J Sjors, Dr. Hugo; Universitetets Vaxtbiologiska
‘Institution, Uppsala, Sweden — Bog
vegetation of northern Sweden; _ taxo-

-- nomy and ecology of Sphagnum.

Skard, Prof. Olav; Norges Landbrukshggs-

kole, Vollebekk, Norway — Pomology.

= a a

_Skuja, Prof. Dr.

Goteborgs :

Skottsberg, Prof. Emer. Dr. Carl; Gdteborgs
Botaniska Tradgard, Gédteborg, or Natur-
historiska Riksmuseet, Stockholm 50,
Sweden — Pacific flora, especially of
Hawaii, New Zealand, and South Ameri-
ca; Swedish Myxomycetes.

Skovsted, Dr. A.; Carlsberg Laboratorium,
Valby-Kdbenhavn, Denmark — Genetics;
mycology.

Heinrichs; Universitetets
Botaniska Museum; Uppsala, Sweden —
Taxonomy of Swedish freshwater phyto-
plankton; freshwater Rhodophyceae; sul-
-phur organisms.

Slankis, Dr. V.; Universitetets Vaxtfysiologis-
ka Institution, Uppsala, Sweden — Mor-
phogenic influence of exudates of Fungi
on roots of Pinus sylvestris (with E.
Melin q.v.).

Slogedal, Cand. Haakon; Det Kgl. Selskap
for Norges Vel, Oslo, Norway — Moun-
tain grasslands; pastures.

Smith, Cand. Folmer D.; Norges Landbruk-
shggskole, Vollebekk, Norway — Photo-
climate of Norway and Svalbard in rela-
tion to plant-gfowth.

Smith, Dr. Harry; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Uppsala, Sweden — Taxonomy
of critical Scandinavian mountain pha-
nerogams; Chinese Gentianaceae.

Sgérensen, Prof. Dr. Nils Andreas; Norges
Tekniske Hogskole, Trondheim, Norway
— Chemistry of plants; alpine flora of
Norway.

Sgrensen, Dr. Thorvald; Kgl. Veterinaer— og
Landbohgjskole, Rolighedsvej 23, Kgben-
havn V, Denmark — Plant sociology; sys-
tematics: arctic plants (especially Green-
land phanerogams),

Soyrinki, Dr. Niilo; Forest Institute of the
University, Kirkkokatu 4, Helsinki, Fin-
land — Floristics and ecology of alpine
plants in Lapland and central Europe.

Stalfelt, Prof. Dr. M. G.; Botaniska Institutet,

Stockholms Hégskola, Stockholm, Sweden
— Water balance; plasma ye of
plants; photosynthesis.

_ Steeman Nielsen — see Nielsen, E. Ghia

Steindorsson, Steindor; Menntaskolinn, Aku-
reyri, Iceland — Floristics and phyto-
geography of the central highland of Ice-
land.

Stenar, Dr. Helge; Erik Dahlbergsgatan 14,
Sddertalje, Sweden — Plant embryology.

118 THE CANADIAN

Stenlid, Lic. Géran; Kgl. Lantbrukshogskolan,
Uppsala, Sweden — Physiology of respira-
tion.

Sterner, Dr, Rikard; Gdteborgs Botaniska
Tradgard, Goteborg, Sweden — Flora of
the Province of Oland; continental elem-
ents in the flora of southern Sweden.

Stordal, Cand. Jens; Voss, Norway — Myco-
logy; Hymenomycetes of Norway.
Stdérmer, Kons. Per; Universitetets Botaniske
Museum, Toyen, Oslo, Norway — Norwe-

gian flora; Bryophyta; ecology.

Stoy, Volkmar; Universitetets Botaniska La-
boratorium, Lund, Sweden — Light and
nitrogen metabolism.

Strom, Prof. Dr. Kaare; Universitetets Lim-
nologiske Institutt, Blindern, Oslo, Nor-
way — Limnology; freshwater Algae.

Sundene, Cand. Ove; Universitetets Botanis-
ke Museum, Tdyen, Oslo, Norway — Al-
gology of the Oslofjord region.

Suneson, Dr. Svante; Slattgardsgatan 6, Gote-
borg, Sweden — Calcareous Algae.

Suomalainen — see Therman-Suomalainen,
Eeva

Svedelius, Prof. Emer. Dr. Nils E.; Univer-
sitetets Vaxtfysiologiska Institution, Upp-
sala, Sweden — Monograph of the genus
Galaxaura.

Svensson, V.;
Sweden — Genetics of Tomatoes,
cumbers, and Melons.

Sylvén, Prof. Dr. Nils; Institutet for Skog-
stradsforadling, Kallstorp, Sweden —
Genetics of induced polyploids in Popu-
lus; plant breeding of Coniferae.

Cu-

Tackholm, Fru Vivi; Svarvaregatan 13, Stock-
holm, Sweden — Flora of Egypt.

Tambs Lyche — see Lyche, Ralph Tambs

Tamm, Mag. Carl Olof; Statens Skogsforsk-
ningsinstitut, Experimentalfaltet, Stock-
holm, Sweden — Regeneration, etc., in
plant communities; nutrient content of
forest plants.

Tedin, Dr. Olof; Sveriges Utsadesforening,
Svalév, Sweden — Genetics of Solanum
tuberosum.

Teiling, Dr. Einar; Klostergatan 10, Linko-
ping, Sweden — Swedish freshwater
plankton.

FIELD-NATURALIST

Weibullsholm, Landskrona, »

[Vol. 64

Tengner, Mag. Jan; Skogshogskolan, Experi-
mentalfaltet, Stockholm, Sweden — Bac-
teria of forest soils; chlorate poisoning
of forest vegetation. -

Therman-Suomalainen, Dr. Eeva; Botanical
Institute of the University, Unioninkatu

44, Helsinki, or State Horticultural Insti-
tute, Piikkidé, Finland — Cytogenetics
and biochemistry of Polygonatum, etc.

Thorlaksson, Cand. Gundmundur, Eikjuvogur
138, Reykjavik, Iceland — Icelandic and
arctic floristics.

Thorsrud, Prof. Arne; Norges Landbruksh¢g-
skole, Vollebekk, Norway — Horticultu-
ral investigations.

Thunmark, Prof. Dr. Sven; Universitetets
Limnologiska Institution, Lund, Sweden
—Limnology, in particular of Swedish
lakes. e

Traaen, Prof. A. E.; Norges Landbruksh¢g-
skole, Vollebekk, Norway — Microbiolo-
gical investigations.

Tuomikoski, Dr. Risto; Botanical Institute of
the University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Taxonomy and ecology of
Bryophyta, especially of eastern subarc-
tic Canada; Fungi.

Turesson, Prof. Dr. Gote; Kgl. Lantbrukshég-
skolan, Uppsala, Sweden — Ecotypes of
boreal vascular plants; colchicine-induced
polyploidy, especially in economic plants
such as Trifolium, Brassica, Sinapis, Ra-
phanus, and crosses between various
Cruciferae; microspecies of Alchemilla
vulgaris s. 1.

Ulvinen, Dr. A.; c/o Botanical Institute of
the Universty, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,.
Finland — Phytogeography.

Vaarama, Dr. Antero; Maatalouskoelaitos,.
Piikkid, Finland — Genetical and cyto-
logical investigations, especially of Ribes
nigrum; phytogeography.

Vartiovaara, Dr. V.; Botanical Institute of the
University, Unioninkatu 44, Helsinki,
Finland — Plant physiology: various
studies including the permeability of cells:
to heavy water and methyl alcohol, and
the exchange of potassium and sodium
between single cells of Algae.

Ve, Dr. Sgren; Pihls Skole, Bergen, Norway
— Natural woodlands and forest-limits of
western Norway; ethnobotany of trees.

ee

aA = . 2 x
ee ey ee ee ee eee ee eee

ee

May-June, 1950] THE CANADIAN

Vegis, Dr. A.; Universitetets Vaxtfysiologiska
Institution, Uppsala, Sweden — Physio-
logy of winter dormancy in Stratiotes.

Vik, Prof. Knut; Norges Landbruksh¢gskole,
Vollebekk, Norway—Agricultural plants.

Virgin, Lic. Henning; Botaniska Institutet,
Stockholms Hogskola, Stockholm, Sweden
—Influence of light on plasma viscosity
of plants.

von Euler — see Cleve-Euler, Astrid

von Krusenstjerna — see Krusenstjerna, Ed-
vard von

von Rosen — see Rosen, Gosta von.

Waern, Lic. Mats; Universitetets Vaxtbiolo-
giska Institution, Uppsala, Sweden —
Taxonomy, distribution and ecology of
Algae on the Baltic coast of Sweden.

Waldheim, Dr. Stig; Universitetets Botaniska
Museum, Lund, Sweden — Plant sociology
and pedology, in particular bog vegeta-
tion and moss communities of southern
Sweden; European phytogeography;
Musci.

Wanscher, Mag. J. H.; Kgl. Veterinaer- og
Landbohgjskole, Rolighedsvej 23, Kgben-
havn V, Denmark—Genetics of cultivated
plants.

Waris, Prof. Dr. H.; Botanical Institute of
_ the University, Turku (Abo), Finland —
Plant physiology: various studies in-
cluding calcium requirements of certain
Algae.

FIELD-NATURALIST

11O%

Weibull, Kand. Gunnar; Weibullsholm, Land-

_ skrona, Sweden — Genetics of induced
polyploids, etc. in Dactylis; cytotaxo-
nomy. |

Weimarck, Prof. Dr. Henning; Universitetets
Botaniska Museum, Lund, Sweden
Taxonomy and distribution of South
African vascular plants; phytogeography
of southern Scandinavia, in particular
the flora of the Province of Skane
(Scania),

Westergaard, Prof. Dr. M.; Universitetets
Genetiske Laboratorium, Universitetets-
parken, Kgébenhavn @, Denmark — Gene-
tics; cytology.

Wexelsen, Prof. Dr. H.; Norges Landbruk-

shggskole, Vollebekk, Norway — Genetics
and breeding especially of Clovers.

Wiedling, Sten; Apotekarnas Kemiska Fa-
briker, Sddertalje, Sweden — Plant phy-
Siology, especially nutrition of Algae.

Wiinstedt, Kons. K.; Universitetets Botanis-
ke Museum, Gothresgade 130, Kgbenhavn

K, Denmark — Floristics especially of
Denmark.
Wilske, Camilla; Universitetets Botaniska

Laboratorium, Lund, Sweden—Herbicide
homologues and growth.

Winge, Prof. Dr. @jvind; Carlsberg Labora-
torium, Valby-Kgbenhavn, Denmark —
Genetics; cytology; Fungi.

A, 9, 0, B (Th), etc., are placed in their
English alphabetical positions.

120 THE CANADIAN

MEMBERS OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB
AND SUBSCRIBERS TO
THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

New members and changes in address since
May, 1949

LIFE MEMBERS
Cody, W. J., Division of Botany, Science Ser-
vice Bldg., Ottawa, Ont.

Senn, H. A., Division of Botany, Science Ser-
vice Bldg., Ottawa, Ont.

MEMBERS AND SUBSCRIBERS
ely, Yo

Agricultural Experiment Station Library, c-o
J. H. Moriarity, A.E.S. Bldg., West Lafayet-
te, Indiana, U.S.A.

Alaska, University of, Library, College, Alas-
ka, U.S.A.

Arnold, John Walter, Room 375, Science Ser-
vice Bldg., Ottawa, Ont.

Arkansas, University of, General Library,
Fayetteville, Arkansas, U.S.A.

Audubon Society of Canada, 177 Jarvis St.,
Toronto 2, Ontario.

pie
Ball, Mrs. Geers, 240 Central Ave., London,
Ont.

Bauche, Mrs. A. W., 44 Spadina Ave., Ottawa,
Ont.

Berry, W. S. C., 44 Iona St., Ottawa, Ont.
Bird, John, 30 Cooper St., Ottawa, Ont.

Boston Society of Natural History, SSCS
Park, Boston 14, Mass., U.S.A.

Bowerman, Dr. Mary L., Herbarium, Univer-
sity of California, Berkeley 4, Cal., U.S.A.

Bowles, Kenneth W., 75 Kenilworth Ave.,
Ottawa, Ont.

Brown, Howard M., 23 Crescent Heights, Ot-
tawa, Ont.

Brown, J. L., 103 Fourth Ave.,
Re Ge

Chapman, J. W., Div. of Botany, Science Ser-
vice Bldg., Ottawa, Ont.

Clifford, B., General Delivery, Terminal A,
Toronto, Ont.

Colls, David Geoffrey, 900 Dominion Public
Building, Winnipeg, Man.

Cottle, Walter H., Dept. of Zoology, Univer-
sity of British Columbia, Vancouver, B.C.

Ottawa, Ont.

FIELD-NATURALIST

<

[Vol. 64

Cross, Miss Edith, 36 Grove, Ottawa, Ont.

Cuerrier, Jean-Paul, Wildlife Service, Norlite
Bldg., Ottawa, Ont.

ois je

Doull, Mrs. Ann, 515 Evered Ave.,
Ont.

Ottawa,

in qe
Ellens, J. C., 521 Alexander Rd., R.R. 1, Mil-
ner, B.C.

Enstone, J. P., 21 Second Ave., Ottawa, Ont.
ey py 7

Finlayson, G. D., 200 Carling Ave.,
Ont.

Francis, C. Stuart, Sprucedale Farm, Torch
River, Sask.

Ottawa,

Ma! pA
Galt Collegiate and Vocational School, c-o O.
G. Clarke, Science Department, Galt, Ont.
Garson, Stuart, 350 Justice Bldg., Ottawa, Ont.
Gollop, Bernard, c-o Miss M. Funesco, 3558
Grey Ave., Montreal, Que.
Grant, J., Dominion Forestry Insect Lab.,
Customs Bldg., Calgary, Alta.
Guiou, Dr. Norte 380 Driveway, Ottawa,
Ont.
Guiou, Atherton, 380 Driveway, Ottawa, Ont.
dies $ pet
Haight, Deborah E., 401 Hamilton Ave., Ot-
tawa, Ont.
Hamilton, R. A., 577 Tweedsmuir Ave., Ot-
tawa, Ont.
Henderson, Miss Georgia, Wallingford Hall,
McMaster University, Hamilton, Ont.
Howe, J. S., 68 Orange St., Leamington, Ont.

ee ee
Idaho University, Library, Moscow, Idaho,
U.S.A.
aby eal
Johanson, E. B., Norway House, Man.
pe ds

Kidd, H. E., 2 Clemow Ave., Ottawa, Ont.
Kidd, Mrs. H. E., 2 Clemow Ave., Ottawa, Ont.
Kowal, J., Buford, Alta.

a ee ee

May-June, 1950] THE CANADIAN

—L—
Lanning, Robert G., 257 Coleman St., Belle-
ville, Ont.
Lewis, Miss Edith, 31 Renfrew Ave., Ottawa,
Ont.
Lilly, J. E., 194 Bayswater Ave., Ottawa, Ont.

Lochhead, Douglas G., 35 Woodlawn, Ave.,
Ottawa, Ont.

Loring, Mrs. D. F., P.O. Box 954, Ottawa, Ont.
fs 1 LE
MacLachlan, Dr. Lorne E., 55 Sunset Blvd.,
Ottawa, Ont.
Maleolm, W. C., Huxley, Alta.

Mann, David, Jasper National Park Fish
Hatchery, Jasper, Alta.

McGuffin, W. C., Fourth Floor, Customs Bldg.,
Calgary, Alta.

Meyerriecks, Andrew J., Box 4251, University
of Tennessee Post Office, Knoxville, Tenn.,
U.S.A.

Miller, W. S., 137 Cambridge Street, Galt, Ont.

Mills, R. Collin, 87 Arnold Ave., Hamilton,
Ont.
Morland, Cmdr. T., University Club, Elgin St.,
Ottawa, Ont.
ANT
Newfoundland Biological Station, St. John’s,
Nfld.

New York Academy of Medicine, 2 East 103rd
St., New York 29, N.Y., U.S.A.

Nicol, J.A. Colin, Treveau, George Lane, Plyn-
ston, St. Maurice, South Devon, England.

Nieghom, Cecil L. A., 61 Ruskin, Ottawa, Ont.
Qs
Organ, R. J., P.O. Box 2162, St. John’s, Nfld.
Oshawa Collegiate Vocational Institute, Lib-
rary, Oshawa, Ont.
pe ee
Reeve, Harold, R.R. 3, Port Hope, Ont.

Reynolds, Keith, 152 Victoria St., London,
Ont.

Ritchie, R. C., 11 Woburn Ave., Toronto 12,
Ont.

Robertson, Lloyd, Box 65, Marquette, Man.

FIELD-NATURALIST

121

Rousseau, Jacques, Montreal Botanical Garden,
4101 Sherbrooke St. E., Montreal, Que.

Rutter, R. J., Huntsville, Ont.
ail Sa
Scott, Dr. D. M., Dept. of Zoology, McGill

University, Montreal 2, Que.

Shannon, Miss Myrtle, 475 MacLaren St., Ot-
tawa, Ont.

Shaub, B. M., 159 Elm St., Northampton, Mass.,
U.S.A.

Smith, J. E., 407 Hinton, Ottawa, Ont.

Starker, Leopold A., Museum of Vertebrate
Zoology, University of California, Berkeley
4, Cal., U.S.A.

Steele, W. W., 151 Glasgow St., Guelph, Ont.

Stevens, Ward E., Canadian Wildlife Service,
Aklavik, N.W.T.

Stiver, Miss Pearl, 300 Cooper St., Ottawa,
Ont.

pan, (Pe
Tener, John S., Dominion Wildlife Service,
Norlite Bldg., Ottawa, Ont.
Tinney, H. G., 41 Perth St., Ottawa, Ont.
Tuck, Leslie M., Dominion Wildlife Officer,
P. O. Box 870, General Post Office, St.
John’s, Nfld.
see pastes

Van Horne, H. B., 4685 West 10 Ave., Van-
couver, B.C.

Ne 1 a

Wallace, Dudley F., 700 Main St., St. Joseph,
Mich., U.S.A.

Wallace, H. A. H., Dominion Laboratory of
Plant Pathology, University of Manitoba,
Fort Garry, Man.

Waterton Lakes Park, Superintendent, Water-
ton Park, Alta.

Webster, H. R., Truro, N.S.

Weinberger, Mrs. Pearl, Apt. 16, 210 Chapel
St., Ottawa, Ont.

Whitton, Mrs. D. A., 133 First Ave., Ottawa,
Ont.

Williams, Miss T. D., 475 MacLaren St., Ottawa,
Ont.

122 THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

EUROPEAN HARE INTRODUCED INTO
THE DISTRICT OF THUNDER BAY, ONTARIO*

A. E. ALLIN
Fort William, Ontario.

AG IaUGH the Varying Hare (Lepus
americanus) is abundant at the Canadian
Lakehead, it is not considered a game
species by local sportsmen. In the hope that
conditions would prove satisfactory and that
a hew game species would be made available
for fall and winter hunting it was decided
that an attempt should be made to introduce
the European Hare (Lepus europaeus) from
Southern Ontario where it is commonly but
erroneously known as the “jackrabbit”.

A sum of fifty dollars was collected in
1941 by Colonel L. S. Dear of Port Arthur
from sportsmen of Port Arthur and Fort
William. A source of supply was located
near Meaford but it was found that hares
could be readily trapped only in winter
and it was not until March, 1942 that the
first ten pairs were procured. These animals
were released eight miles west of the Lake-
head cities in McIntyre Township in an area
which was cleared and under cultivation and
which was believed suitable for the needs
of the animals. Eight more were obtained
on February 2, 1943. Four were released
in the above area but the remainder were
held in pens for acclimatization. Some died
in captivity but the others were subsequently
released in the same general area.

In the spring of 1945, when the writer of
this note was President, the Thunder Bay
District Fish and Game Association decided
more hares should be introduced and 72
were secured from near Meaford. Since the
snow was still deep, these animals were held
in a large outdoor pen with the intention
that they should be released at the advent
of more clement weather. This move was
disastrous: the terrified animals crowded
into a heap in the corner of the enclosure
and many either suffocated or died from
fright. On March 3, we released 28 animals
in Neebing Township, five miles south of
the McIntyre site and across the Kaministi-
quia River. Eight more were released there
on March 12. At least five of these 36 hares
were found dead within the following few

1 Received for publication February 23, 1950.

days. Possibly others suffered the same
fate but from the observations which follow
it will be seen that some of the animals
survived.

Following the introductions of 1942-3,
there were occasional reports of the hares
being seen near the area of release. Young
were observed in the spring of 1943 and on
September 9, of that year I saw a European
Hare at Murillo, (four miles distant), which
I estimated would weight five or six pounds.
On October 8, 1949, an animal of this size
was shot in fields adjacent to Fort William
and not far from the site of the releases in
1942 and 1943. Meanwhile, there were
reports of their occurrence in Neebing
Township. Several were noted in 1947 and
at least two were killed by speeding auto-
mobiles in the spring of 1948. One of these
hares weighed ten pounds when it was
dressed. A hare was reported in the area
in the fall of 1948 and another in 1949. In
October, 1949, a hare was seen eight miles
from the nearest point of release.

Dymond (1922) recorded the introduction
of the European Hare (Lepus europaeus)
into Ontario — seven females and two males
which had been procured from Germany
and placed on an island in the Grand River
near Brantford whence they escaped across
the ice to the mainland during the winter
of 1912-13. By 1928, they had _ reached
Penetanguishene (Saunders, 1932). By 1932,
they had spread eastward at least to Dar-
lington Township, Durham County (Allin,
1941). Downing (1948) reported them pre-
sent in 1948 at Burk’s Falls, Parry Sound
District. Burt (1946) stated they were “rare
as yet” in the Upper and Lower Peninsula
of Michigan where they had spread from
Ontario.

Dymond based his identification of the
hares introduced into Southern Ontario on
two specimens from Brantford received at
the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology. Miller

(1923) referred the Ontario animals to the ~

race L. e. europaeus Pallas. Anderson (1946)
also referred specimens

in the National —
Museum of Canada Collection to this race. —

a ae

:
a
a
:

eae ooeaal

country and a limiting factor in

May-June, 1950] THE CANADIAN
Other recent authors have followed the same
custom. It does not appear that systematic
studies have been carried out on specimens
from this continent, and it is possible that
the basis for referring the Ontario animals
to this race is the assumption that the
original Ontario animals originated in the
range of L. e. europaeus in Europe.

It would now appear that the European
Hare has been successfully introduced into
the Lakehead area of the Thunder Bay Dis-
trict of Ontario. Whether they will mul-
tiply and achieve the purpose for which
they were introduced remains to be seen. In
Southern Ontario their winter food includes
large amounts of winter wheat and rye but
they have advanced beyond the area where
these crops are commonly raised, and are
now occupying the southern limits of the
Canadian zone of the Boreal region. The
local area also lies in the latter zone, and
there is no logical reason why conditions
here should not prove to be equally satis-
factory. This hare is an animal of open
its local
spread may be the relatively small areas
which have been cleared of the original
forest. Most of the cleared land lies in the
Great Lakes - St. Lawrence Forest Region
(Halliday, 1937) a narrow belt of which
extends along the American border from

‘Lake Superior into Eastern Manitoba, in-
cluding the lower valleys of the Kaministi-

quia, Pine and Pigeon Rivers and it is here

‘that conditions should prove most favour-

able, and it was for that reason that the in-
troductions were originally made in McIn-
tyre and Neebing Townships. To the west
and south, into Minnnesota, their spread
will be handicapped by unbroken forest.
North and east of Port Arthur lies in Hal-
liday’s Lake Superior Section of the Boreal
Region. Its extensive forests of spruce and
kalsam, poplar and white birch will pro-
bably prove unsuitable but it is possible
that stragglers may find their way into the
small islands of farm land and occupy them
in future years.

The introduction of a foreign species
into a new land is always fraught with dan-

ger. Dymond (loc. cit.) and Anderson (1923)
reported damage to crops by these animals

shortly after their escape in southwestern

Ontario. Subsequently, however, there have
keen few complaints of extensive destruction

FIELD-NATURALIST

123:

caused by the hares. They have provided
excellent hunting and the revenue accruing
directly and indirectly from that sport as.
well as the pleasure derived by the shooting
parties probably compensates for any des-
tructive tendencies they may have.

In view of the type of farming carried
out in Thunder Bay District, I would an-
ticipate even less danger of the hares prov-
ing to be destructive to local farmers al-
though there might be instances of losses
by individual market gardeners. There has
been no evidence produced that the Ontario
animals harbour diseases which would be
spread to our native species.

SUMMARY

European Hares from the Meaford area
of Ontario were introduced into the Lake-
head area of Thunder Bay District, Ontario,
in 1942, 1943 and 1945.

Some of these animals survived and ap-
parently multiplied as they have been noted
over a considerable area and several have
been killed.

Should they continue to multiply they will
provide a new sport for local hunters — the
purpose for which they were introduced.

At present, there would appear to be
slight danger attached to the introduction of
this foreign species.

REFERENCES

ALLIN, A. E., 1940. The Vertebrate Fauna
of Darlington Township, Durham Coun-
ty, Ontario. Trans. Roy. Can. Inst. Vol.
XXIII, pt. 1, pp. 83 - 118.

ANDERSON, R. M. 1923. Further Notes on
the European Hare in Ontario. Can.
Field-Nat., Vol. 37, pp. 75 - 76.

ANDERSON, R. M., 1946. Catalogue of Can-
adian Recent Animals. Nat. Museum
Canada. Bull. No. 102, Biol. Ser. 31:
1 - 238.

BURT, W. H., 1946. Mammals of Michigan.
Univ. Mich. Press, Ann Arbor.

DOWNING, S. C., 1948. A Provisional Check-
list of the Mammals of Ontario. Roy.
Ont. Mus, Zool., Misc. Publ. 2: 1 - 11.

DYMOND, J. R. 1922. The European Hare
in Ontario. Can. Field-Nat., Vol. 36,
pp. 142-3.

HALLIDAY, W. E. D., 1937. A Forest Clas-
Sification for Canada. Canada Dept.
Mines and Resources, Forest Service
Bull. 89: 1-50.

124 THE CANADIAN

MILLER, G. S. Jr., 1924. List of North
‘ American Recent Mammals, 1923, U.S.
Nat. Mus. Bull. 128: 1-673.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

SAUNDERS, W. E. 1932. Notes. on the Mam-
mals of Ontario. Trans. Roy. Can. Inst.
Vol. XVIII, pt. 2, pp. 271 - 309.

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

Marine sunfish, Mola mola (Linnaeus) from the lower St. Lawrence.

Photo: Wallace Pollock.

Mola mola (Linnaeus) from the lower St.
Lawrence. On October 13, 1949, a speci-
men of the marine sunfish, Mola mola (Lin-
naeus), was received at the Department of
Zoology, McGill University. The fish had
been seen some 10 days before that date by Mr.
Arthur Mathewson, K.C., on the beach at
Metis Beach, Matane County, Quebec, and
it was through the good offices of Mr.
Mathewson that it was sent to McGill for
identification.

The specimen measured four feet from
snout to tail, and was in an advanced state
of decay by the time the writer, together
with Mr. Donald Cleghorn of the Redpath
Museum, undertook the preliminary work on
it in an effort to make a skeletal preparation.
The skeleton is only partially ossified, so
so that skeletal preparation may be difficult.

Mola mola is a pelagic fish found in most

temperate and tropical waters. It is also seen —

fairly frequently close to shore in tropical

May-June, 1950]

and subtropical regions, and occasionally in

the temperate zones. Jordan and Evermann
(1898) gave its Atlantic and Pacific dis-
tribution as “Common northwand to England,
Cape Cod, and San Francisco”. In more
recent years, however, no doubt following
the increase in Gulf Stream influence, it has
been seen in Nova Scotia, where it is reported
to be fairly common in the Bay of Fundy
region and in the waters round Cape Breton
Island. The present writer has heard
rumours, unconfirmed, of its occasional pre-
sence in the Baie des Chaleurs; its appear-
ance as far up the St. Lawrence as Metis
Beach, however, appears to be a new record.

Reference: Jordan, D. S., and B. W. Ever-
mann, 1898. The fishes of North and Middle
America, Part II: 1753-55 —M. J. DUNBAR,
Department of Zoology, McGill ‘University,
Montreal.

—— EEE

Partial Albinism in the Bronzed Grackle
(Quiscalus quiscula versicolor). — On June
12, 1948, I noticed an abnormally plumaged
grackle in a group of five moving along the
shore of Lake Sasajewan, Algonquin Provin-
cial Park. It was noted to have white tail
feathers, white feathers in each wing and
perhaps some white on the head. The bird
appeared to be a well-grown young in a fa-
mily of two adults and three young. The
other birds in the group were normally plum-
aged.

Almost a year later, on May 29, 1949, Mr.

E M. Hagmeier observed a similarly plum-

aged bird where several pairs of grackles
were nesting in an abandoned saw-mill at the
west end of the Lake of Two Rivers, two
miles distant from Lake Sasajewan. There
seems little doubt that this was the same
bird I had seen the previous year.

On June 2, Mr. Gordon Bennett found the
nest of this bird, which proved to be a female.
The nest contained five young whose feath-
ers had grown out about one quarter of an
inch to half an inch from the sheaths. From
the standpoint of genetics, it was interesting
to find that one of the five showed partial
albinism, but the other four appeared normal.

On June 8, Bennett and I revisited the
nest site, which was on a cross-beam on the
second story of the ruined mill. The young

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

125

had left the nest but the female was observed
nearby, feeding dragonflies to one of the
normally plumaged young. The female was
studied carefully from a distance of about
50 feet. The tail feathers were all white
except for the two outermost ones on the
left side. There was a narrow ring of white
feathers about the nape of the neck. At rest,
two rectangular white patches showed near
the leading edge of each wing; in flight, the
greater primary coverts appeared to be white.
A rather large patch of white covered the
lower abdomen between the legs.

While we were examining the nestlings
in another nest, one of them flew from the
nest and disappeared directly into a dark
hole some 60 or 70 feet away. This hole prov-
ed to be formed by the mouth of a disused
well. While retrieving this bird from the
water, Bennett came across the body of a_
young partial albino bird, presumably the
same one he had seen in the nest the week
before. It had apparently fallen in shortly.
before our arrival, for it was still fresh and
in good condition. The skin is now in the
Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology.

The distribution of white feathers on this
young bird was very similar to, but not ident-

- ieal with, that of the female parent. Patches

on the neck and lower abdomen were the
same, but the two outer tail feathers were
normal on each side, only the central ones
being white. White wing feathers also differ-
ed in position and were not bilaterally sym-
metrical on the bird itself. Some of the pri-
maries of the left wing showed albinism, as
did the greater primary coverts of the right
wing. The scales and claws also were albi-
nistic and there were some traces to be found
on the bill and the inside of the mouth. The
eyes appeared normal.

The arrangement of white feathers in the
tail in both adult and juvenile resembles that
of a bronzed grackle collected in Oklahoma
in 1938, by Harmon (Auk, 56:481) in which
the three outer tail feathers were normal
and the remaining central ones white.

As far as is known, the adult female sur-
vived the summer and may well be reported
in migration or in winter quarters, for it is
a bird of uncommonly striking appearance.
—W. W. H. GUNN, Division of Research, On-
tario Department of Lands and Forests.

ES

“eceous species as trailing

126 THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

REVIEW

Shrubs of Michigan. By Cecil Billington.
Cranbrook Institute of Science, Bulletin No.
20, second edition, 1949: pp. I - VII, 1 - 339, 3
colour-photo plates, 207 figs. Price, $4.50
(U.S.A.), cloth.

This book should prove a most useful
manual for the serious naturalist interested
in the accurate identification of shrubby
plants. While designed to include only the
207 species of the State of Michigan, its treat-
ment is applicable to the great majority of
shrubs to be found in Eastern Canada, espe-
cially those in the adjacent portions of On-
tario from Lake Erie to the head of Lake
Superior.

“Shrubs” are considered in the broadest
sense. Thus we see included along with the
willows, brambles, blueberries and _ honey-
suckles, such vines as greenbriar, clematis
and grape and even some dwarf semi-herba-
arbutus, winter-
green and twinflower. Difficult groups such
as Salix, Ribes, Rubus, Rosa, Crataegus, Ame-
lanchier, Vaccinium and Sambucus are ad-
mirably treated from a systematic point of
view. Only in Rubus and Crataegus is the
treatment restricted to the better defined
species or to the characteristic represen-
tatives of generic sections. There is con-
siderable improvement over the first edition
published. in 1943.

Keys for identification, detailed descrip-
tions, finely executed drawings and current
botanical names are given for all species.
The small distributional maps, inset through-
out the text, indicate the counties in which
the plants occur. A pictorial glossary, the
meanings of specific names, and a list of
author’s names are other useful features. The
author’s notes presented as though he were
speaking with the plant actually in front of

him, give a delightful personal touch and.

prevent the dullness which might otherwise
creep into such a handbook. In all, Shrubs
of Michigan maintains the fine tradition of
the other Cranbrook Publications on orchids,
ferns, mushrooms and other aspects of the
flora of the State, — W. G. DORE.

The Second Annual Report of the Severn
Wildfowl Trust, The New Grounds, Slimbrid-
ge, Gloucestershire, England, 1948-1949. 133
pp., 1 map, 41 photographs, numerous draw-
ings.

The remarkable collection of living water-
fowl maintained by the Severn Wildfowl
Trust is described as containing some 654
individuals of 106 species and subspecies.
These are listed (pp. 36-42) with brief anno-
tations.

There is a variety of information on
waterfowl in the report with notes on be-
haviour, plumages, banding and trapping, the
sense of smell, pathological observations and
information derived from the study of the
living collection or from the wild waterfowl
that visit the grounds in numbers. There is
an annotated list (pp. 19-24) of birds of all
kinds recorded on the grounds in the period
January 1948 to April 1949. Numerous draw-
ings and sketches add to the attractiveness
and value of the report. A 24-page photo-
gravure section contains excellent pictures of
waterfowl and of aspects of the waterfowl
grounds.

A very interesting and useful adjunct to
this report is the 47-page “Key to the Wild-
fowl of the World” by Peter Scott. Litho-
graph drawings illustrate 240 forms of swans,
geese, and ducks in male and female breeding
plumage. Among similar species and subspe-
cies distinguishing characters are given. Dis-
tributions are succinctly outlined. The author-
artist is eminently qualified to prepare such
a key, inasmuch as he has observed in life a
large number of the forms shown; and the
numerous notes on colors of ‘soft parts’ as,
well as the proportions and postures of the
drawings are therefore particularly authentic.
This useful key may be purchased in booklet
form for two shillings and sixpence from the
Severn Wildfowl Trust. — W. EARL GOD-

FREY. cs

AFFILIATED SOCIETIES

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY
OF MANITOBA

OFFICERS FOR 1949-50

President Emeritus: Dr. H. M. Speechly; President:
A. H. SHORTT; Vice-Presidents: R. R. LEJEUNE, Mrs.
D. B. SPARLING; General Secretary: Miss WINONA
DOWNES; Executive Secretary: H. V. HOSFORD;
Treasurer: H. MOSSOP; Auditor: W. A. CARTWRIGHT;
Social Convenor: Mrs. R. K. HELYAR.

SECTIONS—

Ornithological: Chair. D. HARRY YOUNG; Sec. WAR-
REN JOHNSTON. Entomological: Chair. H. R. WONG;
Sec. J. D. SMITH. Botanical: Chair. Mrs. E. J. McMIL-
LAN; Sec. Mrs. D.B. SPARLING. Geological: Chair.
A. G. LAWRENCE; Sec. P. H. STOKES. Mammalogical:
Chair. L. T. S. NORRIS-ELYE; Sec. D. K. SMITH.
Herpetological: Chair. R. K. STEWART-HAY; Sec. D.
K. SMITH. Archaeological: Chair. Walter M. Hlady;
Sec: Mrs. P. H. STOKES.

Meetings are held each Monday evening, except on
holidays, from October to April, in Theatre F of the Uni-
versity of Manitoba, Memorial Boulevard, Winnipeg.
Field excursions are held on Saturdays or Sundays
during May, June and September, and on public holi-
days in July and August. Membership fee: $1 a year
for adults; 25 cents for juniors.

PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL
HISTORY OF CANADA

OFFICERS FOR 1949

President: REX MEREDITH, N.P.; lst Vice-President: Dr.
VIGER PLAMONDON; 2nd Vice-President: J. GERALD
COOTE; Secretary-Treasurer: GEO. A. LECLERC; Chief
Scientific Section: Dr. D. A. DERY; Chief Protection Sec-
tion: JOS MORIN; Chief Publicity Section: RENE CONS-
TANTINEAU; Chief Information Section; FRANCOIS
HAMEL. Other directors: J. K. HILL, J. SAUNDERS
HUGILL, STUART ATKINSON, T. J. A. HUNTER, O.
eae G. STUART AHERN, ULRIC G. TESSIER,

Secretary’s address: GEORGES A. LECLERC, 85 des
Franciscains St., Quebec, P.Q.

THE TORONTO FIELD-NATURALISTS’
CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1947-1948

President: C. A. WALKINSHAW; Vice-President: Pro-
fessor A. J. V. LEHMANN; Secretaries: MISS M.
MEASHAM, MRS. J. B. STEWART, Royal Ontario Mu-

100 Queen’s Park; President of Junior Club:
MRS. J. W. BARFOOT; Vice-President of Junior Club:
MISS LEWELLA MANN; Executive Council: J. L.
BAILLIE Jr., ALFRED BUNKER, A. C. CAMERON, BRO-
THER DENIS, O. E. DEVITT, MISS BARBARA DOUGLAS,
T. W. DWIGHT, MISS MADELEINE FRITZ, MRS. L. E.
JAQUITH, DR. L. E JAQUITH, W. H. MARTIN, DOUGLAS
MILLER, A. A. OUTRAM, MISS LILIAN PAYNE, F.
GREER ROBERTS, MRS. H. C. ROBSON, H. H. SOUTHAM,
EARL STARK, MRS. J. B. STEWART, R. W. TROWERN:
Ex Office: F. C. HURST, R. M. SAUNDERS, T. F.
McILWRAITH.

Meetings are held at 8.15 p.m. on the first Monday of
each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario
Museum, unless otherwise announced. Field trips are
held during the spring and autumn and on the second
Saturday of each month during the winter.

VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY
SOCIETY

EZECUTIVE OFFICERS — 1946-1947

Hon. President: DR. NORMAN A. M. MacKENZIE, M.M.
B.A., L.L.M., L.L.B., L.L.D., Past President: LAN McTAG-
GERT COWAN, B.A., Ph.D.; President: A. H. BAIN;
Vice-President: J. J. PLOMMER; Corr. Secretary: A. R.
WOOTON; Rec. Secretary: MISS STELLA BOYSE: Asst.
Secretary: F, TIMMIS; H. Treasurer: F. J. SANDFORD;
Librarian: MRS. F. MORGAN; Chairmen of sections:
Botany - J. DAVIDSON, F.LS., F.B.S.E.: Geology -
M. Y. WILLIAMS, B.Sc. Ph.D., F.G.S.A.: Entomology -
A. R. WOOTTON: Omithology - J. HOLMAN: Photo-
graphy - P. T. TIMMS: Mammalogy - Ian McT. COWAN,
B. A., Ph.D.: Marine Biology - R. W. PILLSBURY, M.A.3
Junior Section - MISS M. L. ELLIOTT; Additional
eure aot Sue - MISS E. SUTHERLAND, C.

»_K , G. R. WOOD. Auditors - H. G.
SELWOOD, W. B. WOODS. ic ae 4

All meetings at 8 p.m., Room 100, Applied Science-

Building, University of British Columbia, unless other-
wise announced,

McILWRAITH ORNITHOLOGICAL CLUB
LONDON, ONT.

OFFICERS FOR 1949

President: Mr. WM. G. GIRLING, 530 English St., Lon-
don; Vice-president: Mr. J. LEACH, West London P.O.;
Recording Secretary: Miss M. STEVENS, 81 Elmwood
Ave., London; Treasurer: Mr. A. CLENDINNING, 40
Ridout St., London; Migration Secretary: Mr. T. GAR-
SIDE, 27 Elm St., London.

Meetings are held at 8.00 p.m. in the Public Library
biulding on the second Monday of each month from
September to May.

Field trips are held during the spring and a special
excursion in September.

PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR
THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS INC.

OFFICERS FOR 1950-51

President: G. H. MONTGOMERY JR.; Vice-president:
W. H. RAWLINGS; Vice-president: DR. M. J. DUNBAR;
Treasurer: D. G. ELLIOT; Secretary: MISS R. S.
ABBOTT, 166 Senneville Road, Senneville, P.Q.

COMMITTEE

Miss R. S. ABBOTT; J. P. ANGLIN; W. R. B. BERTRAM:
J. D. CLEGHORN; J. A. DECARIE; Dr. M. J. DUNBAR;
D. G. ELLIOT; Mrs. D. G. ELLIOT; G. H. HALL:
W. S. HART; Mrs. C. L. HENDERSON; Miss G. HIBBARD;
H. A. C. JACKSON; A. R. LEPINGWELL; G. H.
MONTGOMERY; Miss L. MURPHY; G. G. OMMANNEY:
W. H. RAWLINGS; Miss M. SEATH; L. Mcl. TERRILL:
Mrs. L. McI. TERRIL.

Meetings held the second Monday of the month except
during summer.

BRITISH COLUMBIA BIRD AND
MAMMAL SOCIETY

President: KENNETH RACEY; Vice-President: H. M.
LAING; Secretary: IAN McT. COWAN, Dept. of
Zoology, University cf British Columbia, Vancouver, B.C.

WANTED

In order to meet the demand for back numbers of the publications
of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, the following are urgently needed:
Transactions, Otta. Field-Nat. Club, No. 1, 1880.

Ottawa Naturalist

Vol. 4, Sept., 1890
Vol. 11, Jan., 1898
Vol. 11, Feb., 1898
Vol. Mar., 1898
Vol. Apr., 1898
Vol. : July, 1898
Vol. ; Aug,., 1898
Vol. ; Sept., 1898
Vol. Oct-Nov., 1898
Vol. , Dec., 1898

Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 38, No. Jan., 1924
Vol. 39, No. Mar., 1925
Vol. 39, No. Apr., 1925
Vol. 39, No. May, 1925

Members and subscribers who are able to spare any of these numbers
would greatly assist the Club by forwarding them to:

Mr. W. J. Cody,
Division of Botany
Science Service,
Dept. of Agriculture,
Ottawa, Ontario.

“LE DROIT” Printing, Ottawa, Canada. griiiiimst

~_— PETER DATS TIS Er Pombes Reet oa ae re:
~—_> nN ABHIO OAR 9
ii * au

oft is

Vol. of uf JULY-AUGUST, 1950 [NOV 14

The CANADIAD
FIELD-NATURALIST

No. 4

tt °S a 2? |
BRAST . a |

Contents
Plants collected in the Dundas Marsh, Hamilton, Ont., 1946. By W. W. Judd ...... 127
The fauna of the Royal Botanical Gardens, Hamilton, Ontario.
gee PENTMCESON WWATTER sfcke el Re RS martes Naan MeL 4 130
Defense behavior in the mantis. By Mae Halliday o.0....0..0.0.0.cc cet 133
& Birds observed in the Yukon Territory during the summer of 1944.
Dg AIRS VON Ta EO TP eC RP 135

Northern breeding waterfowl summering at Niagara Falls. By R. W. Sheppard .... 139
Additional notes on the birds of Renfrew County, Ontario.

By Hoyes Lloyd, Robert G. Lanning and Sheldon Davis ..............0.....0c00 140
Another parallel mutation in Oenothera. By R. Ruggles Gates 0.0.0.0... 142
Additions to the birds of Simcoe County, Ontario. By O. E. Devitt .....0000000000.. 145
Directions for using a plastic adhesive in mounting pressed botanical specimens.

CO ee a 0 rt Deora Baan RAR YRS COS PLE RSet pole ae 148
Francis J. A. Morris (1869-1949). By Edmund M. Walker ooo... 150
Notes and Observations: —

An abnormally colored Woodcock (Philohela minor). By A. L. Rand .......... 153

June record of a European Widgeon in Manitoba. By Graham Cooch ........ 153

Arctic fox on Cape Breton Island. By Austin W. Cameron ...........0..0000.. 154

Bert LON ASSOCIATION Vy Ros EES SEHMIEZ (Ju een aN. A ne ae eer 154

Babolink’ at Cochrane, ‘Ontario. By)D.)B.O: Savile ..2.00.000.0 154

Unusual behaviour of Wilson’s Snipe. By D. B. O. Savile 00.00.0000. 155

The roosting behaviour of a Snow Goose at Montreal. By D. M. Scott ...... 155

The Semipalmated Sandpiper (Eveunetes pusillus) in southwestern

New VErunswicks Meals We SGObE eel ee OA a ee 155

The first record of the Chiselmouth, Acrocheilus alutaceus Agassiz

and Pickering, from British Columbia. By R. G. Ferguson ................ 156
Ee FPS OUI Mi HIM She Re RUD USN ROE A ce a Ee 156

Published by the
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

Entered at the Post Office at Ottawa, Ont., as second class matter.

Che Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club

— Patrons —
Their Excellencies the Governor-General and the Lady Alexander

President: Dr. PAULINE SNURE

1st Vice-President: Dr. J. W. GROVES 2nd Vice-President: Mr. R. Frito
Treasurer: RaymMoND Moore, Secretary: H. J. Scoccan,
Division of Botany, National Museum of Canada,
Science Service, Dept. of Ottawa.

Agriculture, Ottawa.

Additional Members of Council: Mrs. H. Liuoyp, Miss VERNA Ross, Miss Mary Stuart,
Messrs. E. G. ANDERSON, R. M. ANDERSON, W. K. W. BALpwin, A. F. W. BANFIELD,
Rev. F. E. Banim, B. Borvin, A. E. Bourcuicnon, A. W. CAMERON, W. J. Copy, J. P.
CUERRIER, W. G. Dore, C. FRANKTON, W. E. Goprrey, H. Grou, S. D. Hicks, W. ILLMAN,
W. H. Lancetey, D. LEEcHMAN, H. F. Lewis, Hoves Lioyvp, T. H. MANNING, W. H.
MINSHALL, A. E. Porsizp, D. B. O. Savitz, H. A. SENN, V. E. F. Sotman, J. S. TENER.

Auditors: I. L. CONNERS, C. FRANKTON, and H. F. Lewis.

Editor

Dr. H. A. SENN,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

Associate Editors

Mix Gs Donne SOs tae t lies Botany R. M. ANDERSON ................. Mammalogy
A MES ROCOUR, | AL to lm Ni ntelras Conchology A. G. HUNTSMAN ............ Marine Biology
HAG. CRAWEORD ) a0) 20) ih Entomology Wile GopEREyy 220 Ure erat. Ornithology
Al A COCT CE ONE Tori) seis o Geology Wie wAS SB acIT, WCE Ras eeu Palaeontology
CLYDE PAT CE NS TeHlith ie . Herpetology Je-Rs DY MOND: Ree es Ichthyology

Business Manager
W. J. Copy,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

The official publications of THz Ortawa Firip-NATURALIsTS’ CLUB have been
issued since 1879. The first were The Transactions of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’
Club, 1879, 1886, two volumes; the next, The Ottawa Naturalist, 1886-1919, thirty-
two volumes: and these have been continued by The Canadian Field-Naturalist to

date. The Canadian Field-Naturalist is issued bi-monthly. Its scope is the publication
of the results or original research in all departments of Natural History.

Price of this volume (6 numbers) $3.00; Single copies 60c each.

Subscription ($3.00 per year) should be forwarded to Dr. R. J. Moore,
Div. of Botany, Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture,
OTTAWA, CANADA.

3 The Canadian Field-Naturalist-

Vol. 64 OTTAWA, CANADA, JULY-AUGUST, 1950 No 4
PLANTS COLLECTED IN THE DUNDAS MARSH,

HAMILTON, ONT., 1946°

W. W. Jupp .
McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario. —

See Se ee Oe
a re

HE FOLLOWING is a list of plants col-

lected in the Dundas Marsh, Hamilton,
in the summer of 1946, in the course of an
ecological survey of the region sponsored by
the Research Division, Department of Lands
and Forests of Ontario and McMaster Uni-
versity. ,

The author wishes to acknowledge grate-
fully the aid of Professor M. L. Fernald, Gray
Herbarium, Harvard University, who kindly
identified the species of the genus Potamo-
geton, Dr. J. H. Soper, Department of Bota-
ny, University of Toronto, who identified
species of the genera Polygonum, Sparga-
nium and Myriophyllum, Mr. W. Dore, De-
partment of Botany, Ontario Agricultural
College, who identified the Gramineae and
various Cyperaceae and Dr. F. 9. Hermann,
Plant Industry Station, U.S. Department of
Agriculture, Beltsville, Md., who identified
various Cyperaceae and Juncaceae. Speci-
mens retained by Mr. Dore for the herba-

‘rium at the Ontario Agricultural College are
marked -(*):

specimens retained by Profes-
sor Fernald for the Gray Herbarium are
marked (+). All other specimens are re-
tained at McMaster University. The writer
is grateful to Messrs. L. Wragg, E. Kay and
EK. Turner, students of McMaster University,
who aided in making the collections.

The Dundas Marsh (see fig. 1) lies ad-
jacent to the northern limits of the city of
Hamilton. It is traversed through most of
its length by the disused Desjardins Canal

which originates in a turning: basin, at its

west end, near the town of Dundas. At its
eastern end the canal opens into a body
of open water with average depth of four
feet. The water of the marsh empties into
Hamilton Bay through a short canal. The
map has been traced from a series of aerial
photographs kindly supplied by Professor

+ Received for publication October 9, 1947.

J. W. Watson of the Department of Geogra-
phy of McMaster University.

HEPATICAE

Ricciaceae
Ricciocarpus natans (L.) Corda
Riccia fluitans L.

PTERIDOPHYTA
*. Polypodiaceae
Onoclea sensibilis L.

Equisetaceae
.Equisetum fluviatile L.

SPERMATOPHYTA —
Typhaceae
Typha latifolia L.

Sparganiaceae
Sparganium eurycarpum Engelm.
Sparganium chlorocerpum Rydb.

Najadaceae

+Potamogeton pectinatus L.

+Potamogeton nodosus. Poir.

+Potamogeton crispus L.

+Potamogeton zosteriformus Fern.

;Potamogeton foliosus Raf. var. macellus
Fern.

+Potamogeton Berchtoldi Fieber var. acumi-
natus Fieber

+Potamogeton perfoliatus L.

Alismaceae
Alisma Plantago-aquatica L.
Sagittaria latifolia Willd.

Hydrochar_taceae
Anacharis canadensis (Michx.) Planchon

*

Gramineae
Calamagrostis canadensis (Michx.) Nutt.
Phalaris arundinacea L.
Glyceria striata (Lam.) Hitch.
*Glyceria maxima (Hartm.) Holmb.

Vol. 64, No. 3, May-June, 1950, was issued July 27, 1950.

— 127 —

128 THE

“Phragmites communis Trin. var. Berlan-
dieri (Four.) Fern.

Hystrix patula Moench

Cyperaceae
Eleocharis calva Torr.
Carex diandra Schrank
Carex substricta (Kiikenth.) Mack.
“Carex Pseudo-Cyperus L.
Carex versicaria lL.
Carex stricta Lam. var. strictior (Dewey)
Carey
“Carex cristatella Britt.
“Carex vulpinoidea Michx.
“Scirpus atrovirens Muhl.
Scirpus validus Vahl

Araceae
Calla palustris L.
Acorus Calamus L. .
Symplocarpus foetidus (L.) Nutt.

Lemnaceae
Spirodela polyrhiza (L.) Schleid.
Lemna minor L.
Lemna trisulca L.
Wolffia columbiana Karst.

Juncaceae
Juncus tenuis Willd.
Juncus tenuis var. Dudleyt
mann

(Wieg.) Her-

Dioscoreaceae
Dioscorea villosa L.

Iridaceae
Iris versicolor L.

Polygonaceae

Polygonum coccineum Muhl. forma natans
(Wieg.) Stanford

Polygonum natans Eaton forma Hart-
wrightii (Gray) Stanford

Polygonum natans Eaton forma genuinum
Stanford

Polygonum punctatum Ell.

Polygonum scabrum Moench.

Ceratophyllaceae
Ceratephyllum demersum L.

Nymphaeaceae
Nymphaea odorata Ait.
Nuphar advena Ait.

Ranunculaceae
Ranunculus sceleratus L.
Ranunculus pennsylvanicus L.
Anemone canadensis L.
Caltha palustris L.

CANADIAN FYIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64.

Crucifereae
Rorippa palustris L.

Crassulaceae
Penthorum sedoides L.

Rosaceae
Potentilla palustris (L.) Scop.
Potentilla Anserina L.

Balsaminaceae
Impatiens biflora Walt.
Impatiens pallida Nutt.

Lythraceae
Decodon verticillatus (L.) El.

Onagraceae
Epilobium hirsutum L.
Epilobium adenocaulon Haussk.

Haloragidaceae
Myriophyllum verticillatum L.

: Umbellifereae
Cicuta bulbifera L.
Sium suave Walt.

Cornaceae
Cornus stolonifera Michx.

» Primulaceae
Steironema ciliatum (L.) Raf.
Lysimachia Nummularia L.

Apocynaceae
Apocynum cannabinum L.

Asclepiadaceae
Asclepias incarnata L.

Verbenaceae
Verbena hastata L.
Verbena urticaefolia L.

Labiatae
Mentha arvensis L.
Lycopus americana Muhl.
Scutellaria galericulata L.

Solanaceae
Solanum Dulcamara L.

Scrophulariaceae
Mimulus ringens L.
Chelone glabra L.
Veronica americana Schwein.

Lentibulariaceae
Utricularia vulgaris L. var. americana Gray

Phrymaceae
Phryma Leptostachya L.

<

July-August, 1950] TuE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 129

Hamilton

Map of Dundas Marsh near Hamilion, Ont.

Fig. 1.

ww
iS
z
3
-_
x
Aa

130 THE CANADIAN
Caprifoliaceae

Sambucus canadensis L.
Cucurbitaceae

Echinocystis lobata (Michx.) T. & G.
Campanulaceae

Campanula aparinoides Pursh

£

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Lobeliaceae
Lobelia siphilitica L.

Compositae
Eupatorium purpureum L.
Eupatorium urticaefolium Reichard
Eupatorium perfoliatum L.

THE FAUNA OF THE ROYAL BOTANICAL GARDENS,
HAMILTON, ONTARIO?

A. EMERSON WARREN, Ph.D.
McMaster University

N ACCOUNT of the fauna of the ‘Royal

Botanical Gardens” region will of ne-
cessity be incomplete, in that there are few
published statements to which to refer. Data
concerning the abundance and variety of
animal organisms are limited to personal
observations and to verbal information
gleaned from naturalists and other persons
familiar with the life within the area. With
the exception of the resident and migratory
birds, the natural history of the region is
vaguely understood and considerable know-
ledge must be gained before a constructive
program of conservation and_ wildlife
management can be successfully carried out.

The Royal Botanical Gardens, which in-
clude the region known as Coote’s Paradise,
afford many interesting examples of the
close relationships that exist between a
terrestrial and an aquatic habitat. For con-
venience, we may define the life zones here
as shore and marsh on the one hand, and
woodland, meadow or upland on the other.
However, these classifications are arbitrary,
since the ranges of many organisms overlap
and sharp delineations of habitat cannot al-
ways be made. The aquatic zone includes
the entire marsh region and an arm of the
bay extending beyond Valley Inn. The land
area completely surrounds the marsh and
extends on the northwestern side over up-
land slopes of the Dundas escarpment, thus
comprising in all about 1,800 acres.

In a general sense, the fauna of this region
resembles that of adjoining stretches of
southern Ontario. The location of the
Gardens, at the western end of Burlington
Bay, implies that much of the aquatic life
is Similar to that found elsewhere along the

1 Received for publication December 1, 1948.

®

northwestern shore of Lake Ontario. The
immediate proximity to the Niagara Penin-
sula suggests a land fauna considerably in-
fluenced by the conditions peculiar to this
specialized environment. The peninsula is
a funnel through which pass many forms of
migratory life, and the Botanical Gardens
and marshes afford sanctuary to a great many
species of birds of passage. The restrictions
on hunting and shooting within the area
have afforded considerable protection to our
feathered visitors and have encouraged many
to nest or become residents of the region.
Regulations in themselves, however, are not
sufficient guarantee for birds to remain in a
place for long periods. There are other con-
siderations, and the assurance of adequate
food supply and protection against natural
enemies are quite essential.

Many forms of animal life no longer in

evidence used to flourish in this part of
Ontario. Overfishing, overhunting and over-
trapping in earlier years have taken their
toll of life indigenous to this locality. But.
in addition, the encroachments of civilization
with the resultant clearance of woodlands
for agricultural or other purposes, the
development of modern highways, and the
expansion of industry with its many com-
plicating conditions have tended to render
the place uninhabitable for many types. To
illustrate, salmon, trout and sturgeon have
not been taken in these waters for many
years. The passenger pigeon is extinct and
the wild turkey has vanished from the area.
Bob white quail and ravens no longer fre-
quent these regions, and several other forms
rarely appear. Bears, martens, otters and
beavers have not occurred here in many
decades, although there are occasional re-

nt =e

Se as SS

July-August, 1950]

ports of bears and otters having been seen
in the general vicinity. We may not anti-
cipate the return of any of these forms
today, but we can help to maintain an en-

vironment: favourable for the perpetuation .

of the species that still remain in the dis-
- trict. Some forms which formerly flourished
occur today in depleted numbers, while
other species seem to have increased far
beyond what might be regarded as normal.
Skunks, common rats and meadow mice
thrive in an environment fostered by man,
and tend to crowd out other denizens. Star-
-lings and English sparrows, lacking normal
controls, exert very unfavourable influences
upon other bird life. The German carp, in
the absence of many former competitors,
is detrimental to other fishes. Of course
there are annual fluctuations of population
numbers in many species, and these differ-
ences often occur in predictable cycles. But
one essential at least for species survival in
an area is the maintenance of a normal
balance of nature. In regions under the
control of an authority, therefore, wise
management is necessary for the perpetua-
tion of this balance.

There are no fewer than twenty-five species
of mammals in this locality. - Racoons,
skunks, star-nosed moles, short-tailed shrews
and cinereous shrews are common. Most of
these are either nocturnal or fossorial in
their habits, hence they are not ordinarily
observed by daytime visitors. There are no
good bat caves in this area, but the little
brown bat is frequently observed and the
‘big brown bat more rarely. Black and gray
squirrels, Eastern chipmunks, woodchucks,
white-footed or deer mice, meadow mice,
muskrats and cottontail rabbits all are quite
abundant. The European hare (erroneously
called the jack rabbitt) also occurs, though
less frequently. The New York weasel is
present, and the mink occasionally. Red
foxes are quite common. The brush wolf
has been reported on occasion, although
there are few authenticated records. Evi-
dences of its occurrence have been based al-
most wholly upon reports of howls heard in
the vicinity. White-tailed deer are found
north of the canal and deer tracks are seen
occasionally in the ravine behind the Uni-
versity. These animals would probably be
more abundant if there were a larger stand
of cedars present.

An enumeration of the birds of the locality
would make a sizeable list. The variety of

¢ ;
THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

131

habitat within the Royal Botanical Gardens
area invites a wide variety of birds to feed
or breed there. The marsh in particular is
an oasis for much bird life. In general, the
area supports a bird population equal to or
exceeding that of any comparable situation
in this latitude. Under the auspices of the
Hamilton Nature Club census surveys are
made at regular intervals and fair estimates
on species and population numbers have
been obtained. There are now at least two
hundred and sixty-seven recorded species,
ninety-three of which are aquatic and shore
birds and one hundred and seventy-four are
of meadow and woodland. With respect to
residence, nineteen species are _ present
throughout the year, thirty others are
northern forms remaining during the winter,
ninety-two species are summer residents
especially during the nesting season, one
hundred and two are transients or birds of
passage which spend briefer or longer
periods en route, and there are twenty-four
species which occur but rarely. The environs
of Hamilton constitute a bird lover’s para-
dise. Here we find the horned lark, the
meadow lark, the bobolink, the oriole, the
cardinal and the scarlet tanager, the robin
and the wren, the blue heron and the Flo-
rida gallinule, the red-winged blackbird,
black ducks and plovers and dozens of other
species. Who has not thrilled to the notes
of the wood thrush and the veery, the indigo
bunting and the white-throated sparrow ?
The songs emanating from the ravine in
springtime comprise a veritable woodland
symphony.

Local reptiles consist of snakes and turtles.
The blue-tailed skink, the only lizard in
Ontario, occurs around Lake Erie. This
species has not been reported here, although
it has been found near Smithville. There
are eight kinds of snakes in this locality.
The garter snake, the milk snake, the little
brown (De Kay’s) snake, and the water
snake are fairly abundant, but the ribbon
snake, the red-bellied. snake, the smooth
green snake and the ring-necked snake are
rare. The hog-nosed snake or blowing adder
is not known here. None of our snakes is
poisonous, but all are useful in controlling
rodents and insect pests. De Kay’s snake
and the ring-necked snake are sometimes
mistaken for copperheads and, unfortunately,
killed, but there are no copperheads in this
area.

132

The snapping turtles and painted turtles
are the commonest. The former are often
accused of destroying young ducks and other
waterfowl, but these turtles feed on small
fish, frogs, snails, crayfish, insects and in
fact any kind of small animal, living or
dead, that may come within range of their
jaws. Painted turtles, with their prettily
marked carapaces, are frequently seen
sunning themselves on logs. The map turtle
is a fairly large species. It is found in this
vicinity although its range is. more souther-
ly and it is not as hardy as the others. Blan-
ding’s turtle, which occurs around Lake Erie,
rarely is found here. The musk turtle and
the soft-shelled turtle have only local dis-
tribution, being found in one pond at the
end of the bay near Valley Inn.

Among tailed amphibians, Jefferson’s sala-
mander and the spotted salamander are
common. These hide in decaying logs or
under stones during the day, but move
about at night. In early spring they move
towards ponds or pools where they lay their
eggs. The crimson-spotted newt, with its eft
or land stage, is widely distributed. The
common mudpuppy, Necturus, with its
feathery gills, spends its entire life in the
water. It is common in Desjardins Canal,
and is found under stones in nearby brooks.
The red-backed salamander, Plethodon, on
the other hand, is exclusively a terrestrial
form. It is found under logs or stones al-
most anywhere in the district. Its young
never pass through an aquatic stage.

The spring peeper (Pickering’s hyla), with
its shrill notes, is an early harbinger of
spring. It is one of the commonest of our
tree-frogs. It is usually preceded by the
swamp tree-frog. The tree-toad, on the
contrary, comes very late, at about the same
season as the bullfrog. The wood frog is
the first of the pond frog group to arrive.
It is not very common in this locality, al-
though it occurs widely in the province. The
leopard frog and the green frog are very
common. The pickerel frog occurs less fre-
quently. The bullfrog is practically gone,
due largely, no doubt, to its having been
fished too much. An attempt is being made
at restoration of this species in one large
pond near Dundas. The common American
toad is well known to everyone.

There are many kinds of fishes in the
marsh and bay regions. Few are good game
fishes, and none has particular commercial
significance. Carp and suckers, which are

%
THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST.

[Vol. 64

caught for food, are plentiful and attain
considerable size. Bowfins and pike are
present in fair numbers, the latter often
being fished through the ice. Occasionally

-anglers have a try at perch, sunfishes, crap-

pies and rock bass, but the better types of
sporting fishes have either been crowded
out or conditions are no longer favourable
for their existence. Catfishes are common
and their capture affords some sport. Lam-
preys are found in the bay and in nearby
streams and brooks. The common eel, which
at times abounds near Burlington Beach, is
also detected in the marsh area.
are numerous smaller fishes; sticklebacks,
shiners, creek chub, mud minnows, red-sided
dace and johnny darters all occur in brooks
and streams and in the waters roundabout.

There is a large invertebrate fauna repre-
sented by several phyla. Worms and leeches
are common. Numerous molluscs, especially

snails, occur both in water and on land. -

Crayfish and gammarids are found in ponds
and streams, and minute crustacean forms
abound in marsh and pond everywhere and
furnish very important elements of fish food.
Many species of spiders are found in this
locality. But the greatest variety and popu-
lation exist among the insects. While records
of insect life are not specific for this par-
ticular region, it may safely be assumed
that there are no fewer than one thousand
species here. A _ detailed study will un-
doubtedly reveal more nearly twice that
number. Of all these creatures, possibly no
other insect is more obnoxious than the
common culex mosquito. In the Westdale
and Dundas regions it is a serious pest.
The pleasurable use of the Gardens is much
restricted by its presence, but definite con-
trol measures are now being developed to
help rid the place of this nuisance.

The Royal Botanical Gardens and environs
afford a panorama of singular beauty. This
beauty could be enhanced by the removal
of certain unfavorable features. The waters
of Coote’s Paradise could become a sanctua-
ry unrivalled in this province. Vast flocks
of waterfowl passing to and fro can always
find harbour in this locality. That more
birds do not settle here might well be due
to the several conditions which interfere
with the development of the plant and other
aquatic life upon which they feed. There is
the problem of pollution of the bay and
marsh. Much drainage into the marsh is
very detrimental and there should be proper

There .

re ene

oi lial

—_

a
;
j
4
.

a

| July-August, 1950]

THE CANADIAN

‘diversion of sewage. Many forms of life are

impaired or destroyed by such contamina-
tion. Other controlling measures appear ne-
cessary. The dredging of the Desjardins
Canal would permit a runway for many
species of the desirable fish.

The netting of large carp is an important
and necessary requirement of good fishery
management. Carp are bottom feeders, and
although their diet consists mainly of insects
and aquatic vegetation, they have the un-

desirable habit of tearing up plants at their .

roots and of churning the bottom deposits,
thus greatly increasing the turbidity of the
water and rendering conditions very un-
suitable for the spawning and nesting of
other fish. The control of the carp popula-

* FIELD-NATURALIST

133

tion, although a very difficult problem in view
of the rapid increase and hardy nature of
this species, would help to maintain a better
balance of nature and thus contribute to
the establishment of more desirable species
of fish.

Any long-range program for the develop-
ment of a sanctuary, such as the Royal
Botanical Gardens, must depend upon a
thorough knowledge of food-chains and other
controlling factors of the local environment.
A systematic detailed study of the life of
this region is essential. An ecological re-
search program involving Wentworth County
and surrounding areas has been initiated at
McMaster University, under the auspices of
the Research Council of Ontario, and is now
in progress.

DEFENSIVE BEHAVIOR IN THE MANTIS'

Mar HALLIDAY
25 LeMay Rd., Toronto.

OWARD the end of August, 1949, a male

praying mantis (Mantis religiosa Linn.)
turned up in our garden and we transferred
it to a screened observation box. With us at
the same time was an immature bay-breasted
warbler which had been injured when it flew
against a school window.

Prompted by curiosity I cautiously placed

the mantis inside the bird cage. Hardly had

I withdrawn my hand when the mantis went
into action. It took a firm stand on the twig
and started to sway from side to side. At
the same time it fanned out both upper and
lower wings in the vertical plane. The ad-
domen was raised and turned back between
the wings. The cerci were rubbed against the
inside of the wings making a dry sound like

.a person’s fingers being rubbed firmly and
quickly across the surface of paper.

1 Received for publication October 27, 1949.

2 For the benefit of those who may be interested in
technical details in connection with Mrs. Halliday’s
observations on the defensive behaviour of Mantis
religiosa, the following notes are submitted :

The eye-like spots on the front legs consist each of
a pale central spot and a surrounding dark area.
They are situated on the inner or mesal surface of the
elongated fore coxae and are usually concealed, since
in the ordinary position of the coxae these surfaces are
almost cont.guous. In the defensive attitude the coxae
are rotated outwards so that the inner surfaces are
_directed forwards. The femora are tightly flexed upon
“the coxae and each femur bears a small pale spot in
alignment with the pale central areas of the coxal
spois. — E. M. WALKER.

The forepart of the body of the mantis,
though held rigid, was twisting and turning
sharply. The eyes never left the bird and
the front legs were raised, not in the usual
praying position, but turned outward with
the inner surfaces facing forward, exposing
the pair of eye-like spots’.

M. religiosa appears to be exceptional
among mantids in its possession of these spots
on its forelegs and here the spots were appar-
ently being used for their real purpose, that
of disconcerting an enemy or, in other words,
as part of a defensive reaction.

The warbler took several pecks at the
mantis but seemed puzzled and finally with-
drew a short distance while looking sharply
and curiously at the mantis which still held
its fieree pose and kept changing the posi-
tion of its front legs, or arms, by holding
first one in the air and then the other, re-
minding me of a spider monkey. This kept
up for an hour when I concluded the mantis
had had enough excitement. As I attempted
to pick the mantis up he fought my fingers

‘and even after I had returned him to the

observation box he would assume a fighting
attitude at the least movement of my fingers.

He held this position for about 20 minutes
when he relaxed and went about nonchalantly

CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

THE

134

.)

babel

RELIGIOSA L

is (MANTIS

ing Mant

Pray

July-August, 1950]

grooming his war weapons and antennae. At

no time could I get the mantis to go into

action without the assistance of the bird.

A few days later I had the opportunity
to repeat the observation with two cedar wax-
wings and four female mantids. I telephoned

Prof. E. M. Walker and he and Mrs. Walker
(Dr. Norma Ford Walker) soon arrived.
Though the mantids were gravid they, too,
were ready to “do or die”. Prof. Walker
remarked on the “amazing position of the
forelegs.”

This time the action was not as fast as
in the case of the male mantis and the cedar

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

135

waxwings were more interested in the berries
we had for them to eat. However the female
mantids definitely went through the same
performance as the male and showed their
dislike for the birds by attacking their feet
and legs. The waxwings just looked down |
and shook off the mantids.

The following morning the Walkers re-
turned. Dr. Norma brought along her motion
picture equipment and we staged the specta-
cle over again. We also made a series of
still photographs in black and white and also
in colour.

BIRDS OBSERVED IN THE YUKON TERRITORY
DURING THE SUMMER OF 1949°

W. W. Jupp
McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario.

HILE EMPLOYED with the Northern
Insect Survey sponsored by the Defence
Research Board and the Department of Agri-
culture of Canada the writer had an oppor-
tunity of observing various birds in the
Yukon Territory during the summer of 1949.

On May 31 a few birds were noted at Watson,

Lake near the southern border of the terri-
tory and during the week of May 31 to June
6 observations were made at Whitehorse.
During the remainder of June and in July
the area in which observations were made
was centred at Dawson which is located at
the north-east corner of the junction of the
Klondike and Yukon Rivers and is backed
by the slopes of Moosehide Mountain (see
map). Opposite the mouth of the Klondike
River, on the banks of the Yukon River, are
West Dawson and Sunnydale, two settlements
consisting of scattered farms some of which
are abandoned. Running westward from West
Dawson is the Sixtymile Road. At irregular
intervals along it are cabins used by travel-

. lers and at the 49-mile cabin the road forks,
the right branch continuing on to Poker
Creek in Alaska and the left branch to
mining camps at Sixtymile.

‘The topography along the road is a series
of rounded ridges intersected by deep val-
leys. Along the ridges are smooth-topped

1 Received for publication October 27, 1949.

_tween domes where water flows.

elevations locally known as “domes” and —
ranging from 3000 to 5000 feet in elevation.
In the bottoms of the valleys are small, rapid,
clear streams flanked by dense growths of
willow 3 to 6 feet tall which give a dis-
tinct light green colour to the valley
bottoms and which continue upward in
light green streaks in the gulches_ be-
The pre-
dominant shrub in the region is a dwarf
birch. On the lower slopes the shrubs are
3 to 6 feet tall and become progressively
shorter toward the crests of the domes where
they may be a few inches tall. Along the
slopes of the domes and crowding into the
valleys are spruces in close growth. They are
tallest at the bottom of the slopes while on
the crests they are absent altogether or are
represented by scattered dwarf trees often
gnarled in appearance. To the east of the
Yukon River is a region which presents much
the same topography as the region to the

- west of the Yukon except that the valleys

have extensive flats (eg. Jensen Flats)
bordering the creeks which run through them.
The chief rivers are the Klondike and Indian
Rivers into which flow various creeks e.g.
Bonanza, Eldorado, Quartz, Hunker, Sulphur
and Dominion Creeks. About the area are
several domes, the highest being King Solo-
mon Dome (elevation 4250 feet) which lies

136

at the centre of the area and is flanked by a
somewhat lower eminence, Hunker Summit.
Along the roads following the creeks are
settlements and mining camps such as Bear
Creek, Sulphur and Rock Creek.

Colymbus auritus Linnaeus.

HORNED GREBE. One in breeding plum-
age was seen on June 18 in a pool in a
sphagnum bog in Jensen Flats.

Charadrius hiaticula semipalmatus Bonaparte.

SEMIPALMATED PLOVER. Two birds
were seen moving actively about shallow
puddles along a roadside at Whitehorse on
June 5; two were noted on June 19 along
Sulphur Creek where hydraulic stripping
operations had removed the upper layers of
soil and had exposed layers of permanently
frozen mud; two birds were seen on mud
flats surrounding a pool near Bear Creek on
June 21.

“‘Totanus flavipes (Gmelin).

LESSER YELLOW-LEGS. A single bird
was seen scolding excitedly about a bog on
Jensen Flats on June 19. It would fly to the
tip of a small, isolated spruce tree, remain
there for a few moments with fluttering wings
and fly off to another tree to repeat the per-
formance as long as an observer remained
in the vicinity.

Larus argentatus smithsonianus Coues.

HERRING GULL. These birds frequented
the banks of the Yukon River at Dawson.
Six were observed for about an hour on July
8 when they flew back and forth along the
river near the ferry wharf, occasionally alight-
ing on the water or dipping downward to
snatch pieces of floating refuse.

Larus philadelphia (Ord).

BONAPARTE GULL. A single bird, with
black head, flew overhead along the border of
the airfield at Watson Lake on May 31.

Colaptes auratus luteus Bangs.

NORTHERN YELLOW-SHAFTED FLICK-
ER. Two birds, with red bar on nape and
yellow underwing, were in flight from tree to
tree in Sunnydale on July 14. On July 21 in
Dawson a young male was found calling and
fluttering in the grass.

Sayornis saya saya (Bonaparte).

SAY PHOEBE. This phoebe was common-
ly to be seen about Dawson perched in trees

Tur CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

rVele4

and on corners of buildings. On June 22 a
nest was discovered in Sunnydale. It was on
a narrow shelf in an abandoned building and
was constructed of grasses, feathers and
several pieces of string. In the nest were
seven downy young with eyes still closed.
When an observer came close to the nest the
parent birds swooped toward him clicking
their bills: On July 8 a group of five juvenile
birds were observed making trial flights about
a woodpile and adjacent roofs of buildings in
Dawson. At intervals the parents arrived
and fluttering before the young birds, fed
them insects as they teetered uncertainly on
their perches.

Tachycineta thalassina lepida Mearns.

NORTHERN VIOLET-GREEN SWALLOW.
These swallows were in flight about Dawson
in June and July and they nested in holes in
walls, in bird boxes and between rafters on
the outside of buildings. A voluminous nest
made of grasses was found in a ventilator on
the side of a building on June 8 and con-
tained three addled eggs. Several birds were
in flight about Bear Creek on June 13.

Iridoprocne bicolor (Vieillot).

TREE SWALLOW. A few birds were seen
swooping over the creek at Bear Creek on
Julv 5. ;

Petrochelidon pyrrhonota hypopolia Oberhol-

Ser.

GREATER CLIFF SWALLOW. These swal-
lows were first seen on May 31 at Watson
Lake where they were flying about the air-
craft hangar. Later on the same day more
birds were seen at Whitehorse where there
were numerous nests beneath the eaves of
buildings. In Dawson the birds nested be-
neath eaves and during June and July were
in flight about the town, particularly over
ponds and watercourses.

Perisoreus canadensis subsp.

CANADA JAY. Canada jays were en-
countered in wooded areas in the vicinity of
Dawson. A single bird was seen in bushes
on the slopes of Moosehide Mountain on June

17; 2 birds were seen squawking in trees at.

Mile 31 of the Sixtymile Road on June 26;
one bird was noted in a tree on the road to
Sunnydale on July 6; and several jays were
fussing about in trees on the heights about
Sunnydale on July 20. Two birds were noisy
visitors at a tree stump where they fed on
toast crumbs at Rock Creek on July 26.

Se a ee

137

FIELD-NATURALIST

THE CANADIAN

July-August, 1950]

*‘peip burpunoiuns pup ‘Aroyiiey, uoynx ‘wosmng jo dow

wv;
»
¥>
73

s ag

unydyng e

799 15
“ory
oh

og" qwog

qiuwng sayuny @ ® ae

>
2

“UAW
Siyeescn

Bre aiiwist

N,Olet9
urqvy
a ne ANWIZ )
~“ @u1
199)
angus anwde
aT!W IE

/ yaad) 4ay

o4?

vusviy

138

Cervus corax principalis Ridgway.
NORTHERN AMERICAN RAVEN. Two
were seen in flight along a cliff above White-
horse on June 1. At Dawson they frequented
the tops of cliffs along the Yukon River
where they could be seen in wheeling flight.
A bird was seen in flight along the bank of
the Yukon River on June 10, and on June
11 one fiew croaking across town. Two ravens
feeding on scraps on a street in Dawson on
June 14 were undisturbed by a passing truck.
On June 15 two birds soared about the river
bank at West Dawson. On June 13 two birds
were seen in flight along a cliff above Bear
Creek and .at the same locality six ravens,
congregated on the shoulder of the road on
July 5, flew off when approached by a truck.

Parus hudsonicus subsp.

BROWN-HEADED CHICKADEE. A single
bird was noted singing in a tree in a gully
at Mile 31 of the Sixtymile Road on June 26.

Turdus migratorius migratorius Linnaeus.

EASTERN AMERICAN ROBIN. One robin
was seen in a field at Whitehorse on May 31
and another was hopping about a field in
Dawson on June i0. Robins were in flight
over the tops of the birch scrub on the Sixty-
mile Road on June 26. On June 23 a young
bird with spotted breast was located in a
thicket along the Yukon River at Dawson.

Sialia currucoides (Bechstein).

MOUNTAIN BLUEBIRD. Two male birds
were seen at Whitehorse, one in a field on
May 31 and the other perched on a tele-
phone wire on June 2.

Bombycilla garrula pallidiceps Reichenow.

AMERICAN BOHEMIAN WAXWING. Two
birds were noted in a spruce wood at White-
herse on June 3 and another pair was seen
in a bush at the edge of the road through
Jensen Flats on June 19.

Dendroica petechia subsp.

YELLOW WARBLER. The yellow warblers
frequented the thickets of willow and poplar
along the Yukon River at Dawson. They
were first seen on June 10 when they were
in song. On June 23 a nest was found in a
crotch of a willow about four feet from the
ground. It was composed of grasses and bits
of soft paper and was lined with fluffy “down”
from flowers of willow. In the nest were one
egg and four young birds with little down
and with eyes still closed. When the nest

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

was first observed the female parent fussed
about in the bushes and a few minutes later
the male arrived and fed the young birds.
Fifteen minutes later one of the parents was
on the nest. On July 2 there were in the
nest three well-feathered birds two of which
fluttered out and scrambled along the ground.

Wilsonia pusilla subsp.

WILSON’S WARBLER. A _black-capped
male was seen in a spruce tree at.the bottom
of a gully at Mile 31 of the Sixtymile Road
on June 26. It remained in sight at a distance
of about forty feet for 15 minutes and then
darted away among the trees.

Euphagus carolinus (Muller).

RUSTY BLACKBIRD. Two birds were seen
scolding in a willow bush in a swamp in
Dawson on June 23 and a single bird was
noted in the same swamp on July 2.

Pinicola enucleator subsp.

PINE GROSBEAK. A male and female
grosbeak were seen at the edge of the road
through Jensen Flats on June 19 and another
pair, male and female, was seen in a tree at
Mile 3 of the Sixtymile Road on June 26.

Acanthis flammea flammea (Linnaeus).

COMMON REDPOLL. Five redpolis cling-
ing to dandelion scapes were feeding on the
seeds in Dawson on Yune 23 and four birds
were engaged in the same activity in a field
in Dawson on June 27.

Junco hyemalis hyemalis (Linnaeus).

EASTERN SLATE-COLOURED JUNCO. A

junco was first seen in Whitehorse in song at
the top of a telephone pole on June 4 and
another was located in a tree in Dawson on
June 10. During June and July they appeared
frequently in bushes and along roadsides. On
June 22 a nest was found at the side of the

road between West Dawson and Sunnydale.

It was on the ground beneath a clump of
bearberry and contained five young downy
birds with eyes still closed. On June 30
when I approached the nest the five birds
serambled out of it and away into the sur-
rounding bushes. Five hours later the nest
was examined and was empty.

Zonotrichia leucophrys gambellii (Nuttall).
GAMBEL WHITE-CROWNED SPARROW.
This sparrow was one of the birds of com-
monest occurrence about Dawson during June
and July, being noted first on June 10. The

Se
punt yet Nip Se aad

/

July-August, 1950] THE CANADIAN

‘birds could be seen in bushes and trees about

Dawson and were encountered throughout
the wooded parts of the country surrounding
the town.

FIELD-NATURALIST 139

Passerella iliaca subsp.

FOX SPARROW. Three fox sparrows were
flitting about in bushes and on the ‘ground
near Sulphur on Sulphur Creek on June 19.

NORTHERN BREEDING WATERFOWL SUMMERING
AT NIAGARA FALLS’

R. W. SHEPPARD

Niagara Falls, Ontario

HROUGHOUT a three months period from

June 16 to September 15, in the summer
of 1949, the broad waters of the lower Nia-
gara River immediately below the Falls harb-
oured a most unusual congregation of water-
fowl which under normal circumstances it
would seem should have been occupied in
breeding activities on far-a-way northern
lakes, or western prairie sloughs.

On June 16, there was present, chiefly
around a group of small rocky islets on the
Canadian side of the river midway between
the Maid-of-the-Mist docks and the H.E.P.C.
generating station, the following collection
of waterfowl:— Common Loon (Gavia
immer) 2; Horned Grebe (Colymbus auritus)
2 in breeding plumage; Golden-eye(Glaucio-
netta clangula) 4 males and 2 females; Can-
vas-back (Nyroca valisneria) 2, apparently
females; Gadwall (Chaulelasmus streperus)
1 female; Mallard (Anas platyrhynchos) 2
males and 1 female; Black Duck (Anas ru-
bripes) 3. On June 23, in the same general
area, there were present 3 Loons, two of
which were in full breeding plumage, while
the other appeared to be in a transition stage.
At the same time the 6 Golden-eyes were
again observed, but only one Horned Grebe
was noted. Two days later, on June 25, the
3 Loons, the 6 Golden-eyes, the female Gad-
wall, and the Black Duck were present. On
July 2, with the duck population as on June
25,-only one Loon was found; but on July 5
there were present in the area no less than
4 Loons, three in breeding plumage and one
in a transition stage; with 2 Horned Grebes,

the 6 Golden-eyes, the Gadwall female, and
_ the two Black Ducks.

1 Keceived for publication October 21, 1949.

Due to absence from home, no further
observations were made at the Falls until
July 29 and 30 on whieh days the waters
around the same rocky islets harboured 2
Loons in full breeding plumage; 3 Horned
Grebes two of which were in the dark breed-
ing plumage while the other was in an inter-
mediate phase; 3 American Mergansers
(Mergus m. americanus), one an adult male
and the other two youngish appearing birds
of undetermined sex; 5 Golden-eyes, one a
female, others apparently male, but only one
showing much black and white for the group
at this time was in a transition stage of plum-
age; 2 Black Ducks; a Mallard female; and
2 Canvas-backs of very immature appearance.
On three visits within the period August 6-8,
the following waterfowl were present in the
area :— Loons 2; Horned Grebe 3, only one
still in breeding: plumage the other two
changing to autumn feathering; Golden-eye
5, the four males in an advanced state of
eclipse with only one showing any appreci-
able extent of black and white plumage;
American Mergansers 2, a male and a female.
Canvas-back 2, apparently the same imma-
ture looking birds as seen on July 29 and 30,
and Baldpates (Mareca americana) 2, both
possibly immature, or in a complete eclipse
type of plumage, and the latter would’ seem
more probable for they were very brown on
back and scapulars, with breasts white, and
heads patchy with brownish an dwhite.

On August 15, the two Loons, two of the
Horned Grebes, the five Golden-eyes, the two
American *Mergansers, and the two Canvas-
backs were still in the vicinity of the rocky
islets.

A visit on September 3, revealed the two |
Loons; four Horned Grebes; four Golden-

140 THE CANADIAN

eyes, and the pair of American Mergansers,
the male in such a heavy moult that it was to
all intents and purposes flightless, as was
evidenced when it was seen to leave the
water, and scramble up onto a rather high
rock.

On September 10, there were present in
the area one Loon in summer plumage; 4
Horned Grebes, three in the grey and white
plumage of winter, and one darker, browner
looking bird; Golden-eye 6, now seemingly
_ revealed as four males and two females;
American Mergansers 2, the male appearing
very much larger than the female, and in
some form of eclipse plumage and heavy
moult, and the two Canvas-backs, apparently
the same immature looking birds previously
recorded.

On September 15, the waterfowl in this
particular part of the River, were much as
on the 10th, except that on this day both
Loons were present.

Although not all found on every recorded
visit, a circumstance not to be wondered at
in view of the extent of the water surface,
and the rocky, and in some places overhung
nature of the shoreline, there would appear
to be little reason to doubt that the broad
waters of the lower Niagara River, in that
area between the Falls and the Rainbow
Bridge, harboured throughout the summer

FIELp-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

of 1949, two or more Common Loons; three
or four Horned Grebes; six Golden-eyes, and
two Canvas-backs; while during the greater
part of the period, at least from the end of
July on, a pair of American Mergansers were
also present. The appearance and disappear-
ance, throughout the period, of the four
species of surface feeding duck mentioned,
Gadwall, Mallard, Black Duck, and Baldpate
does not necessarily mean that these birds
were not in the general area throughout the
summer, but rather indicates that they were
never far away, but spent intervening periods
elsewhere on the River, and most likely in
the shallows above the American Falls and
around Goat Island.

While admittedly two of the species men-
tioned in the foregoing notes, the Mallard
and the Black Duck, are well enough known
local breeding birds, and while not entirely
ruling out the possibility of flight crippling
injury to at least some of the other birds,
the apparent presence throughout the entire
summer, on the lower Niagara River, of such
northern breeding waterfowl sustaining them-
selves in seemingly perfect health, and going
through their normal seasonal plumage
changes, represents an unprecedented obser-
vation in my long experience of water-birds
on the Niagara, and would in consequence
seem sufficiently unusual to be worth placing
on record.

t--<>-

ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THE
BIRDS OF RENFREW COUNTY, ONTARIO’

Hoves Liovp, Rogert G. LANNING, and SHELDON Davis
Ottawa, Belleville, and Eganville, Ont.

INCE THE COMPLETION of “Observa-

tions on the Birds of Renfrew County,
Ontario”* additional material has become
available. Sheldon Davis of Eganville, who
has lived in the county all his life, and who
knows it well, has joined with us and has
added important records. Lanning visited
Combermere in 1946 from October 10 to 13,
and in 1948, from October 8 to 11. From
February 7 to 16, 1948, the area surrounding
Eganville was carefully surveyed. Lloyd

1 Received for publication January 9, 1950.
2 1948. Lloyd, Hoyes, and Lanning, Robert G., Can.
Field-Nat. 62:47.

visited the Y.M.C.A. Camp,
during the following periods: 1946, July 3 to
13, and July 23 to August 2; 1947, June 5,
June 30 to July 10, July 21 to August 1; 1948,
July 5 to 13, July 21 to 30. Lloyd camped at
Lake Doré in 1947 from October 3 to October
9. Lloyd and Lanning camped at Lake Doré
from June 21 to 27, 1948 and travelled through
much of the northern part of the county,
going as far as Round Lake and Stonecliffe.

Fifteen additions are made to the list of
birds observed in Renfrew County, bringing
the total number of species to 189, with
definite breeding evidence established for 84.

Golden Lake,

yee

July-August, 1950] THE CANADIAN

1. Gavia immer immer (Briinnich).
COMMON LOON. A specimen examined in

the flesh on June 24, 1948 was referable to °

this race because the bill measured 90 mm.

2. Phalacrocorax auritus auritus (Lesson).
DOUBLE-CRESTED CORMORANT. A young
bird received by the Royal Ontario Museum
of Zoology on October 5, 1946, was collected
by R. Jones at Westmeath.

3. Falco columbarius columbarius Linnaeus.
EASTERN PIGEON HAWK. One was seen
by Lanning on June 24, 1948, near Petawawa.

4. Charadrius vociferus vociferus Linnaeus.
KILLDEER — Although a common summer
resident, the first definite breeding evidence
was on July 4, 1948, when two young were
found in a field east of Lake Doré.

5. Bartramia longicauda (Bechstein).
UPLAND PLOVER. Dr. P. Harrington states
that he observed this species in June 1939,
near Arnprior.

6. Calidris canutus rufa (Wilson).
AMERICAN KNOT. Five birds were seen on
October 9, 1947 by Lloyd and Davis, on the
shore of Lake Doré.

7. Zenaidura macroura carolinensis
(Linnaeus).

EASTERN MOURNING DOVE. Davis secured

a juvenile bird not long out of the nest on

June 12, 1948, at Lake Doré.

8. Bubo virginianus virginianus (Gmelin).
GREAT HORNED OWL. A specimen in the
Lloyd collection taken at Perrault on July 1,
_ 1947, has been referred to this race.

9. Nyctea scandiaca (Linnaeus).

SNOWY OWL. A mounted specimen of one
which had been taken locally was examined
by Davis in Pembroke.

10. Melanerpes’ erythrocephalus
phalus (Linnaeus).
RED-HEADED WOODPECKER. A specimen
was taken by Davis on June 5, 1948, near the
Davis Cottage, Lake Doré, in hardwood forest.

erythroce-

11. Empidonax traillii traillii (Audubon).
ALDER \|FLYCATCHER. A specimen was
taken on June 24, 1948 near Rankin.

12. Contopus virens (Linnaeus).
EASTERN WOOD PEWEE. A nest was found

_ 30 feet up in an elm tree at Lake Doré on
July 10, 1948.

FIELD-NATURALIST

141

13. Iridoprocne bicolor (Vieillot).

TREE SWALLOW. Definite breeding evi-
dence was established when an adult was
seen feeding young in a bird-house in Pem-
broke on June 22, 1948.

14. Perisoreus canadensis canadensis (Lin-

naeus). ;
CANADA JAY. Uncommon resident, common
winter resident, breeds. Noted on February
8, 1948, and on June 21, 1948, three juvenile
specimens secured were being fed by parents
in a jackpine forest near Round Lake.

15. Corvus corax principalis (Ridgway).
NORTHERN RAVEN. Seen on the opening
date of the deer hunting season (first week
in November) from 1939 to 1947 by Davis,
west of Pembroke. A specimen taken, Sept.
5, 1948, at Lake Clear.

16. Corvus brachyrhynchos’ brachyrhynchos
Brehm.

EASTERN CROW. On February 12, 1948, two

crows were seen feeding on refuse near

Eganville, a winter record.

17. Anthus spinoletta rubescens (Tunstall).
AMERICAN PIPIT. Common fall migrant.
Seen several times on farmland near Lake
Doré during October 1947, and at Comber-.
mere October 1948.

18. Lanius ludovicianus migrans Palmer.
MIGRANT SHRIKE. A juvenile specimen not:
long from the nest was taken near Rankin
on June 22, 1948, establishing a breeding
record.

19. Acanthis flammea flammea (Linnaeus).

COMMON REDPOLL. <A small flock was
found on February 12, 1948, near Eganville.
Apparently they are erratic winter residents.

20. Sp'nus p‘nus pinus (Wilson).
NORTHERN PINE SISKIN.. Flocks were
noted on October 8, 1947, by Lloyd and Davis
at Lake Doré, and Siskins were abundant in
February 1948, throughout the area visited by
Lanning.

21. Loxia curvirostra sitkensis (Grinnell).
SITKA CROSSBILL. On June 5, 1947, a
female was secured by Lloyd from a small
flock feeding in the red pines at Golden
Lake. W. Earl Godfrey, ornithologist, National
Museum of Canada, assigns it to this sub-
species.

22. Lox’a leucoptera leucoptera Gmelin.
WHITE-WINGED CROSSBILL. Five males in
full breeding condition were taken from

142 THE
several small flocks at Lake Doré in February,
1948. Presumably, because of absence of
females and condition of specimens taken,
they may have been nesting.

23. Sp*zella arborea arborea (Wilson).
EASTERN TREE SPARROW. Small flocks
winter throughout the area.

24. Zonotrichia leucophrys leucophrys
(Forster).
WHITE-CROWNED SPARROW. Migrating

CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

flocks observed October 2-20, 1948, at Rankin
and Lake Doré by Davis.

25. Melospiza gcorgiana georgiana (Latham).
SWAMP SPARROW. A specimen was taken
on October 11, 1943, at Combermere, from a
large flock congregated in Conroy’s Marsh.

ADDITIONAL REFERENCE:

1947—Brown, N. R. Can. Field-Nat. 61:47.

Observations on the Birds of the Petawawa.

Military Reserve and Surrounding District,
Renfrew County, Ontario. *

ANOTHER PARALLEL MUTATION IN OENOTHERA *

R. RUGGLES GATES
Biological Laboratories, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

; going through the large collections of
Oenothera at the Gray Herba2rium I have
come across certain forms of more than
ordinary interest. The purpose of the present
note is to describe two of them as a new
species and its variety. Some students of
Oenothera would doubtless regard the variety
as another micro species, for they show many
differences; but I am following the plan of
attaching one form to another as a variety
whenever the relationship is clear. In this
case the most striking feature of the variety
has clearly originated as a paral'el mutation
in a local area. This makes it of much taxo-
nomic as well as genetic interest. The des-
cription of the species, according to a system
- adopted a decade ago, is as follows:

O. perangusta n. sp.

Stem ca. 50 cm. high, apparently slightly
bent, diffuse red, with appressed and crispate
puberulence and very scattered long hairs
from small red papillae. The remains of the
rosette are attached to its base. Stem leaves
10 cm. x 10-12 mm. narrow lanceolate, point-
ed, red at tip, midribs apparently red, upper
surface nearly glabrous, lower surface with
fine puberulence, denser on the midrib. Up-
per part of stem bears numerous red papillae,
but the upper bracts are little more pubescent
than the leaves. The ovaries and young fruits
are densely hairy pubescent, without red pa-
pillae. Buds yellow, with few short hairs but
no red papillae. Ovary 8-9 mm. long, hairy;
hypanthium 30 mm., slender; bud cone 9-13

1 Received for publication February 22, 1950.

mm., sepal tips greenish, tipped with red, 1-2
mm., terminal, appressed, somewhat hairy;
petals 15-20 mm. long.

The type specimen was collected on a
sandy beach of Lake Huron at Stokes Bay,
Bruce Peninsula, Ontario, by P. V. Krotkov
in 1934, as No. 9252, University of Toronto
Herbarium. Another specimen collected by
P. V. Krotkov at Dunk’s Bay, Bruce Penin-
sula, 1933, differs only in having less red
stem and less hairy fruits. Another by the
same collector at Queenleen Lake, 1936,
agrees closely with the last. O. perangusta is
especially characterized by its very narrow

leaves, the hairy ovaries and young fruits, —

and the small flowers (petals ca. 10-20
mm.). It differs markedly from O. strigosa
Rydb. in that the latter has soft gray pubes-
cence on the leaves. The pubescence on the
buds is also very different, the leaves are
shorter and broader, the stems not red and
the flowers frequently smaller. The persistent
rosette of O. perangusta is another dis-
tinguishing feature. Its distribution is gen-
erally more northern, and specimens from
near Edmonton, Alta., 1941; Milk River, As-
siniboia, coll. by John Macoun in 1895 as
No. 10644, Herb. Geol. Survey Canada; Leeds,
North Dakota; and Idaho 1941 (5,500 ft.) be-
long here rather than to O. strigosa. These
all have reddish (rubrinervis) buds, but green
hypanthia. O. strigosa is typical in Nebraska,
Wyoming, Colorado, where the hypanthium
may be densely pubescent and the petals only
12 mm.

July-August, 1950] THE CANADIAN

Diagnosis: Caulis brevis, ad extremum
rubro-tuberculatus, et in speciem leviter
curvus. Fo_ia caulina angustissime lanceolata,
plana, costa in speciem rubra. Sepala et hy-
~ panthium Virides. Alabastra lutea, ovaria et
capsula immatura dense hirsuta, hypanthium

tenue; apices sepalorum virides, rubrotincti,-

1 mm. longi, appressi, sepala aliquantum
pilosa; petala circa 20 mm. longa. Bractae non
hirsutae.

To this species is also attached a specimen
from a gravelly bank along a stream, at Marie
Louise Creek, Sibley Township, Thunder Bay
District, Ontario, in Lat. 48° 20’N. Long.
88° 50’W., collected for the Nat. Herb. Canada
as No. 830 by Taylor, Losee and Bannan in
1936. It differs from the type in (1) some-
what broader leaves (10 cm. x 14 mm.), (2)
the ovary and fruits are not hairy, (3) petals
only 10-11 mm., fading pink.

O. perangusta thus extends from the Bruce
Peninsula of Lake Huron along the north
shore of Lake Superior, westwards to Ed-
monton, Alberta, and southwards into Mon-
tana.

Another sheet, from the Thunder Bay
District on the north shore of Lake Superior,
resembles the species in certain features and
the variety to be described in certain others.
It was also collected by Messrs. Taylor, Losee
and Bannan in 1936, as No. 831, at Sleeping
Giant, Ontario, for the National Herbarium
of Canada. The sheet bears two small plants
(height only 20-25 cm.) which have no mature
flowers but very young buds. The stems show
little diffuse red but the leaves are even
narrower (midleaf 6.5-7.5 ecm. x 7-9 mm.).
Other features of these two plants, which
come from the same area as the “variety” to
be deseribed: will be. referred to later.

O. Peranadea var. rubricalyx n. var.

Unlike most Oenotheras, the rosette is
persistent 2 after a stem is formed. The stem
is short (30-35 cm.) but stout and has
abundant red papillae. It is also intensely
red from diffuse pigmentation, especially in
the upper part (ca. 5 cm.) which is also
strongly bent in both specimens. The
rosette leaves are ca. 12 cm. x 11-12 mm.,
oblanceolate, tapering to long, + margined
petioles; stem leaves very narrow, a midleaf
measuring ca. 9 cm. x 9 mm., narrow-lance-
olate, subentire, acuminate, tipped with red,

2 The fact that in the species the remains of the rosette
were still attached helps further to connect these
two forms.

FIELD-NATURALIST .

143

both surfaces having a fine puberulence,
midrib evidently red. Upper bracts hirsute
on both surfaces, the very long, white hairs
not arising from a papilla. The bracts also |
show much diffuse red on their lower surface.
Inflorescence relatively dense, ovary 11-13
mm. in length, hypanthium 30 mm., bud
cone 18 mm.; sepal tips 4 mm., green, hairy,
terminal, appressed, tipped with red. Petals
15-19 mm. long, filaments 8 mm., anthers 9
mm.; stigma lobes ca. 6 mm. base of lobes ca.
5 mm. above hypanthium, so the flower is
self-pollinated before anthesis. The ovaries
and young fruits bear a dense _ hirsute,
pubescence arising from red papillae, as well
as fine puberulence, the sepals and hypan-
thium having scattered long hairs from most-
ly white papillae.

The pigmentation of the sepals is deep
red, corresponding with the exireme condi-
tion (No. 5) found in rubrinervis (Gates
1911), the anthocyanin extending practically
to the margins but the midvein remaining
green. In the rubricalyx mutation, to which
this is a parallel, the midvein is darker red
than the rest of the sepal. ‘The variety here
described agrees, however, with the rubri-
calyx mutation in having the unique feature
of a deep red hypanthium.

Diagnosis: Folia radicalia anguste ob-
lanceolata, persistens. Caulis brevis, apice
declinato, praecipue ad extremum rubro-
tuberculatus etiam rubro-tinctus. Inflores-
centia comparate condensa. Folia caulina
angustissime lanceolata, plana, costa rubra.
Sepala et hypanthium valde rubra, hypan-
thium crassum; apices sepalorum virides, 4
mm. longi, appressi, pilosi; petala 15-19 mm.
longa, bractae et ovaria hirsuta, bractae infra
rubrae. ,

This striking form is represented by a
single sheet in the Gray Herbarium, contain-
ing two specimens which were collected by
A. S. Pease and R. C. Bean in 1933 by the
Canadian Pacific Railway track at Jackfish
Station in the Thunder Bay District on the
north shore of Lake Superior, Ontario. As
representing a variety of O. perangusta, it
differs from the species in (1) rubricalyx
pigmentation of sepals and hypanthium, (2)
bracts and fruits much more hairy, (3)
hypanthium -stout not slender, (4) stem tip
strongly bent, (5) stem tip very red, (6)
upper bracts hairy and red on their lower
surface, (7) rosette persistent.

144 _ THE CANADIAN
The sheet from Sleeping Giant, in the
same general area, contains, as already men-
tioned, two small, rather depauperate plants
with extremely narrow leaves. The bracts
and young fruits are hairy, as in the variety,
but the bracts are not red below. From the
general lack of pigmentation, the indications
are clear that this form would have green,
not red, hypanthia. These depauperate
specimens therefore probably represent the
green-budded species from which the
variety must have been derived.

Two other sheets in the Gray Herbarium
apparently represent independent develop-
ments of deep red buds and hypanthium,
and are therefore included in var. rubricalyx.
One of these was collected near Pony, Mon-
tana (alt. 7000 ft.) as No. 4584 by P. A.
Rydberg and E. A. Bessey under the name
of O. strigosa. The stem is diffuse red and
has red papillae, midleaf 8 cm. x 11-12 mm.,
hypanthium and bud cone red, but paler than
the type; petals 15 mm., ovary and fruits
less hairy. The other sheet was collected
at Suksdorf Gulch, Montana, 1916. It has a
red hypanthium, and many red papillae on
the sepals and fruits as well as the stem. It
differs from the type in having (1) fruits and
bracts less hirsute, (2) shorter stem leaves,
5.5-6 cm. x 11 mm. Other plants from Mon-
tana have green buds. Occasional sheets are
seen in which the hypanthia have become
pale reddish in drying, and the same
frequently occurs to the petals of Western
species, but this is another matter.

The genetic significance of this find will
emerge more clearly from a brief account of
the origin of the rubricalyx mutation from
O. rubrinervis. Over forty years ago a single
plant with red sepals and hypanthium
appeared in a culture of Oenothera rubriner-
vis from the sand dunes on the Lancashire
coast of England, north of Liverpool (see
Gates, 1914), where introduced Oenotheras
had flourished for over a century. Among
my cultures from this source at the Uni-
versity of Chicago in 1907 (the seeds having
reached me through Dr. D. T. MacDougal)
were several of the mutant rubrinervis from
O. Lamarckiana. In one of these rubrinervis
cultures a single plant appeared having deep
red sepals and hypanthium.. This was called
O. rubricalyx. Many pure seeds were ob-

FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 64
tained by self-pollinating the flowers, but
through an accident only four plants survived
and were grown at Woods Hole, Massa-
chusetts, in 1908. These were all rubricalyx.
Selfed seeds of two of these plants produced
at the Missouri Botanical Garden in 1909
rubricalyx and rubrinervis in the ratios re-
spectively of 14:6 and 33:11. More seeds
sown in 1910 produced 70 plants, but only 15
of them came into bloom, 10 with red buds;
5 with green buds.

These three ratios give a total of 57:22,
thus providing clear evidence that the rubri-
calyx mutation was a simple Mendelian domi-
nant. This and other evidence of pigment va-
riation was described in detail, with a colored
plate (Gates 1911). Much subsequent evidence
of Shull (1926), Catcheside (1940) and others
has confirmed the status of mut. rubricalyz,
but it has never appeared in cultures again
and is thus perhaps the rarest of the muta-
tions. The characteristic feature of intensely
red buds is hitherto unknown in any wild
Oenothera, although certain forms from Nan-
tucket and the Magdalen Islands with a pale
pink hypanthium approach it. The rubri-
calyx character has no known advantage in
relation to natural selection, and as the
plants here described were growing in a
ruderal condition along the railway lines it
may have been exterminated, but no doubt
specimens from the same collection were
distributed to other herbaria.

The origin of this red-budded variety in
one locality fits precisely my conception of
how new characters in any genus arise and
spread. I know of no other case in which a
mutation has first arisen in cultures of one
species and afterwards been found wild in a
different species of the same genus. One
would like to know whether all the planis

in this Thunder Bay locality had the deep

red buds or whether some had rubrinervis
buds with a green hypanthium. This question
receives a partial answer from the two plants
in collection No. 831 at Sleeping Giant, which
showed no evidence of the rubricalyx
pigmentation.

It is hoped that visitors to the Jackfish
locality will observe the present state of
the Oenothera population, to determine
whether this character is spreading or is
being exterminated, and whether the usual

Ee Os ee ee

July-August, 1950] THe CANADIAN
green-budded type also occurs intermingled
in the population. If both occur, it would be
of much interest to determine the relative
numbers and how they change from year to
year.

Gates, R. R. 1911. Studies on the variability
and heritability of pigmentation in
Oenothera. Zeits. f. Abst. u. Vererb.
4: 337-372.

FIELD-NATURALIST

145

Oenotheras from
Ann. Mo.

1914. Some

Cheshire and Lancashire.
Gard. 1: 383-396. Pls. 3.

Shull, G. H. 1926. “Old-gold” flower color,
the second case of independent in-
heritance in Oenothera. Genetics 11:
201-234.

Catcheside, D. G. 1940. Structural analysis
of Oenothera complexes. Proc. Roy.
Soc. 128B: 509-535.

ADDITIONS TO THE BIRDS OF SIMCOE COUNTY, ONTARIO *

: O. E. Devitt
Toronto, Ontario.

qa INCE THE ACCOUNT of the Birds of

Simcoe County, Ontario, was published
(Trans. Royal Canadian Institute, Vol. XXIV,
part 2, 1943 and Vol. XXV, part 1, 1944),
considerable valuable information has come
to the writer’s attention. It was thought
advisable to place it on record at this time
and bring the list of birds up to date.

To the original list of 257 species, ten
new birds have been added, making the
present total 267. The number of breeding
species has been increased by two with the
addition of the Wilson’s Phalarope and the
Philadelphia Vireo, the total now standing
at 188 species which have been known to
nest and rear their young in the county.
Other birds of which increased distributional
data have been gained are also included.

I am indebted to the many correspondents
who have contributed information pertaining
to Simeoe birds. Particularly valuable have
been. the records of the late Dr. E. L. Bre-
reton, Dr. J. Murray Speirs and Messrs. R. D.
Ussher and A. J. Mitchener.

WESTERN GREBE.

Aechmophorus occidentalis. — An individual
of this species was observed on October 25,
1944, at the head of Kempenfelt Bay, Lake
Simcoe, by Dr. E. L. Brereton, and a note
to this effect appeared in the Canadian Field-
Naturalist (Vol. 59, p. 68, 1945). The grebe
was studied for an hour at various distances
up to within 30 yards of the shore and perti-

: __} Received for publication March 6, 1950

nent details as to plumage and behaviour
noted. This is the only record for the county.

GREAT WHITE EGRET.

Casmerodius albus. — Two additional ob-
servations of this southern visitor are now
available. One was seen on Batteaux Creek,
near Batteaux Station, on July 27, 1946, by
Dr. E. L. Brereton; and another was noted
at New Lowell during the week of August 11,
1946 by Mr. Lawrence Davis.

The writer is now able to report that the
fine specimen of Great White Egret collected
by the late Mr. W. Sutherland at Orillia, April
30, 1908, and previously recorded, has been
donated by his son, Gordon, to the Royal
Ontario Museum of Zoology for permanent
preservation.

. COMMON GLOSSY IBIS.

Plegadis falcinellus. — The writer is indebted
to Mr. J. L. Baillie of the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology for calling his attention
to a Simcoe County occurrence of this unusual
species as recorded in one of Charles Fother-
gill’s manuscripts (“Memoirs and Illustrations
of Natural History”, in the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology) of 100 and more years
ago. Fothergill’s detailed description leaves
no doubt as to the identity of the birds con-
cerned. He states: “They were shot in what
are called the Narrows of Lake Simcoe, near
where the river runs out of and leaves that
lake towards Lake Huron. An Indian return-
ing homewards to his camp in the evening
during the fall of 1828 late in October or
early November, observed a pair of strange-

146 THE CANADIAN
looking birds, of which he was ignorant,
alight upon an old log upon the shore, near
the edge of the water, apparently much
fatigued. He fired and killed both at one
shot. I regretted much they were skinned
and stuffed with feathers when they came
into my hands through the kindness and
attention of Mr. Charles Heward of York.”
According to Fothergill’s very detailed de-
scription: ‘“. .. the length of one of the birds
from tip of bill to end of tail 2 feet 24% inches,
of the other, 2 feet 3%, but this difference
might have been occasioned by the stuffing
or drying ... . bill to the corners of the
mouth in one specimen was 5% inches in
the other 534 inches, following the curve of
the upper mandible. Both mandibles much
curved and the upper one grooved and pol-
ished the entire length, the bill very thick
and strong at the base and somewhat swelled
out at the tip, of a dark olivaceous brown or
deep horn colour approaching to an entire
black. Head, neck and all the under paris
of a deep and rich chocolate brown or mul-
berry colour, brightest on the breast and a
good deal glossed on the shoulders and upper
part of the back, etc... .”

WHISTLING SWAN.

Cygnus columbianus. — Additional records
for the Whistling Swan in the county were
established during 1948. On March 28, 1948,
Dr. E. L. Brereton saw 10 swans flying north-
westward over Barrie. Mr. A. J. Mitchener
noted 5 swans on Nottawasaga Bay, near
Craigleith on November 11, 1948; and 14
were counted in Collingwood Harbour by Dr.
Brereton on December 5, 1948. An interest-
ing summer record concerns a Whistling
Swan which was found alive on July 31, 1949
in a ditch near Alliston by Game Overseer
Ellis. The swan, which appeared to have an
injured wing, was brought to Barrie but
lived only a few days.

KING EIDER.

Somateria spectabilis. — On December 15,
1948, Dr. E. L. Brereton saw a King Eider
off Big Bay Point, Innisfil Township, Lake
Simeoe. This constitutes the second record
for the county, a specimen (in the Royal
Ontario Museum of Zoology) having been
taken on November 1, 1926.

GYRFALCON.

Falco rusticolus. — Dr. E. L. Brereton ob-
served a White Gyrfalcon near Barrie on

FIeELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64—

October 26, 1948. A letter received from
him at that time states, in part: “Mrs. Brere-
ton and I drove out the Shanty Bay road
about 9:30 A.M. Passing through the heavily
wooded part east of Raikes, I suddenly noticed
through a break in the trees a large bird that
I at once thought to be a Snowy Owl. It was
sitting ten feet from the ground on the
lower branch of an old dead tree which stood
out alone about 200 yards from us in an
open pasture field . . . stepping out of. the
car I discovered that the supposed owl was
in reality a hawk — yes, beyond any doubt
it had a hawk’s head. The head, throat,
breast and upper part of the body were pure
white. The lower part of the body down to
the branch was white but a little dingy.
Several inches of tail showing below the
branch were pure white. There was a little
dusky smudge around the eyes and as it
turned its head two or three times and its
body once to the right I could see dark
markings on the back of the neck, back and —
lower edge of the wings (primaries)

As I stood watching it (after nearly 10
minutes) it suddenly shot out from the tree
and with outstretched wings glided swiftly to
the ground 75 yards away where a flock of
starlings exploded into the air ...as the hawk |
also shot straight up into the air I had a

brief but clear view of the wings. They were
those of a falcon.”
KING RAIL.
Rallus elegans. — Mr. A. D. Henderson of

Belvedere, Alberta, and formerly of Barrie,
in a letter to the writer dated December 29,
1944, states: “On November 9, 1896, I killed
a large rail on the Nottawasaga River, I think
it was a King Rail. I believe this record
perfectly good as I had Mecllwraith’s Birds of

‘On‘ario and Coues Key to refer to at that

time.” This is an additional species for the
county.

STILT SANDPIPER.

Micropalama himantopus. — On August 25,
1945, Dr. E. L. Breretom identified a Stilt
Sandpiper as it fed in shallow water, within
20 feet of him, at Courtice’s pond on the
northern outskirts of Barrie. This is the first
record for the county.

BUFF-BREASTED SANDPIPER.

Tryngites subruficollis. — A single individual
was under observation for over three hours |
on the shore at Wasaga Beach by Dr. E. L.

\

July-August, 1950]

Brereton on August 28, 1949. This is the
initial record of this species for the county.

WILSON’S PHALAROPE.

Steganopus tricolor. — The status of this
species has changed from a rare spring and
fall visitant to that of a rare summer breeding
bird. On two occasions within recent years
Wilson’s Phalarope has been found breeding

in the county. On June 16, 1946, a party of

naturalists consisting of Messrs. David West,
W. W. Smith, F. H. Emery and R. V. Lindsay
discovered a pair of these birds breeding in
the Holland River Marsh north of Bradford
railroad station. Actions of the adults led
to the finding of two young, three or four

\ days old, running about in the marsh. One

of the young was collected and is now in the
Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology.

On July 20, 1947, the writer encountered
a pair of these birds at Marl Lake, Flos
Township. Their actions indica‘ed that they
were probably nesting but it was not until
August 3, that evidence in the form of a
young bird, barely able to fly, was discovered
in the sedgy margin of the lake. These two
records appear to be the most eas‘erly nest-
ings of this species for Ontario.

GREAT BLACK-BACKED GULL.

Larus marinus. — On November 25, 1944,
Dr. R. M. Saunders observed two Great
Black-backed Gulls at Cook’s Bay, Lake
Simcoe. This was the first reported occur-
rence of this species in the county. Another
was seen at Barrie on January 3, 1949, by
Dr. E. L. Brereton and a third was noted at
Wasaga Beach on April 17, 1949 by Dr. Paul
Harrington.

RING-BILLED GULL.
Larus delawarensis. — To the returns from

Florida, Cuba and Jamaica for gulls banded

in Simcoe County, already reported, the fol-
lowing outstanding recovery can be added —
A young Ring-billed Gull banded by Mr. H.
H. Southam in June, 1945, at Gull Island,
near Penetanguishene (Band No. 41-669469),
was found dead on November 5, 1945 at Horta,
Fayal, Azores Islands, by Senor Jose Larango.

FRANKLIN’S GULL.

Larus pipixcan. — A second record for this
western gull was made on October 26, 1948,

‘when Mr. James Westman noted an immature

flying over Kempenfelt Bay, Barrie. The

-writer in company with Dr. E. L. Brereton

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 147

watched this bird for an hour on November 7,
as it dived for minnows along with many
Bonaparte’s Gulls near Barrie railroad station.

This individual was present until November

20, according to Dr. Brereton.

THICK-BILLED MURRE.

Uria lomvia. — Additional occurrences for
this unusual species were reported on Decem-
ber 8, 1948, when Mrs. James Westman saw
a single individual on Kempenfelt Bay, off
Lover’s Creek, and called it to the attention
of Dr. E. L. Brereton, who confirmed the
identification; and December 15, of the same
year, when Dr. Brereton saw eight of them
off Big Bay Point, Lake Simcoe.

HAWK OWL.

Surnia ulula. — A mounted specimen, which
had been shot by Mr. Lawrence Davis at New
Lowell on November 3, 1933, has been
examined by the writer. This is the second
record for the county. ,

CAROLINA WREN.

Thryothorus ludovicianus. — In a recent
conversation, Mr. Norman Martin assured the
writer that he had observed this large wren
at close range and heard it singing on June
30, 1939, at his Lake Simcoe summer home at
Sandy Cove, Innisfil Township. This is the
only record of its occurrence in the county.

PHILADELPHIA VIREO.

Vireo philadelphicus. — The first breeding
of this species in the county was established
on July 25, 1948, when Mr. A. A. Outram
saw a young bird, out of the nest, being fed
by a parent on an island in the Severn River,
two miles northeast of Washago. The island
is located on Lot 11, Concession 18, Orillia
Township. This appears to be the most
southerly nesting record of the Ed
Vireo for Ontario.

CAPE MAY WARBLER.

Dendroica tigrina. — A male observed on
Beckwith Island in July, 1948, by Dr. J.
Murray Speirs marked the most southerly
summer occurrence for Ontario.

RED CROSSBILL.

Loxia curvirostra. — Present on Beckwith
Island from May 25 to July 11, 1948, accord-
ing to Dr. J. M. Speirs, constituting the
second summer occurrence for Simcoe
County.

148 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

HENSLOW’S SPARROW.

Passerherbulus henslowti. — A new sum-
mer location for this rare sparrow was dis-
covered by Dr. J. Murray Speirs on July 7,
1945, when he noted several singing males in
a grassy field, 3 miles west of Barrie on the
Camp Borden road. The birds were still
present on July 27.

SHARP-TAILED SPARROW.

Ammospiza caudacuta. — This interesting
sparrow was added to the county list when
one was identified under excellent light
condition by Dr. E. L. Brereton on September
19, 1945, in the northern environs of Barrie.

CLAY-COLOURED SPARROW.

Spizella pallida. — Here is another species
whose status in the county appears to have
changed since 1942. Formerly recorded only
as a rare migrant, we now find it summering
in at least four localities. On June 28, 1945,
Mr. R. D. Ussher saw two singing Clay-
coloured Sparrows in a mixed plantation of
small red, scotch and jack pines at Elsie
Mills County Forest, Concession 6, Medonte
Township. Dr. J. Murray Speirs found at
least two singing birds, which seemed
definitely established in a pine plantation, on
the southwestern outskirts of Penetangui-
shene on May 30, 1948.

Other occurrences noted by Mr. R. D. Us-
sher which may indicate possible breeding

[Vol. 64

areas are two birds at Midhurst Re-forest
Station on June 7, 1946, and another along
the northern boundary of Camp Borden, near
Angus on June 10, 1949.

HARRIS’S SPARROW.

Zonotrichia querula. — In addition to the
two sight observations of Harris’s Sparrow
previously reported, there can be added the
following:—On October 18, 1947, the writer
and his wife noticed one of these large west-
ern sparrows in a mixed flock of White-
throated and White-crowned Sparrows mov-
ing southwestward along the ridge at Three
Mile Point, near Wasaga Beach. This bird,

which was eventually collected, proved to be ©
an immature female and apparently the first —

specimen for the county.

SMITH’S LONGSPUR.

Calcarius pictus. — This longspur is included
on the basis of two sight records. Although
no specimens are as yet available, it is be-
lieved that the birds concerned in the
following observations were of this species.
The first was detected by Dr. E. L. Brereton
in a flock of feeding Lapland Longspurs in
a ploughed field near Barrie on November 2,
1947. Another was identified by the writer
and his wife on May 22, 1949, near Elmvale,
Flos Township. Further work may establish
Smith’s Longspur as a rare, but regular,
migrant through the county.

DIRECTIONS FOR USING A PLASTIC ADHESIVE IN MOUNTING
PRESSED BOTANICAL SPECIMENS °

V. H. H. WILiramson, *
Wildlife Food Habits Research Laboratory, Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology, Toronto.

HE PURPOSE of this paper is to intro-

duce the use of plastic adhesives in
place of glues in the process of mounting
pressed plant specimens. In an effort to
devise a method of mounting plant speci-
mens which would require a minimum of
time and give maximum strength and dura-
bility, the Wildlife Food Habits Research
Laboratory sponsored by the Ontario Re-
search Council at the Royal Ontario Museum

1 Received for publication April 3, 1950.

2 Future work of the author will be carried on with the
Department of Lands and Forests, Maple, Ontario.

of Zoology, experimented with Polyvinyl
Acetate. This material produced the desired
results.

In addition to the experiments with Poly-
vinyl Acetate, laboratory reports were con-
sulted from the Shawinigan Falls Chemicals
Limited, Quebec, and from the Carbide and
Carbon Chemicals Corporation, New York.
These gave proof of even higher qualities
and greater permanence than were first
anticipated.

Polyvinyl Acetate is recognized in Canada
under the trade name of “Gelva’”. It con-

Oe ee oe

ea

a

July-August, 1950] THE CANADIAN
sists of colourless, granular crystals and is
graded by its degree of polymerization or
molecular weight. The viscosity in solution
is the distinguishing point between the vari-
ous grades. The grades now being manu-
factured range from V.1.5 to V.60. A medi-
um to high viscosity is recommended for
porous materials, and it was found that the
grade V.25 gave excellent results. Gelva
has many solvents, but methyl or 95% ethyl
alcohol has proved to be best suited for our
purpose. The solution is obtained by adding
one part by measure of Gelva crystals to
two parts of ethyl alcohol. The mixture is
then heated in a double-boiler until all the
crystals are dissolved. A low flame should
be used and other necessary precautions
taken. Alcohol being quite volatile, it is
often necessary to add small quantities to a
mixed solution of gelva when open and in
use.

The following implements are required for
mounting under this method (as with the
usual “glue” method):

1 sheet of glass (slightly larger than the

common herbarium paper).
1 jar of. Gelva and 1 of solvent

2 pairs of forceps (1 kept free of solution
to arrange specimens)

1 ordinary plant press and weight (10 to
12 Ibs.)

A piece of gauze, an applicator (brush),
two or three small blotters, herbarium pa-
per and newsprint.

Procedure:

(i) Arrange the specimen to be mounted
in the desired position on a sheet of
herbarium paper and make a mental
note of the composition.

(ii) Spread a thin layer of Gelva over
the glass, using any of the con-
ventional methods (brush, swab, roll-
coat, etc.).

(iii) Place the specimen in the layer of
: Gelva on the glass and make-sure
all the under surface is coated.

(iv) Lift the specimen carefully by the
stalk or stem and allow the tension
to draw the leaves and branches
from the solution.

(v) Place the apex of the specimen in
the desired position on the paper,
then arrange the leaves and branches
as it is lowered.

Swab off any surplus solution with

(vi)
gauze dampened in the solvent.

FIELD-NATURALIST

149

(vii) Place the specimen in the press be-
tween sheets of newsprint and apply
the weight.

In the interim of finishing the mount, the
solution on the glass may become tacky. In
this case an application of the solvent or an
additional layer of Gelva should be applied
before continuing. If the layer on the glass
begins to set or becomes too unwieldy, it
can be rolled off under warm water. Then
the glass should be dried and a fresh layer
of Gelva added. Do not discard the ball of
Gelva removed from the glass as it will
dissolve overnight in the Gelva stock in
the jar. If the newsprint in the press should
stick to the mount, merely apply the solvent
over the spot on the newsprint and it will
soak through sufficiently to release it.

Labels may be fastened to the mount be-
fore placing it in the press. Touch the
corners of the label to the solution on the
glass and apply it to the lower right hand
corner of the mount. When the press is
filled (ordinarily 20 or 30 specimens) the
first specimens may be removed, placed in
their genus covers and incorporated into the
collection. By the time the day’s mounting
is completed and materials and equipment
cleaned and stored, the remainder of the
plants may then be taken from the press and
placed in the herbarium.

Several hundred plants in the herbarium
of the Wildlife Food Habits Laboratory have
been mounted with Gelva. Use of these
specimens shows no loose ends of leaves,
petals, stems or branches with the usual
resulting damage through handling. Gum-
med strips formerly used for specimen
mounts have been eliminated entirely. A
collection of plants gathered in the latter
part of the 19th century has been remounted,
following the method described above, with
amazing results. The undersurfaces of these
old desiccated specimens, impregnated with
Gelva in the process of mounting, were
strengthened to such an extent that the
plants will either support the mounting
paper if picked up at one end or will bend
with no injury to the specimen whatever.

In conclusion the following points are
worthy of note:

a) The mounts are extremely durable due
to the fact that Gelva reinforces the
plants with a backing of plastic that is
unaffected by age and does not become
brittle after drying. Gelva has very
high penetrative qualities which are
especially valuable for adhering water-

150

proof stems and culms of grasses. The
specimens will not become detached
but can be removed with the solvent if

necessary. Tapes are eliminated entire- |

ly.

b) The mounts are clean as Gelva is colour-
less and the surplus is readily dissolved
with alcohol without discolouration of
the sheet. Blue and purple anthocya-
nin pigments in petals and other piant
parts are not affected since Gelva does
not contain acid.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

»

c) Gelva can be spread easily over the
glass, flows rapidly over the eontacting
surfaces and dries by the evaporation
of the alcohol.

‘d) The use of Gelva has proved to:be an
economical method of mounting pressed
plant specimens. Only a very small
quantity is required to do a number of
plants and the Gelva film left on the
glass is reclaimable. Also the time re-
quired in processing is less than that
required in older methods.

FRANCIS J. A. MORRIS (1869 - 1949)

EpMUND M. WALKER
Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology, Toronto.

N THE DEATH of Francis J. A. Morris,

Canada has lost a great teacher of English
literature, a classical scholar, a writer of
charm in both prose and verse, and a natural-
ist of distinction. After a lingering illness of
some years’ duration, he died on December
31, 1949. ;

Until he was 25 years old, Frank Morris
lived in the British Isles. He was born in
1869 in a parsonage near the Scottish town
of Crieff, in Perthshire, where he remained
until the death of his father, when Frank was
thirteen years old. It was during these boy-
hood years in Scotland that he laid the
foundation of his later interests. He was
fascinated by all the living things about him.
Flowers were his first interest, then, with
the companionship of his brother, he became
engrossed in birds and birds’ nesting, in the
rearing of moths and butterflies, and finally
in insects generally, which, for a few years,
the brothers collected assiduously.

After the death of their father, the boys
were moved to London, where they suffered
a partial separation by attending different
schools, but still carried on their hobbies
together. Frank attended Dulwich College,
where he became immersed in the Classics
and English literature, reading widely, parti-
cularly nineteenth century poetry and the
novels of the day. The brothers continued
to spend their free time together, adding to
their collection of insects and, under the
guidance of a new school friend, making long
excursions into the countryside. This friend’s
favourite hobby was fossil collecting and to

this new pastime he introduced the Morris
brothers, taking them out to the chalk pits
near Croydon, where they spent many hours
digging out fossils from the chalk beds and
delighting in the many new kinds of birds
and insects of the downs.

The brothers still spent their holidays
together in their old haunts in Scotland but,
when Frank was sixteen, his brother set sail
for Australia and Frank was thrown on his
own resources. School studies claimed most
of his time and the boyish interest in collect-
ing waned, although his delight in the con-
templation of living nature grew even more
intense.

Morris’s outlook on nature, however, soon

began to be coloured by a rapidly growing -

interest in Darwinism and the theory of
Evolution, which he had often heard dis-
cussed at school, although it was during a
holiday trip in Scotland that his interest in
the subject was truly aroused. An old army
doctor, who had often been the boys’ host,
was a great reader and a keen disciple of
Darwin and it was his exposition of the

subject that actually kindled Morris’s imagi-

nation.

At Oxford University, Morris continued to
pursue the Classics and English literature but
varied his reading with many works on
Evolution. In spite of this new interest,
however, his emotional attitude toward nature
not only persisted but was kindled afresh by
his discovery that in Wordsworth’s poetry
was the expression of all his own feelings
and sentiments concerning nature.

[Vol. 64 4

July-August, 1950]

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

151

Francis J. A. MORRIS (1869-1949)

Soon after graduating from Oxford, Morris
came out to Canada, spending his first winter
in Toronto in attendance at the Normal
* School. It was in Toronto that he first met
Dr. William Brodie, to whom he owed his
introduction to Canadian natural history.
Dr. Brodie remained a close friend of Morris
until his death in 1909, which was commem-
orated by Morris in his poem “The Master
Mind”.

After a summer in Toronto, Morris was
appointed to the staff of the High School at
Smiths Falls and here he learned from the
science master how to identify plants with a
“key”, for he had never employed scientific
methods. before, as there were plenty of
popular guides to the British flowers and
birds. This new skill became a veritable
obsession to him. He was never tired of
adding to his acquaintance with the local
flora so that, by the end of the second year,
when he left Smiths Falls, he knew most of
the commoner flowering plants of the district.

At this time he accepted a private tutor-
ship in the neighbouring town of Perth, and
it happened that his pupil was an ardent
ornithologist. A close friendship grew up
between tutor and pupil of the give-and-take
kind, and the teacher learned much from the
pupil about Ontario birds and their songs
and calls.

In 1899 Morris returned to Toronto for
the spring and summer. He again had the
companionship of Dr. Brodie and enjoyed the
opportunity of adding to his knowledge of the
Ontario flora. In the following April he had

settled in Port Hope where he had been
appointed classical master in Trinity College
School. His first two seasons here were spent
in active pursuit of botany and ornithology.
For a time his attention was mainly concen-
trated on bird watching, but he also gave
much of his free time to those pupils who
were interested in natural history, particu-
larly in competing for a prize that was offered
annually for the best collection of “flowers,
foliage and ferns”. These boys organized a
Field Ciub with Morris as their Honorary
President.

One April morning a deputation from the
club came to ask Morris if insects could be
accepted as a subject for the prize competi-
tion. After some consideration Morris agreed
to this, but limited the field to Moths and
Butterflies or Beetles. Beetles having been
chosen by some of the boys, the difficulty of
naming them at once became a major prob-
lem, and thus .Morris was besieged with en-
quiries morning, noon and night. Beetles had
as yet no place in Morris’s hobbies and there
was no “Beetle Book”, like Holland’s Butter-
fly Book and Moth Book. Thus, out of sheer
desperation, Morris began to make a collec-
tion of beetles for himself and, with the help
of various texts, he was soon a beetle addict
in an advanced stage. This interest in beetles,
particularly the “long-horns”, became a per-
manent one and is reflected in a number of
delightful essays that appeared during the
years from 1913 to 1920 in the Canadian
Entomologist and the Annual Reports of the
Entomological Society of Ontario. He served
as President of this Society from 1921 to 1923.

152

Morris had long desired to teach in the
Provincial Schools rather than the private
schools but, in order to qualify as a “Special-
ist” in Classics, as required by the Depart-
ment of Education, he left Port Hope in 1911
' for a year at the University of Toronto. In
the following year he obtained the degree of
Master of Arts as well as the Specialist’s
Certificate in Classics, and in September, 1913,
he was appointed to the staff of the Peter-
borough Collegiate Institute. Here he taught
Classics for a time, but his colleagues, recog-
nizing his flair for literature, urged him to
teach English. This he was finally persuaded
to do but, in order to qualify as a “Specialist”
in English, he must also become a specialist
in History. Accordingly, although it was a
heavy burden, he went once more to Toronto
and, in another year, he obtained the neces-
sary certificate which enabled him to head
the English Department in the Peterborough
Collegiate Institute, a position which he re-
tained until his retirement in 1936.

It was not long after Morris was settled
in Peterborough that he. chanced to meet
Edward A. Eames of Buffalo, whose hobby
was the photographing of wild orchids. These
were also favourites of Morris, and it was
not long before the two en‘husiasts had
planned to collaborate in a book for the
amateur naturalist, on Our Wild Orchids,
the text to be written by Morris and the
illustrations furnished by Eames. A most
beautiful book was the outcome, a literary
gem, in which the incidents recorded about
each species are set forth in fine prose with
those touches of gentle humour that are part
of the charm of all Morris’s writings. Many
happy years were spent by the “foursome”,

THe CANADIAN Fre_p-NATURALIST

consisting of the two authors and their wives,
in gathering material for this venture. Even
after the book was published, Morris con-
tinued to find his greatest delight in the
tracking down and recording of rare and little-
known orchids.

In addition to his writings on Natural .

History, which included also the widely cir-
culated booklet, Our Wild Flowers, a plea
for their protection, Morris contributed
articles to The Canadian Forum and various
other magazines in Canada and the United
States. Most of his verse is unpublished
but two poems “The First Hepatica” and
“Life” are included in Professor Alexander’s
Shorter Poems (1924) which has been used
for a whole generation in the Ontario High
Schools. His love for the Victorian poets,
especially Wordsworth, is clearly revealed in
his own verse. ;

Any account of Frank Morris’s life, how-
ever brief, would be inadequate without
paying a high tribute to his wife (née Elma
Walker) whom he married while he was
living in Port Hope.
years of his last illness, she ministered faith-
fully and cheerfully to his needs, for he was,
as related by himself, somewhat awkward with
his hands, his fingers being ‘all thumbs’.
The writer recalls a week spent with the
Morrises at Silver Islet, Lake Superior, when
he observed with admiration how Mrs. Morris
would drive the car to any spot that her
husband wished to explore and would cheer-
fully wait for hours, if need be, until his
return. It was most fortunate for him that

he had such a wife to care for him during -

the years of his decline. To this gracious
lady we extend our deepest sympathy.

[Vol. 64 ©

Even before the long ~

Pees

| Sy uly-August, 1950] THE CANADIAN

{

FIELD-NATURALIST

(153

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

An Abnormally Colored Woodcock (Philo-
hela minor). — Mr. R. W. Tufts of Wolfville,
Nova Scotia, has sent me in the flesh a wood-
cock, Philohela minor (Gmelin), which he
characterized as a “Golden Woodcock.” He
writes me that in his long field experience in
the Maritime Provinces of Canada he has
handled thousands of woodcocks and recalls
that about 1909 at Black River, Kings County,
Nova Scotia, he shot one of these especially
brightly colored birds and then dubbed it a
“Golden Woodcock.” Twenty-six years later,
cn October 9, 1935, he was hunting at South
Berwick, Nova Scotia, and shot another bril-
liant, coppery-looking bird. In the first week
of November, 1949, Mr. James Donly of Mill
Village, Queens County, Nova Scotia, told Mr.
Tufts that he had shot a peculiar looking
woodcock, so different from the usual run of
birds that he had placed it in his deep freeze
until Mr. Tufts could see it. Tufts found it
to be another “Golden Woodcock.” Thanks
to the interest and cooperation of Mr. Tufts
I now have this bird before me.

Pettingill (1936, The American Woodcock,
Mem. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc., 9, p. 197) in his
monograph of this species under “Abnormal
Plumage Coloration” listed only a number of
cases of partial albinism. The present spe-
cimen falls in a somewhat different class,
and while perhaps not as as different from
the normal bird as the term “Golden Wood-
cock” might imply, still falls completely out-
side the range of variation of the 64 specimens
of woodcock in the Chicago Natural History
Museum in the considerably more bright red-
dish and less blackish and greyish color of
the upperparts and merits a brief descrip-
tion.

The specimen, taken in the autumn of
1949 presumably in Queens County, Nova
Scotia, is in fresh autumn plumage, and was
fat. It proved impossible to sex it; its size
is: wing 139, exposed culmen about 72 mm.
Compared with other autumn birds, the un-
der parts are richly colored but fall within
the range of variation of normal birds. On
the upper side the primaries are much paler,
_ silvery grey rather than blackish; the inner
_ secondaries and wing coverts have the black-
ish markings paler, more silvery grey, and
the rufous markings coarser, brighter rufous,

and hence this plumage is more conspicuously
reddish. On the back the black blotches are
still black, but seem reduced in size, and the
finer dark markings are paler, more silvery
grey; the brown markings are coarser and
brighter red; and in some of the grey areas
there is more of a rufous tinge. The result
is to give the upper parts a considerably more
reddish brown, sparsely blotched with black
appearance, rather than a black, grey and —
brownish-barred appearance.

The lack of pronounced individual varia-
tion in the Chicago Natural History Museum
series is rather striking. That unusually red-
dish birds do occur is demonstrated by the
present specimen. The scarcity of such
variants is indicated by Mr. Tufts’ observation
that he has seen but three of these birds in
cver forty years of active bird study and
woodcock shooting. — A. L. RAND, ee
Natural History Museum.

June Record of a European Widgeon in
Manitoba.—The annual Waterfowl Breeding
Ground Survey in Manitoba brought to light
an interesting record of a European Widgeon
(Mareca penelope) from the southwest part
of the province. The bird, an adult male, was
cbserved June 3, 1949, 6 miles southeast of
Hartney, a region of numerous willow-rimmed
potholes. While making a routine survey of
the area I noted a rather grayish widgeon
feeding on this typical slough. Visibility was
excellent and the vegetation gave sufficient
cover for me to observe the undisturbed bird
for 10 minutes with a pair of 7 x 50 Bausch
& Lomb glasses. The bird slowly fed its way
towards me and soon approached a male
American Baldpate (Mareca americana)
which had been sleeping on a muskrat house
some 10 yards away. When the two birds
were both in my field of vision it was ap-
parent that the grayish widgeon had a red-
dish head, a buffy crown, lacked a green eye
patch and checked with all field marks for
the species as given in Peterson’s A Field
Guide to the Birds. The bird appeared to be
healthy and when attacked by the territorial
Baldpate flew off quite readily. There was
no evidence that this was a breeding bird.

The vegetation in the slough was typical
cf the region and consisted of a mixture of
sago pondweed (Potamogeton pectinatus),

154 THE CANADIAN
sparganium, Carex, whitetop (Fluminea fes-
tucacea), smartweed (Polygonum hydropi-
peroides) and a great deal of duckweed
(Lemna). — GRAHAM COOCH, Ottawa, On-
tario.

Arctic Fox on Cape Breton Island.—Reli-
able information regarding the occurrence
of the Arctic Fox (Alopex lagopus) in the
Gulf of St. Lawrence south of the Strait of
Belle Isle is wanting. According to Captain
H. M. Walters, Chief Game Warden for New-
foundland (by letter, 1948), it is an infre-
quent visitor to the coast of Newfoundland.
Seton (Lives of Game Animals, Vol. 1, pt. 2,
p. 433) gives two records for Anticosti based
on an article published in Forest and Stream
by William Couper in 1877. The first and
only record of its occurrence on Cape Breton
Island is that of a specimen taken at Laing
Bay in 1923 (J. L. De Vany, “Arctic Fox
Shot in Cape Breton’, Canadian Field-Natu-
ralist, Sept. 1923, p. 118). In view of the
paucity of published records it seems desir-
able to record the following:

Early in May, 1935, the residents of Port
Hood Island, Cape Breton, reported a small
white “dog”, observed feeding on offal along
a rocky shore. The unusual appearance and
singular behaviour of the animal as reported
by them, prompted me to investigate further.
After several fruitless attempts, I was re-
~ warded by catching sight of the animal which
proved to be an Arctic Fox (Alopex lagopus).
Evidentally unaccustomed to man, it could
be closely approached and examined care-
fully. The diagnostic characters — long,

narrow muzzle, bushy tail, and pure white

coloration, were plainly visible.

Several days later it was captured by Mr.
I. D. Cameron, and held in captivity for a
period of 18 months on his ranch at Port
Hood Island. Mr. Cameron has kindly pro-
vided the following data:

Although unusually tame prior to capture,
it proved to be very timid in captivity. Not
only was it obviously afraid of its human at-
tendants, but also of the red foxes (Vulpes
fulva) in the adjoining pens. Needless to
say, attempts to crossbreed it with the latter
were unsuccessful. The fish diet which it
received was apparently adequate, as it re-
mained in good health and the biannual molts
progressed in an orderly fashion. In the
autumn of 1936, it was pelted and the skin
sold to a fur dealer who further confirmed
my identification.

FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 64

It is believed that this animal reached the
Island on an ice floe which moved into St.
George’s Bay early in May, 1935. — Austin
W. Cameron, National Museum of Canada,
Ottawa. °

Cat-Fox Association. — Several instances
of the association of the red fox (Vulpes
fulva) and the domestic cat (Felis domestica)
have been noticed in the southern Algonquin
Park area. This was first noticed by me dur-
ing the summer of 1948. Several cats, pres-
umably abandoned at one time by a logging
camp had apparently gone feral in the neigh-
bourhood of Little McCauley Lake. Several
times these cats were noticed during our
trips into the lake, but any attempt to ap-
proach them was always quite unsuccessful.

During one of these trips, we rounded a
bend and noticed a red fox and one of these
eats sitting within a foot of each other, at
the side of the road. As we approached, they
fled into the bush together. The cat was
apparently quite used to the idea of the fox
being so intimate, or vice versa.

This fox-cat association was noticed again
in 1949 at Lake Opeongo. This time I noticed
a cat, belonging to the tourist lodge on the
lake, and a fox wandering together in a clear-
ing behind the lodge. They finally disappear-
ed into the bush, still together.

I also found that similar observations
have been made for a pet cat belonging to
one of my co-workers, N. Martin, at the Fish-
eries Research Laboratory at Lake Opeongo.
Several evenings when leaving his cottage
to bring his cat in for the night he shone his
flashlight on the fox and cat together im-
mediately outside the cottage. Apparently
the fox was a frequent visitor to the cottage
while the cat was there. — F. H. SCHULTZ,
Dept. of Zoology, University of Toronto.

Bobolink at Cochrane, Ontario—A male
bobolink (Dolichonyx oryzivorus) was oOb-
served on June 5, 1949 in a meadow at Little
Bell Lake, about five miles north of
Cochrane, Ont. It was repeatedly giving its
flight song, but no female could be found.
This appears to be the most northerly record
of the species in this area, although it is only
slightly north of the breeding ground at Lake
St. John, Que. — D. B. O. SAVILE, Division
ec: Botany and Plant Pathology, Dept. of
Agriculture, Ottawa.

July-August, 1950]

Unusual Behaviour of Wilson’s Snipe.—
Wilson’s snipe, Capella gallinago, disturbed
on Moose Island, near Moosonee, Ont., dur-
ing the second week of June, 1949, did not
usually utter the well-known ‘scaipe’ note
and dart off in zigzag flight. Instead they
would fly about the observer, usually at ran-
ges of ten to thirty yards, giving a slightly
nasal ‘yak’ generally repeated three to eight
times at intervals of half a second, then
pausing for some seconds and repeating the’
performance, This behaviour would continue
for several minutes with one or two birds
taking part. A group of six birds, apparently
migrants, disturbed near Ottawa on April 30,
all gave a similar display for more than fif-
teen minutes with usually two to four doing
so simultaneously, while the others would
sometimes fly off to pezform the winnowing
courtship flight briefly and return to fly
about the observer again. This behaviour
centinued until I left. Bent’ quotes E. W.
Nelson as describing a similar performance
by birds on their breeding grounds in Alaska;
- but I have seen no other record of it——D. B.

O. SAVILE, Division of Botany and Plant
Pathology, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

1 Life North American Shore Birds.

Part 1,

Histories of

1927.

The Roosting Behaviour of a Snow Goose
at Montreal. — One of the most in‘eresting
observations made on the Christmas bird-
census at Montreal on December 19, 1948
was that of a Snow Goose (Chen hyper-
boreus) observed by J. Anglin, J. Pollock, D.
Ryan and the writer. The goose was prob-
ably a young bird, judging by its greyish-
brown plumage, with an injured right leg
which hung down during flight. Its size was
very small, scarcely larger than that of some
herring gulls (Larus argentatus) with which
it settled on the water.

The bird was first seen on Goat Island
in the St. Lawrence arising from the lawn
of a summer cottage facing approximately
northwest towards the river. Later upon our
return past the cottage the bird was seen
standing on the lawn. A closer inspection of
the lawn revealed a peculiar pattern of the
bird’s excrement. The droppings were ar-
ranged in a broad semi-circle whose open
side faced the river while the base of the

\

fap 5

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

155

semi-circle was at the rear of the lawn.
There were about one hundred separate
piles of excrement indicating that this roost
had been used for at least several days. The
shape of the roost suggests that the bird
probably faced towards the river at all times
moving along the are of the semi-circle in
relation to the movement of the sun and the
extent of visibility on the river. — D. M.
SCOTT, Dept. of Zoology, McGill University,
Montreal, Que.

The Semipalmated Sandpiper (Ereunetes
pusillus) in Southwestern New Brunswick. —
Moore! states that the semipalmated sand-
piper is rare in New Brunswick. This remark
may apply to the interior of New Brunswick
but its validity coastwise is contradicted by ©
my experience in the vicinity of St. Andrews,
N.B. where this species is the most abundant
shorebird during the fall migration. At low ©
tide the extensive mudflats are the feeding
grounds for hundreds of semipalmated sand-
pipers in August and September. Upon one
occasion in August, 1948, I found a night
roost of this species containing not less than
two thousand birds. Its abundance in this
region has already been recorded by Pet- .
tingill2 who considered the species as an
“abundant transient”. This sandpiper is rare
in the spring; I have only seen a few in-
dividuals at this season and it is possible
that Moore’s knowledge of this bird was
restricted to the spring migration.

1, Moore, W. H., 1928. ‘A list of New Bruns-
wick birds”’., 24 pp., Fredericton
Science Club.

2. Pettingill, Jr. O. S., 1939. “The Bird life of
the Grand Manan Archipelago”.
Proc. Nova Scotian Inst. Sci., Vol.
XIX pt. 4 pp. 293-372.

— D. M. SCOTT, Dept. of Zoology, McGill

University, Montreal, Que.

Kodachrome slides of Canadian birds.—Of
interest to naturalists, teachers, and others
who lecture on birds is a new series of 2 x 2
Kodachrome slides now obtainable from the
Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology, 100
Queen’s Park, Toronto 5, Ontario. Approxi-
mately 150 species of Canadian birds are re-
presented, the price being $1.00 per slide.—
W. E. G.

156

The first record of the Chiselmouth,
Acrocheilus alutaceus Agassiz and Pickering,
from British Columbia, Canada. — A single
specimen of chiselmouth was obtained by
gill net on July 22, 1948, in Skaha lake, British
Columbia. The net was set in approximately
fifteen feet of water at the mouth of the
Okanagan river at the north end of the lake.

Skaha lake is on the upper reaches of the
Columbia river drainage, in the Okanagan
valley, immediately south of Okanagan lake.

The appearance of this specimen repre-
sents a considerable northward extension of
the known range for the species. Schultz and

Tuer CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

DeLacy (Journ. Pan-Pac. Res. Inst., 10(4),
(1935) record the general range as the lower
Columbia river system and Malheur lake
drainage, Oregon, but also include records
of specimens taken in the Spokane, Washing-
ton area, which is above the junction of the
Okanagan and Columbia rivers.

The measurements and counts of the spe-
cimen taken were: length 20.5 cm. standard
length; lateral line scales on right side 87;
fin rays: dorsal 10, anal 9, pectorals 17, pel-
vic 9; colour brownish with orange under
bases of pectoral and pelvic fins—R. G. FER-
GUSON, Department of Zoology, University
of British Columbia.

=

REVIEWS

4

The Sandhill Cranes. By Lawrence H.
Walkinshaw. Cranbrook Institute of Science,
Bull. 29, 1949, pp. I-X, 1-202, pls. 1-17.

In the past fifteen years the author has
travelled some 70,000 miles in Alaska, Canada,
the United States, Cuba, and the Isle of Pines
to study the four known races of the Sandhill
Crane, Grus canadensis. Sections of the book
are devoted to plumages and molts, voice,
behaviour, food and feeding habits, pairing
and territory, nesting, and the young. An-
other section deals with this crane in the
fall, winter, and spring seasons and there
also is a history of North American crane po-
pulations.

Appendix A is a Key to the Cranes of
the World. Appendix B presents the distri-
butional information known to the author,
these date being arranged seasonally and
subspecifically. The breaking down of some
of the field observations into subspecies was
undoubtedly a difficult undertaking. In one
case (p. 168) a small breeding female and a
set of eggs from near Yorkton, Saskatchewan,
is identified as probably canadensis while on
page 173 apparently the same female and
set of eggs are referred to tabida. It would
seem best to refer them to the latter.

The detailed information brought toge-
ther in this book is well organized and in-
terestingly presented. One is impressed with
the abundant detailed information which is
a result of the author’s own observations.
There is a bibliography and an index. —- W.
EARL GODFREY

The Siphonaptera of Canada. By George
P. Holland. 306 pages, 44 distribution maps,
42 plates containing 350 figures. Technical
Bulletin No. 70 of the Dominion of Canada,
Department of Agriculture.

The Siphonaptera of Canada by George
P. Holland issued September 1949 (actual
mailing date, December 6, 1949) is a major

contribution to the knowledge of the Si-

phonaptera of North America and is essen-
tially a taxonomic monograph. It supplements
the previous books: Fleas of Eastern United
States, by Irving Fox, 1940, and Fleas of
Western North America, by C. A. Hubbard,
1947.

Most of the work on this volume was done
by Mr. Holland while at the Livestock Insects
Laboratory, Kamloops, British Columbia, and
he personally collected many of the specimens
used in this study. Mr. Holland has now been
transferred to Systematic Entomology, Divi-
sion of Entomology, Ottawa, Ontario. *

One hundred twenty-seven species and
subspecies of fleas representing five families
are treated in this monograph. Six species
included, are believed to be introduced from
Europe or Asia. ;

Introductory sections are devoted_ to
acknowledgements (which are generous),
synopsis of families, genera and species, dis-
tribution by Provinces, notes on life history
1 Chief, Unit of Systematic Entomology, Division of

Entomology, Science Service, Canada Department
of Agriculture. > !

PE

es et Te

|
wa
By

[Vol. 64- |

;
;
i
;

s

July-August, 1950] THE CANADIAN
and ecology, host specificity, geographical
distribution, notes on the relationship of
Nearctic and Palearctic fleas, economic im-

‘portance of fleas, notes on anatomy as ap-

plied to systematics, and the problem of flea
taxonomy.

A key to the genera which has received
much careful consideration introduces the
real taxonomy section which is arranged by
families, genera, and species, respectively.
Each species is given separate consideration
with a bibliography, distribution map, and
figures of critical characters, interesting
notes on relationships, host and geographic
distribution, and specific collection records
including locality, date, host, number of
specimens collected and collector.

Tedious and lengthy redescriptions of
well-recognized species giving bristle counts
and measuzements are omitted. New species
and subspecies are adequately described and
figured. A comprehensive host-flea index in-
dicates the author’s opinion on (1) true host-
parasite relationships, (2) doubtful, and (3)
cbviously accidental host records which are
very numerous in fleas. This is based on the
eollection and examination of many thou-
sands of specimens. An appendix discusses
rotes on collecting methods, mounting tech-
niques, and a glossary of collectors. The
bibliography covers 12 pages.

The 42 plates of 350 line drawings in-
eluding critical characters of every recogniz-
ed Canadian species demand special mention.
They are superior in choice of subject, in ac-
curacy, in technique of execution, and in re-
production. These are all original drawings
by Mr. Holland and it may be said that
preparation of this book was delayed at one
time by prolonged eye fatigue or failure in
making these camera lucida drawings.

In the systematic arrangement of Cerato-
phyllidae, Holland has used the basic division
into genera proposed by Jordan 1933 instead
of the revision by Ewing and Fox 1943 which
has in general been rejected by students of
North American fleas. f

Described as new are:

Hystrichopsylla occidentalis
Hystrichopsylla spinata

Callistopsyllus campestris
Peromyscopsylla hesperomys pacifica —
Megabothris obscurus

FIELD-NATURALIST

157

The hitherto unknown male of Megarthro-
cglossus divisus exsecatus Wagner, and the
females of Tarsopsylla coloradensis (Baker)
and Malaraeus euphorbi (Rothschild) are des-
cribed. A new subfamily, Nearctopsyllinae,
is proposed. Monopsyllus bakeri (Wagner) is
shown to be a synonym of M. thambus (Jor-
dan). Opisodasys jellisoni Fox is considered
a synonym of Tarsopsylla coloradensis
(Baker). :

Most of the collections are from specifical-
ly determined hosts, giving adding value to
tnese host-parasite records.

An impressive list of Canadian naturalists,
trappers, Royal Canadian Mounted Police,
clergymen, and others have contributed speci-
mens to this study.

It is a pleasure to see this volume added
te the literature on ectoparasites. — W. L.
JELLISON.

Bird-Watching. Fifteenth Annual Report
of the British Trust for Ornithology, 1948
(1949), pp. 1-49.

This interesting report outlines some of
the ornithological problems investigated by
the British Trust for Ornithology during 1948.
Considerable emphasis on population den-
sities is apparent. There are well-organized
long-term censuses of such species as_ the
Great Crested Grebe, the Hobby, and the
Black Redstart, as well as of the heronries
in the British Isles. Extensive studies of the
migration of waders, terns, and swifts are
kLeing made. A particularly worthwhile study,
by the Edward Grey Institute, of factors in-
ffuencing numbers of the Great Tit, Parus
niajor, is begun. -

The opening of milk bottles and the drink-
ing of the milk by birds, first recorded in the
British Isles in 1921, has become widespread
in many parts of England and less exten-
sively in Scotland, Wales, and Ireland. This
behavior was investigated by the B.T.O. The
vast majority of the attacks on milk bottles,
it was found, were by two tits, Parus major
and P. caeruleus, although 11 species of birds
lave been reported obtaining food in this
way.

An apparently effective system for the
collecting of nesting date is being carried out
by the British Trust for Ornithology. Cards .
con which data can be written in by the ob-
server are sent to cooperators. When these

are completed they are returned to the files
/

158

of the B.T.O. and a mass of definite informa-
tion is thus being accumulated. Such a Sys-
tem could be emulated with profit elsewhere.
—W. EARL GODFREY.

Mammals of North America. By Victor H.
Cahalane. The MacMillan Co., New York,
1947; x + 682 pages; Illus., with drawings
by Francis L. Jacques. $7.50.

As the author points out in his intro-
duction, the present volume is_ iritended
primarily for the laymen. From the great
mass of published technical and semi-tech-
nical material that has appeared down
through the years, Mr. Cahalane has ex-
tracted the most significant facts and trans-
lated them into language inte.ligible to” the
average reader. Such a task is by no means
an easy one and the author is to be compli-
mented on an excellent job.

With the interests of his readers clearly in
mind the author deals first with the larger,
and to the ‘man on the street, more interest-
ing mammals. Avoiding the technical classi-
fications generally employed in works of this
kind, he groups the mammals under such
headings as “The Deer Family” (moose, cari-
bou, deer, etc.), “Original American Live-
stock” (bison, muskoxen, goats, etc.), “The
Musk-carriers’ (weasels, otter, skunks, etc.),
and so on. Within these higher categories he
treats each species independently, giving the
common and scientific names, general de-
scription, distinguishing characteristics, and
distribution. As might be expected, emphasis
is placed on pertinent facts pertaining to
habits and life history. Drawing his material
from numerous published sources as well as
from personal observations, he writes a
scientifically accurate yet highly entertain-
ing account of each mammal, dealing with
such subjects as behaviour, breeding, hiber-
nation, predators, and numerous other topics.
With regard to behaviour, his anthropomor-
phic interpretations may irritate the scien-
tist, but they will delight the layman, for
whom, after all, the book was written. There
is an excellent bibliography which should
prove extremely useful to both scientist and
layman. The black and white drawings by
the famous artist, Francis L. Jacques add im-
measurably to the value of the book. —
AUSTIN W. CAMERON.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

- this book was

[Vol. 64-

Introducing the Insect. By F. A. Urquart.
Illustrations by E. B. S. Logier. Clarke
Irwin & Co., Toronto. Price $5.00.

As the author makes clear in the preface,
intended for the amateur
entomologist; to help him in collecting,
preserving and studying the insects he finds;
to assist in the identification of the common
insects to the proper Family, and to guide
his studies of insects and their habits in the
early stages. Identification keys are pro-
vided for the common families of insects and
are well illustrated. For a closer identifi- -
cation of his collections the student must go
to more advanced texts or to specialists.

The first chapters deal with making insect .
collections, and, briefly, with anatomy and
life history. The chapter on classification
and identification is an exceptionally fine
introduction to a difficult subject. The
remaining chapters deal with the commoner
Orders and Families, giving a general ac-
count of the Order and a key to the com-
mon Families in the Order, followed by a
discussion of habits and life-histories in each
Family.

The insect habits and life-histories are
dealt with at considerable length and in a
manner likely to awaken and hold the in-
terest of the young reader. The illustrations
are exceptionally good. They include four
good colour plates, 160 line-drawings and
many additional line-drawings illustrating the
keys.

The identification keys serve their purpose
well and are illustrated so effective’y that
one wonders whether the amateur will
trouble to use the text.

The design of the book is good and a
fairly even balance is held in the treatment
of the groups. While an entomologist would
find a few minor defects, there are none of |
great importance, but it might be suggested
that the second edition would be improved by
an expansion of the keys and of the text of
the more important Families, and that more
attention to the economic species could add
a great deal of interest.

Introducing the Insect should be in the
library in all our schools which teach Nature
Study and certainly no amateur entomologist
in this country can afford to be-without it. —
J. M. SWAINE.

President Emeritus: Dr. H. M. Speecy:

_ Herpetological: Chair.

AFFILIATED SOCIETIES

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY
OF MANITOBA

OFFICERS FOR 1949-50

President:
A. H. SHORTT; Vice-Presidents: R. Mrs.
D. B. SPARLING; General para Miss WINONA
DOWNES; Executive Secretary: H. V. HOSFORD;
Treasurer: H. MOSSOP; Auditor: W. A. CARTWRIGHT;
Social Convenor: Mrs. R. K. HELYAR.

SECTIONS—
o Agger Chair. D. HARRY YOUNG; Sec. WAR-
REN JOHNSTON. Entomological: Chair. H. R. WONG;
Sec. j. D. SMITH. Botanical: Chair. Mrs. E. J. McMIL-
LAN; Sec. Mrs. D.B. SPARLING. Geological: Chair.
A. G. LAWRENCE; Sec. P. H. STOKES. Mammalogical:
Chair. L. T. S. NORRIS-ELYE; Sec. D. K. SMITH.
R. K. STEWART-HAY; Sec. D.
K. SMITH. Archaeological: Chair. Walter M. Hlady;
Sec: Mrs. P. H. STOKES.

Meetings are held each Monday evening, except on
holidays, from October to April, in Theatre F of the Uni-
versity of Manitoba, Memorial Boulevard, Winnipeg.
Field excursions are held on Saturdays or Sundays
during May, June and September, and on public holi-
days in July and August. Membership fee: $1 a year
for adults; 25 cents for juniors.

PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL
HISTORY OF CANADA

OFFICERS FOR 1949

President: REX MEREDITH, N.P.; Ist Vice-President: Dr.
VIGER PLAMONDON; 2nd Vice-President: J. GERALD
COOTE; Secretary-Treasurer: GEO. A. LECLERC; Chief
Scientific Section: Dr. D. A. DERY; Chief Protection Sec-
tion: JOS MORIN; Chief Publicity Section: RENE CONS-
TANTINEAU; Chief Information Section; aa

Other directors: J. K. HILL, AUNDERS
HUGILL, STUART ATKINSON, T. J. A. UNTER, Oo.
STUART AHERN, ULRIC G. TESSIER,

MARCEAU, G.
J. C. PRICE.

Secretary’s address: GEORGES A. LECLERC, 85 des
Franciscains St., Quebec, P.Q.

THE TORONTO FIELD-NATURALISTS’

CLUB
OFFICERS FOR 1947-1948
President: C. A. WALKINSHAW: Vice-President: Pro-
fessor A. J. V. LEHMANN; Secretaries: MISS M.

MEASHAM, MRS. J. B. STEWART, Royal Ontario Mu-

100 Queen’s Park; President of Junior Club:

J. W. BARFOOT; Vice-President of Junior Club:
MISS LEWELLA MANN; Executive Council: 1 aa
BAILLIE Jzr., ALFRED BUNKER, A. C. CAMERON, BRO-
THER DENIS, O. E. DEVITT, MISS BARBARA DOUGLAS,
T. W. DWIGHT, MISS MADELEINE FRITZ, MRS. L. E.
JAQUITH, DR. L. E JAQUITH, W. H. MARTIN, DOUGLAS
MILLER, A. A. OUTRAM, MISS LILIAN PAYNE, F.
GREER ROBERTS, MRS. H. C. ROBSON, H. H. SOUTHAM,
EARL STARK, MRS. J. B. STEWART, R. W. TROWERN;
Ex Office: F. C. HURST, R. M. SAUNDERS, T. P.
McILWRAITH,

Meetings are held at 8.15 p.m. on the first Monday of
each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario
Museum, unless otherwise announced. Field trips are
held during the spring and autumn and on the second

seum,

Saturday of each month during the winter.

VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY
SOCIETY

EZECUTIVE OFFICERS — 1946-1947

Hon. President: DR. NORMAN A. M. MacKENZIE, M.M,
B.A., L.L.M., L.L.B., L.L.D., Past President: LAN McTAG-
GERT COWAN, B.A, Ph.D.; President: A. H. BAIN;
Vice-President: J. J. PLOMMER; Corr. Secret A. BR.
WOOTON; Rec. Secretary: MISS STELLA BOY: E Asst.
Secretary: F. TIMMIS; Treasurer: F. J. SANDFORD;
Librarian: MRS. F. MORGAN; Chairmen of sections:
Botany J. DAVIDSON, ES F.B.S.E.: Geology -
M. Y. WILL ILLIAMS, B.Sc. Ph.D., dae sey Entomology -
A. R. ons Omithology - J. HOLMAN: Photo-
ap A P. T. TIMMS: Mammalogy - lan McT. COWAN,
.. Ph.D.: Marine Biology - R. W. PILLSBURY, M.A.;
Junior Section - MISS M. L. ELLIOTT; Additional
eoiaaE a eee - MISS E. SUTHERLAND,
Y, G. R. WOOD. Auditors - H.
SELWOOD, W. B. WOODS. é

All meetings at 8 p.m., Room 100, Applied Science-
Building, University of British Columbia, unless other
wise announced,

McILWRAITH ORNITHOLOGICAL CLUB
LONDON, ONT.

OFFICERS FOR 1949

President: Mr. WM. G. GIRLING, 530 English St., Lon-
don; Vice-president: Mr. J. LEACH, West London P.O.;
Recording Secretary: Miss M. STEVENS, 81 Elmwood
Ave., London; Treasurer: Mr. A. CLENDINNING, 40
Ridout St., London; Migration Secretary: Mr. T. GAR-
SIDE, 27 Elm St., London.

Meetings are held at 8.00 p.m. in the Public Library
biulding on the second Monday of each month from
Sepiember to May.

Field trips are held during the spring and a special
excursion in September.

PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR
THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS INC.

OFFICERS FOR 1950-51

President: G. H. MONTGOMERY JR.; Vice-president :
W. H. RAWLINGS; Vice-president : DR. M. J. DUNBAR;
Treasurer: D. G. ELLIOT; Secretary: MISS R. S.
ABBOTT, 166 Senneville Road, Senneville, P.Q_ .

COMMITTEE

Miss R. S. ABBOTT; J. P. ANGLIN; W. R. B. BERTRAM;
J. D. CLEGHORN; J. A. DECARIE; Dr. M. J. DUNBAR:
Dp. LG vELLIOT: (Mrs. / Do. 'Go) ELLIOT?) G.)) Ho) HALE
W. S. HART; Mrs. C. L. HENDERSON; Miss G. HIBBARD;
He Ae .C... JACKSON; ) Ac Re LEPINGWELL; Gre,
MONTGOMERY; Miss L. MURPHY; G. G. OMMANNEY;
W. H. RAWLINGS; Miss M. SEATH; L. Mcl.
Mrs. L. MclI. TERRIL.

Meetings held the second Monday of the month except
during summer.

BRITISH COLUMBIA BIRD AND
MAMMAL SOCIETY |
President: KENNETH RACEY; Vice-President : f HL

=
ING; Secretary: IAN McT. CO OWAN, Dept.
Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver, Be

Oliawa Naturalist

Vol.
Vol.
Vol.
Vol.
Vol.
Vol.
Vol.
Vol.
Vol.
Vol.

4,
ll,
ll,
ll,
12,
12,
12,
12,
12,
12,

WANTED

In order to meet the demand for back numbers of the publications
of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, the following are urgenily needed :
Transactions, Otta. Field-Nat. Club, No. 1, 1880.

Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 38,
Vol. 39,

Vol.

39,

Vol. 39,

No.
No.
No.
No.

Sepi., 1890
Jan., 1898
Feb., 1898
Mar., 1898
Apr., 1898
July, 1898
Aug., 1898
Sept., 1898
Oct.-Nov., 1898
Dec., 1898

Jan., 1924
Mar., 1925
Apr., 1925
May, 1925

Members and subscribers who are able to spare any of these numbers
would greatly assist the Club by forwarding them to:

Mr. W. J. Cody,
Division of Botany
Science Service,
Dept. of Agriculture,
Ottawa, Ontario.

“LE DROIT" Printing, Ottawa, Canada. fmGeiyes
nt

a LIBRARY

JAN 22 [95]
Vol. 64 SEPTEMBER-OCTOBER, 1950 No. 5

ee eet

The CANADIAN
Se L-NATURALIST

Contents

Abundance of certain mammals of the Geraldton Forest District, Ontario.

Loe eat all eS MRM ZEA AO Sc AEN AIR AAO Ue 159
& Size of summer bird grouping, Texas to the Yukon. By Leonard W. Wing ............ 163
The Peromyscus maniculatus bairdii complex in Manitoba. By Stuart Criddle ........ 169

A study of screech owls in southern Ontario. By R. F. James and N. D. Martin ..... 177
Some Myxomycetes of Canada. By Eli Davis and W. D. Sutton |... 180
Notes and Observations:—

Effect on trees of extremes of climate in southern Alberta.

SOFIE RON WT se) od Shoo va rh EM SAH ay AN a MR ae ally Py 0 ae A 185
Recent bird records for the Ottawa District. By W. John Smith ............0....... ee

A Worm-eating Warbler (Helmitheros vermivorus) at St. Andrews, N.B.
TESTED Tel oso 075 MAG Ge A Ue are a ROU ac Pe 187
Two records of shrimps from English Bay, B.C. By T. H. Butler ................ 188
The Scissor-tailed Flycatcher in New Brunswick. By George F. Boyer ........ 188
Salvelinus alpinus in Walton Lake, New Brunswick. By James Catt ........ 189
Unusual behaviour of Cormorants. By Jean M. Odlum ........00. 189
2 OPE VORA DTU CSCS DER GIN a0 oa Re ae 190

Published by the
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

Entered at the Post Office at Ottawa, Ont., as second class matter

Che Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club

— Patrons —
Their Excellencies the Governor-General and the Lady Alexander

President: Dr. PAULINE SNURE

1st Vice-President: Dr. J. W. GROVES 2nd Vice-President: Mr. R. FritH
Treasurer: RAyMOND Moore, Secretary: H. J. Scoccan,
Division of Botany, National Museum of Canada,
Science Service, Dept. of Ottawa.

Agriculture, Ottawa.

Additional Members of Council: Mrs. H. Litoyp, Miss VERNA Ross, Miss Mary Stuart,
Messrs. E. G. ANDERSON, R. M. ANDERSON, W. K. W. Batpwin, A. F. W. BANFIELD,
Rev. F. E. Bantu, B. Borvin, A. E. Bourcuicnon, A. W. CAMERON, W. J. Copy, J. P.
CUERRIER, W. G. Dore, C. FRANKTON, W. E. Goprrey, H. Grou, S. D. Hicks, W. ILLMAN,
W. H. Lancetey, D. LeecumMan, H. F. Lewis, Hoves Lioyp, T. H. MANNING, W. H.
MINSHALL, A. E. Porsitp, D. B. O. Savite, H. A. SENN, V. E. F. Sotman, J. S. TENER.

Auditors: I. L. CoNNERS, C. FRANKTON, and H. F. Lewis.

Editor

Dr. H. A. SENN,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

Associate Editors

Wis GoD OR yyy Ck denen im see! Botany R, M. ANDERSON! (0).2:).0) 5. Mammdlogy
AL LAROCOUE Ally See Conchology A. G. HUNTSMAN ............ Marine Biology
Hie G. CRAWFORD 7:5!) 2502008 Entomology Wi. EE SGODEREY fi). Raa, Ornithology
ESHA COC HY lh be anaes Geology Wii Ae (BELL een ane Palaeontology
CLYDE PATCH yu: Herpetology JGR DY MOND Hus Rea a Ichthyology

Business Manager
W. J. Copy,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

The official publications of THz OrraAwa FreLp-NaTuRALIsts’ CLus have been
issued since 1879. The first were The Transactions of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’
Ciub, 1879, 1886, two volumes; the next, The Ottawa Naturalist, 1886-1919, thirty-
two volumes: and these have been continued by The Canadian Field-Naturalist to

date. The Canadian Field-Naturalist is issued bi-monthly. Its scope is the publication
of the results or original research in all departments of Natural History.

Price of this volume (6 numbers) $3.00; Single copies 60c each.

Subscription ($3.00 per year) should be forwarded to Dr. R. J. Moore,
Div. of Botany, Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture,
OTTAWA, CANADA.

The Canadian Hela Naturalist

Vol. 64

OTTAWA, CANADA, SEPTEMBER-OCTOBER, 1950

No. 5

ABUNDANCE OF CERTAIN MAMMALS OF THE GERALDTON
FOREST DISTRICT, ONTARIO*

C. A. ELsrey
Toronto, Ont.

N THE WINTER of 1947-48, the author

undertook to start a programme of gener-
al mammal studies in the Geraldton District
of northwestern Ontario. The first step
was to establish a picture of the distribution
of the various mammals. This article con-
tains a report on the information obtained
in the preliminary survey. The use of the
terms “abundant”, “common”, and “rare” are
the writer’s opinion of the status of the
species concerned. The Geraldton District is
very large, and probably many of the estim-
ates are incorrect. If this study were con-
tinued for a number of years, and a true
picture of the mammal population obtained,
it would be possible to relate their numbers
and movements to food supplies, timber
operations, forest cover, advance of civiliza-
tion, hunting and trapping pressure, environ-
mental factors. With this information it will
be possible to plan a management programme
calculated to maintain the district at the
optimum level for all species.

The information contained in this report
was obtained partly through airplane, auto-
mobile, hiking, snowshoe and canoe trips.
A Tiger Moth was used in the air surveys.
This plane was found to be most satisfactory
because of the low altitudes at which it
could safely fly, its low airspeed, and the
ease with which it could be landed on small
lakes.
from discussions with trappers.

Mr. U. W. Fiskar, the District Forester at
Geraldton, spent a great deal of time and
energy in assisting in the collection of the
information for this report.

Beaver

The density of beaver is indicated on the
accompanying map (fig. 1).

It is interesting to note that five new dams
and houses have been found where the avail-

1 Received for publication January 12, 1950.

Much information was also gleaned:

able food supply consists of evergreens only.
In these cases suitable sites for dams and
houses, having a food supply of aspen and
willow were near, and easily accessible.
Evergreens had been cut recently and used
in dam construction, but the extent to which
they had been used as food is not known.

Canada Lynx

In general the lynx population of the
Geraldton District is said to be decreasing
possibly towards extinction. However, trap-
pers have reported a few local increases
during the past year (fig. 2).

Marten and Fisher

The population of these species in the
Geraldton District is at a very low ebb. In
discussing the problem with the trappers, it
was learned that most of them have none
or at most 2 or 3 pair of either or both
species.

Moose

The Geraldton District seems to be one of
the last strongholds of the moose (fig. 3).
In a few places there are signs of overgraz-
ing. However, the overgrazing is not ex-
cessive, and there are areas of adequate food
supply nearby.

Otter

Because otters are difficult to trap they
are relatively abundant in the Geraldton
District. In most localities they may be
described as common, while in a few areas
they are abundant. They have used the Nipi-
gon-Onaman Crown Game Preserve to ad-
vantage.

Raccoon

A raccoon was caught in the fall of 1946
north of Longlac by an Indian. As the ani-
mal was about one and one-half miles from
the railway, it is suggested that it may have
entered the Geraldton District by rail.

Vol. 64, No. 4, July-August, 1950, was issued November 13, 1950.
— 159 —

[Vol. 64

NATURALIST

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-

160

GERALDTON
DISTRICT

PLAN SHOWING —— BEAVER

MILES
20 10 ° 20 40
et

DEPT. OF LANDS G FORESTS ~ 1946

Fig. 1. Density of beaver.

GERALDTON
DISTRICT

PLAN SHOWING —— LYNX

P LATION
MILES

DEPT. OF LANDS & FORESTS ~- 1946

Fig. 2. Density of Canada lynx.

161

Tue CanapiAn Fretp-NaturRAList

1950]

)

Sept.-October

*yJom requiy jo Aysueq ‘“p “bz

| 9¥61-S1S3U04 9 SGNV1 JO 1d3d

——————— Ss es

Or o ol

zt °
SJ1IW

7
'
' 1 i
y Lee sazene Vm
A. ZC)
A

ae ae
YO

Laisa
NOLGIVAF)

STON — ONIMOHS NV1d

oL

@

ee | ae ie a ee eee Eee aaa

‘ssoour jo Aytsuaq ‘“g “bry

9761-S1S3U04 9 SANV1 4O 1430

Last
NOLQIVAF)

[Vol. 64

FIELD-NATURALIST

THE CANADIAN

162

GERALDTON
DISTRICT

t za
1 far jen z
qeercsecccecescesces eoo ee ae Ser
Shaw Bod

’
‘ _/
5 i) Ow | SELL
A cara | } Vee as ‘
‘ | rbbnow |
H

Snarcedeccsseserfrastescvoctsceses
ae)

MILES
20 40

DEPT. OF LANDS G FORESTS ~ 1946

Fig. 5. Density of white-tailed deer.

GERALDTON
DISTRICT

PLAN SHOWING —— CARI{IBOU

CUI

MILES

20 10 ° 20 40
—— ES ——————|

DEPT. OF LANDS G FORESTS - 1946

Fig. 6. Density of woodland caribou.

Sept.-October, 1950]

: Timber Wolf

The accompanying map (fig. 4) will indi-
cate the abundance of wolf. It is generally
thought that wolves are very abundant in
this district, but in the opinion of the writer
the indications are to the contrary. In areas
marked “rare” the Indian trappers report
that they have seen none or only one set of
tracks this last winter. The centres of great-
est abundance are relatively near to human
habitations. The density pattern is similar to
that of the snow-shoe rabbit, although there
were no signs that the wolf had been feed-
ing on rabbit. A few deer or moose kills
were noted this winter but these incidents
were so rare that little significance is at-
tached to them. The coyote is found in this
district but seems to be out-numbered by
the timber wolf. Only nineteen bounty claims
were paid last winter. Apparently the bounty
is not much incentive to kill wolves here.
The writer seriously doubts that there is
any need for a wolf bounty payment in non-
agricultural areas. There is no evidence that
the wolves seriously interfere with any of
our game or fur-bearing mammals. If these
animals were a very serious problem here,
more bounty claims would have been reg-
istered by the trappers.

; Wapiti
Four specimens have been reported during
1948. Three of these were in the Nipigon-

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

163

Onaman Crown Game Preserve and one with-
in a mile of the Preserve. Elk were placed
here several years ago in the fall. It was
reported to be a severe winter and no elk
were reported until last year. Three of those
seen were young animals; one was an old
bull.

White-tailed Deer

The white tailed deer is not common in
the Geraldton District (fig. 5). The limit-
ing factor in its distribution is not known.
Food supply, water, temperature and depth
of snow all seem to be satisfactory as com-
pared to other districts.

There have been some indications that the
deer may be moving gradually into the
settled portions of the Geraldton District.
In other areas the Indians report a former
abundance of deer and a present scarcity.

Woodland Caribou

The caribou is in serious danger of ex-
tinction in the immediate future (fig. 6).
Probably not more than about fifty or sixty
of these animals still survive in this district.

Observation trips into the woods indicate
a fair amount of the lichens suitable for
caribou winter forage. However, a _ highly
concentrated food supply has been observed
in only a few places.

SIZE OF SUMMER BIRD GROUPING, TEXAS TO THE YUKON *

LEONARD W. WING
Texas Agricultural and Mechanical College, College Station, Texas. ‘°

OR YEARS automobile driving to me, as

to many others, usually had been chiefly
a means of getting from one place to an-
other. But several years ago, I began to
record systematically the size of bird flocks
while driving, as well as while in the field.
It thus gives some value to the time con-
sumed in driving and even gives a few data
of bird flocking habits.

Only species that can be identified readily
and counted quickly are usable for this
gathering of flock data from a moving car.
A driver must watch the road carefully,
which limits his counting, but those that

pe Received for publication March 6, 1950.

he can count have some comparative value
in flock studies. I am often able to obtain
sex counts also, as of Mountain Bluebirds.

A “group” or “flock” for this purpose
consists of any number of birds separable
into units recognizable as such. Single birds,
as found in the breeding season for example,
should be considered as a “group”. Obvious-
ly, group counts made from a moving car
are “conservative”, for members of a
group can be missed easily when counting
in motion. Despite popular acclaim for
“conservative” data, I really see no greater
reason for pride in these “conservative”
figures than in liberal ones. So far as
scientific accuracy is concerned, an error

164

on the “conservative” side seems to be as
much an error as one on the liberal side.
It must be our desire to appear modest that
makes us like “conservative” figures, be-
cause it doesn’t seem to change the fact of
error in the least!

I keep a small note pad attached to the
dash of my car, along with an altimeter
and watch. I write down the counts as
shown in Figure 1, which is here used for
illustrative purposes only; the records are
little different than the original. Commas
are omitted because car motion may turn
them into apparent numerals, but I encircle
all numbers above ten to distinguish them
from single numbers. I also abbreviate bird
names for convenience.

Fig. 1.

Sample notepad record.

The condensed note shown states that on
June 12, 1948, we left Grand Prairie, AI-
berta, at 11:15 A.M. The speedometer read
15,161 miles. The difference between this
and the next reading will give the mileage
for the counts noted. The day was clear. I
was able to record the following flock counts:

Red-tailed Hawk 1

Eastern Kingbird 1

Mountain Bluebird 30 (in groups as fol-
lows: three females, a male and female,

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

five birds of unknown sex, a group of
four females and one male along with
five of unknown sex, a flock of ten of
unknown Sex.)

Crow 17 (five birds seen singly, five in
a group, and two in another group)

Red-winged Blackbird 34 (in three groups
of six and eight as counted and one
group estimated to contain twenty).

On a trip from College Station, Brazos
County, Texas, to the Yukon, June 3-16,

1948 for some field study*, I recorded a.

total of 2,151 groups of birds. These data
and others gathered later give some indica-
tion of the flocking of birds in summer. The
geographic distribution shows a slight in-
crease in group size north of Edmonton, Al-
berta, as indicated on the map of Figure 2.
The explanation seems to be the later
progress of the season as one backs into
spring going northward (Table 1).

Our return began at noon of August 19
(Yukon or 135th Meridian Time), and we
reached College Station again September 4.
A total of 673 flock counts resulted from
the counts going south, which includes 164
groups seen northwest of our base camp at
Johnson’s Crossing of Teslin River during
the few days before the 19th. The total dif-

fers from the northward recording by al-

most fifteen-hundred groups, which differ-
ence is accounted for in part by rainy
weather that rendered birds less active and
observations more difficult and in part by
some night driving and in part also by the
increase in family size of birds and scatter-
ing of individuals.

The total birds for the 2,151 flocks in
early summer was 2,531 and that for the
southbound record of 673 flocks totalled
3,367. These give averages of about 1.2 and
5.0 birds, respectively. The 246 flocks
counted in the summer totalled 619 birds
and averaged 2.1 each.

The highest count for the late summer re-
turn trip occurred between Edmonton and
the International Border, where thirty-two
flocks averaged 19.9 birds each. The size
along the Alaska Highway and adjacent area
to the North (North of Johnson’s Crossing
in Table 2) reflects the tendency of forest
birds to be less gregarious than nonforest
ones. The decline in flock size from Idaho

* A research project made possible by a grant from
the Arctic Institute of North America.

[Vol. 64

oe Bae

THE CANADIAN

Sept.-October, 1950]

0 MILES 500.

FIELD-NATURALIST 165

Fig. 2a. Area travelled and averages by sections. The underlined figures are return-trip averages.
The heavy dots represent Edmonton, Dawson Creek, and Johnson’s Crossing from south to north

respectively.

x

southward no doubt can be accounted for
by the later flocking together of more
southerly birds in comparison with more
northerly ones.
within the species shows the same trend of
decrease from north to south, which un-
doubtedly reflects the earlier foretaste of
winter farther north.

During the summer, I collected 246 group
counts that average 2.1 birds each as
shown in Table 3. A review of the summer
field data gives some indication of flock in-
ception in summer. Several species congre-

The average for counts

gated together in late July in favored spots,
such as along the Teslin River or in brushy
areas near by, but the lack of flock con-
sciousness precluded designation of this as
flocking. But it probably was the assembling
of birds that forms the prelude to flocking
for fall migration. Among the species so
congregating were the Slate-colored Junco,
Robin, Chipping Sparrow, Gambel White-
crowned Sparrow, and Yellow Warbler.

A number of birds stayed in small groups
most of the summer, and were still in these
small groups on August 19. The largest

166 THE CANADIAN

FreLp-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Table 1. BIRD FLOCKS COUNTED NORTHBOUND, TEXAS TO THE YUKON

7

2s a
Le Sear epe cea
* = 3 es E 5 s§ 5° We ee
5 a - re > S gE ES spas
— ) v4 o ES = oa pa <c056
mmunkey,. Vulture 2-4. ee 22 1.0
EP AWAUCS DY) aishcet soctee nce eter 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Goshen Kea ice a ie eae 1.0
Golden "Eagle: eee 1.0
Pigeon Hawk (Merlin) ........ 1.0
Sparrow Hawk (Kestrel) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Keil deen Wee el cue eeoeee. 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
KGS LISI Tesora et ease antec er: 1.0
Mourning Dove .............00.. Te2 1.1 1.4 1.2 125
Yellow-sh. Flicker ................ 1.0 1.0 1.0
Red-shiy Phickery 25... er 1.0
Eastern Kingbird ................ 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 12 1e2, 1.0
Western Kingbird ................ 2.0 12 Vel led 102 1.4
Scissor-tailed Flycatcher ....... 1.4
Canadian JayAre cy ee eee 1.0 3.0
BWC Hay see eee Aes, eae h 1.0
UAV EMeaueeer ict, armen i) Mee i a 2.0 eS
ORO Weer ies 8 soils Se es 1.6 182 1.0 TAL igh 1.9
Black-billed Magpie ................ 1.0 1.0 ileal 1.0 1.0
astern Blvebird irc. cee. 1.0
Mountain Bluebird ................ 1.0
Loggerhead Shrike ................ 1.0
Eastern Meadowlark ............ 1.0 15
Western Meadowlark ............ 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Redwinged Blackbird ............ 1.0 Teal 1.0 1.0 Veil Tal
COWIE er neste ete tee 4.0
Brewer Blackbird .................. 1.0 LP 1.0 1.8
Bronzed Grackle .................... 2.0 13 Hal 1.0 1.3
WarkeP Bunting cescsect ccs eee 5.0
MGM SISK © so6 he eee ee 4.0
TOTAL NUMBER OF
GROUP COUNTS jah. 52e a L08 171 164 363 424 527 310 27
AVERAGE .GROUP SIZE ..... iat 133 Ve 1.0 al ial iat 1.6 108
flock of Hudsonian Chickadees, for example, groups. Perhaps most of the small as-

totalled six on July 25, but Chickadees
usually went about in groups, perhaps
families, of three to four birds. The Pine
Siskin usually went in flocks of four or five
but a flock estimated to number about
twenty-five was also seen on July 25. The
- Canada Jay always seemed to be in small
groups of one to two adults with a few
young, which probably represented family

semblages of resident species were family
groups.

But observational evidence of flock ac-
cumulation occurred in many species. The
Herring Gull, for example, usually patrolled |
the river in small numbers and singles. But
on July 29 a flock of eighteen passed on up
the river going Southeast, which may have
been the start of premigration or even mi-

Sept.-October, 1950]

3 S
mig fe _88 b
See 86888 gE
aie GE: a
Z26 25a aes
Turkey Vulture ........0...
BlSsekPVUlUTe © oii. f lac.
Cooper Hawk _.................. a 1.0 1.0 1.0
ReGtawled Hawk 0:6 sie eed 1.0 1.0
AGED ES ET AWC os. ccacseecoeseqenteecesnete
Golden Basle? sk S$ 1.0
iBSEUI(c |!) SHES (Ce aa ee 1.0
IVES PEL AWK f5c00/cdiseaeeccewedt sence 1.0 1.0 1.0
CSPOIRES acc Ripe eee ee 2.0
Pigeon Hawk (Merlin) ............ 1.0
Sparrow Hawk ..........0 0.0.00 1.4 RD 1.1
Spruce Grouse ..................0..- (11.0)
Rock Ptarmigan .... ............ 4.5
Riatted “Grouse 22.70.02... ih 2.0 3.0 6.0
Samohi eCranes eo eo 21.8
TET NG (EET ae aia Ae a ai ote
Short-eared Owl ... ....8.00.0000... 1.0
Horned Owl ........ SMP Sa Satie 2 1.0
GUM TISHOT eos h ede cndeecene eee 1.0
Mourning Dove _........... .....
Yellow-shafted Flicker .......... iteel 1.0 es
Red-shafted Flicker ................
astern “Kingbird -....2.........0.:. ont
Western Kingbird ....................
BISA EMOCDE,. 6. )r. 0s bee ences os 1.1 1.0, 1.0
Cliti SwallOw 2.5005. /00 5 fc stes , 6.0
Canada: Jay... MCs Tes ©. 1.5 1.8 1.0
Black-billed Magpie ...... ........ 3.0 3.3
TSS NISL Pas Rese ae aera er a i 1.4 1.0
(CHRON. WL: Sa an 10.1
LEAS T0 cl cE Ce a ele ei a Ea a
SPRODIMY 8.00. s.. OE Nee Reeth 2.5 1.0 1.0
Mountain Bluebird ............. .... 1.0
Townsend Solitaire ................. 1.0 :
Bohemian Waxwing .... ........ 35.5 50.0 9.0
Northern Shrike _................ ; 1.0
Loggerhead Shrike ..................
Western Meadowlark ......... .... 1.0
Redwinged Blackbird ...........
Brewer Blackbird ..................... 87.3
Bronzed Grackle .................. oh 20.0
TENOCIE I STIS [0 1 Was a ee Sea 2.0
TOTAL NUMBER OF
GROUP, ICOUNTS rain Naele 164 47 89
AVERAGE GROUP SIZE ...... Pads es 5.1

ee

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Table 2. BIRD FLOCKS COUNTED SOUTHWARD, YUKON TO TEXAS

167
Sm -) Re 3
a9 ifs E o 2
- mw oO o ~
a Ce
a= | i} o
we Aas as zs
2.1
1.0
1.0
1.0 1.0
1.0 1.8
1.0
1.0
45 2.1 1.3
1.0
3.8 2.0
1.5 1.3
1.0
5.2 1.6 2.0
3.0 2.1
i 5.5 ;
2.1 1.5
3.0 1.5
3.5 5.3 2.0 1.3
1.0 1.0
1.6 1.0
(500)
32.0 35.5 10.9
32 148 91 102
19.9 8.2 2.9 2.0

168 THE CANADIAN

Oo MILES 500

Fig. 2b.’ Southern part of area travelled and
averages by sections. Underlined figures are
return-trip averages. :

gration movement. On August 1, I saw six
Yellow-shafted Flickers in a flock; previous-
ly the birds had been in singles or pairs and
rarely three or four. Bohemian Waxwings
were noted in singles and pairs until July
17 when I counted forty-five in a flock. The
first definite flocking tendency and mi-
gratory movement of the Nighthawk oc-
curred together on August 1 when a flock
of fifteen passed over.

I am unable to say what initiated the flock
assembling, but it probably came about with
the decline of daylight that was so notice-
able in mid-July. The gonads of birds col-
lected then were small compared to earlier,
even though young birds had just left the
nest and the breeding season was not yet
far behind. Evidently the gonadal regression
is extremely rapid in the Northland.

But it was not until the Cliff and Bank
Swallows left so dramatically on the morn-
ing of August 3 that one became conscious
of the passing evidence of summer and the
coming of fall, even though it was early
August. The congregating of birds for the
fall migration became clearer after that, but
the silence that followed the cessation of
breeding activity blanketed the land and
pressed upon the ears that strained to catch
sounds in the soundless landscape as the
eyes strain to see in the dark.

FreLp-NATURALIST [Vol. 64

Table 3. SUMMER FLOCK COUNTS OF
BIRDS BY SPECIES

Loon

Men YAEL. i AUCH SCO ON oe 115)
Canada -Gooser 3733) ee a 2.0
‘Baldpate: 2.25 eee oe ee ee 1.0
Greater Scaup Duck ...............0.0...... 2.0
Barrow Golden-eye .............ccccccee 8.2
Butfleheadig is cae ee aries Bey 1.3
White-winged Scoter ..........0...000.00. 16.4
Surf Scoters ie eee eee 2.0
American Merganser ..................00... 2.0
American Rough-legged Hawk ........ 1.0
Redtailed Hawk. ...........00000cccee 1:3
Bald VMasle * (sya 8 ety eee ee ee 1.0
Marsh Hawk it ae eee 1.0
Golden ‘Bagle (0. Oa ei 1.0
Sparrow Hawk (Kestrel) .................. iL3}
Blue Grouse (brood) _.................0 5.0
Spruce Grouse (brood) .................... 4.0
Killdeer ............... OSA Ele ene eee ee 1.3
Spotted Sandpiper ....................... 1.4
Lesser Yellowlegs ........ ....ccccccceeees 1.5
Semipalmated Sandpiper .................. 2.0
Least Sandpiper ..................ccccceeee 4.0
Herring: Gull ie eo eee 4.8
Bonaparte Gull is ee oe 2.0
Horned) Owl: ea eek ee 1.0
Nighthawks 00/2 us a vesndet San ee 3.2
Kingtishier |) i cecar ae an ee eee 1.0
Yellow-shafted Flicker .............00.... ee
Arctic Three-toed Woodpecker ........ 1.0
Trail -Plycatcher) ici ene ce 1.0
Olive-sided Flycatcher ...........00.0.0. 1.0
Wood "Pewee: ote hoe ee ee 1.4
Canada w Jay. (2b nae ee ee 2.4
FRAV EN a, tie eh ch dacs ear ae ae ee eee ee 3.8
Bohemian Waxwing ...................00. 10.2
Golden-crowned Kinglet ................... 4.0
Red-breasted Nuthatch ..............00.... 1.0
Hudsonian Chickadee ....................0... 2.4
3s RODIN Son esa ee Re ee ee eee 1.0
Mountain Bluebird ............0...00.00... 1.8
Olive-backed Thrush. ..............00.......0.. V7
Black-polled Warbler. ....................... 1.5
Myrtle: Warbler 22/200 i cce aces 1.2
Yellow Warbler (45:2. 2.5. cect aes 1.0
Wilson: (Warbler Vian. t tee eae 1.0
Northern Waterthrush. .................... 1.0
Rusty Blackbird. 230. secre 4.0
PineiSiskinys W200 eh wee ee ee eee 9.8
Purple} Finehy ie cu oer ae eee 1.0
Slate-colored Junco .................ccce 1:2,
Chipping Sparrow .............ccccceeeeee 1.2
White-crowned Sparrow ..............000 1.0
Lincoln. Sparrow? ).c..i3.uca-e cee 1.0
Song: Sparrow) 2. Gakkai 1.0

TOTAL FLOCKG ................ 264
AVERAGE SIZE .................. 2.1

Sept.-October, 1950] THE CANADIAN

Small groups of birds became more
numerous, and I have used the end of the
first week of August as the end of summer
counts and the start of fall counts. I was
unable to detect in the field any marked
weather changes that seemed to influence or
to stimulate flock formation, except that a
series of cool, cloudy, damp days appeared

FIELD-NATURALIST 169
to be followed by increase in flocking ten-
dencies. But the small bird populations in
the Arctic make exact measurement diffi-
cult. It would seem logical, however, that
flocking is a preludé to migration and
measures the increased gregariousness as-
sociated with decline in gonadal activity as
the breeding season wanes.

THE PEROMYSCUS MANICULATUS BAIRDII COMPLEX
IN MANITOBA *

STUART CRIDDLE
(Aweme), Treesbank, Manitoba

OST OF THE INFORMATION given

in this study of Baird’s white-footed
mouse has either been gathered within a few
miles of my home at Aweme, or over the
vast sand deposits known as the Spruce
Woods Sandhills and the sandy prairies em-
bracing them. Besides the information gain-
ed here, wide excursions have been taken
into more remote parts of the Province with
the object of collecting specimens, determin-
ing range, and gathering other information
about this mouse and other natural history
subjects of general interest. Our introduc-
tion to these interesting mice took place
within a few days of our arrival here in 1882.
While collections of natural history speci-
mens were commenced during the following
‘spring and grew rapidly as the years passed on,
no real systematic work was undertaken until
about 1895. By then we had made extensive
collections and were sending specimens, or
coloured drawings of them, painted by my
brother Norman, to Dr. James Fletcher,
Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, and to
Dr. C. Hart Merriam, Chief, U. S. Bureau of
Biological Survey, Washington, D.C. These
two great naturalists gladly named speci-
mens, wrote most encouraging letters and
helped us in many ways.

The widely different climatic conditions
encountered and the great diversity of food
available over the vast range of Peromyscus
m. bairdii, has in the course of time develop-
ed marked variations in its colour and size.
This is clearly shown in southern Manitoba,
more especially in the Spruce Woods Sand-
hills, where there is still much free sand.

1 Received for publication March 27, 1950.

Here the mice have developed a light tawny —
coat which matches the drifting yellow sand
so closely that it is hard to see them when
upon it. In the Riding and Duck Mountains
we have another example of this adaptibility,
where the mice are taking on a much deeper
tone which is more in harmony with the
dark coniferous forests in which they live.
Where bairdi intermingles with other sub-
Species, as they do here on three sides, (P.
m. osgoodi on the southwest, P. m. borealis
on the northwest and P. m. maniculatus on
the north and east), we get endless varia-
tions or intergrades, which make it impossi-
ble to delineate boundaries for any one of
them. This uncertainty as to which sub-
species, or intergrade is likely to be en-
countered in Manitoba makes the study of
the white-footed mice one of the most ab-
sorbing subjects we have. i

During the early stages of my mammalian
studies, or hobby, my brother Norman gave
me invaluable assistance, and my other bro-
thers Evelyn and Talbot and my sister
Maida continue to do so in many ways.
They as always have my grateful thanks.
Dr. R.. M. Anderson, National Museum of
Canada, Ottawa, and Mr. J. Dewey Soper,
Wildlife Officer for the North-West Terri-
tories, friends of many years standing, have
given freely of their expert knowledge and
it gives me much pleasure to be able to
acknowledge their many kindnesses here.

To show that these mice were just as
abundant and destructive in pre-agricultural
times as they are today I quote the follow-
ing excerpt from my father’s diary of 1882
when we were still living under canvas:

170 THE CANADIAN

“One very important factor in our Mani-
toba existence I must immediately bring
the history thereof into the foreground. ‘Tis
when taken singly but a small and unim-
portant creature, but when joined by my-
riads of brothers, sisters, husbands, wives,
grandmothers and children, a most serious
and all-devouring monster. I refer to The
Mouse. This little pest simply pervades the
prairie in thousands and destroys every-
thing. Unlike his English relative he can
climb perpendicular walls and I believe get
along the ceiling if not too even. No place
is safe from him, and for the construction
of his nest, wherein lies his greatest des-
tructiveness, he is not contented with
gnawing up and spoiling any one garment,
but loving variety, he will take a bit of fur
here, some wool there, the heel of a sock,
the seat of a pair of breeches. Braid he
dearly loves, and whenever he can get at
anything especially prized or new, then he
is in his element. We were some time ere
we discovered what a terrible enemy we
had amongst us. We had treated him as a
pretty and harmless little friend whenever
he showed himself to us, but when we did
find him out a holy war was at once de-
claréd. A big hunt among our boxes and
stores is our only way of paying him out
and even then he is so nimble and clever
that he often gets off Scot free. When we
moved up to the hill there was a general
rout and something like twenty of his race
paid the debt of nature. But alas our vic-
tory was saddened by the awful discoveries
of ruined clothes and sacked stores that
came to light.”

General description

These fascinating little mice are among
the most clever of our small mammals.
This is clearly revealed in such mannerisms
as their choice of food, choice of nesting
sites and choice of nesting materials. It is
also evident in their ability to survive in
such large numbers in spite of their prefer-
ence for open places on the prairies, their
habit of running along trails and pathways
in summer and over the snow in winter.
While usually most shy and unobtrusive
they do occasionally become bold and in-
quisitive and at such times they are seen
at their best, as their keen black eyes, so
well adapted for seeing at night, appear ab-
normally large and bright. Their rounded
ears with their fine white edges, are fully

FIELD-NATURALIST

of tail),

[Vol. 64

expanded and their long light and dark
whiskers quiver with uncontrolled excite-
ment. These features in addition to their
spotless white and tan coat present a charm
which at once places them among our most
beautiful small mammals.

White-footed mice have large cheek
pouches which allow them to gather food
from distant parts of their home range and
carry it back to their store rooms in com-
fort. Their sense of smell is extremely
acute and enables them to detect cutworms,
grasshopper eggs and other forms of insect
life which may be an inch or more below
the surface. Their front feet or hands are
provided with sharp curved claws which
enable them to climb nearly any object they
may wish. They are also used in holding
food which they are consuming and for
holding hazel nuts and cherry stones while
holes are being gnawed into them for the
removal of the kernel. Their hind legs and
feet are powerfully developed to suit their
mode of travel, which is a succession of
quick jumps or leaps, from a few inches in
length to as much as eighteen or twenty
when running at top speed.

Colour pattern

The colour pattern of these mice is very
similar throughout their entire range in
Manitoba and in brief is as follows: the
lower parts of the body from the side of
the nose to the base of the tail, including
cheeks, fore legs and feet, are pure white.
The tail is light brown to black above and
white below. The ears are dark with a fine
edging and often have a small white dot
at the base. The colour of the upper parts
of the body varies largely with age, season
and locality, the greatest density being on
the forehead, back and hind quarters, fading
to lighter on the face, neck and sides.

Colour Variations and Distribution

Besides those zonal belts separating two
or more subspecies, (in which there are
endless variations in colour, size and length
there are large tracts of land,
“Islands”, in which the mice breed, more or
less, true to type. The two most important
of which I know, are the Spruce Woods
Sandhills and the Riding and Duck Moun-
tain areas with many miles of country
about them. From the southwest corner of
the Province the mice show unmistakable

en a ee

‘Ss
*y

a Sept.-October, 1950] _

THE CANADIAN

signs of being related to P. m. osgoodi and
specimens from White Water lake, Melita
and Tiger Hills north nearly to Kenton,
show closer affinity to this western sub-
species than they do to P. m. bairdiz, or the
sandhill form of bairdii, which is the most
brightly coloured of all our Manitoba Pero-
myscus. The colour of many adults of this
sandhill form match that of sand so closely
that they are hard to see when either lying
still or running about over it. Their colour
is almost identical with that of P. m. luteus
of Nebraska, which lives in a similar habitat.

When examining specimens from the
Riding and Duck Mountains we see that they
are much darker on the back and hind
quarters and slightly smaller than the sand-
hill mice. They appear to be more closely
related to P. m. borealis in colour than
either bairdii or osgoodi. In fact they have
developed a colour pattern which is more
in harmony with their darker surroundings.

Between Lake Manitoba and Lake Winni-
peg, are endless intergrades which do not
show any close relationship with either
typical P. m. bairdii, borealis, or manicu-
latus. A very good example of this is seen
in two mice in Mr. Soper’s very fine col-
lection. They are a clear soft grey, striking-
ly different to any other forms I have seen.
Towards the south end of Lake Winnipeg
and east of the Red river the mice show
unmistakable signs of close relationship with
the western form P. m. maniculatus, which
occurs abundantly in the coniferous forests
some sixty miles east of Winnipeg.

Record of abundance, age and sex

The original object of this part of the
study was to try and determine the magni-
tude of the population fluctuations which
were known to take place among our small
mammals by keeping day to day records of
all those killed on the farm, or examined in
hand. This aim was soon enlarged to in-
clude relative age, sex and when possible,
pregnancy. Rare species and uncommon
specimens were noted and made into study
skins. While the results from this work are
gratifying, they are not as dependable as
I should wish, as too many unforeseen con-
ditions crept into them. For instance, some
autumns were fine and warm, while others
were the reverse, cold and damp. Thus in
one season harvesting would be over be-

- fore the mice had time to congregate in the

FIELD-NATURALIST

171

grain stooks, while in the other they had
ample time to do so. This would result
in far more being killed and recorded in
the one season than in the other. Such
uncontrollable conditions as these do not
apply to other seasons of the year, so per-
haps a truer indication of the yearly popu-
lation can be found in them.

During the first twenty years of this
study, 1928-1947, 22,173 mammals were
recorded, among which were 6,012 white-
footed mice. The tables below, (1), gives
the total number of these examined for each
year of the study and the relative age and
sex in the following order: adult male,
juvenile male, adult female and juvenile.
female. Table 2 gives the month in which
the greatest numbers were recorded for the
year. It helps the impression implied in
table 1, that there are years of abnormal
abundance followed by others of relative
scarcity. However neither show that a
smooth rhythm took place during the twenty
years of the study.

The reason for more adult males, (292),
being captured than adult females is partly
explained by the greater activity of the
males during the breeding season, which
exposes them to danger more often than
the quieter females. This cannot be applied
to the juveniles and as there were 114 more
males recorded than females, we must con-
clude that more males are born than females.

Measurements

The data given in the following table (No.
3), comprise measurements of mice from
various localities in Manitoba. Although not
very comprehensive or informative, they do
show that size and length of tail vary con-
siderably in different localities. The figures
for the sandhills are the means of twenty
typical adult males and twenty selected
adult females. As insufficient adult speci-
mens were procured from the other districts
to obtain a significant average a typical male
from each locality has been chosen as a
representative.

The measurements are in millimetres, and
indicate total length, tail vertebrae, right
hind foot. Weights are in grams.

Breeding
The date on which the breeding season
starts in the spring and terminates in the
fall depends very largely on the conditions
of the weather at those seasons of the year,

2 THE CANADIAN

FIELD- NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Table 1. RECORD OF YEARLY TAKE

Year adult ¢ juvenile ¢ adult ¢° juvenile 9 Total
1G 28 iver dein aga 108 99 76 89 372
OD ORE iio sirens tine 83 81 69 71 304
SO eee Pee cekcac 61 26 34 ; i9 140
GSN ete ee! 121 31 69 30 251
TIS VA hal Sa ROP 51 22 51 16 140
MOSS ne eee ns teen, 101 33 88 30 252
1 YB eae eR Ro RR 64 28 49 19 160
OSD eee es. ee 152 119 108 104 483
MOS Gere. Ueto ree Tree Pe 140 115 105 128 488
VOB TEN lure Bea Aerts: 153 127 96 77 435
OS BPN oe ves testcase 92 75 69 99 295
1G 10 Fee oer nie eee 154 . 158 149 183 644
NO AOL A Re. dey ce ese 77 91 88 82 338
UGS 5) LG i Re acer 43 44 36 42 165
Are eat FE I dae 32 48 31 46 157
11S Fale i ave BRU 39 49 43 46 177
1 a ee rae ce ie 87 134 78 134 433
WGA Serie tesla. 81 87 91 86 345
GAG Bieta k OF ie aoe, 70 99 72 83 324
TIC Se A ieee eae 33 19 30 27 109
MOtalsen. 230. teu 1724 1485 1432 1371 6012
Ota WGN etek ses 30 3209

OVA OOO este cae: 2803

EGR ite cee, ae 6012

but on an average it commences in March
and continues without marked interruption
until the end of September. In early March,
I have taken half grown young which must
have been born in February. I also have
the following records of gravid females for
late November 1940 when I killed two
females on the 23rd and another on the
25th whose young would not have been born
until the end of the month or early in De-
cember. These mice were killed as they ran
from grain stooks which were being loaded
_ from a field well away from farm buildings.

It will be noticed in table 4 that there
are fewer records for the months of June
and August than there are for other months
of the main breeding season. The explana-
tion for this is due to the type of farm work
being carried on at those periods. It often
proves unfavourable for securing specimens
and so fewer records are obtained. It is not
a falling off in the birth rate at those times
as might be suspected.

Table 4 shows the number of embryos
earried varies from two to nine. It also
shows the number of occurrences for each
month, and on the right the number of
females examined and the total number of
embryos recorded.

Females born early in the season usually
commence to breed when little more than
half grown and their first litter seldom ex-
ceeds four young. This does not apply to
females that were born too late to breed in
the previous season as they will be full
grown by spring and will then bring forth
an average litter of five or six young.

Mother and young

At birth the young are chubby little mites,
naked, blind, toothless and are only able to
squirm about and utter faint squeaks when
hungry or disturbed. They grow rapidly and
are able to fend for themselves when about
three weeks of age. Their mother is most
attentive and takes the greatest care of

B |
:
“all
i
i
q
4
a

ae ee ee

—
wi Nin epi

era

—— se a oe

Sept.-October, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 173

Table 2. GREATEST MONTHLY CATCH IN EACH YEAR

Year Month adult 4 juvenile ¢ adult 9° juvenile 9° Total
AG MESO UA s.ssdsecs- <o0eece 22 29 22 29 102
GVA P15 911 ee 8 30 Tie 2; 24 73
TOSOM“SEDE. fe. cccetds 8 2 9 4 23
Ti sD bs 7A 1 a ee 8 6 9 7 30
1G Be 7 ne 8 8 3 6 25
BS A UL? aS os tdecacee sens 13 12 12 12 49
NOSE eESED bs: kisi cceoe yess 15 10 13 7 45
OS ee SED ina) esckestiaas soece 33 35 30 10 108
UGSGG SOD thy ocis)siccsasesss 10 33 8 35 86
IGE 37ia, OS YE) 0) et ieee eer 25 32 10 16 83
TIGR Teh SYS) 01 ee ea ee 18 24 17 21 80
LG EAS AIS} 0) a 87 101 79 116 383
$9402 Sept.) oo... .c.c..0.005 21 42 15 34 112
POA OCHA esas is 14 23 16 25 78
109 7 D275 22s 5 16 5 18 44
TGS CE STs) 0) ae 6 14 4 14 38
1944 Sept. oe. 22 61 29 58 170
GA AMIS ee oo cse eens 17 30 24 32 103
1946 Sept. ou... 16 40 21 30 107
12 2 57 Sas S) 0) a 10 12 10 12 44
PROCAIST co. -2ic cece: 366 560 347 510 1783
EOC Pee A ON a 926
TORI Li ASO ae Riel eee 857
ordi et 1783

Localities Sex TEE: TetWes H. F. Wt.
SST (0 0 INR A eS ee RR A ae 3g 160.2 65.0 19.5 22.9
PeeReTiaR Mt? Sukie MMe ie 8 Wy oe He ey Q 160.8 65.0 18.8 22.6
ICU ERS So MIE RY NARUC at amend tay eet $ 168.0 70.0 19.0 —
MISO THIUIS sed eee ae ll ee ee Lea | 3g 172.0 73.1 20.7 —
TSSCEROUECOS GIN Sa OA SC Oe CE Ra 3g 164.0 62.0 18.0 —
JRTAG EU TIE OU SS ha ae Rat Ae aa RA a TR 3 155.0 65.0 19.5

PATCHES ct oe Mans re a 165.0 67.0 20.0 21.9
Bia ei cy Ve ke Sr eos ect g 169.0 72.0 18.5

Beaver: Damviibake ee eo $ 157.0 68.0 18.0 —

| LSE CU ah RC IR Tg hE a BS 162.0 65.0 19.0 _
MRO MYR Le acer, IS he wea es 3g 165.0 78.0 20.0 13.9
CELT y QB13 1 Hie) ieee A te RR aN eka oa 3 171.0 78.0 20.0 18.5

174 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

> [Vol. 64

Table 4. NUMBER OF EMBRYOS CARRIED BY GRAVID FEMALES

No. of embryos No. 292 Total No.

per ¢ 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 examined embryos
Marches o.sh tart es 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 5 25
PASTS Mg exch eis) oui mAs 0 0 0 10 5 2 2 0 19 110
Wage eee ess eee neta 1 2 5 5 3 1 0 26 132
UUATIG dae coe ee oN Sch eee cn 0 0 3 6 4 1 0 17 99
CLT A Rt dR Ba ee 0 0 Leal 5 1 1 1 22 123
PAVIGUUS tei sce alton aden 0 1 3 5 3 0 0 18 96
September) 0.0... ..s:.ceseelecace 1 0 4 eel 2g) Clioe 5 0 1 36 200
MCtODETIR ea ibad sscesetente 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 qi 33
INOVeEMbDerR oh ee ee 0 0 0 iL 0 .0 0 4 21
PROC era me tae ic ees e sea So tbaee onan 2 3 21.460 443 18 5 2 154 839
them, even to endangering her life for them. r Nests

This is illustrated by the following observa-
tion. One evening, after retiring for the
night in an old log shack I heard the faint
squeaks of young mice coming from be-
neath the straw upon which I was lying.
Soon afterwards I noticed their mother
watching me from a safe distance. Upon my
remaining perfectly still, she cautiously ap-
proached, went quickly beneath the straw
and as quickly returned with a young one
held firmly in her mouth. She ran up the
wall, along the top log to the far corner
and shoved the youngster into a large crack.
She then returned for another and in quick
succession removed five from close beneath
me. They were not placed together, but hid-
den away in different crannies some feet
apart, all well up from the floor. After
placing the last one in safety, she ran off
and was away for several minutes, evidently
looking for a comfortable place for her
family, for on returning she ran to one of
.the youngsters, took it in her mouth and
scampered out of the building. The others
were carried off in a similar manner and all
were safely removed to their new home
within a few minutes.

When working in the fields at harvest time
we often find nests of young mice and oc-
casionally an adult will dash away with her
family hanging to her teats. This only oc-
curs when the young are being suckled and
their mother has to take instant flight. It is
not an effort on her part to save her family,
but merely the instinct of the young to hang
on while feeding. ¥

More often than not these mice have a
wide choice of places in which to make their
nests and they usually select the one which
is most suitable to their requirements. I
have found nests in holes of ground squir-
rels, pocket gophers and badgers, in hollow
logs and standing trees, and beneath decay-
ing roots, bits of board and other matter
lying on the ground. I have also found
them in farm buildings, grain stacks and
stooks, in Pedomys minor homes and even in
birds’ nests. While this is by no means a
complete list of nesting places it will give
some idea of where they may be found.

The nest is usually round with the en-
trance just above the bed. Normally it is
from four to five inches across, the size de-
pending on the number of mice using it and
the length of time it has been occupied. I
have found nests that have been in use for
many years and added to from time to time
until they had become bulky affairs nearly
a foot across. One such nest as this had
enough waste material about it, discarded
from nest and store, to more than fill a
bushel basket.

When made under natural conditions
those materials which provide the greatest
comfort and warmth are used. I have found
nests either made of, or lined with, the
following materials: cotton from _ poplar;
willow and prairie anemone; down of thistle,
milkweed, dandelion and other air-borne
seeds; animal hair and wool; feathers; fine-
ly shredded grass and moss. Grass and moss
nests are usually lined with one or other

ci
hi
4
4
y
4
:
4
}
4
7

~

Sept.-October, 1950] THE CANADIAN

of the finer materials. A most unusual nest

_ found on the edge of a swamp had an outer

covering of moss which was thickly lined
with mouse hair secured from a _ nearby
weasel nest. When living in country houses
and farm buildings the mice usually have a
wide variety of fine materials to chose from
and their nests will generally contain
samples from them all.

Food and Stores

The food of the white-footed mouse varies
quite perceptably during the changing
seasons of the year. During the colder
months, that is, late fall, winter and early
spring, the mice feed almost exclusively on
vegetable matter obtained from a_ great
variety of seeds gathered and stored close
about the nest in the autumn. Seeds are also
largely eaten as the various types ripen in
succession throughout the summer.

During the warmer months of the year
the mice turn largely to insects for their
source of food. In early summer I have
often seen where cutworms have been un-
earthed in growing grain crops. In June
large numbers of June beetles are con-
sumed, and later on grasshoppers and their
eggs are taken extensively and eaten in
large ‘numbers until freeze up. Insects. be-
come most important during the hot dry
weeks which we occasionally have in July
and August. They not only provide the mice
with rich food, but also with a copious sup-
ply of moisture which is so necessary at
such times and cannot be obtained from any
other source. Beside seeds and insects many
kinds of wild fruits are eaten, also a small
amount of succulent vegetable matter and
the flesh of their own kin and other animals
when found freshly killed.

The inherent urge to gather food for
future use is present at all seasons of the
year, although most strongly developed in

- the fall when seeds in large quantities must

be gathered and stored for winter use.
While at this work the mice seem to be full
of tireless energy. They travel long dis-
tances for choice seeds, carry fully loaded
cheeks back to their stores, improve their
nests, and attend to many other matters im-
portant to their winter existence. This work
continues without interruption until winter
sets in and even then work is continued on
all the milder nights.

I am unable to say how far the mice will

. go for food. On one occasion I followed

FIELD-NATURALIST

LAS

their tracks along a sandy trail to some spilt
grain 366 yards away from their home. I
have known them to go nearly this distance
on several occasions for choice grains.
Usually several spend the winter where I
am able to watch their movements from
tracks left on the snow. A few years ago
two had their home in an old well that I
passed daily. They were out nearly every
night, once even when it was calm and 37°
below zero. They usually went to some
cherry bushes, 238 yards away, occasionally
312 yards to a granary and at short intervals
to outlying holes or weed patches.

The amounts of the various kinds of seeds
found in the stores listed below are given
in percentages and the size by total weight.

No. 1. On wheat stubble field: wheat 63.5,
wild buckwheat 21.3; green foxtail 9.8, other
seeds 5.4. Wt. 1 lb. 7 oz.

No. 2. From rye field: rye 36.5, wild buck-
wheat 31.3, green foxtail 23.2, lamb’s
quarter, dragon’s head, and false flax 9.0.
Wt. 1 Ib. 3 oz. '

No. 3. On sweet clover field, between
wheat and oats: wheat 29.7, sweet clover
26.4, oats 17.2, wild buckwheat 16.7, brome
grass seed 5.8, other seeds 4.2. Wt. 1 lb.
11 oz.

No. 4. In straw stack against granary filled
with wheat and oats, in use for several years:
wheat 71.0, wild buckwheat 18.0, oats 8.0,
false ragweed, thistle and primrose 3.0.
Wt. 45 Ibs.

No. 5. In old drill grain box, 127 yards
from granary: wheat 49.2, sweet clover 21.3,
wild buckwheat 11.7, cherry stones 6.0,
acorns 3.6, rye 2.8, green foxtail 1.8, brome
and rye grass seeds 0.6, dragon’s head, sun- ~
flower, knot weed, rose, lamb’s ne 0.4.
Wt. 9 Ibs. 11 02.

No. 6. From pasture field: knot weed, two
kinds, 45.7, cherry stones 17.7, poverty weed
2.3, brome, rye and other grass seeds 9.5,
wild buckwheat 7.6, rose 3.6, green foxtail
2.7, other seeds 1.1. Wt. 1 Ib. 2 oz.

No. 7. In old building among cherry
bushes: cherry stones 1 Ib. 5 oz., russian pig-
weed 1 oz. Wt. 1 lb. 6 oz. There were well
over 13,500 cherry stones in the store and a
nest of torn-up paper over the store.

No. 8. Store of female about to have young,
found October 4th in oak grove, had had
652 acorns in four shallow chambers close
about her nest.

=a

176 THE CANADIAN
The stores tabulated above will give a
general idea of what is eaten during the
winter. They also show, by the variety of
seeds found in them, that the mice prefer a
mixed diet when it can be had. A few stores
found on the prairie, and dug out by bad-
gers, had contained a large assortment of
seeds. Those most noticeable were: wild
sunflower, allium, vetches, anemone, cherry,
rose and several kinds of grasses and
sedges. No stores have been found in the
sandhills, although I have often seen where
mice had been gathering seeds in the fall,
of spruce, sunflower, cherry, and oak, as
well as those of the sand-binding grasses
Oryzopsis, Andropogon and Calamovilfa and
from the sedge Cyperus Schweinitzii, which
grows profusely in some parts of the area.
Besides these, seeds are gathered in small
amounts from many other sources.

In all the stores so far examined I have
never found a trace of bulbs, tubers, root-
stalks, green herbage or insects. Food is
usually eaten close about the nest or in the
store room, which is also largely used as a
latrine.

Playing

Like most of our small mammals, white-
footed mice indulge in games of one kind
or another and seem to take great pleasure
in them. Their games may take the form of
chasing one another, or carrying some small
object, hiding or throwing it about. One
which we kept for several months, soon be-
came friendly and unafraid of us. One eve-
ning we noticed him dashing about his cage
with a wad of cotton in his mouth, evident-
ly having a game with it. This led to giving
him other objects to play with. Feathers
seemed to afford him the greatest pleasure
and provided us with much amusement. A
large stiff feather poked through the wire
netting of his cage and pulled back and
forth with a quick jerking motion by our
children provided them and the mouse much
sport. He would jump up and down on the
feather, try to hold it with his forefeet and
teeth, jump away from it, turn and spring
back and worry it as though it was some
living monster. These games often con-
tinued intermittently for half an hour or
more, the children laughing and kicking up
no end of a noise and the mouse apparently
enjoying the game as much as they.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Fighting

Fighting often takes place between males
and is usually well worth watching. Their
movements in jumping at and avoiding one
another, are done so quickly that they are
hard to follow. They seldom jump directly
at each other, “like domestic cocks,’ but
rather take turns at doing so. The one
starting the fight will suddenly make several
successive jumps at the other, endeavouring
to kick him from above, on the head and
back. If possible this is skillfully avoided
and in quick succession the attacked be-
comes the attacker, and so the fight con-
tinues until one or other manages to land
a few solid blows which usually end the
fight.

If a fight takes place in a small cage at
night, the mouse getting the upper hand
will quickly kill the other by jumping up
and down on him and will probably have
most of him eaten by next morning, always
consuming his brain first. In all the fights
I have witnessed between these mice I have
never seen them attempt to bite one an-
other and have very seldom taken one
with torn ears or scarred faces. A few have
had damaged tails, but whether this was
done by their own kin or some other species
I do not know.

Travel or Migration

My efforts to secure information on this
subject by following tracks across the snow
in early spring have met with little success.
In a few instances I have seen where indi-
viduals have travelled considerable distances
in a given direction, but never anything sug-
gesting that several had moved away in com-
pany. My records give one account of my
following the tracks of one for nearly a
mile, and while the mouse wandered about
a good deal, he kept going in the same
general direction. He was caught hiding un-
der some loose straw, examined and given
his freedom. Other records tell of mice
travelling well over half a mile in a similar
manner. Each had hidden beneath the snow
for the day. Whether the mice continued
their journey next evening, or returned to
their starting point, I cannot say.

We have demonstrated through trapping
that a great deal of local movement takes
place during spring and summer. Most of
this is brought about by three main causes:
(1) the departure of many adults from their
winter quarters in early spring, (2) sexual

Se

Sept.-October, 1950] THE CANADIAN
activities during the breeding season and (3)
young leaving their natal nest to find homes
of their own. While some of these mice,
and those mentioned above, evidently trav-
elled considerable distances, their move-
ments can never be considered anything but
individual travel or personal migration.

Survival and Predation

The active life led by white-footed mice,
their preference for sand-blown, cut banks
and sparsely covered prairies, along with
their love for following game paths and
open roads in summer and running across
the snow in winter, exposes them to capture
by predaceous animals more readily than
any other race of mice. These life habits
which might be considered adverse, would
have exterminated the species long before this
if it were not for their cleverness and great
fecundity. These two latter factors alone
have not only enabled them to survive, but
have enabled them to maintain a greater,
and more nearly balanced population through
the years than any other species of North
American mice.

Weasels and owls are by far the most
important of all the predaceous animals
which prey upon, and so control, the popu-
lations of the white-footed mouse.. They are
ably supported in this work by the coyote,
badger, ground squirrels, skunk and fox,
all of which are keenly awake for the mouse,
whose flesh is apparently superior in
flavour to that of most rodents. As these
mice restrict their activities to the hours
of darkness, hawks can have little effect on

FIELD-NATURALIST

177

their numbers. Crows are more important
as many mice exposed by farm work fall
prey to them.

During my long acquaintance with these
mice I have seldom found one that appeared
to be suffering from disease, and have no
evidence’ to show that they have, at any
time, been swept off by a disease similar to
those which periodically reduce the popu-
lations of other species from great abundance
to relative scarcity.

Like many of our small rodents, white-
footed mice become infested with the larvae
of the botfly, Cuterebra grisea, Cog. One
captured in July had five great bots em-
bedded beneath his skin. He was very thin
and listless when caught and would probably
have died before the last bot fell from his
body. External parasites are occasionally
found, but they are seldom in sufficient
numbers to harm the mice.

Economic Importance

In reference to agriculture and _ sylvi-
culture alone the economic importance of
the white-footed mice would not be too
black, as the amount of damage done by
them on grain fields and in the forests is
usually offset by the numbers of harmful
insects and weed seeds eaten by them. But
when they invade country homes and farm
buildings they become extremely destructive,
and are capable of doing a vast amount of
damage in a short space of time. This alone
condemns them as vermin and as such they
must be destroyed without compunction.

A STUDY OF SCREECH OWLS IN SOUTHERN ONTARIO?
R. F. JaMEs and N. D. MartTIn

INTRODUCTION

N 1935, R.F. James began putting up

roosting barrels for screech owls (Otus
asio naevius) in southern Ontario. Since
1940, N.D. Martin has assisted in this study.
Over a thousand barrels have been placed
since 1935. Screech owls discovered within
the barrels have been used for banding and
for breeding experiments. Information on

Received for publication March 6, 1950.

food of screech owls have been derived from
examination of barrel contents.

MANUFACTURE OF OWL BARRELS

A nail keg with top and bottom in place
is used. A round, oval, or rectangular hole
four inches in diameter is cut in the side,
near the top. The keg is then coated with
a coat of creosote to withstand rain, snow,
and hot sun. Dark green, brown, black, or
aluminum paints contribute most to the
camouflage of the barrel. The edge of the

178 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

entrance is then smoothed with a file; this
leaves a white ring around it, accentuating
it and giving it a well-worn appearance that
may attract screech owls. An identifying
number and the following notice are sten-
cilled on the side of the barrel:

UNDER ORNITHOLOGICAL OBSERVATION
BY REG. F. JAMES, WILLOWDALE, ONT.
PLEASE DO NOT MOLEST.

This barrel is nailed up in a vertical posi- -

tion in a tree. Modifications of this vertical
type of barrel include the observation barrel,
the horizontal barrel, and the trap barrel.

The observation barrel resembles’. the
vertical barrel, but has in addition a remov-
able panel four inches square in the side.
The lower edge of the panel is close to the
bottom of the barrel, so that when the panel
is removed, barrel contents may be observed
or photographed.

The horizontal barrel does not have any
opening in the side. Instead, about one
third of the top is left open. This opening
provides the entrance when the barrel is
nailed in a horizontal position in a tree. The
horizontal barrel was originally intended to
attract wood ducks around ponds and

streams, but the screech owl has proved its

most common occupant.

The trap barrel is a vertical barrel fitted
with a trap door. The door is weighted, and
swings inward and upward. It is propped
open by a piece of wire extending from the
floor of the barrel to the trap door. An
animal that enters the barrel knocks the
wire aside and the door falls across the
entrance. The trap barrel must be checked
daily to determine whether or not an animal
has been entrapped.

The authors are now testing a “barrel”
of a more permanent nature. This is a heavy
steel box about one foot cube. It has a three-
inch opening in one side near the top, and
is nailed to a tree with two six-inch nails
driven through holes conveniently located
in the back. These odd “bird-houses” were
originally used to transport certain metal
parts by a hardware firm. So far only ten of
these boxes have been placed up for animals;
these ten are used each year by tree swal-
lows (Iridoprocne bicolor) and house wrens
(Troglodytes aedon).

Vertical and horizontal barrels are shown
in Fig. 1.

[Vol. 64

PLACEMENT OF BARRELS

Barrels most often used by screech owls
are those placed at the edge of a woodlot,
marsh, or garbage dump, beside a stream,
or in a wooded valley surrounded by open
fields. Barrels placed at a height of 15 feet
are most often used. The most suitable
trees are deciduous trees, tamarack, white
pine, and hemlock. Barrels are fastened to
the trees with two four-inch nails driven
one through the top and one through the
bottom metal rim. A handful of sawdust
is placed inside. Selection of sites is made
to avoid discovery by children.

Owl barrels have been placed between
London on the west and Oshawa on the east,
Toronto on the south and Chalk River on
the north. Ninety per cent are in York
County.

USE OF BARRELS BY OWLS

Screech owls use the barrels as roosting

cavities — especially in winter — and as
roosting sites in spring. When discovered
within, they can be captured. Barrels have
been checked on an average of one day per
week since the inception of this study. Since
only about 25 barrels may be checked in a
day, some barrels may not be checked more
often than once a year.

Examination of the barrel contents usu-
ally reveals what animals have been there,
how frequently and how recently they have
been there. A screech owl leaves pellets,
droppings, feathers of prey, and the occasion-
al feather of its own. If a barrel contains
only one or two pellets, it has been used
on a few days only. If it is covered with
droppings, and contains dozens of pellets in
all stages of decomposition, it has been used
by one or more screech owls for a whole
season or many seasons.

FOOD OF SCREECH OWLS

The following is a list of animals found
dead in the barrels, entire or partly eaten
by screech owls. In many cases, an owl has
been found roosting with its uneaten prey.

MAMMALS

white-footed mouse (Peromyscus)
meadow mouse (Microtus pennsylvanicus)
rabbit (skull only, unidentified)

rat (Rattus norvegicus), decapitated carcass —

eee ee

Sept.-October, 1950] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

179

7 Fig. 1. Vertical (left) and horizontal barrels ready for placement.

BIRDS

Decapitated carcass of
flicker (Colaptes auratus)
meadowlark (Sturnella magna)
Feathers of
blue jay (Cyanocitta cristata)
black-capped chickadee (Parus atricapillus)
eatbird (Dumetella carolinensis)
robin (Turdus migratorius)
English sparrow (Passer domesticus)
cardinal (Richmondena cardinalis)
redpoll (Acanthis flammea)
goldfinch (Spinus tristis)
slate-coloured junco (Junco hyemalis)
tree sparrow (Spizella arborea)
white-crowned sparrow (Zonotrichia
leucophrys)
song sparrow (Melospiza melodia)

OTHER FOOD
fish (mostly Cyprinidae)
erayfish (broken remains)

Decapitated mice were frequently found
in barrels. This suggests that the screech
owl often eats the head of its victim first,
and leaves the remainder for a future occa-
sion. The head of the victim may be the pre-
ferred part of the screech owl’s meal.

When the snow is deep, screech owls are
most often found in barrels located near

open water patches of streams. These barrels

then contain remains of fish left by owls.

Fish are mostly about three inches long.
’Common suckers (Catostomus commersonnii)
seven inches long were found on two oc-
casions.

BARREL OCCUPANTS OTHER THAN
SCREECH OWLS

Gray and red squirrels (Sciurus carolinen-
sis and Tamiasciurus hudsonicus, respective-
ly) use the barrels almost as much as does
the screech owl. AS many as six young
white-footed mice (Peromyscus) have been
found at one time in barrel nests. Sparrow
hawks (Falco sparverius) nest in barrels
that are placed in open country. One barrel
contained a sparrow hawk’s nest four years
in succession, and one of the adults used
the barrel all winter for three winters.
Crested flycatchers (Myizarchus crinitus) and
starlings (Sturnus vulgaris) have nested in
them. The raccoon (Procyon lotor) has been
found during the day in barrels, almost
completely filling them. The flicker (Co-
laptes auratus) roosts and nests in them.

Less frequent occupants have included the
flying squirrel (Glaucomys sabrinus), weasel
(unidentified), house wren (Troglodytes
aédon), and unidentified bees and wasps.
Honey bees converted six barrels into hives,
and overwintered in them. One barrel was
found in October packed with butternuts.
Another contained corn cobs. These were
probably squirrels’ storehouses.

On two occasions a saw-whet owl (Cryp-
toglaux acadica) has been discovered roost-
ing on a branch beside a barrel, but never
within.

SUMMARY

1. Over a thousand nail kegs were converted
into roosting houses for screech owls and

180

placed in trees throughout southern

Ontario.

2. Prey carried by screech owls into the
barrels included four species of mammals,
14 species of birds, fish averaging three
inches long, and crayfish.

3. Owl barrels have been used as nesting
or roosting quarters by five other species

Tue Canaptan’ Fretp-NaATurRALIST

[Vol. 64

of birds and six species of mammals.
Bees and wasps have nested in them.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The original trap barrel was designed and
constructed by A.W. Ghent. C.E. Hope
identified many of the feathers of screech
owl victims. J. L. Baillie read the manuscript
critically.

SOME MYXOMYCETES OF CANADA"

Ext Davis and W. D. SuTTON
London, Ontario.

URING THE LAST FIFTEEN YEARS

the authors of this paper have been
collecting and studying specimens of the
myxomycetes or mycetozoa. The collecting
has been done chiefly in the County of Middle-
sex in southwestern Ontario, but some has
been done in other parts of the Province, in
Quebec, in Tennessee, Kentucky, New Hamp-
shire, Connecticut, Florida, and New Mexico.

In the course of this pleasant pastime
we collected in Ontario and Quebec a number
of species and varieties that had, at the time
of collection, not been previously reported
in Canada. Specimens of many of these
species and varieties were sent to Robert
Hagelstein and these specimens were after-
wards used by him in recording their Cana-
dian distribution. In addition, a few species
have been collected that have not been previ-
ously encountered in this country. It is the
purpose of the present paper to record our
collections in order to add to the knowledge
of the occurrence and distribution of the
Myxomycetes in Canada.

Currie (1920) has summarized most of
the Canadian records of Myxomycetes, pub-
lished up to the time of her writing. Ap-
parently she had not seen the Dearness list
(1911) which records the names of 51 species
collected in Middlesex County, Ontario. Also
she does not mention the list of 30 Canadian
gatherings, unpublished at the time, which
Miss Lister gave to W. A. Cheesman and
which he included in the first part of his
paper (1911). Since Currie’s paper appeared
Adamstone (1922) listed 28 species and one
variety which he collected in the Lake Nipi-
gon district of Ontario; Bisby, Buller, and
Dearness (1929) recorded 73 species and six
varieties from Manitoba; later, Bisby (1938)

1 Received for publication April 8, 1950.

listed 91 species and 8 varieties from Mani-
toba and Saskatchewan; and Mains, Over-
holts, and Pomerleau (1939) published a list
of 113 species and 9 varieties collected in
Quebec in 1988 during the Summer Foray of
the Mycological Society of America. A count
of all forms recorded for Canada including
those in the present paper shows that 200
species and 32 varieties in 41 genera have
been found in Candda.

In the 40 years since Moore’s list (1910)
was published, numerous changes have been
made in the nomenclature, and in the deli-
mitation of genera, species, and varieties, of
the Myxomycetes. There are still several
points in these matters on which authorities
do not agree. With certain exceptions and
reservations we have followed in this paper
the arrangement and nomenclature given in
“The Mycetozoa of North America” by Robert
Hagelstein (1944).

In the private herbaria of the authors
there are more than 2500 collections of the
Myxomycetes, representing 228 species and
29 varieties in 44 genera. Of the 41 genera,
200: species, and 32 varieties so far recorded
from Canada, these herbaria contain repre-
sentative forms of 40 genera, 192 species,
and 22 varieties. Not all of these, of course,
are from Canada. Some are from the United
States, the West Indies, and Europe. A con-
siderable amount of duplicate material is
available for exchange and distribution. Nu-
merous specimens have been communicated
to The New York Botanical Garden, The
University of Western Ontario, The University
of Toronto, The State University of Iowa,
Willamette University, The University of
Florida, The University of Montreal, The
University of Tokyo, and to several private
herbaria.

Sept.-October, 1950] THE CANADIAN FIELp-NATURALIST 181

The authors wish to acknowledge grate-
fully their indebtedness to the late Robert
Hagelstein who assisted them kindly and
freely by determining specimens, checking
determinations, and generously supplying
excellent authentic material for their her-
baria. To Dr. John Dearness who inspired
and aided them in their studies, and to Dr.
G. W. Martin who has willingly assisted them
with determinations and advice, they are
indeed thankful.

Unless it is stated otherwise, collections
of the Myxomycetes recorded in this list were
made by one or both of the authors, and all
moist chamber developments were secured
by Eli Davis.

Catalogue of Species

1. Arcyria carnea G. Lister

Collected for the first time in Canada
near Duchesnay, Quebec, in 1938. Since then,
found at least once in Ontario. These are the
only records for Canada.

2. Arcyria insignis Kalchbr. & Cooke

Collected in both Ontario and Quebec.
Previously recorded from Manitoba by Bisby
(1929).

3. Badhamia affinis Rost

Quebec, 1938. Ontario, 1945.

4. Badhamia affinis Rost. var. orbiculata

(Rex) G. Lister

Ontario, 1935. Quebec, 1938. Previously
unreported from Canada. .

5. Badhamia gracilis Macbr.

In January, 1938, Eli Davis toured the
southern part of the United States. He
brought home a piece of Yucca wood from
New Mexico to make fire-by-friction sets.
Finding the wood was damp and unworkable,
he tried to dry it beside the furnace in the
basement of his home. When this method
failed he threw the wood out into the back-
yard. There it remained until May, 1941,
when a good fruiting of Badhamia gracilis
appeared on it. This species may prefer, or
require, this particular ‘substratum on which
to fruit, but it apparently found the Canadian
climate not unfavourable. Macbride and
Martin (1934) state that most of their ma-

terial of this species is on Yucca or Cactus.
_ 6. Badhamia lilacina (Fries) Rost.

3 -Previously recorded from Ontario, it
was collected in Quebec in 1938.

7. Badhamia macrocarpa (Ces.) Rost.

4 Recorded by Bisby (1929) from Manitoba.
_ Collected three times in Ontario.

8. Badhamia ovispora Racib.

This species (on dung from Germany
and Saskatchewan) was developed in the
laboratory at Toronto, Ontario, in 1935 and
1936, by Dr. Roy F. Cain. We have collected
it several times in greenhouses at Byron,
Ontario, where the moist mulch of straw and
manure and the high temperature approxi-
mated the conditions of a moist chamber on
a large scale.

9. Badhamia rubiginosa (Chev.) Rost.

Previously. recorded from Ontario by
Currie (1920). Collected in Quebec, 1938.
10. Brefeldia maxima (Fries) Rost.

Recorded from Ontario by Faull (1913),
and by Currie (1920), and reported from
British Columbia by Macbride and Martin
(1934). Collected in Quebec by René Pomer-
leau and communicated to Eli Davis.

11. Clastoderma Debaryanum Blytt

The first Canadian collection was made
in 1939 at Komoka, Ontario, on dead trunks
of a species of Cornus. Collected several
times since on the same substratum.

12. Comatricha aequalis Peck

Currie listed this species from Ontario
as C. nigra Schroeter var. aequalis (Pk.)
Sturgis. We have collected it in both Ontario
and Quebec. :

13. Comatricha cornea G. Lister & Cran

Developed in moist chamber on bark of
Juglans cinerea in January, 1941.

14. Comatricha elegans (Racib.) Lister

This species was listed by Currie (1920),
but the material was collected in New York
State. Lister (1925) records it from New
Brunswick and Quebec. We have collected
typical specimens several times in Ontario.
15. Comatricha fimbriata G. Lister & Cran

Obtained at Byron, Ontario, in moist
chamber developments on wood from New

_ York State. -

16. Comatricha laxa Rost.

One collection has been made on a pile
of firewood in Springbank Park, Byron, Onta-
rio. Apparently this is the only Canadian
collection.

17. Comatricha longa Peck

Lister (1925) records this species from
Ottawa, Ontario. We have collected it three
times in southwestern Ontario. These are the
only Canadian records.

18. Comatricha pulchella (Bab.) Rost. var.
fusca Lister

One collection from Kettle Point, Ontario.
This appears to be the only collection made
in Canada.

182

19. Comatricha rubens Lister

This species was collected in Laurentides
National Park, Quebec, by Hagelstein and
Rispaud. We have collected one rather doubt-
ful specimen at Komoka, Ontario, in 1940.
20. Comatricha subcaespitosa Peck

Previously recorded from Nova Scotia by
Macbride and Martin (1934). Collected three
times in Ontario.

21. Comatricha tenerrima (Curt.) G. Lister

We collected one specimen in October,
1937, at Komoka, Ontario. Hagelstein (1939)
reported the species from Quebec.

22. Craterium aureum (Schum.) Rost.
Collected at Duchesnay, Quebec, in 1938,
and at Byron, Ontario, in 1939. Several other
collections in Ontario. Apparently the only
records for Canada. Hagelstein (1944) says it
is not uncommon throughout North America
but does not specify any part of Canada where
it has been found.
23. Cribraria minutissima Schw.

We have collected this tiny species sev-
eral times in Ontario. Due to its minute size
it is difficult to find. This is the first record
of its discovery in Canada.

24. Cribraria piriformis Schrad.

This species has been collected by the
authors at least once in Ontario. Hagelstein
(1944) lists Ontario for this, but a search of
the herbarium at The New York Botanical
Garden has failed to reveal any specimens
from here. The specimen we collected is
fairly typical. Hagelstein (1944) states that
representative forms are rare and confined
to those from mountainous regions. Weh-
meyer (1935) records it from Nova Scotia.
25. Cribraria rufa (Roth) Rost.

Collected several times in Ontario, the
earliest in 1937. Hagelstein (1944) lists it
from Prince Edward Island, by report.

26. Cribraria violacea Rex

Collected in Ontario several times. Dev-
eloped once in moist chamber. Not reported
from any other part of Canada.

27. Diachea caespitosa (Sturg.) A. & G. Lister

Collected in 1940 at Byron, Ontario, on
the tips of sphagnum. The first record for
Canada.

28. Diachea leucopodia (Bull.) Rost.

Quebec, 1938. Strange to say, this cos-
mopolitan species had previously been re-
ported only from Ontario.

29. Diachea subsessilis Peck

Collected at Dorchester, Ontario, in 1940.
Hagelstein (1940) records it from Algonquin
Park, Ontario, collected by R. F. Cain in 1939,

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

and (1941) from Quebec. These appear to
be the only records of this species in Canada.
30. Dianema corticatum Lister

Previously reported from Alberta and
Quebec by Lister (1925). Found several
times in Ontario.

31. Dianema Harveyi Rex

This exceedingly rare species has been
previously recorded in North America from
three widely separated stations—Maine, 1889,
Colorado, 1913, and Manitoba, 1938. We have
made several collections in Ontario, the earli-
est in 1939.

32. Diderma Chondrioderma (de Bary &

Rost.) G. Lister ° .

Bisby reported this species from Mani-
toba with the comment, “apparently this
species”. We have two moist chamber deve-
lopments on bark of Juglans.

33. Diderma montanum Meylan

Found at Komoka, Ontario. Several col-
lections, the first in Canada.

34. Diderma montanum Meylan var. album

(Torrend) G. Lister

_ Several collections from Komoka, Ontario.
The only records for North America.
35. Diderma simplex (Schroet.) Lister

Found several times at Byron, Ontario,
on sphagnum. The only Canadian records.
36. Didymium anellus Morg.

Bisby (1938) reported that this species
had been developed in moist chamber in
Manitoba. Collected in Ontario at least once.
37. Didymium clavus (Alb. & Schw.) Rabenh.

Previously recorded from Alberta by
Cheesman (1911). We have found it in
Quebec and Ontario.

38. Didymium difforme (Pers.) Duby

Previously recorded from British Colum-
bia, and from Manitoba, a moist chamber
development. We have collected it in Ontario.
39. Didymium ochroideum G. Lister

Collected several times on the moist
mulch in .a greenhouse at Byron, Ontario —
the only Canadian collections. —

40. Didymium Sturgisii Hagelstein

Developed in ‘moist chamber at Byron,
-Ontario.

41. Didymium xanthopus (Ditm.) Fries

Reported by Bisby (1938) as developed
in moist chamber in Manitoba. We have col-
lected it in Ontario several times. Wehmeyer
(1935) records it from Nova Scotia.

42. Echinostelium minutum de Bary

Developed in moist chamber at Byron,
Ontario, in 1940.

as reported by Hagelstein ete)

Sept.-October, 1950]

43. Elaeomyxa miyazakiensis (Emoto) Ha-

gelstein

The first North American collection, the
second in the world, was made by Eli Davis
in 1938 at Komoka, Ontario. Subsequent col-
lections were made by us at Acton, Ontario,
in 1939, and again at Komoka in 1941. These
were reported by Dr. John-Dearness (1940).
The original collection of this species was
made by Yoshikadzu Emoto (1935) in Japan.
44. Enerthenema papillatum (Pers.) Rost.

Collected several times in Ontario. Ha-

_gelstein (1944) lists Canada and U.S. for the

distribution of this species, but we have found
only one other record of its occurrence in
Canada, by Wehmeyer (1935) in Nova Scotia.
45. Fuligo septica (L.) Weber var. candida
(Pers.) R. E. Fries
Collected at Glanworth, Ontario. Record-
ed also from Manitoba and Quebec.
46. Fuligo septica (L.) Weber. var.
(Pers.) R.E. Fries
- Collected at Komoka, Ontario. Recorded
also from Manitoba and Quebec.
47. Hemitrichia intorta Lister
Extremely rare. Collected several times
in Middlesex County, Ontario. Macbride and
Martin (1934) list it from Ontario. Reported
from no other province.
48. Lachnobolus congestus (Somm.) Lister
A very rare species. Macbride and Martin
(1934) list Ontario for this species, and we
have collected it here several times. Hagel-
stein (1944) reports it from only five states
of the U.S.A. .
49. Lamproderma atrosporum Meylan
' Collected by J. W. Groves at Burnet,
Quebec, and determined by Eli Davis. Ap-
parently the only collection from Canada.
50. Lepidoderma tigrinum (Schrad.) Rost.
Macbride and Martin (1934) report this
species from British Columbia. We have
found it once in Ontario, at Dorchester — a
fine, large fruiting.
51. Licea minima Fries
Collected several times in Ontario. Mains
(1939) reports it from Quebec.
52. Licea tenera Jahn
Developed in moist chamber in Toronto,
and at

rufa

Byron, Ontario.

53. Macbrideola scintillans Gilb.
Developed in moist chamber at Byron,

Ontario, on bark of Juglans cinerea.

54. Margarita metallica (Berk.) Lister
This species appeared in Moore’s list

(1910) 2s Margarita pictoviana sp. nov. Hagel-

THE CANADIAN FYIELD-NATURALIST

183

stein (1944) states that it was found repeated-
ly in Quebec, near Lake St. John, in August
1938. The only Ontario record is a moist
chamber development at Byron, Ontario, on
bark of Juglans.

55. Orcadella parasitica (Zukal) Hagelstein

Moist chamber developments at Byron,
Ontario, on bark of Celtis, Juglans, Platanus,
and Ulmus. Hagelstein (1942 b) proposed
to broaden the genus Orcadella Wingate to
include the genera Hymenobolina .Zukal and
Kleistobolus Lippert. He carried out this
proposal in the Mycetozoa of North America.
Martin (1942) has proposed the emendation
of the genus Licea Schrader to include the
genera Hymenobolina Zukal, Kleistobolus
Lippert, and Orcadella Wingate.

56. Orcadella pusilla (Lipp.) Hagelstein

Collected at Komoka, Ontario, in 1940.
Also developed on bark in moist chamber,
1941.

57. Physarum aeneum (Lister) R. E. Fries

Moist chamber development on bark at
Byron, Ontario, in 1940.

58. Physarum bogoriense Racib.

Collected at Dorchester, Ontario, in 1940.
Mains (1939) lists it from Quebec. First
Canadian records. .

59. Physarum citrinellum Peck

Collected at Duchesnay, Quebec, in 1938.
So far reported from no other part of Canada.
60. Physarum confertum Macbr.

Collected in the Bruce Peninsula, Onta-

rio, in 1944.

61. Physarum didermoides (Pers.) Rost.

Collected on the mulch in a greenhouse
at Byron, Ontario,. in 1939. Previously re-
corded from British Columbia and Manitoba.
62. Physarum gyrosum Rost.

Collected at Guelph, Ontario, in 1934, by
J. E. Howitt and sent to G. W. Martin. We
have made two collections in Ontario. Not
previously recorded from Canada.

63. Physarum lateritium (Berk. & Rav.)

Morgan

Collected at Duchesnay, Quebec, in 1938.
Previous records are from Ontario and Nova
Scotia.

64. Physarum luteolum Peck

Collected in Timagami, Ontario, Septem-
ber 1923, by G. D. Darker and W. R. Watson.
We collected it at EON: Ontario, in June,
1938.

65. Physarum melleum (Berk. & Br.) Massee

Listed from Quebec by Mains (1939).
Collected by us at Ipperwash, Ontario, in

134

1940. The Ontario collection is a fine exam-
ple of the rare form with orange stalks.
66. Physarum nucleatum Rex

Several collections from Byron and Ko-
moka, Ontario. Hitherto unrecorded from
Canada.
67. Physarum oblatum Macbr.

Collected in Ontario and Quebec. Bisby
(1929) records it from Manitoba.
68. Physarum penetrale Rex

Collected at Duchesnay, Quebec, in 1938,
and at Byron, Ontario, in 1940.
69. Physarum pulcherrimum Berk. & Rav.

Collected at Byron, Ontario, in July,
1938, and at Duchesnay, Quebec, in August
of the same year.
70. Physarum Serpula Morgan

Collected at Duchesnay, Quebec, in
August, 1938, and at Ipperwash, Ontario, in
August 1940.
71. Physarum superbum Hagelstein

Collected several times in Ontario, at
Komoka and Mt. Brydges. Hagelstein (1941)
reported the collection at the latter station.
72. Physarum viride (Bull.) Pers. var.

mecanum Lister

Hagelstein (1944) states that this variety
is abundantly distributed throughout North
America, yet the only record for Canada is
from Manitoba by Bisby (1929). We have
collected it several times, at Komoka and
Dorchester, Ontario, and at Duchesnay,
Quebec.
73. Stemonitis flavogenita Jahn

Collected in Wawanosh Township, Huron
County, Ontario, in August 1939. This is the
second record for Canada.
74. Stemonitis fusca Roth. var. flaccida Lister

Collected at Komoka, Ontario, in October
1940. Not previously recorded for Canada.
75. Stemonitis fusca Roth. var. nigrescens

(Rex) Torrend

Several collections in Ontario, at Komoka,
Lobo, and Grand Bend, in August and Septem-
ber. Apparently these are the only Canadian
records of this variety.
76. Stemonitis hyperopta Meylan

Collected at Komoka, Ontario, in 1938.
Recorded by Bisby (1929) from Manitoba.
77. Stemonitis splendens Rost. var. Webberi

(Rex) Lister

Collected at Komoka, Ontario, in 1936,
and at Duchesnay, Quebec, in 1938.
78. Trichia erecta Rex

Collected at Duchesnay, Quebec, in 1938.
Mains (1939) reports a collection by Hagel-

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

stein from the same area. As far as we can
ascertain this species has not been recorded
from any other part of Canada.

79. Trichia floriformis (Schw.) G. Lister
Collected several times in Ontario. There
are no records from other parts of Canada.

80. Trichia lutescens Lister

A small gathering made at Mt. Brydges,
Ontario, in October 1940, is the only Cana-
dian record.

REFERENCES

Adamstone, F. B. 1922. Myxomycetes of the
Lake Nipigon district. Can. Field-
Nat. 36: 129-131.

Bisby, G. R., A. H. R. Buller, and John Dear-
ness. 1929. Myxomycetes. In The
Fungi of Manitoba. London. pp. 51-54.

Bisby, G. R. et al. 1938. Myxomycetes. In
The Fungi of Manitoba and Saskat-
chewan. Ottawa. pp. 25-27.

Cheesman, W. A. 1911. A contribution to the
mycologic flora and the Mycetozoa
of the Rocky Mountains. Trans.
Brit. Myc. Soc. 3: 267-276.

Currie, M. E. 1920. A critical study of the
slime-molds of Ontario. Trans. Royal
Can. Inst. 12: 247-308.

Dearness, John. 1911. The Myxos of Middle-
sex. Ont. Natural Sci. Bull., Jour.
Wellington Field Nat. Club. Guelph,
Ont. No. 7: 3-10.

1940. Distribution of a slime-mold.
Mycologia 32: 265-266.

Eastham, J. W. 1912. The Myxomycetes or
slime-moulds of the Ottawa district;
a preliminary list. Ottawa Nat. 25:
157-163.

Emoto, Yoshikadzu. 1935. Zwei neue Arten
von Myxomyceten. Proc. Imp. Acad.
Tokyo 11: 444-446.

Faull, J. H. 1913. Mycetozoa or slime-moulds.
In The Natural History of the To-
ronto Region, Ontario, Canada. To-
ronto. pp. 188-192.

Hagelstein, Robert. 1938. Notes on the Myce-
tozoa. II. Mycologia 30: 336-353.
1939. Notes on the Mycetozoa. III.
Mycologia 31: 337-349.

1940. Notes on the Mycetozoa. IV.

Mycologia 32: 376-387.
1941. Notes on the Mycetozoa. V.
Mycologia 33: 294-309.

1942 a. A new species of Mycetozoa.
Mycologia 34: 116-118.
1942 b. Notes on the Mycetozoa. VI.
Mycologia 34: 248-262.

|
|

Sept.-October, 1950]

1942 ec. A new genus of the Myce-
tozoa. Mycologia 34: 593-594.
1943. Notes on the Mycetozoa. VII.
Mycologia 35: 363-380.

1944. The Mycetozoa of North Amer-
ica. Mineola, N.Y.

Lister, Arthur. 1925. A Monograph of the
Mycetozoa. Third edition, revised
by Gulielma Lister. London.

Macbride, Thomas H., and G. W. Martin.
1934. The Myxomycetes. New York.

Mains, E. B., L. O. Overholts, and René Po-
merleau. 1939. Myxomycetes. In
Mycological Society of America —
Fungi collected at the foray, August
1938. Mycologia 31: 728-729.

Tur CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

7

185

Martin, G. W. 1942. Taxonomic notes on the
Myxomycetes. Mycologia 34: 696-704.

Massee, George. 1892. A Monograph of Myxo-
gastres. London.

C. L. 1910. The Myxomycetes of
Pictou County. Trans. N.S. Inst. Sci.
12: 165-206.

Wehmeyer, Lewis E. 1935. Myxomycetes. In
Contributions to a study of the fung-
ous flora of Nova Scotia. I. Papers
Mich. Acad. Sci. 20: 238-241.

1950. Myxomycetes. In The Fungi
of New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, and
Prince Edward Island. Ottawa. pp.
10-13.

Moore,

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

Effect on trees of extremes of climate in
southern Alberta. — The growing season in
this region is characterized by a low rainfall
and late spring frosts. Although much of the
10-15 in. annual precipitation is in June, this
month is frequently subject to strong west-
erly winds which are both hot and dry, and
thus involve a very great saturation defici-
ency. Whereas the growing season may

commence early due to the scanty snow cover
and cloudless spring days, the clear nights
following cold fronts allow severe frosts to
occur in May.

The dry winds may have spectacular effects
on planted vegetation. After a day in early
June, 1943, when the wind averaged 40 m.
p-h. and the temperature 85° F., the foliage
of a lilac bush (Syringa) 7 feet in height,

Fig. 1. Alberta white spruce transplanis with crop of cones developed one year after planting
at Suffield, Alta.

186 THE CANADIAN

Fig. 2. Green ash in second foliage after
frost-kill of May 9-10, 1946, at Medicine
Hat, Alta.

planted in good soil alongside a building at
Suffield, Alta., was completely withered by
direct desiccation. Again, some specimens of
the Alberta white spruce (Picea glauca al-
bertiana) were transplanted from _ their
mountain home at Seebe, Alta, to Suffield
in June, 1945, when they were 7 feet high.
By diligent watering they were carried
through that summer and were able to
develop buds, which began to open in May
of 1946. All the lateral buds turned out to
be cones instead of shoots. The terminal
growth was however sufficient to support
the trees, as shown by the accompanying

_ photograph (Fig. 1), taken in 1947.

An exceptionally heavy late spring frost
occurred on the night of May 9-10, 1946,
when the temperature fell to a minimum of
19° F. The preceding 3 weeks had seen
warm sunny weather, and all the trees of
Medicine Hat, Alta. were in leaf. The frost
resulted in the complete destruction of the
foliage of green ash (Fraxinus pennsylvani-
ca), the choicest available shade-tree for the
city. The foliage of Manitoba maple (Acer
Negundo) was partially killed, and the leaves
of the cottonwood (Populus deltoides) were
slightly affected. The ash put forth a com-
plete replacement of new foliage within 3
weeks, by the development of lateral buds
which must evidently be normally suppress-

FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 64
ed. A photograph taken at this time (Fig. 2)
shows the bizarre appearance of the trees,
with the dried remnants of the frost-killed
foliage still hanging on them. — A. W. A.
BROWN, University of Western Ontario,
London.

Recent Bird Records for the Ottawa District.
1. American Brant.

Branta bernicla. In the afternoon of
October 8, 1949, fifteen were observed at
Britannia, Ontario, by H. Brown, E. Mills and
mysielf. They flew directly overhead in a
close “V” formation. Flocks of Brant num-
bering from 3 to 39 were seen by local natu-
ralists until November 11 on which date 3
were watched feeding about 100 feet off-
shore in Graham Bay by E. Mills, D. Curry
and myself. On all occasions the birds show-
ed little fear, and when feeding or resting
on the shore they allowed close approach.
This particular area of the Ottawa River is
favoured by Brant during the spring migra-
tion, but there is apparently only one previ-
ous fall record.

2. Gadwall.

Chaulelasmus streperus.
4. 1949, D. Curry and I identified a drake
Gadwall on Dow’s Lake in a flock of Mal-
lards, Blacks and one shoveller. The bird
was later seen by E. Mills, Dr. D. B. O. Savile
and many other members of the Ottawa Field-
Naturalists’ Club. It became quite tame, al-

lowing approach within three feet, and many

photographs were taken of it. The bird was
in exceptionally fine plumage, correct to
every detail. There are two previous Ottawa
region records. The bird remained until
November 19 when the water, which was
being drained from the lake, became too
low to facilitate feeding near the marsh.

3. Hungarian Partridge.

Perdix perdix. During the morning of
August 16, 1949, at the Eastern Forestry
Station, Kemptville, Ontario, I surprised a
family of ten young and two adult Hungarian
Partridge. The first indication I had of their
presence was the sight of a half grown young,
standing on a gravel road. When I ap-
proached to within ten feet of it, it flew
showing a rusty tail. Another young scur-
ried across the road in front on me and dis-
appeared in the roadside underbrush. When
Tt went into the ditch I flushed the whole
family which landed in a nearby field, where

the tall grass protected them from being —

On November

Sept.-October, 1950]

seen. After a short while the parents called
the young to them in soft clucking notes.
By following these notes I was able to flush
them again and eliminate any doubt of their
identity.

4. Coot

Fulica americana. A late record for this
bird was one seen on the Rideau River, at
the Eastern Forestry Station, Kemptville, on
November 7, 1948.

5. Iceland Gull.

Larus leucopterus. At Dow’s Lake on
October 27, 1949, I saw what I took to be
a small Glaucous Gull. It was later seen by
Dr. D.B.O. Savile, V. Goodwill and others,
all of whom were impressed by its small
size. On October 30, it was observed by Mr.
Earl Godfrey who identified it as an Iceland
Gull, the second one recorded in this area.
It remained for over a week.

6. Short-eared Owl.

Asio flammeus. On December 3, 1949,
I was able to watch a Short-eared Owl] hunt-
ing by the Rideau River within the city
limits of Ottawa. It was not seen again until
January 1, 1950, when a group of chicka-
dees drew my attention to it while it perch-
ed in a small white cedar in Dow’s swamp.
This constitutes the first Ottawa-region
winter record. It was last seen a week later
in the Dominion Arboretum and Botanic
Garden by Dr. D. B. O. Savile.

7. Short-billed Marsh Wren.

Cistothorus platensis. During the mor-
ning of July 24, 1949, I was helping Mr. C.
H. Bennett band three Yellow Warblers near
a swamp approximately 2 miles south of
Ottawa. We both heard the song of the
Short-billed Marsh Wren. Two days later
I returned and spent the morning watching
the birds. There were at least three singing
males. Although they appeared much per-
turbed I found no nests or young. The area
in which they were singing bordered a
marsh. Its boundaries apparently were the
end of the cat-tail marsh on one side and
the beginning of a dry uncultivated field
on the other. The birds were seen until the
end of August.

8. Wood Thrush.
Hylocichla mustelina. Late in June, 1949,
N. Wickenden reported hearing a possible

Wood Thrush in a woods near Fairmont

THe CanapiaAn Fre_tp-NATURALIST

187

Avenue, in Ottawa. On June 30, E. Mills
and I investigated and found two singing
birds. On July 1, I returned and spent an
hour and a half watching one of these males.
At the end of this time he relieved the
female at the nest for a period of seventeen
minutes. The nest was saddled on the slop-
ing limb of an elm, approximately twenty-
six feet from the ground.

9. Cowbird.

Molothrus ater. On February 4, 1949,
at 13 Aylmer Avenue, Ottawa, I saw a Cow-
bird at the feeding station where I had been
looking for a Cardinal. The bird was al-
most totally black, with only a small patch
of brown on the nape. It remained in this
area of this feeding station until spring,
making the second winter record. On Decem-
ber 3, 1949, I saw another male of this
species. by the Rideau River just outside
the city limits of Ottawa.

10. Lapland Longspur.

Calcarius lapponicus. On September 17,
1949, a bird of this species landed close to
me on the shore of Beattie Bay. It was col-
lected by Mr. A.E. Bourguignon. At least
five more birds were seen that same day.
This is 22 days earlier than the former earli-
est date.

W. JOHN SMITH,
428 Sunnyside Ave., Ottawa, Ontario.

A Worm-eating Warbler (Helmitheros ver-
mivorus) at St. Andrews, N.B. — A Worm-
eating Warbler was observed by my wife
and me on May 5, 1949, at St. Andrews, N.B.
The bird was feeding quietly and silently
in a small, yellow birch (Betula lutea) and
was observed through 10 x 50 and 8 x 32
binoculars for fifteen minutes at a distance
of twenty-five feet. The large bill, the olive
and buff coloration, the four distinct black
stripes on the head, and the slow unwarbler-
like movements of the bird rendered its
identity unmistakable.

As far as I can determine, this is the first

record of this species in New Brunswick.
The remaining Canadian records are from

. southern Ontario:

1. London, May 28, 1908 — ¢ collected
by W.E. Saunders: and now in the col-
lection of the Royal Ontario Museum
of Zoology, Toronto.

2. Morgan’s Pt., Port Colborne, April 29,
and now in the Buffalo Museum of
Science. °

188

3. Vineland, May 4 to 10, 1944 — sight
record by W.L. Putnam ®*.

4. Four sight records at Toronto on file
at the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology:

Sept. 2, 1938 (F. Smith).
May 27, 1940 (B. Ritchie & R. Bremner)
May 9, 1943 (R. Sachs)

April 24, 1947 (T. Swift and D. Scovell)

I wish to thank Mr. J.L. Baillie of the
Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology for provid-
ing the information concerning the Port
Colborne specimen and the Toronto records.
— D. M. Scott, Department of Zoology,
McGill University.

Saunders, W. E., 1958 Auk, Vol. 25, No. 3, p. 319.
Axtel, H., 1949 Prothonotary, Vol. 15, p. 29.
Putnam, W. L., 1944 Can. Field-Nat., Vol. 58, No. 5,
Dp. 92:

om

Two Records of Shrimps from English Bay,
B.C. — While conducting a study of the com-
mercial shrimp fishery of English Bay, as-
sociated decapods were examined. As a
result, two records have been established :
one species constituting a first record and
the other evidently a second record. The
keys and descriptions of Rathbun (1904) and
Schmitt (1921) were consulted in the iden-
tification of these species.

The new record is Crago spinosissima
(Rathbun). This cragonid is represented by
a single specimen, an ovigerous female
captured on August 20, 1948 at 20 fathoms.
Previously, C. spinosissima had been re-
ported off the Oregon and California coasts
(Rathbun 1904), with the northern limit at
False Tillamook, Oregon. The present record,
therefore, greatly extends the northern
range of this species.

The other species, Crago communis (Rath-
bun) was reported by Potts (1912) as the
host for the rhizocephalan parasite Myceto-
morpha vancouverensis. Potts collected C.
communis in Departure Bay, B.C. during
August 1911. The entire distribution of this
shrimp is from the Bering sea to San Diego,
California.

An ovigerous female, 63 mm. in length was
measured on February 13, 1949. Other spe-
cimens measured ranged from 59 mm. to
73 mm. C. communis was found at depths
ranging from 15 to 60 fathoms. Next to the
commercial pandalids this species appears
to be the most abundant decapod crustacean
from English Bay.

Tur CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

References

Clemens, W. A., 1933. A check list of the
marine fauna and flora of the Canadian
Pacific Coast. National Research Council
of Canada, Ottawa. 88 pp. (Mimeographed).

Potts, F. A., 1912. Mycetomorpha, a new
Rhizocephalan. Zool. Jahrb. 33: 574-594.

Rathbun, M. J. Decapod crustaceans of the
northwest coast of North America. Harri-
man Alaska Exped. X, 3-190, Text fig. 1-
95, pl. I- X.

Schmitt, W. L., 1921. The marine decapod
crustacea of California. Univ. Calif. Pub.
Zool., vol. 23, 1-359, text fig. 1-165, pl.
1-50.

T. H. BUTLER,

Junior Biologist,

Pacific Biological Station,
Nanaimo, B.C.

The Scissor-tailed Flycatcher in New Bruns-
wick. — On June 29, 1949, while at the head-
quarters of the Fundy National Park, West-
morland Co., New Brunswick, I saw a Scis-
sor-tailed Flycatcher, Muscivora forficata
(Gmelin). This bird was perched on a tele-
phone wire above the beach in front of the
Park Superintendent’s house. Every few
moments it launched itself into the air to
a height of about fifty feet, apparently in
search of food. Occasionally it flew down
and alighted on the beach. The bird was
easily identified by its characteristic tail
and salmon-pink sides.

Several people including the wife and
daughter of the Park Superintendent, my
wife and Mr. Thomas Lothian, of the Biology
Department of the University of New Bruns-
wick, had an opportunity to carefully ob-
serve this bird.

Mr. W. A. Squires of the New Brunswick
Museum has kindly informed me of the fol-
lowing records of the Scissor+tailed Fly-
catcher in the province:

1. One shot at Clarendon Station by G. S.
Lacy, on May 21, 1906 (Cook, Wells W., Auk
23, 1906:460.)

2. Male collected at Alma, Albert Co. by
Fred Rommel, on June 20, 1907. Skin now in
N.B. Museum. (Leavitt, A. G., Bull. Nat.
Hist. Soc. of N.B., No. 26, 1908:64-65).

3. One collected at Whale Cove, Grand
Manan, Charlotte Co., on October 26, 1924.

Sept.-October, 1950]

Skin now in Alan Moses’ collection. (Tufts,
R. W., Can. Fd. Nat. 39, 1925:86-87).

4. Sight record at Hampstead, Queens
County by Stanley Gorham, on July 14, 1948.
(Unpublished.) — GEORGE F. BOYER, Do-
minion Wildlife Management Officer, R.R.
No. 1, West Sackville, N.B.

Salvelinus alpinus in Walton Lake, New
Brunswick. — A form of the Alpine char
(Salvelinus alpinus) is found in Walton Lake,
King’s County, New Brunswick.

Walton Lake is privately owned by the
Pejepscot Paper Company. One of the Com-
pany’s guests wrote to me from New York
some years ago describing a fish he had
taken in the lake which from the description
suggested Salvelinus marstoni, the Red Trout
of Quebec, now regarded as a form of alpi-
nus. As only one specimen was reported it
was thought that it might be merely a co-
lour phase of fontinalis, the eastern speckled
trout. This year Mr. Kaare Smith, local
manager for the Pejepscot Company called
on me and stated that about ten per cent
of the trout taken in the lake were not
fontinalis. In consequence of Mr. Smith’s
report I started to investigate the lake and
from the lake’s caretaker I learned that
alpinus had always made up far more than
ten per cent of the total number of fish
annually recorded as taken by anglers. He
referred to them as salmon trout.

D. H. Alderdice, who made an examination
of the lake, secured a number of specimens
which were forwarded to the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology, where Professor J. R.
Dymond and Dr. W. B. Scott confirmed the
identification as a form of the Arctic char
(Salvelinus alpinus).

I have a fairly good knowledge of our
Maritime waters and feel convinced that
alpinus is found in Walton Lake only. The
only other indigenous species known to
occur in the lake are the eastern speckled
trout and American eel. Golden shiners,
now present in great numbers were intro-
duced without authorization, probably by
some live bait fisherman. Before the intro-
duction of golden shiners, alpinus averaged
only about five ounces. Now specimens of a
- pound and a half are common with a maxi-
- mum of three pounds five ounces recorded.

; Professor Dymond in confirming the
identification of the Walton Lake specimens
asa form of alpinus wrote:

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

189

“Salvelinus alpinus, as you know, occurs
aS an anadromous species throughout the
northern part of the northern hemisphere
and is “land locked” in many lakes in all
northern lands. In the British Isles it shows
so much variation from lake to lake that at
least a dozen names have been applied to
it. However, Dr. Regan, a former director
of the British Museum (Natural History)
told me that he had decided that all should
be regarded as variants of alpinus. So far
as I know he never published that opinion.

Populations which have been long isolated
usually show variations. How much variation
from other forms is required to warrant a
specific or subspecific name is one on which
taxonomists would differ depending on
whether they were lumpers or splitters.” —
JAMES CATT, Department of Fisheries, St.
John, N.B.

Unusual Behaviour of Cormorants. — In
the late afternoon of December 31, .1949, I
watched two Cormorants diving just a few
yards off our rocks. One was a Pelagic Cor-
morant (Phalacrocorax pelagicus) the other
was a Brandt Cormorant (Phalacrocorax
penicillatus). Both dived and the Brandt
Cormorant came up with a fish cross-ways in
his bill. The fish looked to be about eight
inches in length, fairly heavy and coloured
a yellow-orange. The Cormorant seemed to
be having quite a time with the fish as it
was trying to wiggle free. The Pelagic then
started prodding the Brandt Cormorant on
the back with his bill. The Brandt Cormorant
dived three times with the fish in his bill,
and each time the Pelagic dived too, coming
up within inches of the Brandt. Whenever
they surfaced, the Pelagic would swim about
the other prodding him on the back and
making passes at the fish. Finally the Brandt
Cormorant came up with the fish head first
in his bill, he then gulped it down with
some difficulty. His neck filled out so much
that he couldn’t move it. The Pelagic swam
away.

I presume all the diving etc. was to get
the fish in the proper position for swallow-
ing. He must have released the fish in
every dive, recapturing it in the attempt to
get it into position, presumably because the
fish was too heavy to toss and catch in the
usual manner. — JEAN M. ODLUM, Triple
Island Lightstation, Prince Rupert, B.C.

190 THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

REVIEWS

Drawings of British plants. Part I. Ranun-
culaceae. Part II. Berberidaceae, Nymphaea-
ceae, Papaveraceae, Fumariaceae. By Stella
Ross-Craig. Pt. I, 44 plates, Pt. II, 22 plates.
G. Bell & Sons Ltd., London, 1948. In Canada,
Clarke, Irwin & Co., Toronto. $1.50 each part.

This work is planned to illustrate all the
clearly defined species of flowering plants
growing wild in Britain. It is anticipated
that the whole work will include some 1,500
to 1,800 plates and that several years will be
required for its completion. The artist is on
the staff of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew,
and the Director of the Gardens, Sir Edward
Salisbury, has contributed a brief foreword.

The illustrations are well-executed black
and white line drawings. Each includes a
habit sketch as well as detailed drawings of
flowers, fruits, and critical characters of es-
pecial importance in identification. A brief
legend appears at the bottom of each plate
including in every case a note on flower
eolour. No distributional data of any kind
are given. The drawings appear to be highly
accurate as well as of considerable artistic
merit. Unfortunately some of the plates are
rather crowded. These parts are only bound
in a heavy paper cover — obviously unsatis-
factory for what is intended as a more or
less permanent reference work. — HAROLD
A. SENN.

South Nation Valley Interim Report 1948.
Recommendations and Summary. Depart-
ment of Planning and Development. To-
ronto, 1950.

Establishment of the South Nation Valley
Conservation Authority on May 8, 1947, was
immediately followed by intensive studies
that led to an Interim Report. Recommenda-
tions of direct interest to naturalists are:
establishment of forests including the South
Nation Forest of nearly 200,000 acres; desig-
nation of part of the pond created by the
improved Spencerville mill dam as a perma-
nent wildlife sanctuary; protection of pre-
dators of meadow mice; control of stream
pollution; studies on the biology of the
Hungarian partridge. A short section is in-
cluded on the wildlife of the area and sug-
gestions for improving the wildlife environ-
ment. There are sixteen pages of excellent
photographs. — C. FRANKTON.

Audubon’s Birds of America. Popular
edition, with introduction and descriptive
captions by Ludlow Griscom. The MacMil-
lan Company, New York; 320 pp., 288 co-
loured plates, 1950 ($3.95 in Canada).

This “popular edition” of Audubon’s
paintings of the birds of America is decided-
ly less satisfactory than was the royal octavo
edition published by the MacMillan Com-
pany some time ago. In the “popular edition”
the plates are reduced, at considerable loss
of detail, to approximately 3% x 5% inches.
In the Acadian flycatcher, white-crowned
sparrow, Wilson and orange-crowned war-
blers, color reproduction is so bad that the
illustrations convey little resemblance to the
birds they depict. The chipping sparrow,
slate-coloured junco, yellow-breasted chat,
Connecticut warbler, cedar and Bohemian
waxwing, and mockingbird are shown with
more or less bright blue or green in the
plumage! The jet black head of the Bona-
parte gull is here colored a washed-out
brown and the vivid red crest of the ivory-
billed woodpecker also is brown!

The introduction and captions are by Lud-
low Griscom.
sides of Audubon are interestingly dis-
cussed. Those who do not like the im-
probable postures of some of Audubon’s bird
subjects are reminded that this dramatiza-
tion of his birds was Audubon’s revolt
against the conventional unimaginative paint-
ings in vogue in his time. — W. EARL GOD-
FREY.

National Wildlife and Conservation Digest,
Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1950, pp. 1-112. Pike
and Kearne, 184 Lanark Street, Winnipeg,
Manitoba. ($3.00 a year). ,

The first number of this new monthly
magazine is a pleasant surprise. As the
name on its attractive cover implies, it is
a digest of timely wildlife and conservation

articles selected from the pages of other re- |

putable North American publications. Forty
such articles are contained in the first num-
ber. They are well chosen, covering a
balanced variety of wildlife subjects, are
written informally in highly readable brevi-
ty, and are well printed on good paper.
Judging by the first number, sportsmen,
conservationists, and all who enjoy reading
about the out-of-doors will enthusiastically

welcome this interesting newcomer. — W.

EARL GODFREY.

In the former a number of |

—_—

!
|
i
;

meee lA EDP SOCIETIES

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY
OF MANITOBA

OFFICERS FOR 1950-1951

President Emeritus: DR. H. M. SPEECHLY; President:
R. R. LEJEUNE; Vice-Presidents: MRS. D. B. SPAR-
LING and PROF. R. K. STEWART-HAY; General
Secretary: MRS. W. A. CARTWRIGHT; Executive
Secretary: H. V. HOSFORD; Treasurer: H. MOSSOP;
Social Convenor: MISS L. LOVELL.

SECTIONS—

Ornithological: Chair. D. HARRY YOUNG; Sec. WAR-
REN JOHNSTON; Entomological: Chair. H. R. WONG;
Sec. J. D. SMITH; Botanical: Chair. MRS. D. B. SPAR-
LING; Sec. J. ROWE; Geological: Chair. P. H. STOKES;
Sec. D. T. MURRAY; Mammalogical: Chair. PROF.
R. K. STEWART-HAY; Sec. S. WICK; Archaeological :
Chair. MRS. P. H. STOKES, Sec. MISS W. DOWNES.

Meetings are held each Friday evening from October
to April in Thestre “A’’ of the University of Manitoba,
Memorial Boulevard, Winnipeg. Field excursions are
held on Saturdays or Sundays during May, June and
September and on public holidays in July and August.
Membership fee: $1.00 a year for adults; 25 cents
for juniors.

PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL
HISTORY OF CANADA

OFFICERS FOR 1950

President: DR. VIGER PLAMONDON; ist Vice-Presi-
dent: J. KENNEDY HILL; 2nd Vice-President: J.
GERALD COOTE; Secretary-Treasurer: GEORGES A.
LECLERC; Chief of Scientific Section: FRANCOIS

HAMEL; Chief of Protection Section: Dr. D. A. DERY;
Chief of Propaganda Section: RENE CONSTANTINEAU;
Chief of Information Section: W. STUART ATKINSON.

Other directors: G. H. CARTWRIGHT, JOS MORIN,
J. C. PRICE, ULRIC G. TESSIER, T. J. A. HUNTER, REX
MEREDITH.

THE TORONTO FIELD-NATURALISTS’
CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1950-1951

President: A. A. OUTRAM; Vice-President: J. L.
BAILLIE; Secretary-Treasurer: MRS. J. B. STEWART,
21 Millwood Rd., Toronto; President of Junior Club:
MRS. J. MURRAY SPEIRS; Vice-President of Junior Club:
MRS. L. E. JAQUITH. Executive Council: G. M. BART-
MAN, J. BARNETT, MRS. N. BROWN, ALFRED BUNKER,
MISS F. BURGESS, ALEXANDER CAMERON, MISS VERA
CLARK, MISS B. DOUGLAS, PROF. T. W. DWIGHT, DR.
M. FRITZ, W. W. H. GUNN, DR. L. E. JAQUITH, MRS.
J. D. KETCHUM, MISS V. KOHLER, MRS. H. H. MARSH,
C. S. McKEE, D. S. MILLER, JOHN MITCHELE, R. M.
SAUNDERS, EARL STARK, H. H. SOUTHAM. Ex. Officio:
A. J. V. LEHMANN, C. A. WALKINSHAW, T. F. McIL-
WRAITH.

Meetings are held at 8.15 p.m. on the first Monday of
each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario
Museum, unless otherwise announced. Field trips are
held during the spring and autumn and on the second
Saturday of each month during the winter.

VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY
SOCIETY

EXECUTIVE OFFICERS — 1950-1951

Hon. President: DR. N. A. M. MacKENZIE; Past Presi-
dent: A. H. BAIN Esq.; President: DR. V. C. BRINK;
Vice-President: PROF. T. M. C. TAYLOR; Hon. Secre-
tary: BERNARD ROGERS; Assistant Secretary: MRS.
A. E. BIRNEY; Program Secretary: A. H. BAIN; Hon.
Treasurer: F. J. SANFORD; Librarian: MRS. §. F.
BRADLEY; Chairmen of Sections: Botany — PROF. J.
DAVIDSON; Geology — J. J. PLOMMER; tomology —
A. R. WOOTON; Ornithology — W. M. HUGHES; Mam-
malogy — DR. I. McT. COWAN; Marine Biology —
R. W. PILLSBURY; Photography — D. J. MARTIN:
Junior Section — A. R. WOOTON; Additional Members
of Executive: DR. M. Y. WILLIAMS, F. WAUGH, PROF.
G. J. SPENCER, S. F. BRADLEY; Auditors; W. B.
WOODS, H. G. SELWOOD.

All meetings at 8 p.m., Room 100, Applied Science-
Building, University of British Columbia, unless other-
wise announced.

McILWRAITH ORNITHOLOGICAL CLUB
LONDON, ONT.

OFFICERS FOR 1949

President: Mr. WM. G. GIRLING, 530 English St., Lon-
don; Vice-president: Mr. J. LEACH, West London P.O.;
Recording Secretary: Miss M. STEVENS, 81 Elmwood
Ave., London; Treasurer: Mr, A. CLENDINNING, 40
Ridout St., London; Migration Secretary: Mr. T, GAR-
SIDE, 27 Elm St., London.

_Meetings are held at 8.00 p.m. in the Public Library
biulding on the second Monday of each month from
Sepiember to May.

Field trips are held during the spring and a special
excursion in September.

PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR
THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS INC.

OFFICERS FOR 1950-1951

President: G. H. MONTGOMERY Jr.; Vice-President:
W. H. RAWLINGS; Vice-President: DR. M. J. DUNBAR;
Treasurer: D. G. ELLIOT; Secretary: MISS R. S.
ABBOTT, 166 Senneville Road, Senneville, P.Q.

COMMITTEE
Miss R. S. ABBOTT, J. P. ANGLIN, Miss R. B. BLAN-
CHARD, W. R. B. BERTRAM, J. D. CLEGHORN, J. A.

DECARIE, DR. M. J. DUNBAR, D. G. ELLIOT, Mrs. D.
G. ELLIOT, G. H. HALL, W. S. HART, Mrs. C. L. HEN-
DERSON, Miss G. HIBBARD, H. A. C. JACKSON, A. R.
LEPINGWELL, G. H. MONTGOMERY Jr, Miss L. MURPHY,
G. G. OMMANNEY, W. H. RAWLINGS, J. W. ROBINSON,
C. C. SAIT, DR. D. M. SCOTT, Miss M. SEATH, L. Mcl.
TERRILL, Mrs. L. McI. TERRILL.

Meetings held the second Monday of the month except
during summer.

BRITISH COLUMBIA BIRD AND
MAMMAL SOCIETY
President: KENNETH RACEY; Vice-President: H. Ma,

LAING; Secretary: IAN McT. COWAN, Dept. of
Zoology, University ¢f British Columbia, Vancouver, B.C.

WANTED

In order to meet the demand for back numbers of the publications
of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, the following are urgently needed:
Transactions, Otta. Field-Nat. Club, No. 1, 1880.

Otiawa Naturalist

Vol. 4, No. 6, Sept., 1890
Vol. 11, No. 10, Jan., 1898
Vol. 11, No. 11, Feb., 1898
Vol. 11, No. 12, Mar., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 1, Apr., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 4, July, 1898
Vol. 12, No. 5, Aug., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 6, Sept., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 7 & 8, Oct-Nov., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 9, Dec., 1898

Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 38, No. 1, Jan., 1924
Vol. 39, No.3; Mar., 1925
Vol. 39, No. 4 Apr., 1925
Volrog: No. 5, May, 1925

Members and subscribers who are able to spare any of these numbers
would greatly assist the Club by forwarding them to:

Mr. W. J. Cody,
Division of Botany
Science Service,
Dept. of Agriculture,
Ottawa, Ontario.

"LE DROIT” Printing, Ottawa, Canada. fangiivest

Vol. 64 NOVEMBER-DECEMBER, 1950 No. 6

The CANADIAN
mae LD-NATURALIST

Contents

Pectinatella magnifica Leidy (Bryozoa) in Dundas Marsh, Hamilton, Ontario.

FERN OUP ETA CH On 8 cee IN MUNN UES AN US Mhh a AML ol IAIN AEN 191
Notes on the vertebrates, except fishes, of the Sault Ste. Marie region of Ontario.

PCM ETO CUMNN LEDIIGEOI he resus cee tT Skate ds ile Sen i Se eS 192
Breeding behaviour of the Ring-necked Pheasant on Pelee Island, Ontario.

Pee ay Lip ee ees re uen aak Lie aa A NON a SO UNS a Ala asa le 201
Colour phase investigations on the Screech Owl in Ontario.

LETT) De) 1G Sil [Gv 0 8 OOP 2 ae aaa UE BURY“ Rn Rh een OAC pe 208
The dates of publication of the Icones Filicum ae W. nan Hooker and R. K. Greville.

By Bernard Boivin . tau pete

&H. B. Conover’s bird work in Yukon. By A. L. Rand .........0.0000.0.0.0 SSL ae 214

Notes and Observations:—
Florida Gallinule, Gallinula chloropus cachinnans, in Thunder Bay District.

“EOP LU TEC aa AS 2S VISCO MR Rn ge hs a 221

The Burrowing Owl in Alberta. By W. Ray Salt ....00... eee 221

Belated Swallows in the Maritimes. By W. Austin Squires ........0..00.0000000.. 221

ETSI NOTE Be DU) A TE rg UO RL eR Oe ee 220

a IIE Ge Mies tor TH CU cek ie ve 222
Li

SH FEB 49 95]
Published by L Te “ay
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

Entered at the Post Office at Ottawa, Ont., as second class matter.

Che Ottawa Pield-Paturalists’ Club

— Patrons —
Their Excellencies the Governor-General and the Lady Alexander

President: Dr. PAULINE SNURE

1st Vice-President: Dr. J. W. GROVES 2nd Vice-President: Mr. R. FRITH
Treasurer: RAYMOND Moore, Secretary: H. J. Scoccan,
Division of Botany, National Museum of Canada,
Science Service, Dept. of Ottawa.

Agriculture, Ottawa.

Additional Members of Council: Mrs. H. Luoyp, Miss VERNA Ross, Miss Mary Stuart,
Messrs. E. G. ANDERSON, R. M. ANDERSON, W. K. W. Batpwin, A. F. W. BANFIELD,
Rey. F. E. Bantu, B. Borvin, A. E. BourcuicNon, A. W. Cameron, W. J. Copy, J. P.
CUERRIER, W. G. Dore, C. FRANKTON, W. E. Goprrey, H. Grou, S. D. Hicxs, W. ILLMAn,
W. H. Lancertey, D. Lreecuman, H. F. Lewis, Hoyves Lioyp, T. H. MANNING, W. H.
MINSHALL, A. E. Porsitp, D. B. O. Savitz, H. A. SENN, V. E. F. Sorman, J. S. TENER.

Auditors: I. L. CONNERS, C. FRANKTON, and H. F. Lewis.

Editor

Dr. H. A. SENN,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

Associate Editors

WG DORE CALE ee iE aunts Botany R. M. ANDERSON .................. Mammalogy
ZA MA ROCOUR | et. cadre REN Conchology A. G. HUNTSMAN ............ Marine Biology
HG) CRAWEORD ie) VOW Entomology We: GopRrey ye ay Ornithology
Bey PAR COCK Mi EUs wih AU tay sa Geology WAC BEET. Wun fst end eines Palaeontology
Crype L. Pater ())o00)0., Herpetology Je RD YMOND) 004 Ae Ichthyology

Business Manager
W. J. Copy,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

The official publications of THr OTTAwA FieLtp-NATuRALIsTS’ CLUB have been
issued since 1879. The first were The Transactions of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’
Club, 1879, 1886, two volumes; the next, The Ottawa Naturalist, 1886-1919, thirty-
two volumes: and these have been continued by The Canadian Field-Naturalist to

date. The Canadian Field-Naturalist is issued bi-monthly. Its scope is the publication
of the results or original research in all departments of Natural History.

Price of this volume (6 numbers) $3.00; Single copies 60c each.

Subscription ($3.00 per year) should be forwarded to Dr. R. J. Moors,
Div. of Botany, Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture,
OTTAWA, CANADA.

nies es Wey a} 2 (el Bay ©) i ingens ISD |

_ The Canadian ,!

Vol. 64

OTTAWA, CANADA, NOVEMBER-DECEMBER, 1950

aturalist

No. 6

PECTINATELLA MAGNIFICA LEIDY (BRYOZOA) IN THE
DUNDAS MARSH, HAMILTON, ONTARIO’

W. W. Jupp
McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario

URING THE SUMMER MONTHS of
1946 and 1948 observations were made
on colonies of Pectinatella magnifica Leidy
in the Dundas Marsh which lies along the

northern limits of the city of Hamilton,

Ontario. The marsh is about 700 acres in
extent, and in 1946-1948 about three-quarters
of its area was occupied by heavy growths
of aquatic and marsh-dwelling plants. The
depth of the water was between one and
two meters over most of the area and the
water was comparatively still, the only out-
let of the marsh being a canal leading into
Hamilton Bay. The colonies of Pectinatella
occurred in stretches of shallow water
among rushes: and about a boathouse.

Davenport (1904) reports that Pectinatella
magnifica is confined to North America ex-
cept as introduced at Hamburg, Germany,
and he records its occurrence in Maine,
Massachusetts, New York and Illinois. In
Ontario it has been reported to occur at Go
Home Bay and the French River by White
(1915) and in the Humber River near To-
ronto by Huntsman (1913). This bryozoan
was first noted by the writer in the Dundas
Marsh during July, 1946 when several colo-
nies, each about 6 inehes in diameter, were
seen floating among rushes in water one to
two feet deep. On July 23 a colony 15 cm.

On Sept. 14, 1948 Mr. R. Sims counted 20
colonies in water surrounding a boathouse in
the north-east corner of the marsh and
noted that some of these were formed on
dead, submerged branches. One _ elliptical
colony measured by Mr. Sims was 14 inches
in diameter along its length and 11 inches
across its width.

The hooks which project from the circum-
ference of the statoblasts have been used by
Henchman and Davenport (1913) in an in-
vestigation of the genetic origin of colonies.
Davenport (1904) reports that the stato-
blasts have from 11 to 22 hooks from 0.15-
0.25 mm. long, and Henchman and Daven-
port (1913) record that the number of hooks
varies from 11 to 26. In a count of the
number of hooks on 827 statoblasts from
several colonies collected in Lake Michigan,
Davenport (1900) found that the number
of hooks per statoblast ranged from 11 to
21 and that the number occurring most com-
monly was 13. From the colony collected in
the Dundas Marsh on July 23, 1946, 517
statoblasts were removed and the hooks
were counted. The result of the count is |
shown in Table 1.

In this case the average number of hooks
per statoblast was 15.11 and the number
occurring most frequently was 15. This is

Table 1. — Number of hooks per statoblast.

Number of hooks per statoblast ........ 12

Frequencies

1B A BO oe Bh ee l8.y | 10 20
28 118 195 123 38 8 3 a

in diameter was found encircling a sub-
merged stick and the outer surface of its
jelly-like matrix was plentifully speckled
with statoblasts. On July 28, 1946, Mr. L.
Wragg collected a colony 8 inches in dia-

meter likewise speckled with statoblasts.

1 Received for publication March 27, 1950. .

higher than the average number occurring
in the population of 827 studied by Daven-
port (1900), but in other populations studied
by Henchman and Davenport (1913) the
most commonly occurring number of hooks |
per statoblast was 15 or more. Davenport
(1900) also studied variations in the form
of the hooks and figured several types show-

Vol. 64, No. 5, September-October, 1950, was issued January 18, 1951.
— 191 —

192

ing that the distal end of the hook may
have a single claw, a bifid claw, two claws
or two double claws. All the types figured
by him show hooks with simple stalks. On
one of the 517 statoblasts from the colony
collected in the Dundas Marsh on July 23,
1946 there were two hooks at opposite sides
of the statoblast in which the base of the
stalk originated from the circumference of
the statoblast as three short filaments con-
verging to form a tripod supporting the rest
of the stalk.

Literature cited

Davenport, C. B. 1900 — On the variation of
the statoblasts of Pectinatella magnifica

THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

from Lake Michigan, at Chicago. American
Naturalist 34 : 959-968.

Davenport, C. B. 1904 — Report on the fresh-
water Bryozoa of the United States. Proc.
U. S. National Museum 27.: 211-221.

Henchman, A. P. and C. B. Davenport 1913
— Clonal variation in Pectinatella. Ameri-
can Naturalist 27 : 361-371.

Huntsman, A. G. 1913 — Invertebrates other
than insects and mollusks. The Natural
History of the Toronto Region, Ontario,
Canada. Canadian Institute, Toronto.

White, H. C. 1915 — Bryozoa of the Georgian
Bay region. Contributions to Canadian
Biology, 1911-1914, Fasciculus 2 : 195-199.

—__—_—__ > -@ _____

NOTES ON THE VERTEBRATES, EXCEPT FISHES, OF THE SAULT
STE. MARIE REGION OF ONTARIO?
FRED WARBURTON,
Owen Sound, Ont.

ROM September, 1947, to June, 1948, I
| ese a few miles east of Sault Ste.

Marie, Ontario, and from September to
December, 1948, a few miles north of Bruce
Mines, Ontario, about thirty miles east of
“The Soo”. During that time I had many
opportunities to study the land vertebrates
of the area.

The most complete account of the fauna
of the area which I was able to find is “A
Faunal Investigation of the Sault Ste. Marie
Region, Ontario.”, by L.L. Snyder, E.B.S.
Logier, and T.B. Kurata. (Trans. Roy. Can.
Inst. Vol. XXIV, Pt 1, 1942.) It comprises a
record of the field work conducted by the
Royal Ontario Museum in the summer of 1931,
and several other pertinent records. Only
information which is additional to that in
the cited work will be recorded here. (Sub-
sequent references to the above paper will
be cited simply as “Snyder et al.’’)

Although I was able to collect very few
specimens, I am morally certain of the iden-
tification of all the species listed, unless I
state otherwise.

Acknowledgment is due to a great number
of residents of the Sault Ste. Marie area who
gave me invaluable assistance in my work,
and who showed admirable patience in an-
swering innumerable questions.

1 Received for publication May 10, 1950.

Snyder et al include a detailed description
of the area in their paper, on which I shall
not enlarge here except to state that, since
1931, portions of the area have been cleared
by lumbering, agriculture, and fire, but other-
wise the region remains essentially the same.

Amphibians
Necturus maculosus.

MUDPUPPY. One was caught by hook and
line in Korah Township, west of “The Soo,”
and kept for several days in an aquarium.
Mrs. W.E. Shaule, of Bruce Mines, says they
are occasionally caught in the Thessalon
River. Mr. R.H. Burns, of Sault Ste. Marie,
reported finding one dead under a wharf
at Richard’s Landing on St. Joseph’s Island,
with a group of its eggs nearby.

Triturus viridescens.

NEWT. W.E. Shaule reported finding red,
spotted, “Blood Lizards’ with flattened tails
under logs, etc. He was familiar with the
Red-backed Salamander.

Ambystoma jeffersonium.

JEFFERSON’S SALAMANDER. I captured
two in ditches two or three miles east of
Sault Ste. Marie on April 10,1948.

Plethodon cinereus.

RED-BACKED SALAMANDER. Not un-
common near Bruce Mines.

Nov.-Dec. 1950]. THE CANADIAN

Rana catasbeiana.

BULLFROG. I discovered one in Septem-
ber, 1947, in the mud of a recently excavated
basement near Sault Ste. Marie. The follow-
ing spring, I heard one regularly, calling
from a pond near the mouth of the Root
River.

My information concerning the other am-

phibia of the region is in complete agree-
‘ment with that of Snyder et al.

Reptiles
Thamnophis sirtalis.

GARTER SNAKE. The smallest seen was
about ten inches long, September 28, 1948.
During October, 1947, I dissected two which
had been killed. One had been eating earth-
worms only. The second had eaten a ten-
inch Red-bellied Snake and a small toad.

Birds

I shall omit a number of species of birds
which I observed in the region because my
data add nothing to those already published
by Snyder et al.

Branta canadensis.

CANADA GOOSE. A common spring and
fall migrant, occurring in flocks of up to two
or three hundred individuals but more often
in flocks of twenty to fifty. Frequently they
could be heard flying overhead shortly after
dark, and occasionally they alighted in open
fields at night. Mr. W. St. John, game over-
seer at Thessalon, stated that they are of
little importance as game in the area.

A trustworthy farmer at Bruce Mines told
me of shooting an albino goose several years
ago. The bird. was entirely white, with pink
eyes and feet. He could not identify it
specifically, but described it as lacking a
“srinning patch,” which would exclude both
of the following species.

Chen hyperborea.

SNOW GOOSE. In mid-November, 1947, I
saw two flocks of this species flying toward
the river a couple of miles east of Sault Ste.
Marie. One flock contained about 100 birds
(by actual count,) the other, two or three
times that number. On November 11, 1948,
I saw ten or more flocks north of Bruce
- Mines, varying in size from 9 to 75 individuals.

Chen caerulescens.
eS BLUE GOOSE. I saw two or three small
flocks at Bruce Mines at the same time as

FIELD-NATURALIST

193

the Snow Geese. This species was much less
numerous. Each species appeared to form
homogeneous flocks.

Anas platyrhynchos.

MALLARD. I failed to find this species
but many hunters knew it.

Anas rubripes.

BLACK DUCK. Occasional as a breeding
species. I found an adult and four downy
young on the Root River near its mouth on
June 13, 1948.

February 7, 1948, was a bitterly cold day,
and I was greatly surprised to find two
Black Ducks on the ice at the lower end
of the Sault ship canal. On February 27,
there were ten individuals at the same place.
On inquiry, I learned that it was not un-
usual to find the species there at that time
of year. The rapid current of the tailrace
of the Abitibi power dam maintains an area
of open water throughout the winter, and
this proves attractive to several species of
gulls and ducks which would otherwise be
able to find open water only in deeper or
more turbulent areas.

Anas acuta.

PINTAIL. I saw three adult females near
the mouth of the Root River, September 21,
1947. The species is apparently one of the
more important game waterfowl of the region.

Aythya affinis.

LESSER SCAUP DUCK. A fairly common
spring and fall migrant in 1947-48, and an
important game species.

Glaucionetta clangula.

AMERICAN GOLDEN-EYE. A common
winter duck, remaining on the St. Mary’s
River as long as open water is available. About
150 apparently spent much of the winter of
1947-48 on the open water at the Abitibi
dam and the St. Mary’s Rapids at Sault Ste.
Marie. Here, they could be seen drifting
downstream until they nearly reached the
ice at the lower end of the open area, and
flying back upstream, so that a _ constant
movement was present in the flocks. Oc-
casionally small groups rested on the ice. As
the afternoon darkened, the birds appeared
to be congregating on the headrace of the
dam, where the water, although swift, was
smooth. Even the turbulence of the rapids,
however, failed to deter them from feeding
there in daylight.

194 THE CANADIAN

Lophodytes cucullatus.

HOODED MERGANSER. On November 23,
1947, I flushed a male and female from the
Root River near Highway 17. Earlier that
month I had obtained a wing of the species
from a hunter near Sault Ste. Marie.

Mergus merganser.

COMMON MERGANSER. Common through-
out the fall and winter on the St. Mary’s
River, and, after that is closed by ice, on the
open water of the rapids and- the Abitibi
dam, where I found them about as common
as the Golden-eye. Scattered pairs were
present in the spring on the more isolated
streams and islands. On September 5, 1948,
there were at least 100 on the rocks in the
St. Mary’s Rapids, and a few others on the
water below the dam.

Cathartes aura.

TURKEY VULTURE. I saw one individual
on May 22, 1948, about four miles north-east
of Sault Ste. Marie. The bird flew across
open fields about a hundred yards from me
and at an altitude of about fifty feet. I am
fairly well acquainted with the field identifica-
tion of the species and have no doubt whatso-
ever that I have named it correctly. No other
bird in the region could be confused with it at
many times the distance.

Accipiter striatus.

SHARP-SHINNED HAWK. It is regularly |

but not commonly seen in the region through-
out the warmer months. One at Bruce Mines
was proudly displayed by a farmer who
claimed that it had been killed by his cat.

Accipiter cooperii.

COOPER’S HAWK. Not as common as the
Sharp-shin. Otherwise the status of the two
species would appear to be similar.

Buteo jamaicensis.

RED-TAILED HAWK. Not common at any
time, but I found it a little more common as
a migrant than as,a resident in the more
settled areas.

Buteo lineatus.

RED-SHOULDERED HAWK. I saw only
one, circling below me in the air over a deep
valley six miles north-east of Sault Ste. Marie
on May 22, 1948.

Buteo lagopus.

ROUGH-LEGGED HAWK. Very numerous
as a fall migrant in the Bruce Mines area in

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

1948. From mid-October until late November
I saw two or three every day, and a few
remained until late December. Residents
stated that it was equally common every
year.

Haliaeetus leucocephalus.

BALD EAGLE. I have three records for
the region, an adult at the Root River, May
19, 1948; an immature individual north of
Bruce Mines, September 12; and another
adult over the lake at Bruce Mines, December
The

Circus cyaneus.

MARSH HAWK. I would modify the state-
ment of Snyder et al, that this is the com-
monest hawk of the region, to a statement
that it is the commonest breeding hawk. It
is far outnumbered in fall by migrant Rough-
legs and Sparrow Hawks.

Falco columbarius.

PIGEON HAWK. I have five records of
this species, for October 13, 1947; and April
10, June 19, September 6, and October 17,
1948 respectively. Surprisingly enough, the
first four are all from within the city limits
of Sault Ste. Marie, three of them from the
business section. The last record was from
north of Bruce Mines.

Falco sparverius.

SPARROW HAWKE. A fairly common breed-
ing species. I found a nest in a hollow tree
four miles east of Sault Ste. Marie, on June
13, 1948. However, it is in the fall migration
that this hawk reaches its greatest abundance.
In the fall of 1948, I saw fifteen or twenty
daily in fields about Bruce Mines, often in
small groups of four or five. One was seen
harrying a cat, swinging in an are just out
of reach of the mammal, crying ‘klee-klee-
klee” impertinently until the cat was wild
with rage. Possibly a similar but less well
judged act resulted in the death of the Sharp-
shin described above.

Canachites canadensis.

SPRUCE GROUSE. SPRUCE HEN. Ac-
cording to hunters’ reports, this species is
now probably extinct, or nearly so, in the
Bruce Mines area. Formerly, and still in
nearby areas, it could be captured (with
snares on poles, with which the birds were
merely picked from their perches one at a
time.

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN

Bonasa umbellus.

RUFFED GROUSE. A common bird of
considerable importance as game. Drum-
ming had begun by the middle of May in
1948. By the end of June, many empty nests
were in evidence in the deciduous slashings.
By mid-September, the birds had begun their
movement to the coniferous bush. I found
the first snow roost in 1948 on January 19.
Snow roosts were usually near the bases of
fairly large spruces, the lowest branches of
which formed a canopy just above the snow.
Each roost contained a pile of bean-shaped
droppings in the morning: The birds’ tracks
showed that they usually walked away from
their roosts in the mornings. One individual
had used two snow roosts in one night; the
first was in an unsheltered position, from
which tracks led to the second, nine feet
away, which was sheltered on three sides by
underbrush.

When the Cloudslee area, north of Bruce
Mines, was settled, grouse were much more
plentiful than they are now. One old resident
told of shooting thirty in one day, all within
sight of his house, twenty years ago. At that
time, large areas of bush still separated the
fields from each other.

Tympanuchus cupido.

PRAIRIE CHICKEN. I flushed two from a
puddly open field near the edge of aspen
shrubbery on the Garden River Indian Re-
serve, about two miles north of Highway 17,
two or three miles east of Sault Ste. Marie.
The birds were identified by their short, dark
tails, as I flushed them. Nearby was a nest
containing fragments of three buff eggs,
spotted with brown, larger than those of a
Ruffed Grouse. Possibly the nest was of this
species.

Pedioecetes phasianellus. |

SHARP-TAILED GROUSE. Not uncommon
north of Bruce Mines in open and brushy
fields. I saw two or three each week during
the four months of my residence there. One
was shot on November 12, 1948, from a group
of three at Cloudslee, north of Bruce Mines.
Such shooting is, of course, illegal, but it
occasionally takes place. The hunter showed
me the bird, and from him I obtained a wing
and the two central tail feathers, which I
preserved.

A farmer described ceremonies among
these birds, which took place years ago in a

FIELD-NATURALIST

195

hayfield on his farm. The birds strutted
about with ooccasional fights, uttering calls
“like a crazy owl,” with the feathers on the
sides of their necks extended. Several people
in the Cloudslee area described “Prairie
Chickens,” with short, dark, rounded tails
and darker breasts than the present species.
I believe they were probably referring to
Tympanuchus cupido.

Perdix perdix.

EUROPEAN PARTRIDGE. This species in-
troduced into the region in 1930, still exists
in and about Sault Ste. Marie. It is especial-
ly often seen in a wooded area near the
locks of the Sault Ste. Marie Ship Canal.

Phasianus colchicus.

COMMON PHEASANT. This introduced
species is still fairly common on St. Joseph’s
Island, but I was unable to obtain any data
about its status on the mainland.

(Grus canadensis.)

(SANDHILL CRANE). When I arrived in
Cloudslee, north of Bruce Mines, in the fall
of 1948, I was told of a “wild turkey” which
had been seen there by many residents
during the preceding summer. The bird, or
perhaps two of them, inhabited a wide area
of pasture through which flowed a _ small
creek. By questioning several people, I ob-
tained a considerable amount of information
about the bird, which I shall summarize be-
low.

1. All those whom I questioned called it
a “wild turkey”. One believed it to be a
cross between a turkey and a “crane,” (i.e., a
Great Blue Heron.)

2. All my informants were acquainted with
the Great Blue Heron, and were certain that
the bird was not the same.

3. The “wild turkey” was described as
brown in colour (the “crane” was usually
described as gray). Several people mentioned
red markings on the bird’s head. Their
descriptions varied from a mention of red
spots on the head of the bird to a crest of
short red feathers. The “wild turkey’s’” tail
was described as “curved downward.” This .
statement was illustrated by a sweep of the
hand in a vertical arc, and seems to refer to
the “tufted rear” illustrated by Roger Tory
Peterson (A Field Guide to the Birds, 1947,
page 86). |

4. The bird’s voice was loud and sonorous,
audible at distances up to a half mile, and

196 THE CANADIAN
resembled one of the calls of a domestic
turkey. It flew with its neck outstretched
and legs trailing behind. Usually it was seen
walking about on the dry portions of the
pasture, and was said by one observer to
spend much of its time catching grasshoppers.

5. One observer told of seeing two indi-
viduals together, one slightly smaller than
the other. One was jumping about, flapping
its wings and assuming awkward poses. This,
if true, may refer to the courtship “dance”
of the species.

6. An old resident told of seeing two
similar birds in the area “many years ago.”
His description tallied in every way with that
of the Sandhill Crane. He told how one of
the birds had alighted in a field on his fa-
ther’s farm, and had been shot. The second
refused to leave, and it too was shot. On
investigation, he learned that the birds were
“wild turkeys,’ which he believed to be a
western bird.

Charadrius hiaticula.
SEMIPALMATED PLOVER. I saw two on

the rocky shore of the Sault rapids on May
24, 1948.

Philehela minor.

AMERICAN WOODCOCK. Found in suita-
ble localities from April until late in fall.
I found one on June 15 near Sault Ste. Marie,
showing considerable reluctance to leave a
small area, but I was unable to find a nest.
My latest record is November 3, 1947.

Larus argentatus.

HERRING GULL. Common throughout the
region in summer. In spring and fall, flocks
of up to 60 or 80 individuals feed in freshly
ploughed fields. A few spent the winter of
1947-1948 near the open water at the rapids
and the Abitibi dam.

Larus philadelphia.

BONAPARTE’S GULL. I saw one in win-
ter plumage at the C.P.R. dock at Sault Ste-
Marie, September 20, 1947.

Sterna hirundo.

COMMON TERN. A few could be seen
every day on the river at Sault Ste. Marie
from the middle of May until early in the
summer of 1948. They were common again
in September and I frequently saw several
hundred in one day. On September 5, I
watched a flock of over 100 on the rocks at
the lower end of the St. Mary’s Rapids. The

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

young birds were still being fed by the
adults, which carried small fish to them, often
held crosswise in their beaks, and frequently
fed them while hovering.

Columba livia.

ROCK DOVE. Fairly common, but not
abundant in Sault Ste. Marie. Occasional indi-
viduals and small flocks were found through-
out the region.

Zenaidura macroura.

MOURNING DOVE. Scarce, but I saw it
in the Cloudslee area.

Ectopistes migratorius.

PASSENGER PIGEON. Now extinct. The
Cloudslee area was first settled circa 1870.
According to the reports of old residents, and
stories handed down from one generation to
the present, wild pigeons were “as thick as
black flies’ at that time. One old man, who
entered the area about 1884, told me that he
often saw thousands while driving along the
roads. He thought they were not often shot
in large numbers in the area, but neverthe-
less they disappeared within a few years.

The Sault Daily Star of December 24, 1946,
describing the settling of the Cloudslee area
about 1875, states that “. . . numerous rabbits,
partridge and wild pigeons and also bears
were numerous. (sic).”

Apparently, then, the Passenger Pigeon still
existed in numbers in the District of Algoma
at least as late as 1880.

Coccyzus erythropthalmus.

BLACK-BILLED CUCKOO. Not uncommon.
I found a nest on June 14, 1948, on the ground
in the centre of a small clump of willow
shrubs a few miles east of The Soo. It was
lined with willow catkins, and contained three
eggs.

Otus asio.

SCREECH OWL. I failed to find this
species but many residents were thoroughly
familiar with it.

Bubo virginianus.

GREAT HORNED OWL. I heard one near
Bruce Mines, September 7, 1948, and pre-
served a wing from one which was shot at
Cloudslee on November 21.

Nyctea scandiaca.

SNOWY OWL. According to the reports —
of residents, it visits the region in large
numbers in some winters.

~

~~

Nov.-Dec. 1950]

Surnia ulula.

HAWK OWL. There is a mounted Hawk
Owl in the lobby of the Sinton Hotel in
Thessalon. I could not trace its origin with
certainty, but it probably came from nearby.

Strix varia.

BARRED OWL. I found a dead Barred Owl
suspended in a roadside tree in January, 1948.
It had probably been shot on suspicion of
stealing chickens.

Asio flammeus.

SHORT-EARED OWL. On February 7,
1948, I saw one perched low in a tree near
the Sault Ship Canal.

Caprimulgus vociferus.

WHIP-POOR-WILL. Fairly common in
suitable areas. The residents of the region
frequently confuse this species and the
Nighthawk, believing that they are the same
‘species, of which only those individuals living
in the woodlands “sing.”

Dryocopus pileatus.
PILEATED WOODPECKER.
species moderately common in coniferous
bush, often feeding in hardwood bush, and
occasionally found on roadside telephone
poles. Unfortunately it offers an almost
irresistible target for a much-too-common
class of hunters.

Eremophila alpestris.

HORNED LARK. I found this species a
common spring and fall migrant, but less
numerous as a summer resident.

Perisoreus canadensis.
CANADA JAY. I found it fairly common,

at least in winter, in the rural areas of the

region. On December 7, 1948, I saw two in
the town of Bruce Mines. R. H. Burns, of
Sault Ste. Marie, told me that the species
had regularly visited his winter feeding
station until 1945 or 46, after which he had
not seen it in the city.

Corvus corax.

RAVEN. A regular winter resident in the
region. My earliest fall record is October
29, 1947. They remained until the middle
of March the following year. In Tarentorus
Township, adjoining Sault Ste. Marie on the
East, I saw two together at intervals of one
day to one month throughout the winter.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

I found this .

197

Such long intervals during which the birds
did not appear may indicate a very extensive
winter foraging area. I saw a lone individual
flying over the central part of Sault Ste.
Marie on January 31, 1948. Other individual
records are Echo Bay, January 5; Cloudslee,
November 6.

Corvus brachyrhynchos.

AMERICAN CROW. A very common breed-
ing bird. My latest fall record is November
13, 1948. However, I heard reports that a
few sometimes winter near the open water

at the Abitibi dam, and a Cloudslee farmer,

who was quite familiar with the Raven, said
that he occasionally sees Crows in winter.

Parus atricapillus.

BLACK-CAPPED CHICKADEE. A common
resident. In the breeding season, in my ex-
perience, it retires to densely wooded areas,
although a small woodlot is sufficient for at
least one pair. In fall and winter the birds
join mixed flocks and can be found in almost
any habitat, from dense coniferous bush to
burnt-over areas thinly grown with aspens
only five or six feet high, and the city.

Parus hudsonicus.

BROWN - HEADED CHICKADEE. I did
not find this species, but several reliable
people reported it from their winter feeding
stations in Sault Ste. Marie.

Sitta canadensis.

RED-BREASTED NUTHATCH. Common
throughout the colder months of the year,
from September on. It occurs in mixed flocks
of Chickadees and Brown Creepers, but is
apparently restricted to the larger coniferous
trees. (Snyder et al remark on the fact that
they failed to find the White-breasted Nut-
hatch, S. carolinensis in the area. None of
the residents with whom I spoke knew the
species, nor did I see it during my time in
the region).

Certhia familiaris.

BROWN CREEPER. A fairly common win-
ter resident in the coniferous woods, where
it was usually found in the company of
chickadees and Red-breasted Nuthatches.

Troglodytes troglodytes.

WINTER WREN. My only three records,
two of them rather doubtful, are for October,
1948 at Cloudslee, in spruce forest.

198 THE CANADIAN
Dumetella carolinensis.

CATBIRD. I saw it three of four miles
east of Sault Ste. Marie on May 23 and June
13, 1948.

Hylocichla guttata.

HERMIT THRUSH. Common in farm wood-
lots. My earliest record is May 19, 1948, but
the species probably occurred before this.

Hylocichla minima.

GRAY-CHEEKED THRUSH. I saw one on
September 10, 1948, in dense, damp spruce
bush at Cloudslee.

Hylocichla fuscescens.

VEERY. Fairly common. I found an adult
feeding a youngster just out of the nest on
June 15, 1948.

Regulus calendula.

RUBY-CROWNED KINGLET. I found this
species only as a fall migrant, usually in
spruces.

Anthus spinoletta.

AMERICAN PIPIT. Not uncommon as a
fall migrant in September, 1948. I once saw
_ a flock of about 200 individuals in a ploughed
field at Cloudslee.

‘Lanius excubitor.
NORTHERN SHRIKE. I saw two individu-

als, separately, within the city limits of Sault
Ste. Marie on December 19, 1947.

Sturnus vulgaris.

STARLING. .A common resident, nesting
in the cities and throughout the cultivated
areas where it competes with some native
birds for nesting sites. In winter I found
none in rural areas, but the species was fair-
ly common in Sault Ste. Marie.

Vireo philadelphicus.

PHILADELPHIA VIREO. On May 15, 1948,
I heard and saw one of this species in the
Garden River Indian Reserve.

Vermivora peregrina.

TENNESSEE WARBLER. I saw several

on May 23 and 24, in and near Sault Ste.

Marie, in 1948.

Dendroica petechia.

YELLOW WARBLER. Not common in sum-
mer, but not unusual as a spring migrant.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Dendroica tigrina.

CAPE MAY WARBLER. I saw a male of
this beautiful species a couple of miles north
of Sault Ste. Marie, in a roadside tree, on
May 22, 1948.

Dendrica palmarum.

PALM WARBLER. Not a rare migrant.
I saw four together on September 28, 1947.
My latest record was October 13 of the same
year.

Icterus galbula.

BALTIMORE ORIOLE. On May 24, 1948,
I saw a male and heard it sing, in a tree in
Sault Ste. Marie.

Euphagus carolinus.

RUSTY BLACKBIRD. On June 17, 1948, I
found a male Rusty Blackbird about two
miles east of Sault Ste. Marie, near Highway
17.

Hesperiphona vespertina.

EVENING GROSBEAK. A common winter
resident in 1947-48. I saw it as late as May
23, 1948, often, at that time, in isolated
pairs.

Carpodacus purpureus.

PURPLE FINCH. A fairly common winter
resident, usually inhabiting spruces. I also
found it, in May, in pairs throughout the
region, where it is known to breed.

Pinicola enucleator.

PINE GROSBEAK. All my records of this
species are for November 1947 and 1948.

Spinus pinus.
PINE SISKIN. Common in winter. The

largest flock which I saw consisted of about
35 birds, November 21, 1947.

Spinus tristis.

AMERICAN GOLDFINCH. My latest
record is November 16, 1947.
Loxia curvirostra.

RED CROSSBILL. I have a_ definite

record of one individual, and a_ possible
record of four others, for December 6, 1947,
in white pines a few miles east of the Soo.

Loxia leucoptera.

WHITE-WINGED CROSSBILL. Common
but irregular in occurrence in the region in
winter. I have records for most of the areas

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN
under study during the winter of my resi-
dence. My earliest fall record is for October
23, 1948.

On October 27, 1948, I watched a flock of
fifty to seventy-five Crossbills work over a
forty-foot spruce at Cloudslee. The falling
cone scales produced a rustle audible twenty
yards away, and the “wings” discarded from
the eaten seeds resembled light snow.
One cone scale which I examined was still
complete, and showed the depression in
which the seed had rested, although others
had been more roughly handled. On Decem-
ber 1, one flew low in a spruce to the rail
of a fence, where it apparently ate several
mouthfuls of snow before returning to the
tree.

Pooecetes gramineus.

VESPER SPARROW. Joseph J. Hickey
(A Guide to Bird Watching, 1943), after
giving two exceptions, states, “In my experi-
ence, all other male vespers have used fences
or very low telephone poles [as_ singing
perches]”. In the Rankin Location,»a school
section a couple of miles east of Sault Ste.
Marie, this species is common in an area of
dry, sandy fields, in which aspens up to six
or eight feet tall grow sparsely. Although the
fields are separated by fences, the birds al-
most invariably used the trees as singing
perches, and I never saw one sing from a
fence at any time. Possibly northern Ontario’s
vespers are not yet as accustomed to civiliza-
tion as Mr. Hickey’s.

Junco hyemalis.

SLATE-COLOURED JUNCO. A fairly com-
mon breeding species, but much more
abundant as a migrant.

Spizella arborea.

TREE SPARROW. An abundant migrant.
The number seen daily in the fall of 1947
dwindled from several flocks of twenty or
thirty about October 20, to a last individual
on November 9.

Spizella pallida.

CLAY-COLOURED SPARROW. Rare, but
locally common. In 1948, I found two nests
in the Rankin Location. I have described (in
press) the nesting of the species there in
greater detail.

Zonotrichia leucophrys.

WHITE-CROWNED SPARROW. I flushed
one from a roadside in Tarentorus Township,
east of The Soo, on September 17, 1947.

FIELD-NATURALIST

199

Melospiza lincolnii.

LINCOLN’S SPARROW. I saw one on Sep-
tember 12, 1948, at Cloudslee.

Plectophenax nivalis.

SNOW BUNTING. A common winter resi- —
dent, from November 30, 1947, until March
2, 1948, occurring in flocks of up to 100 birds.
In 1948, they reappeared on November 27.

On March 2, 1948, I saw a collie dog catch
his leg in a wire fence. In spite of his
yelps and the cries of children, a group of
eight Snow Buntings circled overhead during
the excitement and alighted for a minute in
a nearby aspen.

Mammals

As with the other groups, I shall record
here only information which differs from, or
adds to, that published by Snyder et al. I
had very little opportunity for trapping in
the Sault Ste. Marie region, and I fear that
my notes on most species of mammals are
excessively brief.

Blarina brevicauda.

SHORT-TAILED SHREW. A very common
species. A total of 300 trap-nights in late
September, 1947, in Tarentorus Township,
produced a total of 16 individuals, and only
one other mammal, a Cinereous shrew, Sorex
cinereus. One hundred and fifty trap nights
were in a habitat consisting of dry, sandy
soil with a waist-high undergrowth of brac-
ken, a thin growth of aspens up to twenty
feet tall, with occasional small pines, spruces,
and larches. The ground cover consisted of
grass, small areas of moss, and six-inch blue-
berries. A few very old stumps and logs were
present. This area produced six shrews. The

’ other 150 trap nights were in similar, but

damper, areas, with higher trees, and a two-
inch layer of black leaf mould over the soil.
This area produced ten Short-tails and the
Cinereous Shrew.

I saw only one Blarina active during day-
light.

During November of 1947, I studied the
trails of this species on the surface of the
snow. The longest trail was 28 yards in
length, including a loop, and covered a
straight line distance of 22 yards. On several
occasions, the tracks crossed those of weasels.
Neither animal appeared to have paid any
attention to the tracks of the other, except
that in one case a shrew had turned slightly

200 THE CANADIAN

to one side to pass between two prints of a
weasel, rather than cross that depression in
the snow.

Lepus americanus.

VARYING HARE. One which I saw on
November 19, 1947, was beginning to turn
white. On November 20, 1948, a farmer told
me of seeing one which was still entirely
dark, although he had seen a white one the
preceding day. One shot on December 4 was
entirely white except for a few black hairs
mixed with the white on the mid-line of the
back.

A resident told me that twenty years ago
he had shot rabbits with a slingshot, but had
never found them so abundant since.

Castor canadensis.

BEAVER. This species now occurs in num-
bers near the Thessalon River, on the main-
land, as on St. Joseph’s Island.

Napaeozapus insignis.

WOODLAND JUMPING MOUSE. I found
‘one, dead, in a water-filled pail in aspen
bush, on June 7, 1948. Unfortunately it could
not be preserved.

Vulpes fulva.

RED FOX. A common animal. Farmers in
the Cloudslee area said that they vary in
numbers from year to year, but were more
common in 1947 and 1948 than in other
recent years. I heard reports of black, gray,
and cross foxes in the Cloudslee area, as well
as one variation with a wooly coat without
guard hairs.

In winter, foxes use the smooth, snow-
covered ice of the St. Mary’s River as an
easy route from place to place.

Euarctos americanus.

BLACK BEAR. Fairly regular in all but
the most settled parts of the region. f

Mustela erminea.

SHORT-TAILED WEASEL. A common
animal. Occasionally it destroys poultry. On
December 15, I found one alive in a small
milk house, which it had entered through a
two-inch drain pipe set in the wall at floor
level. It was entirely white with a black tail-
tip. I managed to capture it alive by squeez-
ing it between the door and the sill as it
attempted to escape. In a temporary cage, it

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

bit fiercely at my fingers or my handker-
chief, but ignored other objects which I in-
serted. Possibly it bit at those which smelled
most strongly of man.

Lutra canadensis.

OTTER. Mr. Wm. Shaule, of Cloudslee, told
me that otter tracks are still occasionally
found along the Thessalon River north of
Cloudslee.

Mephitis mephitis.

SKUNK. On June 7, 1948, I met an adult
skunk carrying a “kitten” a few days old on
a path through aspen bush. A few yards
from me, she stopped and began stamping
her front feet. I prudently backed away, and
the skunk picked up the youngster and gal-
lumphed off with it. She followed a remark-
ably straight course for several hundred
yards. A few minutes later, I again met her
travelling in the opposite direction on the
same route, without the kitten.

Lynx canadensis.

CANADA LYNX. Mr. W. E. Shaule told
me that they were occasionally trapped in
and near Cloudslee about 25 years ago.

Cervus canadensis.

WAPITI. ELK. Two Cloudslee farmers,
Mr. W. E. Shaule, and Mr. Art Chapman, Jr.,
told me that elk are still found, very rarely,
in the Cloudslee area. The species was intro-
duced in 1934.

Odocoileus virginianus.
WHITE-TAILED DEER. A common .and

important game species, and a major attraction ©

for tourists. It forms an important addition to
the food supply of many farmers in the
region. The Sault Daily Star, December 24,
1946, mentions that no deer were found in
the woods when Cloudslee was first settled,
about 1875.

Rangifer caribou.

WOODLAND CARIBOU. Mr. W. St. John,
game overseer at Thessalon, told me that
there had been a caribou in the Cloudslee
area a year or two before my visit in 1948
but it had finally disappeared. He believed
that it had probably been shot. Mr. Wm.
Vaughn reported that when he first arrived
in Cloudslee, about 1884, caribou had been
numerous. Mr. Art Chapman, Jr., said that
his parents had told him the same thing.

{
|

Pe
;

Now Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST 201

BREEDING BEHAVIOUR OF THE RING-NECKED PHEASANT
ON PELEE ISLAND, ONTARIO’

K. E. BALi

PTIMUM RANGE for the ring-necked
C) pheasant, one of Ontario’s most important

game birds, is found on Pelee Island.
Apart from tiny Middle Island, Pelee Island
is the southernmost land in Canada. It is lo-
cated nearly in the centre of the western end
of Lake Erie, one of the island archipelago
which stretches across from Point Pelee on
the Canadian mainland to Sandusky on the
United States mainland. Most of the central
part of the island is reclaimed marsh, brought
about by a series of drainage canals. The
island has an area of between 9,000 and 10,000
acres.

This study was begun as a thesis for the
graduate school, Cornell University, Ithaca,
N.Y., and was carried on with the assistance
of the Department of Lands and Forests of
Ontario, during 1946, 1947 and 1948.

After the 1947 shoot there was a ratio of
one cock to 10 hens, and there were about
500 cocks left on the island. This disparate
sex ratio was one of the interesting factors
of the Pelee Island pheasant study. Shick
(1947), with limited data in Michigan, has
suggested that a 10:1 ratio of hens to cocks
may still produce adequate harvestable sur-
plusses. This was the case on Pelee Island.

As spring approached the winter flocks
broke up and there began a general dispersal
of the birds over the island. This was proved
by the individual marking method (Taber,
1949). As spring progressed the birds were
seen more and more in the larger soy bean
fields near the middle of the island; during
the winter few, if any, were seen in these
fields.

The breeding cycle of pheasants has been
studied by Leffingwell (1926), Randall (1940),
Strode (1942), Baskett (1947) and Taber
(1949). These writers all speak of pheasant
“territories” or “crowing areas” being estab-
lished by the cock in spring. Territoriality
exists as a part of a behaviour pattern in
many kinds of animals . . . birds, mammals,
reptiles, fishes,.and some invertebrates. Burt
(1949) suggests that it is advantageous for
individuals to possess a territorial trait, and
that management techniques for animals

1 Received for publication May 29, 1950.

possessing this trait must be founded on this
basic information to be successful.

Nice (1941) has defined bird territory as
follows: “The theory of territory in bird life
is briefly this; that pairs are spaced through
the pugnacity of males toward others of their
own species and sex; that song and display
of plumage and other signals are a warning
to other males and an invitation to a female;
that males fight primarily for territory and
not for mates; that the owner of a territory
is nearly invincible in his territory; and
finally that birds which fail to obtain a ter-
ritory form a reserve supply from which re-
placements come in case of death of owners
of territories.”

If many authors are consulted they are
unanimous on only one point — a territory
is a defended area.

The Pelee pheasants certainly fulfilled a
part of Nice’s definition . . . they advertised
by crowing, they defended by fighting, and
they displayed to females on their territories.

Territory, on the whole, was evidenced by
plasticity. Baskett (1947) found this to be
the case in Iowa, where he tried to map
pheasant territories but found the territories
were subject to frequent readjustments, even
through the nesting phase. Taber’s (1949)
research in Wisconsin agreed with these find-
ings.

On the island at times a cock would defend

-a certain area, at other times he would not.

In April during the height of the crowing
season a territory was fiercely defended, and
as time progressed it was defended less and
less, or perhaps sporadically so, until finally
the territorial boundary between two cocks
could not be distinguished by their actions.

Advertisement

Leffingwell (1926) considers the “crow”
of the pheasant to be both a warning to other
males not to trespass, and an announcement
to the females where their mate is to be
found ... in other words, the pheasant crows
to advertise. This consists of the cock stand-
ing erectly, and, with head up, uttering a
loud two syllable call, followed by a rapid

202 THE CANADIAN
beating of the wings. The calls of different
cocks may vary considerably in pitch and in-
tensity.

It is customary to think of the cock pheasant
as crowing most frequently from an hour
before dawn until an hour after sunrise. This
is not a hard and fast rule but a good general
one during the height of the crowing season.

Practically no crowing was heard in Janua-
ry. During February and March crowing was
infrequent and sporadic.

A crowing count census, as described by
Kimball (1949) was taken twice a week from
March 22 to May 31, and once a week from
then until July 3. Seven stops were made,
one mile apart, as the Pelee roads are roughly
seven miles from one end of the island to
the other. The Kimball routes were 20 miles
long. The resultant curve should rise slowly
in March, reach a peak in late April, hold
this peak until nearly the end of May, then
decline until the end of June, and from then
gradually diminish. Any population indexes
should be taken during the time of the flat
top of the curve, roughly late April till late
May. This flat-top to the curve is the factor
which makes crowing count censuses possible.

The Pelee curve went from a low of eight
on April 21 to 91 on April 24, then 149 April
25, falling precipitously to 32 on April 27.
There are probably several reasons for this,
perhaps the main one being audibility. Banko,
of the South Dakota Department of Game,
Fish and Parks, has been studying the radius
of audibility of pheasant calls (Kimball, 1949).
His studies indicate that normal pheasant
calls may be heard roughly nine-tenths of a
mile. We did not find this to be true on
Pelee Island. One half a mile was more
average, and one quarter mile at times best.
Humidity had no apparent effect. One of the
best crowing mornings we had was in a heavy
fog, such that visibility was less than from
one telephone pole to the next.

A wind, on the other hand, made quite a
difference to audibility. Kimball (1949) found
winds above eight miles per hour influenced
crowing counts considerably, and counts
should be taken on mornings with less wind
than this. .

Mr. A. W. Stokes, leader of the Pelee
Island Pheasant Project, co-operated on this
census, in which we tried to plot the position
of all cocks on the island. On mimeographed
maps of the island we plotted cock positions
by two methods — cock-cruising and trian-
gulation. .

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

The first method consisted of driving slowly
on all roads and trails, plotting the location
of all cocks seen or heard. The second method
entailed the use of three people (and some-
times four) who started an hour before dawn,
with watches synchronized, and stood on
three sides of a woodlot for intervals of two,
five or ten minutes, depending on how fre-
quently the cocks were crowing. Arrows
were drawn on the maps in the direction of
the call, with the time to quarter seconds.
The arrows were made different lengths ac-
cording to how far away the bird was judged
to be. After about five stops in one morning
the crew gathered, compared maps and times,
and where two (or three) lines crossed, a
cock was indicated on the master map.

This triangulation method involved many
adjustments. Since it was assumed first that
a crowing cock could be heard for half a
mile the observers were stationed about a
mile apart. This assumption proved to be
erroneous and it was later found that a
quarter of a mile interval was more practica-
ble. Even this was too far certain mornings.

A total of 370 cocks were actually plotted
in this way by the end of June. The question
then remained how many cocks were non-
crowers, or in some other way were not
counted?

Not a single non-crowing cock was observed

by either Stokes or myself during this spring —

of 1948. Leffingwell (1926), Strode (1942)
and Randall (1940) make no mention of non-
crowers, but Taber (1949) found eight out
of 21 cocks to be non-territorial and therefore
non-crowers (by his definition), in the season
of 1948 in Wisconsin. There were certainly
some non-territorial cocks on Pelee Island,
which could have been missed on the crow-
ing counts due to their position. One such
cock, tagged green 99, was seen to crow on
several occasions however, so this is not in
agreement with Taber’s (1949) findings.

On the basis of the number of cocks seen

-on Fishing Point by repeated cruising, com-

pared to the number recorded by the trian-
gulation method I estimated 450 cocks to
be present on the island in the spring of 1948.
This figure was later corroborated by other
census methods used by Stokes.

This triangulation method was very time-
consuming and is not to be recommended for
such a large area. As far as a population
census is concerned some variation of Kim-
ball’s (1949) crowing count census would

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN
probably be more useful and equally exact,
as well as taking less time.

The triangulation method did show some
good correlation between the pheasant ter-
ritories and the cover available. The heaviest
cock populations on the island were on Fish-
ing Point in the southwest part of the island,
around the scrublands in the southeast corner,
and the southern part of the west side, at
Lighthouse Point and around the woods at
the central part of the north end of the island.
The central part of the island, with most of
the large soy bean fields, had a much smaller
population. The
method strikingly showed this relation be-
tween the land economy and the spring ter-
ritories of cock pheasants. The distribution
of the areas of uncultivated land is one of
the chief reasons the pheasant population re-
mains at such a high level.

FIELD-NATURALIST

map derived from this:

203

several reasons. This time limit appeared
to give a reliable sample even in very low
populations, time was limited, and it was
found hard to concentrate for a longer time.

According to the data presented in Table
1 the Kimball crowing count census could
be used as a population index (the purpos2
for which it was intended) but not for a real
census in the strict sense. None of the Pelee
cocks were found to crow at an average rate
of one call per two minutes or less, conse-
quently to use this method as a census the
time required at a stop would have to be
longer ... four minutes or more, at the
height of the crowing season on Pelee Island.

Display
The display of the cock pheasant is a mag-
nificent performance. Often on Pelee they
would make preliminary short:rushes toward

Table 1
PHEASANT CROWING RATES

no. calls given

average time between | time range between

Date ‘two successive calls | two successive calls

by one cock (minutes ) (minutes)
April 27 24 2.4 1 5
April 30 5 3.0 2 - 4
May 3 20 3.0 1 7
May 28 12 2.7 2.4
May 29 20 3.4 Neue
June 9 zZ9 3.4 2- 8
June 24 15 3.4 Derren ey

Individual crowing rates of cocks were re-
corded over a period of time coinciding with
the triangulation crowing census, to gauge
the time required at each stop for maximum
efficiency of the census.

Kozlowa (1947) found that the peak of
sexual activity of the male pheasants of Tad-
jikistan was March 15 (it is about a month
later on Pelee Island), and that during this
period the cocks crow every four or five min-
utes. The height of the crowing season on
Pelee seemed to be from about April 20 to
the end of May. During this time they have
a faster crowing rate than Kozlowa reports

for the Tadjikistan birds. Table 1 shows the

rate of crowing of Pelee Island cocks between
April 27 and June 24.

- Kimball’s (1949) crowing count census
was based on a two-minute interval for

one hen though another hen might be much
closer. With head lowered, tail spread like
a fan with its tip tilting in the direction of
the hen, and ear tufts raised (usually), they
circle the hen, often so close that their
feathers brush. Usually the hen stands still,
looking around, and apparently not impressed
by the cock’s display. When the cock has
made three-fourths of a circle the hen usu-
ally runs off a few yards and pauses. The
cock straightens, repeats his dash and slow
circling. Randall (1940) reports that the
male may hold this crouched position several
minutes. This display may. occur eight or
10 times with the same hen, but does not
necessarily result in copulation. One cock
(April 29, 4.30 p.m.) displayed 14 times in
rapid succession to one hen in a 15-minute
interval. Taber (1949) has reported up to 12
displays in one series.

204

Toward the latter part of the season the
hens would sometimes make the first advances,
their peak of sexual activity occurring some-
what later than the males’. Kirkpatrick
(1944) found that in its seasonal development,
the ovary lagged behind the testes more than
a month although the growth of the ovary
was more rapid. Kozlowa (1947) speaks of
March 15 as being the time of the peak of
sexual activity of the male Tadjikistan
pheasants, while the “organs of the female
were still quiescent’.

In between displays or crows the cock
would sometimes shake himself. Occasionally
the hens would do this also. Toward the end
of the mating season the hens often raised
their wings over their heads in a stretch
(Taber, 1949, records this also), which seemed
to be a method of attracting the cocks’ at-
tention.

From a peak in displaying there was a
gradual lessening of interest although the
hens appeared interested for a longer time
than the cocks, as witnessed by hens coming
up to a cock June 9, feeding about an inch
from his beak, only to have him ruffle his
feathers and turn away. This happened with
greater frequency as June advanced — hens
would lift their wings, ruffle their feathers,
and upon occasion crouch down in front of a
cock, only to have him turn away disinterest-
edly.

At times the courtship became quite violent.
On April 26 a cock made a dash at a hen,
grabbed her by the back of the neck, swung
her off her feet and three times around be-
fore she managed to escape. On April 18
a cock chased a hen around seven times in
a circle, then she ran off a few yards with
him following. Finally he grabbed her with
his beak, lifted her off the ground and a
considerable struggle ensued, involving swift
wing flaps and flying feathers, before she
broke away. The cock then displayed with
much less apparent energy to two other hens.
A few minutes later a hen approached him
as he stood still, fed with her head only three
or four inches from his, but he didn’t bother
to look up. Finally there were seven hens
in a circle around him... he ruffled his
feathers but just stood. This continued for
three quarters of an hour when suddenly,
with no display or warning, he turned to the
closest hen, mounted and copulated. Some
10 minutes later he displayed to another hen.
Then he made a 50 foot dash across the field
to a third hen, displayed once, grabbed her

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

neck with his beak and swung her around
five times before letting her go, at which she
flew to the edge of the field and looked back.
Taber (1949) records only one instance of a
hen being apparently lifted off the ground,
but there was no mistaking its occurrence
on Pelee Island.

Leffingwell (1926) reports males displaying
to each other as being not uncommon. Per-
haps because of the disparate sex ratio this
was not observed on Pelee Island.

Mating

Copulation was observed 19 times between
April 18 and June 20. On April 26 a cock
mated at 10.21 a.m. and again at 10.31. Simi-
larly on May 5-a cock mated at 7.03 and
again at 7.05 with another hen, an interval
of only two minutes. On May 14 a cock mated
at 7.10 and again at 7.24 a.m.

Three cases were noted where after copu-
lation the cock gave the hen a vicious peck
on the forehead. Two of the 19 matings were
on invitation of the hen. On June 9 a cock
was observed mating with a hen and within
the same minute another cock, who apparently
had priority on this territory, came rushing
forward. The first cock hurriedly departed
and the second cock then displayed to the
same hen.

Defense

Many authors who have worked with
pheasants report active fighting ... Leedy
and Hicks (1945), Wight (1945), Sharp and
McClure (1945), Beebe (1918), Randall (1940),
Buss (1946), and Taber (1949). It is there-
fore odd that Kozlowa, studying pheasants
on their native ground, failed to see this, and
speaks of domains (areas where cocks feed
and mate) rather than territories (defended
area).

Several instances of active defense were
observed on Pelee Island, four of these be-
tween hens, the rest between cocks. No in-
stances of cock and hen battles were observ-
ed. Some of the defenses consisted of pitched
battles, others merely of chasing, with no
opposition on the part of the intruder.

Sometimes the defense appeared as a mild
form of “jitterbugging”, or what Taber (1949)
calls “sparring”. Such a fight occurred March
22. At seven a.m. a cock emerged from the
woods, fed for a few minutes among 14 hens
in a soy bean field, then began walking due
south, pausing only twice to feed briefly
until he passed one cock (neither paying any

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN

attention to the other) and about 15 feet
farther he met another cock head-on. At first
they crouched facing each other, breast
feathers touching the ground, tails straight
up, jabbing at each other with their beaks.

First one, then the other, would leap into
the air, perhaps about four feet. They par-

ried each other’s thrusts, their tails going

straight up, then down and up in sudden
jerks. This continued for 10 minutes, while
hens wandered around them within a few
feet, but paying no attention. (Randall, 1940,
thought that battles were often brought on
by the presence of hens.) A non-participating
cock wandered within 20 feet or so, but did
not join the battle. There was a five minute
intermission in the battle while the two cocks
fed, then they again assumed sparring posi-
tions. The third cock, at this point, herded
16 hens south with him about 40 feet, leaving
only three near the antagonists. Again the
savage jabbing began, the three hens coming
within two feet of the fight, but apparently
paying no attention to it.

Sometimes one cock or the other would

back up from a thrust, but more often they

stood their ground. The invader would oc-
casionally begin the aggression. Sometimes
they would ‘crouch four or five minutes just
eyeing each other, then the tail jerking
would begin again.

At 7.50 the original aggressor retreated
toward the wood from which he had emerged,
slowly feeding as he went. During this battle,
which lasted 50 minutes, no blood was shed.
Buss (1946) shows a photograph of one cock
killed by another in battle in Minnesota.

All other battles were similar. The fights
between hens were as vicious as those be-
tween cocks.

At the end of one cock fight the intruder
gave a raucous screech before walking back
to his own area. Aside from this one instance
the battles were voiceless. Strode (1942)
records instances of the victor crowing once
or twice after battle.

On another occasion when two hens were
fighting, a cock slowly circled them like a
referee, and finally they had to avoid him
to continue fighting.

During the period between 6.20 a.m. and
7.50 am., June 9, I observed a cock defend
his territory four times by giving chase to
other cocks entering it. In each case the in-
truders took flight, apparently recognizing

FIeELD-NATURALIST &

205

his prerogative. This same cock on June 23
watched another cock on his territory and
merely looked, offering no opposition what-
soever, suggesting that by this date his pug-
nacity had subsided and his territory was no
longer in need of defense. This same cock
Showed active defense of his territory on
April 24, April 27, April 28, and yet did not
defend it May 25, in what might be consider-
ed still the defensive season, when another
cock came onto his territory. It may be ob-
servations such as these which led Leedy and
Hicks (1945) to write: “Observations in Ohio
indicated that such territories (as those de-
scribed by Wight, 1933) are not always clear-
ly defined, although . . . the range of indivi-
dual males and females may not be more
than a few acres.”

Several islanders spoke of cocks mutilating
each other in former years, but this was not
observed in the spring of 1948. Active de-
fense, however, was certainly in evidence.

Territories

Kozlowa (1947) speaks of “strictly defined
cruising routes” rather than territories, along
which the cock moves, routes of not over 400-
500 metres in length, and which take the
bird 30-40 minutes to traverse. This did not
appear to be the case on Pelee Island. One
individual bird was under observation for
four hours in the morning and one in the
afternoon, and it certainly did not travel
along a well defined route, but rather seem-
ed to wander at will, always within a certain
area.

In order to study the manifestations of
territorial behaviour in Pelee pheasants five
cocks were chosen on adjacent, or near-by,
areas and their activities recorded from day
to day, as far as possible. These areas were
surveyed and tags put up in strategic places
at known distances from each other. In this
manner a cock’s progress could be recorded
in an organized fashion and plotted on a
map. (see figure 1).

In 10 hours and 43 minutes of observation
dispersed from April through June, Cock A
was seen to crow 61 times, display 11 times,
and mate twice on his area of suis two
and three acres.

Similarly, Cock B, in three hours and 19
minutes of observation was seen to crow 16
times, display 11 times, and mate twice on
his area of 3+ acres. Detailed observations of
these two cocks ceased at the end of May

206 THE (CANADIAN

A

Figure 1.

as the rye in their areas grew to such a height
it was impossible to follow their movements.

Cock C’s meanderings give a more definite
picture. From the middle of April, until the
end of June, in 10 hours and 16 minutes of
observations he was seen to crow 91 times,
display 14 times and mate three times. No

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

N

soy beans

COCK D - territory

scale 1 inch = 180 feet
D- defense
M- mated

other cock was seen to cross his territory
without some form of defense. Most of his
trips were within 100 feet of one of the two
hedgerows involved, though several wider
excursions occurred. He traversed an area
of about six acres. Cock D had a still larger
territory of about 11 acres. Here he was seen

Dal gna i ee

Nov.-Dec. 1950]

to crow 226 times, display 54 times and mate
six times. Eighteen hours and 28 minutes
were spent in these observations.

Adjacent to Cock D was Cock E, who crow-
ed 142 times, displayed seven times and
mated twice in eight hours and 38 minutes

of observations, on what appeared to be an

area of roughly six acres.

The cover on the territories of these five
cocks was much the same. Each territory
had at least one hedgerow containing an over
foliage of mainly Rhus, typhina, and Cornus
sp. with a weedy undergrowth of Vitis sp.,
Rhus toxicodendron, Ambrosia elatior, Rumex
obtusifolius, Poa annua, Arctium minus and
others. All five territories had an open sec-
tion . . . four with stubble bean fields, the
fifth with an open pasture. Besides the hedge-
rows for nesting cover three cocks’ territo-
ries had adjacent weed fields. Petrides
(1942) gives a discussion of the relation of
hedgerows to wildlife and concludes that
hedgerows are the most favoured spots in
winter. For nesting he concludes that a
10-foot hedgerow is a desirable location.
Nearly all the hedgerows on Pelee Island
are at least this width.

The dispersion of good nesting cover and
abundant food on Pelee Island makes pos-
sible the large pheasant population obtaining
there.

References

1. Baskett, T.S. 1947. Nesting and Produc-
tion of the Ring-necked Pheasant in
North-Central Iowa. Ecol. Monog.
ACL)’.

. Beebe, William. 1918. Monograph of the
Pheasants. Doubleday, Doran & Co.,
Ine. Garden City, Long Island, N.Y.

3. Burt, W.H. 1949. Territoriality. Journ.

Mamm., 30 (1).

4. Buss, Irven O. 1946. Wisconsin Pheasant
Populations. Wisc. Conserv. Bull.
120.G7).

. Kimball, J. W. 1949. The Crowing Count
Pheasant Census. Journ. Wildl. Mgt.,
13 (1).

6. Kirkpatrick, C.M. 1944. Body Weights

and Organ Measurements in Relation

JN

ol

THE ‘CANADIAN FYIELD-NATURALIST

207

to Age and Season in Ring-necked
Pheasants. Anat. Rec. 89.

7. Kozlowa, E. V. 1947. On the Spring Life
and Breeding Habits of the Pheasant
(Phasianus colchicus) in Tadjikistan.
Ibis, 89.

8. Leedy, Daniel L. and Lawrence E. Hicks.
1945. The Pheasant in Ohio. in The
Ring-necked Pheasant and its Man-
agement in North America. W.L.
McAtee ed. Amer. Wildl. Inst.

9. Leffingwell, Dana J. 1926. A Study of
the Pheasant (Phasitanus colchicus
Linné) with Notes on its Artificial
Propagation. Unpub. PhD thesis,
Cornell Univ. Library, Ithaca, N.Y.

10. Nice, Margaret M. 1941. The role of Ter-
ritory in Bird Life. Amer. Midl. Nat.
26 (3).

11. Petrides, George. 1942. Relation of Hedge-
rows in Winter to Wildlife. Journ.

- Wildl. Mgt., 6(4).

12. Randall, Pierce E. 1940. The Life Equa-
tion of the Ring-necked Pheasant in
Pennsylvania. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf.
Trans. 5.

13. Sharp, W.M. and H.E. McClure. 1945.
The Pheasant in the Sandhill Region
of Nebraska. in The Ring-necked
Pheasant and its Management in
North America. W.L. McAtee ed.
Amer. Wildl. Inst.

14. Shick, Charles. 1947. Sex Ratio-Egg Fer-

tility Relationships in the Ring-
necked Pheasant. Journ. Wildl. Mgt.,
3(4).

15. Strode, D.H. 1942. A Three Year Inten-
sive Study of Natural Pheasant Pro-
duction. Unpub. MS Thesis. Ohio
State Univ. Library, Columbus, Ohio.

16. Taber, Richard D. 1949. Observations on
the Breeding Behavior of the Ring-
necked Pheasant. Condor 51 (4). -

17. Wight, H.M. 1945. The Pheasant in
Michigan. in The Ring-necked
Pheasant and its Management in
North America. W.L. McAtee ed.
Amer. Wildl. Inst. :

208 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 64
COLOUR PHASE INVESTIGATIONS ON THE SCREECH OWL IN
ONTARIO °*

N. D. MartTIn

TT HE EXPLANATION of dichromatism in

the screech owl, Otus asio (Linnaeus)
has eluded investigators since the species
was described in 1758. While this owl is
generally considered to have two colour
phases, grey and rufous, or “red,” the dis-
tinction between red and grey is far from
standardized, and a possible third phase is
often spoken of as “intermediate.”

This study of the eastern screech owl,
O. a. naevius (Gmelin), indicates that there
are only two phases, red and grey, and the
distinction between them is emphatic.

The relation of colour phases to sex, and
the distribution of colour phases in Ontario
are presented.

Mr. L. L. Snyder made available the col-
lection of skins of the Royal Ontario Mu-
seum of Zoology, and granted advice. Other
members of the Museum staff granted help-
ful criticism.

Definition of Colour Phases

The 93 specimens of O. a. naevius in the
Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology collection
in October, 1949 were examined to deter-
mine what constituted the red phase and
what the grey. The museum specimens were
placed in a row, dorsal side up, on a black-
topped museum table. They were arranged
in order of decreasing redness of the
plumage of the back.

One gap near the red end of the series
broke the gradation from extreme red to
Sa eh This gap was conspicuous.
On one Sside—of it, all specimens were dis-
tinctly red in phase. On the other, all speci-
mens were predominantly grey. This gap
“represents the division between red and

ey phases. In the red phase there was a
gradation from strong red at one end to
slightly paler red at the gap. In the grey
phase there was an even gradation from grey
strongly tinged with red at the gap to grey
lacking any trace of red at the end of the
line.

To determine the frequency of specimens
having different amounts of redness, five

1 Contribution from Department of Zoology, University
of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario.
2 Received for publication May 31, 1950.

specimens were chosen from the grey phase
to form a type series representing five
degrees of redness. This degree of redness
is an arbitrary one. Specimens representing
the five grades were chosen so that each
was distinct from its neighbours in the type
series, and also so that a uniform difference
of redness existed between any two consecu-
tive birds in the type series.

The red phase was then considered in the
same way; it seemed justified to include
two grades of redness in this phase. Two
type specimens were chosen to represent
these two grades. The gap between red and
grey phases was considered to represent an
absence of two colour grades.

The type series of seven specimens —
two red, five grey — were numbered 1 and
2 in the red phase, and 5 to 9 in the grey
phase. It seemed justified to consider the
gap between phases as representing absence
of Grades 3 and 4. Each specimen in the
collection was compared with the type series,
and assigned to its appropriate grade. Figure
1 shows the frequency of specimens in each
grade. The division line between Grades 7
and 8 in Fig. 1 is an arbitrary one, and
serves only to describe the general coloura-
tion of birds in the middle of the line-up.
The birds do not group themselves around
the centres of the grades, but change gradu-

‘ally from the red end of Grade 5 to the grey

end of Grade 9.

This colour grade classification was con-
firmed by consultation with members of the
Museum staff.

The relative frequency of screech owls in
each colour grade in the Museum collection
is considered to be essentially representative
of frequencies in the screech owl population
of Ontario. If there has been any selection
by the Museum, it has been in preserving
specimens of a colour intermediate between
red and grey, and. has been carried out on
such a minor scale that Fig. 1 may, in
general, represent the wild population.

Figure 1 shows that the population con-
sists roughly of two phases, red and grey,
with no complete intergradation, and no in-
termediate phase. About 19% of the popu-

a a

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN

50

Ao

go

OF COLLECTION

10

%

A a2 I

GRADE

FIELD-NATURALIST

209

REDDISH GREY

5

Fig. 1. Distribution of colour grades for specimens in collection of the Royal Ontario

Museum of Zoology.

lation is of the red phase, and 81% of the
grey phase. Only about 5% is grey with a
conspicuously reddish tinge, Grades 5 and
6. Birds in Grade 7 have slight but apparent
tinge of red, and compose about 12% of the
population. Birds in Grades 8 and 9 show
no conspicuously red shading, and comprise
64% of the Ontario population.

When treated statistically (by considering’

the heterozygotes to comprise Grade 5, or
Grades 5 and 6, or 5, 6, and 7), these ratios
do not approximate the ratios expected if
red and grey phases were respective ex-
pressions of monohybrid alleles in a freely
interbreeding population.

The specimens chosen as types in the R.
O. M. Z. collection have the following ac-
cession numbers:

Grade 1: 67498
22 25,10;1,21

5. 30-5-2-197

6),29:12:11 1

7: 373 (Mcllwraith tag) male, Hamil-
ton, Collector: McIlwraith

8: 28.10.30.1

9: 31904

od

Relation of Colour Phase to Sex

The 75 skin specimens of O. a naevius in
the collection of the Royal Ontario Museum
of Zoology in January, 1948 were treated
satistically to determine if there is any
significant relationship between one colour
phase and one sex. The following contingen-
ey table was used:

Red Grey
Male fos 9 33
Female ........... 5 28

[Vol. 64

FIELD-NATURALIST

THE CANADIAN

210

NORTH-EAST

wT
mo eae
(eo) S

SOVTH- WEST

xX - REO SPECIMENS
O ~- GREY SPECIMENS

’ Fig 2. Distribution of red and grey phases in Ontario. Specimens include the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology collection, owls banded by James Martin 1942-1949.

Nov.-Dec. 1950]

THE (CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

211

Table 1. — Composition of population of four sections of Ontario with
respect to colour phases

Section of Southern Ontario

PARTIC OSH 8.2 o0.0 heecececsduedect oat usibecekoxscuaty Sedo eet

West
York County
Northeast

Total for Ontario
The data are the same as for Fig. 2.

There is a probability of these data, or
data showing even less random distribution,
occurring by chance 50% of the time. There-
fore, according to these data, there is no
significant relationship between colour pha-
ses and sexes.

Distribution of Colour Phases

The known range of O. a. naevius in On-
tario includes roughly all the Province south
of Highway 60, or a line drawn from Pem-
broke on the Ottawa River to Parry Sound
on Georgian Bay, and from Lake Huron on
the West to Quebec on the east.

In general, the flora and fauna of Southern
Ontario show a cline from southwest to
northeast: the southwestern section contains
southern forms that become increasingly
scarce towards the northeast. Hasbrouck
(1893) and Bendire (1892) have noted that
the screech owl is predominantly of the
red phase in the central-eastern states. If
the red phase become increasingly scarce
towards the north, it might be expected to
show a cline in Ontario. Figure 2 and Table
1 show that the red phase does comprise a
larger part of the population in the south-
western section of the province than in any
other section, but no other indication of a
cline in colour phase is indicated by these
data.

Figure 2 shows the geographic distribution
of red and grey colour phases in Ontario. It
is drawn from two sources of reliable data.
Eighty-eight of the birds mapped represent
the collection of the Royal Ontario Museum
of Zoology, and 57 are from the bird-banding
record of R. F. James, representing field
work in which he collaborated with the au-
thor.

In Fig. 2 the distribution of the screech
owl in Southern Ontario is divided into four
sections from southwest to northeast: south-

wee cece rece ecco nest snes ese esas es esesseese essere ssassesensssssssees

eee mecca cee enene ee seseseseessessseneesessecssosaees

Specimens
Total Red Grey % Red
Rea 21 8 13 38
seas 22 2 20 9
Te, 88 10 78 11
Desh 14 2 iz 14
ee 145 22 123 15

west, west, York County, and northeast. The
boundary between southwest and west is
drawn where there is a gap in the records.
York County is separated because 61% of
the records are from that county alone. The
remainder of Southern Ontario comprises
the northeast section.

This map probably shows the distribution
of ornithologists more completely than the
distribution of O. a. naevius in Ontario, but
it is probably reliable in showing that the
red phase forms a larger proportion of the
screech owl population in southwestern On-
tario than in the rest of the Province.

Table 1 shows the frequency of red and
grey phases in each region.

Summary

1. Red and grey are the only distinct colour
phases of Otus asio naevius (Gmelin).
Ninety-three specimens in the Royal On-
tario Museum of Zoology collection were
classified into nine colour grades with
respect to the redness of the plumage of
the back. The red phase consisted of two
grades, the grey of five. Two grades
between red and grey had no representa-
tive specimens.

2. The red phase forms a greater proportion
of the screech owl population in south-
western Ontario than in any other part
of the Province.

3. There is no significant relationship be-
tween sexes and colour phases. |

References
Bendire, C. E. Life histories of North Ameri-
ean birds. U. S. Nat. Mus. Spec. Bull 1.
1892.

Hasbrouck, E. M. Evolution and dichromat-
ism in the genus Megascops. Amer. Nat.
27: 521-533, 638-649. 1893.

*

212 THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

THE DATES OF PUBLICATION OF THE ICONES FILICUM
BY W. J. HOOKER AND R. K. GREVILLE *?
BERNARD BOIVIN

Division of Botany and Plant Pathology
Department of Agriculture, Ottawa

T IS WELL KNOWN that many of William

J. Hooker’s botanical publications carry
on the title page a date that corresponds to
the date of completion of publication rather
than the actual dates of publication of the
successive parts. It appears that this is also
true of Hooker & Greville’s Icones Filicum,
a series of plates with explanatory text,
containing illustrations and descriptions of a
great many old and new ferns and fern allies,
including quite a few that are quite familiar
to field botanists of Eastern North America,
such as Nephrodium, sive Aspidium, sive
Thelypteris, sive Dryopteris Goldiana and
others.

Although it was not possible to bring to-
gether any two of the numerous copies ex-
amined, it was noticed that they were all
similar in size of page, type and color of
-binding and lettering on spine, as if the
books had all been sold pre-bound. There
is however good evidence that this work
first came out in fascicles, and a more
thorough search might lead to the dis-
covery of one or more copies thus issued.

The evidence that the date 1831 that ap- -

pears on the title page is only the date of
publication of the bound copies is as fol-
lows:

The first mention of the Icones Filicum ap-
pears in Linnaea 2: 526. 1827 where the publi-
cation of the first fascicle of 20 plates is
mentioned. In the same journal vol. 3: Littb.
p. 25, and vol. 4: Littb. p. 29 the next two
fascicles of 20 pages each are reviewed and
are said to have been published in 1827.

In the Litteraturblatter fiir reine und
angewandte Botanik vol. 1, page 84, year
1828 (first fascicle, probably early 1828, the
“Vorwort” being dated: “Zu Ende Februar
1828”), I find: “Icones filicum..... 1827. fol.
mit 20 Tafeln.”

In F. Miltitz, Bibliotheca botanica, page
487, published 1828, I find: 1827....Icones
Filicum....I, II, III fase. ¢. tab. 20, p. 20.”

1 Contribution No. 1035 from the Division of Botany and
Plant Pathology, Science Service, Department of
Agriculture, Ottawa, Canada.

2 Received for publication June 15, 1950.

In the Ann. Sc. Nat. 18: Rey. Bibl. 37-38.
Mars 1829 the following appears: ‘83. Icones
Filicum... Fase. I-VI, 1827-1828...”

in rea Allgemeine Litteratur Zeitung for
the end of April 1830, I find a long review
(pages 529 to 543) of the Icones Filicum
with the following information: “... Fasc.
1-7. 1827 sq. Fol. (Jedes Heft. mit 20 Kup-
fern)....”’ This note is also reprinted in
Flora 13:712, 1830. This is very definite in-
formation that the Icones Filicum were
published over a period of years, starting
with 1827 for the first fascicle and that, by
the end of 1829 or at most early 1830, the
first volume (120 plates) and the first fasci-
cle of the second volume were already pub-
lished. Most likely, fascicle 8 (plates 141 to
160) was not yet published or was being
published by early 1830. Also, it will be
noted that each fascicle has 20 plates.

Greville and Hooker in the Botanical Mis-
cellany 2:360-403, published during the au-
tumn of 1831 (see Marshall, Kew Bull.,
1936:85-95. 1936), enumerate all the species
of Lycopodium known up to that time. The
Botanical Miscellany refers to all the plates
of Lycopodium of the Icones Filicum up to
plate 224 (Lycopodium crassum HBK.). The
last two plates of Lycopodiwm, plates 227
and 233, are not cited in the Botanical Mis-
cellany. On the other hand, the Icones Fili-
cum does refer to the Botanical Miscellany
only twice, viz., under plates 212 and 224.
This is fairly good evidence that plates 201
to 225 of the Icones Filicum were proof-read
approximately at the same time as pages
360-403 of volume 2 of the Botanical Mis-
cellany, namely, autumn 1830, whereas plates
1 to 200 of the Icones Filicum were published ~
prior to autumn 1831.

By inference from the above it seems also
that the last two fascicles had 25 plates each.
Then since the Bot. Misc. is not cited at
plates 227 and 233, it would appear that
fascicule XII was proof-read between the
proof-reading and the publication of the Bot.
Misc. 2: 360-403. 1.

Blume, in his Enumeratio Plantarum Ja-
vae, lists the ferns, in fascicle 2, dated 1828.
This fascicle contains many references to the

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN
earlier plates of Hooker & Greville’s Icones
Filicum; the highest number cited is plate
39 (on page 270). On the other hand, Hooker
& Greville do not cite Blume’s Enumeratio
until plate 141, after which Blume _ is
frequently referred to. It seems that at least
plates 1 to 40 of Hooker & Greville’s Icones
Filicum were published in 1828 or earlier,
probably in 1827, whereas plates 141 to 250
of the Icones Filicum were published well
after Blume’s Enumeratio, probably 1829 or
later. The intervening plates, 41 to 140 were
probably published around 1828 or 1829.

Wallich’s “Numerical list of dried speci-
mens of plants in the Museum of the Honb.
East India Company ...’”, or more commonly
the “Catalog”, gives almost no _ biblio-
graphical references, but many of the species
published for the first time in the Icones
Filicum are frequently and properly cited
by Wallich in his Catalog. None of the Wal-
lich’s citations refer to any plate subsequent
to No. 79. This one is referred to as follows:
“Botrychium lanuginosum Wall. apud Hook.
et Grev.” And all these references are in
the first few pages of the Catalog. Probably
the first part of the Catalog was substantial-

ly ready for publication by December Ist,

1828, and was certainly published by De-
cember, 1829, as can be derived by Wallich’s
prefaces to the various parts of the Catalog.
Hooker & Greville, in the Icones Filicum,
regularly cite Wallich’s nomina nuda as
“Wallich MSS” up to plate 158, but starting
with plate 161, full references to Wallich’s
Catalog are regularly given. From that I
would conclude that plates 1 to 80 of the
Icones Filicum were probably published by
December Ist, 1828; that plates 80 to 160
were published at about the same time as

_ Wallich’s Catalog, probably in 1829, with

Volume I

Fascicle I plates 1-20 with text
ce Il (19 21-40 ce oe
ce Ill (73 41-60 “cc 6c
it3 IV ce 61-80 6é “
“ V ce 81-100 ce 66
‘ VES id EATS KOE eh en

Volume II

Fascicle VII plates 121-140 with text

ens VIII “141-160 “ a
a3 IX ce 161-180 “ is3
ce XS “cc 181-200 “ce a3

5 ce XI cc 201-225 (4 “

’ a XII 3

226-250 “ i:

FIELD-NATURALIST

some of them published perhaps as early as
late 1828 or as late as early 1830; and that
plates 161 to 260 were published after the
catalog, some of them perhaps as early as
late 1829, but most, if not all, in 1830 or
later.

It will be noted that the above contains’
very little absolute evidence, but, on the
other hand, there is no discrepancy between
the various conclusions drawn from eleven so
diverse sources. I am therefore inclined to
think that the dates arrived at are a fairly
good approximation of the actual dates of
publication.

In Pritzel I find “Icones Filicum, volume
1, plates 1-120, 1829; volume 2, plates 121-
250, 1831”, which I take to mean that the
publication of the first and second volumes
of the Icones Filicum was complete by 1829
and 1831 respectively. Pritzel does not give
the source of his information and it seems:
that it must have been much less definite
than what has just been listed.

The only bit of conflicting evidence comes
from Christensen, Index Filicum, p. 706,
1906. Without specifying the source of his
information, he states: “Icones Filicum —
t. 1-60:1827. — t. 61-120:1828 (?) — ft. 121-
180: 1829. — t. 181-240: 1930-31. In so far
as I do not know and cannot check the
sources of Christensen’s information, I find
it difficult to accept his opinion at face value
as it conflicts with so many of the probable
dates arrived at from a variety of other
sources. In particular, I find no evidence
that fascicles VIII and IX were published as
early as 1829.

To summarize, I consider that, until more
evidence is available, the Icones Filicum of
Hooker and Greville were probably pub-~
lished in the following years:

Probable date

1827
1827
1827
1828
1828
1828

Probable date

1829

early 1830?

1830 ?

1830 to summer 1831
Fall 1831
(Dec. ?) 1831

213

214

This table of dates of publication does not
take into account the dates given by Chris-
tensen.

To the late Prof. C. A. Weatherby and Dr.
Bernice Schubert, of the Gray Herbarium of

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Harvard University, to Mr. F. Ballard of the
Kew Gardens and to Mr. A. H. G. Alston of
the British Museum, I extend my sincere
thanks for help and suggestions in carrying
out this bibliographical study.

“HB. CONOVER’S BIRD WORK IN YUKON’?

A. L. RAND
Chicago Natural History Museum

N GOING OVER the papers of the late

H. B. Conover of Chicago, I found diaries
of his 1919 and 1920 hunting trips to Yukon.
Yukon Territory, Canada, has long been
celebrated as a hunting field, and perhaps
many of the big game hunters have collected
some bird specimens that are _ scattered
through many museums. Though Conover’s
1919 trip was primarily for big game and
yielded few birds, his 1920 trip was under-
taken shortly after his return from a col-
lecting trip to Venezuela for the then Field
Museum, on which he accompanied W. H.
Osgood. This was at the time he became
seriously interested in building up a world-
wide collection of game birds, and _ this
quickening interest in game birds is indi-
cated by the increased amount of notes on
game birds on this second trip and a col-
lection of about 100 specimens.

In my “List of Yukon Birds, etc.” pub-
lished in 1946 (Nat. Mus. Can., Bull 105) I
had no information on Conover’s Yukon bird
work, and these notes may be considered a
supplement to that work.

In 1919 Conover, with an outfitter and
two guides, by canoe went up the Nisutlin
River (leaving Teslin Post August 1) to the
‘mouth of Wolf River (August 1); up the
Wolf River to the junction of the Little Wolf
and Red Rivers which latter is the more
northerly tributary (August 8); and up the
Little Wolf River to Wolf Lake (arriving
August 11). He hunted the Wolf Lake area
August 11— September 9 for big game, and
shot a few ducks and ptarmigan. On Sep-
tember 10 he started back down the Little
Wolf River and reached Teslin Post Sep-
tember 12, where he stayed until September
17. He left the post September 17; reached
Teslin River September 18 and hunted in
the nearby mountains until he returned to
Teslin Post October 1. He stayed there until
October 5, then went to Hootalinqua, where

1 Received for publication July 17, 1950.

he arrived October 10 and took a river
steamer October 12 for Whitehorse.

Though Conover’s 1919 notes are full of
reference to game birds seen, and some
skinned, and part of his time at Teslin Lake
was spent shooting birds, only one of his
skins, that of a willow ptarmigan, survived
and is now in his collection.

In 1920 Conover made a hunting trip to
the Big Salmon River — Rose River country
by packhorse, and then shot ducks on Lake
Marsh, and hunted the country around Lake
Bennett and Watson River. He arrived at
Whitehorse August 3; with guide went by
river boat to Hootalinqua arriving August
5; August 8 reached Winter Crossing? by
canoe where they met their outfit of 9 horses
and 2 men. They arrived at Livingston, on
Livingston Creek on August 10.

The period August 12 to September 1 was
spent in the sheep ranges with peaks 4000-
6500 feet in altitude (estimated) between the
headwaters of the Big Salmon and the head-
waters of the Rose River. September 2 camp
was made at the headwaters of the Rose
River, among the little lakes and ponds
of what was evidently the Rose-Lapie Pass
and September 3 and 4 were spent there.
On September 5 the party started back
reaching Big Salmon Lake on September 7,
and September 8-12 was spent hunting about
Big Salmon and Quiet Lake. September 13
they started for Livingston which they
reached September 18, and Winter Crossing
September 21. Here apparently the pack out-
fit was left, and by boat Conover went to
Lake Laberge where he shot on September
22, 23; Lake Marsh, October 1-11; Lake
Bennett, October 11, and hunted Watson
River, October 23 — November 8. No journal
covers this period, but I have the catalogue
of specimens collected and the list of game
birds shot.

2 In 1946 I identified ‘Winter Crossing’’ as probably
referring to Yukon Crossing, near Carmacks. Pro-
bably there are several Winter Crossings on the

Yukon River. The present one is 40 miles above
Hootalinqua on the Teslin River.

Nov.-Dec. 1950]

Though this 1920 trip also was ostensibly a
big game trip, Conover devoted much time to
game birds as his notes indicate, and he
made a collection that numbers 103 specimens
entered in his catalogue.

Comments on the Data

Conover’s notes and catalogues deal al-
most entirely with game birds, and part of
the time at least he recorded daily all the
game species seen. Numbers of individuals
are seldom given, but from the incidental
comments some idea of abundance can be
secured.

The chief value of these notes perhaps is
that they give a picture, sketchy though it is,
of the game bird situation in parts of
southern Yukon from which we had no data
for any period.

Discussion of the Game Birds
in the Area

At Teslin Bay on several days between
September 12 and October 5 Conover found
considerable numbers of ducks and geese,
and swans stopped there. Between Teslin
Lake and Wolf Lake, along the Nisutlin,
Wolf and Little Wolf Rivers, August 2-11,
only occasional ducks: whistlers, pintail, 1
flock of 100 Canada geese, mallards, green-
winged teal and mergansers were seen, and
there was apparently no concentration of
waterfowl. Lesser yellow-legs and solitary
sandpipers were also recorded, and on 3
days spruce grouse were seen. On the return
trip, August 26-27 and September 9-12, only
a few widgeon and a brood of harlequins
were noted.

At Wolf Lake, between August 11 and 26,
Conover records that many ducks were found
on a bay they called Duck Bay, including
pintail, green-winged teal, baldpate, golden-
eye, buffle-head. Though ducks were more
numerous than elsewhere, as Conover speaks
of 20 ducks seen on the lake one day, the
total mumber of ducks evidently was not
large. A semipalmated plover, many lesser
yellow-legs, and a few Wilson snipe were also
seen here. Hunting for sheep and caribou in
the surrounding mountains a few rock and
white-tailed ptarmigan were found, and on
the island in Wolf Lake were a flock of
willow ptarmigan. Near the mouth of the
Little Wolf River, was a small lake called
Fish Lake. Here about 50 surf scoters were
seen.

At the outlet of Teslin Lake October 6,
there were quite a few geese and ducks, in-
cluding whistlers, scaup, and mallards.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

215

Travelling down the Teslin River, October
8-10 quite a few ducks were seen, mostly
whistlers, with mallards the next most com-
mon.

In the mountains about the foot of Teslin
Lake September 19-29 only a few rock ptar-
migan (on 2 days), willow ptarmigan (1 day)
and spruce grouse (on 2 days) were seen.

In the Big Salmon River country, along
the valleys of the river and its tributaries,
only a few broods of harlequin ducks were
seen; in the forests occasional blue and
spruce grouse, and at timberline willow ptar-
migan were seen August 10-15 and Septem-
ber 13-18. In the mountains between Big Sal-
mon Lake and Rose Lake, August 16 — Sep-
tember 7, one brood of harlequins were
recorded, and willow ptarmigan on 6 occa-
sions; white-tailed ptarmigan, 2 coveys;
spruce grouse, 1 covey; and rock ptarmigan,
twice. One Wilson snipe was also seen.
About the little lakes at the head of Rose
River Conover on September 4 found 4
golden-eye and 5 green-winged teal only.

About Big Salmon Lake, Quiet Lake, and
the few miles of water between, September
8-12 Conover found a few harlequins, 1 bunch
of baldpates, some golden-eyes, mallards and
buffle-heads, and saw two scaup and 2 surf

scoters.

From the above it is seen that about Wolf
Lake, Rose Lakes, and Big Salmon-Quiet Lake
a few duck summer. Along most of the streams
are only a few harlequin ducks breeding.
Only in Teslin Bay, and at the foot of Teslin
Lake are areas where ducks and geese stop
in some numbers.

For Marsh Lake we have no field notes, but
we do have a bag record, which has totals
for the period October 1-8 (8 days of shoot-
ing) as follows:

lesser SCAUP ...........::::ccceceees 42 birds
golden-eye (2 species) ...... 3D) rm
buttle-heddy i. ce ee ee 26 ot
Pinta es eee Pes
Aa ATG ee eh. enor wee NS 1Oe is
greater SCAUP ..........:ceeeee “Oats
Daldpatew 2 eu ce eee Sze
SUL SCOLER) cs oes eee Soh i
white-winged scoter ............ Paes
OLG-SOMAW) iyo een coectesccendareee & Dishing
red-breasted merganser ... 2 “
ring-necked duck ................ a ae
Obagi ook ass wees aoes gates 152 birds

Whistling Swan.
Cygnus columbianus (Ord). Swans were
reported only three times, all in 1919: on

216 THE CANADIAN
October 3 there was a flock of about 100
in Nisutlin Bay; on October 5 swans were
seen flying high over Lake Teslin, and on
October 8 a flock of 15 was seen on Teslin
River.

Lesser Canada Goose.

Branta canadensis leucopareia (Brandt).
Apparently a few geese summer on Wolf
River, where on August 5 a flock of about
100 birds, mostly unable to fly, was seen,
and another flock on August 6, and on Wolf
Lake, where a few were seen on August 21.
Geese apparently stop in the autumn in
Nisutlin Bay, where about 50 were seen on
October 3, and 400 on October 4. A few
geese were seen at the foot of Teslin Lake
on October 6.

Common Mallard.

Anas platyrhynchos platyrhynchos Lin-
naeus. In 1919 a very few mallards were
seen along the Wolf River, including one
flock of young unable to fly on August 6;
a few were seen in Nisutlin Bay October 6
and 8, and at the foot of Teslin Lake and in
Teslin River, October 9-13 there were quite
a few ducks, among which the mallards were
outnumbered only by the golden-eyes.

In 1920 mallards are recorded only at Big
Salmon Lake, where a few were seen, Sep-
tember 8-12, and at Lake Marsh, where some
were shot, October 1-8, the largest day’s bag
being 7 birds.

Green-winged Teal.

_ Anas carolinensis Gmelin. Along the Wolf
River seen, August 6-8; and at Wolf Lake,
August 12-25, and in Nisutlin Bay, Septem-
ber 13-14, 1919. In the Big Salmon River—
Rose Lake country only 5 teal were seen, on
a pond near Rose Lake on September 4,
1920. At Marsh Lake, October 1-8, 1920, no
green-winged teal were shot.

American Pintail.

Anas acuta tzitzihoa Vieillot. Along the
Wolf River seen August 5-10; at Wolf Lake,
August 11-25; at Nisutlin Bay, September
12; and on Teslin River, October 11, 1921.

In the Big Salmon—Rose Lake area no pin-
tail were recorded in 1920. Shooting at Lake
Marsh, in October pintail were shot on only
October 1 and 2, when 11 birds in all were
killed.

Baldpate.

Mareca americana (Gmelin). Wolf River,
seen on August 24, 25 and September 11;
and at Nisutlin Bay two were shot on Sep-
tember 14 and a few seen on October 3,
1919.

FIELD-NATURALIST

‘recorded, on September 12, 1920.

[Vol. 64

In the Big Salmon River—Rose Lake
country only one bunch of widgeon were
During
the period shooting on Lake Marsh baldpate
were shot on October 1 (2 birds) and on
October 2 (6 birds).

Specimen:

Marsh Lake: 19;
Canvas-back Duck.

Aythya valisineria Wilson. The only pre--
viously published Yukon record is of the
two birds I saw on June 16, 1944 on a
marshy lake in the Pelly River Valley.
Conover adds another sight record, of a
flock of 15 seen in Nisutlin Bay on October
4, 1919.
Ring-necked Duck. :

Aythya collaris (Donovan). The specimen
listed below is the first Yukon record for this
more southern duck. Presumably it is not
of regular nor common occurrence.

October 1, 1920.

Specimen:
Lake Marsh: 12; October 5, 1920.
This specimen compares well with

females from various other parts of
North America.

American Greater Scaup Duck.

Aythya marila nearctica Stejneger. The
only specimen hitherto recorded for Yukon
was Nelson’s from Fort Reliance. Though
there have been a number of sight records,
Swarth in 1927 was unwilling to accept any
for the Atlin area because all the specimens
he secured were lesser scaup. :

Because of the known distribution of the
greater scaup it would be surprising if they
did not occur, and Conover’s specimens
listed below are thus particularly welcome.
In addition to the specimens, Conover

records shooting two greater scaup near the

outlet to Teslin Lake on October 6, 1919 and
another on October 8, and in 1920 on Lake
Marsh shooting 1, 2, 3, 4 and 1 greater
scaup on October 4, 5, 6, 8 and 11. Possi-
bly they are all migrants in southern Yukon.

Specimens:
Lake Marsh: 2¢, 29; October 4-11, 1920.
Wing, ¢ 220, 222; 9 208, 217; ex-

posed culmen ¢ 46, 46, 2 43, 44; great-
est width of bill ¢ 23, 24; 92 23, 26 mm.
The males are just beginning to get
vermiculated feathers in their backs.

Lesser Scaup Duck.

Aythya affinis Eyton. Strangely no scaup
were recorded on the Wolf River or Wolf
Lake area, and only on Nisutlin Bay and
Teslin Lake, October 1 and 3, 1919, were a few

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THe CANADIAN
seaup, that could well have included this
species, recorded, and 1 lesser scaup was
shot in Nisutlin Bay on October 8, 1919.

In the Big Salmon River—Rose Lake area
the only scaup recorded are two on Sep-
tember 8, 1920 at Big Salmon Lake which
were probably of this species. While shoot-
ing at Lake Marsh, in 1920 this was ap-
parently one of the commonest ducks, and
2, 4, 19, 2 and 15 birds were shot on October
3, 5, 6, 7 and 8.

Specimens:

Lake Marsh: 1¢ immature, 19; October
Bee. 1920:

Wing ¢ 201, @ 181; exposed culmen
6 37, 238; greatest width of bill, ¢ 19,
? 16 mm.

American Common Golden-eye.

Bucephala* clangula americana (Bonapar-
te). In 1946 I had but a single record of
this species for Yukon. Conover recorded
various golden-eyes seen in Yukon, which

‘are listed under the next species, but he

collected the specimens of this species listed
below. Its summer and breeding status in
Yukon is unknown.

Specimens:
Lake Marsh: 3 6, 6 @; October 2-7,
1920. One male is in partial plumage;
the other two are in female plumage.
All these birds have the straight sided
bill with the flat nail of this species.

Barrow Golden-eye.

Bucephala* islandica (Gmelin). As _ this
species is known to be a fairly common
summer resident in southern Yukon I have
listed Conover’s sight records here.

In 1919, on the Nisutlin River, August 1,
one brood was seen, and a flock on the Wolf
River, August 4; on Wolf Lake one was
seen on August 21, and a brood on August
25. In Nisutlin Bay, August 4, there were
quite a few, and at the outlet to Teslin Lake,
October 6-8 there were quite a few ducks,
mostly golden-eyes.

In 1920 four were recorded on a pond at
the head of Rose River, September 4, and
“some” on Big Salmon Lake—Quiet Lake on
September 12.

While shooting on Lake Marsh golden-eyes
of two species were shot as follows: 1, 2, 13,
4, and 8 on October 1, 4, 5, 7, and 8. Ap-
parently these were amongst the commonest
ducks there.

* For reasons for using Bucephala instead of Glaucio-

netiz as the genus for the golden-eye and buffle-head
see 1948, Auk, 65, p. 439.

FIELD-NATURALIST

207

Specimens:

Rose River headwaters: 3 9; September
4, 1920.
Lake Marsh: 4 6 imm., 2 9; October 4,

5, 1920. These all have the tapering bill

and arched nail of this species.
Buffle-head Duck.

Bucephala* albeola (Linnaeus). In 1919
buffle-heads were recorded only on August
25 at Wolf Lake, in Nisutlin Bay on October
8, and Teslin River, October 9 and 10. In
1920 recorded at Big Salmon—Quiet Lakes,
September 8 and 12, and when shooting on
Lake Marsh birds were taken as follows:
1, 1, 5, 10, 5, 2 and 2 on Oct. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
and 8th.

Specimens:

Head Big Salmon River:

ber 12, 1920.

Lake Marsh: 1 ¢; October 2, 1920.
Old-squaw Duck.

Clangula hyemalis (Linnaeus). When I
compiled my 1946 list I had not a single
interior record, nor knew of a specimen
from Yukon despite the species being re-
ported to summer in abundance on the Arctic
coast.

Conover collected the specimens listed on
October 6, and also shot another on Lake
Marsh on October 8, 1920.

Specimens:

Lake Marsh: 1 ¢ imm.; October 6, 1920.
Western Harlequin Duck.

Histrionicus histrionicus pacificus Brooks.
In 1919 Conover recorded a female with 4
half grown young on August 27 on the Wolf
River, and shot one on Teslin River, on Oc-
tober 10. In 1920 on streams in the Big Sal-
mon—Rose Lake area he recorded broods of
young on August 12, 14 and 19, and Sep-
tember 7, while on September 12, on Big
Salmon Lake—Quiet Lake waters he saw
three harlequin ducks.

None was recorded for Lake Teslin or Lake
Marsh.

Specimens:

Headwaters Big Salmon River: 2 4,
imm., 39; August 14—September 12.
The August 18 immature male is about
two-thirds grown, and still has much down
on the neck.
King Eider.

Somateria spectabilis (Linnaeus). In my
1946 list I had but a single interior Yukon
station for this bird, two birds from the
Yukon River near Dawson. The Conover
specimen listed below thus gives the second
interior locality for the species.

2 2; Septem-

218 THE CANADIAN

Specimen:
Lake Marsh: 1 ¢ imm.; October 7, 1920.

Western White-winged Scoter.

Melanitta fusca dixoni (Brooks). Conover
records this bird only from Lake Marsh,
where he shot single individuals on October
4 and 6, 1920.

Specimens:

Lake Marsh: 1 9;

Surf Scoter.

Melanitta perspicillata (Linnaeus). In
1919, on a small lake called Fish Lake near
where the Little Wolf River and the Red
River join to form the Wolf River, Conover
found about 50 surf scoters on August 28.
Later, on October 1 in Nisutlin Bay he re-
corded many scoters, and the one shot was
this species.

In 1920, two were recorded on September
8 on Big Salmon Lake. While shooting on
Lake Marsh surf scoters were taken as fol-
lows: 1 and 2 birds on October 1 and 7.

Specimens:

Head Big Salmon River: 1 9;
ber 8, 1920.

Red-breasted Merganser.

Mergus serrator Linnaeus. In 1919 record-
ed only on Wolf River, August 6 and 8
(species ?). In 1920 while shooting at Lake
Marsh one was taken on October 1, and an-
other on October 7, both identified in Cono-
ver’s notes as this species.

Specimen:

Lake Marsh: 1 9; October 7, 1920.

Richardson Blue Grouse.

Dendragapus obscurus richardsonii Dou-
glas. No blue grouse were recorded in 1919;
in 1920 a covey of young grouse was seen
on the headwaters of the Big Salmon River
on August 12, and single birds are entered
for Livingston, August 10, Lake Laberge,
September 22, and 3 for Lake Bennett, Octo-
ber 11. Evidently it was scarce and local,
as appears to be the case generally.

Conover has the following notes on this
species, apparently gathered in part from
conversation with local people: “Found in
July and August around shores of lakes. In
September works up mountains to timber-
line where it winters. In fall seems to like
to feed on a red berry locally known as
“pigeon berry’. Holds generally higher than
either ruffed or spruce grouse. Found
broods of half-grown young middle of Au-
gust in high valleys, but not up to timber-
line. Very tame, treeing on being flushed
and allowing close approach. Tamer than

October 4, 1920.

Septem-

FIELD-NATURALIST

{[Vol. 64

either of other two grouse”
the ruffed grouse.

Specimens:

Carcross: 1 ¢ ad., 1 @ ad.; October 11,
1920.
Lake Laberge: 1 ¢ ad.; September 22,
1920.
Livingston Creek: 1 9 juv.;
1920.

Alaska Spruce Grouse.

Canachites canadensis osgoodi Bishop. As
would be expected, spruce grouse were noted
sparingly throughout when in forest country.
Conover’s notes, evidently gathered in part
from local people read: “Found in spruce
timber and also in jack pine but not as
commonly as in spruce. Most common of
[the] three grouse [the others are the blue
and ruffed grouse]. A swampy spot over-
grown with spruce is a good place for them.
Generally tame, treeing when flushed, but
sometimes very wild. One killed in Sep-
tember had crop full of jack pine buds.
Never seem to taste bitter; drier and flavor
nowhere near as good as blue or ruffed
grouse. Meat black’.

Specimens:

Winter Crossing (on Teslin River): 1 ¢
ad.; 1 ¢ imm.; 2 9; August 9, Sep-
tember 21, 1920.
Headwaters Big Salmon River: 1 4;
September 13, 1920.
Livingston: 1 ¢ ad, 2 Q;
September 18, 19, 1920.
Head McConnell River: 1 ¢ imm.; 3 2;
August 26, 1920.

Yukon Ruffed Grouse.

Bonasa umbellus yukonensis Grinnell.
None was recorded in 1919; in 1920, 2 are
recorded near Winter Crossing on Teslin
River, and 1 at Lake Laberge, Conover’s no-
tes read: “Found in poplar groves along
banks of rivers or lakes. — Don’t tree, and
are hard to flush as they are great runners
and sneakers.”

Specimens:

Winter Crossing, Teslin River: 1 ¢, 1 2

September 19, 1920.

Lake Laberge: 1 9; September 23, 1920.

Black-shafted Willow Ptarmigan.

Lagopus lagopus lagopus (Linnaeus).
Found in small numbers in autumn in Wolf
Lake, Big Salmon Lake—Rose Lake, foot of
Teslin Lake, Lake Bennett, and Watson Ri-
ver areas. Conover’s notes read: ‘‘“Most com-
mon of the three ptarmigan. Lives in wil-
lows generally just around or above timber-
line, but also found in high valleys well down

, the spruce and

August 12,

August 10,

——

i

Nov.-Dec. 1950]

below timberline. — [near Rose Lake] —
saw them in valley eight hundred feet be-
low timberline and on Wolf Lake found a
large covey on a small island in the lake.

Island was mostly all willow, and only
hundred yards from nearest shore, but
shores were heavily timbered. —. In summer

have also seen them well up toward tops of
mountains — where there was willow. Meat
dark and very dry.”
Specimens:
Wolf Lake: 1°¢, August 13, 1919.
Big Salmon—Rose Lake area; 1 ¢,5 9,
August 13—September 16, 1920.
Watson River: 246, October 23, Novem-
ber 8, 1920.

Southern Rock Ptarmigan.

Lagopus mutus kelloggae Grinnell. Small
numbers occasionally recorded in the higher
Wolf. Lake country; above the foot of Teslin
Lake, between Big Salmon and Rose Lake,
and in Watson River country. Conover’s no-
tes follow: “Probably little more common
generally than white-tailed but in 1919 and
1920 not very plentiful. In summer found
on top of flat grassy mountains. Does not
seem to like the rocky ones as well as the
grassy flat ones. Good ewe ranges are good
rock ptarmigan country. In ‘winter seems
to hold to about the same country, maybe
working down closer to the willow line but
holding higher than either of the two
others. Sometimes very tame and others
very wild. Single birds in summer apt to be
very wild. Meat black but not as dry as
willow ptarmigan.”

Specimens:

Headwaters Big Salmon River—Rose
Lake: 7 6,3 9; September 2-15, 1920.

Head of Watson River: 1 ¢, November 4,
1920.

White-tailed Ptarmigan.

Lagopus leucurus subsp. ? Two coveys, one
of 4 and one of two birds recorded in the
Wolf Lake area; two coveys seen one day in
the Big Salmon — Rose Lake area; and col-
lected in Watson River country.

Conover’s notes follow: “Holds in summer
to the very tops of the roughest peaks. De-
lights in the slide rock slopes of these peaks.
Ram mountains are generally good white-
tailed country [this does not accord with my
own observations; in summer most of them,
especially females with young, are on
grassy meadows at timberline]. Very tame.
Walked into bunch in slide rock before
seeing them and they only ran a few steps.

q “8

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

219

In winter comes down into the hollows in
the high draws, holding lower than the rock
ptarmigan in that season. Still tame but
apt to be wilder than in summer. — Best
eating of the three ptarmigan, meat being
black but juicy.”
Specimens:
Head McConnell River (6200 feet): 3 ¢,
7 9; August 24, 1920.
Head Watson River: 1 ¢, 2 2; October
30, 1920.

These birds are much greyer than is a
single Jasper bird in the Conover collection.
In my 1946 list I noted the same consider-
able difference between Yukon and Jasper
birds (topotypical leucurus) in the National
Museum of Canada, and referred the Yukon
birds to peninsularis. However, I had seen
no Kenai birds (topotypical peninsularis)
and was guided in this allocation by the
description. Friedmann (1946, U.S. Nat. Mus.
Bull., 50, p. 129) refers Yukon birds to
P. l. leucurus. A revision of this part of the
species seem advisable.

Little Brown Sandhill Crane.

Grus canadensis canadensis Linnaeus.
Near Rose Lake on September 4 six were
seen flying over, and again on September 5,
1920, a flock of 100 passed.

Wilson Snipe.

Capella gallinago delicata (Ord.). Only at
Wolf Lake on August 12, 1919, did Conover
record “quite a few”. Otherwise single birds
were recorded on September 1 between Big
Salmon and Rose Lake; October 2, 4 and 5.
on Lake Marsh.

Specimens:

Lake Marsh: 1 ¢, 1 92; October 2, 5, 1920.

Red Phalarope. ;
Phalaropus fulicarius (Linnaeus). Though
not recorded in Yukon this species is to be
expected. Conover shot three phalaropes in
grey plumage out of a flock on October 6,
1919 at the outlet of Teslin Lake. Though
the specimens were lost, as Conover mentions
their bills being broad one can reasonably

assume they were this species.

Upland Plover.

Bartramia longicauda (Bechstein), One
was collected and another seen, on August
16, 1920 above timberline in the mountains
above the headwaters of the Big Salmon
River.

Specimens:

Headwaters Big Salmon River: 1
August 16, 1920.

$ 25

220 Tur CANADIAN
Pectoral Sandpiper.

Erolia melanotos Vieillot. The scant know-
ledge of the occurrence of this species in
southern Yukon is added to by Conover’s
1920 notes of birds as follows: September 14,

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

2 birds, Nisutlin Bay; and October 1, 2 birds
and October 6, 2 birds at Lake Marsh.
Specimen:

Lake Marsh: 1 4; October 6, 1920.

REVIEWS

Annual Report for 1948 of the Province of
‘Quebec Society for the Protection of Birds,
Inc., Montreal, P.Q., pp. 1-41.

This summarizes the results of the 1948
bird observations by members of the Pro-
vince of Quebec Society for the Protection
of Birds in southern Quebec province. The
information is presented in (1) an annotated
list; (2) a table of bird migratory move-
ments showing first, last, and peak dates;
and (3) a summary by L. MclI. Terrill of 14
Christmas bird censuses (1935-1948) made
in the Montreal district. As is usual in these
reports comments on temperature and pre-
cipitation are made and some phenological
data are given. — W. EARL GODFREY.

W. E. Saunders, Naturalist. R. J. Rutter,
Editor; The Federation of Ontario Natu-
ralists, Toronto, 1949; pp. I-IV, 1-66, 5 photos.

This little volume, a memorial to the late
William Edwin Saunders, is made up of es-
Says written by naturalists who were fortu-
nate enough to know him well: R. J. Rutter,
John Dearness, the late P. A. Taverner,
JR: Dymond, J... Baillie, Jr. and, Ry .G:
Dingman. These essays, together with several
written by Saunders himself, give an in-
formal picture of this unusual man who was
able at once to run a thriving business, take
major parts in civic and church affairs, and
still find time to acquire an expert’s know-
ledge and standing in such fields as orni-
thology, mammalogy, botany, and entomo-
logy. His imposing bibliography, which is
included in the volume, comprises some 279
titles. Dr. Saunders was an _ outstanding
example of the school of broad-interest natu-
ralists whose members are passing with re-
grettable rapidity and, in these days of
specialization, with few replacements. — W.
EARL GODFREY.

An Annotated List of the Birds of the East
Kootenay, British Columbia. By Walter B.
Johnstone. British Columbia Provincial Mu-
seum, Occasional Paner No. 7; December,
1949; 87 pp., 20 figs., 1 map. (Price, 75c).

This is a worthwhile contribution to the
ornithology of the East Kootenay, British

Columbia, the results of field work carried
on by the author intermittently in the period
February 1937 to June 1949. The author
recognizes for biotic areas, outlines their
salient characteristicts, and succinctly but
adequately describes the physiography of the
region. Data contained in the annotated list
are grouped under categories similar to those
so admirably used by Munro and Cowan
(1947, B.C. Prov. Mus., Spec. Pub. No. 2,
pp. 43-237). There is for each species a

_general statement of status. This is followed

by seasonally grouped data and in the case
of breeding species there is usually a de-
tailed account of nesting. Some very in-
teresting notes on other aspects of bird be-
havior are included.

There are a few minor points upon which
one might comment, chiefly because they
might easily have been averted. Apparently
the author did not have access to the latest
supplements to the A. O. U. Checklist and
presumably he followed the nomenclature
used by Munro and Cowan (loc. cit.) — even
to the point of perpetuating certain typo-
graphical errors (e.g. spelling of suckley2
and Friedmann). However, many important
changes have been made in nomenclature
since the appearance of that excellent
publication and authors of ornithological
papers would be well advised to keep abreast
of these.

The author appears to have relied almost
entirely upon his own careful observations
in compiling this impressive list of the birds
of the East Kootenay region. It seems pos-
sible that an exhaustive perusal of the
literature might have added perhaps a few
more species. Parus hudsonicus columbia-
nus comes to mind as missing from the list
despite the fact that the type locality (Field)
of that subspecies is in the northern part of
the area concerned! These are small things,
however, and it is felt that the author has
well attained his stated objective of record-
ing the bird fauna, not hitherto fully re-
ported upon, of that section of southeastern
British Columbia. — W. EARL GODFREY.

EEE

a

ee a ee eS

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

221

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

Florida Gallinule, Gallinula chloropus ca-
chinnans, in Thunder Bay District. — On
May 8, 1950 a bird of this species was found
in an apparently exhausted condition at
Gurney, on the north shore of Lake Superior,
about 90 miles east of Port Arthur. It was
found by a resort owner who tried to keep
it alive, but it died on May 11 and came into
the hands of Mr. W. Bittle, a Conservation
Officer who forwarded it to me. It is now
in the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology.
This is a new record for this district and
would appear to be unusually far north. —
L. S. DEAR, Port Arthur, Ont.

The Burrowing Owl in Alberta. — Upon my
arrival at Rosebud, Alberta, in 1928 I re-
ceived reports of little long-legged owls
which used to sit about on the ground. No
one had seen them for several years and
although I was on the alert I saw no sign
of the burrowing owl until 1938 when I
found a dead one tied to a fence about 20
miles south of Rosebud. In 1939 two or
three pairs nested around Rosebud and
during the following years burrowing owls
were found nesting as far west as Calgary
and as far north as Munson. From the facts
it appeared that this was a secondary in-

cursion into central Alberta and that its

northerly limit was near Munson.

When a ten year old boy, David Hitchin,
reported to a meeting of the Edmonton Bird
Club that he had captured a burrowing owl
about 30 miles east of Edmonton there was
some scepticism. This was dispelled at a
later meeting by the display of the mounted
specimen. The bird was captured by hand
near Cooking Lake on October 5, 1949. It
had apparently been shot and left with both
wings broken. The following day it died.
It appears to be a young of the year and
may have been on one of those pre-migratory
peregrinations which commonly break up
the families of both owls and hawks. In any
case the specimen now constitutes our most
northerly record of the species. — W. RAY
SALT, Dept. of Anatomy, Univ. of Alberta,

- Edmonton, Alta.

Belated Swallows in the Maritimes. — The
fall of 1948 saw many swallows in the Mari-
time Provinces of Canada long after the

’ normal date of migration. It seems desirable

to put some of these reports on record as
they show that more than a few isolated
swallows were involved.

The following records, all for Barn Swal-
lows, have been forwarded to me from
various parts of New Brunswick.

On November 8, 1948, Stanley Gorham saw
two Barn Swallows at Browns Flats, Kings
County. é

Henrik Deichman saw one Barn Swallow
at Summerville, Kings County, November 11,
1948.

On November 13, 1948, Miss Willa Mac-
Coubrey reported four Barn Swallows at
St. Andrews.

George Boyer saw an unstated number of
Barn Swallows at Memramcook, Westmor-
land County, December 3, 1948. This report
has already been published (Audubon Field
Notes 3:5).

At Cape Spencer, St. John County, the
lightkeeper, Charles O. Mitchell, reported a
flock of fifteen Barn Swallows seen almost
daily until February 13, 1949. What they
could feed on at this season is hard to
imagine but the lightkeeper reported that
when his children collected dormant flies in
the attic and dropped them out of an up-
stairs window the Swallows caught them in
mid-air.

The Barn Swallow normally leaves New
Brunswick about the second week of Sep-
tember. September 29, 1892, when J. W.
Banks saw one at Saint John, was always
considered an unusually late date for this
species.

Two November records have been re- .
ported for other years. Reid McManus Jr.
(Auk 49:222) saw one at Memramcook No-
vember 8 and 9, 1931, and Ernest Joy (Pet-
tingill, Proc. N.S. Inst. Sci. 19:354) saw one
at Kent Island November 9, 1935. These
two isolated reports could have been at-
tributed to injured birds which had managed
to survive but the number of late records
in 1948 demands some other explanation. —
W. AUSTIN SQUIRES, Curator, Natural
Science Department, The New Brunswick
Museum, Saint John, N.B.

222 THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

INDEX TO VOLUME 64

mel yy, yee

Abnormally colored Woodcock (Philohela
minor), An, by A. L. Rand, 153

Abundance of certain mammals of the Gerald-
ton Forest District, Ontario, by C. A.
Elsey, 159

Acanthis flammea, 99; flammea flammea, 64,
138, 141; hornemanni exilipes, 65

Accipiter cooperii, 194; striatus, 194

Acorus Calamus, 128

Acrocheilus alutaceus, 156

Actitis macularia, 61, 97

Additional notes on the birds of Renfrew
County, Ontario, by Hoyes Lloyd, Robert
G. Lanning and Sheldon Davis, 140

Additions to the birds of Simcoe County,
Ontario, by O. E. Devitt, 145

Aechmophorus occidentalis, 94, 145

Agropyron, 39; trachycaulum, 39; trachycau-
lum var. glaucum, 39

Albino mud puppy near Fort William, Onta-
rio, An, by A. E. Alin, 92

Alectoria ochroleuca, 46

Alisma Plantago-aquatica, 127

Allin, A. E.
An Albino mud puppy near Fort William,

Ontario, 92
European hare introduced into the Dis-
trict of Thunder Bay, Ontario, 122

Alopecurus alpinus, 90

Alopex lagopus, 154

Ambystoma jeffersonianum, 86, 93, 192

American wild flowers, reviewed by A. E.
Porsild, 53

Ammospiza pallida, 148

Anacharis canadensis, 127

Anas acuta, 193; acuta tzitzihoa, 52, 58, 96,

216; carolinensis, 216; platyrhynchos,
139, 193; platyrhynchos, 216; rubripes,
66, 139

Anemone canadensis, 128
Annotated list of the birds of the East Koo-
_tenay, British Columbia, An, reviewed by
W. Earl Godfrey, 220
Annual meeting of the Ottawa Field-Natu-
ralists’ Club, 1949, 36
Annual report for 1948 of the Province of
Quebec Society for the Protection of
Birds, Inc., reviewed by W. Earl Godfrey,
220
R. Ruggles Gates, 142
Another parallel mutation in Oenothera, by
Antennaria, 1; alaskana, 2, 3, 8, 11; albo-
rosea, 5, 9, 17; alpina, 1, 17; angustata, 2,
3, 4, 8, 11; angustifolia, 13; atriceps, 2,

5, 8, 12; borealis, 14; Breitungii n. sp., 6,
9, 18; campestris, 1, 2, 3, 8; candida, 12;
carpatica, 1; carpatica var. pulcherrima,
10; compacta, 2, 4, 8, 11, 12; congesta,
11; crymophila, 7, 9, 18; densifolia, 2, 4,
8, 12; dioica, 1; Ekmaniana, 2, 4, 8, 11,
13, 92; elegans n. sp., 2, 5, 6, 18, 20; eu-
cosma, 10; glabrata f. tomentosa, 11;
Howellii, 1, 3, 8, 10; hudsonica, 11; inecar- |
nata n. sp., 6, 19, 20; itsolepis, 7, 19, 20;
Laingii, 7, 20, 21; leuchippi, 6, 20, 21;
media, 16; megacephala, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 13;
monocephala, 1, 2, 3, 9, 14; neoalaskana,
4, 9, 14; nitens, 11; nitida, 2, 7, 20, 22;
oxyphylla, 6, 20, 23; pallida, 1, 5, 9, 14;
parvifolia, 24; pedunculata n. sp., 2, 5, 9,
15; philonipha, 2, 3, 9, 15; plantaginifo-
lia, 24; pulcherrima, 3, 8, 10; pulcherri-
ma var. angustisquama var. nov., 8, 11; .
pygmaea, 2, 4, 6, 20, 23; rosea, 6, 20, 24;
rupicola, 17; stolonifera n. sp., 2, 5, 9, 16;
subcanescens, 2, 4,'9, 17; subviscosa, 7,
20, 24

Anthus spinoletta,
cens, 64, 98, 141

Arabis arenicola, 92

Arctagrostis latifolia, 99

Arctic fox on Cape Breton Island, by Austin
W. Cameron, 154

Arcyria carnea, 181; insignis, 181

Arenaria interpres morinella, 97

Armeria maritima, 92; maritima var. sibiri-
ca, 92

Asclepias incarnata, 128

Asio flammeus, 187, 197; flammeus flam-
meus, 63, 98

Aster elegantulus n. sp., 43

Astragalus alpinus, 92

Audubon’s Birds of America, reviewed by W.
Earl Godfrey, 190

Auk, Razor-billed, 74

Aythya affinis, 193, 216; collaris, 52, 70, 216;
marila nearctica, 216; valisineria, 216

198; spinoletta rubes-

on Bae

Badhamia affinis, 181; affinis var. orbicu-
lata, 181; gracilis, 181; lilacina, 181; ma-

crocarpa, 181; ovispora, 181; rubiginosa,
alghh

Baldpate, 81, 139, 168, 216

Ball, K. E.

Breeding behaviour of the Ring-necked
Pheasant on Pelee Island, Ontario, 201
Bartramia longicauda, 141, 219
Bear. Back, 200

\

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THe CANADIAN

Beaver, 159, 160, 200

Belated Swallows in the Maritimes, by W.
Austin Squires, 221

Bird notes from Great Whale River, Que.,
by D. B. O. Savile, 95

Bird-watching, reviewed by W. Earl Godfrey,
157

Birds observed in the Yukon Territory during
the summer of 1949, by W. W. Judd, 135

Birds of Arctic Alaska, reviewed by A. L.
Rand, 54

Blackbird, Brewer, 81, 166, 167; Red-winged,
71, 80, 166, 167; Rusty, 77, 80, 99, 138,
168, 198

-Blarina brevicauda, 199

Blue Grosbeak in western Ontario, The, by
C. S. Marvel, 94

Bluebird, Eastern, 166; Mountain, 138, 166-
168

Bobolink, 154

Bobolink at Cochrane, Ontario, by D. 2 O.
Savile, 154

Boivin, Bernard
The dates of publication of the Icones
Filicum by W. J. Hooker and R. K. Gre-
ville, 212

Bombycilla garrula pallidiceps, 138

Bonasa umbellus, 195; umbellus yukonensis,
218

Botanical research in Scandinavia; 375 con-
temporary workers and their special in-
terests, by Nicholas Polunin, 105

Bourguignon, A. E.
Red Crossbills collected in oe Ottawa
District, 52

Boyer, George F.
The Scissor-tailed Flycatcher
Brunswick, 188

Brant, American, 186; Black, 81

Branta bernicla, 186; canadensis, 58, 95, 193;
canadensis leucopareia, 216

Breeding behaviour of the Ring-necked
Pheasant on Pelee Island, Ontario, by Ke
KE. Ball, 201 .

Brefeldia maxima, 181

Brown, A. W. A.
_ Effect on trees of extremes of climate in
southern Alberta, 185

Bryozoa, 191

in New

“Bryum pallescens, 48

Bubo virginianus, 196; virginianus virginia-
nus, 141

Bucephala albeola, 217;
96, 217; islandica, 217

Buffle-head, 77, 78, 80, 81, 168

Bufo americanus americanus, 86

Bullfrog, 193

'
clangula americana,

,

ad

FIELD-NATURALIST

223

Bunting, Eastern Snow, 65;
Snow, 71, 73, 77, 79-81, 199

Burrowing Owl in Alberta, The, by W. Ray
Salt, 221

Buteo jamaicensis, 194; lagopus, 194;
pus s. johannis, 66, 96; lineatus, 194

Butler, T. H.
Two records of shrimps from English Bay,
B.C., 188

By-laws, Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, 89

fe ee

Calamagrostis canadensis, 127

Calcarius lapponicus, 187; lapponicus lappo-
nicus, 65, 99; pictus, 148

Calidris canutus rufus, 97, 141

Calla palustris, 128

Caltha palustris, 128

Cameron, Austin W.
Arctic fox on Cape Breton Island, 154
Review of: Mammals of North America,
158 ;

Campanula aparinoides, 130

Canachites canadensis, 96, 194;
canadensis, 60;° canadensis osgoodi,

Canvas-back, 81, 139

Capella gallinago,
219

Caprimulgus vociferus, 197

Cardinal, 77-80

Carex aquatilis, 90; Bigelowti, 90; cristatella,
128; diandra, 128; membranacea, 90; nar-
dina, 90; Pseudo-Cyperus, 128; stricta var.
strictior, 128; substricta, 128; versicaria,
128; vulpinoidea, 128

Caribou, Woodland, 162, 163, 200

Carpodacus purpureus, 198

Casmerodius albus, 145

Cassiope tetragona, 92

Castor canadensis, 200

Cat, Domestic, 154

Cat-fox association, by F. H. Schultz, 154

Catbird, 78, 198.

Cathartes aura, 194

Catt, James
Salvelinus alpinus in Walton Lake, New
Brunswick, 189

Cepphus grylle, 62

Cerastium alpinum, 46, 49, 92

Ceratophyllum demersum, 128

Certhia familiaris, 197

Cervus canadensis, 200

Char, Alpine, 189

Charadrius hiaticula, 196; hiaticula semipal-
mata, 61, 96, 136; vociferus vociferus, 141

Chaulelasmus streperus, 139, 186

Chelone glabra, 128

Chelydra serpentina, 86

Lark, 166;

lago-

canadensis
218

155; gallinago delicata,

224 THE CANADIAN

Chen caerulescens, 95, 193; hyperborea, 155,
193; hyperborea hyperborea, 95

Chickadee, Black-capped, 71-73, 77-81; Brown-
capped, 98; Brown-headed, 77, 138, 197;
‘Chestnut-backed, 81, 82; Hudsonian, 63,
80, 168; Oregon, 81

Chicken, Prairie, 195

Chiselmouth, 156

Chrysemys, 86; picta bellii, 86

‘Cicuta bulbifera, 128

Circus cyaneus, 194; cyaneus hudsonius, 96

Cistothorus platensis, 187

Clangula hyemalis, 58, 96, 217

Clastoderma Debaryanum, 181

‘Coccyzus erythropthalmus, 196

Cochlearia officinalis var. arctica, 49, 92

Cody, W. J.
Plants collected by B. John Woodruff on
the west coast of Melville Peninsula,
Franklin District, N.W.T., Canada, 90

Colaptes auratus, 98; auratus luteus, 136

Colour phase investigations on the Screech
Owl in Ontario, by N. D. Martin, 208

Columba livia, 196

Colymbus auritus, 136, 139

Comatricha aequalis, 181;
gans, 181; fimbriata, 181; laxa, 181; longa,
181; nigra var. aequalis, 181; pulchella
var. fusca, 181; rubens, 182; subcaespitosa,
182; tenerrima, 182

‘Compositae, 43

Contopus virens, 141

Cooch, Graham
June record of a European. Widgeon in
Manitoba, 153

‘Coot, 82, 187

‘Cormorant, Brandt, 189; Double-crested, 74,
81, 141; European, 74; Pelagic, 81, 189

Cornus stolonifera, 128

‘Corvus brachyrhynchos, 197; brachyrhynchos
brachyrhynchos, 141; corax, 197;
principalis, 66, 98, 138, 141

‘Cowan, I. McT. and R. H. Mackay
Food habits of the marten (Martes amer-
icana) in the Rocky Mountain region of
Canada, 100

Cowbird, 80, 99, 166, 187

‘Crago communis, 188; spinosissima, 188

Crane, Little Brown Sandhill, 219; Sandhill,
167, 195

Craterium aureum, 182

Creeper, Brown, 72, 73, 77-80, 197

Cribraria minutissima, 182; piriformis, 182;
rufa, 182; violacea, 182

Criddle, Stuart
The Peromyscus maniculatus bairdii com-
plex in Manitoba, 169

cornea, 181; ele-

FIELD-NATURALIST

corax

[Vol. 64

Crocethia alba, 97

Crossbill, Bendire’s, 82; Eastern Red, 33, 52;
Red, 32, 52, 80, 147, 198; Sitka, 141; White-
winged, 32, 52, 99, 141, 198

Crow, 72, 77-80, 166, 167; American, 73, 197;
Eastern, 71, 141; Northwestern, 81, 82;
Western, 82

Cuckoo, Black-billed, 196

Curlew, Hudsonian, 97

Cygnus columbianus, 146, 215

wills 9 aes

Dates of publication of the Icones Filicum
by W.J. Hooker and R.K. Greville, The,
by Bernard Boivin, 212

Davis, Eli and W.D. Sutton
Some Myxomycetes of Canada, 180

Davis, Sheldon
See Lloyd, Hoyes, Robert G. Lanning and
Sheldon Davis

Dear, L.S.
Florida Gallinule, Gallinula chloropus ca-
chinnans, in Thunder Bay District, 221

Decodon verticillatus, 128

Deer, White-tailed, 162, 163, 200

Defensive behavior in the Mantis, by Mae
Halliday, 133

Dendragapus obscurus richardsonii, 218

Dendroica coronata coronata, 64, 99; palma-
rum, 198; palmarum palmarum, 93; pete-
chia, 99, 138, 198; striata, 64, 99; tigrina,
147, 198

Description of a new northwestern Geothly-
pis, by W. Earl Godfrey, 104

Devitt, O. E.

Additions to the birds of Simcoe County,
Ontario, 145
Diachea_ caespitosa,
subsessilis, 182

Dianema corticatum, 182; Harveyi, 182

Diderma Chondrioderma, 182; montanum,
182; montanwm var. album, 182; simplez,
182

Didymium anellus, 182; clavus, 182; difforme,
182; ochroideum, 182; Sturgisti, 182;
xanthopus, 182

Dioscorea villosa, 128

182; leucopodia, 182;

Directions for using a plastic adhesive in

mounting pressed botanical specimens, By
V.H.H. Williamson, 148

Ditrichum flexicaule, 46

Dolichonyx oryzivorous, 154

Dore, W.G.
Review of: Shrubs of Michigan, 126
Supposed natural hybrid between Agropy-
ron and Hystrix, 39

Dove, Eastern Mourning, 141; Mourning, 79,
80, 166, 167, 196; Rock, 72, 73, 78-80, 196

Da

)

Nov.-Dec. 1950] Tue CANADIAN

Draba fladnizensis, 92; nivalis, 92

Drawings of British Plants, reviewed by
Harold A. Senn, 190

Dryas integrifolia, 48, 92 |

Drycopus pileatus, 197

Duck, American Greater Scaup, 216; Black,
66, 71-74, 77-80, 139, 193; Buffle-head, 217;
Canvas-back, 216; Greater Scaup, 72, 77,
78, 81, 168; Harlequin, 81; Lesser Scaup,
78, 193, 216; Old-squaw, 217; Ring-necked,
52, 70, 78, 216; Ruddy, 78, 82, 96; Scaup,
73, 81; Western Harlequin, 217

Dumetella carolinensis, 198

Dunbar, M. J.
Mola mola (Linnaeus) from the lower St.
Lawrence, 124

Dundas Marsh, Hamilton, Ont., 127

Dupontia Fisheri var. aristata, 90

AND «ipa

Eagle, Bald, 71, 78-80, 167, 168, 194; Golden,
166-168; Northern Bald, 71

Echinocystis lobata, 130

Echinostelium minutum, 182

Ectopistes migratorius, 196

Effect on trees of extremes of climate in
southern Alberta, by A. W.A. Brown, 185

Egret, Great White, 145

Eider, Common, 74; King, 60, 146, 217; North-
ern, 58; Steller, 51

Elaeomyxa miyazakiensis, 183

Eleocharis calva, 128

Elk, 40

Elsey, C. A.
Abundance of certain mammals of the
Geraldton Forest District, Ontario, 159

Empidonaz trailli trailliz, 141

Enerthenema papillatum, 183 .

Epilobium adenocaulon, 128; hirsutum, 128;
latifolium, 92

Equisetum fluviatile, 127

Eremophila alpestris, 197; alpestris alpestris,
63, 98

Ereunetes pusillus, 61, 155

Eriophorum angustifolium, 90

Erolia alpina pacifica, 97; bairdii, 97; fusci-
collis, 61, 97; minutilla, 97; melanotos,
61, 97, 220

Esox amentus, 88; lucius, 88

Euarctos americanus, 200

Eupatorium perfoliatum, 130;
130; urticaefolium, 130

Euphagus carolinus, 99, 138, 198

European hare introduced into the District
of Thunder Bay, Ontario, by A.E. Allin,

122

_ Eutrema Edwardsii, 92

purpureum,

FIELD-NATURALIST

225

Se ies

Falco columbarius, 194; coluwmbarius colum-
barius, 60, 96, 141; peregrinus anatum,
66, 96; rusticolus, 146; sparverius, 194

Falcon, Peregrine, 96

Fallis, A. Murray and C.E. Hope
Observations of Ruffed Grouse in south-
ern Ontario with a discussion on cycles, 82:

Fauna of the Royal Botanical Gardens, Hamil-
ton, Ontario, The, by A. Emerson Warren,.
130

Feeding flights of Common Terns across the
Niagara Peninsula, by Wm. L. Putman, 51

Felis domestica, 154

Ferguson, R.G.

The first record of the chiselmouth, Acro-
cheilus alutaceus Agassiz and Pickering,
from British Columbia, Canada, 156

Festuca brachyphylla, 90

Fifth census of non-passerine birds in the
bird sanctuaries of the north shore of the
Gulf of St. Lawrence, by Oliver H. Hewitt,
73

Finch, California Purple, 81; Purple, 73, 77-
79, 81, 82, 168, 198

First record of the chiselmouth, Acrochetlus
alutaceus Agassiz and Pickering, from
British Columbia, The, by R.G. Ferguson,
156

Fisher, 159

Five new Compositae from Yukon-Alaska, by
A.E. Porsild, 438

Flicker, 72, 77, 79, 82, 98; Northern, 71;
Northern Yellow-shafted, 136; Northwest,
81; Red-shafted, 81, 166, 167; Yellow-
shafted, 166-168

Florida Gallinule, Gallinula chloropus cachin-
nans, in Thunder Bay District, by L. S.
Dear, 221

Flycatcher, Alder, 141; Olive-sided,
Scissor-tailed, 166, 188; Trail, 168

Food habits of the marten (Martes america-
na) in the Rocky Mountain region of
Canada, by I. McT. Cowan and R.H.
Mackay, 100

Fox, Arctic, 154; Red, 154, 200

Francis J. A. Morris (1869-1949), by Edmund
M. Walker, 150

Frankton, C.

Review of: South Nation Valley interim
report 1948, 190
Freeman, T.N.

168;

Review of: Spiders, 54
Frog, Green, 86; Leopard, 86; Mink, 86;
Wood, 86

Fulica americana, 187

226 THE CANADIAN

Fuligo septica var. candida, 183; septica var.
rufa, 183

Fulmar, Atlantic, 58

Fulmarus glacialis glacialis, 58

eG

Gadwall, 139, 186

Gallinula chloropus cachinnans, 221

Gallinule, Florida, 221

Gannet, 78

Gates, R. Ruggles
Another parallel mutation in Oenothera,
142

Gavia immer, 95, 139; immer immer, 58, 141;
stellata, 58, 95

Genus Antennaria in Northwestern Canada,
The, by A.E. Porsild, 1

Geothlypis, 104; trichas, 104; trichas alber-

ticola, 104; trichas arizela, 104; trichas
campicola, 104; trichas yukonicola subsp.
nov., 104

Geum Rossii, 49

Glaucionetta clangula, 139, 193

Glyceria maxima, 127; striata, 127

Godfrey, W. Earl
Description of a new northwestern Geo-
thlypis, 104
Review of: An annotated list of the birds
of the East Kootenay, British Columbia,
220
Review of: Annual report for 1948 of the
Province of Quebec Society for the Pro-
tection of Birds, Inc., 220
Review of: Audubon’s Birds of Ame.ica,
190
Review of: Bird-watching, 157
Review of: National Wildlife and Con-
servation Digest, 190
Review of: The Sandhill Cranes, 156
Review of: The Second annual report of
the Severn Wildfowl Trust, the New
Grounds, Slimbridge, Gloucestershire,
England, 1948-1949, 126
Review of: W. E. Saunders, Naturalist, 220

Godwit, Hudsonian, 97

Golden-eye, 139; American, 71-73; 77-81, 96,

193; American Common, 217; Barrow,
81, 168, 217
Goldfinch, 77; American, 72, 78-80, 198;

Eastern, 71

Goose, Blue, 95, 193; Canada, 58, 71, 73, 79,
95, 168, 193; Lesser Can2da, 216; Lesser
Snow, 95; Snow, 155, 193

_ Goshawk, 72, 77, 166; Eastern, 71;
81

Grackle, Bronzed, 79, 125, 166, 167

Grebe, Holboell’s, 72, 77, 81; Horned, 77, 78,
81, 136, 139; Pied-billed, 81; Red-necked,
81; Western, 81, 94, 145 —

Western,

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Green, Hubert U.
The productivity and sex survival of elk,
Banff National Park, Alberta, 40

Grosbeak, Blue, 94; Evening, 71-73, 77-80;
198; Pine, 64, 71-73, 77, 78, 80, 138, 198

Grouse, Alaska Spruce, 218; Blue, 168; Hud-
sonian Spruce, 60; Oregon Ruffed, 82;
Richardson Blue, 218; Ruffed, 71-73, 77-
80, 82, 167, 195; Sharp-tailed, 80, 195;
Spruce, 96, 167, 168, 194; Yukon Ruffed,
218

Grus canadensis, 195; canadensis canadensis,
219 :

Guillemot, Black, 62, 74

Guiraca caerulea, 94

Gull, Bonaparte, 78, 136, 168, 196; California,
82; Franklin’s, 147; Glaucous, 61, 72, 73,
77, 78, 97; Glaucous-winged, 81, 82; Great
Black-backed, 71-74, 77, 78, 97, 147; Heer-
man’s, 81; Herring, 62, 71-74, 77-82, 97,
136, 168, 196; Iceland, 72, 77, 78, 187;
Kumlien’s, 78, 97; Ring-billed, 72-74, 77-82,
97, 147; Short-billed, 81, 82; Thayer’s, 82;
Western, 81 :

Gunn, W. W. H.
Partial albinism in the Bronzed Grackle

(Quiscalus quiscula versicolor), 125
Gyrfalcon, 146
Sy

Haliaeetus leucocephalus, 194

Halliday, Mae
Defensive behavior in the Mantis, 133

Hare, European, 122; Varying, 122, 200

Hawk, 166; American Rough-legged, 66, 79,
80, 96, 168; American Sparrow, 73;
Cooper’s, 77, 79-81, 167, 194; Duck, 66, 72;
-Eastern Pigeon, 60, 96, 141; Easte-n Red-
tailed, 71; Harris, 167; Marsh, 80, 96, 167,
168, 194; Pigeon, 79, 166, 167, 194; Red-
shouldered, 80, 194; Red-tailed, 77-80, 82,
167, 168, 194; Rough-legged, 77, 78, 194;
Sharp-shinned, 79-81, 194; Sparrow, 72,
77, 78, 80, 82, 167, 168, 194

H. B. Conover’s bird work in Yukon, by A. L.
Rand, 214

Helmitheros vermivorus, 187

Hemitrichia intorta, 183

Hen, Spruce, 194

Heron, Great Blue, 77, 79, 81; Northwestern
Coast, 81

Herrington, H.B.
Sphaeriidae of Athabaska and Great Slave
Lakes, Northwestern Canada, 25

Hesperiphona vespertina, 198

Hewitt, Oliver H.

Fifth census of non-passerine birds in the

bird sanctuaries of the north shore of the
Gulf of St. Lawrence, 73

% +
aa we ad

Nov.-Dec. 1950]

THE CANADIAN

Pintail and Ring-necked Duck breeding
in the Ottawa region, 52
Hieracium gracile var. yukonense n. var., 45
Hierochloé alpina, 90

_ Hildebrand, Henry

Notes on the birds of the Ungava Bay
district, 55

Histrionicus histrionicus pacificus, 217

Hope, C.E.
See Fallis, A. Murray and C.E. Hope

Hyla crucifer, 86

Hylocichla fuscescens, 198; guttata, 198; mi-
nima, 198; minima minima, 64; mustelina,
187

Hymenobolina, 183

Hypnum condensatum, 46

Hystriz, 39; patula, 128; patula var. Bigelo-
viana, 39

i

Ibis, Common Glossy, 145

Icterus galbula, 198

Impatiens biflora, 128; pallida, 128

Introducing the Insect, reviewed by J.M.
Swaine, 158

Iridoprocne bicolor, 136, 141

Iris versicolor, 128

PEL (ee

Jaeger, Parasitic, 66 -

James, R.F. and N.D. Martin
A study. of screech owls in southern Gute:
rio, 177

Jay, Blue, 72, 73, 77-80, 166; Canada, 63, 80,
81, 98, 136, 141, 166-168, 197; Northern
Blue, 71; Pinon, 167

Jellison, W.L.
Review of :
156

Judd, W. W.
Birds observed in the Yukon Territory
during the summer of 1949, 135 ~
Pectinatella magnifica Leidy (Bryozoa) in
the Dundas Marsh, Hamilton, Ontario, 191
Plants collected in the Dundas Marsh,
Hamilton, Ont., 1946, 127

Juglans cinerea, 181

Junco hyemalis, 199; hyemalis hyemalis, 65,
99, 138

Junco, Eastern Slate-colored, 138; Oregon,
81, 82; Slate-colored, 65, 71, 72, 77-80, 99,
168, 199

Juncus albescens, 90; biglumis, 90; castaneus,
90; tenuis, 128; tenuis var. Dud'leyi, 128

June record of a European Widgeon in Mani-
toba, by Graham Cooch, 153

The Siphonaptera of Canada,

FIELD-NATURALIST

227
sty ocak

Killdeer, 82, 141, 166-168

Kingbird, Eastern, 166, 167; Western, 166, 167

Kingfisher, 77, 166-168; Belted, 73, 78, 79

Kinglet, Eastern Ruby-crowned, 64; Golden-

crowned, 77-82, 168; Ruby-crowned, 72,

78, 98, 198
Kittiwake, 74; Atlantic, 62
Kleistobolus, 183
Knot, 97; American, 141

ey (ae
Lachnobolus congestus, 183
Lagopus lagopus lagopus, 218; lagopus un-
gavus, 60, 96; leucurus, 219; mutus kel-

loggae, 219; mutus rupestris, 60
Lamproderma atrosporum, 183
Lanius excubitor, 198; excubitor borealis, 64;

ludovicianus migrans, 141
Lanning, Robert G.

See Lloyd, Hoyes, Robert G. Lanning and

Sheldon Davis
Lark, Horned, 78, 80, 197; Northern Horned,

63, 71, 98
Larus argentatus, 196; argentatus smithso-

nianus, 62, 97, 136; delawarensis, 97, 147;

hyperboreus hyperboreus, 61, 97; leucop-

terus, 187; leucopterus kumlieni, 97; mari-
nus, 97, 147; philadelphia, 36; 196; pi-

pixcan, 147
Law, C.E.

A new record for Palm Warbler, 93
Lemna minor, 128; trisulca, 128
Lepidoderma tigrinum, 183
Lepus americanus, 122, 200;

europaeus europaeus, 122
Licea minima, 183; tenera, 183
Limosa haemastica, 97
Lindeborg, R.G.

Some herpetological records from the
Quetico Provincial Park of Ontario, 86
Lloyd, Hoyes, Robert G. Lannie and Sheldon

Davis

Additional notes on the birds of Renfrew

County, Ontario, 140
Lobelia siphilitica, 130
Lobipes lobatus, 61
Longspur, Lapland, 65, 80, 99, 187; Smith’s,

148
Loon, 168; Common, 58, 78, 81, 95, 139, 141;

Pacific, 81; Red-throated, 58, 74, 81, 95
Lophodytes cucullatus, 194
Loxia curvirostra, 32, 147, 198; curvirostra

minor, 33, 52; curvirostra sitkensis, 141;

leucoptera, 32, 198; leucoptera leucoptera,

99, 141
Lutra canadensis, 200
Luzula confusa, 90; nivalis, 90

europaeus, 122;

228 THE CANADIAN
Lycopus americana, 128

Lynx canadensis, 200

Lynx, Canada, 159, 160, 200

Lysimachia Nummularia, 128

pa (esl

Macbrideola scintillans, 183
Mackay, R.H.

See Cowan I.McT. and R.H. Mackay
Magpie, 81; Black-billed, 166, 167
Mallard, 72, 77-81, 139, 193; Common, 216
Mammals of North America, reviewed by

Austin W. Cameron, 158
Mantis religiosa, 133
Mantis, Praying, 133
Mareca americana, 139, 216; penelope, 153
Margarita metallica, 183; pictoviana, 183
Marten, 100, 159
Martes americana, 100
Martin, N.D.

Colour phase investigations on the Screech

Owl in Ontario, 208

See also James R.F. and N.D. Martin
Marvel, C.S.

-The Blue Grosbeak in western Ontario, 94
Matricaria inodora var. nana, 49
Meadowlark, 80, 82; Eastern, 77, 79, 166;

Western, 81, 166, 167
Melanerpes erythrocephalus erythrocephalus,

141
Melanitta fusca deglandi, 96; fusca dixoni,

218; perspicillata, 218
Melospiza georgiana georgiana, 142; _ lin-

colnii, 199; lincolnii lincolnii, 99
Members of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’

Club and subscribers to the Canadian

Field-Naturalist, 120
Mentha arvensis, 128
Mephitis mephitis, 200
Merganser, American, 71-73, 77-82, 139, 168;

Common, 194; Hooded, 78, 82, 194; Red-

breasted, 60, 72 ,74, 78-82, 96, 218
Mergus merganser, 194; merganser america-

nus, 139; serrator, 60, 96, 218
Meterk, 58
Micropalama himantopus, 146
Migration of Black Swift, by Kenneth Racey,

93
Migration of Western Grebe on British Col-

umbia coast, by Theed Pearse, 94
Mimulus ringens, 128
Mockingbird, 78; Eastern, 71
Mola mola, 124
Mola mola (Linnaeus) from the lower St.

Lawrence, by M.J. Dunbar, 124
Molothrus ater, 187; ater ater, 99
Moose, 159, 161

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Se ie a ale a Ni

Morris, Francis J.A., 150

Mouse, Baird’s White-footed, 169; Woodland
Jumping, 200

Mousley, William Henry, 1865-1949, by L. MclI.
Terrill, 67

Mudpuppy, 92, 192

Murre, Brunnich’s, 62, 72, 74; Common, 74;
California, 82; Thick-billed, 147

Muscivora forficata, 188

Musculium ryckholti, 27, 28;
27, 28; winkleyi, 27, 28

Mustela erminea, 200

Mycetomorpha vancouverensis, 188

Mynah,. Crested, 81

Myriophyllum verticillatum, 128

Myxomycetes of Canada, Some, by Eli Davis
and W.D. Sutton, 180

Ni

Napaeozapus insignis, 200

National Wildlife and Conservation Digest,
reviewed by W. Earl Godfrey, 190

Necturus maculosus, 92, 192

Nephoecetes niger borealis, 93

Nesting of the Red Crossbill in Pakenham
Township, Lanark County, Ontario, by
Edna G. Ross and Verna M. Ross, 32

Neuropogon sulphureus, 48

New record for Palm Warbler, A, by C. E.
Law, 93

Newt, 192; Common, 93

Nighthawk, 168

Norris-Elye, L.T.S.
Purple Sandpiper in Manitoba, 94
Northern breeding waterfowl summering at
Niagara Falls, by R. W. Sheppard, 139
North-west passage plants in the Scott Polar
Research Institute, by Nicholas Polunin, 45

Notes on the birds of the Ungava Bay District,
by Henry Hildebrand, 55

Notes on the vertebrates, except fishes, of the
Sault Ste. Marie region of Ontario, by
Fred Warburton, 192

Numenius phaeopus hudsonicus, 97

Nuphar advena, 128

Nuthatch, Red-breasted, 72, 73, 77-80, 168,
197; White-breasted, 72, 73, 77-81

Nyctea scandiaca, 66, 141, 196

Nymphaea odorata, 128

Nyroca valisneria, 139

Sige

Observations of Ruffed Grouse in southern

Ontario with a discussion on cycles, by A. —

Murray Fallis and C.E. Hope, 82 +

Odlum, Jean, M.

Unusual behaviour of Cormorants, 189
Odocoileus virginianus, 200

transversum,

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN

Oenothera, 142; Lamarckiana, 144; peran-
gusta n. sp., 142; perangusta var. rubri-
calyx n. var., 143; rubricalyx, 144; rubri-
nervis, 142; strigosa, 142

Oidemia nigra americana, 96

Old-squaw, 58, 77, 78, 96

Onoclea sensibilis, 127

Orcadella parasitica, 183; pusilla, 183

Oriole, Baltimore, 198

Osprey, 96, 167

Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club
Annual meeting, 1949, 36
By-laws, 89
Members, and subscribers to the Canadian
Field-Naturalist, 120 ~
Statement of financial standing, December
2, 1949, 35

Otter, 159, 200

Otus asio, 196, 200; asio naevius, 177, 208

Owl, Barred, 77, 197; Burrowing, 221; East-
ern Screech, 208; Great Horned, 71-73,
79, 80, 141, 196; Hawk, 147, 197; Horned,
77-79, 167, 168; Long-eared, 77-79; Richard-
son’s, 79; Saw-whet, 77, 78; Screech, 77-
81, 177, 196, 208; Short-eared, 63, 98, 167,
187, 197; Snowy, 66, 72, 73, 77-81, 141, 196

Oxyria digyna, 90

Oxytropis Maydelliana, 92

Oxyura jamaicensis rubida, 96

a pe

Pandion haliaetus carolinensis, 96

Papaver radicatum, 92

Partial albinism in the Bronzed Grackle
(Quiscalus quiscula versicolor), by W. W.
H. Gunn, 125

Partridge, 71; European, 78, 80, 81,
Hungarian, 186

Parus atricapillus, 197; hudsonicus, 98, 138,
197; hudsonicus hudsonicus, 63

Passerculus sandwichensis, 99; sandwichen-

r sis labradorius, 65

_ Passerella iliaca, 139; iliaca iliaca, 65, 99

_ Passerherbulus henslowii, 148

- Pearse, Theed

Migration of Western Grebe on British
Columbia coast, 94

Pectinatella magnifica, 191

_ Pectinatella magnifica Leidy (Bryozoa) in

_ the Dundas Marsh, Hamilton, Ontario, by

W.W. Judd, 191

_ Pediocetes phasianellus, 195

Peeper, Spring, 86

_Penthorum sedoides, 128

Perdix perdix, 186, 195

-Perisoreus canadensis, 98, 136, 197; canaden-

sis canadensis, 141; canadensis nigrica-

pillus, 63

195;

FIELD-NATURALIST

229

Peromyscus maniculatus bairdii, 169; mani-
culatus borealis, 169; maniculatus manicu-
latus, 169; maniculatus osgoodi, 169

Peromyscus maniculatus bairdii complex in
Manitoba, The, by Stuart Criddle, 169

Petrochelidon pyrrhonota hypopolia, 136

Pewee, Eastern Wood, 141; Wood, 168

Phalacrocorax auritus auritus, 141; pelagicus,
189; penicillatus, 189

Phalaris arundinacea, 127

Phalarope, Northern, 61; Red, 219; Wilson’s,
147

Phalaropus fulicarius, 219

Phasianus colchicus, 195

Pheasant, Common, 195; Ring-necked, 71-73,
77-82, 201

Philohela minor, 153, 196

Phoebe, Eastern, 98; Say, 136, 167

Phragmites communis var. Berlandieri, 128

Phryma leptostachya, 128

Physarum aeneum, 183; bogoriense, 183: ci-
trinellum, 183; confertum, 183; dider-
moides, 183; gyrosum, 183; lateritium,
183; luteolum, 183; melleum, 183; nu-
cleatum, 184; oblatum, 184; penetrale,
184; pulcherrimum, 184; Serpula, 184;
superbum, 184; viride var. incanum, 184

Pigeon, Passenger, 196

Pike, 88

Pinicola enucleator,
leucura, 64 ;

Pintail, 52, 72, 74, 77, 81, 82, 96, 193; Ameri-
can, 58, 216

Pintail and Ring-necked Duck breeding in
the Ottawa region, by Oliver H. Hewitt, 52

Pipit, American, 64, 77, 98, 141, 198

Pisidium abditum, 27, 28; compressum, 26-28;
conventus, 26-28; fallax, 26, 28; idahoense,
26-28; lermondi, 27, 28; lilljeborgi, 26-28;
lilljeborgi cristatum, 28; medianum, 26,
28; miliwm, 27, 28; pauperculum, 26-28;
punctatum, 26, 28; scutellatum, 26; splen-
didulum, 27, 28; subtruncatum, .26-28;
tenuissimum, 27, 28

Plants collected by B. John Woodruff on the
west coast of Melville Peninsula, Franklin
District, N.W.T., Canada, by W. J. Cody, 90

Plants collected in the Dundas Marsh, Hamil-
ton, Ont., 1946, by W. W. Judd, 127

Plectrophenax nivalis, 199; nivalis nivalis, 65

Plegadis falcinellus, 145

Plethodon cinereus, 86, 93, 192

Pleuropogon Sabinei, 90

Plover, Black-bellied, 97; Golden, 61, 96;
Semipalmated, 61, 74, 96, 136, 196; Upland,
141, 219

Pluvialis dominica dominica, 61, 96

138, 198: enucleator

230 THE CANADIAN

Poa abbreviata, 46; arctica, 90

Polunin, Nicholas
Botanical research in Scandinavia: 375
contemporary workers and their special
interests, 105
North-west passage plants in the Scott
Polar Research Institute, 45

Polygonum coccineum f. natans, 128; natans
f. genuinum, 128; natans f. Hartwrightii,
128; punctatum, 128; scabrum, 128

Polysticta stelleri, 51

Pooecetes gramineus, 199

Porsild, A. E.
Five new Compositae from Yukon-Alaska,
43 ak.
Review of: American Wild Flowers, 53
The genus Antennaria in northwestern
Canada, 1

Potamogeton Berchtoldi var. acuminatus, 127;
crispus, 127; foliosus var. macellus, 127;
nodosus, 127; pectinatus, 127; perfoliatus,
127; zosteriformis, 127

Potentilla Anserina, 128; palustris, 128

Productivity and sex survival of elk, Banff
National Park, Alberta, The, by Hubert
U. Green, 40

Ptarmigan, Black-shafted Willow, 218; Rock,
60, 167; Southern Rock, 219; Ungava, 60;
Ungava Willow, 96; White-tailed, 219;
Willow, 74

Puccinellia paupercula, 90; Vahliana, 90

Puffin, 74

Purple Sandpiper in Manitoba, by L.T.S.
Norris-Elye, 94

Putman, Wm. L.
Feeding flights of Common Terns across
the Niagara Peninsula, 51

“Qi
Quail, California, 82
Quiscalus quiscula versicolor, 125

BL

Raccoon, 159
Racey, Kenneth
Migration of Black Swift, 93
The Steller Eider in British Columbia, 51
Rail, King, 146
Rallus elegans, 146
Rana catesbeiana, 193; clamitans, 86; pipiens,
86; septentrionalis, 86; sylvatica canta-
brigensis, 86
Rand, A. L.
An abnormally colored Woodcock (Philo-
hela minor), 153
H.B. Conover’s bird work in Yukon, 214
Review of: Birds of Arctic Alaska, 54
Rangifer caribou, 200

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 64

Ranunculus pennsylvanicus, 128;
128

Raven, 66, 80, 82, 98, 166-168, 197; Northern,
71, 141; Northern American, 138

Recent bird records for the Ottawa District,
by W. John Smith, 186

Red Crossbills collected in the Ottawa Dis-
trict, by A. E. Bourguignon, 52

Redpoll, 72, 99; Common, 64, 71, 72, 77-81,
138, 141; Hoary, 65

Regulus calendula, 198;
64, 98

Riccia fluitans, 127

Ricciocarpus natans, 127

Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris) in the
Counties of Kamouraska and L’Islet, Pro-
vince of Quebec, The, by Abbe Rene Tan-
guay, 70

Rissa tridactyla tridactyla, 62

Robin, 72, 78, 80-82, 98, 167, 168; Black- back-
ed, 63; Eastern, 71; Eastern American,
138

Roosting behaviour of a Snow Goose at
Montreal, The, by D.M. Scott, 155

Rorippa palustris, 128

Ross, Edna G. and Verna M. Ross
Nesting of the Red Crossbill in Pakenham
- Township, Lanavk County, Ontario, 32

Ross, Verna M.
See Ross, Edna G. and Verna M. Ross

sceleratus,

calendula calendula,

ages

Sagittaria latifolia, 127
Salamander, Jefferson’s,
Backed, 86, 93, 192
Salix arctica var. Brownei, 90; herbacea, 90

Salt, W. Ray
The Bu.rowing Owl in Alberta, 221

Salvelinus alpinus, 189; fontinalis, 93, 189;
marstoni, 189

Salvelinus alpinus in Walton. Lake,
Brunswick, by James Catt, 189

Sambucus canadensis, 130

Sanderling, 97

Sandhill Cranes, The, reviewed by W. Earl
Godfrey, 156

Sandpiper, Baird’s, 97; Buff-breasted, 146;
Least, 97, 168; Pectoral, 61, 97, 220;
Purple, 94; Red-backed, 81, 97; Semipal-
mated, 61, 155, 168; Spotted, 61, 74, 97,
168; Stilt, 146; White-rumped, 61, 97

Savile, D. B. O.
Bird notes from Great Whale River, Que.,
95

Bobolink at Cochrane, Ontario, 154 /
Unusual behaviour of Wilson’s Snipe, 155

Saxifraga cernua, 92; Hirculus, 92; opposi-—

86, 93, 192; Red-

New

ca

|

\

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THE CANADIAN
tifolia, 92; stellaris var. comosa, 92; tri-
cuspidata f. subintegrifolia, 92; tricuspi-
data f. Woodruffii f. nov., 92

Sayornis phoebe, 98; saya saya, 136

Seaup, Greater, 81

Schultz, F. F.

Cat-fox association, 154

Scirpus atrovirens, 128; validus, 128

Scissor-tailed Flycatcher in New Brunswick,
The, by George F. Boyer, 188

Scott, D. M.

A Worm-eating Warbler (Helmitheros ver-
mivorus) at St. Andrews, N.B., 187

The roosting behaviour of a Snow Goose
at Montreal, 155

The Semipalmated Sandpiper (Ereunetes
pusillus) in southwestern New Brunswick,
155

Scoter, American, 81, 96; Surf, 81, 168, 218;
Western White-winged, 218; White-wing-
ed, 77, 78, 81, 96, 168

Scutellaria galericulata, 128

Seiurus noveboracensis, 99

Semipalmated Sandpiper (Ereunetes pusillus)
in southwestern New Brunswick, The, by
D.M. Scott, 155

Senecio sheldonensis n. sp., 43; yukonensis
n. sp., 44

Senn, Harold A.

Review of: Drawings of British Plants, 190

Severn Wildfowl Trust, The New Grounds,
Slimbridge, Gloucestershire, England,
1948-1949, The Second Annual Report of
the, reviewed by W. Earl Godfrey, 126

Sheppard, R. W.

Northern breeding waterfowl summering
at Niagara Falls, 139

Shoveller, 77, 81

Shrew, Short-tailed, 199

Shrike, Loggerhead, 166, 167; Migrant, 141;
Northern, 64, 72, 73, 77-80, 167, 198

Shrimps, 188

Shrubs of Michigan, reviewed by W.G. Dore,
126

Sialia currucoides, 138

Sieversia Rossii, 49

Silene acaulis var. exscapa, 92

Siphonaptera of Canada, The, reviewed by
W.L. Jellison, 156

Siskin, Pine, 72, 73, 77-79, 81, 82, 99, 141, 166-
168, 198

Sitta canadensis, 197

Sium suave, 128

Size of summer bird grouping, Texas to the
Yukon, by Leonard W. Wing, 163

Skunk, 200

Smith, W. John

FIELD-NATURALIST

231

Recent bird records for the Ottawa Dis-
trict, 186

Snake, Garter, 86, 193

Snipe, Wilson’s, 81, 155, 219

Solanum Dulcamara, 128

Solitaire, Townsend, 167

Solman, Victor E. F.
Review of: An unusual maskinonge from
Little Vermilion Lake, Ontario, 88

Somateria mollissima borealis, 58; spectabi-
lis, 60, 146, 217

Some counts of bird populations in coniferous
forests near the limit of trees, by Leonard
W. Wing, 87

Some herpetological records from the Queti-
co Provincial Park of Ontario, by R.G.
Lindeborg, 86

South Nation Valley interim report 1948, re-
viewed by C. Frankton, 190

Sparrow, Clay-coloured, 148, 199; Chipping,
73, 168; Eastern Fox, 65; Eastern Song,
71; Eastern Tree, 65, 71, 142; English,
71-73, 77-82; Field, 78; Fox, 82, 99, 139;
Gambel White-crowned, 138; Harris’s, 148;
Henslow’s, 148; House, 77; Labrador
Savannah, 65; Lincoln, 78, 99, 168, 199; -
Puget Sound, 81; Rusty Song, 81; Savan-
nah, 99; Sharp-tailed, 148; Song, 77-82,
168; Swamp, 77-80, 142; Tree, 72, 73, 77-
80, 99, 199; Vesper, 199; White-crowned,
65, 77, 78, 99, 142, 168, 199; White-throat-
ed, 71, 77, 79, 99

Sparganium chlorocarpum, 127; eurycarpum,
127

Sphaeriidae of Athabaska and Great Slave
Lakes, Northwestern Canada, by H.B.
Herrington, 25

Sphaerium striatinum, 27, 28; tenue nitidum,
Paps Ae:

Spiders, reviewed by T.N. Freeman, 54

Spinus pinus, 198; pinus pinus, 99, 141; tris-
tis, 198

Spirodela polyrhiza, 128

Spizella arborea, 199; arborea arborea, 65,
99, 142; pallida, 148, 199

Squatarola squatarola, 97

Squires, W. Austin
Belated Swallows in the Maritimes, 221

Starling, 71-73, 77-79, 198; Common, 71, 73,
77, 79

Statement of Financial standing, Ottawa Field-
Naturalists’ Club, December 2, 1949, 35

Steganopus tricolor, 147

Steironema ciliatwm, 128

Stellaria laeta, 92; longipes, 92

Steller Eider in British Columbia, The, by
Kenneth Racey, 51

232 Tue CANADIAN

Stemonitis flavogenita, 184; fusca var. flac-

cida, 184; fusca var. nigrescens, 184;
hyperopta, 184; splendens var. Webberi,
184

Stercorarius parasiticus, 66

Sterna hirundo, 51, 196; paradisaea, 62, 97

Strix varia, 197

Study of Screech Owls in southern Ontario,
A, by R. F. James and N.D. Martin, 177

Sturnus vulgaris, 198 |

Sunfish, Marine, 124

Supposed natural hybrid between Agropyron
and Hystrix, by W.G. Dore, 39

Surnia ulula, 147, 197

Sutton, W.D.
See Davis, Eli and W.D. Sutton
Swaine, J. M.
Review of: Introducing the Insect, 158
Swallow, Barn, 221; Cliff, 167; Greater Cliff,
136; Northern Violet-green, 136; Tree,
136, 141

Swan, Whistling, 146, 215
Swift, Black, 93

Symplocarpus foetidus, 128

p=

Tachycineta thalassina lepida, 136

Tanguay, Abbe Rene
The Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris)
in the Counties of Kamouraska and L’Islet,
Province of Quebec, 70

Taraxacum pellianum n. sp., 44

Teal, Green-winged, 71, 74, 216

Tern, Arctic, 62, 74, 97; Caspian, 74; Com-
mon, 51, 74, 196

Terrill, L. Mcl.
William Henry Mousley, 1865-1949, 67

Tetraplodon mnioides, 48

Thamnophis sirtalis, 193; sirtalis sirtalis, 86

Thrush, Gray-cheeked, 64, 198; Hermit, 77,
198; Olive-backed, 168; Varied, 81; Wood,
187

Thryothorus ludovicianus, 147

Tit, Coast Bush, 81

Toad, American, 86

Totanus flavipes, 136; melanoleucus, 97

Towhee, 78; Oregon, 81, 82; Red-eyed, 80;
Spotted, 81

Trichia erecta, 184; floriformis, 184;
cens, 184

Trisetum spicatum, 90

Triturus viridescens, 93, 192

Troglodytes troglodytes, 197

Trout, Brook, 93; Eastern Speckled,
Red, 189

Tryngites subruficollis, 146

lutes-

189;

Turdus migratorius, 98; migratorius migra-

torius, 138; migratorius nigrideus, 63

FIELD-NATURALIST

Turnstone, Ruddy, 97

Turtle, Painted, 86; Snapping, 86

Two records of shrimps from English Bay,
B.C., by T.H. Butler, 188 ‘

Tympanuchus cupido, 195

Typha latifolia, 127

ue if ee

Ungava Bay district, Notes on the birds of,
by Henry Hildebrand, 55

Unusual behaviour of Cormorants, by Jean
M. Odlum, 189

Unusual behaviour of Wilson’s Snipe, by
D.B.O. Savile, 155

Unusual maskinonge fom Little Vermi-
lion Lake, Ontario, An, reviewed a Victor
E.F. Solman, 88

Uria lomvia, 147; lomvia lomvia, 62

Utricularia cBRHIG GAAS var. americana, 128

Uvuguk, 58

PBL fps

Veery, 198

Verbena hastata, 128; urticaefolia, 128
Vermivora peregrina, 98, 198

Veronica americana, 128

Vireo philadelphicus, 147, 198

Vireo, Philadelphia, 147, 198

Vulpes fulva, 154, 200

Vulture, Black, 167; Turkey, 166, 167, 194

ah 1 Aone

Walker, Edmund M.
Francis J. A. Morris (1869-1949), 150

Wapiti, 163, 200

Warbler, Black-poll, 64, 99, 168; Cape May,
147, 198; Myrtle, 64, 77, 99, 168; Palm,
93, 198; Tennessee, 98, 198; Wilson’s, 64,
99, 138, 168; Worm-eating, 187; Yellow,
99, 138, 168, 198

Warburton, Fred
Notes on the vertebrates, except fishes, of
the Sault Ste. Marie region of Ontario,
192

Warren, A. Emerson
The fauna of the Royal Botanical Gardens,
Hamilton, Ontario, 130

Water-thrush, Northern, 99, 168

Waxwing, Bohemian, 72, 80, 81, 167, 168;
Cedar, 72, 77-79

Weasel, Short-tailed, 200

W.E. Saunders, Naturalist, reviewed by W.
Earl Godfrey, 220

Whip-poor-will, 197

Widgeon, European, 153

William Henry Mousley,
MclI. Terrill, 67

[Vol. 64

1865-1949, by L.

;
Mt
4
4]

bes

S Souk bees

5 Es Si” =

ee

Pia i

aa AER Rag

ae eae One

tec

SSR A SS

i
4

Nov.-Dec. 1950] THe CANADIAN

Williamson, V. H. H.

Directions for using a plastic adhesive in
mounting pressed botanical specimens,
148

Wilsonia pusilla, 138; pusilla pusilla, 64, 99

Wing, Leonard W.

Size of summer bird grouping, Texas to
the Yukon, 163

Some counts of bird populations in coni-
ferous forests near the limit of trees, 87

Wolf, Timber, 161, 163

Wolffia columbiana, 128 —

Worm-eating Warbler (Helmitheros vermivo-
rus) at St. Andrews, N.B., A, by D. M.
Scott, 187 :

Woodcock, 153; American, 80, 196; Golden,
153

FIELD-NATURALIST

233

Woodpecker, Arctic Three-toed, 80, 168;
Downy, 71-73; 77-81; Gairdner’s, 82;
Gairdner’s Downy, 81; Hairy, 71-73, 77-80;
Harris’s, 82;, Northern Hairy, 71; Pileated,
72, 77-82; 197; Red-headed, 141

Wren, Bewick’s, 81; Carolina, 80, 147; Seattle,
81, 82; Short-billed Marsh, 187; Winter,
72, 78-81, 197

— Y —
Yellow-legs, Greater, 97; Lesser, 136, 168
Yellow-throat, 104; Yukon, 104

calle Jobe

Zenaidura macroura, 196;
nensis, 141

Zonotrichia albicollis, 99;

leucophrys gambellii,

leucophrys, 65, 99, 142;

macroura caroli-

leucophrys, 199;
138; leucophrys
querula, 148

~

Chief aE Propaganda Section : RENE CONSTANTINEAU,
Chief of Information Section: W. STUART ATKINSON.

Other directors: G. H. CARTWRIGHT. JOS MORIN,
eee SS TESSIER, 1 | J. B. HUNTER, REX

o

OFFICERS FOR 1850-1951

President: A. A. OUTRAM; President :
BAILLIE: Secretary-Treasurer: J. Stew,

21 Millwood Rd., to; of |
MRS. J. MURRAY fon aaa Junior

aM Executive Council: G. M.

aoae ’ . N. BRO’ ,

| MISS B, DOUGLAS, PROF. 7. W. DWIGHT, DR a | SM |

CLARK . W. ;
M. FRITZ, W. W. H. GUNN, DR. L. E. JAQUITH, MRS. Meetings held the second Monday of the month except
: D MISS V. KOHLER, MRS. H. H. MARSH, aah 1

ABER RErCHUM, MISS V. H.
C. S. McKEE, D. S. MILLER, JOHN MITCHELE, R. M.
SAUNDERS, EARL a: H. H. SOUTHAM. Ex. Officio:

A. J. V. LEHMANN, C. A. WALKINSHAW, T. F. MclL- | phn MGA f

Meetings are held at 8.15 p.m. on the first Monday of MAMMAL SOCIETY
each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario

Museum, unless otherwise announced. Field trips are pyesident: KENNETH see Fics President a) oe
held during the spring and autumn and on the second Secretary: a OWAN, Dept.
Saturday of each month during the winter. Zoology, Unieraty of Baten Calambie, Vator, BE

WANTED

In order to meet the demand for back numbers of the publications
of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, the following are urgently needed:
Transactions, Otta. Field-Nat. Club, No. 1, 1880.

Olfawa Naturalist

Vol. 4, No. 6, Sept., 1890 |
Vol. 11, No. 10, Jan., 1898 |
Vol. 11, No. 11, Feb., 1898 |
Vol. 11, No. 12, Mar., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 1, Apr., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 4, July, 1898
Vol. 12, No. 5, Aug., 1898 |
Vol. 12, No. 6, Sept., 1898 |
Vol. 12, No. 7 & 8, Oct.-Nov., 1898
Vol. 12, No. 9, Dec., 1898

Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 38, No. 1, Jan., 1924
Vol. 39, No. 3, Mar., 1925
Vol. 39, No. 4 Apr., 1925
Vol. 39, No. 5, May, 1925

Members and subscribers who are able to spare any of these numbers
would greatly assist the Club by forwarding them to:

Mr. W. J. Cody,
Division of Botany ¥
Science Service,
Dept. of Agriculture, 4
Ottawa, Ontario. j
&

“LE DROIT” Printing, Ottawa, Canada. fant

les

it

a

Date Due

Neti

3 2044 114 19

faieay { : < Syn

ath tate aoneteeae

Sn Mya mes
tees

_ Se
ee eon

Hotel

“Speci oe

et yage

sim

lena acne

ee

ie fi

¢ iia Nietiattetin, dae te a:
g Ne Srtonassise " +s a tear SC Forte
meee eiayenpe : a
Pago ; q

Pe

Ses 12 treme er
se gepeacoe . ~ ee rt geen Pe CI “
Se nm » : *
ewe Wi aise ee
Py hs ny edad Knees =